FCC ID: N7NMC8355 Multi-band Radio Module

 

B6FY-0631-01EN-00-2lang.fm Page 1 Tuesday, April 5, 2011 11:50 AM F u j i t s u A m e r i c a , I n c . Docking Cradle Users Guide I N S T R U C T I O N S The optional docking cradle extends the functionality of your STYLISTIC Tablet PC by providing ports to connect four USB 2.0 devices and DC power. The docking cradle connects to the bottom of your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. DOCKING CRADLE COMPONENTS The following is a brief description of the docking cradles panel components. Support Release Latch The back panel of the cradle acts as a rear support when it is open so that you can use the tablet in a hands-free vertical position. To release the panel from the back of the cradle, push the latch down. Note that the support is not adjustable; it only supports the fully open position. To attach it to the cradle, push the release latch down and swing the panel back towards the cradle, then snap them together. DC Power Jack The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter to power your Tablet PC and charge the internal Lithium ion battery. B6FY-0631-01EN-00-2lang.fm Page 2 Tuesday, April 5, 2011 11:50 AM USB 2.0 Ports DC In Support Release Latch Cradle Support Figure 1. Docking Cradle - Rear USB 2.0 Ports Docking Connector Figure 2. Docking Cradle - Front 2 B6FY-0631-01EN-00-2lang.fm Page 3 Tuesday, April 5, 2011 11:50 AM USB 2.0 Ports (Qty. 4) Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2.0 ports allow you to connect USB devices. USB 2.0 ports are backward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices. There are two USB ports on the right side of the cradle, and two on the left. Docking Connector The docking connector allows you to connect the Docking Cradle to your tablet. CAUTION THE SYSTEM CONTAINS COMPONENTS THAT CAN BE DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE COMPONENTS, BEFORE DOCKING OR UNDOCKING YOUR TABLET WHEN USING A DOCKING CRADLE, IT IS GOOD PRACTICE TO TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY IN YOUR BODY. ATTACHING A DOCKING CRADLE To attach the Docking Cradle, visually align the cradle connector on the bottom of your Tablet PC with the connector on the Docking Cradle. Push both corners down at the same time, but do not push too hard, or the connectors may be damaged. Note that when properly installed, the tablet will rest on the small risers on the base of the cradle; there should be a small gap between the bottom of the tablet and the base of the cradle. 3 B6FY-0631-01EN-00-2lang.fm Page 4 Tuesday, April 5, 2011 11:50 AM Risers Figure 3. Attaching the Docking Cradle DETACHING DOCKING CRADLE To detach the Docking Cradle, lift the Tablet PC away from the cradle to detach it. Fujitsu, the Fujitsu logo, and STYLISTIC are registered trademarks of Fujitsu, Ltd. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. 4 B6FY-0631-01EN-00-2lang.fm Page 5 Tuesday, April 5, 2011 11:50 AM Guide d'utilisation du duplicateur de ports Le duplicateur de ports optionnel augmente la fonctionnalit de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC en offrant des ports permettant de connecter quatre priphriques USB 2.0 et une alimentation c.c. Le duplicateur de ports se connecte sur le dessous de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC. COMPOSANTS DU DUPLICATEUR DE PORTS Voici une courte description des composants du duplicateur de ports. Loquet douverture du support Le panneau arrire du duplicateur sert de support arrire lorsquil est ouvert, permettant ainsi dutiliser le PC Tablette la verticale en mode mains libres. Pour ouvrir le panneau sur larrire du duplicateur, poussez le loquet vers le bas. Remarquez que le support nest pas rglable. Il ne peut tre utilis quen position compltement ouverte. Pour le fixer au duplicateur, poussez le loquet douverture vers le bas et faites basculer le panneau vers larrire en direction du duplicateur, puis embotez-les ensemble. Prise d'alimentation c.c. La prise d'alimentation c.c. sert brancher l'adaptateur secteur, lequel permet d'alimenter le PC Tablette et de charger la batterie interne au lithium. 5 B6FY-0631-01EN-00-2lang.fm Page 6 Tuesday, April 5, 2011 11:50 AM Ports USB 2.0 Prise

.c. Loquet douverture du support Support du duplicateur Figure 1. Duplicateur de ports Arrire Connecteur our duplicateur e ports Ports USB

.0 Figure 2. Duplicateur de ports Avant 6 B6FY-0631-01EN-00-2lang.fm Page 7 Tuesday, April 5, 2011 11:50 AM Ports USB 2.0 (Qt : 4) Les ports USB 2.0 vous permettent de connecter des priphriques USB. Les ports USB 2.0 sont rtrocompatibles avec les priphriques USB 1.1. Deux ports USB sont disponibles sur le ct droit du duplicateur, ainsi que deux autres sur le ct gauche. Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports Ce connecteur permet de brancher le duplicateur de ports sur votre PC Tablette. ATTENTION Le systme contient des composants pouvant tre endommags par une dcharge lectrostatique (DES). Afin de minimiser les risques pour les composants lorsque vous utilisez un duplicateur de ports, avant de connecter ou de dconnecter votre ordinateur tablette, il est toujours recommand de toucher un objet mtallique mis la terre afin de dcharger l'lectricit statique qui s'est accumule dans votre corps. INSTALLATION DU DUPLICATEUR DE PORTS Pour installer le duplicateur de ports, alignez visuellement le connecteur du duplicateur de ports sous votre PC Tablette avec le connecteur sur le duplicateur de ports. Enfoncez simultanment les coins, mais ne poussez pas trop fort car vous risqueriez dendommager les connecteurs. Lorsque linstallation est bien ralise, le PC Tablette reposera sur les petites pattes la base du duplicateur. Il devrait donc y avoir un petit espace entre le dessous du PC Tablette et la base du duplicateur de ports. 7 B6FY-0631-01EN-00-2lang.fm Page 8 Tuesday, April 5, 2011 11:50 AM Pattes Figure 3. Installation du duplicateur de ports DINSTALLATION DU DUPLICA-

TEUR DU PORTS Pour dsinstaller le duplicateur de ports, soulevez le PC Tablette jusqu ce quil se spare du duplicateur. Fujitsu, le logo Fujitsu et STYLISTIC sont des marques dposes de la socit Fujitsu Ltd. Toutes les autres marques de commerce mentionnes dans le prsent document appartiennent leur propritaire respectif. Fujitsu, le logo Fujitsu et STYLISTIC sont des marques dposes de la socit Fujitsu Ltd. Toutes les autres marques de commerce mentionnes dans le prsent document appartiennent leur propritaire respectif. B6FY-0631-01EN-00 8

 

 

Users Guide Learn how to use your Fujitsu STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC Copyright and Trademark Information Fujitsu America, Inc.has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document. Because ongoing development efforts are made to continually improve the capabilities of our products, however, the data contained herein represents Fujitsu design objectives and is provided for comparative purposes; actual results may vary based on a variety of factors. This product data does not constitute a warranty. Specifications are subject to change without knowledge. Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited; STYLISTIC is a registered trademark of Fujitsu America, Incorporated. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The SD Logo is is registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and with other trademark offices around the world by SD-3C, LLC. Intel, Intel Core, and Intel Atom are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. OmniPass is a trademark of Softex, Inc. Broadcom is a registered trademark of Broadcom Corporation.smartcard Norton Internet Security is a trademark of Symantec Corporation in the United States and other countries. AirPrime is a trademark of Sierra Wireless Inc. Gobi3000 is a trademark of Qualcomm Inc. Nuance and XT9 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Nuance Communications, Incorporated. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Ralink is a registered trademark of Ralink Technology Corporation. Bluetooth and the Bluetooth logo are registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Realtek is a trademark of Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Wi-Fi is a trademark of the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA). All other products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Copyright 2011 Fujitsu America, Incorporated. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or translated, without the prior written consent of Fujitsu America, Incorporated. No part of this publication may be stored or transmitted in any electronic form without the prior consent of Fujitsu America, Incorporated. B5FJ-9941-01ENZ0-00 USER GUIDE FOR WIRELESS BROADBAND CONNECTION IF YOU HAVE THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS WAN (WWAN) DEVICE INSTALLED IN YOUR TABLET PC, THE WWAN USERS GUIDE IS LOCATED AT:

http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/mobile/support_notices PLEASE CLICK 3G MINI-CARD GOBI3000 REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION TO OPEN THE FULL USER GUIDE CONTAINING WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH RF SAFETY WHEN USING THE WWAN DEVICE. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to FCC Part 15 Responsible Party Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Declares that product:

Fujitsu America, Incorporated 1250 E. Arques Avenue, Sunnyvale, CA 94085

(408) 746-6000 Base Model Configuration: STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operations are subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This unit requires an AC adapter to operate. Use only UL Listed I.T.E. Class II Adapters with an output rating of 19 VDC, with a current of 2.1A (40 W). AC adapter output polarity:

When using your tablet PC, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:

CAUTION: HOT SURFACE: THE BOTTOM OF THIS COMPUTER CAN BECOME HOT WHEN USED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME. WHEN USING THIS DEVICE, TAKE CAUTION TO LIMIT LONG TERM OR CONTINUOUS USE WHILE RESTING IT ON EXPOSED SKIN, SUCH AS THE LAP. Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. For Authorized Repair Technicians Only SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF LITHIUM (CLOCK) BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTION. FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE AND RATING FUSE. Recycling your battery Over time, the batteries that run your mobile computer will begin to hold a charge for a shorter amount of time; this is a natural occurrence for all batteries. When this occurs, you may want to replace the battery with a fresh one*. If you replace it, it is important that you dispose of the old battery properly because batteries contain materials that could cause environmental damage if disposed of improperly. Fujitsu is very concerned with environmental protection, and has enlisted the services of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation (RBRC)**, a non-profit public service organization dedicated to protecting our environment by recycling old batteries at no cost to you. RBRC has drop-off points at tens of thousands of locations throughout the United States and Canada. To find the location nearest you, go to www.RBRC.org or call 1-800-822-8837. If there are no convenient RBRC locations near you, you can also go to the EIA Consumer Education Initiative website (http://EIAE.org/) and search for a convenient disposal location. Remember protecting the environment is a cooperative effort, and you should make every effort to protect it for current and future generations.

* To order a new battery for your Fujitsu mobile computer, go to the Fujitsu shopping site at www.shopfujitsu.com in the US or www.fujitsu.ca/products/notebooks in Canada.

** RBRC is an independent third party to which Fujitsu provides funding for battery recycling; RBRC is in no way affiliated with Fujitsu. Contents Preface About This Guide . 11 Conventions Used in the Guide . 11 Fujitsu Contact Information . 12 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Tablet PC Overview . 13 Locating the Connectors and Controls . 14 Front Features. 14 Back Features . 16 Status Indicator Panel . 18 Display Panel . 20 Adjusting Display Panel Brightness. 20 Active Digitizer/Touchscreen. 21 Active Digitizer Display. 21 Using the Capacitive Touchscreen . 24 Accessing the OnScreen TouchPad . 29 Using the Nuance SoftKeyboard . 29 Caring for the Pen. 30 Tablet PC Buttons. 33 Chapter 2 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Power Sources . 35 Connecting the Power Adapters . 35 Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC . 37 Power On . 37 Boot Sequence . 38 Hard Disk Drive Passwords . 39 BIOS Setup Utility . 39 Booting the System. 40 Starting Windows the first time . 40 Registering Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC with Fujitsu . 42 Installing ClickMe!. 42 Power Management. 43 Power/Suspend/Resume Switch . 43 Sleep Mode . 43 Hibernation Feature . 45 Windows Power Management . 45 Restarting the System . 45 Powering Off . 46

. 46 User-Installable Features Lithium Polymer Battery . 47 Recharging the Batteries. 48 Replacing the Battery . 50 Secure Digital Cards . 53 Installing SD Cards. 53 Removing an SD Card . 54 7 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Your Tablet PC Troubleshooting. 55 Identifying the Problem . 55 Specific Problems . 57 Power On Self Test Messages . 64 Restoring Your Pre-installed Software . 65 Re-installing Individual Drivers and Applications. 65 Restoring the Operating System for Windows . 66 Care and Maintenance Caring for your Tablet PC . 70 Cleaning your Tablet PC . 71 Storing your Tablet PC . 72 Traveling with your Tablet PC . 73 Batteries . 73 Media Care . 74 Secure Digital Cards. 75 System Specifications Specifications . 76 Configuration Label . 76 Microprocessor . 77 Chipset . 77 Memory. 77 Video. 77 Audio . 78 Mass Storage Device Options. 78 Communications. 78 Security Features . 78 Device Ports . 79 8 Power . 79 Dimensions and Weight . 80 Environmental Requirements . 80 Popular Accessories . 80 Included Software. 80 Learning About Your Software . 81 Regulatory Information . 83 Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN . 87 Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document. 87 Characteristics of the WLAN Device . 87 Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device . 88 Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device . 90 Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch . 91 Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar. 91 Activating the WLAN Device . 91 Configuring the Wireless LAN. 92 Configuring the WLAN . 92 Connection to the network . 92 Troubleshooting the WLAN. 93 Troubleshooting . 93 WLAN Specifications . 95 Specifications . 95 Using the Bluetooth Device. 97 What is Bluetooth . 97 Where to Find Information About Bluetooth . 97 9 Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device . 99 Getting Started . 100 Installing OmniPass . 100 User Enrollment . 102 Using OmniPass . 106 Configuring OmniPass . 111 OmniPass Control Center . 113 Troubleshooting . 115 Appendix C: FujitsuHL User Guide FujitsuHL Instructions . 117 Starting FujitsuHL . 117 Closing FujitsuHL . 118 About FujitsuHL. 118 Home Launcher . 119 Gadget Screen. 121 Launcher Screen . 123 Photo Launcher. 124 Documents Launcher . 125 Camera Tool . 126 Photo Viewer . 128 Index . 130 10 Preface About This Guide The STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC is a high-performance pen-based computer that has been designed to support MicrosoftWindows 7 Professional edition. This manual explains how to operate your Tablet PC hardware and built-in system software. The STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC is a completely self-contained unit with a 10.1 WXGA LED backlit IPS display with 160 degree vertical and horizontal viewing angles. It has a powerful interface that enables it to support a variety of optional features. Conventions Used in the Guide Pages with additional information about a specific topic are cross-referenced within the text. On screen buttons or menu items appear in bold. Example: Click OK to restart your Tablet PC. THE INFORMATION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT WILL ENHANCE YOUR UNDERSTANDING OF THE SUBJECT MATERIAL. THE CAUTION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT IS IMPORTANT TO THE SAFE OPERATION OF YOUR COMPUTER, OR TO THE INTEGRITY OF YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL CAUTION INFORMATION CAREFULLY. 11 THE WARNING ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO EITHER YOU, YOUR TABLET PC, OR YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL WARNING INFORMATION CAREFULLY. Fujitsu Contact Information Service and Support You can contact Fujitsu Service and Support in the following ways:

Toll free: 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) Website: http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:

Product name Product configuration and serial numbers Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any Fujitsu Shopping Online You can go directly to the online by going to the website at: www.shopfujitsu.com. Limited Warranty Your STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC is backed by a Fujitsu International Limited Warranty. Check the service kit that came with your tablet PC for the Limited Warranty period and terms and conditions. 12 - About This Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Tablet PC Overview The STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC is a high-performance pen-based computer that has been designed to support Microsoft Windows7 Professional edition. This chapter provides an overview of the STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC and its many features. Figure 1. STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC 13 Locating the Connectors and Controls Features and controls that you use to operate your Tablet PC are outlined below and illustrated in Figures 2 and 3. Details on using these features and controls are provided later in this manual. Front Web Camera Display Docking Cradle Connector Speaker DC Input Connector Power/Suspend/

Resume Switch Figure 2. STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC Features (Bottom, Right View) Pen Tether Attachment Point Wireless Device Switch Application Buttons Status Indicators Front Features Front Web Camera The front-facing VGA web camera allows you to take pictures of yourself to send over the internet. For information on using the microphone and web cam, see the documentation associated with the FujitsuHL application. 14 - Locating the Connectors and Controls Display The 10.1 Wide XGA display offers 160 degree vertical and horizontal viewing angles. Pen Tether Attachment Point The pen tether attachment point is used to connect your pen -- or stylus -- to the system to prevent its loss. Wireless Device On/Off switch The wireless device on/off switch is used to turn the optional WLAN, WWAN, and Bluetooth devices on and off. Switching the device off when not in use will help to extend battery life. Application Buttons Allow you to quickly launch pre-defined applications and utilities, rotate your screen, and perform Ctl-

Alt-Del by pressing a button. See Tablet PC Buttons on page 33. System Status Indicators Indicate the operational status of the Tablet PC power and battery charge level. See Status Indicator Panel on page 18. Power/Suspend/Resume Switch Allows you to turn on, off, sleep, resume, hibernate or wake the Tablet PC in order to optimize battery life. See Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC on page 37. DC input connector:

Allows you to connect the AC adapter or auto adapter. Speaker The speaker allows you to hear sound from the system. Docking Cradle Connector Allows you to connect the optional STYLISTIC Docking Cradle. 15 - Locating the Connectors and Controls Battery Release Latches SD Card Slot Rear Web Camera Removable Battery Built-in Microphone Figure 3. STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC Features (Back View) Fingerprint Sensor Built-in Microphone USB 2.0 Port SmartCard Slot Line Out/

Headphone Jack HDMI Port Back Features Battery Release Latches Used to release the removable battery. Rear Web Camera The 1.3 megapixel rear web camera allows you to take pictures of objects in front of you for sharing over the internet. For information on using the camera, see the documentation associated with the FujitsuHL application. 16 - Locating the Connectors and Controls SD Card Slot The Secure Digital (SD) card slot allows you to insert a flash memory card for data storage. Flash memory cards allow you to transfer data to and from a variety of different digital devices. See Secure Digital Cards on page 53. Fingerprint Sensor The fingerprint sensor allows you to start your system by swiping your finger over the sensor. See Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device on page 99. Built-in Microphones The built-in microphones allow you to input analog audio. USB 2.0 port Allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus-compliant devices (compliant with USB Standard Revision 2.0) to the Tablet PC. Four additional USB ports are located on the optional STYLISTIC Docking Cradle. Smart Card Slot The dedicated Smart Card slot allows you to insert a Smart Card on which you can store such data as medical information or electronic cash. Line Out/Headphone Jack Allows you to connect a set of stereo headphones. HDMI Port The HDMI port is used to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as a high-

definition television or AV receiver). Removable Lithium Polymer Battery Can be removed and replaced with a charged battery. See Lithium Polymer Battery on page 47. 17 - Locating the Connectors and Controls Status Indicator Panel Icons appear under each of the system status LEDs in the status display indicating the status of system power and battery charge status. The location of icons in the Status display is shown in Figure 4. Table 1 explains how the LEDs associated with the individual icons are displayed, and describes what the variations of that display indicate. (If an icon is not displayed, it indicates that the related system function is off or inactive. Power Charge/

DC in Figure 4. Status Display Icons 18 - Status Indicator Panel Table 1. Status Display Conditions In the following table, a blinking LED flashes at the rate of once per second; an LED that is blinking, slow flashes at the rate of one second on, five seconds off. Mode/State LED State Remarks Icon Power Charge/DC In On State Idle Mode Sleep Off State Hibernate On State Idle Mode Sleep Hibernate Off State Blue, continuous The system is powered on and ready for use. Blue, blinking Off Green Orange The system has suspended and saved active settings to RAM. The system has suspended and saved settings and data to the hard disk drive. AC adapter and battery are available and charged battery level is 50-100%. AC adapter and battery are available and charged battery level is less than 50%. Green, blinking Tablet PC is in Suspend mode, AC adapter and battery are available and charged battery level is 50-100%. Tablet PC is in Suspend mode, AC adapter and battery are available and charged battery level is less than 50%. The AC Adapter is not available. Orange, blinking Off 19 - Status Indicator Panel Display Panel Figure 5. Tablet PC Display Panel Your STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC contains an LCD display panel that is backlit for easier viewing in bright environments. The slate design of your Tablet PC allows you to easily hold the unit and rotate it 90o, 180o, or 270o in either direction. This display is used as a tablet, much as you would a pad of paper. Adjusting Display Panel Brightness To adjust brightness with the power management utility:

Click Start -> Control Panel. In View by:, select one of the icon views. Select Display, then click Adjust brightness in the left pane. Under Select a power plan, select the plan settings you want to use. Drag Screen brightness: bar (at the bottom of the window) to the left or right, depending on your preference. 20 - Display Panel Holding the Tablet PC The STYLISTIC Q550 can be held in any of four orientations, depending upon how you would like to use it. There are primary and secondary landscape orientations and primary and secondary portrait orientations. The primary orientations are the most practical (for example, when the primary portrait orientation is used, the web camera is at the top of the display). Primary Landscape Orientation Primary Portrait Orientation Secondary Landscape Orientation Secondary Portrait Orientation 21 - Display Panel Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Active Digitizer Display The integrated active digitizer allows you to use the included stylus (also called a pen) as a pointing device. (For detailed information about caring for your stylus, go to Caring for the Pen on page 27.) You can use the stylus to click, double-click, drag items and icons, write text, or to draw like a pen or pencil in applications that support this behavior, such as drawing or painting programs. See the documentation that came with your application for details. Figure 6. Using the Active Digitizer Display DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING OR WRITING ON THE SCREEN WITH THE STYLUS. EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR ACTIVE DIGITIZER. TO PURCHASE ADDITIONAL OR REPLACEMENT STYLUSES, VISIT THE FUJITSU ACCESSORIES WEBSITE AT: WWW.SHOPFUJITSU.COM. 21 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Clicking on Active Digitizer Display To left-click, touch the object you wish to select and then lift the stylus tip immediately. Figure 7. Clicking on the Active Digitizer Display Figure 8. Right-clicking Active Digitizer Right-Clicking on Active Digitizer Right-click can be accomplished by holding the front of the toggle button down while tapping on the screen. To change the settings for the right-

click feature, go to Start -> Control Panel -> Pen and Touch. In the Pen Options tab, select Press and Hold then click the [Settings] button. 22 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Double-Clicking To double-click, touch the item twice, and then immediately remove the stylus tip. Figure 9. Double-clicking the Display Dragging Dragging means moving an item with the stylus by touching the screen, moving and then lifting the stylus. To drag, touch the Active Digitizer Display with your stylus on the item you wish to move. While continuing to touch the screen with the stylus, drag the item to its new location by moving the stylus across the screen, and then lifting the stylus to release it. Figure 10. Dragging on the Display 23 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Calibrating the Display In order to ensure accurate tracking between the stylus and cursor, you must run the Calibration Utility before you use the system for the first time, or after you change the display resolution. To run the calibration utility:

1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Double-click the Tablet PC Settings icon and select the Display tab 3 Click the [Calibrate] button, then select whether you want to calibrate pen input or touch input. 4 Adjust the display of your Tablet PC to a comfortable angle and find the (+) symbol in the upper-left corner of the display. DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING ON THE SCREEN DURING CALIBRATION. USE OF EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR TOUCH PANEL. 5 Using the stylus or your finger (depending upon which type of input you are calibrating), firmly touch the screen directly on the (+) symbol. Lift the stylus from the screen and the target will move to a different location on the screen. 6 Repeat step 5 until you have selected all of the (+) symbols. 7 Once you have selected all the symbols, press the [OK] button. 8 Touch the stylus to various points on the screen to verify that the screen is correctly calibrated. If you are not satisfied with the screens calibration, press the [Calibrate]) button to begin again. 24 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Using the Capacitive Touchscreen Certain configurations of this Tablet PC have an optional dual digitizer that allows you to use either the stylus or your finger(s) as a pointing device. This type of display also allows you to use gestures to perform such actions as scroll, zoom, and rotate. GESTURE SUPPORT IS DETERMINED BY THE APPLICATION IN USE. THE STYLUS TAKES PRECEDENCE OVER FINGER TOUCH. IF THE STYLUS IS WITHIN ACTIVE RANGE OF THE SCREEN, FINGER TOUCH WILL BE DISABLED. WHEN ONE FINGER IS USED ON THE TOUCHSCREEN, IT BEHAVES IN THE SAME MANNER AS A STYLUS. Right-clicking the touchscreen To perform a right-click action using two fingers, press the first finger at the location you want to perform a right-click, then quickly tap and release the second finger on the screen. Gesture Mode To initiate gesture mode, two fingers must touch the screen within 200 ms of each other. If the second finger touches the screen after 200 ms has elapsed, the second finger is ignored. If more than two fingers touch the screen in that time, Advanced Gesture Mode is activated instead. When Gesture Mode is activated, no cursor movement is sent to the system. When both fingers are removed, Gesture mode ends. When a third finger is added, gesture mode ends and Advanced gesture mode is activated. Note that if a gesture cant be recognized, no action is taken. In that case, remove both fingers from the screen and try again. Scrolling Gesture To scroll through long documents or on a web page, place both fingers on the screen (one finger quickly followed by the second). If at least one finger has moved at least 3 mm, a scroll is considered. If both fingers are moving in the same direction and parallel (given a tolerance of 5 mm), Scroll Mode is activated. If one finger is stationary, it is not considered a scroll. If either finger is lifted, Scroll Mode is canceled. Zoom Gesture The zoom gesture is especially helpful when viewing pictures. To zoom in, place two fingers on the item you want to enlarge (one finger quickly followed by the second), then spread them away from each other. 25 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen If at least one finger has moved at least 10 mm, a zoom event is considered. If the distance between the fingers has changed by at least 10 mm, and both fingers have stayed on approximately the same line, Zoom Mode is entered. If either finger strays more than 10 mm from the "zoom line" created when the fingers first made contact, the zoom is canceled. To zoom out, place two fingers on the item you want to reduce (one finger quickly followed by the second), then move them towards each other. Rotate Gesture To change the orientation of an object on the screen, place two fingers on the image you want to rotate

(one finger quickly followed by the second), then move them in opposite directions (as if you were turning a knob). The direction the item turns is dependant upon the direction you move your fingers. If at least one finger moves at least 12 mm, a rotate is considered. If one finger is stationary (moving less than 5 mm in any direction), and the other is moving, a rotate is considered. If the fingers begin moving in the same direction, the rotation is canceled. If the distance between the fingers changes by more than 10 mm, the rotation is canceled. Accessing the OnScreen TouchPad Your tablet has a handy on-screen touchpad that offers a variety of helpful functions. Features of the OnScreen TouchPad include:

Virtual Mouse Emulator: The Virtual Mouse Emulator works in much the same manner as a hardware mouse. With the virtual mouse, you can scroll, drag, and click, as well as perform

[Ctl]+[Click] and [Shift]+[Click] actions. Application Launch/Key Macro: This window provides access to five pages, each of which can contain up to twenty buttons. Each button can be programmed to open an application, a folder, document, or key (such as [Esc], [ Alt+X] and [Page Up]). Digital Keyboard: This window provides a soft keyboard for use in mathematical procedures. It works in much the same way as the Windows standard calculator. To access the OnScreen TouchPad, go to the Start Menu > All Programs > Fujitsu OnScreen TouchPad. To learn more about the utility, click on Usage and Help. 26 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Using the Nuance SoftKeyboard For general information about using the Nuance SoftKeyboard, please refer to your Getting Started Guide that came with the system. If you have questions about the Nuance SoftKeyboard, or you would like to learn more, click the Help icon (it looks like a question mark) in the Nuance taskbar. Caring for the Pen ONLY USE THE PEN PROVIDED WITH YOUR TABLET PC. DO NOT USE SUBSTITUTE PEN TIPS THAT WERE NOT SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR YOUR TABLET PC. REPLACE THE STYLUS TIP IF IT IS WORN. THE WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER A SCRATCHED SCREEN. WHILE WRITING, DO NOT TO SCRATCH THE SURFACE OF THE DISPLAY (E.G., WITH A WRISTWATCH OR BRACELET). THE PEN OF YOUR TABLET PC IS AN ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT WHICH CAN BE DAMAGED IF USED INCORRECTLY. HANDLE THE PEN WITH CARE. THE FOLLOWING LIST CONTAINS GUIDELINES FOR PROPER PEN HANDLING:

DO NOT GESTURE WITH THE PEN OR USE IT AS A POINTER. NEVER USE THE PEN ON ANY OTHER SURFACE THAN THE SCREEN OF YOUR TABLET PC. DO NOT TRY TO TURN THE THUMB GRIP ON THE PEN. NEVER STORE THE PEN WITH THE TIP BEARING THE WEIGHT OF THE PEN. IF THE PEN IS STORED WITH THE TIP POINTING DOWN, THIS MAY HAVE AN ADVERSE EFFECT ON THE PEN MECHANISM (PARTICULARLY UNDER HIGH TEMPERATURES). IN THIS CASE THE PEN TIP MAY REACT AS THOUGH IT IS CONSTANTLY BEING PRESSED DOWN. THE PEN CAN BE INFLUENCED BY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS (CURSOR QUIVERS OR JUMPS). THERE MAY BE A FEW AREAS ON THE SCREEN WHERE THE CURSOR QUIVERS SLIGHTLY IN SPITE OF PRESSING THE PEN DOWN FIRMLY. Changing the Pen Settings There are a few changes you can make to your pen settings in order to make it more suitable to your needs

(such as changing the pressure sensitivity). To do so, go to Start > Control Panel and select one of the icon views from the View by: dropdown. Click on the Pen and Touch icon to open the window from which you can change a variety of pen settings. 27 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Changing the Pen Battery Pen Cap DO NOT REMOVE THE TIP OF THE PEN TO REPLACE THE BATTERY; REMOVE ONLY THE CAP ON THE TOP OF THE PEN. THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF THE BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL INSTRUCTIONS. The pen contains a AAAA-battery. Before proceeding, be sure to have a new battery available. 1 Remove the rear Pen Cap (Figure 11). 2 Remove the battery from the pen barrel. 3 Insert the new battery into the pen barrel in the same orientation as the one that was removed. 4 Close the rear Pen Cap. Replacing the Pen Tip With use, the pen tip may become worn or may pick up foreign particles that can scratch the screen. A damaged or worn tip may not move freely, causing unpredictable results when using the pen. If a problem like this should occur, you should replace the pen tip. 1 Pull the tip from the barrel. 2 Using one of the new tips that were supplied with your pen, insert the pointed end of the tip into the barrel and push it in firmly until it is in place 28 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen AAAA-battery Pen Barrel Figure 11. Replacing the Battery Pen Tip Figure 12. Replacing the Pen Tip Installing a Pen Tether To prevent dropping or losing your pen, you should attach it to your system using the pen tether that is included with the system. To attach the pen tether to your Tablet PC, perform the following steps:

1 Attach the end of the pen tether with the smaller loop to your pen. To do so, push the end of the tether under the slot on the top of the pen, then thread the opposite end of the tether through the loop. 2 Attach the end of the pen tether with the larger loop to the attachment point on the right side of your tablet. To do so, insert the end of the pen tether through the attachment point, then feed the pen through the large loop in the tether. Figure 13. Installing a Pen Tether 29 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Tablet PC Buttons The three Tablet PC buttons are located on the right-hand side of a horizontally-

oriented system. Two of the buttons have secondary functions. The secondary functions are activated by pressing and holding the button. Keyboard Button Ctl-Alt-Del Rotation Button Figure 14. Application buttons CTL-ALT-DEL IS THE ONLY APPLICATION BUTTON THAT CAN BE USED WHILE THE SYSTEM IS LOGGING ON OR WHEN THE SYSTEM IS LOCKED (I.E., WHEN YOU HAVE THE LOGON OR COMPUTER LOCKED WINDOW SHOWING ON YOUR DESKTOP). 33 - Tablet PC Buttons Button Icon and Name Primary Function

(Press) Secondary Function

(Press and Hold) Press at Splash Screen*

In BIOS Setup Utility Description Launch TabTip Launch FujitsuHL Boot Menu Enter Keyboard Button Screen Rotate Rotation Button Enable/

Disable Auto Rotate BIOS Setup Utility Down Ctrl + Alt + Del None Application Menu Up Ctl-Alt-Del Button Pressing the Keyboard button invokes the TabTip utility. Pressing and holding the button launches the FujitsuHL utility that provides shortcuts to a variety of commonly accessed tools and tasks, including the web camera application. If you press the Keyboard button while the Fujitsu logo appears during system boot, the Boot Menu will open. While you are in the BIOS Setup utility, this button can be used as an [Enter] key. When you press the Rotate button, the system screen orientation changes from portrait (vertical) to landscape (horizontal) or from landscape to portrait. When you would like to use the Tablet PC as an eBook, for example, you would use the portrait orientation, when accessing spreadsheets, you would more typically use a landscape orientation. Pressing and holding the button enables and disables the Auto Rotate function. If you press the Rotation button while the Fujitsu logo appears during system boot, the BIOS Setup Utility will open. While you are in the BIOS Setup utility, this button can be used as a Down key Pressing the Ctl-Alt-Del button for approximately one second causes it to act as if Ctl-Alt-Del had actually been entered from a keyboard. If you press the Ctrl+Alt+Del button while the Fujitsu logo appears during system boot, the Application Menu will appear. While you are in the BIOS Setup utility, this button can be used as an Up key.

* Press at Splash Screenrefers to the action that occurs when you press the button when the Fujitsu logo appears when you first start up the system. 34 - Tablet PC Buttons Chapter 2 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Power Sources Your Fujitsu STYLISTIC Tablet PC has three possible power sources: a primary Lithium Polymer battery, an AC adapter or an optional Auto/Airline adapter. Connecting the Power Adapters The AC adapter or optional Auto/Airline adapter provides power for operating your Tablet PC and charging the batteries. Connecting the AC Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack of your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. 2 Plug the AC adapter into an AC electrical outlet. Connecting the Optional Auto/Airline Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack on your Tablet PC. 2 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the cigarette lighter of an automobile, or, 3 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the DC power jack on an airplane seat. 35 AC Adapter DC Power Jack Figure 15. Connecting the AC Adapter Switching from AC Adapter Power or the Auto/Airline Adapter to Battery Power 1 Be sure that you have at least one charged battery installed. 2 Remove the AC adapter or the Auto/Airline adapter. THE LITHIUM POLYMER BATTERY IS NOT CHARGED UPON PURCHASE. INITIALLY, YOU WILL NEED TO CONNECT EITHER THE AC ADAPTER OR THE AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER TO USE YOUR TABLET PC. 36 - Power Sources Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC Power On Power/Suspend/Resume Switch The Power/Suspend/Resume switch is used to turn on your STYLISTIC Tablet PC from its off state. Once you have connected your AC adapter or charged the internal Lithium Polymer battery, you can power on your Tablet PC. WHEN YOU TURN ON YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC BE SURE YOU HAVE A POWER SOURCE. THIS MEANS THAT AT LEAST ONE BATTERY IS INSTALLED AND CHARGED, OR THAT THE AC OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER IS CONNECTED AND HAS POWER. To turn on your STYLISTIC Tablet PC from its off state, slide the Power/Suspend/Resume switch, located on the bottom edge of the right side (when the system is held horizontally). When you are done working you can either leave your Tablet PC in Suspend mode or you can turn it off. See Sleep Mode on page 43 and Powering Off on page 46. Figure 16. Power/Suspend/Resume Switch 37 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC When you power on your STYLISTIC, it will perform a Power On Self Test (POST) to check the internal parts and configuration for correct functionality. If a fault is found, your STYLISTIC Tablet PC will emit an audio warning and/or an error message will be displayed. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 64. Depending on the nature of the problem, you may be able to continue by starting the operating system or by entering the BIOS setup utility and revising the settings. After satisfactory completion of the POST, your Tablet PC will load your operating system. NEVER TURN OFF YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC DURING THE POWER ON SELF TEST (POST) OR IT WILL CAUSE AN ERROR MESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED WHEN YOU TURN YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC ON THE NEXT TIME. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 64. Boot Sequence The procedure for starting-up your Tablet PC is termed the Bootup sequence and involves your Tablet PCs BIOS. When your STYLISTIC Tablet PC is first turned on, the main system memory is empty, and it needs to find instructions to start up your Tablet PC. This information is in the BIOS program. Each time you power up or restart your Tablet PC, it goes through a boot sequence which displays a Fujitsu logo until your operating system is loaded. During booting, your Tablet PC is performing a standard boot sequence including a Power On Self Test (POST). When the boot sequence is completed without a failure and without a request for the BIOS Setup Utility, the system displays the operating systems opening screen. The boot sequence is executed when:

You turn on the power to your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. You restart your Tablet PC from the Windows Shut Down dialog box. The software initiates a system restart. Example: When you install a new application. 38 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC Hard Disk Drive Passwords To provide additional security for your data, you can assign passwords to your hard disk drive(s). This feature is managed in the system BIOS Setup Utility. See BIOS Setup Utility below for information about accessing the utility. REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORDS. IF YOU SET AND FORGET YOUR USER AND MASTER HARD DISK PASSWORDS, FUJITSU WILL NOT BE ABLE TO RESET IT. YOU MAY LOSE DATA AND HAVE TO REPLACE YOUR SYSTEM BOARD OR HARD DISK DRIVE. BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS Setup Utility is a program that sets up the operating environment for your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. Your BIOS is set at the factory for normal operating conditions, therefore there is no need to set or change the BIOS environment to operate your Tablet PC. The BIOS Setup Utility configures:

Device control feature parameters, such as changing I/O addresses and boot devices. System Data Security feature parameters, such as passwords. Entering the BIOS Setup Utility IN ORDER TO NAVIGATE THROUGH THE BIOS SETUP UTILITY, YOU MUST HAVE AN EXTERNAL KEYBOARD ATTACHED TO YOUR TABLET. To enter the setup utility, do the following:

1 Turn on or restart your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. 2 To enter the BIOS Setup Utility, either press the Rotation button (or press the [F2] key if you have an external keyboard) when the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. This will open the main menu of the BIOS Setup Utility with the current settings displayed. 39 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC 3 Press the [RIGHT ARROW] or [LEFT ARROW] key to scroll through the other setup menus to review or alter the current settings. BIOS Guide A guide to your Tablet PCs BIOS is available online. Please visit our service and support website at http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support, then select Users Guides under Online Support. Select your Product, Series, and Model, then click [Go]. Under the Manuals tab, select the BIOS Guide. Booting the System We strongly recommend that you not attach any external devices until you have gone through the initial power on sequence. When you turn on your Tablet PC for the first time, it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen. If you do nothing the system will load the operating system, and then the Windows Welcome will begin. Starting Windows the first time IMPORTANT: DURING THE SETUP PROCEDURE, DO NOT DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY, PRESS ANY BUTTONS, OR USE ANY PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUCH AS A MOUSE OR KEYBOARD. In order to ensure that you receive the most benefits from the Windows operating system, it should be registered the first time you use it. 40 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC 1 First of all, you will need to read and accept the End User License Agreements (EULAs). IF YOU REJECT THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENTS YOU WILL BE ASKED TO REVIEW THE LICENSE AGREEMENTS FOR INFORMATION ON RETURNING WINDOWS OR TO SHUT DOWN YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC. YOU CANNOT USE YOUR TABLET PC UNTIL YOU HAVE ACCEPTED THE LICENSE AGREEMENTS. IF YOU STOP THE PROCESS YOUR TABLET PC WILL RETURN TO THE BEGINNING OF THE WINDOWS WELCOME PROCESS, EVEN IF YOU SHUT YOUR TABLET PC DOWN AND START IT UP AGAIN. 2 You will be prompted to enter your User Name and Password and you will be given a chance to select an icon for your account. 3 The next screen asks for a Computer Name. 4 You will next see a "Help protect Windows automatically screen in which the default choice is "Use recommended settings. The other two choices are "Install important updates only" and "Ask me later". Select from the three choices. 5 On the next screen set your time and date settings. 6 You will next see the "Select your computer's current location" screen. Make your selection from Home, Work

(Default), and Public location. 7 The "Thank you" screen follows and an offer for free TBD Norton Internet Security is extended. Following are several screens while Windows checks the system performance. 8 Windows will then boot up for the first time. As noted above, the first time you initialize your system, the screen will be blank for approximately two minutes. This is normal. During this period, do not disconnect the power supply, press any buttons, or use any peripheral devices such as mouse or keyboard. Registering Windows with Microsoft To register your copy of Windows, be sure to go to the Microsoft's website at:

http://windows.microsoft.com/en-US/windows7/help/register. 41 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC Registering Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC with Fujitsu You can register your STYLISTIC by going to our website at: http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/. You will need to be set up with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to register online. Installing ClickMe!

ClickMe!

BEFORE INSTALLING THE CLICKME! UTILITY, BE SURE THE WIRELESS LAN SWITCH IS TURNED ON. The first time you boot up your system, you will see a Primary Settings for the PC window. This window explains the installations which will be performed by the Click Me! utility. If you click [Execute], ClickMe! will begin installing. If after clicking the button you receive a User Account Control window, you will be asked for your permission to continue. Click [Continue] to continue. If you cancel the operation, the ClickMe! icon will appear on your desktop for later installation. THERE MAY BE SOME THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS THAT DO NOT GET INSTALLED USING THE CLICKME!

UTILITY. FOR MORE INFORMATION, REFER TO YOUR GETTING STARTED GUIDE. 42 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC Power Management Your Fujitsu STYLISTIC Tablet PC has many options and features for conserving battery power. Some of these features are automatic and need no user intervention. However, others depend on the parameters you set to best suit your operating conditions, such as those for the display brightness. Internal power management for your Tablet PC may be controlled from settings made in your operating system, pre-

bundled power management application, or from settings made in BIOS setup utility. Besides the options available for conserving battery power, there are also some things that you can do to prevent your battery from running down as quickly. For example, you can create an appropriate power saving profile, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode when it is not performing an operation, and you can limit the use of high power devices. As with all mobile, battery powered computers, there is a trade-off between performance and power savings. Power/Suspend/Resume Switch When your Tablet PC is active, the Power/Suspend/Resume switch can be used to manually put the Tablet PC into Sleep mode. Push the Power/Suspend/Resume switch when the Tablet PC is active, but not actively accessing anything, and immediately release the button. If your Tablet PC is suspended, pushing the Power/Suspend/Resume switch returns it to active operation. You can tell whether the system is Suspended by looking at the Power indicator. If the indicator is visible and not flashing, your Tablet PC is fully operational. If the indicator is visible and flashing, the Tablet PC is in Sleep mode. If the indicator is not visible, the power is off or your Tablet PC is in Hibernation mode. Sleep Mode Sleep mode in Windows saves the contents of your system memory during periods of inactivity by maintaining power to critical parts. This mode turns off the CPU, display, hard drive, and all other internal components except those necessary to maintain system memory and for restarting. Your Tablet PC can be put in sleep mode by:

Pressing the Power/Suspend/Resume switch when your system is turned on. 43 - Power Management Selecting Sleep after clicking [Start] then clicking the small arrow at the bottom right of the window. Timing out from lack of activity. Allowing the battery to reach the Dead Battery Warning condition. Your Tablet PCs system memory typically stores the file on which you are working, open application information, and any other data required to support operations in progress. When you resume operation from Sleep mode, your Tablet PC will return to the point where it left off. You must use the Power/Suspend/Resume switch to resume operation, and there must be an adequate power source available, or your Tablet PC will not resume. IF RUNNING YOUR TABLET PC ON BATTERY POWER, BE AWARE THAT THE BATTERY CONTINUES TO DISCHARGE WHILE YOUR TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, THOUGH NOT AS QUICKLY AS WHEN FULLY OPERATIONAL. DISABLING THE POWER/SUSPEND/RESUME SWITCH PREVENTS IT FROM BEING USED TO PUT THE TABLET PC INTO SLEEP OR HIBERNATION MODE. THE BUTTON RESUME FUNCTION CANNOT BE DISABLED. IF YOUR TABLET PC IS ACTIVELY ACCESSING INFORMATION WHEN YOU ENTER THE SLEEP OR HIBERNATION MODE, CHANGES TO OPEN FILES ARE NOT LOST. THE FILES ARE LEFT OPEN AND MEMORY IS KEPT ACTIVE DURING SLEEP MODE OR THE MEMORY IS TRANSFERRED TO THE INTERNAL HARD DRIVE DURING HIBERNATION MODE. THE MAIN ADVANTAGE OF USING HIBERNATION IS THAT POWER IS NOT REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN YOUR DATA. THIS IS PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT IF YOU WILL BE LEAVING YOUR TABLET PC IN A SUSPENDED STATE FOR A PROLONGED PERIOD OF TIME. THE DRAWBACK OF USING HIBERNATION MODE IS THAT IT LENGTHENS THE POWER DOWN AND POWER UP SEQUENCES AND RESETS PERIPHERAL DEVICES. 44 - Power Management Hibernation Feature The Hibernation feature saves the contents of your Tablet PCs system memory to the hard drive as a part of the Suspend/Resume mode. Hibernation is enabled by default. Defining Power Button Action To determine what occurs when the power button is pressed, follow these steps:

1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, then select the Power Options icon. 2 Select Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing the lid does, then make your selections

(Do Nothing, Sleep, Hibernate, or Shut Down). Windows Power Management The Power Options icon located in the Windows Control Panel allows you to configure some of the power management settings. For example, you can use the Power Options to set the timeout values for turning off the display and hard disks whether you are running the Tablet PC on battery power or one of the adapters. Restarting the System If your system is on and you need to restart it, be sure that you use the following procedure. 1 Click the [Start] button, and then move the mouse over the small arrow at the bottom right of the right-hand pane. 2 Select Restart from the list. TURNING OFF YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC WITHOUT EXITING WINDOWS OR TURNING ON YOUR TABLET PC WITHIN 10 SECONDS OF THE SYSTEM BEING SHUT OFF MAY CAUSE AN ERROR WHEN YOU START THE NEXT TIME. 45 - Power Management Powering Off If you turn off the power while accessing a disk there is a risk of data loss. To ensure that your Tablet PC shuts down without error, use the Windows shut down procedure. BE SURE TO CLOSE ALL FILES, EXIT ALL APPLICATIONS, AND SHUT DOWN YOUR OPERATING SYSTEM PRIOR TO TURNING OFF THE POWER. IF FILES ARE OPEN WHEN YOU TURN THE POWER OFF, YOU WILL LOSE ANY CHANGES THAT HAVE NOT BEEN SAVED, AND MAY CAUSE DISK ERRORS. Using the correct procedure to shut down from Windows allows your Tablet PC to complete its operations and turn off power in the proper sequence to avoid errors. The proper sequence is:

1 Click the [Start] button, and then move the mouse over the small arrow at the bottom right of the right-hand pane. 2 Select Shut Down from the list. If you are going to store your Tablet PC for a month or more, see Care and Maintenance Section. 46 - Power Management Chapter 3 User-Installable Features Lithium Polymer Battery Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC has a Lithium Polymer battery that provides power for operating your Tablet PC when no external power source is available. The battery is durable and long lasting, but should not be exposed to extreme temperatures, high voltages, chemicals or other hazards. The Lithium Polymer battery operating time may become shorter if it is used under the following conditions:

When used at temperatures that exceed a low of 5C or a high of 35C (41 to 95 F). Extreme temperatures not only reduce charging efficiency, but can also cause battery deterioration. The Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when you try to charge a battery that is outside its operating temperature range. When using a high current device such as an external optical drive or the hard drive, using the AC adapter will conserve your battery life. DO NOT LEAVE A FAULTY BATTERY IN YOUR TABLET PC. IT MAY DAMAGE YOUR AC ADAPTER, OPTIONAL AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER, OR YOUR TABLET PC ITSELF. IT MAY ALSO PREVENT OPERATION OF YOUR TABLET PC BY DRAINING ALL AVAILABLE CURRENT INTO THE BAD BATTERY. 47 ACTUAL BATTERY LIFE WILL VARY BASED ON SCREEN BRIGHTNESS, APPLICATIONS, FEATURES, POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGS, BATTERY CONDITION AND OTHER CUSTOMER PREFERENCES. HARD DRIVE USAGE MAY ALSO HAVE A SIGNIFICANT IMPACT ON BATTERY LIFE. THE BATTERY CHARGING CAPACITY IS REDUCED AS THE BATTERY AGES. IF YOUR BATTERY IS RUNNING LOW QUICKLY, YOU SHOULD REPLACE IT WITH A NEW ONE. UNDER FEDERAL, STATE, OR LOCAL LAW IT MAY BE ILLEGAL TO DISPOSE OF BATTERIES BY PUTTING THEM IN THE TRASH. PLEASE TAKE CARE OF OUR ENVIRONMENT AND DISPOSE OF BATTERIES PROPERLY. CHECK WITH YOUR LOCAL GOVERNMENT AUTHORITY FOR DETAILS REGARDING RECYCLING OR DISPOSING OF OLD BATTERIES. IF YOU CANNOT FIND THIS INFORMATION ELSEWHERE, CONTACT YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE AT 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Recharging the Batteries If you want to know the condition of the primary Lithium Polymer battery, check the Battery Level indicator located on the Status Indicator panel. The indicator changes as the battery level changes. The Lithium Polymer battery is recharged internally using the AC adapter or Auto/Airline adapter. To recharge the battery make sure the battery that needs to be charged is installed in your STYLISTIC Tablet PC and connect the AC or Auto/Airline adapter. MAKE SURE THAT THE PERCENTAGE CHARGE IS INDICATED BY THE BATTERY CHARGING INDICATOR ON THE STATUS INDICATOR PANEL. There is no memory effect on the Lithium Polymer battery therefore you do not need to discharge the battery completely before recharging. The charge times will be significantly longer if your Tablet PC is in use while the battery is charging. If you want to charge the battery more quickly, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode, or turn it off while the adapter is charging the battery. (See Power Management on page 43 for more information on Sleep mode and shutdown procedure) 48 - Lithium Polymer Battery USING HEAVY CURRENT DEVICES OR FREQUENT EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ACCESSES MAY PREVENT CHARGING COMPLETELY. Low Battery State When the battery is running low, a low battery notification message will appear. If you do not respond to the low battery message, the batteries will continue to discharge until they are too low to operate. When this happens, your Tablet PC will go into Sleep mode. There is no guarantee that your data will be saved once the Tablet PC reaches this point. ONCE THE LOW BATTERY NOTIFICATION MESSAGE APPEARS, YOU NEED TO SAVE ALL YOUR ACTIVE DATA AND PUT YOUR TABLET PC INTO SLEEP MODE UNTIL YOU CAN PROVIDE A NEW POWER SOURCE. YOU SHOULD PROVIDE A CHARGED BATTERY, AN AC POWER ADAPTER, OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. WHEN YOU ARE IN SLEEP MODE THERE MUST ALWAYS BE AT LEAST ONE POWER SOURCE ACTIVE. IF YOU REMOVE ALL POWER SOURCES WHILE YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, ANY DATA THAT HAS NOT BEEN SAVED TO THE HARD DRIVE WILL BE LOST. Dead Battery Suspend mode shows on the Status indicator just like the normal Sleep mode. Once your Tablet PC goes into Dead Battery Suspend mode you will be unable to resume operation until you provide a source of power either from an adapter, or a charged battery. Once you have provided power, you will need to press the Power/Suspend/Resume switch to resume operation. In the Dead Battery Suspend mode, your data can be maintained for some time, but if a power source is not provided promptly, the Power indicator will stop flashing and go out, meaning that you have lost the data that was not stored. Once you provide power, you can continue to use your Tablet PC while an adapter is charging the battery. Shorted Batteries The Status Indicator panel indicator associated with the Battery Level indicator displays the operating level available in that battery. If this display shows a flashing red LED, it means the battery is damaged and must be replaced so it does not damage other parts of your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. 49 - Lithium Polymer Battery Replacing the Battery With the purchase of an additional battery, you can have a fully charged spare to swap with one that is not charged. There are two ways to swap batteries, cold-swapping and hot-swapping:

Cold-swapping Batteries To cold-swap batteries in your battery bay, follow these easy steps:

1 Have a charged battery ready to install. 2 Perform one of the following two steps:

Click the Fujitsu Battery Swap Utility icon on the desktop. Follow the instructions that appear to put the system into Hibernate mode. Using this procedure saves your data and the system powers down. It is then safe to swap the batteries. Save your data, then power down the system. It is then safe to swap the batteries. 3 Note that the battery latch on the left is spring loaded, while the latch on the right is not. Unlock the battery by first pushing the right latch backwards, then pushing and holding the left latch (Figure 17). While holding the left latch, lift the battery out at the lift point (Figure 18). 4 To install a battery, first verify that the right latch is pushed back. While pushing the left latch back and holding it, insert a new battery into the bay (Figures 19 and 20). Lock the battery in place by sliding the right latch forward. 50 - Lithium Polymer Battery 5 Plug in the AC adapter and turn the power on. Lift Point Figure 17. Unlocking the Battery Figure 18. Removing the Battery Figure 19. Replacing the Battery Figure 20. Locking the Battery Hot-swapping Batteries 51 - Lithium Polymer Battery To hot-swap batteries in your battery bay follow these easy steps:

BE SURE TO PLUG IN AN AC ADAPTER PRIOR TO REMOVING THE BATTERY. THERE IS NO BRIDGE BATTERY PRESENT TO SUPPORT THE SYSTEM WHILE THE BATTERY IS BEING REPLACED. IF YOU DO NOT USE AN AC ADAPTER YOU WILL LOSE ANY UNSAVED FILES. 1 Plug an AC Adapter into the system and connect it to a power outlet. 2 Follow steps 3 through 5 in Cold Swapping Batteries. IF THE LITHIUM POLYMER BATTERY CONNECTOR IS NOT FULLY SEATED, YOU MAY NOT BE ABLE TO USE YOUR TABLET PC OR CHARGE YOUR BATTERY. 52 - Lithium Polymer Battery Secure Digital Cards Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC supports Secure Digital (SD) cards, on which you can store and transfer data to and from a variety of digital devices. These cards use flash memory architecture, which means they dont need a power source to retain data. Note that SD and SDHC Cards are supported, but SDXC Cards are not. SD Cards allow portable storage among a variety of devices, such as cell phones, GPS systems, digital cameras, and PDAs. SD Cards transfer data quickly, with low battery consumption. SD Card SD Card Slot

(relative location on rear) SD Card Slot SD Card Figure 21. SD Card Slot - Front Access Figure 22. SD Card Slot - Rear Access Installing SD Cards When holding the Tablet PC in horizontal position with the front facing you and the web camera on the left, the SD Card slot is located at the top left edge of the system, in the rear (Figures 21 and 22). To install an SD Card, follow these steps:

53 - Secure Digital Cards INSTALLING OR REMOVING AN SD CARD DURING YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PCS SHUTDOWN OR BOOTUP PROCESS MAY DAMAGE THE CARD AND/OR YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC. DO NOT INSERT A CARD INTO A SLOT IF THERE IS WATER OR ANY OTHER SUBSTANCE ON THE CARD AS YOU MAY PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE CARD, YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC, OR BOTH. 1 See your specific card manual for instructions on the installation of your card. Some cards may require that your Tablet PC is off while installing them. 2 Make sure there is no card currently in the slot. If there is, see Removing an SD Card. 3 With the product label facing in the same direction as the display screen, insert your card into the slot. 4 Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in the connector. Removing an SD Card To remove an SD Card, follow these easy steps:

SEE YOUR CARD MANUAL FOR SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS ON THE REMOVAL OF YOUR CARD. SOME CARDS MAY REQUIRE YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC TO BE IN SLEEP MODE OR OFF WHILE REMOVING THEM. 1 Select Safely Remove Hardware from the System Tray. Highlight the card in the list, then click [Stop]. 2 Push the SD Card in until it unlatches. It will then eject from the slot for removal. 54 - Secure Digital Cards Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Your Tablet PC Troubleshooting There may be occasions when you encounter simple setup or operating problems that you can solve on the spot, or problems with peripheral devices that can be solved by replacing the device. The information in this section helps you isolate and resolve some of these straightforward issues and identify failures that require service. Identifying the Problem If you encounter a problem, go through the following procedure before pursuing complex troubleshooting:

1 Turn off your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. 2 Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into your Tablet PC and to an active AC power source. 3 Make sure that any cards installed are seated properly. If it appears that there is a problem with a card, remove the card from the slot, thus eliminating it as a possible cause of failure. 4 Make sure that any devices connected to the external connectors are plugged in properly. You can also disconnect such devices, thus eliminating them as possible causes of failure. 5 Turn on your Tablet PC. Make sure it has been off at least 10 seconds before you turn it back on. 6 Go through the boot sequence. 7 If the problem has not been resolved, refer to the Troubleshooting Table that follows for more detailed troubleshooting information. 55 IF YOU KEEP NOTES ABOUT WHAT YOU HAVE TRIED, YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE MAY BE ABLE TO HELP YOU MORE QUICKLY BY GIVING ADDITIONAL SUGGESTIONS OVER THE PHONE. 8 If you have tried the solutions suggested in the Troubleshooting Table without success, contact your support representative:

Toll free: 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) Web site: http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support. Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:

Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any See the Configuration Label on the bottom of your Tablet PC for configuration and serial numbers. 56 - Troubleshooting Specific Problems Using the Troubleshooting Table When you have problems with your Tablet PC, try to find the symptoms under the Problem column of the troubleshooting table for the feature giving you difficulty. You will find a description of common causes for that symptom under the column Possible Cause and what, if anything, you can do to correct the condition under Possible Solutions. All possible causes or solutions may not apply to your Tablet PC. Troubleshooting Table Audio Problems. page 58 Power Failures . page 60 Hard Drive Problems. page 58 Shutdown and Startup Problems . page 62 Keyboard or Mouse Problems. page 58 Video Problems . page 62 Pen Input Problems. page 59 Miscellaneous Problems . page 63 USB Device Problems. page 59 57 - Troubleshooting Problem Audio Problems Possible Cause Possible Solutions There is no sound coming from the built-in speaker. The volume is turned too low. Adjust the volume control on your Tablet PC and operating system. Click the Volume icon in the system tray on the bot-

tom right of the screen. (It looks like a speaker). If the Mute box has a red circle on it, click on it to deselect it. Headphones are plugged into your Tablet PC. Plugging in headphones disables the built-in speaker. Remove the headphones. Hard Drive Problems You cannot access your hard drive. The wrong drive designator was used by an application when a bootable disc was used to start the Tablet PC. Security is set so your operat-

ing system cannot be started without a password. Verify drive designator used by application is in use by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a CD, drive designations are automatically adjusted. Verify your password and security settings. Keyboard or Mouse Problems You have installed an optional external key-

board or mouse, and it does not seem to work. Your external device is not properly installed. Your operating system is not set up with correct software driver for that device. Re-install your device. See Device Ports on page 82. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. You have connected an external keyboard or a mouse and it seems to be locking up the system. Your operating system is not setup with correct driver. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Your system has crashed. Try to restart your Tablet PC. 58 - Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Pen Input Problems Cursor is not tracking the pen. Display needs to be cali-

brated See Calibrating the Display on page 24. for more informa-

tion. Tablet is not responding to the pen System may have crashed. If the Tablet PC does not respond to the pen, connect an external keyboard to the system to see if it responds to key-

board commands. If the system doesnt respond to a key-

board, the application or system may have crashed, and it may be necessary to reboot the system. If the system responds to a keyboard but not to a pen, contact your local help desk or reseller, or call Fujitsu Service and Support at 1-

800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) for further assistance. Memory Problems Your System screen in the Control Panel does not show the correct amount of installed memory. USB Device Problems Your system doesnt rec-

ognize a USB device you installed, or the device doesnt work properly. You have a memory failure. Check for Power On Self Test (POST) messages. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 64. The device is not properly installed. The device may have been installed while an application was running, so your system is not aware of its installation. Remove and re-install the device. Close the application and restart your Tablet PC. Your device may not have the correct software driver active. See your software documentation and activate the correct driver. 59 - Troubleshooting Problem Power Failures Possible Cause Possible Solutions You turn on your Tablet PC and nothing seems to happen. The installed battery is com-

pletely discharged or there is no power adapter installed. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 18. Install a charged battery or a Power adapter. The battery is installed but is faulty or very low. System is at a critical thermal limit. When the battery reaches a critically low level, the system is forced into Sleep mode to avoid a total system power failure. To correct this problem, either connect an external power supply (such as the AC adapter), or install a charged battery in the Tablet PC. To avoid damage to heat-sensitive components, the system enters sleep mode when it gets too hot. System operation cannot be resumed until the Tablet PC cools off to a tolerable temperature. Move the Tablet PC to a cooler location. AC power adapter is not plugged in properly. Verify that your adapter is connected correctly. See Power Sources on page 35. The power adapter has no power from the AC or airline outlet. Move the AC cord to a different outlet, or check for a line switch or tripped circuit breaker. If you are using an auto/air-

line adapter in a car be sure the ignition switch is in the On or Accessories position. The power adapter is faulty. Try a different power adapter. The power management parameters are set for auto timeouts which are too short for your operating needs. Move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push Power/Suspend/Resume switch. Check your power manage-

ment settings, or close your applications and go to Power Options located in the Control Panel to adjust timeouts to better suit your needs. Your power adapter has failed or lost its power source. Make sure the adapter is plugged in and the outlet has power. 60 - Troubleshooting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC turns off all by itself. Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC turns off all by itself.

(continued) You ignored a low battery alarm until the battery entered Dead Battery Suspend mode. Install a power adapter, then push the Power/Sus-

pend/Resume switch. See Power Sources on page 35. Your Tablet PC will not work on battery alone. You have a battery failure. Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel. If the battery is shorted, replace or remove it. See Status Indicator Panel on page 18. The installed battery is dead. Replace the battery with a charged one or use an adapter. No battery is installed. Install a charged battery. Battery is improperly installed. Verify that the battery is properly connected by re-installing it. Your installed battery is faulty. Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel and replace or remove any batteries that are shorted. See Status Indicator Panel on page 18. The battery seems to discharge too quickly. The power savings features may be disabled. Check the Power Options menu settings and adjust accord-

ing to your operating needs. The brightness is turned all the way up. Turn down the brightness adjustment. The higher the bright-

ness the more power your display uses. Youre running an application that uses a lot of power due to frequent drive access, or use of wireless devices. Use a power adapter for this application when at all possible. The battery is very old. Replace the battery. The battery was exposed to high temperatures. The battery is too hot or too cold. 61 - Troubleshooting Replace the battery. Restore the Tablet PC to normal operating temperature. Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when battery is outside of operating range. Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Shutdown and Startup Problems The Suspend/Resume switch does not work. Suspend/Resume switch is disabled. To enable the button, go to Control Panel -> Power Options and click on the Advanced tab. In the Power buttons area, select the Change what the power button does option. The system powers up and displays power on information, but fails to load the operating system. There may be application software. conflict Close all applications and try the button again. You have a secured system requiring a password to load your operating system. Make sure you have the right password. Enter the setup util-

ity and verify the Security settings and modify them as accordingly. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 39. The boot sequence settings of the setup utility are not compatible with your configu-

ration. Set the operating source by pressing the [F12] key while the Fujitsu logo is on screen or use the [F2] key and enter the setup utility and adjust the source settings from the Boot menu. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 39. Hard drive was not detected. Use BIOS setup utility to auto detect the internal hard drive. An error message is dis-

played on the screen dur-

ing the boot sequence. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a problem. Your Tablet PC appears to change setup parameters when you start it. BIOS setup changes were not saved when made and you exited the setup utility. See the Power On Self Test (POST) messages to determine the meaning and severity of the problem. Not all messages are errors; some are simply status indicators. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 64. Make sure you select Save Changes And Exit when exiting the BIOS setup utility. Video Problems The display is blank when you turn on your Tablet PC. Power management timeouts are set for short intervals and you didnt see the display go on and off again. Move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume switch. (The display may be shut off by Sleep mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) 62 - Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions The Tablet PC turned on with a series of beeps and the display is blank. Power On Self Test detected a failure which does not allow the display to operate. The display goes blank by itself after you have been using it. Power management timeouts are set for short intervals and you failed to notice the display come on and go off again. Contact your support representative. Push the Power/Suspend/Resume switch. (The display may be shut off by Sleep Mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) The Tablet PC has gone into Sleep or Hibernate mode because you have not used it for a period of time. Push Power/Suspend/Resume switch. Check power man-

agement settings, or close applications and go to the Power Savings menu of the setup utility to adjust timeout values to suit your needs. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 39. The display has bright or dark spots. Miscellaneous Problems If the spots are very tiny and few in number, this is normal for a large LCD display. If the spots are numerous or large enough to interfere with your operation needs. This is normal; do nothing. Display is faulty; contact your support representative. Error message displayed on the screen during oper-

ation of an application. Application software often has its own set of error message displays. See your application manual and help displays screens for more information. Not all messages are errors some may simply be status. 63 - Troubleshooting Power On Self Test Messages The following is a list of error-and-status messages that the Phoenix BIOS and/or your operating system can generate and an explanation of each message. Error messages are marked with an *. If an error message is displayed that is not in this list, write it down and check the operating system documentation on screen and in the manual. If you can find no reference to the message, contact a support representative.

*Invalid NVRAM Data Problem with NVRAM access. In the unlikely case that you see this message you may have a display problem. You can continue operating but should contact your support representative for more information.

*Operating system not found Operating system cannot be located on either drive A: or drive C: Enter the setup utility and see if both the fixed disk, and drive A: are properly identified and that the boot sequence is set correctly. Unless you have changed your installation greatly, the operating system should be on drive C:. If the setup utility is correctly set, your hard drive may be corrupted.

*Real time clock error - Check date and time settings Real-time clock fails BIOS test. May require board repair. Contact your support representative. 64 - Troubleshooting Restoring Your Pre-installed Software Packed with your system you will find two discs for recovering your pre-installed software:

Drivers and Applications Restore Disc Recovery and Utility Disc Drivers and Applications Restore Disc The Drivers and Applications Restore (DAR) disc included with your system contains sets of device drivers and Fujitsu utilities (in specific directories) that are unique to your computer configuration. IF YOU HAVE ACCESS TO THE INTERNET, VISIT THE FUJITSU SUPPORT WEBSITE AT HTTP://

WWW.COMPUTERS.US.FUJITSU.COM/SUPPORT TO CHECK FOR THE MOST CURRENT INFORMATION, DRIVERS AND HINTS ON HOW TO PERFORM RECOVERY AND SYSTEM UPDATES. Re-installing Individual Drivers and Applications The Drivers and Applications disc can be used to selectively re-install drivers and/or applications that may have been un-installed or corrupted. THERE MAY BE CERTAIN FREE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS PRE-INSTALLED ON YOUR SYSTEM THAT ARE NOT ON THE DAR DISC. THE LATEST VERSIONS OF THE APPLICATIONS CAN BE DOWNLOADED FROM THE THIRD-PARTYS WEBSITE. To re-install drivers and/or applications:

1 Boot up the system and insert the DAR disc after Windows has started. A Fujitsu Installer screen is displayed after the disc is inserted. 2 After reading the License Agreement, click [I agree]. 3 A window will appear containing a list of applications, drivers, and utilities that you can install from the DAR disc. 65 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software THE COMPONENTS LISTED ARE COLOR-CODED IN TERMS OF THEIR INSTALL STATUS. BLUE INDICATES THAT THE COMPONENT CAN BE INSTALLED. GREEN INDICATES THAT THE COMPONENT NEEDS TO BE INSTALLED SEPARATELY. GREY INDICATES A COMPONENT THAT IS ALREADY INSTALLED; GREY ITEMS CAN BE REINSTALLED, BUT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION YOU WILL RECEIVE A REMINDER THAT THE COMPONENT IS ALREADY INSTALLED. 4 In the list, check off all the components you want to install. If you want to install all components, click [Select All]. Clicking [Select All] will select all of the blue-coded components; you must select grey and green components separately. 5 Once you have selected the components you wish to install, click [Install Selected Subsystems]; the components will be installed. 6 After the components are installed, click [OK], then click [Yes] when asked if you want to reboot the system. Recovery and Utility disc The Recovery and Utility disc contains six utilities:

Recovery and Utility tabs Diagnostics tab: The Diagnostics tool is designed for use by IT professionals. It is not likely you will need to use this tool. When you select devices from the Diagnosis window then click [Execute], several tests are performed on the selected components. Recovery tab: The Recovery tab contains two tools:

Restoring the Factory Image (only C: drive) and Restoring the Factory Image (full hard drive recovery). You can use these tools to perform a full hard drive recovery. Utility tab: The Utility tab contains three tools: Hard Disk Data Delete, Restore Recovery and Utility, and Windows Complete PC Restore. The Hard Disk Data Delete utility is used to delete all data on the hard disk and prevent the data from being reused. NOTE: Do not use the Hard Disk Data Delete utility unless you are absolutely certain that you want to erase your entire hard disk, including all partitions. Restore Recovery and Utility allows you to restore the first hidden partition. 66 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software Windows Complete PC Restore utility allows you to restore an image created with Windows Backup and Restore Center. Windows Complete PC Restore will overwrite the data on your hard disk drive. The Diagnostics utility allows the IT professional to determine device status/condition by executing diagnostics tests on selected system components. To use the disc, follow the instructions in the Using the Recovery and Utility Disc booklet that is pack-

aged with the disc. 67 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 68 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 69 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software Chapter 5 Care and Maintenance Caring for your Tablet PC If you use your STYLISTIC Tablet PC carefully, you will increase its life and reliability. This section provides some tips for looking after the Tablet PC and its devices. THE SYSTEM CONTAINS COMPONENTS THAT CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE COMPONENTS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

IF YOU DROP YOUR TABLET PC OR DAMAGE THE HOUSING IN ANY WAY, IMMEDIATELY TURN OFF POWER AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN A SHORT CIRCUIT, SMOKE, AND/OR FIRE. CONTACT FUJITSU SERVICE AND SUPPORT BY PHONE AT 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-

5487), BY EMAIL AT 8FUJITSU@US.FUJITSU.COM, OR THROUGH THE WEBSITE AT HTTP://WWW.COMPUTERS.US.FUJITSU.COM/SUPPORT TO LEARN HOW TO GET THE SYSTEM REPAIRED. BEFORE DOCKING OR UNDOCKING YOUR TABLET PC (WHEN USING A DOCKING CRADLE), IT IS GOOD PRACTICE TO TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY IN YOUR BODY. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAY BE HAZARDOUS IF MISUSED. OPERATIONS OF THIS PRODUCT OR SIMILAR PRODUCTS, MUST ALWAYS BE SUPERVISED BY AN ADULT. DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF ANY ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS AND DO NOT PERMIT THEM TO HANDLE ANY CABLES. Your STYLISTIC is a durable but sensitive electronic device. Treat it with respect and care. Make a habit of transporting it in a suitable carrying case. 70 Do not attempt to service the computer yourself. Always follow installation instructions closely. Keep it away from food and beverages. If you accidentally spill liquid on your STYLISTIC Tablet PC:

1 Turn it off. 2 Position it so that the liquid can run out and let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer if needed. 3 If your Tablet PC will not boot after it has dried out, call your support representative. Do not use your Tablet PC in a wet environment (near a bathtub, swimming pool). Always use the AC adapter and batteries that are approved for your Tablet PC. Avoid exposure to sand, dust and other environmental hazards. Do not expose your Tablet PC to direct sunlight for long periods of time as temperatures above 140 F (60 C) may damage your Tablet PC. Do not put heavy or sharp objects on the computer. Cleaning your Tablet PC Always disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug, not the cord.) Clean your STYLISTIC Tablet PC with a damp, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents. Use a soft cloth to remove dust from the screen. Never use glass cleaners. Always shut down the computer, unplug the power adapter, and remove the battery when cleaning or disinfecting the computer exterior or LCD display. Cleaning guidelines using recommended off-the-shelf cleaners Computer exterior. To clean the exterior, use one of the following off-the-shelf products:

Office Depot #154-616 Notebook Cleaning Kit Meridrew Enterprises Klear Screen Wipes 3M CL563 Cleaner Wipes Note: After cleaning with one of these products, gently polish with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth until the solution is no longer visible. 71 - Care and Maintenance Disinfecting STYLISTIC computers Wipe the surface with a soft cloth wipe and a 50% ethanol solution or use another ethanol-based germicide which has been registered as a hospital disinfectant by the EPA. USE OF INCORRECT CLEANERS CAN RESULT IN OPTICAL IMPAIRMENT OF THE LCD AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE COMPUTER. ALWAYS REFER TO THE CLEANER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES AND MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR PROPER HANDLING AND USE OF THE PRODUCTS. NEVER USE AMMONIA, ACIDIC, OR ALKALINE CLEANERS OR ORGANIC CHEMICALS SUCH AS PAINT THINNER, ACETONE, PROPYL OR ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL, OR KEROSENE. IT MAY DAMAGE SURFACE FINISHES AND THE COATING OF THE LCD SCREEN. NEVER USE COMPRESSED AIR FOR CLEANING YOUR COMPUTER. Storing your Tablet PC If storing your Tablet PC for a month or longer, turn it off, fully charge the battery, then remove and store all Lithium Polymer batteries. Store your Fujitsu STYLISTIC in a cool, dry location. Temperatures should remain between 13F

(-25C) and 140F (60C). Store your tablet and batteries separately. If you store your system with a battery installed, the battery will discharge, and battery life will be reduced. In addition, a faulty battery might damage your system. ALWAYS POWER OFF THE COMPUTER BEFORE TRANSPORTING AND/OR PACKAGING IT. AFTER SHUTTING DOWN THE SYSTEM, WAIT UNTIL THE STATUS LED PANEL INDICATES POWER OFF CONDITION (I.E., NO LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINATED). IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE UNIT MAY NOT AUTOMATICALLY GO TO POWER OFF OR HIBERNATE MODE WHEN YOU CLOSE THE LID. THIS SITUATION MAY OCCUR DUE TO PRE-OS BOOT PASSWORD SECURITY SETTINGS OR SOME OTHER APPLICATION RUNNING ON THE COMPUTER. ATTEMPTING TO TRANSPORT THE COMPUTER WHILE POWER IS ON MAY DAMAGE THE TABLET PC DUE TO SHOCK OR OVERHEATING. 72 - Care and Maintenance Traveling with your Tablet PC Do not transport your Tablet PC while it is turned on. You should carry your Tablet PC with you while traveling, rather than checking it in as baggage. Never put your Tablet PC through a metal detecto; have it hand-inspected by security personnel. You can however, put your Tablet PC through a properly tuned X-ray machine. To avoid problems, place it close to the entrance of the machine and remove it as soon as possible or have it hand-

inspected by security personnel. Security officials may require you to turn your system on, so make sure you have a charged battery on hand. Take the necessary plug adapters if you're traveling overseas. Check the following diagram to determine which plug adapter you'll need or ask your travel agent. Outlet Type Location Outlet Type Location United States, Canada, parts of Latin America, Mexico, Japan, Korea, the Philippines, Taiwan Russia and the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS), most of Europe, parts of Latin America, the Middle East, parts of Africa, Hong Kong, India, most of South Asia United Kingdom, Ireland, Malaysia, Singapore, parts of Africa China, Australia, New Zealand Batteries Caring for your Battery Always handle batteries carefully. Do not short-circuit the battery terminals (that is, do not touch both terminals with a metal object). Do not carry lose batteries in a pocket or purse where they may mix with coins, keys, or other metal objects. Doing so may cause an explosion or fire. 73 - Care and Maintenance Do not drop, puncture, disassemble, mutilate or incinerate the battery. Recharge batteries only as described in this manual and only in ventilated areas. Do not leave batteries in hot locations for more than a day or two. Intense heat can shorten the life of your battery. Do not leave a battery in storage for longer than 6 months without recharging it. Increasing Battery Life If your tablet runs on battery power all day, connect it to an AC adapter overnight to recharge it. Power your Tablet PC through the AC or optional auto/airline adapter whenever possible. Keep brightness to the lowest level comfortable. Set the power management for maximum battery life. Put your Tablet PC in Sleep mode when it is turned on and you are not actually using it. Limit your media drive access. Disable the Media Player auto insert notification function. Media Care Caring for your Media (when optional external optical drive is installed) Media discs are precision devices and will function reliably if given reasonable care. Always store your media disc in its case when it is not in use. Always handle discs by the edges and avoid touching the surface. Avoid storing any media discs in extreme temperatures. Do not bend or scratch media discs or set heavy objects on them. Do not spill liquids or get dust on media discs. Never write on the label surface with a ballpoint pen or pencil. Always use a felt pen. If a disc is dirty, use only a DVD/CD cleaner or wipe it with a clean, soft, lint free cloth starting from the inner edge and wiping to the outer edge. 74 - Care and Maintenance If a disc is subjected to a sudden change in temperature, condensation may form on the surface. Wipe moisture off with a soft, lint free cloth and let it dry at room temperature. DO NOT use a hair dryer or heater to dry media discs. Caring for an Optional Optical Drive An optional optical drive is durable but you must treat it with care. Please pay attention to the following points:

The drive rotates the compact disc at a very high speed. Do not carry it around or subject it to shock or vibration with the power on. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be exposed to extreme temperatures. Avoid using or storing the drive where it is damp or dusty. Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets or devices that generate strong magnetic fields. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be subjected to shock or vibration. Do not disassemble or dismantle the optical drive. Use of a commercially available lens cleaner is recommended for maintenance of your drive. Secure Digital Cards Caring for your Cards Secure Digital Cards are durable, but you must treat them with care. The documentation supplied with your card will provide specific information, but you should pay attention to the following points:

To keep out dust and dirt, store cards in their protective sleeves when they are not installed. Avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight or excessive heat. Keep the cards dry. Do not flex or bend the cards, and do not place heavy objects on top of them. Do not force cards into the slot. Avoid dropping cards, or subjecting them to excessive vibration. 75 - Care and Maintenance Chapter 6 System Specifications Specifications This section provides the hardware and environmental specifications for your Fujitsu STYLISTIC Tablet PC. Specifications of particular configurations will vary. Configuration Label The configuration label located on the bottom of your Tablet PC contains specific information regarding the options youve chosen for your Tablet PC. Following is an example configuration label. Part Number Configuration ID Configuration P/N:

FPC P/N: FPCMXXXXX STQ550, AtomZ670, W7Pro, 2GB, 62G, WLAN, 10.1WXGA AOUXXXXXXXXXXXXX Model #

Processor Operating System Memory Hard Drive Communications Screen Size/Type 76 Microprocessor Intel Atom Z670 processor (1.5 GHz) Chipset Intel SM35 Memory System Memory DDR2-800 MHz SDRAM memory module. Fixed 2GB of total memory (onboard). Cache Memory 512 kB L2 cache on-die Video Video Color and Resolution Anti-glare 10.1" Wide XGA LED backlit IPS display Internal: 1280 x 800 pixel resolution, 16M colors External: 1280x720 pixel resolution, 16M colors Simultaneous: 1280 x 800, 16M colors 160 vertical and horizontal viewing angles Digitizer N-trig DuoSense technology. Dual Digitizer, consisting of active digitizer and capacitive touch panel

(uses active stylus input and up to four finger touch input). Video RAM Intel GMA600 video graphics controller with 3D Accelerator. Maximum 759 MB UMA VRAM 77 - Specifications Audio Realtek codec ALC269 Headphones: Stereo headphone jack, 3.5 mm, 1 Vrms or less, minimum impedance 32 Ohms One built-in speaker, 18 mm diameter Two built-in dual analog microphones Mass Storage Device Options Hard Drive Options FDE Solid State Drive, S-ATA/300 (3.0Gbps), 62 GB, with TRIM command support FDE Solid State Drive, S-ATA/300 (3.0Gbps), 30 GB, with TRIM command support Communications communication WLAN: Ralink RT3572 802.11a/b/g/n Wireless LAN USB Device Bluetooth: Broadcom BCM20702 Bluetooth USB device for wireless personal area network WWAN: Optional integrated 3G Wireless Wide Area Network, Gobi3000 (Sierra Wireless AirPrime MC8355) Security Features Trusted Platform Module The STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC may have an optional Trusted Platform Module (TPM) installed for added system security. Fingerprint Recognition Sensor Swipe sensor for biometric security. SmartCard Slot Integrated SmartCard slot (requires third-party application) 78 - Specifications Device Ports On the STYLISTIC Tablet PC:

SD Card slot One USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) connectors for input/output devices One DC In connector One HDMI connector Docking port (100-pin, to dock with optional STYLISTIC Docking Cradle) One stereo headphone jack 1.3 megapixel rear-facing web camera, VGA front-facing web camera On the Optional STYLISTIC Docking Cradle Four USB 2.0 connectors for input/output devices One DC-in connector One docking connector (100-pin, to dock with Tablet PC Power Battery Otions Lithium Polymer Battery, 2 cells, 7.2V, 19Wh, 2620 mAh Lithium Polymer Battery, 4 cells, 7.2V 38Wh 5240 mAh AC Adapter Autosensing 100-240V AC, supplying 19V DC, 2.1A, 40W to the Tablet PC; includes an AC cable Power Management Conforms to ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface). 79 - Specifications Dimensions and Weight Overall Dimensions Approximately 10.8" (w) x 7.56" (d) x 0.64" (h) (275 x 192 x 16.2 mm) Environmental Requirements Temperature Operating: 41 to 95 F (5 to 35 C). Non-operating: 5 to 140 F (15 to 60 C) Humidity Operating: 20% to 85%, relative, non-condensing. Non-operating: 8% to 85%, relative, non-condensing Altitude Operating: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) maximum Popular Accessories For ordering or additional information on Fujitsu accessories please visit our Web site at www.shopfujitsu.com or call 1-800-FUJITSU. Included Software Depending on your pre-installed operating system, your Tablet PC comes with software for playing audio and video files of various formats. In addition there is virus protection software and Power Management software. The following list indicates the software included with your system. Adobe Reader Norton Internet Security (60-day free trial) FujitsuHL OmniPass Fingerprint application Nuance Keyboard/Handwriting Input Microsoft Office Starter 2010 80 - Specifications Learning About Your Software Tutorials All operating systems and most application software have tutorials built into them upon installation. We highly recommend that you step through the tutorial before you use an application. Manuals Included with your Tablet PC you will find manuals for your installed operating system and other pre-

installed software. Any manuals that are not included, are available online through the help system of the software. We recommend that you review these manuals for general information on the use of these applications. Adobe Reader The Adobe Reader allows you to view, navigate, and print PDF files from across all of the major computing platforms. FujitsuHL FujitsuHL provides a variety of tools and shortcuts to commonly-used applications and utilities. Among the features offered by FujitsuHL are the camera application for use with the built-in web camera, a calculator, and links to applications such as Explorer. Norton Internet Security - TBD TBD Your system is preinstalled with a free 60-day trial version of Symantecs Norton Internet Security. Norton Internet Security is a suite of tools designed to protect your Tablet PC from computer viruses, hackers, spyware, and spam. It assists in the protection of data currently on your hard disk from destruction or contamination. The trial version is activated upon your acceptance of software license agreement. After 60 days, you will need to purchase a subscription from Symantec to download latest virus, spyware, and spam definitions. 81 - Specifications OmniPass Fingerprint application The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass lets you use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-line passwords, and presents a convenient user interface through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. Nuance XT9 Keyboard/Handwriting Input A predictive text application that allows you to quickly complete your tasks with a number of tools, including next-word prediction, enhanced word completion, automatic spell correction, auto-accenting, and smart punctuation. Microsoft Office Starter 2010 (32-bit) Microsoft Office Starter 2010 includes reduced-functionality versions of Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel that include advertising.Microsoft PowerPoint, Microsoft Outlook, and Microsoft Publisher are not included. Customers must purchase an Office 2010 Disc, PKC (Product Key Card), or select one of the full Microsoft Office 2010 suites to activate full-featured Office software on the PC. Fujitsu offers a PKC (Product Key Card) for Microsoft Office Home and Student 2010 and Microsoft Office Home and Business 2010 (32-bit). Simply enter your product key and youre ready to go!

Another option is to purchase a full Microsoft Office 2010 suite from either your computer reseller or online from Microsoft. Operating System The following operating system configuration is installed on your system:

Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Edition 82 - Specifications Regulatory Information Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Fujitsu could void this users authority to operate the equipment. FCC NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limit for class B digital devices, pursuant to parts 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit than the receiver. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device. DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. 83 - Regulatory Information Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide FCC Regulatory Information Please note the following regulatory information related to the optional wireless LAN device. Regulatory Notes and Statements Wireless LAN, Health and Authorization for use Radio frequency electromagnetic energy is emitted from Wireless LAN devices. The energy levels of these emissions, however, are far much less than the electromagnetic energy emissions from wireless devices such as mobile phones. Wireless LAN devices are safe for use by consumers because they operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. The use of Wireless LAN devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as:

On board an airplane, or In an explosive environment, or In situations where the interference risk to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. In cases in which the policy regarding use of Wireless LAN devices in specific environments is not clear (e.g., airports, hospitals, chemical/oil/gas industrial plants, private buildings), obtain authorization to use these devices prior to operating the equipment. 84 Regulatory Information/Disclaimers Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of this device, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by the manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any damage or violation of government regulations arising from failure to comply with these guidelines. This device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN: For operation within 5.15~5.25 GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environments, and the antenna of this device must be integral. Federal Communications Commission statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. FCC Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from the one the receiver is connected to. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 85 Figure A-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposure have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The wireless LAN radio device has been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. Export restrictions This product or software contains encryption code which may not be exported or transferred from the US or Canada without an approved US Department of Commerce export license. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules., as well as ICES 003 B / NMB 003 B. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation. Modifications not expressly authorized by Fujitsu America, Inc. may invalidate the user's right to operate this equipment. Canadian Notice The device for the 5150 - 5250 MHz band is only for indoor usage to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. The maximum antenna gain of 6 dBi permitted (for devices in the 5250 - 5350 MHz, 5470 - 5725 MHz and 5725 - 5825 MHz bands) to comply with the e.i.r.p. limit as stated in A9.2 of RSS210. In addition, users are cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 - 5350 MHz and 5650 - 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. 86 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN This manual describes the procedures required to properly set up and configure the optional integrated Wireless LAN USB device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read this manual carefully to ensure its correct operation. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document This document is applicable to systems containing the following device:

Integrated Ralink RT3572 802.11a/b/g/n Wireless LAN USB Device Characteristics of the WLAN Device The WLAN device is a USB module attached to the main board of the mobile computer. The WLAN device operates in license-free RF bands, eliminating the need to procure an FCC operating license. The WLAN operates in the 2.4GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band and the lower, middle, and upper bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands. The WLAN devices are capable of four operating modes, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n The WLAN devices are Wi-Fi certified and operate (as applicable) at a the maximum data rate of 150 Mbps

(theoretical) in IEEE802.11n mode; 54 Mbps in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode; and 11 Mbps in IEEE802.11b mode. The WLAN devices support the following encryption methods - WEP, TKIP, CKIP, and AES encryption. The Wireless LAN devices are compliant with the following standards: WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0, CCX4.0, and CCX5.0. 87 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device Ad Hoc Mode

"Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer networks. Ad Hoc networks are an easy and inexpensive method for establishing network connectivity between multiple computers. Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID, network authentication, and encryption key settings are identically configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network. Figure 23. Ad Hoc Mode Network 88 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless network architecture in which devices communicate with wireless or wired network devices by communicating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode, wireless devices can communicate with each other or with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks operate in infrastructure mode because they require access to the WLAN in order to access services, devices, and computers (e.g., file servers, printers, databases). Internet ADSL modem, cable modem, or similar Wired LAN Access Point*

Wireless LAN

*An optional hub for a wired LAN may be required depending upon the type of access point used. Figure 24. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Network 89 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN How to Handle This Device The WLAN device is an optional device that may come pre-installed in your mobile computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The operating system that your mobile computer comes with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN device. The Wireless LAN devices support IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n. The WLAN devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and the 5 GHz lower, middle, and upper UNII bands. Microwave ovens may interfere with the operation of WLAN devices since they operate in the same 2.4 GHz frequency range as IEEE802.11b/g/n devices. Interference by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band. Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4 GHz range may interfere with operation of WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g/n modes. Symptoms of interference include reduced throughput, intermittent disconnects, and many frame errors. It is HIGHLY recommended that these interfering devices be powered off to ensure proper operation of the WLAN device. Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device Disconnecting the WLAN device may be desired in certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics, airplanes, etc.). The WLAN device can be deactivated by using the Wireless On/Off Switch, and it can be disconnected in Windows using the WLAN icon in the system tray (Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio;

it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected.). BEFORE USING THE WIRELESS LAN DEVICE, YOU MUST FIRST INSTALL CLICKME! TO ENSURE THAT THE CORRECT SOFTWARE FOR YOUR DEVICE IS INSTALLED. SEE INSTALLING CLICKME! ON PAGE 42. 90 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch The WLAN device can be deactivated quickly and efficiently by toggling the Wireless Device On/Off Switch to the Off position. The switch has no effect on non-Wireless LAN models. Wireless Device Switch Figure 25. Wireless LAN/Bluetooth On/Off Switch Location Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected. 1 Right-click the WLAN icon in the taskbar at the bottom right of your screen. 2 Choose Disconnect from a network. Activating the WLAN Device Activation of the WLAN device can be accomplished using the same methods as the deactivation process Using the Wireless On/Off Switch In Windows, by right-clicking the WLAN icon then clicking Connect to a network 91 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Configuring the Wireless LAN The WLAN device can be configured to establish wireless network connectivity using the software that is built into Windows. Support for most industry standard security solutions is contained in this software. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network administrator for these parameters:

Configuring the WLAN 1 Click the Start button, then select Control Panel. 2 If the Control Panel is not in Classic View, select Classic View from the left panel. Double-click the Network Connections icon. 3 Double-click on the Wireless Network Connection icon. 4 Click on [View Wireless Networks]

5 Choose a wireless network. 6 Click [Connect]. 7 Enter the Network Key, if required. 8 Enter any required information. It may be necessary to consult with your network administrator for some of the information. 9 If you require assistance, go to [Start] -> Help and Support -> Networking and the Web. Select the main topic in which you are interested, then type in relevant keywords in the Search box. Connection to the network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by performing the following steps:

1 Click on the WLAN icon in the system tray. 2 Select Connect to a network. 3 Select a network from the list that appears, and click the [Connect] button. After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by clicking on the Wireless Network icon in the system tray:

92 Configuring the Wireless LAN Troubleshooting the WLAN Troubleshooting Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the following table. If you are unfamiliar with the steps required, consult your System Administrator or go to [Start] -> Help and Support -> Networking and the Web Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection Incorrect network name (SSID) or network key Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSIDs) and network keys

(WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured correctly. SSIDs and WEP key values must be identical on each machine. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set network name (SSID) and network key to the same values as those of the access point. Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access Point. Please consult your network administrator for this value, if necessary. Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for better transmission. Check if the wireless switch is turned On. Go to Start -> Control Panel, and double-click on Windows Mobility Center. If the wireless network is off, click the

[Turn wireless on] button. Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON. Weak received signal strength and/or link quality The WLAN device has been deactivated or disabled The computer to be connected is turned off 93 Troubleshooting the WLAN Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection

(continued) RF interference from Access Points or other wireless networks Wireless network authentication has failed Incorrectly configured network settings The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering device. Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly typed WEP key, a misconfigured LEAP username, or an incorrectly chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate but not authenticate to the wireless network. Recheck the configuration of your network settings. Incorrect IP address configuration This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact your network administrator for the correct settings. 94 Troubleshooting the WLAN WLAN Specifications Specifications Item Type of network Transfer rate Active frequency Typical operating distances**

Number of channels Specification The integrated Ralink RT3572 802.11a/b/g/n Wireless LAN USB Device conforms to IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g, and 802.11n, Wi-Fi based*.

(Automatic switching) 150 Mbps maximum data rate 802.11n: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz 802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz 802.11a: 4900 ~ 5850 MHz 802.11a: 40 ft. (12 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 6 Mbps 802.11b: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 11 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11g: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11n: Estimated double the operating distance of 802.11g and 802.11a in their respective frequencies. 802.11a: 8 independent channels 802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels 802.11n: 2.4 GHz - 3 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is not used; 2 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is used. 5 GHz - 12 non-overlapping UNII channels with or without Channel Bonding Security Encryption Types - WEP, TKIP, AES***, WPA 1.0 compliant Maximum recommended number of computers to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc connection) 10 units or less ****

95 WLAN Specifications

* Wi-Fi based indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.

** The communication ranges shown above will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls, reflective material, or interference from external RF sources.

*** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/ 104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.

**** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased. 96 WLAN Specifications Using the Bluetooth Device The optional Integrated Bluetooth (V. 3.0) module is a wireless device installed in selected Fujitsu mobile computers. What is Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is designed as a short-range wireless link between mobile devices, such as laptop computers, phones, printers, and cameras. Bluetooth technology is used to create Personal Area Networks

(PANs) between devices in short-range of each other. THE WIRELESS LAN/BLUETOOTH ON/OFF SWITCH WILL POWER OFF BOTH THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS LAN AND BLUETOOTH DEVICES AT THE SAME TIME. TO ENABLE OR DISABLE EITHER ONE OF THE DEVICES INDIVIDUALLY, PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS:

1 Slide the Wireless LAN/Bluetooth on/off switch to On position. 2 Right-click on the Bluetooth icon in the Windows notification area on the right side of the taskbar. 3 Select Turn Adapter On (or Off). 4 Click [OK]. Where to Find Information About Bluetooth For additional information about Bluetooth Technology, visit the Bluetooth Web site at:

www.bluetooth.com. 97 Using the Bluetooth Device FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The Bluetooth antenna is located on the front edge of the right palm rest and is exempt from minimum distance criteria due to its low power. The transmitters in this device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Notice To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Warranty Users are not authorized to modify this product. Any modifications invalidate the warranty. This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without signed written permission from Fujitsu. Unauthorized modification will void the equipment authorization from the FCC and Industry Canada and the warranty. 98 Using the Bluetooth Device Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Your system has a fingerprint sensor device at the bottom left below the display screen. Fingerprint Sensor Device With a fingerprint sensor, you can avoid having to enter a username and password every time you want to:

Figure 26. Fingerprint sensor Log onto Windows Resume from sleep mode Cancel a password-protected screen saver Log into home pages that require a username and password 99 After you have enrolled - or registered - your fingerprint, you can simply swipe your fingertip over the sensor for the system recognize you. The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass enables you to use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-line passwords. OmniPass requires users to authenticate themselves using the fingerprint sensor before granting access to the Windows desktop. This device results in a secure authentication system for restricting access to your computer, applications, web sites, and other password-protected resources. OmniPass presents a convenient graphical user interface, through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. Getting Started This section guides you through the preparation of your system for the OmniPass fingerprint recognition application. You will be led through the OmniPass installation process. You will also be led through the procedure of enrolling your first user into OmniPass. Installing OmniPass If OmniPass has already been installed on your system, skip this section and go directly to User Enrollment on page 102. You can determine whether OmniPass has already been installed by checking to see if the following are present:

The gold key-shaped OmniPass icon in the system tray at the bottom right of the screen. The Softex program group in the Programs group of the Start menu System Requirements The OmniPass application requires space on your hard drive; it also requires specific Operating Systems

(OSs). The minimum requirements are as follows:

Windows XP Professional operating system or later 100 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device At least 35 MB available hard disk space Installing the OmniPass Application If OmniPass is already installed on your system, go to User Enrollment on page 102. Otherwise continue with this section on software installation. INSTALLATION OF THE APPLICATION REQUIRES THAT YOU HAVE AN EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ATTACHED TO YOUR SYSTEM. FOR INSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER INSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS INSTALLATION. To install OmniPass on your system you must:

1 Insert the installation media for the OmniPass application into the appropriate drive. If you are installing from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM, you must find and launch the OmniPass installation program (setup.exe) from the media. 2 Follow the directions provided in the OmniPass installation program. Specify a location to which you would like OmniPass installed. It is recommended that you NOT install OmniPass in the root directory (e.g. C:\). 3 Once OmniPass has completed installation you will be prompted to restart you system. Once your system has rebooted you will be able to use OmniPass. If you choose not to restart immediately after installation, OmniPass will not be available for use until the next reboot. 4 The installation program automatically places an icon (Softex OmniPass) in the Windows Control Panel as well as a golden key shaped icon in the taskbar. Verifying Information about OmniPass After you have completed installing OmniPass and restarted your system, you may wish to check the version of OmniPass on your system. To check the version information of OmniPass:

1 From the Windows Desktop, double-click the key-shaped OmniPass icon in the taskbar (usually located in the lower right corner of the screen), or, 101 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Click the Start button, select Settings, and click Control Panel. Double-click Softex OmniPass in the Control Panel, and the OmniPass Control Center will appear. If it does not appear, then the program is not properly installed, or, Click the Start button, select Programs, and from the submenu select the Softex program group, from that submenu click OmniPass Control Center. 2 Select the About tab at the top of the OmniPass Control Center. The About tab window appears with version information about OmniPass. Uninstalling OmniPass FOR UNINSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER UNINSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS UNINSTALLATION. To remove the OmniPass application from your system:

1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar. Select Settings, and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 3 Select OmniPass, and then click Change/Remove. 4 Follow the directions to uninstall the OmniPass application. 5 Once OmniPass has finished uninstalling, reboot your system when prompted. User Enrollment Before you can use any OmniPass features you must first enroll a user into OmniPass. Master Password Concept 102 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Computer resources are often protected with passwords. Whether you are logging into your computer, accessing your email, e-banking, paying bills online, or accessing network resources, you often have to supply credentials to gain access. This can result in dozens of sets of credentials that you have to remember. During user enrollment a "master password is created for the enrolled user. This master password replaces all other passwords for sites you register with OmniPass. Example: A user, John, installs OmniPass on his system (his home computer) and enrolls an OmniPass user with username John_01 and password freq14. He then goes to his webmail site to log onto his account. He inputs his webmail credentials as usual (username John_02 and password STYLISTIC), but instead of clicking [Submit], he directs OmniPass to Remember Password. Now whenever he returns to that site, OmniPass will prompt him to supply access credentials. John enters his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14) in the OmniPass authentication prompt, and he is allowed into his webmail account. He can do this with as many web sites or password protected resources he likes, and he will gain access to all those sites with his OmniPass user credentials

(John_01 and freq14). This is assuming he is accessing those sites with the system onto which he enrolled his OmniPass user. OmniPass does not actually change the credentials of the password protected resource. If John goes to another computer without he OmniPass account to access his webmail, he would need to enter his original webmail credentials (John_02 and STYLISTIC) to gain access. If he attempts his OmniPass user credentials on a system other than a system hes enrolled on, he will not gain access. THE ENROLLMENT PROCEDURE ASSUMES YOU HAVE NO HARDWARE AUTHENTICATION DEVICES OR ALTERNATE STORAGE LOCATIONS THAT YOU WISH TO INTEGRATE WITH OMNIPASS. IF YOU DESIRE SUCH FUNCTIONALITY, CONSULT THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THIS DOCUMENT. Basic Enrollment 103 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device The Enrollment Wizard will guide you through the process of enrolling a user. Unless you specified otherwise, after OmniPass installation the Enrollment Wizard will launch on Windows login. If you do not see the Enrollment Wizard, you can bring it up by clicking Start on the Windows taskbar; select Programs; select Softex; click OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. 1 Click Enroll to proceed to username and password verification. By default, the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard enters the credentials of the currently logged in Windows user. 2 Enter the password you use to log in to Windows. This will become the master password for this OmniPass user. In most cases, the Domain: value will be your Windows computer name. In a corporate environment, or when accessing corporate resources, the Domain: may not be your Windows computer name. Click [Next] to continue. 3 In this step OmniPass captures your fingerprint. Refer to Enrolling a Fingerprint on page 104 for additional information. 4 Next, choose how OmniPass notifies you of various events. We recommend you keep Taskbar Tips on Beginner mode taskbar tips and Audio Tips on at least Prompt with system beeps only until you get accustomed to how OmniPass operates. Click [Next] to proceed with user enrollment. You will then see a Congratulations screen indicating your completion of user enrollment. 5 Click [Done] to exit the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. You will be asked if youd like to log in to OmniPass with your newly enrolled user; click [Yes]. Enrolling a Fingerprint Enrolling a fingerprint will increase the security of your system and streamline the authentication procedure. You enroll fingerprints in the OmniPass Control Center. With an OmniPass user logged in, double-click the system tray OmniPass icon. Select the User Settings tab and click Enrollment under the User Settings area. Click Enroll Authentication Device and authenticate at the authentication prompt to start device enrollment. 104 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device 1 During initial user enrollment, you will be prompted to select the finger you wish to enroll. Fingers that have already been enrolled will be marked by a green check. The finger you select to enroll at this time will be marked by a red arrow. OmniPass will allow you re-enroll a finger. If you choose a finger that has already been enrolled and continue enrollment, OmniPass will enroll the fingerprint, overwriting the old fingerprint. Select a finger to enroll and click [Next]. 2 It is now time for OmniPass to capture your selected fingerprint. It may take a several capture attempts before OmniPass acquires your fingerprint. Should OmniPass fail to acquire your fingerprint, or if the capture screen times out, click [Back] to restart the fingerprint enrollment process. Your system has a swipe fingerprint sensor. A swipe sensor is small and resembles a skinny elongated rectangle. To capture a fingerprint, gently swipe or pull your fingertip over the sensor (starting at the second knuckle) towards yourself. Swiping too fast or too slow will result in a failed capture. The Choose Finger screen has a [Practice] button; click it to practice capturing your fingerprint. When you are comfortable with how your fingerprint is captured, proceed to enroll a finger. 3 Once OmniPass has successfully acquired the fingerprint, the Verify Fingerprint screen will automatically appear. To verify your enrolled fingerprint, place your fingertip on the sensor and hold it there as if you were having a fingerprint captured. Successful fingerprint verification will show a green fingerprint in the capture window and the text Verification Successful under the capture window. 105 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Using OmniPass You are now ready to begin using OmniPass. Used regularly, OmniPass will streamline your authentications. Password Replacement You will often use the password replacement function. When you go to a restricted access website (e.g., your bank, your web-based email, online auction or payment sites), you are always prompted to enter your login credentials. OmniPass can detect these prompts and you can teach OmniPass your login credentials. The next time you go to that website, you can authenticate with your fingerprint to gain access. OmniPass Authentication Toolbar After installing OmniPass and restarting, you will notice a dialog you have not seen before at Windows Logon. This is the OmniPass Authentication Toolbar, and it is displayed whenever the OmniPass authentication system is invoked. The OmniPass authentication system may be invoked frequently: during Windows Logon, during OmniPass Logon, when unlocking your workstation, when resuming from sleep or hibernate, when unlocking a password-enabled screensaver, during password replacement for remembered site or application logins, and more. When you see this toolbar, OmniPass is prompting you to authenticate. The Logon Authentication window indicates what OmniPass-restricted function you are attempting. The icons in the lower left (fingerprint and key) show what authentication methods are available to you. Selected authentication methods are highlighted while unselected methods are not. When you click the icon for an unselected authentication method, the authentication prompt associated with that method is displayed. When prompted to authenticate, you must supply the appropriate credentials: an enrolled finger for the fingerprint capture window or your master password for the master password prompt (the key icon). Remembering a Password OmniPass can remember any application, GUI, or password protected resource with a password prompt. Using the following procedure, you can store a set of credentials into OmniPass. These credentials will then be linked to your master password or fingerprint. 106 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Go to a site that requires a login (username and password), but do not log in yet. At the site login prompt, enter your username and password in the prompted fields, but do not enter the site (do not hit [Enter],

[Submit], [OK], or Login). Right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and select Remember Password from the submenu. The Windows arrow cursor will change to a golden key OmniPass cursor. Click the OmniPass cursor in the login prompt area, but dont click [Login] or [Submit]. Associating a Friendly Name After clicking the OmniPass key cursor near the login prompt, OmniPass will prompt you to enter a friendly name for this site. You should enter something that reminds you of the website, the company, or the service you are logging into. In its secure database, OmniPass associates this friendly name with this website. Additional Settings for Remembering a Site When OmniPass prompts you to enter a friendly name you also have the opportunity to set how OmniPass authenticates you to this site. There are three effective settings for how OmniPass handles a remembered site. The default setting is Automatically click the OK or Submit button for this password protected site once the user is authenticated. With this setting, each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass, you will automatically be logged into the site. Less secure is the option to Automatically enter this password protected site when it is activated. Do not prompt for authentication. Check the upper box to get this setting, and each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will log you into the site without prompting you to authenticate. THIS SETTING IS MORE CONVENIENT IN THAT WHENEVER YOU GO TO A SITE REMEMBERED WITH THIS SETTING, YOU WILL BYPASS ANY AUTHENTICATION PROCEDURE AND GAIN INSTANT ACCESS TO THE SITE. BUT SHOULD YOU LEAVE YOUR SYSTEM UNATTENDED WITH YOUR OMNIPASS USER LOGGED IN, ANYONE USING YOUR SYSTEM CAN BROWSE TO YOUR PASSWORD PROTECTED SITES AND GAIN AUTOMATIC ACCESS. 107 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device If you uncheck both boxes in Settings for this Password Site, OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass your credentials will be filled in to the site login prompt, but you will have to click the website [OK], [Submit], or [Login] button to gain access to the site. Click Finish to complete the remember password procedure. The site location, the credentials to access the site, and the OmniPass authentication settings for the site are now stored in the OmniPass secure database. The OmniPass authentication settings (Settings for this Password Site) can always be changed in Vault Management. Logging in to a Remembered Site Whether or not OmniPass prompts you to authenticate when you return to a remembered site is determined by Settings for this Password Site and can be changed in Vault Management. The following cases are applicable to using OmniPass to login to: Windows, remembered web sites, and all other password protected resources. With Master Password Once you return to a site you have remembered with OmniPass, you may be presented with a master password prompt. Enter your master password and you will be allowed into the site. Logging into Windows with a Fingerprint Device When logging into Windows with a fingerprint device, the fingerprint capture window will now appear next to the Windows Login screen. Place your enrolled fingertip on the sensor to authenticate. You will be simultaneously logged into Windows and OmniPass. The capture window will also appear if you have used Ctrl-Alt-Del to lock a system, and the fingerprint device can be used to log back in as stated above. IF A MACHINE IS LOCKED AND OMNIPASS DETECTS A DIFFERENT USER LOGGING BACK IN WITH A FINGERPRINT, THE FIRST USER WILL BE LOGGED OUT AND THE SECOND USER LOGGED IN. 108 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Password Management OmniPass provides an interface that lets you manage your passwords. To access this GUI, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management; you will be prompted to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Passwords under Vault Settings. You will see the Manage Passwords interface, with a list of friendly names. You can view the credentials stored for any remembered website by highlighting the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and clicking Unmask Values. Should a password be reset, or an account expire, you can remove stored credentials from OmniPass. Highlight the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and click Delete Page. You will be prompted to confirm the password deletion. The two check boxes in Manage Passwords govern whether OmniPass prompts you to authenticate or directly logs you into the remembered site. OmniPass will overwrite an old set of credentials for a website if you attempt to use Remember Password on an already remembered site. The exception to the above rule is when resetting the Windows password. If your password is reset in Windows, the next time you login to Windows, OmniPass will detect the password change and prompt you to Update or Reconfirm the password with OmniPass. Enter your new Windows password in the prompt and click OK. Your OmniPass "master password" will still be your Windows password. OmniPass User Identities Identities allow OmniPass users to have multiple accounts to the same site (e.g., bob@biblomail.com and boballen@biblomail.com). If OmniPass did not provide you identities, you would be limited to remembering one account per site. To create and manage identities, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management; OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Identities under Vault Settings. You can only manage the identities of the currently logged in OmniPass user 109 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device To add a new identity, click New Identity or double-click Click here to add a new identity. Name the new identity and click [OK], then click [Apply]. You can now switch to the new identity and start remembering passwords. To delete an identity, highlight the identity you want to delete and click [Delete Identity], then [Apply]. WHEN YOU DELETE AN IDENTITY, ALL OF ITS ASSOCIATED REMEMBERED SITES AND PASSWORD PROTECTED DIALOGS ARE LOST. To set the default identity, highlight the identity you want as default and click [Set as Default]; click

[Apply] to ensure the settings are saved. If you log in to OmniPass with a fingerprint device, you will automatically be logged in to the default identity for that OmniPass user. You can choose the identity with which you are logging in if you login using "master password". Choosing User Identity during Login To choose your identity during login, type your username in the User Name: field. Press [Tab] and see that the Domain: field self-populates. Click the Password: field to bring the cursor to it, and you will see the pull-down menu in the Identity: field. Select the identity to login as, then click OK. Switch User Identity To switch identities at any time, right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and click Switch User Identity from the submenu. The Switch Identity dialog will appear. Select the desired identity and then click OK. Identities and Password Management On the Manage Passwords interface of the Vault Management tab of the OmniPass Control Center, there is a pull-down selection box labeled, Identity. This field lets you choose which identity you are managing passwords for. When you select an identity here, only those password protected dialogs that are associated with that identity are shown. You can perform all the functions explained in Password Management on page 109. 110 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Configuring OmniPass This section gives an overview of both the Export/Import function and the OmniPass Control Center. Exporting and Importing Users YOU CANNOT IMPORT A USER INTO OMNIPASS IF THERE ALREADY IS A USER WITH THE SAME NAME ENROLLED IN OMNIPASS. Using OmniPass Control Center, you can export and import users in and out of OmniPass. The export process backs up all remembered sites, credentials, and enrolled fingerprints for an OmniPass user. All OmniPass data for a user is backed up to a single encrypted database file. During the import process, the Windows login of the exported user is required. If the proper credentials cannot be supplied, the user profile will not be imported. YOU SHOULD PERIODICALLY EXPORT YOUR USER PROFILE AND STORE IT IN A SAFE PLACE. IF ANYTHING HAPPENS TO YOUR SYSTEM, YOU CAN IMPORT YOUR OMNIPASS PROFILE TO A NEW SYSTEM AND HAVE ALL YOUR REMEMBERED SETTINGS AND FINGERPRINTS INSTANTLY. YOU DON'T FORGET THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS WHEN EXPORTING. WHEN YOU EXAMINE THE IMPORTATION, YOU ARE PROMPTED FOR AUTHENTICATION. THE CREDENTIALS THAT WILL ALLOW A USER PROFILE TO BE IMPORTED ARE THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS OF THE EXPORTED USER. THEY ARE THE CREDENTIALS THAT HAD TO BE SUBMITTED WHEN THE USER PROFILE WAS EXPORTED. YOU WILL NEED USER NAME, PASSWORD, AND DOMAIN. Exporting an OmniPass User Profile To export a user, open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Import/Export User under Manage Users. Click Exports an OmniPass user profile. OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Upon successfully authentication, you must name the OmniPass user profile and decide where to save it. An .opi file is generated, and you should store a copy of it in a safe place. 111 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device This .opi file contains all your user specific OmniPass data, and it is both encrypted and password protected. This user profile does NOT contain any of your encrypted data files. Importing an OmniPass User Profile To import an OmniPass user open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Import/Export User under Manage Users. Click Imports a new user into OmniPass and then select OmniPass Import/Export File

(*.opi) and click Next. OmniPass will then prompt you to browse for the file you had previously exported

(.opi file). When you select the .opi file for importation, OmniPass will prompt you for authentication. The credentials that will allow a user profile to be imported are the Windows login credentials of the exported user. They are the credentials that had to be submitted when the user profile was exported. You will need User Name, Password, and Domain. If you dont remember the value for Domain, in a PC or SOHO environment Domain should be your computer name. OmniPass will notify you if the user was successfully imported. Things to Know Regarding Import/Export Assume you export a local Windows User profile from OmniPass. You want to import that profile to another machine that has OmniPass. Before you can import the profile, a Windows user with the same login credentials must be created on the machine importing the profile. Example: I have a Windows user with the username Tom and the password Sunshine on my system. I have enrolled Tom into OmniPass and remembered passwords. I want to take all my passwords to new system. I export Toms OmniPass user profile. I go to my new system and using the Control Panel I create a user with the username "Tom" and the password "Sunshine". I can now successfully import the OmniPass user data to the new system. If you export an OmniPass-only user, you can import that user to any computer running OmniPass, provided that a user with that name is not already enrolled in OmniPass. If you attempt to import a user profile who has the same name as a user already enrolled in OmniPass, the OmniPass import function will fail. 112 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device OmniPass Control Center This section serves to explain functions within OmniPass Control Center that werent explained earlier. You can access the OmniPass Control Center any of three ways:

Double-click the golden OmniPass key shaped icon in the Windows taskbar (typically in the lower-

right corner of the desktop) Click the Start button; select the Programs group; select the Softex program group; and click the OmniPass Control Center selection. Open the Windows Control Panel (accessible via Start button --> Settings --> Control Panel) and double-click the Softex OmniPass icon. User Management The User Management tab has two major interfaces: Add/Remove User and Import/Export User. Import/Export User functionality is documented in Exporting and Importing Users on page 111. Add/Remove User functionality is straightforward. If you click Adds a new user to OmniPass you will start the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. The Enrollment Wizard is documented in User Enrollment on page 102. If you click Removes a user from OmniPass, OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Authenticate with the credentials (or enrolled fingerprint) of the user you wish to remove. OmniPass will prompt you to confirm user removal. Click OK to complete user removal. REMOVING A USER WILL AUTOMATICALLY DESTROY ALL OMNIPASS DATA ASSOCIATED WITH THAT USER. ALL IDENTITIES AND CREDENTIALS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USER WILL BE LOST. IF YOURE SURE YOU WANT TO REMOVE THE USER, WE RECOMMEND YOU EXPORT THE USER PROFILE. 113 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device User Settings User Settings tab has three interfaces: Audio Settings, Taskbar Tips, and Enrollment. User settings allow you to customize OmniPass to suit your preferences. Under User Settings (Audio Settings and Taskbar Tips) you can set how OmniPass notifies you of OmniPass events (e.g., successful login, access denied, etc.). Details of each setting under the Audio Settings and Taskbar Tips interfaces are self-

explanatory. The Enrollment interface allows you to enroll fingerprints. For the procedure to enroll and authentication device refer to Chapter 2.3. To enroll additional fingerprints, click Enroll Authentication Device, and authenticate with OmniPass. Select the fingerprint recognition device in the Select Authentication Device screen (it should already be marked by a green check if you have a finger enrolled) and click Next. System Settings The OmniPass Startup Options interface can be found in the System Settings tab. With these options you can specify how your OmniPass Logon is tied to your Windows Logon. The first option, Automatically log on to OmniPass as the current user, will do just as it says; during Windows login, you will be logged on to OmniPass using your Windows login credentials. If the user logging into Windows was never enrolled into OmniPass, upon login no one will be logged on to OmniPass. This setting is appropriate for an office setting or any setting where users must enter a username and password to log into a computer. This is the default setting. With the second option, Manually log on to OmniPass at startup, OmniPass will prompt you to login once you have logged on to Windows. With the third option, Do not log on to OmniPass at startup, OmniPass will not prompt for a user to be logged on. You can manually log on to OmniPass by right-clicking the OmniPass taskbar icon and clicking Log in User from the right-click menu. 114 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Troubleshooting You cannot use OmniPass to create Windows users. You must first create the Windows user, and you will need administrative privileges to do that. Once the Windows user is created, you can add that user to OmniPass using the same username and password Cannot add Windows users to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a Windows user to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. You can do this by going to Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Network Access:

Sharing and Security Model for Local Accounts. The correct setting should be Classic - Local Users Authenticate as Themselves. Cannot add a User with a Blank Password to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a user with a blank password to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. First attempt the procedure explained in the Cannot add Windows user to OmniPass section. If the difficulties persist, then try the following procedure. Click Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Accounts: Limit local account use of blank passwords to console login only. This setting should be set to Disabled. Dialog appears after OmniPass authentication during Windows Logon After installing OmniPass on your system, you can choose to logon to Windows using OmniPass. You authenticate with OmniPass (via master password, or an enrolled security device) and OmniPass logs you into Windows. You may, during this OmniPass authentication, see a Login Error dialog box. This dialog box occurs when OmniPass was unable to log you into Windows with the credentials supplied

(username and password). This could happen for any of the following reasons:

Your Windows password has changed Your Windows account has been disabled 115 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device If you are having difficulties due to the first reason, you will need to update OmniPass with your changed Windows account password. Click Update Password and you will be prompted with a dialog to reconfirm your password. Enter the new password to your Windows user account and click OK. If the error persists, then it is unlikely the problem is due to your Windows user account password changing. 116 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Appendix C: FujitsuHL User Guide FujitsuHL Instructions FujitsuHL provides an icon-based display of the Home, Photo, and Documents Launchers that help you easily choose them by tapping the icon on the screen. FujitsuHL assists you in performing the following functions:

Execute FujitsuHL gadgets Link to software that you often use Open files in the Pictures and Documents folders Take pictures using the Web Camera TO USE FUJITSUHL, YOU SHOULD SET THE DISPLAY RESOLUTION TO 1280 X 800 DOTS. Starting FujitsuHL You can execute FujitsuHL by two methods:

Pressing the [Keyboard] button on the PC for two seconds and more, or, Tapping Start > All Programs > FujitsuHL, then selecting FujitsuHL. 117 Closing FujitsuHL To close FujitsuHL, tap the at the right top of the screen. About FujitsuHL FujitsuHL has three different Launcher screens, each of which will be described in detail later in this chapter:

Home Launcher The Home Launcher allows you to select and execute Gadgets and software. Photo LauncherPhoto Launcher allows you to view your photos contained in the Pictures folder. Documents Launcher The Documents Launcher allows you to view the files in the Documents folder. Additional features Using FujitsuHL, you can also use the Camera feature to take pictures using your web camera, and the Photo Viewer feature to view your photos. 118 FujitsuHL Instructions Home Launcher Tab Area Status Area Handle Bar Quick Launcher Tab Area By tapping one of the tabs, you can switch the Launcher screen to Home, Photo or Documents. Handle Bar By tapping the Handle Bar, you can switch between the Launcher Screen and the Gadget screen 119 FujitsuHL Instructions Status Area Use the icons in the Status Area to (in order from left to right):

Change the display brightness Show the WLAN antenna level (when you tap it, WLAN Management is opened) Change the sound volume and set mute Show the battery level Open the Task Manager Close FujitsuHL Quick Launcher By tapping an icon in this area, you can:

Launch the web camera 120 FujitsuHL Instructions Add software to links in the Quick Launcher for commonly used applications Gadget Screen With the Gadget screen, you can use the FujitsuHL Gadgets to initiate commonly-used tasks. Handle Bar Gadget Area Gadget Icons 121 FujitsuHL Instructions Handle Bar By tapping the Handle Bar, you can switch between Gadget Screen and Launcher Screen. Gadget Area This area shows which gadget is currently being executed. Gadget Icons The following Gadgets are available in the Gadget Icon area. By tapping the icon, you automatically execute the program or utility. Launch the Outlook Mail Gadget*

Launch the Outlook Schedule Gadget*

Launch the Outlook ToDo Gadget*

Launch the Worldwide Clock Gadget

* To launch these features, Microsoft Outlook must be set up. 122 FujitsuHL Instructions Launcher Screen With the Launcher Screen, you can execute selected applications. Shortcut Area Shortcut Area The shortcut area displays icons for each of the linked applications. To execute an application, simply tap on the icon. To add a new icon to the shortcut area, add it to the Quick Launcher (See Quick Launcher on page 120), then drag the icon to the shortcut area. To delete a shortcut, press it until prompted to remove, then tap [OK]. Note that the Mailer and Browser icons cannot be deleted. 123 FujitsuHL Instructions Photo Launcher When Photo is selected in the tab area at the top of the screen, the Photo Launcher screen appears. Photo Area Photo Area This area shows thumbnail images of the photos that are in the Pictures folder. By tapping an image, you can open it through the Photo Viewer. See Photo Viewer Button on page 127 The following formats are supported by this utility: JPG, BMP, PNG and GIF. 124 FujitsuHL Instructions Documents Launcher When Documents is selected in the tab area at the top of the screen, the Documents Launcher screen appears. Documents Area Documents Area This area shows icon representations of the files in the Document folder. By tapping an icon, you can open the file. 125 FujitsuHL Instructions Camera Tool The Camera tool allows you to take and view pictures and modify the settings of the camera(s). Preview Area Photo Viewer Button Home Button Camera Switch Button Shutter Button Setting Button Preview Area This area shows the preview of the scene being viewed by the Web Camera. 126 FujitsuHL Instructions Home Button By tapping this button, you can return to the most recently used Launcher screen. Photo Viewer Button By tapping this button, you execute the Photo Viewer to look at your pictures. If some photos have already been saved, this button icon will be changed to the latest photo image. Shutter Button By tapping this button, you can take a picture. The pictures will be saved in the Camera folder under Pictures. The filename contains the date on which the picture was taken. Camera Switch Button By tapping this button, you can switch between the rear-facing Web Camera and the front-facing Web Camera. Setting Button By tapping this button, you can change the brightness, contrast, and color tone of the Web Camera. 127 FujitsuHL Instructions Photo Viewer You can open the Photo Viewer by either tapping a thumbnail image of a photo in the Photo Launcher or by tapping the Photo Viewer button in Camera. Display Area Home Button Set Wallpaper Button Camera Button Previous Button Rotate Clockwise Trash Can Button Next Button Rotate Counter-clockwise 128 FujitsuHL Instructions Display Area This area shows the photo or graphics data that you selected.. Home Button By tapping this button, you return to the most recently used Launcher screen. Camera Button By tapping this button, you open the Camera utility. See Camera Tool on page 126 Set Wallpaper Button By tapping this button, you can change the photo that is currently displayed as the FujitsuHL wallpaper. If you want to change to the previous wallpaper, choose it from the Photo launcher and then tap this button. Previous Button By tapping this button, you can see previous photo. You can also do this by flicking backwards on the display. Next Button By tapping this button, you can see the next photo. You can also do this by flicking forwards on the display. Rotate Buttons By tapping this button, you can rotate the photo data currently displayed in the Display Area to 90 degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise. Trash Can By tapping this button, you can delete the photo that is currently displayed in the Display Area. 129 FujitsuHL Instructions Index A About This Guide 11 AC adapter 35 plug adapters 73 Active Digitizer 21 application buttons 15 Ctl-Alt-Del button 34 function button 34 orientation button 34 Auto/Airline Adapter 35, 36 Automatically Downloading Driver Updates 69 B Battery 47 care 73 cold-swapping 50 conserving power 43 dead 61 faulty 61 hot-swapping 51 increasing life 74 Lithium Polymer battery 47 low 49 problems 61 recharging 48 replacing 50 shorted 49 Standby mode 49 battery release latch 16 BIOS guide 40 setup utility 39 Bluetooth Where to Find Information 97 Boot Sequence 38 Booting the System 40 Built-in Speakers 58 C Click Me! 42 Clicking 21 Configuration Label 76 Contact Information 12 conventions used in the guide 11 D DC input connector 15 DC Output Cable 35 DC Power Jack 35 Display Panel 20 problems 62, 63 Drivers and Application CD 65 E Error Messages 64 117 F Fingerprint Sensor Device17, 99 enrolling a fingerprint 104 getting started 100 installing OmniPass 100 logging into a remembered site 108 OmniPass authentication toolbar 106 password replacement 106 remembering a password 106 uninstalling OmniPass 102 user enrollment 102 using OmniPass 106 Front Web Camera 14 Fujitsu Contact Information 12 Fujitsu Shopping Online 12 G Gestures Four-Finger Functions 28 One-Finger Functions 25 Three-Finger Functions 27 Two-Finger Functions 26 H Hard Disk Drive problems 58 Hard Disk Drive Passwords 39 HDMI Port 17 headphone 17 Hibernation Feature 45 disable/enable 45 L Lithium Polymer Battery 17 118 M Media Player care 75 Microsoft Office Starter 2010 82 Mouse problems 58 O Operating 82 P Pen Caring for the Pen 30 Changing the Pen Battery 31 Changing the Pen Settings 30 Installing a Pen Tether 32 Replacing the Pen Tip 32 pen not responding 59 Pen Tether Attachment Point 15 Power AC adapter 35 Auto/Airline adapter 35 failure 60 management 43 off 46 on 37 problems 62 sources 35 power icon 19 Power Management 43 Power On Self Test 38, 64 Power/Suspend/Resume Switch 17, 43 Pre-Installed Software 80 R Rear Web Camera 16 Registration 42 Regulatory Information 83 removable battery pack 17 Restarting 45 Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 65 S SD Card installing 53 removing 54 SD Card Slot 17 Secure Digital Card 53 removing 54 Sleep Mode 43 Smart Card Slot 17 Specifications 76 Audio 78 Chipset 77 Digitizer 77 Dimensions and Weight 79 Environmental Requirements 80 Keyboard 79 mass storage device options 78 Memory 77 Microprocessor 77 Power 79 Video 77 status display 18 power icon, system states indicated by 19 system status LEDs 14 T Touch Screen calibrating 24 clicking 22 dragging 23 Troubleshooting 55 Audio Problems 58 battery 61 display 62 hard drive 58 mouse 58 power 60 USB 59 U Universal Serial Bus 17 Using the Optional Capacitive Touchscreen 24 W Warranty 12 Windows 11 Windows Power Management 45 Wireless Device On/Off switch 15 Wireless LAN Before Using the Wireless LAN 87 configuring 87 connection to the network 92 deactivating/disconnecting 90 modes 88 Specifications 95 Troubleshooting 93 119

 

 

Users Guide Learn how to use your Fujitsu STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC Mode demploi Dcouvrez comment 

utiliser votre PC Tablette

STYLISTIC Fujitsu Q550 Users Guide Learn how to use your Fujitsu STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC Copyright and Trademark Information Fujitsu America, Inc.has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document. Because ongoing development efforts are made to continually improve the capabilities of our products, however, the data contained herein represents Fujitsu design objectives and is provided for comparative purposes; actual results may vary based on a variety of factors. This product data does not constitute a warranty. Specifications are subject to change without knowledge. Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited; STYLISTIC is a registered trademark of Fujitsu America, Incorporated. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The SD Logo is is registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office and with other trademark offices around the world by SD-3C, LLC. Intel, Intel Core, and Intel Atom are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. OmniPass is a trademark of Softex, Inc. Broadcom is a registered trademark of Broadcom Corporation.smartcard Norton Internet Security is a trademark of Symantec Corporation in the United States and other countries. AirPrime is a trademark of Sierra Wireless Inc. Gobi3000 is a trademark of Qualcomm Inc. Nuance and XT9 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Nuance Communications, Incorporated. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Ralink is a registered trademark of Ralink Technology Corporation. Bluetooth and the Bluetooth logo are registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Realtek is a trademark of Realtek Semiconductor Corp. Wi-Fi is a trademark of the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA). All other products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Copyright 2011 Fujitsu America, Incorporated. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or translated, without the prior written consent of Fujitsu America, Incorporated. No part of this publication may be stored or transmitted in any electronic form without the prior consent of Fujitsu America, Incorporated. B6FJ-5861-02ENZ0-00 USER GUIDE FOR WIRELESS BROADBAND CONNECTION IF YOU HAVE THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS WAN (WWAN) DEVICE INSTALLED IN YOUR TABLET PC, THE WWAN USERS GUIDE IS LOCATED AT: 

http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/mobile/support_notices PLEASE CLICK 3G MINI-CARD GOBI3000 REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION TO OPEN THE FULL USER GUIDE CONTAINING WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH RF SAFETY WHEN USING THE WWAN DEVICE. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to FCC Part 15 Responsible Party Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Declares that product:

Fujitsu America, Incorporated 1250 E. Arques Avenue, Sunnyvale, CA 94085

(408) 746-6000 Base Model Configuration: STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operations are subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, (2) This device must accept any interference received, 

including interference that may cause undesired operation. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This unit requires an AC adapter to operate. Use only UL Listed I.T.E. Class II Adapters with an output rating of 19 VDC, with a current of 2.1A (40 W). AC adapter output polarity:

When using your tablet PC, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:

CAUTION: HOT SURFACE: THE BOTTOM OF THIS COMPUTER CAN BECOME HOT WHEN USED FOR LONG PERIODS OF TIME. WHEN USING THIS DEVICE, TAKE CAUTION TO LIMIT LONG TERM OR CONTINUOUS USE WHILE RESTING IT ON EXPOSED SKIN, SUCH AS THE LAP. Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool.

Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. For Authorized Repair Technicians Only SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF LITHIUM (CLOCK) BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTION. FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE AND RATING FUSE. Recycling your battery Over time, the batteries that run your mobile computer will begin to hold a charge for a shorter amount of time; this is a natural occurrence for all batteries. When this occurs, you may want to replace the battery with a fresh one*. If you replace it, it is important that you dispose of the old battery properly because batteries contain materials that could cause environmental damage if disposed of improperly. Fujitsu is very concerned with environmental protection, and has enlisted the services of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation (RBRC)**, a non-profit public service organization dedicated to protecting our environment by recycling old batteries at no cost to you. RBRC has drop-off points at tens of thousands of locations throughout the United States and Canada. To find the location nearest you, go to www.RBRC.org or call 1-800-822-8837.

If there are no convenient RBRC locations near you, you can also go to the EIA Consumer Education Initiative website (http://EIAE.org/) and search for a convenient disposal location. Remember protecting the environment is a cooperative effort, and you should make every effort to protect it for current and future generations.

* To order a new battery for your Fujitsu mobile computer, go to the Fujitsu shopping site at www.shopfujitsu.com in the US or www.fujitsu.ca/products/notebooks in Canada.

** RBRC is an independent third party to which Fujitsu provides funding for battery recycling; RBRC is in no way affiliated with Fujitsu. Contents Preface About This Guide . 11 Conventions Used in the Guide . 11 Fujitsu Contact Information . 12 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Tablet PC Overview . 13 Locating the Connectors and Controls . 14 Front Features. 14 Back Features . 16 Status Indicator Panel . 18 Display Panel . 20 Adjusting Display Panel Brightness. 20 Active Digitizer/Touchscreen. 22 Active Digitizer Display. 22 Using the Capacitive Touchscreen . 26 Accessing the OnScreen TouchPad . 27 Using the Nuance SoftKeyboard . 28 Caring for the Pen. 28 Tablet PC Buttons. 31 Chapter 2 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Power Sources . 33 Connecting the Power Adapters . 33 Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC . 35 Power On . 35 Boot Sequence . 36 Hard Disk Drive Passwords . 37 BIOS Setup Utility . 37 Booting the System. 38 Starting Windows the first time . 38 Registering Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC with Fujitsu . 39 Installing ClickMe!. 40 Power Management. 41 Power/Suspend/Resume Switch . 41 Sleep Mode . 41 Hibernation Feature . 43 Windows Power Management . 43 Restarting the System . 43 Powering Off . 44

. 44 User-Installable Features Lithium Polymer Battery . 45 Recharging the Batteries. 46 Replacing the Battery . 48 Secure Digital Cards . 51 Installing SD Cards. 51 Removing an SD Card . 52 7 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Your Tablet PC Troubleshooting. 53 Identifying the Problem . 53 Specific Problems . 55 Power On Self Test Messages . 62 Restoring Your Pre-installed Software . 63 Drivers and Applications Restore Disc. 63 Care and Maintenance Caring for your Tablet PC . 65 Cleaning your Tablet PC . 66 Storing your Tablet PC . 67 Traveling with your Tablet PC . 68 Batteries . 68 Media Care . 69 Secure Digital Cards. 70 System Specifications Specifications . 71 Configuration Label . 71 Microprocessor . 72 Chipset . 72 Memory. 72 Video. 72 Audio . 73 Mass Storage Device Options. 73 Communications. 73 Security Features . 73 Device Ports . 74 Power . 74 8 Dimensions and Weight . 75 Environmental Requirements . 75 Popular Accessories . 75 Included Software. 75 Learning About Your Software . 76 Regulatory Information . 78 Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN . 82 Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document. 82 Characteristics of the WLAN Device . 82 Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device . 83 Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device . 85 Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch . 86 Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar. 86 Activating the WLAN Device . 86 Configuring the Wireless LAN. 87 Configuring the WLAN . 87 Connection to the network . 87 Troubleshooting the WLAN. 88 Troubleshooting . 88 WLAN Specifications . 90 Specifications . 90 Using the Bluetooth Device. 92 What is Bluetooth . 92 Where to Find Information About Bluetooth . 92 9 Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device . 94 Getting Started . 95 Installing OmniPass . 95 User Enrollment . 97 Using OmniPass . 101 Configuring OmniPass . 106 OmniPass Control Center . 108 Troubleshooting . 110 Appendix C: FujitsuHL User Guide FujitsuHL Instructions . 112 Starting FujitsuHL . 112 Closing FujitsuHL . 113 About FujitsuHL. 113 Home Launcher . 114 Gadget Screen. 116 Launcher Screen . 118 Photo Launcher. 119 Documents Launcher . 120 Camera Tool . 121 Photo Viewer . 123 Index . 125 10 Preface About This Guide The STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC is a high-performance pen-based computer that has been designed to support MicrosoftWindows 7 Professional edition. This manual explains how to operate your Tablet PC hardware and built-in system software. The STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC is a completely self-contained unit with a 10.1 WXGA LED backlit IPS display with 160 degree vertical and horizontal viewing angles. It has a powerful interface that enables it to support a variety of optional features. Conventions Used in the Guide Pages with additional information about a specific topic are cross-referenced within the text. On screen buttons or menu items appear in bold. Example: Click OK to restart your Tablet PC. THE INFORMATION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT WILL ENHANCE YOUR UNDERSTANDING OF THE SUBJECT MATERIAL. THE CAUTION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT IS IMPORTANT TO THE SAFE OPERATION OF YOUR COMPUTER, OR TO THE INTEGRITY OF YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL CAUTION INFORMATION CAREFULLY. 11 THE WARNING ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO EITHER YOU, YOUR TABLET PC, OR YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL WARNING INFORMATION CAREFULLY. Fujitsu Contact Information Service and Support You can contact Fujitsu Service and Support in the following ways:

Toll free: 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487)

Website: http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:

Product name

Product configuration and serial numbers

Purchase date

Conditions under which the problem occurred

Any error messages that have occurred

Type of device connected, if any Fujitsu Shopping Online You can go directly to the online by going to the website at: www.shopfujitsu.com. Limited Warranty Your STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC is backed by a Fujitsu International Limited Warranty. Check the service kit that came with your tablet PC for the Limited Warranty period and terms and conditions. 12 - About This Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your Tablet PC Overview The STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC is a high-performance pen-based computer that has been designed to support Microsoft Windows7 Professional edition. This chapter provides an overview of the STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC and its many features. Figure 1. STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC 13 Locating the Connectors and Controls Features and controls that you use to operate your Tablet PC are outlined below and illustrated in Figures 2 and 3. Details on using these features and controls are provided later in this manual. Front Web Camera Display Docking Cradle Connector Speaker DC Input Connector Power/Suspend/

Resume Switch Figure 2. STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC Features (Bottom, Right View) Pen Tether Attachment Point Wireless Device Switch Application Buttons Status Indicators Front Features Front Web Camera The front-facing VGA web camera allows you to take pictures of yourself to send over the internet. For information on using the microphone and web cam, see the documentation associated with the FujitsuHL application. 14 - Locating the Connectors and Controls Display The 10.1 Wide XGA display offers 160 degree vertical and horizontal viewing angles. Pen Tether Attachment Point The pen tether attachment point is used to connect your pen -- or stylus -- to the system to prevent its loss. Wireless Device On/Off switch The wireless device on/off switch is used to turn the optional WLAN, WWAN, and Bluetooth devices on and off. Switching the device off when not in use will help to extend battery life. Application Buttons Allow you to quickly launch pre-defined applications and utilities, rotate your screen, and perform Ctl-

Alt-Del by pressing a button. See Tablet PC Buttons on page 31. System Status Indicators Indicate the operational status of the Tablet PC power and battery charge level. See Status Indicator Panel on page 18. Power/Suspend/Resume Switch Allows you to turn on, off, sleep, resume, hibernate or wake the Tablet PC in order to optimize battery life. See Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC on page 35. DC input connector:

Allows you to connect the AC adapter or auto adapter. Speaker The speaker allows you to hear sound from the system. Docking Cradle Connector Allows you to connect the optional STYLISTIC Docking Cradle. 15 - Locating the Connectors and Controls Battery Release Latches Spacer Bar* (approximate location) Rear Web Camera SD Card Slot Fingerprint Sensor Built-in Microphone USB 2.0 Port SmartCard Slot Line Out/

Headphone Jack Removable Battery HDMI Port

* NOTE: Models that have a Wireless WAN unit installed have a spacer bar attached to the back of the unit in the approximate location of the dotted line in the illustration above. Do not remove the spacer bar. Built-in Microphone Figure 3. STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC Features (Back View) Back Features Battery Release Latches Used to release the removable battery. Rear Web Camera The 1.3 megapixel rear web camera allows you to take pictures of objects in front of you for sharing over the internet. For information on using the camera, see the documentation associated with the FujitsuHL application. 16 - Locating the Connectors and Controls SD Card Slot The Secure Digital (SD) card slot allows you to insert a flash memory card for data storage. Flash memory cards allow you to transfer data to and from a variety of different digital devices. See Secure Digital Cards on page 51. Fingerprint Sensor The fingerprint sensor allows you to start your system by swiping your finger over the sensor. See Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device on page 94. Built-in Microphones The built-in microphones allow you to input analog audio. USB 2.0 port Allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus-compliant devices (compliant with USB Standard Revision 2.0) to the Tablet PC. Four additional USB ports are located on the optional STYLISTIC Docking Cradle. Smart Card Slot The dedicated Smart Card slot allows you to insert a Smart Card on which you can store such data as medical information or electronic cash. Line Out/Headphone Jack Allows you to connect a set of stereo headphones. HDMI Port The HDMI port is used to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as a high-

definition television or AV receiver). Removable Lithium Polymer Battery Can be removed and replaced with a charged battery. See Lithium Polymer Battery on page 45. 17 - Locating the Connectors and Controls Status Indicator Panel Icons appear under each of the system status LEDs in the status display indicating the status of system power and battery charge status. The location of icons in the Status display is shown in Figure 4. Table 1 explains how the LEDs associated with the individual icons are displayed, and describes what the variations of that display indicate. (If an icon is not displayed, it indicates that the related system function is off or inactive. Power Charge/

DC in Figure 4. Status Display Icons 18 - Status Indicator Panel Table 1. Status Display Conditions In the following table, a blinking LED flashes at the rate of once per second; an LED that is blinking, slow flashes at the rate of one second on, five seconds off. Icon Power Charge/DC In Mode/State

On State

Idle Mode

Sleep

Off State

Hibernate

On State

Idle Mode

Sleep

Hibernate

Off State LED State Blue, continuous Blue, blinking Off Green Orange Remarks The system is powered on and ready for use. The system has suspended and saved active settings to RAM. The system has suspended and saved settings and data to the hard disk drive. AC adapter and battery are available and charged battery level is 50-100%. AC adapter and battery are available and charged battery level is less than 50%. Green, blinking Tablet PC is in Suspend mode, AC adapter and battery are available and charged battery level is 50-100%. Tablet PC is in Suspend mode, AC adapter and battery are available and charged battery level is less than 50%. The AC Adapter is not available. Orange, blinking Off 19 - Status Indicator Panel Display Panel Figure 5. Tablet PC Display Panel Your STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC contains an LCD display panel that is backlit for easier viewing in bright environments. The slate design of your Tablet PC allows you to easily hold the unit and rotate it 90o, 180o, or 270o in either direction. This display is used as a tablet, much as you would a pad of paper. Adjusting Display Panel Brightness To adjust brightness with the power management utility:

Click Start -> Control Panel. In View by:, select one of the icon views. Select Display, then click Adjust brightness in the left pane. Under Select a power plan, select the plan settings you want to use. Drag Screen brightness: bar (at the bottom of the window) to the left or right, depending on your preference. 20 - Display Panel Holding the Tablet PC When it is docked, the STYLISTIC Q550 can be used in any of four orientations, depending upon how you would like to use it. There are primary and secondary landscape orientations and primary and secondary portrait orientations. Note that when the system is undocked, the secondary landscape orientation is non-functional. Primary Landscape Orientation Secondary Portrait Orientation Secondary* Landscape Orientation

*Functional when docked only. When undocked, this is non-

functional Primary Portrait Orientation 21 - Display Panel Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Active Digitizer Display The integrated active digitizer allows you to use the included stylus (also called a pen) as a pointing device. (For detailed information about caring for your stylus, go to Caring for the Pen on page 28.) You can use the stylus to click, double-click, drag items and icons, write text, or to draw like a pen or pencil in applications that support this behavior, such as drawing or painting programs. See the documentation that came with your application for details. Figure 6. Using the Active Digitizer Display

DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING OR WRITING ON THE SCREEN WITH THE STYLUS. EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR ACTIVE DIGITIZER.

TO PURCHASE ADDITIONAL OR REPLACEMENT STYLUSES, VISIT THE FUJITSU ACCESSORIES WEBSITE AT: WWW.SHOPFUJITSU.COM. 22 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Clicking on Active Digitizer Display To left-click, touch the object you wish to select and then lift the stylus tip immediately. Figure 7. Clicking on the Active Digitizer Display Figure 8. Right-clicking Active Digitizer Right-Clicking on Active Digitizer Right-click can be accomplished by holding the front of the toggle button down while tapping on the screen. To change the settings for the right-

click feature, go to Start -> Control Panel -> Pen and Touch. In the Pen Options tab, select Press and Hold then click the [Settings] button. 23 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Double-Clicking To double-click, touch the item twice, and then immediately remove the stylus tip. Figure 9. Double-clicking the Display Dragging Dragging means moving an item with the stylus by touching the screen, moving and then lifting the stylus. To drag, touch the Active Digitizer Display with your stylus on the item you wish to move. While continuing to touch the screen with the stylus, drag the item to its new location by moving the stylus across the screen, and then lifting the stylus to release it. Figure 10. Dragging on the Display 24 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Calibrating the Display In order to ensure accurate tracking between the stylus and cursor, you must run the Calibration Utility before you use the system for the first time, or after you change the display resolution. To run the calibration utility:

1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Double-click the Tablet PC Settings icon and select the Display tab 3 Click the [Calibrate] button, then select whether you want to calibrate pen input or touch input. 4 Adjust the display of your Tablet PC to a comfortable angle and find the (+) symbol in the upper-left corner of the display. DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING ON THE SCREEN DURING CALIBRATION. USE OF EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR TOUCH PANEL. 5 Using the stylus or your finger (depending upon which type of input you are calibrating), firmly touch the screen directly on the (+) symbol. Lift the stylus from the screen and the target will move to a different location on the screen. 6 Repeat step 5 until you have selected all of the (+) symbols. 7 Once you have selected all the symbols, press the [OK] button. 8 Touch the stylus to various points on the screen to verify that the screen is correctly calibrated. If you are not satisfied with the screens calibration, press the [Calibrate]) button to begin again. 25 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Using the Capacitive Touchscreen Certain configurations of this Tablet PC have an optional dual digitizer that allows you to use either the stylus or your finger(s) as a pointing device. This type of display also allows you to use gestures to perform such actions as scroll, zoom, and rotate.

GESTURE SUPPORT IS DETERMINED BY THE APPLICATION IN USE.

THE STYLUS TAKES PRECEDENCE OVER FINGER TOUCH. IF THE STYLUS IS WITHIN ACTIVE RANGE OF THE SCREEN, FINGER TOUCH WILL BE DISABLED.

WHEN ONE FINGER IS USED ON THE TOUCHSCREEN, IT BEHAVES IN THE SAME MANNER AS A STYLUS. Right-clicking the touchscreen To perform a right-click action using two fingers, press the first finger at the location you want to perform a right-click, then quickly tap and release the second finger on the screen. Gesture Mode 

To initiate gesture mode, two fingers must touch the screen within 200 ms of each other. If the second finger touches the screen after 200 ms has elapsed, the second finger is ignored. If more than two fingers touch the screen in that time, Advanced Gesture Mode is activated instead. When Gesture Mode is activated, no cursor movement is sent to the system. When both fingers are removed, Gesture mode ends. When a third finger is added, gesture mode ends and Advanced gesture mode is activated. Note that if a gesture cant be recognized, no action is taken. In that case, remove both fingers from the screen and try again. Scrolling Gesture To scroll through long documents or on a web page, place both fingers on the screen (one finger quickly followed by the second). If at least one finger has moved at least 3 mm, a scroll is considered. If both fingers are moving in the same direction and parallel (given a tolerance of 5 mm), Scroll Mode is activated. If one finger is stationary, it is not considered a scroll. If either finger is lifted, Scroll Mode is canceled. Zoom Gesture The zoom gesture is especially helpful when viewing pictures. To zoom in, place two fingers on the item you want to enlarge (one finger quickly followed by the second), then spread them away from each other. 26 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen If at least one finger has moved at least 10 mm, a zoom event is considered. If the distance between the fingers has changed by at least 10 mm, and both fingers have stayed on approximately the same line, Zoom Mode is entered. If either finger strays more than 10 mm from the "zoom line" created when the fingers first made contact, the zoom is canceled. To zoom out, place two fingers on the item you want to reduce (one finger quickly followed by the second), then move them towards each other. Rotate Gesture To change the orientation of an object on the screen, place two fingers on the image you want to rotate

(one finger quickly followed by the second), then move them in opposite directions (as if you were turning a knob). The direction the item turns is dependant upon the direction you move your fingers. If at least one finger moves at least 12 mm, a rotate is considered. If one finger is stationary (moving less than 5 mm in any direction), and the other is moving, a rotate is considered. If the fingers begin moving in the same direction, the rotation is canceled. If the distance between the fingers changes by more than 10 mm, the rotation is canceled. Accessing the OnScreen TouchPad Your tablet has a handy on-screen touchpad that offers a variety of helpful functions. Features of the OnScreen TouchPad include:

Virtual Mouse Emulator: The Virtual Mouse Emulator works in much the same manner as a hardware mouse. With the virtual mouse, you can scroll, drag, and click, as well as perform

[Ctl]+[Click] and [Shift]+[Click] actions.

Application Launch/Key Macro: This window provides access to five pages, each of which can contain up to twenty buttons. Each button can be programmed to open an application, a folder, document, or key (such as [Esc], [ Alt+X] and [Page Up]).

Digital Keyboard: This window provides a soft keyboard for use in mathematical procedures. It works in much the same way as the Windows standard calculator. To access the OnScreen TouchPad, go to the Start Menu > All Programs > Fujitsu OnScreen TouchPad. To learn more about the utility, click on Usage and Help. 27 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Using the Nuance SoftKeyboard For general information about using the Nuance SoftKeyboard, please refer to your Getting Started Guide that came with the system. If you have questions about the Nuance SoftKeyboard, or you would like to learn more, click the Help icon (it looks like a question mark) in the Nuance taskbar. Caring for the Pen

ONLY USE THE PEN PROVIDED WITH YOUR TABLET PC. DO NOT USE SUBSTITUTE PEN TIPS THAT WERE NOT SPECIALLY DESIGNED FOR YOUR TABLET PC. REPLACE THE STYLUS TIP IF IT IS WORN. THE WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER A SCRATCHED SCREEN.

WHILE WRITING, DO NOT TO SCRATCH THE SURFACE OF THE DISPLAY (E.G., WITH A WRISTWATCH OR BRACELET). THE PEN OF YOUR TABLET PC IS AN ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT WHICH CAN BE DAMAGED IF USED INCORRECTLY. HANDLE THE PEN WITH CARE. THE FOLLOWING LIST CONTAINS GUIDELINES FOR PROPER PEN HANDLING:

DO NOT GESTURE WITH THE PEN OR USE IT AS A POINTER.

NEVER USE THE PEN ON ANY OTHER SURFACE THAN THE SCREEN OF YOUR TABLET PC.

DO NOT TRY TO TURN THE THUMB GRIP ON THE PEN.

NEVER STORE THE PEN WITH THE TIP BEARING THE WEIGHT OF THE PEN. IF THE PEN IS STORED WITH THE TIP POINTING DOWN, THIS MAY HAVE AN ADVERSE EFFECT ON THE PEN MECHANISM (PARTICULARLY UNDER HIGH TEMPERATURES). IN THIS CASE THE PEN TIP MAY REACT AS THOUGH IT IS CONSTANTLY BEING PRESSED DOWN.

THE PEN CAN BE INFLUENCED BY ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS (CURSOR QUIVERS OR JUMPS). THERE MAY BE A FEW AREAS ON THE SCREEN WHERE THE CURSOR QUIVERS SLIGHTLY IN SPITE OF PRESSING THE PEN DOWN FIRMLY. Changing the Pen Settings There are a few changes you can make to your pen settings in order to make it more suitable to your needs

(such as changing the pressure sensitivity). To do so, go to Start > Control Panel and select one of the icon views from the View by: dropdown. Click on the Pen and Touch icon to open the window from which you can change a variety of pen settings. 28 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Changing the Pen Battery Pen Cap

DO NOT REMOVE THE TIP OF THE PEN TO REPLACE THE

THERE IS A RISK OF EXPLOSION IF THE BATTERY IS BATTERY; REMOVE ONLY THE CAP ON THE TOP OF THE PEN. REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES IN ACCORDANCE WITH LOCAL INSTRUCTIONS. The pen contains a AAAA-battery. Before proceeding, be sure to have a new battery available. 1 Remove the rear Pen Cap (Figure 11). 2 Remove the battery from the pen barrel. 3 Insert the new battery into the pen barrel in the same orientation as the one that was removed. 4 Close the rear Pen Cap. Replacing the Pen Tip With use, the pen tip may become worn or may pick up foreign particles that can scratch the screen. A damaged or worn tip may not move freely, causing unpredictable results when using the pen. If a problem like this should occur, you should replace the pen tip. 1 Pull the tip from the barrel. 2 Using one of the new tips that were supplied with your pen, insert the pointed end of the tip into the barrel and push it in firmly until it is in place 29 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen AAAA-battery Pen Barrel Figure 11. Replacing the Battery Pen Tip Figure 12. Replacing the Pen Tip Installing a Pen Tether To prevent dropping or losing your pen, you should attach it to your system using the pen tether that is included with the system. To attach the pen tether to your Tablet PC, perform the following steps:

1 Attach the end of the pen tether with the smaller loop to your pen. To do so, push the end of the tether under the slot on the top of the pen, then thread the opposite end of the tether through the loop. 2 Attach the end of the pen tether with the larger loop to the attachment point on the right side of your tablet. To do so, insert the end of the pen tether through the attachment point, then feed the pen through the large loop in the tether. Figure 13. Installing a Pen Tether 30 - Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Tablet PC Buttons The three Tablet PC buttons are located on the right-hand side of a horizontally-

oriented system. Two of the buttons have secondary functions. The secondary functions are activated by pressing and holding the button. Keyboard Button Ctl-Alt-Del Rotation Button Figure 14. Application buttons CTL-ALT-DEL IS THE ONLY APPLICATION BUTTON THAT CAN BE USED WHILE THE SYSTEM IS LOGGING ON OR WHEN THE SYSTEM IS LOCKED (I.E., WHEN YOU HAVE THE LOGON OR COMPUTER LOCKED WINDOW SHOWING ON YOUR DESKTOP). 31 - Tablet PC Buttons Button Icon and Name Primary Function

(Press) Secondary Function

(Press and Hold) Press at Splash Screen*

In BIOS Setup Utility Description Launch Tablet PC Input Panel Launch FujitsuHL Boot Menu Enter Keyboard Button Screen Rotate Rotation Button Enable/

Disable Auto Rotate BIOS Setup Utility Down Ctrl + Alt + Del None Application Menu Up Ctl-Alt-Del Button Pressing the Keyboard button launches the Tablet PC Input Panel. Pressing and holding the button launches the FujitsuHL utility that provides shortcuts to a variety of commonly accessed tools and tasks, including the web camera application. If you press the Keyboard button while the Fujitsu logo appears during system boot, the Boot Menu will open. While you are in the BIOS Setup utility, this button can be used as an [Enter] key. When you press the Rotate button, the system screen orientation changes from landscape

(horizontal) to portrait (vertical) or from portrait to landscape. When you would like to use the Tablet PC as an eBook, for example, you would use the portrait orientation, when accessing spreadsheets, you would more typically use a landscape orientation. Pressing and holding the button enables and disables the Auto Rotate function. If you press the Rotation button while the Fujitsu logo appears during system boot, the BIOS Setup Utility will open. While you are in the BIOS Setup utility, this button can be used as a Down key Pressing the Ctl-Alt-Del button for approximately one second causes it to act as if Ctl-Alt-Del had actually been entered from a keyboard. If you press the Ctrl+Alt+Del button while the Fujitsu logo appears during system boot, the Application Menu will appear. While you are in the BIOS Setup utility, this button can be used as an Up key.

* Press at Splash Screenrefers to the action that occurs when you press the button when the Fujitsu logo appears when you first start up the system. 32 - Tablet PC Buttons Chapter 2 Getting Started with Your Tablet PC Power Sources Your Fujitsu STYLISTIC Tablet PC has three possible power sources: a primary Lithium Polymer battery, an AC adapter or an optional Auto/Airline adapter. Connecting the Power Adapters The AC adapter or optional Auto/Airline adapter provides power for operating your Tablet PC and charging the batteries. Connecting the AC Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack of your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. 2 Plug the AC adapter into an AC electrical outlet. Connecting the Optional Auto/Airline Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack on your Tablet PC. 2 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the cigarette lighter of an automobile, or, 3 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the DC power jack on an airplane seat. 33 AC Adapter DC Power Jack Figure 15. Connecting the AC Adapter Switching from AC Adapter Power or the Auto/Airline Adapter to Battery Power 1 Be sure that you have at least one charged battery installed. 2 Remove the AC adapter or the Auto/Airline adapter. THE LITHIUM POLYMER BATTERY IS NOT CHARGED UPON PURCHASE. INITIALLY, YOU WILL NEED TO CONNECT EITHER THE AC ADAPTER OR THE AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER TO USE YOUR TABLET PC. 34 - Power Sources Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC Power On Power/Suspend/Resume Switch The Power/Suspend/Resume switch is used to turn on your STYLISTIC Tablet PC from its off state. Once you have connected your AC adapter or charged the internal Lithium Polymer battery, you can power on your Tablet PC. WHEN YOU TURN ON YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC BE SURE YOU HAVE A POWER SOURCE. THIS MEANS THAT AT LEAST ONE BATTERY IS INSTALLED AND CHARGED, OR THAT THE AC OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER IS CONNECTED AND HAS POWER. To turn on your STYLISTIC Tablet PC from its off state, slide the Power/Suspend/Resume switch, located on the bottom edge of the right side (when the system is held horizontally). When you are done working you can either leave your Tablet PC in Suspend mode or you can turn it off. See Sleep Mode on page 41 and Powering Off on page 44. 

Figure 16. Power/Suspend/Resume Switch 35 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC When you power on your STYLISTIC, it will perform a Power On Self Test (POST) to check the internal parts and configuration for correct functionality. If a fault is found, your STYLISTIC Tablet PC will emit an audio warning and/or an error message will be displayed. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 62. Depending on the nature of the problem, you may be able to continue by starting the operating system or by entering the BIOS setup utility and revising the settings. After satisfactory completion of the POST, your Tablet PC will load your operating system. NEVER TURN OFF YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC DURING THE POWER ON SELF TEST (POST) OR IT WILL CAUSE AN ERROR MESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED WHEN YOU TURN YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC ON THE NEXT TIME. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 62. Boot Sequence The procedure for starting-up your Tablet PC is termed the Bootup sequence and involves your Tablet PCs BIOS. When your STYLISTIC Tablet PC is first turned on, the main system memory is empty, and it needs to find instructions to start up your Tablet PC. This information is in the BIOS program. Each time you power up or restart your Tablet PC, it goes through a boot sequence which displays a Fujitsu logo until your operating system is loaded. During booting, your Tablet PC is performing a standard boot sequence including a Power On Self Test (POST). When the boot sequence is completed without a failure and without a request for the BIOS Setup Utility, the system displays the operating systems opening screen. The boot sequence is executed when:

You turn on the power to your STYLISTIC Tablet PC.

You restart your Tablet PC from the Windows Shut Down dialog box.

The software initiates a system restart. Example: When you install a new application. 36 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC Hard Disk Drive Passwords To provide additional security for your data, you can assign passwords to your hard disk drive(s). This feature is managed in the system BIOS Setup Utility. See BIOS Setup Utility below for information about accessing the utility. REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORDS. IF YOU SET AND FORGET YOUR USER AND MASTER HARD DISK PASSWORDS, FUJITSU WILL NOT BE ABLE TO RESET IT. YOU MAY LOSE DATA AND HAVE TO REPLACE YOUR SYSTEM BOARD OR HARD DISK DRIVE. BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS Setup Utility is a program that sets up the operating environment for your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. Your BIOS is set at the factory for normal operating conditions, therefore there is no need to set or change the BIOS environment to operate your Tablet PC. The BIOS Setup Utility configures:

Device control feature parameters, such as changing I/O addresses and boot devices.

System Data Security feature parameters, such as passwords. Entering the BIOS Setup Utility To enter the setup utility, do the following:

1 Turn on or restart your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. 2 To enter the BIOS Setup Utility, either press the Rotation button (or press the [F2] key if you have an external keyboard) when the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. This will open the main menu of the BIOS Setup Utility with the current settings displayed. 3 Press the [RIGHT ARROW] or [LEFT ARROW] key to scroll through the other setup menus to review or alter the current settings. 37 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC BIOS Guide A guide to your Tablet PCs BIOS is available online. Please visit our service and support website at http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support, then select Users Guides under Online Support. Select your Product, Series, and Model, then click [Go]. Under the Manuals tab, select the BIOS Guide. Booting the System We strongly recommend that you not attach any external devices until you have gone through the initial power on sequence. When you turn on your Tablet PC for the first time, it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen. If you do nothing the system will load the operating system, and then the Windows Welcome will begin. Starting Windows the first time IMPORTANT: DURING THE SETUP PROCEDURE, DO NOT DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY, PRESS ANY BUTTONS, OR USE ANY PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUCH AS A MOUSE OR KEYBOARD. In order to ensure that you receive the most benefits from the Windows operating system, it should be registered the first time you use it. 1 First of all, you will need to read and accept the End User License Agreements (EULAs).

IF YOU REJECT THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENTS YOU WILL BE ASKED TO REVIEW THE LICENSE AGREEMENTS FOR INFORMATION ON RETURNING WINDOWS OR TO SHUT DOWN YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC.

YOU CANNOT USE YOUR TABLET PC UNTIL YOU HAVE ACCEPTED THE LICENSE AGREEMENTS. IF YOU STOP THE PROCESS YOUR TABLET PC WILL RETURN TO THE BEGINNING OF THE WINDOWS WELCOME PROCESS, EVEN IF YOU SHUT YOUR TABLET PC DOWN AND START IT UP AGAIN. 38 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC 2 You will be prompted to enter your User Name and Password and you will be given a chance to select an icon for your account. 3 The next screen asks for a Computer Name. 4 You will next see a "Help protect Windows automatically screen in which the default choice is "Use recommended settings. The other two choices are "Install important updates only" and "Ask me later". Select from the three choices. 5 On the next screen set your time and date settings. 6 You will next see the "Select your computer's current location" screen. Make your selection from Home, Work

(Default), and Public location. 7 The "Thank you" screen follows along with several other screens while Windows checks the system performance. 8 Windows will then boot up for the first time. As noted above, the first time you initialize your system, the screen will be blank for approximately two minutes. This is normal. During this period, do not disconnect the power supply, press any buttons, or use any peripheral devices such as mouse or keyboard. Registering Windows with Microsoft To register your copy of Windows, be sure to go to the Microsoft's website at:

http://windows.microsoft.com/en-US/windows7/help/register. Registering Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC with Fujitsu You can register your STYLISTIC by going to our website at: http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/. You will need to be set up with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to register online. 39 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC

Installing ClickMe!

ClickMe!

BEFORE INSTALLING THE CLICKME! UTILITY, BE SURE THE WIRELESS LAN SWITCH IS TURNED ON. The first time you boot up your system, you will see a Primary Settings for the PC window. This window explains the installations which will be performed by the Click Me! utility. If you click [Execute], ClickMe! will begin installing. If after clicking the button you receive a User Account Control window, you will be asked for your permission to continue. Click [Continue] to continue. If you cancel the operation, the ClickMe! icon will appear on your desktop for later installation. THERE MAY BE SOME THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS THAT DO NOT GET INSTALLED USING THE CLICKME!

UTILITY. FOR MORE INFORMATION, REFER TO YOUR GETTING STARTED GUIDE. 40 - Starting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC Power Management Your Fujitsu STYLISTIC Tablet PC has many options and features for conserving battery power. Some of these features are automatic and need no user intervention. However, others depend on the parameters you set to best suit your operating conditions, such as those for the display brightness. Internal power management for your Tablet PC may be controlled from settings made in your operating system, pre-

bundled power management application, or from settings made in BIOS setup utility. Besides the options available for conserving battery power, there are also some things that you can do to prevent your battery from running down as quickly. For example, you can create an appropriate power saving profile, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode when it is not performing an operation, and you can limit the use of high power devices. As with all mobile, battery powered computers, there is a trade-off between performance and power savings. Power/Suspend/Resume Switch When your Tablet PC is active, the Power/Suspend/Resume switch can be used to manually put the Tablet PC into Sleep mode. Push the Power/Suspend/Resume switch when the Tablet PC is active, but not actively accessing anything, and immediately release the button. If your Tablet PC is suspended, pushing the Power/Suspend/Resume switch returns it to active operation. You can tell whether the system is Suspended by looking at the Power indicator. If the indicator is visible and not flashing, your Tablet PC is fully operational. If the indicator is visible and flashing, the Tablet PC is in Sleep mode. If the indicator is not visible, the power is off or your Tablet PC is in Hibernation mode. Sleep Mode Sleep mode in Windows saves the contents of your system memory during periods of inactivity by maintaining power to critical parts. This mode turns off the CPU, display, hard drive, and all other internal components except those necessary to maintain system memory and for restarting. Your Tablet PC can be put in sleep mode by:

Pressing the Power/Suspend/Resume switch when your system is turned on. 41 - Power Management

Selecting Sleep after clicking [Start] then clicking the small arrow at the bottom right of the window.

Timing out from lack of activity.

Allowing the battery to reach the Dead Battery Warning condition. Your Tablet PCs system memory typically stores the file on which you are working, open application information, and any other data required to support operations in progress. When you resume operation from Sleep mode, your Tablet PC will return to the point where it left off. You must use the Power/Suspend/Resume switch to resume operation, and there must be an adequate power source available, or your Tablet PC will not resume.

IF RUNNING YOUR TABLET PC ON BATTERY POWER, BE AWARE THAT THE BATTERY CONTINUES TO DISCHARGE WHILE YOUR TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, THOUGH NOT AS QUICKLY AS WHEN FULLY OPERATIONAL.

DISABLING THE POWER/SUSPEND/RESUME SWITCH PREVENTS IT FROM BEING USED TO PUT THE TABLET PC INTO SLEEP OR HIBERNATION MODE. THE BUTTON RESUME FUNCTION CANNOT BE DISABLED.

IF YOUR TABLET PC IS ACTIVELY ACCESSING INFORMATION WHEN YOU ENTER THE SLEEP OR HIBERNATION MODE, CHANGES TO OPEN FILES ARE NOT LOST. THE FILES ARE LEFT OPEN AND MEMORY IS KEPT ACTIVE DURING SLEEP MODE OR THE MEMORY IS TRANSFERRED TO THE INTERNAL HARD DRIVE DURING HIBERNATION MODE.

THE MAIN ADVANTAGE OF USING HIBERNATION IS THAT POWER IS NOT REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN YOUR DATA. THIS IS PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT IF YOU WILL BE LEAVING YOUR TABLET PC IN A SUSPENDED STATE FOR A PROLONGED PERIOD OF TIME. THE DRAWBACK OF USING HIBERNATION MODE IS THAT IT LENGTHENS THE POWER DOWN AND POWER UP SEQUENCES AND RESETS PERIPHERAL DEVICES. 42 - Power Management Hibernation Feature The Hibernation feature saves the contents of your Tablet PCs system memory to the hard drive as a part of the Suspend/Resume mode. Hibernation is enabled by default. Defining Power Button Action To determine what occurs when the power button is pressed, follow these steps:

1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, then select the Power Options icon. 2 Select Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing the lid does, then make your selections

(Do Nothing, Sleep, Hibernate, or Shut Down). Windows Power Management The Power Options icon located in the Windows Control Panel allows you to configure some of the power management settings. For example, you can use the Power Options to set the timeout values for turning off the display and hard disks whether you are running the Tablet PC on battery power or one of the adapters. Restarting the System If your system is on and you need to restart it, be sure that you use the following procedure. 1 Click the [Start] button, and then move the mouse over the small arrow at the bottom right of the right-hand pane. 2 Select Restart from the list. TURNING OFF YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC WITHOUT EXITING WINDOWS OR TURNING ON YOUR TABLET PC WITHIN 10 SECONDS OF THE SYSTEM BEING SHUT OFF MAY CAUSE AN ERROR WHEN YOU START THE NEXT TIME. 43 - Power Management Powering Off If you turn off the power while accessing a disk there is a risk of data loss. To ensure that your Tablet PC shuts down without error, use the Windows shut down procedure. BE SURE TO CLOSE ALL FILES, EXIT ALL APPLICATIONS, AND SHUT DOWN YOUR OPERATING SYSTEM PRIOR TO TURNING OFF THE POWER. IF FILES ARE OPEN WHEN YOU TURN THE POWER OFF, YOU WILL LOSE ANY CHANGES THAT HAVE NOT BEEN SAVED, AND MAY CAUSE DISK ERRORS. Using the correct procedure to shut down from Windows allows your Tablet PC to complete its operations and turn off power in the proper sequence to avoid errors. The proper sequence is:

1 Click the [Start] button, and then move the mouse over the small arrow at the bottom right of the right-hand pane. 2 Select Shut Down from the list. If you are going to store your Tablet PC for a month or more, see Care and Maintenance Section. 44 - Power Management Chapter 3 User-Installable Features Lithium Polymer Battery Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC has a Lithium Polymer battery that provides power for operating your Tablet PC when no external power source is available. The battery is durable and long lasting, but should not be exposed to extreme temperatures, high voltages, chemicals or other hazards. The Lithium Polymer battery operating time may become shorter if it is used under the following conditions:

When used at temperatures that exceed a low of 5C or a high of 35C (41 to 95 F). Extreme temperatures not only reduce charging efficiency, but can also cause battery deterioration. The Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when you try to charge a battery that is outside its operating temperature range.

When using a high current device such as an external optical drive or the hard drive, using the AC adapter will conserve your battery life. DO NOT LEAVE A FAULTY BATTERY IN YOUR TABLET PC. IT MAY DAMAGE YOUR AC ADAPTER, OPTIONAL AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER, OR YOUR TABLET PC ITSELF. IT MAY ALSO PREVENT OPERATION OF YOUR TABLET PC BY DRAINING ALL AVAILABLE CURRENT INTO THE BAD BATTERY. 45

ACTUAL BATTERY LIFE WILL VARY BASED ON SCREEN BRIGHTNESS, APPLICATIONS, FEATURES, POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGS, BATTERY CONDITION AND OTHER CUSTOMER PREFERENCES. HARD DRIVE USAGE MAY ALSO HAVE A SIGNIFICANT IMPACT ON BATTERY LIFE. THE BATTERY CHARGING CAPACITY IS REDUCED AS THE BATTERY AGES. IF YOUR BATTERY IS RUNNING LOW QUICKLY, YOU SHOULD REPLACE IT WITH A NEW ONE.

UNDER FEDERAL, STATE, OR LOCAL LAW IT MAY BE ILLEGAL TO DISPOSE OF BATTERIES BY PUTTING THEM IN THE TRASH. PLEASE TAKE CARE OF OUR ENVIRONMENT AND DISPOSE OF BATTERIES PROPERLY. CHECK WITH YOUR LOCAL GOVERNMENT AUTHORITY FOR DETAILS REGARDING RECYCLING OR DISPOSING OF OLD BATTERIES. IF YOU CANNOT FIND THIS INFORMATION ELSEWHERE, CONTACT YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE AT 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Recharging the Batteries If you want to know the condition of the primary Lithium Polymer battery, check the Battery Level indicator located on the Status Indicator panel. The indicator changes as the battery level changes. The Lithium Polymer battery is recharged internally using the AC adapter or Auto/Airline adapter. To recharge the battery make sure the battery that needs to be charged is installed in your STYLISTIC Tablet PC and connect the AC or Auto/Airline adapter. MAKE SURE THAT THE PERCENTAGE CHARGE IS INDICATED BY THE BATTERY CHARGING INDICATOR ON THE STATUS INDICATOR PANEL. There is no memory effect on the Lithium Polymer battery therefore you do not need to discharge the battery completely before recharging. The charge times will be significantly longer if your Tablet PC is in use while the battery is charging. If you want to charge the battery more quickly, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode, or turn it off while the adapter is charging the battery. (See Power Management on page 41 for more information on Sleep mode and shutdown procedure) 46 - Lithium Polymer Battery USING HEAVY CURRENT DEVICES OR FREQUENT EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ACCESSES MAY PREVENT CHARGING COMPLETELY. Low Battery State When the battery is running low, a low battery notification message will appear. If you do not respond to the low battery message, the batteries will continue to discharge until they are too low to operate. When this happens, your Tablet PC will go into Sleep mode. There is no guarantee that your data will be saved once the Tablet PC reaches this point.

ONCE THE LOW BATTERY NOTIFICATION MESSAGE APPEARS, YOU NEED TO SAVE ALL YOUR ACTIVE DATA AND PUT YOUR TABLET PC INTO SLEEP MODE UNTIL YOU CAN PROVIDE A NEW POWER SOURCE. YOU SHOULD PROVIDE A CHARGED BATTERY, AN AC POWER ADAPTER, OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. WHEN YOU ARE IN SLEEP MODE THERE MUST ALWAYS BE AT LEAST ONE POWER SOURCE ACTIVE. IF YOU REMOVE ALL POWER SOURCES WHILE YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, ANY DATA THAT HAS NOT BEEN SAVED TO THE HARD DRIVE WILL BE LOST.

Dead Battery Suspend mode shows on the Status indicator just like the normal Sleep mode. Once your Tablet PC goes into Dead Battery Suspend mode you will be unable to resume operation until you provide a source of power either from an adapter, or a charged battery. Once you have provided power, you will need to press the Power/Suspend/Resume switch to resume operation. In the Dead Battery Suspend mode, your data can be maintained for some time, but if a power source is not provided promptly, the Power indicator will stop flashing and go out, meaning that you have lost the data that was not stored. Once you provide power, you can continue to use your Tablet PC while an adapter is charging the battery. Shorted Batteries The Status Indicator panel indicator associated with the Battery Level indicator displays the operating level available in that battery. If this display shows a flashing red LED, it means the battery is damaged and must be replaced so it does not damage other parts of your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. 47 - Lithium Polymer Battery Replacing the Battery With the purchase of an additional battery, you can have a fully charged spare to swap with one that is not charged. There are two ways to swap batteries, cold-swapping and hot-swapping:

Cold-swapping Batteries To cold-swap batteries in your battery bay, follow these easy steps:

1 Have a charged battery ready to install. 2 Perform one of the following two steps:

Click the Fujitsu Battery Swap Utility icon on the desktop. Follow the instructions that appear to put the system into Hibernate mode. Using this procedure saves your data and the system powers down. It is then safe to swap the batteries.

Save your data, then power down the system. It is then safe to swap the batteries. 3 Note that the battery latch on the left is spring loaded, while the latch on the right is not. Unlock the battery by first pushing the right latch backwards, then pushing and holding the left latch (Figure 17). While holding the left latch, lift the battery out at the lift point (Figure 18). 4 To install a battery, first verify that the right latch is pushed back. While pushing the left latch back and holding it, insert a new battery into the bay (Figures 19 and 20). Lock the battery in place by sliding the right latch forward. 48 - Lithium Polymer Battery 5 Plug in the AC adapter and turn the power on. Lift Point Figure 17. Unlocking the Battery Figure 18. Removing the Battery Figure 19. Replacing the Battery Figure 20. Locking the Battery Hot-swapping Batteries 49 - Lithium Polymer Battery To hot-swap batteries in your battery bay follow these easy steps:

BE SURE TO PLUG IN AN AC ADAPTER PRIOR TO REMOVING THE BATTERY. THERE IS NO BRIDGE BATTERY PRESENT TO SUPPORT THE SYSTEM WHILE THE BATTERY IS BEING REPLACED. IF YOU DO NOT USE AN AC ADAPTER YOU WILL LOSE ANY UNSAVED FILES. 1 Plug an AC Adapter into the system and connect it to a power outlet. 2 Follow steps 3 through 5 in Cold Swapping Batteries. IF THE LITHIUM POLYMER BATTERY CONNECTOR IS NOT FULLY SEATED, YOU MAY NOT BE ABLE TO USE YOUR TABLET PC OR CHARGE YOUR BATTERY. 50 - Lithium Polymer Battery Secure Digital Cards Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC supports Secure Digital (SD) cards, on which you can store and transfer data to and from a variety of digital devices. These cards use flash memory architecture, which means they dont need a power source to retain data. Note that SD and SDHC Cards are supported, but SDXC Cards are not. SD Cards allow portable storage among a variety of devices, such as cell phones, GPS systems, digital cameras, and PDAs. SD Cards transfer data quickly, with low battery consumption. SD Card SD Card Slot

(relative location on rear) SD Card Slot SD Card Figure 21. SD Card Slot - Front Access Figure 22. SD Card Slot - Rear Access Installing SD Cards When holding the Tablet PC in horizontal position with the front facing you and the web camera on the left, the SD Card slot is located at the top left edge of the system, in the rear (Figures 21 and 22). To install an SD Card, follow these steps:

51 - Secure Digital Cards INSTALLING OR REMOVING AN SD CARD DURING YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PCS SHUTDOWN OR BOOTUP PROCESS MAY DAMAGE THE CARD AND/OR YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC. DO NOT INSERT A CARD INTO A SLOT IF THERE IS WATER OR ANY OTHER SUBSTANCE ON THE CARD AS YOU MAY PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE CARD, YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC, OR BOTH. 1 See your specific card manual for instructions on the installation of your card. Some cards may require that your Tablet PC is off while installing them. 2 Make sure there is no card currently in the slot. If there is, see Removing an SD Card. 3 With the product label facing in the same direction as the display screen, insert your card into the slot. 4 Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in the connector. Removing an SD Card To remove an SD Card, follow these easy steps:

SEE YOUR CARD MANUAL FOR SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS ON THE REMOVAL OF YOUR CARD. SOME CARDS MAY REQUIRE YOUR STYLISTIC TABLET PC TO BE IN SLEEP MODE OR OFF WHILE REMOVING THEM. 1 Select Safely Remove Hardware from the System Tray. Highlight the card in the list, then click [Stop]. 2 Push the SD Card in until it unlatches. It will then eject from the slot for removal. 52 - Secure Digital Cards Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Your Tablet PC Troubleshooting There may be occasions when you encounter simple setup or operating problems that you can solve on the spot, or problems with peripheral devices that can be solved by replacing the device. The information in this section helps you isolate and resolve some of these straightforward issues and identify failures that require service. Identifying the Problem If you encounter a problem, go through the following procedure before pursuing complex troubleshooting:

1 Turn off your STYLISTIC Tablet PC. 2 Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into your Tablet PC and to an active AC power source. 3 Make sure that any cards installed are seated properly. If it appears that there is a problem with a card, remove the card from the slot, thus eliminating it as a possible cause of failure. 4 Make sure that any devices connected to the external connectors are plugged in properly. You can also disconnect such devices, thus eliminating them as possible causes of failure. 5 Turn on your Tablet PC. Make sure it has been off at least 10 seconds before you turn it back on. 6 Go through the boot sequence. 7 If the problem has not been resolved, refer to the Troubleshooting Table that follows for more detailed troubleshooting information. 53 IF YOU KEEP NOTES ABOUT WHAT YOU HAVE TRIED, YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE MAY BE ABLE TO HELP YOU MORE QUICKLY BY GIVING ADDITIONAL SUGGESTIONS OVER THE PHONE. 8 If you have tried the solutions suggested in the Troubleshooting Table without success, contact your support representative:

Toll free: 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) 

Web site: http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support. Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:

Product name

Product configuration number

Product serial number

Purchase date

Conditions under which the problem occurred

Any error messages that have occurred

Type of device connected, if any See the Configuration Label on the bottom of your Tablet PC for configuration and serial numbers. 54 - Troubleshooting Specific Problems Using the Troubleshooting Table When you have problems with your Tablet PC, try to find the symptoms under the Problem column of the troubleshooting table for the feature giving you difficulty. You will find a description of common causes for that symptom under the column Possible Cause and what, if anything, you can do to correct the condition under Possible Solutions. All possible causes or solutions may not apply to your Tablet PC.

Troubleshooting Table Audio Problems. page 56 Power Failures . page 58 Hard Drive Problems. page 56 Shutdown and Startup Problems . page 60 Keyboard or Mouse Problems. page 56 Video Problems . page 60 Pen Input Problems. page 57 Miscellaneous Problems . page 61 USB Device Problems. page 57 55 - Troubleshooting Problem Audio Problems Possible Cause Possible Solutions There is no sound coming from the built-in speaker. The volume is turned too low. Adjust the volume control on your Tablet PC and operating system. Click the Volume icon in the system tray on the bot-

tom right of the screen. (It looks like a speaker). If the Mute box has a red circle on it, click on it to deselect it. Headphones are plugged into your Tablet PC. Plugging in headphones disables the built-in speaker. Remove the headphones. Hard Drive Problems You cannot access your hard drive. The wrong drive designator was used by an application when a bootable disc was used to start the Tablet PC. Security is set so your operat-

ing system cannot be started without a password. Verify drive designator used by application is in use by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a CD, drive designations are automatically adjusted. Verify your password and security settings. Keyboard or Mouse Problems You have installed an optional external key-

board or mouse, and it does not seem to work. Your external device is not properly installed. Your operating system is not set up with correct software driver for that device. Re-install your device. See Device Ports on page 82. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. You have connected an external keyboard or a mouse and it seems to be locking up the system. Your operating system is not setup with correct driver. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Your system has crashed. Try to restart your Tablet PC. 56 - Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Pen Input Problems Cursor is not tracking the pen. Display needs to be cali-

brated See Calibrating the Display on page 25. for more informa-

tion. Tablet is not responding to the pen System may have crashed. If the Tablet PC does not respond to the pen, connect an external keyboard to the system to see if it responds to key-

board commands. If the system doesnt respond to a key-

board, the application or system may have crashed, and it may be necessary to reboot the system. If the system responds to a keyboard but not to a pen, contact your local help desk or reseller, or call Fujitsu Service and Support at 1-

800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) for further assistance. Memory Problems Your System screen in the Control Panel does not show the correct amount of installed memory. USB Device Problems Your system doesnt rec-

ognize a USB device you installed, or the device doesnt work properly. You have a memory

failure. Check for Power On Self Test (POST) messages. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 62. The device is not properly installed. The device may have been installed while an application was running, so your system is not aware of its installation. Remove and re-install the device. Close the application and restart your Tablet PC. Your device may not have the correct software driver active. See your software documentation and activate the correct driver. 57 - Troubleshooting Problem Power Failures Possible Cause Possible Solutions You turn on your Tablet PC and nothing seems to 

happen. The installed battery is com-

pletely discharged or there is no power adapter installed. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 18. Install a charged battery or a Power adapter. The battery is installed but is faulty or very low. System is at a critical thermal limit. When the battery reaches a critically low level, the system is forced into Sleep mode to avoid a total system power failure. To correct this problem, either connect an external power supply (such as the AC adapter), or install a charged battery in the Tablet PC. To avoid damage to heat-sensitive components, the system enters sleep mode when it gets too hot. System operation cannot be resumed until the Tablet PC cools off to a tolerable temperature. Move the Tablet PC to a cooler location. AC power adapter is not plugged in properly. Verify that your adapter is connected correctly. See Power Sources on page 33. The power adapter has no power from the AC or airline outlet. Move the AC cord to a different outlet, or check for a line switch or tripped circuit breaker. If you are using an auto/air-

line adapter in a car be sure the ignition switch is in the On or Accessories position. The power adapter is faulty. Try a different power adapter. The power management parameters are set for auto timeouts which are too short for your operating needs. Move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push Power/Suspend/Resume switch. Check your power manage-

ment settings, or close your applications and go to Power Options located in the Control Panel to adjust timeouts to better suit your needs. Your power adapter has failed or lost its power source. Make sure the adapter is plugged in and the outlet has power. 58 - Troubleshooting Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC turns off all by itself. Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Your STYLISTIC Tablet PC turns off all by itself.

(continued) You ignored a low battery alarm until the battery entered Dead Battery Suspend mode. Install a power adapter, then push the Power/Sus-

pend/Resume switch. See Power Sources on page 33. Your Tablet PC will not work on battery alone. You have a battery failure. Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel. If the battery is shorted, replace or remove it. See Status Indicator Panel on page 18. The installed battery is dead. Replace the battery with a charged one or use an adapter. No battery is installed. Install a charged battery. Battery is improperly installed. Verify that the battery is properly connected by re-installing it. Your installed battery is faulty. Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel and replace or remove any batteries that are shorted. See Status Indicator Panel on page 18. The battery seems to 

discharge too quickly. The power savings features may be disabled. Check the Power Options menu settings and adjust accord-

ing to your operating needs. The brightness is turned all the way up. Turn down the brightness adjustment. The higher the bright-

ness the more power your display uses. Youre running an application that uses a lot of power due to frequent drive access, or use of wireless devices. Use a power adapter for this application when at all possible. The battery is very old. Replace the battery. The battery was exposed to high temperatures. The battery is too hot or too cold. 59 - Troubleshooting Replace the battery. Restore the Tablet PC to normal operating temperature. Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when battery is outside of operating range. Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Shutdown and Startup Problems The Suspend/Resume 

switch does not work. Suspend/Resume 

switch is disabled. To enable the button, go to Control Panel -> Power Options and click on the Advanced tab. In the Power buttons area, select the Change what the power button does option. The system powers up and displays power on information, but fails to load the operating system. There may be application software. conflict Close all applications and try the button again. You have a secured system requiring a password to load your operating system. Make sure you have the right password. Enter the setup util-

ity and verify the Security settings and modify them as accordingly. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 37. The boot sequence settings of the setup utility are not compatible with your configu-

ration. Set the operating source by pressing the [F12] key while the Fujitsu logo is on screen or use the [F2] key and enter the setup utility and adjust the source settings from the Boot menu. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 37. Hard drive was not detected. Use BIOS setup utility to auto detect the internal hard drive. An error message is dis-

played on the screen dur-

ing the boot sequence. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a problem. Your Tablet PC appears to change setup parameters when you start it. BIOS setup changes were not saved when made and you exited the setup utility. See the Power On Self Test (POST) messages to determine the meaning and severity of the problem. Not all messages are errors; some are simply status indicators. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 62. Make sure you select Save Changes And Exit when exiting the BIOS setup utility. Video Problems The display is blank when you turn on your Tablet PC. Power management timeouts are set for short intervals and you didnt see the display go on and off again. Move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume switch. (The display may be shut off by Sleep mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) 60 - Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions The Tablet PC turned on with a series of beeps and the display is blank. Power On Self Test detected a failure which does not allow the display to operate. The display goes blank by itself after you have been using it. Power management timeouts are set for short intervals and you failed to notice the display come on and go off again. Contact your support representative. Push the Power/Suspend/Resume switch. (The display may be shut off by Sleep Mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) The Tablet PC has gone into Sleep or Hibernate mode because you have not used it for a period of time. Push Power/Suspend/Resume switch. Check power man-

agement settings, or close applications and go to the Power Savings menu of the setup utility to adjust timeout values 

to suit your needs. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 37. The display has bright or dark spots. Miscellaneous Problems If the spots are very tiny and few in number, this is normal for a large LCD display. If the spots are numerous or large enough to interfere with your operation needs. This is normal; do nothing. Display is faulty; contact your support representative. Error message displayed on the screen during oper-

ation of an application. Application software often has its own set of error message displays. See your application manual and help displays screens for more information. Not all messages are errors some may simply be status. 61 - Troubleshooting Power On Self Test Messages The following is a list of error-and-status messages that the Phoenix BIOS and/or your operating system can generate and an explanation of each message. Error messages are marked with an *. If an error message is displayed that is not in this list, write it down and check the operating system documentation on screen and in the manual. If you can find no reference to the message, contact a support representative.

*Invalid NVRAM Data Problem with NVRAM access. In the unlikely case that you see this message you may have a display problem. You can continue operating but should contact your support representative for more information.

*Operating system not found Operating system cannot be located on either drive A: or drive C: Enter the setup utility and see if both the fixed disk, and drive A: are properly identified and that the boot sequence is set correctly. Unless you have changed your installation greatly, the operating system should be on drive C:. If the setup utility is correctly set, your hard drive may be corrupted.

*Real time clock error - Check date and time settings Real-time clock fails BIOS test. May require board repair. Contact your support representative. 62 - Troubleshooting Restoring Your Pre-installed Software Packed with your system you will find two discs for recovering your pre-installed software:

Drivers and Applications Restore Disc

Recovery and Utility Disc IF YOU USE THE RECOVERY DISK THAT IS IN THE SYSTEM BOX, BE SURE TO GO TO THE FUJITSU WEBSITE AND DOWNLOAD AND INSTALL THE LATEST VERSIONS OF THE BUTTON UTILITIES AS FOLLOWS:

- GO TO WWW.FUJITSU.COM/US

- UNDER SUPPORT, SELECT DRIVERS AND OTHER DOWNLOADS > NOTEBOOKS (OR TABLET

PCS). THE DOWNLOAD PAGE APPEARS.

- CHOOSE YOUR SYSTEM AND MODEL NUMBER.

- SELECT THE BUTTON UTILITIES AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS THAT APPEAR TO OPEN (OR RUN) THE FILE. THIS COMPLETES THE FACTORY IMAGE RESTORATION OF YOUR SYSTEM. Drivers and Applications Restore Disc The Drivers and Applications Restore (DAR) disc included with your system contains sets of device drivers and Fujitsu utilities (in specific directories) that are unique to your computer configuration.

IN ORDER TO PERFORM THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES, YOU MUST HAVE AN EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE. IF YOU HAVE ACCESS TO THE INTERNET, VISIT THE FUJITSU SUPPORT WEBSITE AT HTTP://WWW.COMPUTERS.US.FUJITSU.COM/SUPPORT TO CHECK FOR THE MOST CURRENT INFORMATION, DRIVERS AND HINTS ON HOW TO PERFORM RECOVERY AND SYSTEM UPDATES. Re-installing Individual Drivers and Applications The Drivers and Applications disc can be used to selectively re-install drivers and/or applications that may have been un-installed or corrupted. THERE MAY BE CERTAIN FREE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS PRE-INSTALLED ON YOUR SYSTEM THAT ARE NOT ON THE DAR DISC. THE LATEST VERSIONS OF THE APPLICATIONS CAN BE DOWNLOADED FROM THE THIRD-PARTYS WEBSITE. To re-install drivers and/or applications:

1 Boot up the system and insert the DAR disc after Windows has started. A Fujitsu Installer screen is displayed after the disc is inserted. 63 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 2 After reading the License Agreement, click [I agree]. 3 A window will appear containing a list of applications, drivers, and utilities that you can install from the DAR disc. 4 In the list, check off all the components you want to install. If you want to install all components, click [Select All]. Clicking [Select All] will select all of the blue-coded components; you must select grey and green components separately. 5 Once you have selected the components you wish to install, click [Install Selected Subsystems]; the components will be installed. 6 After the components are installed, click [OK], then click [Yes] when asked if you want to reboot the system. Recovery and Utility disc The Recovery and Utility disc contains six utilities:

Recovery and Utility tabs

Diagnostics tab: The Diagnostics tool is designed for use by IT professionals. It is not likely you will need to use this tool. When you select devices from the Diagnosis window then click [Execute], several tests are performed on the selected components.

Recovery tab: The Recovery tab contains two tools: 

Restoring the Factory Image (only C: drive) and Restoring the Factory Image (full hard drive recovery). You can use these tools to perform a full hard drive recovery.

Utility tab: The Utility tab contains three tools: Hard Disk Data Delete, Restore Recovery and Utility, and Windows Complete PC Restore.

The Hard Disk Data Delete utility is used to delete all data on the hard disk and prevent the data from being reused. NOTE: Do not use the Hard Disk Data Delete utility unless you are absolutely certain that you want to erase your entire hard disk, including all partitions.

Restore Recovery and Utility allows you to restore the first hidden partition.

Windows Complete PC Restore utility allows you to restore an image created with Windows Backup and Restore Center. Windows Complete PC Restore will overwrite the data on your hard disk drive. To use the disc, follow the instructions in the Using the Recovery and Utility Disc booklet that is pack-

aged with the disc. 64 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software Chapter 5 Care and Maintenance Caring for your Tablet PC If you use your STYLISTIC Tablet PC carefully, you will increase its life and reliability. This section provides some tips for looking after the Tablet PC and its devices. THE SYSTEM CONTAINS COMPONENTS THAT CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE COMPONENTS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

IF YOU DROP YOUR TABLET PC OR DAMAGE THE HOUSING IN ANY WAY, IMMEDIATELY TURN OFF POWER AND DISCONNECT THE POWER PLUG. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN A SHORT CIRCUIT, SMOKE, AND/OR FIRE. CONTACT FUJITSU SERVICE AND SUPPORT BY PHONE AT 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-

5487), BY EMAIL AT 8FUJITSU@US.FUJITSU.COM, OR THROUGH THE WEBSITE AT HTTP://WWW.COMPUTERS.US.FUJITSU.COM/SUPPORT TO LEARN HOW TO GET THE SYSTEM REPAIRED.

BEFORE DOCKING OR UNDOCKING YOUR TABLET PC (WHEN USING A DOCKING CRADLE), IT IS GOOD PRACTICE TO TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY IN YOUR BODY.

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAY BE HAZARDOUS IF MISUSED. OPERATIONS OF THIS PRODUCT OR SIMILAR PRODUCTS, MUST ALWAYS BE SUPERVISED BY AN ADULT. DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF ANY ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS AND DO NOT PERMIT THEM TO HANDLE ANY CABLES.

Your STYLISTIC is a durable but sensitive electronic device. Treat it with respect and care.

Make a habit of transporting it in a suitable carrying case. 65

Do not attempt to service the computer yourself. Always follow installation instructions closely.

Keep it away from food and beverages.

If you accidentally spill liquid on your STYLISTIC Tablet PC:

1 Turn it off. 2 Position it so that the liquid can run out and let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer if needed. 3 If your Tablet PC will not boot after it has dried out, call your support representative.

Do not use your Tablet PC in a wet environment (near a bathtub, swimming pool).

Always use the AC adapter and batteries that are approved for your Tablet PC.

Avoid exposure to sand, dust and other environmental hazards.

Do not expose your Tablet PC to direct sunlight for long periods of time as temperatures above 140 F (60 C) may damage your Tablet PC.

Do not put heavy or sharp objects on the computer. Cleaning your Tablet PC

Always disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug, not the cord.)

Clean your STYLISTIC Tablet PC with a damp, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents.

Use a soft cloth to remove dust from the screen. Never use glass cleaners.

Always shut down the computer, unplug the power adapter, and remove the battery when cleaning or disinfecting the computer exterior or LCD display. Cleaning guidelines using recommended off-the-shelf cleaners Computer exterior. To clean the exterior, use one of the following off-the-shelf products:

Office Depot #154-616 Notebook Cleaning Kit

Meridrew Enterprises Klear Screen Wipes

3M CL563 Cleaner Wipes Note: After cleaning with one of these products, gently polish with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth until the solution is no longer visible. 66 - Care and Maintenance Disinfecting STYLISTIC computers Wipe the surface with a soft cloth wipe and a 50% ethanol solution or use another ethanol-based germicide which has been registered as a hospital disinfectant by the EPA.

USE OF INCORRECT CLEANERS CAN RESULT IN OPTICAL IMPAIRMENT OF THE LCD AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE COMPUTER. ALWAYS REFER TO THE CLEANER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES AND MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR PROPER HANDLING AND USE OF THE PRODUCTS.

NEVER USE AMMONIA, ACIDIC, OR ALKALINE CLEANERS OR ORGANIC CHEMICALS SUCH AS PAINT THINNER, ACETONE, PROPYL OR ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL, OR KEROSENE. IT MAY DAMAGE SURFACE FINISHES AND THE COATING OF THE LCD SCREEN.

NEVER USE COMPRESSED AIR FOR CLEANING YOUR COMPUTER. Storing your Tablet PC

If storing your Tablet PC for a month or longer, turn it off, fully charge the battery, then remove and store all Lithium Polymer batteries.

Store your Fujitsu STYLISTIC in a cool, dry location. Temperatures should remain between 13F 

(-25C) and 140F (60C).

Store your tablet and batteries separately. If you store your system with a battery installed, the battery will discharge, and battery life will be reduced. In addition, a faulty battery might damage your system.

ALWAYS POWER OFF THE COMPUTER BEFORE TRANSPORTING AND/OR PACKAGING IT. AFTER SHUTTING DOWN THE SYSTEM, WAIT UNTIL THE STATUS LED PANEL INDICATES POWER OFF CONDITION (I.E., NO LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINATED). IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE UNIT MAY NOT AUTOMATICALLY GO TO POWER OFF OR HIBERNATE MODE WHEN YOU CLOSE THE LID. THIS SITUATION MAY OCCUR DUE TO PRE-OS BOOT PASSWORD SECURITY SETTINGS OR SOME OTHER APPLICATION RUNNING ON THE COMPUTER.

ATTEMPTING TO TRANSPORT THE COMPUTER WHILE POWER IS ON MAY DAMAGE THE TABLET PC DUE TO SHOCK OR OVERHEATING. 67 - Care and Maintenance Traveling with your Tablet PC

Do not transport your Tablet PC while it is turned on.

You should carry your Tablet PC with you while traveling, rather than checking it in as baggage.

Never put your Tablet PC through a metal detecto; have it hand-inspected by security personnel. You can however, put your Tablet PC through a properly tuned X-ray machine. To avoid problems, place it close to the entrance of the machine and remove it as soon as possible or have it hand-

inspected by security personnel. Security officials may require you to turn your system on, so make sure you have a charged battery on hand.

Take the necessary plug adapters if you're traveling overseas. Check the following diagram to determine which plug adapter you'll need or ask your travel agent. Outlet Type Location Outlet Type Location United States, Canada, parts of Latin America, Mexico, Japan, Korea, the Philippines, Taiwan Russia and the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS), most of Europe, parts of Latin America, the Middle East, parts of Africa, Hong Kong, India, most of South Asia United Kingdom, Ireland, Malaysia, Singapore, parts of Africa China, Australia, New Zealand Batteries Caring for your Battery

Always handle batteries carefully.

Do not short-circuit the battery terminals (that is, do not touch both terminals with a metal object). Do not carry lose batteries in a pocket or purse where they may mix with coins, keys, or other metal objects. Doing so may cause an explosion or fire. 68 - Care and Maintenance

Do not drop, puncture, disassemble, mutilate or incinerate the battery.

Recharge batteries only as described in this manual and only in ventilated areas.

Do not leave batteries in hot locations for more than a day or two. Intense heat can shorten the life of your battery.

Do not leave a battery in storage for longer than 6 months without recharging it. Increasing Battery Life If your tablet runs on battery power all day, connect it to an AC adapter overnight to recharge it.

Power your Tablet PC through the AC or optional auto/airline adapter whenever possible.

Keep brightness to the lowest level comfortable.

Set the power management for maximum battery life.

Put your Tablet PC in Sleep mode when it is turned on and you are not actually using it.

Limit your media drive access.

Disable the Media Player auto insert notification function. Media Care Caring for your Media (when optional external optical drive is installed) Media discs are precision devices and will function reliably if given reasonable care.

Always store your media disc in its case when it is not in use.

Always handle discs by the edges and avoid touching the surface.

Avoid storing any media discs in extreme temperatures.

Do not bend or scratch media discs or set heavy objects on them.

Do not spill liquids or get dust on media discs.

Never write on the label surface with a ballpoint pen or pencil. Always use a felt pen.

If a disc is dirty, use only a DVD/CD cleaner or wipe it with a clean, soft, lint free cloth starting from the inner edge and wiping to the outer edge. 69 - Care and Maintenance

If a disc is subjected to a sudden change in temperature, condensation may form on the surface. Wipe moisture off with a soft, lint free cloth and let it dry at room temperature. DO NOT use a hair dryer or heater to dry media discs. Caring for an Optional Optical Drive An optional optical drive is durable but you must treat it with care. Please pay attention to the following points:

The drive rotates the compact disc at a very high speed. Do not carry it around or subject it to shock 

or vibration with the power on.

Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be exposed to extreme temperatures.

Avoid using or storing the drive where it is damp or dusty.

Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets or devices that generate strong magnetic fields.

Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be subjected to shock or vibration.

Do not disassemble or dismantle the optical drive.

Use of a commercially available lens cleaner is recommended for maintenance of your drive. Secure Digital Cards Caring for your Cards Secure Digital Cards are durable, but you must treat them with care. The documentation supplied with your card will provide specific information, but you should pay attention to the following points:

To keep out dust and dirt, store cards in their protective sleeves when they are not installed.

Avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight or excessive heat.

Keep the cards dry.

Do not flex or bend the cards, and do not place heavy objects on top of them.

Do not force cards into the slot.

Avoid dropping cards, or subjecting them to excessive vibration. 70 - Care and Maintenance Chapter 6 System Specifications Specifications This section provides the hardware and environmental specifications for your Fujitsu STYLISTIC Tablet PC. Specifications of particular configurations will vary. Configuration Label The configuration label located on the bottom of your Tablet PC contains specific information regarding the options youve chosen for your Tablet PC. Following is an example configuration label. Part Number Configuration ID Configuration P/N:

FPC P/N: Q550-62GB-01 STQ550, AtomZ670, W7Pro, 2GB, 62G, WLAN, 10.1WXGA AOUXXXXXXXXXXXXX Model #

Processor Operating System Memory Hard Drive Communications Screen Size/Type 71 Microprocessor Intel Atom Z670 processor (1.5 GHz) Chipset

Intel SM35 Memory System Memory

DDR2-800 MHz SDRAM memory module.

Fixed 2GB of total memory (onboard). Cache Memory 512 kB L2 cache on-die Video Video Color and Resolution Anti-glare 10.1" Wide XGA LED backlit IPS display

Internal: 1280 x 800 pixel resolution, 16M colors

External: 1280x720 pixel resolution, 16M colors

Simultaneous: 1280 x 800, 16M colors

160 vertical and horizontal viewing angles Digitizer N-trig DuoSense technology. Dual Digitizer, consisting of active digitizer and capacitive touch panel

(uses active stylus input and up to four finger touch input). Video RAM Intel GMA600 video graphics controller with 3D Accelerator. Maximum 759 MB UMA VRAM 72 - Specifications Audio

Realtek codec ALC269

Headphones: Stereo headphone jack, 3.5 mm, 1 Vrms or less, minimum impedance 32 Ohms

One built-in speaker, 18 mm diameter

Two built-in dual analog microphones Mass Storage Device Options Hard Drive Options

FDE Solid State Drive, S-ATA/300 (3.0Gbps), 62 GB, with TRIM command support

FDE Solid State Drive, S-ATA/300 (3.0Gbps), 30 GB, with TRIM command support Communications communication

WLAN: Ralink RT3572 802.11a/b/g/n Wireless LAN USB Device

Bluetooth: Broadcom BCM20702 Bluetooth USB device for wireless personal area network

WWAN: Optional integrated 3G Wireless Wide Area Network, Gobi3000 (Sierra Wireless AirPrime MC8355) Security Features Trusted Platform Module The STYLISTIC Q550 Tablet PC may have an optional Trusted Platform Module (TPM) installed for added system security. Fingerprint Recognition Sensor Swipe sensor for biometric security. SmartCard Slot Integrated SmartCard slot (requires third-party application) 73 - Specifications Device Ports On the STYLISTIC Tablet PC:

SD Card slot

One USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) connectors for input/output devices

One DC In connector

One HDMI connector

Docking port (100-pin, to dock with optional STYLISTIC Docking Cradle)

One stereo headphone jack

1.3 megapixel rear-facing web camera, VGA front-facing web camera On the Optional STYLISTIC Docking Cradle

Four USB 2.0 connectors for input/output devices

One DC-in connector

One docking connector (100-pin, to dock with Tablet PC Power Battery Otions

Lithium Polymer Battery, 2 cells, 7.2V, 19Wh, 2620 mAh

Lithium Polymer Battery, 4 cells, 7.2V 38Wh 5240 mAh AC Adapter Autosensing 100-240V AC, supplying 19V DC, 2.1A, 40W to the Tablet PC; includes an AC cable Power Management Conforms to ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface). 74 - Specifications Dimensions and Weight Overall Dimensions Approximately 10.8" (w) x 7.56" (d) x 0.64" (h) (275 x 192 x 16.2 mm) Environmental Requirements Temperature Operating: 41 to 95 F (5 to 35 C). Non-operating: 5 to 140 F (15 to 60 C) Humidity Operating: 20% to 85%, relative, non-condensing. Non-operating: 8% to 85%, relative, non-condensing Altitude Operating: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) maximum Popular Accessories For ordering or additional information on Fujitsu accessories please visit our Web site at 

www.shopfujitsu.com or call 1-800-FUJITSU. Included Software Depending on your pre-installed operating system, your Tablet PC comes with software for playing audio and video files of various formats. In addition there is virus protection software and Power Management software. The following list indicates the software included with your system.

Adobe Reader

FujitsuHL

OmniPass Fingerprint application

Nuance Keyboard/Handwriting Input

Microsoft Office Starter 2010 75 - Specifications Learning About Your Software Tutorials All operating systems and most application software have tutorials built into them upon installation. We highly recommend that you step through the tutorial before you use an application. Manuals Included with your Tablet PC you will find manuals for your installed operating system and other pre-

installed software. Any manuals that are not included, are available online through the help system of the software. We recommend that you review these manuals for general information on the use of these applications. Adobe Reader The Adobe Reader allows you to view, navigate, and print PDF files from across all of the major computing platforms. FujitsuHL FujitsuHL provides a variety of tools and shortcuts to commonly-used applications and utilities. Among the features offered by FujitsuHL are the camera application for use with the built-in web camera, a calculator, and links to applications such as Explorer. OmniPass Fingerprint application The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass lets you use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-line passwords, and presents a convenient user interface through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. Nuance XT9 Keyboard A predictive text application that allows you to quickly complete your tasks with a number of tools, including next-word prediction, enhanced word completion, automatic spell correction, auto-accenting, and smart punctuation. 76 - Specifications Microsoft Office Starter 2010 (32-bit) Microsoft Office Starter 2010 includes reduced-functionality versions of Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel that include advertising.Microsoft PowerPoint, Microsoft Outlook, and Microsoft Publisher are not included. Customers must purchase an Office 2010 Disc, PKC (Product Key Card), or select one of the full Microsoft Office 2010 suites to activate full-featured Office software on the PC. Fujitsu offers a PKC (Product Key Card) for Microsoft Office Home and Student 2010 and Microsoft Office Home and Business 2010 (32-bit). Simply enter your product key and youre ready to go!

Another option is to purchase a full Microsoft Office 2010 suite from either your computer reseller or online from Microsoft. Operating System The following operating system configuration is installed on your system:

Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Edition 77 - Specifications Regulatory Information Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Fujitsu could void this users authority to operate the equipment. FCC NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limit for class B digital devices, pursuant to parts 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit than the receiver.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device. DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. 78 - Regulatory Information Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide FCC Regulatory Information Please note the following regulatory information related to the optional wireless LAN device. Regulatory Notes and Statements Wireless LAN, Health and Authorization for use Radio frequency electromagnetic energy is emitted from Wireless LAN devices. The energy levels of these emissions, however, are far much less than the electromagnetic energy emissions from wireless devices such as mobile phones. Wireless LAN devices are safe for use by consumers because they operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. The use of Wireless LAN devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as:

On board an airplane, or

In an explosive environment, or In situations where the interference risk to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. In cases in which the policy regarding use of Wireless LAN devices in specific environments is not clear (e.g., airports, hospitals, chemical/oil/gas industrial plants, private buildings), obtain authorization to use these devices prior to operating the equipment. 79 Regulatory Information/Disclaimers Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of this device, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by the manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any damage or violation of government regulations arising from failure to comply with these guidelines. This device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN: For operation within 5.15~5.25 GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environments, and the antenna of this device must be integral. Federal Communications Commission statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. FCC Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from the one the receiver is connected to. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 80 FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposure have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The wireless LAN radio device has been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. Export restrictions This product or software contains encryption code which may not be exported or transferred from the US or Canada without an approved US Department of Commerce export license. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules., as well as ICES 003 B / NMB 003 B. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation. Modifications not expressly authorized by Fujitsu America, Inc. may invalidate the user's right to operate this equipment. Canadian Notice The device for the 5150 - 5250 MHz band is only for indoor usage to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. The maximum antenna gain of 6 dBi permitted (for devices in the 5250 - 5350 MHz, 5470 - 5725 MHz and 5725 - 5825 MHz bands) to comply with the e.i.r.p. limit as stated in A9.2 of RSS210. In addition, users are cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 - 5350 MHz and 5650 - 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. 81 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN This manual describes the procedures required to properly set up and configure the optional integrated Wireless LAN USB device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read this manual carefully to ensure its correct operation. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document This document is applicable to systems containing the following device:

Integrated Ralink RT3572 802.11a/b/g/n Wireless LAN USB Device Characteristics of the WLAN Device

The WLAN device is a USB module attached to the main board of the mobile computer.

The WLAN device operates in license-free RF bands, eliminating the need to procure an FCC operating license. The WLAN operates in the 2.4GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band and the lower, middle, and upper bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands.

The WLAN devices are capable of four operating modes, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n

The WLAN devices are Wi-Fi certified and operate (as applicable) at a the maximum data rate of 150 Mbps

(theoretical) in IEEE802.11n mode; 54 Mbps in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode; and 11 Mbps in IEEE802.11b mode.

The WLAN devices support the following encryption methods - WEP, TKIP, CKIP, and AES encryption.

The Wireless LAN devices are compliant with the following standards: WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0, CCX4.0, and CCX5.0. 82 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device Ad Hoc Mode

"Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer networks. Ad Hoc networks are an easy and inexpensive method for establishing network connectivity between multiple computers. Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID, network authentication, and encryption key settings are identically configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network. Figure 23. Ad Hoc Mode Network 83 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless network architecture in which devices communicate with wireless or wired network devices by communicating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode, wireless devices can communicate with each other or with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks operate in infrastructure mode because they require access to the WLAN in order to access services, devices, and computers (e.g., file servers, printers, databases). Internet ADSL modem, cable modem, or similar Wired LAN Access Point*

Wireless LAN

*An optional hub for a wired LAN may be required depending upon the type of access point used. Figure 24. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Network 84 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN How to Handle This Device The WLAN device is an optional device that may come pre-installed in your mobile computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The operating system that your mobile computer comes with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN device.

The Wireless LAN devices support IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n.

The WLAN devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and the 5 GHz lower, middle, and upper UNII bands.

Microwave ovens may interfere with the operation of WLAN devices since they operate in the same 2.4 GHz frequency range as IEEE802.11b/g/n devices. Interference by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band.

Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4 GHz range may interfere with operation of WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g/n modes. Symptoms of interference include reduced throughput, intermittent disconnects, and many frame errors. It is HIGHLY recommended that these interfering devices be powered off to ensure proper operation of the WLAN device. Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device Disconnecting the WLAN device may be desired in certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics, airplanes, etc.). The WLAN device can be deactivated by using the Wireless On/Off Switch, and it can be disconnected in Windows using the WLAN icon in the system tray (Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio;

it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected.). BEFORE USING THE WIRELESS LAN DEVICE, YOU MUST FIRST INSTALL CLICKME! TO ENSURE THAT THE CORRECT SOFTWARE FOR YOUR DEVICE IS INSTALLED. SEE INSTALLING CLICKME! ON PAGE 40. 85 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch The WLAN device can be deactivated quickly and efficiently by toggling the Wireless Device On/Off Switch to the Off position. The switch has no effect on non-Wireless LAN models. Wireless Device Switch Figure 25. Wireless LAN/Bluetooth On/Off Switch Location Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected. 1 Right-click the WLAN icon in the taskbar at the bottom right of your screen. 2 Choose Disconnect from a network. Activating the WLAN Device Activation of the WLAN device can be accomplished using the same methods as the deactivation process

Using the Wireless On/Off Switch

In Windows, by right-clicking the WLAN icon then clicking Connect to a network 86 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Configuring the Wireless LAN The WLAN device can be configured to establish wireless network connectivity using the software that is built into Windows. Support for most industry standard security solutions is contained in this software. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network administrator for these parameters:

Configuring the WLAN 1 Click the Start button, then select Control Panel. 2 If the Control Panel is not in Classic View, select Classic View from the left panel. Double-click the Network Connections icon. 3 Double-click on the Wireless Network Connection icon. 4 Click on [View Wireless Networks]

5 Choose a wireless network. 6 Click [Connect]. 7 Enter the Network Key, if required. 8 Enter any required information. It may be necessary to consult with your network administrator for some of the information. 9 If you require assistance, go to [Start] -> Help and Support -> Networking and the Web. Select the main topic in which you are interested, then type in relevant keywords in the Search box. Connection to the network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by performing the following steps:

1 Click on the WLAN icon in the system tray. 2 Select Connect to a network. 3 Select a network from the list that appears, and click the [Connect] button. After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by clicking on the Wireless Network icon in the system tray:

87 Configuring the Wireless LAN Troubleshooting the WLAN Troubleshooting Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the following table. If you are unfamiliar with the steps required, consult your System Administrator or go to [Start] -> Help and Support -> Networking and the Web Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network 

connection Incorrect network name (SSID) or network key Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSIDs) and network keys

(WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured correctly. SSIDs and WEP key values must be identical on each machine. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set network name (SSID) and network key to the same values as those of the access point. Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access Point. Please consult your network administrator for this value, if necessary. Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for better transmission. Check if the wireless switch is turned On. Go to Start -> Control Panel, and double-click on Windows Mobility Center. If the wireless network is off, click the

[Turn wireless on] button. Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON. Weak received signal strength and/or link quality The WLAN device has been deactivated or disabled The computer to be connected is turned off 88 Troubleshooting the WLAN Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network 

connection

(continued) RF interference from Access Points or other wireless networks Wireless network authentication has failed Incorrectly configured network settings The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering device. Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly typed WEP key, a misconfigured LEAP username, or an incorrectly chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate but not authenticate to the wireless network. Recheck the configuration of your network settings. Incorrect IP address configuration This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact your network administrator for the correct settings. 89 Troubleshooting the WLAN WLAN Specifications Specifications Item Type of network Transfer rate Active frequency Typical operating distances**

Number of channels Specification The integrated Ralink RT3572 802.11a/b/g/n Wireless LAN USB Device conforms to IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g, and 802.11n, Wi-Fi based*.

(Automatic switching) 150 Mbps maximum data rate

802.11n: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz

802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz

802.11a: 4900 ~ 5850 MHz

802.11a: 40 ft. (12 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 6 Mbps

802.11b: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 11 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps

802.11g: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps

802.11n: Estimated double the operating distance of 802.11g and 802.11a in their respective frequencies.

802.11a: 8 independent channels

802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels

802.11n: 2.4 GHz - 3 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is not used; 2 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is used.

5 GHz - 12 non-overlapping UNII channels with or without Channel Bonding Security Encryption Types - WEP, TKIP, AES***, WPA 1.0 compliant Maximum recommended number of computers to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc connection) 10 units or less ****

90 WLAN Specifications

* Wi-Fi based indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.

** The communication ranges shown above will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls, reflective material, or interference from external RF sources.

*** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/ 104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.

**** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased. 91 WLAN Specifications Using the Bluetooth Device The optional Integrated Bluetooth (V. 3.0) module is a wireless device installed in selected Fujitsu mobile computers. What is Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is designed as a short-range wireless link between mobile devices, such as laptop computers, phones, printers, and cameras. Bluetooth technology is used to create Personal Area Networks

(PANs) between devices in short-range of each other. THE WIRELESS LAN/BLUETOOTH ON/OFF SWITCH WILL POWER OFF BOTH THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS LAN AND BLUETOOTH DEVICES AT THE SAME TIME. TO ENABLE OR DISABLE EITHER ONE OF THE DEVICES INDIVIDUALLY, PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS:

1 Slide the Wireless LAN/Bluetooth on/off switch to On position. 2 Right-click on the Bluetooth icon in the Windows notification area on the right side of the taskbar. 3 Select Turn Adapter On (or Off). 4 Click [OK]. Where to Find Information About Bluetooth For additional information about Bluetooth Technology, visit the Bluetooth Web site at:

www.bluetooth.com. 92 Using the Bluetooth Device FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The Bluetooth antenna is located on the front edge of the right palm rest and is exempt from minimum distance criteria due to its low power. The transmitters in this device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Notice To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Warranty Users are not authorized to modify this product. Any modifications invalidate the warranty. This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without signed written permission from Fujitsu. Unauthorized modification will void the equipment authorization from the FCC and Industry Canada and the warranty. 93 Using the Bluetooth Device Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Your system has a fingerprint sensor device at the bottom left below the display screen. Fingerprint Sensor Device With a fingerprint sensor, you can avoid having to enter a username and password every time you want to:

Figure 26. Fingerprint sensor

Log onto Windows

Resume from sleep mode

Cancel a password-protected screen saver

Log into home pages that require a username and password 94 After you have enrolled - or registered - your fingerprint, you can simply swipe your fingertip over the sensor for the system recognize you. The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass enables you to use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-line passwords. OmniPass requires users to authenticate themselves using the fingerprint sensor before granting access to the Windows desktop. This device results in a secure authentication system for restricting access to your computer, applications, web sites, and other password-protected resources. OmniPass presents a convenient graphical user interface, through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. Getting Started This section guides you through the preparation of your system for the OmniPass fingerprint recognition application. You will be led through the OmniPass installation process. You will also be led through the procedure of enrolling your first user into OmniPass. Installing OmniPass If OmniPass has already been installed on your system, skip this section and go directly to User Enrollment on page 97. You can determine whether OmniPass has already been installed by checking to see if the following are present:

The gold key-shaped OmniPass icon in the system tray at the bottom right of the screen.

The Softex program group in the Programs group of the Start menu System Requirements The OmniPass application requires space on your hard drive; it also requires specific Operating Systems

(OSs). The minimum requirements are as follows:

Windows XP Professional operating system or later 95 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device

At least 35 MB available hard disk space Installing the OmniPass Application If OmniPass is already installed on your system, go to User Enrollment on page 97. Otherwise continue with this section on software installation. INSTALLATION OF THE APPLICATION REQUIRES THAT YOU HAVE AN EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ATTACHED TO YOUR SYSTEM.

FOR INSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER INSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS INSTALLATION. To install OmniPass on your system you must:

1 Insert the installation media for the OmniPass application into the appropriate drive. If you are installing from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM, you must find and launch the OmniPass installation program (setup.exe) from the media. 2 Follow the directions provided in the OmniPass installation program. Specify a location to which you would like OmniPass installed. It is recommended that you NOT install OmniPass in the root directory (e.g. C:\). 3 Once OmniPass has completed installation you will be prompted to restart you system. Once your system has rebooted you will be able to use OmniPass. If you choose not to restart immediately after installation, OmniPass will not be available for use until the next reboot. 4 The installation program automatically places an icon (Softex OmniPass) in the Windows Control Panel as well as a golden key shaped icon in the taskbar. Verifying Information about OmniPass After you have completed installing OmniPass and restarted your system, you may wish to check the version of OmniPass on your system. To check the version information of OmniPass:

1 From the Windows Desktop, double-click the key-shaped OmniPass icon in the taskbar (usually located in the lower right corner of the screen),

or,

96 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Click the Start button, select Settings, and click Control Panel. Double-click Softex OmniPass in the Control Panel, and the OmniPass Control Center will appear. If it does not appear, then the program is not properly installed,

or,

Click the Start button, select Programs, and from the submenu select the Softex program group, from that submenu click OmniPass Control Center. 2 Select the About tab at the top of the OmniPass Control Center. The About tab window appears with version information about OmniPass. Uninstalling OmniPass FOR UNINSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER UNINSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS UNINSTALLATION. To remove the OmniPass application from your system:

1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar. Select Settings, and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 3 Select OmniPass, and then click Change/Remove. 4 Follow the directions to uninstall the OmniPass application. 5 Once OmniPass has finished uninstalling, reboot your system when prompted. User Enrollment Before you can use any OmniPass features you must first enroll a user into OmniPass. Master Password Concept 97 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Computer resources are often protected with passwords. Whether you are logging into your computer, accessing your email, e-banking, paying bills online, or accessing network resources, you often have to supply credentials to gain access. This can result in dozens of sets of credentials that you have to remember. During user enrollment a "master password is created for the enrolled user. This master password replaces all other passwords for sites you register with OmniPass. Example: A user, John, installs OmniPass on his system (his home computer) and enrolls an OmniPass user with username John_01 and password freq14. He then goes to his webmail site to log onto his account. He inputs his webmail credentials as usual (username John_02 and password STYLISTIC), but instead of clicking [Submit], he directs OmniPass to Remember Password. Now whenever he returns to that site, OmniPass will prompt him to supply access credentials. John enters his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14) in the OmniPass authentication prompt, and he is allowed into his webmail account. He can do this with as many web sites or password protected resources he likes, and he will gain access to all those sites with his OmniPass user credentials

(John_01 and freq14). This is assuming he is accessing those sites with the system onto which he enrolled his OmniPass user. OmniPass does not actually change the credentials of the password protected resource. If John goes to another computer without he OmniPass account to access his webmail, he would need to enter his original webmail credentials (John_02 and STYLISTIC) to gain access. If he attempts his OmniPass user credentials on a system other than a system hes enrolled on, he will not gain access. THE ENROLLMENT PROCEDURE ASSUMES YOU HAVE NO HARDWARE AUTHENTICATION DEVICES OR ALTERNATE STORAGE LOCATIONS THAT YOU WISH TO INTEGRATE WITH OMNIPASS. IF YOU DESIRE SUCH FUNCTIONALITY, CONSULT THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THIS DOCUMENT. Basic Enrollment 98 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device The Enrollment Wizard will guide you through the process of enrolling a user. Unless you specified otherwise, after OmniPass installation the Enrollment Wizard will launch on Windows login. If you do not see the Enrollment Wizard, you can bring it up by clicking Start on the Windows taskbar; select Programs; select Softex; click OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. 1 Click Enroll to proceed to username and password verification. By default, the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard enters the credentials of the currently logged in Windows user. 2 Enter the password you use to log in to Windows. This will become the master password for this OmniPass user. In most cases, the Domain: value will be your Windows computer name. In a corporate environment, or when accessing corporate resources, the Domain: may not be your Windows computer name. Click [Next] to continue. 3 In this step OmniPass captures your fingerprint. Refer to Enrolling a Fingerprint on page 99 for additional information. 4 Next, choose how OmniPass notifies you of various events. We recommend you keep Taskbar Tips on Beginner mode taskbar tips and Audio Tips on at least Prompt with system beeps only until you get accustomed to how OmniPass operates. Click [Next] to proceed with user enrollment. You will then see a Congratulations screen indicating your completion of user enrollment. 5 Click [Done] to exit the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. You will be asked if youd like to log in to OmniPass with your newly enrolled user; click [Yes]. Enrolling a Fingerprint Enrolling a fingerprint will increase the security of your system and streamline the authentication procedure. You enroll fingerprints in the OmniPass Control Center. With an OmniPass user logged in, double-click the system tray OmniPass icon. Select the User Settings tab and click Enrollment under the User Settings area. Click Enroll Authentication Device and authenticate at the authentication prompt to start device enrollment. 99 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device 1 During initial user enrollment, you will be prompted to select the finger you wish to enroll. Fingers that have already been enrolled will be marked by a green check. The finger you select to enroll at this time will be marked by a red arrow. OmniPass will allow you re-enroll a finger. If you choose a finger that has already been enrolled and continue enrollment, OmniPass will enroll the fingerprint, overwriting the old fingerprint. Select a finger to enroll and click [Next]. 2 It is now time for OmniPass to capture your selected fingerprint. It may take a several capture attempts before OmniPass acquires your fingerprint. Should OmniPass fail to acquire your fingerprint, or if the capture screen times out, click [Back] to restart the fingerprint enrollment process. 

Your system has a swipe fingerprint sensor. A swipe sensor is small and resembles a skinny elongated rectangle. To capture a fingerprint, gently swipe or pull your fingertip over the sensor (starting at the second knuckle) towards yourself. Swiping too fast or too slow will result in a failed capture. The Choose Finger screen has a [Practice] button; click it to practice capturing your fingerprint. When you are comfortable with how your fingerprint is captured, proceed to enroll a finger. 3 Once OmniPass has successfully acquired the fingerprint, the Verify Fingerprint screen will automatically appear. To verify your enrolled fingerprint, place your fingertip on the sensor and hold it there as if you were having a fingerprint captured. Successful fingerprint verification will show a green fingerprint in the capture window and the text Verification Successful under the capture window. 100 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Using OmniPass You are now ready to begin using OmniPass. Used regularly, OmniPass will streamline your authentications. Password Replacement You will often use the password replacement function. When you go to a restricted access website (e.g., your bank, your web-based email, online auction or payment sites), you are always prompted to enter your login credentials. OmniPass can detect these prompts and you can teach OmniPass your login credentials. The next time you go to that website, you can authenticate with your fingerprint to gain access. OmniPass Authentication Toolbar After installing OmniPass and restarting, you will notice a dialog you have not seen before at Windows Logon. This is the OmniPass Authentication Toolbar, and it is displayed whenever the OmniPass authentication system is invoked. The OmniPass authentication system may be invoked frequently: during Windows Logon, during OmniPass Logon, when unlocking your workstation, when resuming from sleep or hibernate, when unlocking a password-enabled screensaver, during password replacement for remembered site or application logins, and more. When you see this toolbar, OmniPass is prompting you to authenticate. The Logon Authentication window indicates what OmniPass-restricted function you are attempting. The icons in the lower left (fingerprint and key) show what authentication methods are available to you. Selected authentication methods are highlighted while unselected methods are not. When you click the icon for an unselected authentication method, the authentication prompt associated with that method is displayed. When prompted to authenticate, you must supply the appropriate credentials: an enrolled finger for the fingerprint capture window or your master password for the master password prompt (the key icon). Remembering a Password OmniPass can remember any application, GUI, or password protected resource with a password prompt. Using the following procedure, you can store a set of credentials into OmniPass. These credentials will then be linked to your master password or fingerprint. 101 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Go to a site that requires a login (username and password), but do not log in yet. At the site login prompt, enter your username and password in the prompted fields, but do not enter the site (do not hit [Enter],

[Submit], [OK], or Login). Right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and select Remember Password from the submenu. The Windows arrow cursor will change to a golden key OmniPass cursor. Click the OmniPass cursor in the login prompt area, but dont click [Login] or [Submit]. Associating a Friendly Name After clicking the OmniPass key cursor near the login prompt, OmniPass will prompt you to enter a friendly name for this site. You should enter something that reminds you of the website, the company, or the service you are logging into. In its secure database, OmniPass associates this friendly name with this website. Additional Settings for Remembering a Site When OmniPass prompts you to enter a friendly name you also have the opportunity to set how OmniPass authenticates you to this site. There are three effective settings for how OmniPass handles a remembered site. The default setting is Automatically click the OK or Submit button for this password protected site once the user is authenticated. With this setting, each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass, you will automatically be logged into the site. Less secure is the option to Automatically enter this password protected site when it is activated. Do not prompt for authentication. Check the upper box to get this setting, and each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will log you into the site without prompting you to authenticate. THIS SETTING IS MORE CONVENIENT IN THAT WHENEVER YOU GO TO A SITE REMEMBERED WITH THIS SETTING, YOU WILL BYPASS ANY AUTHENTICATION PROCEDURE AND GAIN INSTANT ACCESS TO THE SITE. BUT SHOULD YOU LEAVE YOUR SYSTEM UNATTENDED WITH YOUR OMNIPASS USER LOGGED IN, ANYONE USING YOUR SYSTEM CAN BROWSE TO YOUR PASSWORD PROTECTED SITES AND GAIN AUTOMATIC ACCESS. 102 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device If you uncheck both boxes in Settings for this Password Site, OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass your credentials will be filled in to the site login prompt, but you will have to click the website [OK], [Submit], or [Login] button to gain access to the site. Click Finish to complete the remember password procedure. The site location, the credentials to access the site, and the OmniPass authentication settings for the site are now stored in the OmniPass secure database. The OmniPass authentication settings (Settings for this Password Site) can always be changed in Vault Management. Logging in to a Remembered Site Whether or not OmniPass prompts you to authenticate when you return to a remembered site is determined by Settings for this Password Site and can be changed in Vault Management. The following cases are applicable to using OmniPass to login to: Windows, remembered web sites, and all other password protected resources. With Master Password Once you return to a site you have remembered with OmniPass, you may be presented with a master password prompt. Enter your master password and you will be allowed into the site. Logging into Windows with a Fingerprint Device When logging into Windows with a fingerprint device, the fingerprint capture window will now appear next to the Windows Login screen. Place your enrolled fingertip on the sensor to authenticate. You will be simultaneously logged into Windows and OmniPass. The capture window will also appear if you have used Ctrl-Alt-Del to lock a system, and the fingerprint device can be used to log back in as stated above. IF A MACHINE IS LOCKED AND OMNIPASS DETECTS A DIFFERENT USER LOGGING BACK IN WITH A FINGERPRINT, THE FIRST USER WILL BE LOGGED OUT AND THE SECOND USER LOGGED IN. 103 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Password Management OmniPass provides an interface that lets you manage your passwords. To access this GUI, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management; you will be prompted to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Passwords under Vault Settings. You will see the Manage Passwords interface, with a list of friendly names. You can view the credentials stored for any remembered website by highlighting the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and clicking Unmask Values. Should a password be reset, or an account expire, you can remove stored credentials from OmniPass. Highlight the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and click Delete Page. You will be prompted to confirm the password deletion. The two check boxes in Manage Passwords govern whether OmniPass prompts you to authenticate or directly logs you into the remembered site. OmniPass will overwrite an old set of credentials for a website if you attempt to use Remember Password on an already remembered site. The exception to the above rule is when resetting the Windows password. If your password is reset in Windows, the next time you login to Windows, OmniPass will detect the password change and prompt you to Update or Reconfirm the password with OmniPass. Enter your new Windows password in the prompt and click OK. Your OmniPass "master password" will still be your Windows password. OmniPass User Identities Identities allow OmniPass users to have multiple accounts to the same site (e.g., bob@biblomail.com and boballen@biblomail.com). If OmniPass did not provide you identities, you would be limited to remembering one account per site. To create and manage identities, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management; OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Identities under Vault Settings. You can only manage the identities of the currently logged in OmniPass user 104 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device To add a new identity, click New Identity or double-click Click here to add a new identity. Name the new identity and click [OK], then click [Apply]. You can now switch to the new identity and start remembering passwords. To delete an identity, highlight the identity you want to delete and click [Delete Identity], then [Apply]. WHEN YOU DELETE AN IDENTITY, ALL OF ITS ASSOCIATED REMEMBERED SITES AND PASSWORD PROTECTED DIALOGS ARE LOST. To set the default identity, highlight the identity you want as default and click [Set as Default]; click

[Apply] to ensure the settings are saved. If you log in to OmniPass with a fingerprint device, you will automatically be logged in to the default identity for that OmniPass user. You can choose the identity with which you are logging in if you login using "master password". Choosing User Identity during Login To choose your identity during login, type your username in the User Name: field. Press [Tab] and see that the Domain: field self-populates. Click the Password: field to bring the cursor to it, and you will see the pull-down menu in the Identity: field. Select the identity to login as, then click OK. Switch User Identity To switch identities at any time, right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and click Switch User Identity from the submenu. The Switch Identity dialog will appear. Select the desired identity and then click OK. Identities and Password Management On the Manage Passwords interface of the Vault Management tab of the OmniPass Control Center, there is a pull-down selection box labeled, Identity. This field lets you choose which identity you are managing passwords for. When you select an identity here, only those password protected dialogs that are associated with that identity are shown. You can perform all the functions explained in Password Management on page 104. 105 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Configuring OmniPass This section gives an overview of both the Export/Import function and the OmniPass Control Center. Exporting and Importing Users YOU CANNOT IMPORT A USER INTO OMNIPASS IF THERE ALREADY IS A USER WITH THE SAME NAME ENROLLED IN OMNIPASS. Using OmniPass Control Center, you can export and import users in and out of OmniPass. The export process backs up all remembered sites, credentials, and enrolled fingerprints for an OmniPass user. All OmniPass data for a user is backed up to a single encrypted database file. During the import process, the Windows login of the exported user is required. If the proper credentials cannot be supplied, the user profile will not be imported.

YOU SHOULD PERIODICALLY EXPORT YOUR USER PROFILE AND STORE IT IN A SAFE PLACE. IF ANYTHING HAPPENS TO YOUR SYSTEM, YOU CAN IMPORT YOUR OMNIPASS PROFILE TO A NEW SYSTEM AND HAVE ALL YOUR REMEMBERED SETTINGS AND FINGERPRINTS INSTANTLY.

YOU DON'T FORGET THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS WHEN EXPORTING. WHEN YOU EXAMINE THE IMPORTATION, YOU ARE PROMPTED FOR AUTHENTICATION. THE CREDENTIALS THAT WILL ALLOW A USER PROFILE TO BE IMPORTED ARE THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS OF THE EXPORTED USER. THEY ARE THE CREDENTIALS THAT HAD TO BE SUBMITTED WHEN THE USER PROFILE WAS EXPORTED. YOU WILL NEED USER NAME, PASSWORD, AND DOMAIN. Exporting an OmniPass User Profile To export a user, open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Import/Export User under Manage Users. Click Exports an OmniPass user profile. OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Upon successfully authentication, you must name the OmniPass user profile and decide where to save it. An .opi file is generated, and you should store a copy of it in a safe place. 106 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device This .opi file contains all your user specific OmniPass data, and it is both encrypted and password protected. This user profile does NOT contain any of your encrypted data files. Importing an OmniPass User Profile To import an OmniPass user open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Import/Export User under Manage Users. Click Imports a new user into OmniPass and then select OmniPass Import/Export File

(*.opi) and click Next. OmniPass will then prompt you to browse for the file you had previously exported

(.opi file). When you select the .opi file for importation, OmniPass will prompt you for authentication. The credentials that will allow a user profile to be imported are the Windows login credentials of the exported user. They are the credentials that had to be submitted when the user profile was exported. You will need User Name, Password, and Domain. If you dont remember the value for Domain, in a PC or SOHO environment Domain should be your computer name. OmniPass will notify you if the user was successfully imported. Things to Know Regarding Import/Export

Assume you export a local Windows User profile from OmniPass. You want to import that profile to another machine that has OmniPass. Before you can import the profile, a Windows user with the same login credentials must be created on the machine importing the profile.

Example: I have a Windows user with the username Tom and the password Sunshine on my system. I have enrolled Tom into OmniPass and remembered passwords. I want to take all my passwords to new system. I export Toms OmniPass user profile. I go to my new system and using the Control Panel I create a user with the username "Tom" and the password "Sunshine". I can now successfully import the OmniPass user data to the new system. If you export an OmniPass-only user, you can import that user to any computer running OmniPass, provided that a user with that name is not already enrolled in OmniPass. If you attempt to import a user profile who has the same name as a user already enrolled in OmniPass, the OmniPass import function will fail.

107 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device OmniPass Control Center This section serves to explain functions within OmniPass Control Center that werent explained earlier. You can access the OmniPass Control Center any of three ways:

Double-click the golden OmniPass key shaped icon in the Windows taskbar (typically in the lower-

right corner of the desktop)

Click the Start button; select the Programs group; select the Softex program group; and click the OmniPass Control Center selection.

Open the Windows Control Panel (accessible via Start button --> Settings --> Control Panel) and double-click the Softex OmniPass icon. User Management The User Management tab has two major interfaces: Add/Remove User and Import/Export User. Import/Export User functionality is documented in Exporting and Importing Users on page 106. Add/Remove User functionality is straightforward. If you click Adds a new user to OmniPass you will start the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. The Enrollment Wizard is documented in User Enrollment on page 97. If you click Removes a user from OmniPass, OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Authenticate with the credentials (or enrolled fingerprint) of the user you wish to remove. OmniPass will prompt you to confirm user removal. Click OK to complete user removal. REMOVING A USER WILL AUTOMATICALLY DESTROY ALL OMNIPASS DATA ASSOCIATED WITH THAT USER. ALL IDENTITIES AND CREDENTIALS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USER WILL BE LOST. IF YOURE SURE YOU WANT TO REMOVE THE USER, WE RECOMMEND YOU EXPORT THE USER PROFILE. 108 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device User Settings User Settings tab has three interfaces: Audio Settings, Taskbar Tips, and Enrollment. User settings allow you to customize OmniPass to suit your preferences. Under User Settings (Audio Settings and Taskbar Tips) you can set how OmniPass notifies you of OmniPass events (e.g., successful login, access denied, etc.). Details of each setting under the Audio Settings and Taskbar Tips interfaces are self-

explanatory. The Enrollment interface allows you to enroll fingerprints. For the procedure to enroll and authentication device refer to Chapter 2.3. To enroll additional fingerprints, click Enroll Authentication Device, and authenticate with OmniPass. Select the fingerprint recognition device in the Select Authentication Device screen (it should already be marked by a green check if you have a finger enrolled) and click Next. System Settings The OmniPass Startup Options interface can be found in the System Settings tab. With these options you can specify how your OmniPass Logon is tied to your Windows Logon. The first option, Automatically log on to OmniPass as the current user, will do just as it says; during Windows login, you will be logged on to OmniPass using your Windows login credentials. If the user logging into Windows was never enrolled into OmniPass, upon login no one will be logged on to OmniPass. This setting is appropriate for an office setting or any setting where users must enter a username and password to log into a computer. This is the default setting. With the second option, Manually log on to OmniPass at startup, OmniPass will prompt you to login once you have logged on to Windows. With the third option, Do not log on to OmniPass at startup, OmniPass will not prompt for a user to be logged on. You can manually log on to OmniPass by right-clicking the OmniPass taskbar icon and clicking Log in User from the right-click menu. 109 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Troubleshooting You cannot use OmniPass to create Windows users. You must first create the Windows user, and you will need administrative privileges to do that. Once the Windows user is created, you can add that user to OmniPass using the same username and password Cannot add Windows users to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a Windows user to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. You can do this by going to Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Network Access:

Sharing and Security Model for Local Accounts. The correct setting should be Classic - Local Users Authenticate as Themselves. Cannot add a User with a Blank Password to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a user with a blank password to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. First attempt the procedure explained in the Cannot add Windows user to OmniPass section. If the difficulties persist, then try the following procedure. Click Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Accounts: Limit local account use of blank passwords to console login only. This setting should be set to Disabled. Dialog appears after OmniPass authentication during Windows Logon After installing OmniPass on your system, you can choose to logon to Windows using OmniPass. You authenticate with OmniPass (via master password, or an enrolled security device) and OmniPass logs you into Windows. You may, during this OmniPass authentication, see a Login Error dialog box. This dialog box occurs when OmniPass was unable to log you into Windows with the credentials supplied

(username and password). This could happen for any of the following reasons:

Your Windows password has changed

Your Windows account has been disabled 110 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device If you are having difficulties due to the first reason, you will need to update OmniPass with your changed Windows account password. Click Update Password and you will be prompted with a dialog to reconfirm your password. Enter the new password to your Windows user account and click OK. If the error persists, then it is unlikely the problem is due to your Windows user account password changing. 111 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Appendix C: FujitsuHL User Guide FujitsuHL Instructions FujitsuHL provides an icon-based display of the Home, Photo, and Documents Launchers that help you easily choose them by tapping the icon on the screen. FujitsuHL assists you in performing the following functions:

Execute FujitsuHL gadgets

Link to software that you often use

Open files in the Pictures and Documents folders

Take pictures using the Web Camera TO USE FUJITSUHL, YOU SHOULD SET THE DISPLAY RESOLUTION TO 1280 X 800 DOTS. Starting FujitsuHL You can execute FujitsuHL by two methods:

Pressing the [Keyboard] button on the PC for two seconds and more, or,

Tapping Start > All Programs > FujitsuHL, then selecting FujitsuHL. 112 Closing FujitsuHL To close FujitsuHL, tap the at the right top of the screen. About FujitsuHL FujitsuHL has three different Launcher screens, each of which will be described in detail later in this chapter:

Home Launcher The Home Launcher allows you to select and execute Gadgets and software. Photo LauncherPhoto Launcher allows you to view your photos contained in the Pictures folder. Documents Launcher The Documents Launcher allows you to view the files in the Documents folder. Additional features Using FujitsuHL, you can also use the Camera feature to take pictures using your web camera, and the Photo Viewer feature to view your photos. 113 FujitsuHL Instructions Home Launcher Tab Area Status Area Handle Bar Quick Launcher Tab Area By tapping one of the tabs, you can switch the Launcher screen to Home, Photo or Documents. Handle Bar By tapping the Handle Bar, you can switch between the Launcher Screen and the Gadget screen 114 FujitsuHL Instructions Status Area Use the icons in the Status Area to (in order from left to right):

Change the display brightness Show the WLAN antenna level (when you tap it, WLAN Management is opened) Change the sound volume and set mute Show the battery level Open the Task Manager Close FujitsuHL Quick Launcher By tapping an icon in this area, you can:

Launch the web camera 115 FujitsuHL Instructions Add software to links in the Quick Launcher for commonly used applications Gadget Screen With the Gadget screen, you can use the FujitsuHL Gadgets to initiate commonly-used tasks. Handle Bar Gadget Area Gadget Icons 116 FujitsuHL Instructions Handle Bar By tapping the Handle Bar, you can switch between Gadget Screen and Launcher Screen. Gadget Area This area shows which gadget is currently being executed. Gadget Icons The following Gadgets are available in the Gadget Icon area. By tapping the icon, you automatically execute the program or utility. Launch the Outlook Mail Gadget*

Launch the Outlook Schedule Gadget*

Launch the Outlook ToDo Gadget*

Launch the Worldwide Clock Gadget

* To launch these features, Microsoft Outlook must be set up. 117 FujitsuHL Instructions Launcher Screen With the Launcher Screen, you can execute selected applications. Shortcut Area Shortcut Area The shortcut area displays icons for each of the linked applications. To execute an application, simply tap on the icon. To add a new icon to the shortcut area, add it to the Quick Launcher (See Quick Launcher on page 115), then drag the icon to the shortcut area. To delete a shortcut, press it until prompted to remove, then tap [OK]. Note that the Mailer and Browser icons cannot be deleted. 118 FujitsuHL Instructions Photo Launcher When Photo is selected in the tab area at the top of the screen, the Photo Launcher screen appears. Photo Area Photo Area This area shows thumbnail images of the photos that are in the Pictures folder. By tapping an image, you can open it through the Photo Viewer. See Photo Viewer Button on page 122 The following formats are supported by this utility: JPG, BMP, PNG and GIF. 119 FujitsuHL Instructions Documents Launcher When Documents is selected in the tab area at the top of the screen, the Documents Launcher screen appears. Documents Area Documents Area This area shows icon representations of the files in the Document folder. By tapping an icon, you can open the file. 120 FujitsuHL Instructions Camera Tool The Camera tool allows you to take and view pictures and modify the settings of the camera(s). Preview Area Photo Viewer Button Home Button Camera Switch Button Shutter Button Setting Button Preview Area This area shows the preview of the scene being viewed by the Web Camera. 121 FujitsuHL Instructions Home Button By tapping this button, you can return to the most recently used Launcher screen. Photo Viewer Button By tapping this button, you execute the Photo Viewer to look at your pictures. If some photos have already been saved, this button icon will be changed to the latest photo image. Shutter Button By tapping this button, you can take a picture. The pictures will be saved in the Camera folder under Pictures. The filename contains the date on which the picture was taken. Camera Switch Button By tapping this button, you can switch between the rear-facing Web Camera and the front-facing Web Camera. Setting Button By tapping this button, you can change the brightness, contrast, and color tone of the Web Camera. 122 FujitsuHL Instructions Photo Viewer You can open the Photo Viewer by either tapping a thumbnail image of a photo in the Photo Launcher or by tapping the Photo Viewer button in Camera. Display Area Home Button Set Wallpaper Button Camera Button Previous Button Rotate Clockwise Trash Can Button Next Button Rotate Counter-clockwise 123 FujitsuHL Instructions Display Area This area shows the photo or graphics data that you selected.. Home Button By tapping this button, you return to the most recently used Launcher screen. Camera Button By tapping this button, you open the Camera utility. See Camera Tool on page 121 Set Wallpaper Button By tapping this button, you can change the photo that is currently displayed as the FujitsuHL wallpaper. If you want to change to the previous wallpaper, choose it from the Photo launcher and then tap this button. Previous Button By tapping this button, you can see previous photo. You can also do this by flicking backwards on the display. Next Button By tapping this button, you can see the next photo. You can also do this by flicking forwards on the display. Rotate Buttons By tapping this button, you can rotate the photo data currently displayed in the Display Area to 90 degrees clockwise or counter-clockwise. Trash Can By tapping this button, you can delete the photo that is currently displayed in the Display Area. 124 FujitsuHL Instructions Index A About This Guide 11 AC adapter 33 plug adapters 68 Active Digitizer 22 application buttons 15 Ctl-Alt-Del button 32 Keyboard button 32 Rotate button 32 Auto/Airline Adapter 33, 34 B Battery 45 care 68 cold-swapping 48 conserving power 41 dead 59 faulty 59 hot-swapping 49 increasing life 69 Lithium Polymer battery 45 low 47 problems 59 recharging 46 replacing 48 shorted 47 Standby mode 47 battery release latch 16 125 BIOS guide 38 setup utility 37 Bluetooth Where to Find Information 92 Boot Sequence 36 Booting the System 38 Built-in Speakers 56 C Cameras 14, 16 Capacitive Touchscreen 26 Click Me! 40 Clicking 22 Configuration Label 71 Contact Information 12 conventions used in the guide 11 D DC input connector 15 DC Output Cable 33 DC Power Jack 33 Display Panel 20 problems 60, 61 Drivers and Application Restore CD 63 E Error Messages 62 F Fingerprint Sensor 17 Fingerprint Sensor Device 94 enrolling a fingerprint 99 getting started 95 installing OmniPass 95 logging into a remembered site 103 OmniPass authentication toolbar 101 password replacement 101 remembering a password 101 uninstalling OmniPass 97 user enrollment 97 using OmniPass 101 Front Web Camera 14 Fujitsu Contact Information 12 Fujitsu Shopping Online 12 G Gestures 26 H Hard Disk Drive problems 56 Hard Disk Drive Passwords 37 HDMI Port 17 headphone 17 Hibernation Feature 43 disable/enable 43 L Lithium Polymer Battery 17 M Microsoft Office Starter 2010 77 126 P Pen Caring for the Pen 28 Changing the Pen Battery 29 Changing the Pen Settings 28 Installing a Pen Tether 30 Not responding 57 Replacing the Pen Tip 29 Pen Tether Attachment Point 15 Power AC adapter 33 Auto/Airline adapter 33 failure 58 management 41 off 44 on 35 problems 60 sources 33 power icon 19 Power Management 41 Power On Self Test 36, 62 Power/Suspend/Resume Switch 17, 41 Pre-Installed Software 75 Adobe Reader 76 manuals 76 R Rear Web Camera 16 Registration 39 Regulatory Information 78 removable battery pack 17 Restarting 43 Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 63 S SD Card installing 51 removing 52 slot 17 Sleep Mode 41 Smart Card Slot 17 Specifications 71 Audio 73 Chipset 72 Digitizer 72 Dimensions and Weight 74 Environmental Requirements 75 Keyboard 74 Mass storage device options 73 Memory 72 Microprocessor 72 Power 74 Video 72 status display 18, 19 System Status Indicators 15 T Touch Screen calibrating 25 clicking 23 dragging 24 Troubleshooting 53 Audio Problems 56 battery 59 display 60 hard drive 56 mouse 56 power 58 USB 57 U Universal Serial Bus 17 Using the Optional Capacitive Touchscreen 26 W Warranty 12 Windows 11 Windows Power Management 43 Wireless Device On/Off switch 15 Wireless LAN Before Using the Wireless LAN 82 configuring 82 connection to the network 87 deactivating/disconnecting 85 modes 83 Specifications 90 Troubleshooting 88 127 Guide dutilisation Dcouvrez comment utiliser votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC Fujitsu Q550 Informations sur les droits dauteurs et les marques commerciales La socit Fujitsu America, Inc. sest efforce dassurer la prcision ainsi que lintgralit de ce document. Toutefois, en raison de dveloppements continus visant amliorer constamment les capacits de nos produits, les donnes contenues dans ce document reprsentent seulement les objectifs de conception de Fujitsu et ne sont donnes qu titre indicatif ; les rsultats rels peuvent varier en fonction de facteurs trs varis. Les donnes relatives ce produit ne sont pas garanties. Les spcifications sont sujettes modification sans pravis. Fujitsu et le logo Fujitsu sont des marques dposes de Fujitsu, Limited. STYLISTIC est une marque dpose de la socit Fujitsu America, Inc. Microsoft et Windows sont des marques dposes de la socit Microsoft aux tats-Unis et/ou dan s dautres pays. Le logo SD a t enregistr par la socit SD-3C, LLC auprs du U.S. Patent and Trademark Office (Agence amricaine des brevets et marques de commerce) et auprs dautres agences de ce type dans le monde. Intel, Intel Core et Intel Atom sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de la socit Intel ou des ses filiales aux tats-Unis et dans dautres pays. OmniPass est une marque de commerce de la socit Softex, Inc. Broadcom est une marque dpose de la socit Broadcom. Norton Internet Security est une marque de commerce de la socit Symantec aux tats-Unis et dans dautres pays. N-trig, N-act et DuoSense appartiennent exclusivement la socit N-trig, Ltd., et ont t enregistres auprs du U.S. Patent and Trademark Office, elles peuvent galement tre enregistres ou en instance denregistrement dans dautres pays. AirPrime est une marque de commerce de la socit Sierra Wireless Inc. Gobi 3000 est une marque de commerce de la socit Qualcomm Inc. Nuance et XT9 sont soit des marques dposes, soit des marques de commerce de la socit Nuance Communications, Inc. Adobe et Adobe Reader sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de la socit Adobe Systems Inc. aux tats-Unis et/ou dans dautres pays. Ralink est une marque dpose de la socit Ralink Technology. Bluetooth et le logo Bluetooth sont des marques dposes de la socit Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Realtek est une marque de commerce de la socit Realtek Semiconductor. Wi-Fi est une marque de commerce de la Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA). Tous les autres noms de produit sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de leurs propritaires respectifs. Toutes les autres marques de commerce mentionnes dans le prsent document sont la proprit de leur dtenteur respectif. 2011 Fujitsu America, Incorporated. Tous droits rservs. Aucune partie de cette publication ne peut tre copie, reproduite ou traduite sans le consentement pralable de la socit Fujitsu America, Inc. Aucune partie de cette publication ne peut tre enregistre ou transmise lectroniquement sans le consentement crit pralable de la socit Fujitsu America, Inc. B6FJ-5861-02ENZ0-00 GUIDE DUTILISATION POUR LA CONNEXION SANS FIL EN LARGE BANDE SI LE PRIPHRIQUE DE RSEAU TENDU SANS FIL (WWAN) OPTIONNEL EST INSTALL SUR VOTRE ORDINATEUR TABLETTE, LE GUIDE DUTILISATION CORRESPONDANT EST DISPONIBLE SUR : 

http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/mobile/support_notices LA VERSION COMPLTE DU GUIDE DUTILISATION CONTIENT DES AVERTISSEMENTS ET DES MISES EN GARDE SUR LA SCURIT DES RADIOFRQUENCES LORSQUON UTILISE UN DISPOSITIF DE RSEAU TENDU SANS FIL, POUR LES CONSULTER, CLIQUEZ SUR 3G MINI-CARD GOBI3000 REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION . DCLARATION DE CONFORMIT selon la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC Nom de la partie responsable : Fujitsu America, Incorporated Adresse :

Tlphone :

Dclare que le produit :

1250 E. Arques Avenue, Sunnyvale, CA 94085

(408) 746-6000 Configuration du modle de base : PC Tablette STYLISTIC Q550 est conforme aux rgles tablies dans la Partie 15 des rgles de la FCC. Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences de la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC. Lutilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible; (2) cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris celles pouvant causer un mauvais fonctionnement de lappareil. CONSIGNES DE SCURIT IMPORTANTES Pour fonctionner, cet appareil ncessite un adaptateur secteur. Utilisez uniquement un adaptateur de classe 2 pour quipement informatique, homologu UL, avec une sortie nominale de 19 V c.c. et un courant de 2,1A (40 W). Polarit de sortie de ladaptateur secteur :

Lorsque vous utilisez votre ordinateur tablette, vous devez toujours prendre certaines prcautions de base pour viter les risques dincendie, de choc lectrique et de blessure, notamment :

ATTENTION : SURFACE CHAUDE : LE DESSOUS DE CET ORDINATEUR PEUT SCHAUFFER LORSQUE LAPPAREIL EST UTILIS PENDANT UNE LONGUE PRIODE. LORSQUE VOUS UTILISEZ CET ORDINATEUR ET QU'IL REPOSE MME LA PEAU (SUR LES JAMBES NUES), PRENEZ GARDE NE PAS LUTILISER PENDANT TROP LONGTEMPS OU DE MANIRE CONTINUE.

Nutilisez pas ce produit proximit dun point deau (baignoire, lavabo, vier de cuisine, vier de buanderie) ni dans

un sous-sol humide ou ct dune piscine.

Utilisez uniquement le cordon dalimentation et les piles recommands dans ce manuel. Ne jetez pas les batteries dans

le feu. Elles risquent dexploser. Vrifiez si la rglementation locale comporte des instructions spciales dlimination.

Pour rduire les risques dincendie, utilisez uniquement un cble tlphonique AWG de calibre 26 ou suprieur (p. ex. AWG 24), homologu UL ou CSA. Avis rserv des rparateurs qualifis CONSERVEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS DANGER DEXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE AU LITHIUM (HORLOGE) EST INCORRECTEMENT REMPLACE. LA PILE DOIT TRE REMPLACE UNIQUEMENT PAR UNE PILE IDENTIQUE OU DUN TYPE QUIVALENT RECOMMAND PAR LE FABRICANT. JETEZ LES BATTERIES USES CONFORMMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT. POUR BNFICIER DUNE PROTECTION CONTINUE CONTRE LES RISQUES DINCENDIE, LE FUSIBLE

NE DOIT TRE REMPLAC QUE PAR UN AUTRE FUSIBLE DE MME TYPE ET DE MME CAPACIT. Recyclage de la batterie Avec le temps, lautonomie des batteries qui alimentent votre ordinateur portable finira par diminuer ; cest un phnomne naturel pour toutes les batteries. Lorsque vous remarquerez cela, songez installer une batterie neuve*. Si vous remplacez votre ancienne batterie, il est important que vous la jetiez comme il convient car, dans le cas contraire, les matriaux quelle contient risquent de nuire lenvironnement. Chez Fujitsu, nous portons une attention particulire la protection de lenvironnement et nous collaborons donc avec la Rechargeable Battery Recycle Corporation (RBRC*), une organisation de service publique but non lucratif qui sengage dans la protection de lenvironnement en recyclant les batteries et piles usages sans aucun frais pour vous. La RBRC dispose de dizaines de milliers de points de collecte aux tats-Unis et au Canada. Pour trouver le lieu de collecte le plus proche de chez vous, visitez www.RBRC.org ou appelez au 1-800-822-8837.

Si aucun des lieux proposs par la RBRC ne vous convient, vous pouvez en trouver un en visitant le site de la Consumer Education Initiative

(Initiative pour lducation des consommateurs) de lEIA ladresse http://EIAE.org/. Rappelez-vous que la protection de lenvironnement est laffaire de tous, vous devriez donc faire tout votre possible afin dy contribuer, pour la gnration actuelle et les gnrations suivantes.

Pour commander une nouvelle batterie compatible avec votre ordinateur portable Fujitsu, visitez le site www.shopfujitsu.com

si vous rsidez aux tats-Unis ou www.fujitsu.ca/products/notebooks si vous rsidez au Canada.

** La RBRC est une organisation indpendante dont Fujitsu finance une partie des activits de recyclage ; la RBRC nest en aucune faon affilie Fujitsu. Table des matires Prface Chapitre 1 propos de ce guide. 12 Conventions utilises dans ce guide. 12 Coordonnes pour contacter Fujitsu. 13 la dcouverte de votre PC tablette Aperu gnral . 14 Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs . 15 Commandes situes lavant . 15 Commandes situes larrire . 17 Tableau de voyants dtat . 20 cran . 23 Rglage de la luminosit de lcran . 23 Numriseur actif/cran tactile . 25 cran numriseur actif . 25 Utilisation de lcran tactile capacitif. 28 Faire un clic droit sur l'cran tactile . 29 Utilisation du clavier logiciel Nuance . 31 Entretien du stylet. 32 Boutons du PC Tablette . 35 Chapitre 2 Guide dintroduction votre PC Tablette Sources dalimentation . 38 Connexion des adaptateurs dalimentation. 38 Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC. 40 Mise sous tension . 40 Procdure damorage . 41 Mots de passe daccs au disque dur . 42 Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS . 4 Procdure d'accs l'utilitaire de configuration du BIOS . 42 Dmarrage du systme . 43 Premier dmarrage de Windows. 43 Enregistrement de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC chez Fujitsu . 44 Installation de ClickMe! . 45 Gestion de lalimentation . 46 Bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise . 46 Mode sommeil . 46 Fonction de veille prolonge . 48 Gestion de lalimentation dans Windows. 48 Redmarrage du systme . 48 Mise hors tension . 49 Chapitre 3 Options installables par lutilisateur Batterie au lithium-polymre . 50 Procdure de recharge des batteries . 51 Remplacement de la batterie. 53 7 Chapitre Chapitre 5 Chapitre 6 Cartes Secure Digital . 56 Insrer des cartes SD . 56 Retirer une carte SD . 57 Dpannage de votre PC Tablette Dpannage . 58 Identification du problme . 58 Problmes spcifiques . 60 Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension . 69 Restaurer vos logiciels pr-installs. 70 Disque des pilotes et de restauration des applications . 70 Entretien Entretien de votre PC Tablette . 73 Nettoyage de votre PC Tablette . 74 Entreposage de votre PC Tablette. 75 Voyager avec votre PC Tablette . 76 Batteries . 77 Entretien de votre lecteur multimdia. 78 Cartes Secure Digital . 79 Spcifications techniques Spcifications techniques du systme . 81 tiquette de configuration. 81 Microprocesseur . 82 Puce. 82 Mmoire . 82 Vido. 82 Audio . 83 8 Options de mmoire de masse . 83 Communications. 83 Fonctions de scurit . 83 Ports de priphriques. 84 Alimentation . 84 Dimensions et poids . 85 Environnement dexploitation . 85 Accessoires prfrs des utilisateurs . 85 Logiciels fournis . 85 Apprendre utiliser vos logiciels . 86 Renseignements sur la rglementation . 88 Annexe A : Guide dutilisation de la carte de rseau local sans fil Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil en option . 92 Cartes rseau sans fil prsentes dans ce document . 92 Caractristiques de la carte rseau sans fil . 92 Modes de rseau sans fil compatibles avec cette carte . 93 Dsactivation/dconnexion de la carte rseau sans fil . 94 Dsactivation avec le commutateur de la carte rseau sans fil. 96 Dsactivation par licne dans la zone de notification . 96 Activation de la carte rseau sans fil . 96 Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil. 97 Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil. 97 Connexion au rseau. 97 9 Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil . 98 Dpannage . 98 Spcifications de la carte rseau sans fil . 100 Spcifications . 100 Utilisation de Bluetooth . 102 Prsentation de Bluetooth. 102 Sources dinformations supplmentaires sur Bluetooth . 102 Annexe B : Capteur dempreintes digitales Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales . 104 Premire mise en marche . 105 Installation dOmniPass . 105 Enregistrement des utilisateurs. 108 Utilisation dOmniPass. 111 Configuration dOmniPass . 117 Centre de contrle OmniPass . 119 Dpannage . 122 Annexe C : Guide dutilisation de FujitsuHL Instructions de FujitsuHL . 124 Dmarrer FujitsuHL . 124 Fermer FujitsuHL . 125 propos de FujitsuHL . 125 Lanceur daccueil . 126 cran de gadgets. 128 cran de lanceurs . 130 10 Lanceur de photos. 131 Lanceur de documents . 132 Outil de camra. 133 Visualiseur de photos . 135 Index . 137 11 Prface propos de ce guide Le PC Tablette STYLISTIC Q550 est un ordinateur de haute performance, fonctionnant avec un stylet, qui a t conu pour le systme dexploitation MicrosoftWindows dition professionnelle. Ce manuel prsente le mode demploi du PC Tablette et de ses logiciels intgrs. Le PC Tablette STYLISTIC Q550 est un systme monobloc entirement quip, dot dun cran daffichage DEL rtroclair WXGA de 10,1 pouces avec angle de vision verticale et horizontale de 160. Il est dot dune puissante interface autorisant la prise en charge de divers priphriques offerts en option. Conventions utilises dans ce guide Le texte contient plusieurs renvois vers des pages contenant des informations supplmentaires sur un sujet quelconque. Les boutons affichs lcran et les lments de menu sont indiqus en caractres gras. Exemple :

Cliquez sur OK pour redmarrer le PC Tablette. LICNE DINFORMATIONS MET EN VIDENCE DES RENSEIGNEMENTS QUI VOUS AIDERONT MIEUX COMPRENDRE LE SUJET TRAIT. LICNE DE MISE EN GARDE MET EN VIDENCE DES INFORMATIONS IMPORTANTES POUR LUTILISATION SCURITAIRE DE VOTRE ORDINATEUR OU POUR LINTGRIT DE VOS FICHIERS. VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT TOUTES LES MISES EN GARDE. 12 LICNE DAVERTISSEMENT MET EN VIDENCE DES INFORMATIONS SUR DES DANGERS POUR VOUS, VOTRE PC TABLETTE OU VOS FICHIERS. VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT TOUS LES AVERTISSEMENTS. Coordonnes pour contacter Fujitsu Service et assistance Plusieurs faons soffrent vous pour contacter lquipe de service et assistance de Fujitsu :

Appel sans frais : 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487)

Site Internet : http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support Avant de nous contacter, veuillez avoir les informations suivantes porte de main pour que notre prpos du service la clientle puisse vous venir en aide le plus rapidement possible :

Nom du produit

Configuration de lordinateur et numros de srie

Date dachat

Conditions dans lesquelles le problme est survenu

Texte des messages derreur reus

Types de priphriques connects, si applicable Site de vente par internet de Fujitsu Vous pouvez vous rendre sur ce site directement : www.shopfujitsu.com. Garantie limite Votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC Q550 est accompagn dune garantie limite internationale de Fujitsu. Pour connatre les conditions gnrales et la dure de votre garantie limite, consultez la pochette de service livre avec votre ordinateur. 13 - propos de ce guide Chapitre 1 la dcouverte de votre PC tablette Aperu gnral Le PC Tablette STYLISTIC Q550 est un ordinateur de haute performance, fonctionnant avec un stylet, qui a t conu pour le systme dexploitation Microsoft Windows dition professionnelle. Ce chapitre donne un aperu du PC Tablette STYLISTIC Q550 et de ses nombreuses fonctions. Figure 1. PC Tablette STYLISTIC Q550 14 Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Les fonctions et commandes qui vous permettront dutiliser votre PC Tablette sont prsentes et illustres dans les figures 2 et 3. Des informations plus dtailles sur ces fonctions et commandes sont donnes dans les chapitres suivants. Camra web avant cran Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports Haut-parleur Connecteur entre c. c. Bouton dalimentation/

Bouton de reprise Figure 2. Caractristiques du PC Tablette STYLISTIC Q550 (dessous, vue du ct droit) Cordon du style point de fixation Sans fil commutateur de dispositif sans fil Application scurit tat avant Commandes situes lavant Camra Web avant La camra web VGA situe lavant vous permet de transmettre sur Internet des images de vous-mme. Pour de plus amples informations concernant lutilisation du microphone et de la camra web, consultez la documentation accompagnant lapplication HomeLauncher de Fujitsu. 15 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs cran Le grand cran XGA de 10,1 pouces offre un angle de vision verticale et horizontale de 160 degrs. Point dattache du cordon du stylo Le point dattache du cordon permet de relier votre stylo ou stylet lordinateur pour viter de le perdre. Commutateur Marche/Arrt du dispositif sans fil Ce commutateur permet dactiver/dsactiver les dispositifs WLAN (rseau local sans fil), WWAN (rseau sans fil tendu) et Bluetooth en option. Pour prolonger la longvit de la batterie, teignez ces priphriques entre les utilisations. Boutons dapplication Ces boutons vous permettent de lancer rapidement des applications et utilitaires prdfinis, de tourner lcran et dinvoquer la fonction Ctrl-Alt-Suppr en appuyant sur un bouton. Voir Boutons du PC Tablette en page 35. Voyants dtat Ces voyants indiquent ltat de fonctionnement et de charge des batteries du PC Tablette. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 20. Commutateur dalimentation/veille/reprise Ce commutateur vous permet dallumer le PC Tablette, de lteindre, de le mettre en mode Sommeil, en mode Veille prolonge ou de le remettre en marche, ceci afin dconomiser lautonomie de la batterie. Voir Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC en page 40. Connecteur entre c. c. Ce connecteur vous permet de brancher ladaptateur secteur ou ladaptateur auto. Haut-parleur Le haut-parleur vous permet dcouter le son manant de votre systme. Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports Ce connecteur vous permet de brancher un duplicateur de ports (en option) votre ordinateur. 16 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Loquets de dgagement de la batterie Entretoise dcartement* (emplacement approximatif) Camra Web arrire Fente pour carte SD Capteur Microphone intgr Port USB 2.0 Fente pour carte SmartCard Ligne de sortie/

Prise dcouteurs Port HDMI Batterie amovible Microphone intgr

* REMARQUE : Les modles avec systme WAN sans-fil install comportent une entretoise dcartement fixe larrire de ce systme au niveau de lEntretoise dcartement* (emplacement approximatif), situe au niveau de la ligne pointille dans lillustration ci-dessus. Ne pas dmonter lentretoise dcartement. Figure 3. Caractristiques du PC Tablette STYLISTIC Q550 (vue arrire) Commandes situes larrire Loquets de dgagement de la batterie Ce loquet permet de librer la batterie amovible. 17 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Camra Web arrire La camra web de 1,3 mgapixels situe larrire vous permet de prendre en photo des objets situs devant vous et de partager celles-ci sur Internet. Pour de plus amples informations concernant lutilisation de la camra web, consultez la documentation accompagnant lapplication Fujitsu HomeLauncher. Fente pour carte SD La fente pour carte Secure Digital (SD) permet dinsrer une carte mmoire pour la conservation des donnes. Cette carte mmoire vous permet de transfrer des donnes partir de et vers une varit de priphriques numriques. Voir Cartes Secure Digital en page 56. Capteur dempreintes digitales Le capteur dempreintes digitales vous permet de mettre votre ordinateur en marche : il suffit de glisser votre doigt sur le capteur. Voir Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales en page 104. Microphones intgrs Les micros intgrs vous permettent dintroduire de laudio analogue. Port USB 2.0 Ce port vous permet de connecter lordinateur des priphriques USB (Universal Serial Bus) compatibles avec la norme USB 2.0. Quatre ports USB supplmentaires sont situs sur le duplicateur de ports STYLISTIC en option. Fente pour carte Smart Card La fente rserve vous permet dinsrer une carte Smart Card sur laquelle vous pouvez enregistrer des informations importantes, telles que renseignements mdicaux ou de largent lectronique . Prise de sortie audio/couteurs Cette prise vous permet de connecter des couteurs stro. 18 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Port HDMI Le port HDMI est conu pour tre utilis avec des priphriques numriques compatibles avec votre ordinateur, tels quune tlvision haute dfinition ou un rcepteur AV (audio-vido). Batterie au lithium-polymre amovible La batterie peut tre retire et remplace par une batterie charge. Voir Batterie au lithium-polymre en page 50. 19 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Tableau de voyants dtat Les icnes apparaissant sous chacun des voyants dtat dans la zone dtat indiquent ltat du fonctionnement et le niveau de charge des batteries. Lemplacement des icnes dans la zone dtat est illustre dans la Figure 4. Le tableau 1 explique la manire dont les voyants associs aux icnes individuelles sont affichs et dcrit la signification des diffrents affichages. (Si une icne ne saffiche pas, cela signifie que la fonction associe est teinte ou dsactive.) Alimentation Charge/

Prise c.c. Figure 4. Icnes de la zone dtat 20 - Tableau de voyants dtat Tableau 1. Conditions de la zone dtat Dans le tableau suivant, un voyant clignote une fois par seconde ; un voyant clignotant lentement sallume une fois toutes les cinq secondes. Icne Alimentation Mode/tat

Sous tension tat du voyant Bleu continu

Mode dinactivit

Sommeil Bleu clignotant

Hors tension teint

Veille prolonge Remarques Le systme est allum et prt tre utilis. Le systme est en mode Veille, les paramtres actifs sont enregistrs dans la mmoire vive. Le systme est en mode Veille,

les paramtres et donnes sont enregistrs sur le disque dur. 21 - Tableau de voyants dtat Tableau 1. Conditions de la zone dtat Dans le tableau suivant, un voyant clignote une fois par seconde ; un voyant clignotant lentement sallume une fois toutes les cinq secondes. Icne Mode/tat

Sous tension tat du voyant Vert

Mode dinactivit

Sommeil Orange

Veille prolonge

Hors tension Vert clignotant Niveau de charge/entre c.c. Orange clignotant teint Remarques Ladaptateur secteur et la batterie sont disponibles, et la batterie est charge entre 50 et 100 %. Ladaptateur secteur et la batterie sont disponibles, et la batterie est charge moins de 50 %. Lordinateur est en mode Veille, ladaptateur secteur et la batterie sont disponibles, et la batterie est charge entre 50 et 100 %. Lordinateur est en mode Veille, ladaptateur secteur et la batterie sont disponibles, et la batterie est charge moins de 50 %. Ladaptateur secteur nest pas branch. 22 - Tableau de voyants dtat cran Figure 5. cran du PC Tablette Votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC Q550 est dot dun cran daffichage DEL rtroclair vous permettant de mieux voir son contenu lorsque la lumire environnante est intense. La ligne svelte de votre PC Tablette vous permet de le manipuler facilement et de le tourner 90o, 180o, ou 270o dans toutes les directions. Cet cran peut tre utilis comme tablette, de la mme faon quun bloc de papier. Rglage de la luminosit de lcran Pour rgler la luminosit avec lutilitaire de gestion de lalimentation :

Cliquez sur [Dmarrer] -> Panneau de configuration. Dans Affichage par :, slectionnez un des affichages par icnes. Slectionnez cran puis cliquez sur Rgler la luminosit dans le panneau de gauche. Sous Slectionner un rgime dalimentation, choisissez le rgime que vous souhaitez. Faites glisser la barre Luminosit de lcran : (au bas de la fentre) vers la gauche ou la droite selon votre prfrence. 23 - cran Comment tenir le PC Tablette Lordinateur STYLISTIC Q550 peut tre tenu de quatre faons diffrentes, que vous pouvez choisir selon vos besoins du moment. Vous pouvez donc choisir lorientation horizontale primaire ou secondaire, ou encore lorientation verticale primaire ou secondaire (les dsignations dorientation sont conformes celles utilises dans lutilitaire de boutons). Lillustration ci-dessous indique lordre des rotations lorsque vous faites pivoter le systme avec le bouton de rotation. Notez que lorsque le systme nest pas arrim, lorientation horizontale secondaire ne fonctionne pas. Orientation horizontale primaire Orientation secondaire verticale Orientation horizontale secondaire*

Orientation primaire verticale

*Fonctionne seulement en mode arrim. Ne fonctionne pas si le systme nest pas arrim 24 - cran Numriseur actif/cran tactile cran numriseur actif Le numriseur intgr vous permet dutiliser le stylet comme un pointeur. (Pour de plus amples informations sur lentretien du stylet, voir Entretien du stylet en page 32.) Vous pouvez utiliser le stylet pour cliquer, double-

cliquer, faire glisser des lments ou icnes ou pour dessiner comme avec un stylo ou un crayon dans des applications qui fonctionnent avec cette caractristique, notamment des programmes de dessin et de peinture. Pour de plus amples informations, consultez la documentation accompagnant votre application. Figure 6. Utilisation de lcran numriseur

LORSQUE VOUS TOUCHEZ LCRAN AVEC LE DOIGT ET LORSQUE VOUS CRIVEZ AVEC LE STYLET, NUTILISEZ PAS DE FORCE EXCESSIVE. DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LCRAN DEL ET/OU LCRAN TACTILE.

POUR ACHETER DES STYLETS SUPPLMENTAIRES OU DE REMPLACEMENT, VISITEZ LE SITE INTERNET DES ACCESSOIRES DE FUJITSU : WWW.SHOPFUJITSU.COM. 25 - Numriseur actif/cran tactile Cliquer sur lfcran numriseur actif Pour faire un clic gauche, touchez lobjet que vous voulez slectionner, puis soulevez immdiatement le bout du stylet. Figure 7. Cliquer sur lfcran numriseur actif Figure 8. Faire un clic droit sur lcran numriseur Faire un clic droit sur lfcran numriseur Pour faire un clic droit, maintenez le bouton sur le devant du stylet enfonc en tapotant sur lfcran. Pour changer les paramtres pour la fonction de clic droite, allez [Dmarrer] ->

Panneau de configuration -> Paramtres tactiles et du stylet. Dans longlet des Options de stylet, slectionnez Appuyer et maintenir , puis cliquez sur le bouton [Paramtres]. 26 - Numriseur actif/cran tactile Double-cliquer Pour double-cliquer, toucher llment deux fois, puis retirez immdiatement le bout du stylet. Glisser Glisser signifie dplacer un lment avec le stylet en touchant lcran, puis en dplaant et en soulevant le stylet. Pour glisser, touchez lcran tactile avec votre stylet sur llment que vous souhaitez dplacer. Tout en continuant de toucher lcran avec le stylet, glissez llment vers son nouvel emplacement en dplaant le stylet travers lcran, puis en soulevant le stylet pour le relcher. Figure 9. Faire un double clic sur lfcran Figure 10. Faire glisser un objet sur lcran 27 - Numriseur actif/cran tactile talonnage de lcran Pour assurer une correspondance prcise entre le curseur et le stylet, vous devez excuter lUtilitaire dtalonnage de lcran tactile avant dutiliser lcran tactile pour la premire fois. Faites de mme si vous avez modifi la rsolution de lcran et/ou son orientation. Pour excuter lutilitaire dtalonnage :

1 Cliquez sur [Dmarrer] -> Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur licne Paramtres PC Tablette, puis slectionnez longlet Ecran. 3 Cliquez sur le bouton [Etalonner], puis slectionnez la fonction talonner : stylet ou tactile. 4 Rglez lcran de votre portable un angle confortable, puis reprez le symbole (+) dans le coin suprieur gauche de lcran. LORSQUE VOUS TAPOTEZ SUR LCRAN PENDANT LTALONNAGE, NUTILISEZ PAS DE FORCE EXCESSIVE. DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LCRAN DEL ET/OU LCRAN TACTILE. 5 A laide du stylet ou de votre doigt (selon la fonction que vous avez choisi dtalonner), touchez fermement lcran directement sur le symbole (+). Soulevez le stylet de lcran et la cible se dplacera vers une position diffrente sur lcran. 6 Rptez ltape 5 jusqu ce que vous ayez slectionn tous les symboles (+). 7 Une fois cette opration termine, appuyez sur le bouton [OK]. 8 Touchez le stylet sur plusieurs points de lcran pour vrifier quil est bien talonn. Si vous ntes pas satisfait de ltalonnage de lcran, appuyez sur le bouton [talonner] pour recommencer. Utilisation de lcran tactile capacitif Ce PC Tablette comporte un numriseur double permettant dutiliser le stylet ou un doigt comme pointeur

(voir cran numriseur actif en page 25 pour une description). Ce type dcran permet galement dutiliser un, deux, trois ou quatre mouvements de doigts pour excuter diverses oprations, notamment pour dfiler, zoomer et pivoter. 28 - Numriseur actif/cran tactile

LA RECONNAISSANCE DES MOUVEMENTS EST ACTIVE SUIVANT LAPPLICATION UTILISE.

LE STYLET EST PRIORITAIRE PAR RAPPORT LA COMMUNICATION TACTILE. SI LE STYLET SE TROUVE DANS 

LORSQUE LUTILISATEUR POSE UN DOIGT SUR LCRAN TACTILE, CE DERNIER RAGIT COMME SI LE STYLET LE RAYON DACTION DE LCRAN, LA COMMUNICATION TACTILE EST DSACTIVE. TAIT UTILIS. Faire un clic droit sur l'cran tactile Pour excuter un clic droit avec deux doigts, placez un doigt lendroit o vous dsirez excuter le clic droit, puis tapotez rapidement une fois sur lcran. Mode mouvements Pour activer le mode mouvements, deux doigts doivent toucher lcran avec un intervalle de moins de 200 ms. Si le deuxime doigt touche lcran plus de 200 ms aprs le premier doigt, le deuxime doigt est ignor. Si plus de deux doigts touchent l'cran pendant cet instant, c'est plutt le mode mouvements avanc qui est activ. Lorsque le mode mouvements est activ, aucun mouvement de curseur n'est envoy au systme. Lorsque les deux doigts quittent lcran tactile, le mode mouvements est dsactiv. Lorsquun troisime doigt est ajout, le mode mouvements normal est dsactiv au profit du mode mouvements avanc. Si le systme ne reconnat pas un mouvement, aucune opration nest excute. Dans ce cas, retirez les deux doigts de lcran et essayez de nouveau. Mouvement de dfilement Pour faire dfiler un long document ou une page Web, placez deux doigts sur l'cran (un premier doigt rapidement suivi du deuxime). Si au moins un des doigts se dplace d'au moins 3 mm, un dfilement est produit. Si les deux doigts se dplacent dans la mme direction de faon parallle (avec une tolrance de 5 mm), le mode dfilement est activ. Si un doigt demeure immobile, aucun dfilement n'est produit. Si un des deux doigts est lev, le mode dfilement est dsactiv. 29 - Numriseur actif/cran tactile Mouvement de zoom Le mouvement de zoom est particulirement utile pour voir des images. Pour faire un zoom avant, placez deux doigts sur llment que vous dsirez agrandir (posez un premier doigt rapidement suivi du deuxime), puis cartez-les lun de lautre. Si au moins un des doigts se dplace d'au moins 10 mm, un zoom est produit. Si la distance entre les doigts change de 10 mm ou plus et que les deux doigts sont demeurs peu prs aligns, le mode zoom est activ. Si un des deux doigts s'carte de plus de 10 mm de la ligne de zoom cre lors du contact initial des doigts, le mode zoom est dsactiv. Pour faire un zoom arrire, placez deux doigts sur llment que vous dsirez rduire (posez un premier doigt rapidement suivi du deuxime), puis dplacez-les lun vers lautre. Mouvement de rotation Si vous dsirez faire pivoter un objet sur lcran, placez deux doigts sur limage que vous dsirez faire pivoter (posez un premier doigt rapidement suivi du deuxime), puis dplacez-les en sens contraire, comme pour tourner une poigne. La direction du pivotement de lobjet dpend de la direction du mouvement des doigts. Si au moins un des doigts se dplace d'au moins 12 mm, une rotation est produite. Si un doigt demeure immobile (se dplaant de moins de 5 mm dans n'importe quelle direction) et que l'autre est dplac, une rotation est produite. Si les doigts commencent se dplacer dans la mme direction, la rotation est annule. Si la distance entre les doigts change de plus de 10 mm, la rotation est annule. Accs au pav tactile sur cran Votre PC Tablette est dot dun pav tactile sur lcran, qui offre des fonctions utiles. Les fonctions du pav tactile sur cran comprennent :

Souris virtuelle : La souris virtuelle (Virtual Mouse Emulator) fonctionne presque de la mme manire quune souris ordinaire. Vous pouvez ainsi faire dfiler des pages, faire des glisser-dposer et des clics, ainsi que des actions avec les combinaisons [Ctrl]+[Clic] et [Maj]+[Clic]. 30 - Numriseur actif/cran tactile

Lancement dapplications/Touches programmes : Cette fentre donne accs cinq pages dont chacune peut contenir jusqu vingt boutons. Chaque bouton peut tre programm pour ouvrir une application, un dossier, un document ou pour effectuer une combinaison de touches (comme

[chap], [Alt+X] et [Page haut]).

Clavier numrique : Cette fentre contient un clavier logiciel qui peut tre utilis dans les calculs mathmatiques. Il fonctionne presque de la mme manire que la calculatrice ordinaire Windows. Pour accder au pav tactile sur cran, allez [Dmarrer] > Tous les programmes > Pav tactile sur cran Fujitsu (Fujitsu OnScreen TouchPad). Pour en savoir plus sur cet utilitaire, cliquez sur Utilisation et Aide

(Usage and Help). Utilisation du clavier logiciel Nuance Pour des informations gnrales sur lutilisation du clavier logiciel Nuance, veuillez consulter le Guide dintroduction fourni avec lordinateur. Si vous avez des questions sur le clavier logiciel Nuance ou si vous souhaitez en apprendre plus, cliquez sur licne Aide (semblable un point dinterrogation) dans la barre de tches Nuance. 31 - Numriseur actif/cran tactile Entretien du stylet

UTILISEZ UNIQUEMENT LE STYLET FOURNI AVEC VOTRE PC TABLETTE. NUTILISEZ PAS DE STYLETS DIFFRENTS :

ILS NONT PAS T CONUS SPCIALEMENT POUR TRE UTILISS AVEC VOTRE ORDINATEUR PORTABLE. REMPLACEZ LEMBOUT DU STYLET SIL EST US. LA GARANTIE NE COUVRE PAS LES GRATIGNURES SUR LCRAN.

LORSQUE VOUS CRIVEZ QUELQUE CHOSE, PRENEZ GARDE NE PAS GRATIGNER LA SURFACE DE LCRAN (EX. AVEC UNE MONTRE OU UN BRACELET). LE STYLET DE LORDINATEUR EST UN INSTRUMENT LECTRONIQUE QUI PEUT TRE ENDOMMAG EN CAS DUTILISATION NON CONFORME. IL CONVIENT DE LE MANIPULER AVEC PRCAUTION. LA LISTE SUIVANTE DONNE DES INDICATIONS SUR LA FAON DE BIEN UTILISER LE STYLET :

NE FAITES PAS DE GRANDS MOUVEMENTS AVEC LE STYLET ET NE L'UTILISEZ PAS COMME POINTEUR.

NE L'UTILISEZ JAMAIS SUR UNE SURFACE AUTRE QUE CELLE DE L'CRAN DE VOTRE ORDINATEUR.

N'ESSAYEZ PAS DE FAIRE TOURNER LA ZONE DE MAINTIEN PAR LE POUCE.

NE STOCKEZ JAMAIS LE STYLET DE MANIRE CE QUE LEMBOUT SUPPORTE LE POIDS DU STYLET. SI VOUS ENTREPOSEZ LE STYLET DE CETTE FAON, LES MCANISMES INTERNES RISQUENT D'TRE ENDOMMAGS (SURTOUT SI LA TEMPRATURE EST LEVE). DANS CE CAS, LE STYLET PEUT RAGIR COMME SI L'EMBOUT TAIT CONSTAMMENT ENFONC.DANS CE CAS, LE STYLET PEUT RAGIR COMME SI LEMBOUT TAIT CONSTAMMENT ENFONC. IL CONVIENT DONC DE TOUJOURS REMETTRE LE STYLET SUR SON SUPPORT ENTRE LES UTILISATIONS.

LE STYLET PEUT SUBIR LINFLUENCE DES CHAMPS LECTROMAGNTIQUES (VIBRATIONS ET TRESSAUTEMENTS DU CURSEUR). IL SE PEUT QUE LE CURSEUR VIBRE LGREMENT DANS CERTAINES ZONES DE LCRAN MME SI LON APPUIE FERMEMENT SUR LE STYLET. Modification des paramtres du stylet Vous pouvez oprer quelques changements dans les paramtres du stylet pour ladapter vos besoins

(changement de la sensibilit la pression, notamment) Pour ce faire, allez [Dmarrer] > Panneau de configuration, puis slectionnez un des affichages dans la zone Page daccueil du Panneau de configuration : . Cliquez sur licne Stylet et priphriques dentre , la fentre des paramtres saffichera alors. 32 - Numriseur actif/cran tactile Changement de la pile du stylet

NE RETIREZ PAS LEMBOUT DU STYLET POUR ACCDER LA PILE, RETIREZ UNIQUEMENT LE CAPUCHON LARRIRE DU STYLET.

IL Y A UN RISQUE DEXPLOSION SI LA PILE EST REMPLACE PAR UNE PILE DONT LE TYPE NE CORRESPOND PAS. JETEZ LES PILES USAGES CONFORMMENT AUX PROCDURES LOCALES. Capuchon du stylet Le stylet fonctionne avec une pile AAAA. Avant de commencer, assurez-vous davoir disposition une pile neuve. 1 Retirez le capuchon larrire du stylet (figure 11). 2 Retirez la pile du fourreau. 3 Insrez la pile neuve dans le fourreau dans le mme sens que celle qui y tait auparavant. 4 Refermez le capuchon. Pile AAAA Fourreau du stylet Figure 11. Remplacement de la pile 33 - Numriseur actif/cran tactile Embout du stylet Figure 12. Remplacement de lembout du stylet Remplacement de lembout du stylet Avec le temps, il se peut que lembout du stylet suse ou que des particules trangres sy attachent, risquant de rayer lcran. Une fois abm, lembout sera difficile manipuler et lcran ragira de manire imprvue. Si un problme de ce genre se produit, remplacez lembout du stylet. 1 Retirez lembout du fourreau. 2 En vous aidant dun des nouveaux conseils fournis avec votre stylet, insrez lextrmit pointue de lembout dans le fourreau et enfoncez-la fermement pour la mettre en place. Installation du cordon Pour viter dchapper ou de perdre votre stylo, attachez-le votre ordinateur laide du cordon fourni. Pour attacher le cordon votre PC Tablette, suivez les tapes suivantes :

1 Attachez lextrmit du cordon (petite boucle) votre stylet. Pour ce faire, enfilez la petite boucle travers le trou du stylo, puis faites passer lautre extrmit du cordon travers la boucle. 2 Attachez la grande boucle du cordon au point dattache de votre ordinateur. Pour ce faire, enfilez le bout du cordon (grande boucle) travers le point dattache, puis faites passer le stylo travers la grande boucle. Figure 13. Installation du cordon 34 - Numriseur actif/cran tactile Boutons du PC Tablette Les trois boutons du PC Tablette sont situs sur le ct droit de lordinateur lorsque celui-ci est lhorizontale. Deux de ces boutons ont une fonction secondaire. Pour activer les fonctions secondaires, appuyez sur le bouton correspondant et maintenez-le enfonc. Bouton du clavier Ctl-Alt-Suppr Bouton de rotation Figure 14. Boutons dapplication LE BOUTON CTRL-ALT-SUPPR EST LE SEUL POUVOIR TRE UTILIS LORSQUUNE SESSION DEXPLOITATION EST EN COURS DE LANCEMENT OU LORSQUE LORDINATEUR EST BLOQU 

(CEST--DIRE LORSQUE LA FENTRE OUVERTURE DE SESSION OU ORDINATEUR BLOQU APPARAT SUR LE BUREAU). 35 - Boutons du PC Tablette Icne et nom des boutons Fonction principale

(Appuyer) Fonction secondaire

(Appuyer et maintenir) Splash Screen*

Pression lcran de dmarrage initial Dans lutilitaire de configura tion du BIOS Lancer le tableau d'entre Tablette PC Lancer FujitsuHL Menu de la procdure d'amorage Entre Rotation de lcran Activation/d sactivation de la rotation automatique Utilitaire de configurati on du BIOS Bas Bouton du clavier Bouton de rotation Description Le bouton Clavier permet de lancer le tableau d'entre Tablette PC. Lorsque vous appuyez sur ce bouton et le maintenez enfonc, vous invoquez lutilitaire FujitsuHL qui propose des raccourcis clavier pour lancer des outils et tches frquemment utiliss, y compris pour lapplication de webcam. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton Clavier alors que le logo Fujitsu apparat durant la procdure damorage du systme, vous verrez souvrir le menu damorage. Lorsque vous tes dans lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS, ce bouton peut tre utilis titre de touche [Entre].. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton de rotation, l'orientation de l'cran du systme change de Verticale Horizontale ou d'Horizontale Verticale. Lorsque vous souhaitez utiliser le PC tablette comme livre lectronique, par exemple, vous pourriez utiliser l'orientation verticale, mais lorsque vous accdez aux feuilles de calculs, vous utilisez normalement l'orientation horizontale. Lorsque vous appuyez sur ce bouton et le maintenez enfonc, vous activez ou dsactivez la fonction de rotation automatique. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton de rotation alors que le logo Fujitsu apparat durant la procdure damorage du systme, vous voyez souvrir lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS. Lorsque vous tes dans lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS, ce bouton peut tre utilis titre de touche Bas.. 36 - Boutons du PC Tablette Icne et nom des boutons Fonction principale

(Appuyer) Fonction secondaire

(Appuyer et maintenir) Splash Screen*

Pression lcran de dmarrage initial Dans lutilitaire de configura tion du BIOS Description Ctrl+Alt+Su ppr Aucune Menu Amorage Haut Bouton Ctrl-Alt-

Suppr Lorsque Ctl-Alt-Del est enfonc pendant environ une seconde, cette action dclenche les mmes oprations que si vous aviez appuy sur les touches Ctrl-Alt-Suppr du clavier. Si vous appuyez sur Ctrl+Alt+Del alors que le logo Fujitsu apparat durant la procdure damorage du systme, vous verrez souvrir le menu

* Laction Press at Splash Screen dsigne laction qui se produit quand vous appuyez sur le bouton lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat au premier dmarrage de lordinateur. 37 - Boutons du PC Tablette Chapitre 2 Guide dintroduction votre PC Tablette Sources dalimentation Votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC Fujitsu peut utiliser trois sources dalimentation diffrentes : une batterie principale au lithium-polymre, un adaptateur secteur et un adaptateur auto/avion. Connexion des adaptateurs dalimentation Ladaptateur secteur ou ladaptateur auto/avion optionnel permet de faire fonctionner votre PC Tablette et de charger les batteries. Connexion de ladaptateur secteur 1 Branchez le cble de sortie c.c. dans la prise dalimentation c.c. de votre ordinateur. 2 Branchez ladaptateur secteur sur une prise lectrique secteur (c.a.). Connexion de ladaptateur auto/avion disponible en option 1 Branchez le cble de sortie c.c. sur la prise dalimentation c.c. de votre ordinateur. 2 Branchez ladaptateur auto/avion dans lallume-cigare dune automobile, ou 3 Branchez ladaptateur auto/avion sur la prise dalimentation c.c. de votre sige davion. 38 Adaptateur secteur Prise dalimentation c.c. Figure 15. Connexion de ladaptateur secteur Passer dune alimentation sur adaptateur secteur ou auto/avion une alimentation sur batterie 1 Assurez-vous quau moins une batterie charge est installe dans votre ordinateur. 2 Dbranchez ladaptateur secteur ou ladaptateur auto/avion. LORSQUE VOUS RECEVEZ VOTRE NOUVEL ORDINATEUR, LA BATTERIE AU LITHIUM-POLYMRE NEST PAS CHARGE. LORS DE LA PREMIRE UTILISATION DE VOTRE ORDINATEUR, VOUS DEVEZ CONNECTER LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR OU LADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION. 39 - Sources dalimentation Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC Mise sous tension Bouton/dalimentation/veille/reprise Lorsque votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC est teint, le bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise permet de lallumer. Pour allumer votre ordinateur, vous devez avoir connect votre adaptateur secteur ou disposer dune batterie au lithium-polymre charge. LORSQUE VOUS ALLUMEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR PORTABLE, ASSUREZ-VOUS DAVOIR UNE SOURCE DALIMENTATION. VOUS DEVEZ DONC AVOIR AU MOINS UNE BATTERIE INSTALLE ET CHARGE OU AVOIR BRANCH LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR OU LADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION UNE PRISE SOUS TENSION. Pour allumer lordinateur STYLISTIC lorsquil est compltement teint, appuyez sur le bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise situ en haut droite du clavier. Lorsque vous avez termin dutiliser votre ordinateur, vous pouvez soit le mettre en mode veille (sommeil), soit lteindre compltement. Voir Mode sommeil en page 46 et Mise hors tension en page 49. 

Figure 16. Commutateur dalimentation/veille/reprise 40 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC Lorsque vous allumez votre ordinateur STYLISTIC, ce dernier excute un auto-test de mise sous tension pour vrifier les composants internes et la configuration. Si une anomalie est dcouverte, votre systme met un avertissement audio et/ou affiche un message derreur. Voir Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 69. Selon la nature du problme, vous pourrez poursuivre le dmarrage du systme dexploitation ou vous devrez ouvrir lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS pour corriger certains paramtres. Une fois les diagnostics termins, le PC Tablette STYLISTIC charge le systme dexploitation. VOUS NE DEVEZ JAMAIS TEINDRE VOTRE ORDINATEUR PORTABLE DURANT LAUTO-TEST DE MISE SOUS TENSION. AUTREMENT, LA PROCHAINE FOIS QUE VOUS ALLUMEREZ LORDINATEUR, CE DERNIER AFFICHERA UN MESSAGE DERREUR. Voir Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 69. Procdure damorage La procdure de dmarrage de lordinateur PC Tablette invoque une procdure damorage qui fait dabord appel au BIOS. La premire fois que lordinateur STYLISTIC est allum, la mmoire principale du systme est vide et doit trouver les instructions de dmarrage de lordinateur. Ces informations se trouvent dans le programme BIOS. Chaque fois que vous dmarrez ou redmarrez votre ordinateur, il excute une procdure damorage et lcran affiche le logo Fujitsu jusqu ce que le systme dexploitation soit charg. Durant lamorage, votre systme excute une procdure damorage standard y compris un auto-test de mise sous tension. Si la procdure damorage est excute sans chec et sans demande daccs lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS, le message de bienvenue du systme dexploitation saffiche. La procdure damorage est excute lorsque :

Vous allumez votre ordinateur PC Tablette.

Vous redmarrez le PC Tablette partir de la bote de dialogue darrt de Windows.

Un logiciel lance un redmarrage du systme. Exemple : Lorsque vous installez une nouvelle application. 41 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC Mots de passe daccs au disque dur Pour mieux scuriser vos donnes, vous pouvez crer des mots de passe contrlant laccs au(x) disque(s) dur(s). Cette fonction est gre par lutilitaire de configuration BIOS. Pour savoir comment procder, reportez-vous la section Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS ci-aprs. RETENEZ BIEN VOS MOTS DE PASSE. SI VOUS CONFIGUREZ DES MOTS DE PASSE DE MATRE ET DUTILISATEUR, PUIS QUE VOUS LES OUBLIEZ, FUJITSU NE POURRA PAS RINITIALISER VOTRE SYSTME. VOUS RISQUERIEZ ALORS DE PERDRE DES DONNES ET DE DEVOIR REMPLACER VOTRE CARTE SYSTME OU VOTRE DISQUE DUR. Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS Lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS est un programme qui dfinit lenvironnement de fonctionnement de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC. Votre BIOS a t configur en usine pour des conditions dutilisation normales. Vous ne devriez donc pas avoir configurer ni modifier votre environnement BIOS pour utiliser lordinateur. Lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS permet de configurer :

Les paramtres de commande des priphriques, notamment les adresses dentre-sortie et les lecteurs de dmarrage.

Paramtres de scurit des donnes du systme, notamment les mots de passe. Procdure d'accs l'utilitaire de configuration du BIOS POUR NAVIGUER LINTRIEUR DE LUTILITAIRE DE CONFIGURATION DU BIOS, VOUS DEVEZ DISPOSER DUN CLAVIER EXTERNE CONNECT LORDINATEUR. Pour ouvrir l'utilitaire de configuration du BIOS, excutez les oprations suivantes :

1 Allumez ou redmarrez votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC. 42 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC 2 Pour entrer dans lutilitaire, appuyez sur le bouton Rotation (ou sur la touche [F2] si vous avez un clavier externe) lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat lcran. Le menu principal de lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS saffichera avec les paramtres courants. 3 Avec la [TOUCHE FLCHE DROITE] ou la [TOUCHE FLCHE GAUCHE], parcourez les autres menus de configuration et vrifiez/modifiez les paramtres actuels. Guide dinformation sur le BIOS Un guide dinformation sur le BIOS de votre ordinateur portable est disponible en ligne. Pour y accder, veuillez visiter notre site de service la clientle et dassistance http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support : sous Online Support (Soutien en ligne), slectionnez Users Guides (Guides dutilisation). Slectionnez votre produit, sa srie et son modle, puis cliquez sur [Go]. Sous longlet Manuals (Manuels), slectionnez BIOS Guide (Guide du BIOS). Dmarrage du systme Il est fortement recommand de ne pas installer de priphrique externe avant que la procdure de dmarrage ne soit entirement termine. La premire fois que vous allumez votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC, lcran affiche le logo Fujitsu. Si vous nintervenez pas, lordinateur charge le systme dexploitation et lance la procdure douverture Windows. Premier dmarrage de Windows IMPORTANT : PENDANT LA PROCDURE DE CONFIGURATION, NE DBRANCHEZ PAS LE CORDON DALIMENTATION, NAPPUYEZ SUR AUCUN BOUTON ET NUTILISEZ AUCUN PRIPHRIQUE TEL QUE LA SOURIS OU LE CLAVIER. Pour profiter au maximum de votre systme dexploitation Windows, il vous est suggr de lenregistrer lors de sa premire utilisation. 43 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC 1 Premirement, vous devrez lire et accepter les contrats de licence dutilisation.

SI VOUS REFUSEZ DACCEPTER LE CONTRAT DE LICENCE, LE SYSTME VOUS DEMANDE DE REVOIR LE CONTRAT DE LICENCE ET DY LIRE LES INFORMATIONS TRAITANT DU RETOUR DE WINDOWS SON FABRICANT, OU DE SIMPLEMENT TEINDRE LE PC TABLETTE STYLISTIC.

VOUS NE POURREZ LUTILISER QUE SI VOUS ACCEPTEZ LE CONTRAT DE LICENCE. SI VOUS NALLEZ PAS AU BOUT DE CETTE PROCDURE, VOTRE PC TABLETTE RETOURNE LCRAN DE BIENVENUE WINDOWS, MME SI VOUS ESSAYEZ DE LTEINDRE ET DE LE REDMARRER. 2 Vous serez invit saisir vos nom dutilisateur et mot de passe, et vous pourrez choisir une icne pour votre compte. 3 Lcran suivant vous demande dindiquer le Nom de lordinateur (Computer name). 4 Vous verrez ensuite un cran Aider protger automatiquement Windows dans lequel le choix par dfaut est Utiliser les paramtres recommands . Les deux autres choix sont : Installer uniquement des mises jour importantes et Demandez-moi plus tard . Slectionnez parmi les trois choix. 5 Rglez vos paramtres dheure et de date sur lcran suivant. 6 Vous verrez ensuite lcran Slectionnez lemplacement actuel de votre ordinateur . Choisissez parmi Domicile, Travail (par dfaut) et Lieu public. 7 Lcran Merci suit et une offre gratuite de Norton est propose. Plusieurs crans se suivent pendant que Windows vrifie la performance du systme. 8 Windows dmarre alors pour la premire fois. Conformment aux indications ci-dessus, lors de votre premire initialisation du systme, lcran sera vide pendant environ deux minutes. Cela est normal. Durant cette priode, ne dbranchez pas le cordon dalimentation, nappuyez sur aucun bouton et nutilisez aucun priphrique tel que la souris ou le clavier. Enregistrement de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC chez Fujitsu Pour enregistrer votre ordinateur STYLISTIC, vous pouvez aller sur notre site Internet :

http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/. Pour vous enregistrer en ligne, vous devez avoir un compte valide auprs dun fournisseur daccs Internet. 44 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC Installation de ClickMe!

ClickMe!

AVANT DINSTALLER LUTILITAIRE CLICK ME!, VRIFIEZ SI LE COMMUTATEUR DE RSEAU SANS FIL EST LA POSITION DE MARCHE. Lors du premier dmarrage de votre ordinateur, vous verrez une fentre Paramtres principaux de lordinateur . Cette fentre explique les installations qui seront effectues par lutilitaire Click Me! Si vous cliquez sur [Excuter], Click Me! commencera sinstaller. Aprs avoir cliqu sur le bouton, si une fentre Contrle de compte dutilisateur apparat, il faudra donner votre permission pour continuer. Cliquez sur [Continuer] pour poursuivre. Si vous annulez cette opration, licne Click Me! apparatra sur votre bureau pour une installation future. IL EXISTE PEUT-TRE DES APPLICATIONS FOURNIES PAR DAUTRES FABRICANTS QUI NE SONT PAS INSTALLES PAR LUTILITAIRE CLICK ME! POUR OBTENIR DAVANTAGE DE RENSEIGNEMENTS, REPORTEZ-VOUS AU GUIDE DINTRODUCTION. 45 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC Gestion de lalimentation Votre PC Tablette Fujitsu STYLISTIC possde plusieurs dispositifs permettant dconomiser lnergie des batteries. Certains dentre eux sont automatiques et ne ncessitent donc aucune intervention. Cependant, dautres dpendent de paramtres que vous pouvez configurer en fonction de vos conditions dutilisation, notamment en ce qui concerne la luminosit de lcran. Les paramtres de gestion interne de lalimentation peuvent tre configurs dans votre systme dexploitation, dans une application intgre de gestion de lalimentation ou dans lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS. Outre les dispositifs prcdents de conservation de lnergie de la batterie, dautres moyens sont votre disposition pour viter lpuisement trop rapide de votre batterie. Par exemple, vous pouvez crer un profil de conservation de lnergie appropri, mettre votre ordinateur en mode sommeil lorsquil nexcute aucune opration et vous pouvez limiter lutilisation des priphriques consommant beaucoup dnergie. linstar de tous les ordinateurs portables aliments par batterie, vous devez trouver le meilleur compromis entre performance et rendement nergtique. Bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise Lorsque votre PC Tablette est allum, vous pouvez utiliser le commutateur dalimentation/veille/reprise pour placer manuellement votre systme en mode veille. Assurez-vous alors que lordinateur nest pas en train daccder des donnes, puis enfoncez et relchez immdiatement le bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise. Pour rveiller lordinateur lorsquil est en mode sommeil, appuyez de nouveau sur le bouton veille/reprise. Pour savoir si lordinateur est en mode veille, regardez le voyant lumineux dalimentation. Si le voyant est allum sans clignoter, lordinateur est entirement fonctionnel. Si le voyant est allum et quil clignote, lordinateur est en mode sommeil. Si le voyant est teint, lordinateur est teint ou en veille prolonge. Mode sommeil Lorsque le mode sommeil est activ, Windows conserve le contenu de votre mmoire de systme durant la priode dinactivit en maintenant lalimentation de certains composants critiques. Ce mode teint lunit centrale, lcran, le disque dur et tous les autres composants internes sauf ceux qui sont ncessaires pour conserver la mmoire du systme et permettre son redmarrage. 46 - Gestion de lalimentation Votre PC Tablette peut tre mis en sommeil de plusieurs faons :

En appuyant sur le bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise (si lordinateur est allum).

En slectionnant Sommeil aprs avoir cliqu sur le bouton [Dmarrer] puis en cliquant sur la petite flche situe en bas droite de la fentre.

Lorsque le dlai dinactivit est atteint.

En laissant la charge de la batterie descendre au niveau Avertissement de batterie faible. Dans ces situations, la mmoire de systme de lordinateur enregistre gnralement le fichier sur lequel vous travaillez, des informations sur les applications ouvertes et dautres donnes ncessaires aux oprations en cours. Lorsque vous quittez le mode veille, lordinateur retournera ltat o vous lavez laiss. Pour reprendre lutilisation de lordinateur, vous devez employer le bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise et vous devez disposer dune source dalimentation valide.

SI LORDINATEUR UTILISE LALIMENTATION PAR BATTERIE, NOUBLIEZ PAS QUE LA BATTERIE CONTINUE SE DCHARGER MME EN MODE VEILLE, MAIS PLUS LENTEMENT QUEN MODE DE FONCTIONNEMENT NORMAL.

SI VOUS DSACTIVEZ LE COMMUTATEUR DALIMENTATION/VEILLE/REPRISE, VOUS NE POURREZ PLUS LUTILISER POUR METTRE LORDINATEUR PC TABLETTE EN MODE SOMMEIL OU EN VEILLE PROLONGE

(ENREGISTREMENT SUR LE DISQUE). LA FONCTION DE REPRISE DU BOUTON NE PEUT PAS TRE DSACTIVE.

SI VOTRE ORDINATEUR ACCDE ACTIVEMENT DES INFORMATIONS AU MOMENT O VOUS LE METTEZ EN MODE SOMMEIL OU EN MODE VEILLE PROLONGE, LES MODIFICATIONS AUX FICHIERS OUVERTS NE SERONT PAS PERDUES. LORSQUE VOUS ACTIVEZ LE MODE SOMMEIL, LES FICHIERS SONT LAISSS OUVERTS ET LA MMOIRE DEMEURE ACTIVE. SI VOUS CHOISISSEZ LE MODE VEILLE PROLONGE, LA MMOIRE EST TRANSFRE SUR LE DISQUE DUR INTERNE.

LE PRINCIPAL AVANTAGE DU MODE VEILLE PROLONGE EST QUAUCUNE NERGIE NEST NCESSAIRE POUR CONSERVER VOS DONNES. CET AVANTAGE EST PARTICULIREMENT IMPORTANT SI VOUS COMPTEZ LAISSER VOTRE ORDINATEUR EN VEILLE PENDANT DE LONGUES PRIODES. LES PRINCIPAUX INCONVNIENTS DE LA VEILLE PROLONGE SONT UNE PLUS LONGUE DURE DES PROCDURES DE MISE EN VEILLE ET DE REPRISE, AINSI QUE LA RINITIALISATION DES PRIPHRIQUES. 47 - Gestion de lalimentation Fonction de veille prolonge Le mode de veille prolonge enregistre le contenu de la mmoire du systme sur le disque dur du PC Tablette. Cette fonction peut tre active et dsactive. Le mode Veille prolonge est activ par dfaut. Dfinition des actions du bouton dalimentation Pour dfinir ce que le bouton dalimentation fait lorsque vous appuyez dessus, excutez les tapes suivantes :

1 Dans le menu Dmarrer, ouvrez le panneau de configuration et cliquez sur licne Options dalimentation. 2 Puis slectionnez Choisir ce que fait le bouton dalimentation ou Choisir ce que fait la fermeture du couvercle , puis faites votre slection (Ne rien faire, Sommeil, Veille prolonge ou Arrter). Gestion de lalimentation dans Windows Licne des options dalimentation disponible dans le Panneau de configuration Windows vous permet de configurer certains paramtres de gestion de lalimentation. Par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser les Options dalimentation pour rgler les valeurs de temporisation (dlai dinactivit) afin dteindre lcran et les disques durs selon que lordinateur est aliment par batterie ou par lun des adaptateurs. Redmarrage du systme Si votre systme est allum et que vous dsirez le redmarrer, vous devez excuter les oprations suivantes :

1 Cliquez sur le bouton [Dmarrer], puis positionnez le curseur sur la petite flche situe en bas droite du panneau de droite. 2 Dans la liste, slectionnez Redmarrer. SI VOUS ARRTEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR PC TABLETTE STYLISTIC SANS FERMER WINDOWS OU SI VOUS LALLUMEZ MOINS DE 10 SECONDES APRS LAVOIR ARRT, VOUS RISQUEZ DE PROVOQUER UNE ERREUR LORS DU PROCHAIN DMARRAGE DU SYSTME. 48 - Gestion de lalimentation Mise hors tension Si vous arrtez lordinateur alors quun disque est en cours dutilisation, vous risquez de perdre des donnes. Pour vous assurer que lordinateur sarrte sans erreur, utilisez la procdure darrt Windows. AVANT DE COUPER LALIMENTATION LECTRIQUE, NOUBLIEZ PAS DE FERMER TOUS LES FICHIERS, DE QUITTER TOUTES LES APPLICATIONS ET DARRTER VOTRE SYSTME DEXPLOITATION. SI DES FICHIERS SONT OUVERTS LORSQUE VOUS COUPEZ LALIMENTATION, VOUS PERDREZ TOUTES LES MODIFICATIONS NAYANT PAS T ENREGISTRES ET VOUS RISQUEZ DE CAUSER DES ERREURS DE DISQUE. Si vous arrtez votre systme depuis Windows, vous permettez lordinateur de terminer les oprations en cours, vous lui permettez aussi dexcuter les oprations de mise hors tension dans le bon ordre et vous vitez les risques derreur. La procdure approprie est la suivante :

1 Cliquez sur le bouton [Dmarrer], puis positionnez le curseur sur la petite flche situe en bas droite du panneau de droite. 2 Dans la liste, slectionnez [Arrter]. Si vous comptez entreposer votre PC Tablette pendant un mois ou plus, consultez la section Entretien. 49 - Gestion de lalimentation Chapitre 3 Options installables par lutilisateur Batterie au lithium-polymre Votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC possde une batterie au lithium-polymre qui lui permet de fonctionner lorsque vous navez pas accs une source dalimentation externe. Cette batterie est robuste et durable, mais elle ne doit pas tre expose des tempratures extrmes, des tensions leves, des produits chimiques ou dautres situations dangereuses. Si la batterie au lithium-polymre est utilise dans les conditions suivantes, son autonomie peut en tre rduite :

Utilise des tempratures en de de 5C ou au-del de 35C (41F 95F). Les tempratures extrmes ne diminuent pas seulement lefficacit du chargement, elles risquent galement de provoquer la dtrioration de la batterie. Si vous tentez de charger une batterie sous une temprature ambiante dpassant les seuils de tolrance, vous voyez clignoter licne de charge en cours sur le tableau de voyants dtat.

Lorsque vous vous servez dun dispositif courant lev tel quun lecteur optique externe ou un disque dur, lutilisation de ladaptateur secteur vous permettra de conserver la dure de vie de la batterie. NE LAISSEZ JAMAIS UNE BATTERIE DFECTUEUSE DANS PC TABLETTE. ELLE POURRAIT ENDOMMAGER LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR, LADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION DISPONIBLE EN OPTION OU LORDINATEUR LUI-MME. UNE BATTERIE ENDOMMAGE PEUT GALEMENT NUIRE AU FONCTIONNEMENT DE LORDINATEUR EN UTILISANT TOUT LE COURANT DISPONIBLE. 50

LAUTONOMIE DE LA BATTERIE DPEND DE LA LUMINOSIT DE LCRAN, DES APPLICATIONS, DES FONCTIONS, DES PARAMTRES DE GESTION DE LALIMENTATION, DE LTAT DE LA BATTERIE, AINSI QUE DAUTRES PRFRENCES DE LUTILISATEUR. LUTILISATION DU DISQUE DUR A GALEMENT UN EFFET NOTOIRE SUR LAUTONOMIE. EN OUTRE, LA CAPACIT DE CHARGE DE LA BATTERIE DIMINUE AVEC LUSAGE. SI VOTRE BATTERIE PERD RAPIDEMENT SA CHARGE, REMPLACEZ-LA PAR UNE NEUVE.

IL EST POSSIBLE QUE DES LOIS FDRALES, PROVINCIALES OU LOCALES INTERDISENT DE JETER DES BATTERIES DANS LES DCHETS DOMESTIQUES. CONTRIBUEZ LA PROTECTION DE LENVIRONNEMENT ET JETEZ VOS BATTERIES USES CONFORMMENT AUX LOIS EN VIGUEUR. POUR OBTENIR DES INFORMATIONS SUR LE RECYCLAGE ET LA MISE AUX REBUTS DES VIEILLES BATTERIES, CONSULTEZ LES AUTORITS LOCALES OU PROVINCIALES COMPTENTES. SI VOUS NARRIVEZ PAS TROUVER CES INFORMATIONS, CONTACTEZ UN PRPOS DU SERVICE LA CLIENTLE AU 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487). Procdure de recharge des batteries Pour connatre le niveau de charge de votre batterie principale au lithium-polymre, vrifiez le voyant

de batterie dans le tableau de voyants dtat. Ce voyant change selon le niveau de charge de la batterie. La batterie au lithium-polymre peut tre recharge avec ladaptateur secteur ou avec ladaptateur auto/avion. Pour recharger une batterie, assurez-vous quelle est bien installe dans le PC Tablette STYLISTIC et connectez ladaptateur secteur ou ladaptateur auto/avion. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE LE VOYANT DE BATTERIE EN CHARGE SUR LE TABLEAU DE VOYANTS DTAT INDIQUE BIEN LE NIVEAU DE CHARGE EN COURS. Puisque les batteries au lithium-polymre nont aucun effet de mmoire, il nest pas ncessaire de dcharger compltement votre batterie avant de la recharger. La dure de charge sera nettement plus longue si vous utilisez le PC Tablette pendant que la batterie se charge. Si vous dsirez charger la batterie le plus rapidement possible, placez votre ordinateur en mode sommeil ou teignez-le pendant que la batterie se charge. (Pour

de plus amples informations sur le mode sommeil et la procdure darrt, reportez-vous Gestion de lalimentation en page 46.) 51 - Batterie au lithium-polymre SI VOUS UTILISEZ DES PRIPHRIQUES FORTE CONSOMMATION DNERGIE OU SI VOUS

ACCDEZ FRQUEMMENT AU LECTEUR OPTIQUE EXTERNE, LA BATTERIE RISQUE DE NE PAS SE CHARGER COMPLTEMENT. Batterie faible Lorsque la batterie est faible, le systme affiche un avis de batterie faible. Si vous ne prtez pas attention cet avis de batterie faible, la batterie continuera se dcharger jusqu ce quelle ne puisse plus faire fonctionner le systme. Lorsque cela se produit, lordinateur se place en mode sommeil. Dans un tel cas, rien ne garantit que toutes vos donnes seront sauvegardes.

LORSQUE LAVIS DE BATTERIE FAIBLE APPARAT, VOUS DEVEZ ENREGISTRER TOUTES VOS DONNES ACTIVES

ET PLACER VOTRE ORDINATEUR EN MODE SOMMEIL JUSQU CE QUE VOUS PUISSIEZ DISPOSER DUNE AUTRE SOURCE DALIMENTATION. VOUS DEVEZ CONNECTER LE PLUS RAPIDEMENT POSSIBLE UNE BATTERIE CHARGE, UN ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR OU UN ADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION. LORSQUE LORDINATEUR EST EN MODE SOMMEIL, IL DOIT TOUJOURS DISPOSER DUNE BONNE SOURCE DALIMENTATION. SI VOUS RETIREZ TOUTES LES SOURCES DALIMENTATION ALORS QUE LORDINATEUR

EST EN MODE SOMMEIL, TOUTES LES DONNES NAYANT PAS T SAUVEGARDES SERONT PERDUES. Si lordinateur se place en mode veille car batterie puise , le voyant dtat apparat comme si lordinateur tait en mode sommeil normal. Lorsque lordinateur est en mode Veille de batterie puise, il est impossible den reprendre lutilisation avant davoir connect une source dalimentation valide provenant dun adaptateur ou dune batterie charge. Lorsque vous avez connect une alimentation valide, vous devez ensuite appuyer sur linterrupteur dalimentation/veille/reprise pour reprendre lutilisation de lordinateur. Lorsque lordinateur est en mode veille de batterie puise, vos donnes peuvent tre sauvegardes pendant une certaine priode, mais si vous ne connectez pas rapidement une source dalimentation valide, le voyant dalimentation cesse de clignoter et steint. Vous avez alors perdu toutes les donnes nayant pas t enregistres. Ds que vous fournissez une source dalimentation, vous pouvez poursuivre lutilisation

du PC Tablette pendant que la batterie se recharge. Batterie court-circuite Le tableau de voyants dtat comprend un voyant de charge indiquant le niveau de charge disponible de la batterie. Si ce voyant affiche un voyant rouge clignotant, cela signifie que la batterie est endommage :

elle doit donc tre remplace pour viter quelle ne nuise dautres composants de votre ordinateur. 52 - Batterie au lithium-polymre Remplacement de la batterie Si vous achetez une batterie supplmentaire de rechange, vous pourrez remplacer la batterie principale

si elle vient se dcharger compltement. Deux mthodes soffrent vous pour remplacer votre batterie :

le remplacement hors tension et le remplacement sous tension. Remplacement hors tension Pour remplacer la batterie alors que le systme est hors tension, excutez les oprations suivantes :

1 Trouvez une batterie charge, prte linstallation. 2 Excutez lune des deux tapes suivantes :

Cliquez sur licne de lutilitaire Fujitsu Battery Swap de votre bureau Windows. Suivez les instructions qui apparaissent lcran pour mettre lordinateur en Veille prolonge. Cette procdure permet

de sauvegarder vos donnes et dteindre lordinateur. Vous pouvez ensuite changer la batterie.

Sauvegardez vos donnes, puis teignez lordinateur. Vous pouvez ensuite changer la batterie. 3 Notez que le loquet de la batterie situ gauche est mont sur ressort mais que le loquet de droite ne lest pas. Dgagez la batterie en poussant dabord le loquet droit vers larrire, puis en poussant et en maintenant le loquet gauche (figure 17). Tout en maintenant le loquet gauche, soulevez la batterie au point de soulvement

(figure 18). 4 Pour installer la batterie neuve, vrifiez dabord que le loquet droit est retir. Tout en poussant le loquet gauche vers larrire et en le maintenant ainsi, insrez la batterie neuve dans le compartiment (Figures 19 et 20). Bloquez la batterie en position en faisant glisser le loquet droit vers lavant. 53 - Batterie au lithium-polymre 5 Branchez ladaptateur secteur et allumez lordinateur. Point de soulvement Figure 17. Dverrouillage de la batterie Figure 18. Retrait de la batterie Figure 19. Remplacement de la batterie Figure 20. Verrouillage de la batterie 54 - Batterie au lithium-polymre Remplacement sous tension Pour remplacer la batterie alors que le systme est sous tension, excutez les oprations suivantes :

AVANT DENLEVER LA BATTERIE, ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR EST BIEN CONNECT. LORDINATEUR NE DISPOSE DAUCUNE BATTERIE TEMPORAIRE POUR FAIRE FONCTIONNER LE SYSTME DURANT LE REMPLACEMENT DE LA BATTERIE. SI VOUS NUTILISEZ PAS LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR, VOUS PERDREZ TOUTES LES DONNES NON ENREGISTRES. 1 Branchez ladaptateur secteur sur votre ordinateur, puis sur une prise lectrique sous tension. 2 Suivez les tapes 3 5 de la section Remplacement hors tension . SI LE CONNECTEUR DE LA BATTERIE AU LITHIUM-POLYMRE NEST PAS BIEN ENFONC, VOUS RISQUEZ DE NE PAS POUVOIR UTILISER LORDINATEUR OU RECHARGER LA BATTERIE. 55 - Batterie au lithium-polymre Cartes Secure Digital Votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC peut accueillir des cartes Secure Digital (SD), sur lesquelles vous pouvez stocker et transfrer des donnes vers et partir de divers dispositifs numriques. Ces cartes utilisent une architecture de mmoire flash, ce qui veut dire que vous navez pas besoin dune source dnergie pour conserver les donnes. Les cartes SD permettent un stockage mobile sur plusieurs types de dispositifs, tels que des tlphones cellulaires, des systmes de positionnement mondial, des appareils photo numriques et des assistants numriques personnels. Les cartes SD transfrent les donnes rapidement et sollicitent trs peu la batterie. Carte SD Fente pour carte SD

(emplacement approximatif sur le dessous) Fente pour carte SD Carte SD Figure 21. Fente pour cartes SD Accs par lavant Figure 22. Fente pour cartes SD Accs par larrire Insrer des cartes SD Lorsque vous tenez le PC Tablette en position horizontale avec lavant de lappareil face vous et la camra web gauche, la fente pour carte SD est situe dans la partie suprieure du ct gauche, larrire (Figures 21 et 22). Pour installer une carte SD, excutez les oprations suivantes :

56 - Cartes Secure Digital SI VOUS INSREZ OU RETIREZ UNE CARTE SD PENDANT LE PROCESSUS DARRT OU DE DMARRAGE DE VOTRE PC TABLETTE STYLISTIC, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LA CARTE ET/OU VOTRE ORDINATEUR. NINSREZ PAS DE CARTE DANS LA FENTE SIL Y A DE LEAU OU TOUTE AUTRE SUBSTANCE SUR LA CARTE, CAR VOUS POURRIEZ ENDOMMAGER DE FAON PERMANENTE LA CARTE, VOTRE PC TABLETTE STYLISTIC OU LES DEUX. 1 Le guide dutilisation de la carte mmoire vous indiquera comment linstaller. Certaines cartes pourraient ncessiter que votre ordinateur soit teint pendant que vous les insrez. 2 Avant dinsrer votre carte, assurez-vous quaucune autre carte nest dj installe dans la fente. Si cest le cas, consultez la rubrique Retirer une carte SD. 3 Tenez lordinateur de sorte que ltiquette soit dans le mme sens que lcran, puis insrez votre carte dans la fente. 4 Poussez fermement la carte dans la fente jusqu ce quelle soit loge dans le connecteur. Retirer une carte SD Pour retirer une carte SD, suivez ces tapes faciles :

LE GUIDE DUTILISATION DE LA CARTE MMOIRE VOUS INDIQUERA COMMENT LA RETIRER. CERTAINES CARTES POURRAIENT NCESSITER QUE VOTRE PC TABLETTE STYLISTIC SOIT EN MODE SOMMEIL OU QUIL SOIT TEINT PENDANT QUE VOUS LES RETIREZ. 1 Dans la zone de notification, cliquez sur licne Retirer le priphrique en toute scurit . Dans la liste, mettez la carte en surbrillance, puis cliquez sur Stop. 2 Enfoncez la carte SD jusqu ce que vous sentiez un dclic de dverrouillage. La carte sjecte ensuite de la fente pour que vous puissiez la retirer. 57 - Cartes Secure Digital Chapitre 4 Dpannage de votre PC Tablette Dpannage Il est possible que vous rencontriez parfois des problmes simples de configuration ou dexploitation pouvant tre rsolus sur le champ, ou des problmes au niveau dun priphrique pouvant tre rsolus en remplaant lquipement. Les informations contenues dans cette section vous aideront isoler et rsoudre certains de ces problmes simples et identifier les pannes qui ncessitent une rparation. Identification du problme Si vous prouvez un problme, consultez la procdure suivante avant dentreprendre un processus de dpannage complexe :

1 teignez votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC. 2 Assurez-vous que ladaptateur secteur est connect votre ordinateur portable et une source dalimentation secteur active. 3 Assurez-vous que les cartes ventuellement installes sur lordinateur sont bien branches. Si un problme se produit avec une carte, retirez-la de la fente, vous liminerez ainsi ce risque de dfaillance. 4 Assurez-vous que tous les priphriques connects aux connecteurs externes sont bien branchs. Vous pouvez galement dconnecter ces priphriques pour vous assurer quils ne sont pas lorigine de la panne. 5 Mettez votre PC Tablette en marche. Assurez-vous quil soit rest hors fonction pendant 10 secondes au moins avant de le remettre en marche. 58 6 Laissez sexcuter la procdure damorage. 7 Si le problme na pas t rsolu, consultez le tableau suivant pour obtenir des renseignements plus dtaills concernant le dpannage. SI VOUS PRENEZ EN NOTE TOUT CE QUE VOUS ESSAYEZ, LE SERVICE DASSISTANCE POURRA VOUS AIDER PLUS RAPIDEMENT EN VOUS DONNANT DES SUGGESTIONS SUPPLMENTAIRES AU TLPHONE. 8 Si vous avez essay les solutions suggres par le tableau de dpannage sans succs, communiquez avec le service dassistance :

Numro sans frais : 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) 

Courriel : http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support. Avant de nous contacter, veuillez avoir les informations suivantes porte de main pour que notre prpos du service la clientle puisse vous venir en aide le plus rapidement possible :

Nom du produit

Numro de configuration du produit

Numro de srie du produit

Date dachat

Conditions dans lesquelles le problme est survenu

Texte des messages derreur reus

Types de priphriques connects, si applicable Pour les numros de srie et de configuration, consultez ltiquette de configuration sur le dessous de votre ordinateur. 59 - Dpannage Problmes spcifiques Utilisation du tableau de dpannage Lorsque vous prouvez des problmes avec votre PC Tablette, essayez de trouver les symptmes sous la colonne Problme du tableau suivant pour la fonction qui vous cause des problmes. Vous trouverez une description des causes communes pour ce symptme sous la colonne Cause possible ; le cas chant, ce que vous pouvez faire pour corriger la situation se trouve sous la colonne Solutions possibles. Il est possible que certaines causes et solutions possibles ne sappliquent pas votre ordinateur.

Tableau de dpannage Problme Problmes audio . page 61 Page Problme Problmes dalimentation lectrique . page 63 Page Problmes de disque dur . page 61 Problmes darrt et de dmarrage. page 65 Problmes de clavier ou de souris . page 61 Problmes vido . page 66 Problmes de saisie avec le stylet . page 62 Problmes divers. page 68 Problmes de priphrique USB . page 62 60 - Dpannage Problme Problmes audio Aucun son ne sort du 

haut-parleur incorpor. Problmes de disque dur Vous ne pouvez pas accder votre disque dur. Cause possible Solutions possibles Le volume est rgl un niveau trs bas. Rglez le volume de votre ordinateur et de votre systme dexploitation. Cliquez sur licne Volume dans la zone de notification, en bas droite de lcran (elle ressemble un haut-parleur). Si la case Mute (Sourdine) est entoure dun cercle rouge, cliquez dessus pour la dslectionner. Des couteurs sont branchs sur votre PC Tablette. Le branchement dcouteurs dsactive le haut-parleur incorpor. Retirez les couteurs. Un mauvais identificateur dunit a t utilis par une application lorsquun disque damorage a t utilis pour dmarrer votre ordinateur. Les paramtres de scurit exigent un mot de passe pour le dmarrage du systme dexploitation. Assurez-vous que la lettre dunit utilise par lapplication est bien celle quutilise le systme dexploitation. Lorsque le systme dexploitation est dmarr partir dun CD, les identifications du lecteur sont ajustes automatiquement. Vrifiez votre mot de passe et vos paramtres de scurit. Problmes de clavier ou de souris Vous avez install un clavier ou une souris externe en option et il/elle ne semble pas fonctionner. Votre priphrique externe nest pas bien install. Votre systme dexploitation nutilise pas le bon pilote pour ce priphrique. Rinstallez votre priphrique. Voir Ports de priphriques en page 84. Consultez la documentation du priphrique et du systme dexploitation, puis installez le pilote appropri. Vous avez connect un clavier externe ou une souris et il/elle semble bloquer le systme. Votre systme dexploitation nutilise pas le bon pilote. Consultez la documentation du priphrique et du systme dexploitation, puis installez le pilote appropri. Votre systme sest plant. Essayez de redmarrer votre systme. 61 - Dpannage Cause possible Problme Problmes de saisie avec le stylet Le curseur ne suit pas le stylet. Lcran doit tre talonn. La Tablette ne ragit pas au stylet. Il se peut que le systme se soit plant. Problmes de mmoire Dans le panneau de configuration, lcran Systme nindique pas le montant correct de mmoire installe. Problmes de priphrique USB Votre systme ne reconnat pas le priphrique USB que vous avez install ou le priphrique ne fonctionne pas correctement. Votre mmoire est dfaillante. Votre priphrique nest pas bien install. Le priphrique a peut-tre t install pendant quune application tait en excution, par consquent votre systme ne reconnat pas son installation. Solutions possibles Pour de plus amples informations, Voir talonnage de lcran en page 28. Si le PC Tablette ne ragit pas au stylet, connectez un clavier externe lordinateur pour voir sil ragit aux impulsions des touches. Si lordinateur ne ragit pas non plus dans ce cas, il se peut que lapplication ou le systme se soit plant, auquel cas un redmarrage semble ncessaire. Si lordinateur ragit au clavier mais pas au stylet, contactez votre reprsentant ou distributeur local, ou appelez le service de soutien Fujitsu au 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) pour obtenir de laide. Vrifiez les messages de lauto-diagnostic de dmarrage

(POST). Voir Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 69. Retirez et rinstallez votre priphrique. Fermez lapplication et redmarrez votre ordinateur portable. Votre priphrique pourrait ne pas disposer du bon pilote de logiciel actif. Consultez la documentation relative votre logiciel et activez le bon pilote. 62 - Dpannage Cause possible Problme Problmes dalimentation lectrique Lorsque vous allumez votre PC Tablette, rien ne semble se produire. La batterie installe est compltement dcharge ou aucun adaptateur de courant nest install. La batterie est installe, mais elle est dfectueuse ou faible. Le systme a atteint une temprature critique. Solutions possibles Vrifiez le tableau de voyants dtat pour dterminer la prsence et ltat de la batterie. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 20. Installez une batterie charge ou branchez un adaptateur dalimentation. Lorsque la batterie descend un niveau critique, le systme se met systmatiquement en mode Veille pour viter tout problme dalimentation. Pour rsoudre ce problme, branchez une source dalimentation externe (adaptateur secteur, par exemple) ou une batterie charge dans lordinateur. Pour viter tout dgt aux composants sensibles la chaleur, lordinateur se met en mode Sommeil lorsque la temprature est trop leve. Il est impossible de reprendre lutilisation de lordinateur tant quil ne sest pas refroidi suffisamment. Mettez lordinateur dans un endroit frais. Ladaptateur secteur nest pas branch convenablement. Vrifiez si votre adaptateur est branch de faon approprie. Voir Sources dalimentation en page 38. Ladaptateur dalimentation ne reoit pas de courant de la prise murale ou de la prise de lavion. Branchez le cordon dalimentation secteur dans une autre prise murale et vrifiez si un interrupteur ou un disjoncteur coupe le courant. Si vous utilisez un adaptateur auto/avion dans un vhicule, assurez-vous que la cl de contact est la position On (marche) ou Acc. (accessoires). Ladaptateur secteur est dfaillant. Essayez un autre adaptateur dalimentation. 63 - Dpannage Problme Votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC steint tout seul. Le PC Tablette ne fonctionne pas lorsquil est aliment uniquement par batterie. Cause possible Les paramtres de gestion dalimentation sont rgls des temporisations (dlais dinactivit) automatiques trop courtes par rapport vos besoins dexploitation. Votre adaptateur dalimentation est tomb en panne ou a perdu sa source dnergie. Vous avez ignor un avertissement de batterie faible, la batterie sest puise et le systme est entr en mode de veille. Solutions possibles Bougez la souris pour rtablir le fonctionnement. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, appuyez sur le bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise. Vrifiez vos paramtres de gestion dalimentation, ou fermez vos applications et consultez les proprits des Options dalimentation du Panneau de configuration pour ajuster les valeurs de temporisation afin quelles rpondent mieux vos besoins. Assurez-vous que ladaptateur est branch et que la prise est alimente. Installez un adaptateur dalimentation puis appuyez sur le bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise. Voir Sources dalimentation en page 38. Votre batterie est dfectueuse. Vrifiez ltat des batteries laide du Tableau de voyants dtat. Si la batterie est court-circuite, remplacez-la ou retirez-la. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 20. La batterie est puise. Remplacez la batterie par une batterie charge ou branchez un adaptateur dalimentation. Aucune batterie nest installe. Installez une batterie charge. La batterie na pas t correctement installe. Vrifiez si la batterie est bien connecte en la rinstallant. Votre batterie est dfectueuse. Consultez le tableau de voyants dtat pour connatre ltat de la batterie et remplacez ou retirez la batterie si elle est court-circuite. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 20. 64 - Dpannage Problme La batterie semble se 

dcharger trs vite. Cause possible Les fonctions dconomies dnergie sont peut-tre dsactives. Solutions possibles Consultez le menu Options dalimentation du Panneau de configuration pour changer les paramtres en fonction de vos besoins. La luminosit est rgle au maximum. Rduisez la luminosit. Plus la luminosit est leve, plus lcran daffichage consomme de lnergie. Utilisez un adaptateur de courant pour cette application chaque fois que vous le pouvez. Une des applications que vous excutez utilise beaucoup dnergie en raison dun accs frquent un lecteur ou de lutilisation de la carte rseau local sans fil. La batterie est trs vieille. Remplacez la batterie. Les batteries ont t exposes des tempratures leves. La batterie est trop chaude ou trop froide. Problmes darrt et de dmarrage Le bouton de veille/reprise 

ne fonctionne pas. Le bouton veille/reprise 

est dsactiv. Remplacez la batterie. Rtablissez le PC Tablette la temprature dexploitation normale. Licne de chargement sur le tableau de voyants dtat clignote lorsque la batterie est en dehors de la plage de fonctionnement. Pour le ractiver, allez Panneau de configuration -> Options dalimentation, puis cliquez sur longlet Avancs. Dans la zone Alimentation, slectionnez loption Changer ce que fait le bouton dalimentation . Il est possible quil y ait un conflit entre logiciels. Fermez toutes les applications et essayez le bouton nouveau. 65 - Dpannage Problme Le systme se met en marche et affiche les informations de mise en marche, mais nest pas en mesure de charger le systme dexploitation. Cause possible Vous avez un systme protg qui requiert un mot de passe pour charger votre systme dexploitation. Solutions possibles Assurez-vous davoir le bon mot de passe. Accdez lutilitaire de configuration et vrifiez les paramtres de scurit, puis modifiez-les en consquence. Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 42. Les paramtres damorage de lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS sont incompatibles avec votre configuration. Configurez la source dexploitation en appuyant sur la touche

[chap] pendant que le logo Fujitsu est affich sur lcran ou utilisez la touche [F2], accdez lutilitaire de configuration et ajustez les paramtres de source partir du menu Amorage. Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 42. Le disque dur na pas t dtect. Utilisez lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS pour dtecter automatiquement le disque dur interne. Un message derreur saffiche sur lcran durant la procdure damorage. Lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension (POST) a dtect un problme. Votre PC Tablette semble changer les paramtres de configuration lorsque vous le dmarrez. Les modifications que vous avez apportes la configuration du BIOS nont pas t sauvegardes et vous avez quitt lutilitaire sans les sauvegarder. Consultez les messages de lauto-diagnostic de dmarrage pour dterminer la signification et la gravit du problme. Tous les messages nindiquent pas des erreurs ; certains sont simplement des indicateurs dtat. Voir Messages de lauto-

diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 69. Assurez-vous de slectionner loption Sauvegarder les changements et quitter lorsque vous quittez lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS. Problmes vido Lcran daffichage demeure vide lorsque vous mettez en marche votre PC Tablette. Langle de laffichage et les paramtres de luminosit ne sont pas adapts vos conditions dclairage. Il se peut que la luminosit de lcran soit trop faible, ce qui donne limpression quil est teint. Pour modifier la luminosit, appuyez deux fois sur le bouton de fonction Fn pour ouvrir le menu Fujitsu. Vous pourrez alors rgler la luminosit. 66 - Dpannage Problme Lcran daffichage demeure vide lorsque vous mettez en marche votre PC Tablette.

(suite) Le PC Tablette sest mis en marche en mettant une srie de tonalits et votre cran intgr est vide. Lcran devient vide 

par lui-mme aprs 

avoir t utilis. Lcran affiche des zones claires ou sombres. Cause possible La temporisation daffichage a t rgle des intervalles trop courts et vous navez pas remarqu que lcran sallume et steint souvent. Solutions possibles Bougez la souris pour rtablir le fonctionnement. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, appuyez sur le bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise (lcran daffichage peut avoir t arrt par le mode sommeil, veille automatique ou temporisation vido). Communiquez avec le service dassistance. Appuyez sur le bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise. (lcran daffichage peut avoir t arrt par le mode sommeil, veille automatique ou temporisation vido). Appuyez sur le bouton dalimentation/veille/reprise. Vrifiez vos paramtres de gestion de lalimentation, ou fermez vos applications et allez dans le menu conomies dnergie de lutilitaire de configuration pour ajuster les valeurs de temporisation afin quelles rpondent mieux vos besoins. Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 42. Ne faites rien. Lcran est dfectueux : communiquez avec le service dassistance. Lauto-diagnostic de dmarrage (POST) a dtect une dfaillance qui ne permet pas lcran de fonctionner. Les valeurs de temporisation menant au mode dconomie dnergie sont rgles des intervalles trs courts et vous navez pas remarqu que lcran sest allum, puis teint de nouveau. Le PC Tablette sest mis en mode Sommeil ou en mode Veille prolonge car vous ne lavez pas utilis pendant un certain moment. Si ces zones sont trs petites et si leur nombre est restreint, cela est normal pour un grand cran ACL. Si les zones sont nombreuses ou suffisamment grandes pour perturber vos besoins dexploitation, 67 - Dpannage Problme Problmes divers Un message derreur saffiche sur lcran durant lexcution dune application. Cause possible Solutions possibles Les applications gnrent souvent leurs propres messages derreur. Consultez la documentation et laide de lapplication. Tous les messages nindiquent pas des erreurs ; certains sont simplement des indicateurs dtat. 68 - Dpannage Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension Voici une liste des messages derreur et dtat que le BIOS Phoenix et/ou votre systme dexploitation peuvent gnrer ainsi quune explication pour chacun deux. Les messages derreurs sont marqus dun

*. Si un message derreur est affich et ne se trouve pas dans la liste, prenez-le en note et vrifiez-le dans la documentation du systme dexploitation ( lcran et dans le manuel imprim). Si vous ne trouvez pas dexplication au message, communiquez avec le service dassistance.

*Donnes NVRAM non valides Problme daccs la mmoire NVRAM. Au cas o ce message safficherait, ce qui est peu probable, vous pourriez avoir un problme daffichage. Vous pouvez continuer utiliser votre ordinateur mais vous devriez communiquer avec le service dassistance pour plus dinformations.

*Systme dexploitation introuvable Le systme dexploitation ne peut pas tre localis ni sur le lecteur A: ni sur le lecteur C: Accdez lutilitaire de configuration et vrifiez si le disque fixe et le lecteur A: sont bien identifis et si la squence damorage est bien configure. Le systme dexploitation devrait tre sur le lecteur C: sauf si vous avez chang sensiblement votre installation. Si lutilitaire de configuration est bien install, votre disque dur pourrait tre corrompu.

*Erreur de lhorloge de temps rel - Vrifiez les paramtres dheure et de date Lhorloge de temps rel a chou le test du BIOS. Une rparation de la carte mre pourrait tre ncessaire. Communiquez avec le service dassistance. 69 - Dpannage Restaurer vos logiciels pr-installs Votre ordinateur est livr avec deux disques de restauration pour vos logiciels prinstalls :

Disque des pilotes et de restauration des applications

Disque de restauration et d'utilitaires SI VOUS UTILISEZ LE DISQUE DE RESTAURATION INCLUS DANS LE BOTIER DU SYSTME, CONNECTEZ-VOUS AU SITE INTERNET DE FUJITSU ET ASSUREZ-VOUS DE TLCHARGER ET INSTALLER LES DERNIRES VERSIONS DES UTILITAIRES DE BOUTONS COMME SUIT :

- CONNECTEZ-VOUS AU SITE WWW.FUJITSU.COM/US

- SOUS SUPPORT, SLECTIONNEZ PILOTES ET AUTRES TLCHARGEMENTS > ORDINATEURS PORTABLES (OU ORDINATEURS TABLETTES). VOUS VOYEZ APPARATRE LA PAGE DE TLCHARGEMENTS.

- CHOISISSEZ VOTRE SYSTME ET SON NUMRO DE MODLE.

- S LE FICHIER. CETTE ACTION RESTAURE LIMAGE DORIGINE DE VOTRE SYSTME. LECTIONNEZ UTILITAIRES DE BOUTONS ET SUIVEZ LES INSTRUCTIONS PERMETTANT DOUVRIR (OU EXCUTER) Disque des pilotes et de restauration des applications Le disque de pilotes et de restauration des applications (PRA) fourni avec votre ordinateur contient une srie de pilotes de priphriques et des utilitaires Fujitsu (dans des rpertoires spcifiques) qui sont uniques la configuration de votre ordinateur.

POUR EXCUTER LES PROCDURES SUIVANTES, VOUS DEVEZ DISPOSER D'UN LECTEUR OPTIQUE EXTERNE.

SI VOUS AVEZ ACCS INTERNET, VISITEZ LE SITE DASSISTANCE DE FUJITSU HTTP://WWW.COMPUTERS.US.FUJITSU.COM/SUPPORT POUR CONSULTER LES INFORMATIONS LES PLUS RCENTES ET OBTENIR LES DERNIRES VERSIONS DES PILOTES AINSI QUE DES CONSEILS SUR LA RESTAURATION ET LA MISE JOUR DU SYSTME. 70 - Restaurer vos logiciels pr-installs Rinstallation des applications et pilotes individuels Le disque de pilotes et applications peut tre utilis pour rinstaller de faon slective les pilotes et/ou applications qui auraient pu tre dsinstalls ou corrompus. IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CERTAINES APPLICATIONS TIERCES GRATUITES PR-INSTALLES SUR VOTRE SYSTME NE SE TROUVENT PAS SUR LE DISQUE PRA. LES TOUTES DERNIRES VERSIONS DE CES APPLICATIONS PEUVENT TRE TLCHARGES PARTIR DU SITE INTERNET DE LEUR FABRICANT. Pour rinstaller des pilotes et/ou applications :

1 Lancez le systme et insrez le disque PRA aprs que Windows a dmarr. Un cran dinstallation Fujitsu saffiche une fois que le disque est insr. 2 Lorsque vous avez lu le contrat de licence, cliquez sur [Jaccepte]. 3 Une fentre apparatra contenant une liste dapplications, de pilotes et dutilitaires que vous pouvez installer partir du disque de pilotes et dapplications. LES COMPOSANTS CITS SONT CHROMOCODS EN FONCTION DE LEUR TAT DINSTALLATION. LE BLEU INDIQUE QUE LE COMPOSANT PEUT TRE INSTALL. LE VERT INDIQUE QUE LE COMPOSANT DOIT TRE INSTALL SPARMENT. LE GRIS INDIQUE QUE LE COMPOSANT EST DJ INSTALL (LES LMENTS EN GRIS PEUVENT TRE RINSTALLS, MAIS AVANT LINSTALLATION, VOUS RECEVREZ UN RAPPEL VOUS INDIQUANT QUE LE COMPOSANT EST DJ INSTALL). 4 Dans la liste, cochez tous les composants que vous voulez installer. Si vous voulez installer tous les composants, cliquez sur [Slectionner tout]. Si vous cliquez sur [Slectionner tout], le systme slectionne tous les composants cods en bleu. Les composants en vert et en gris doivent tre slectionns sparment. 5 Lorsque vous avez slectionn les composants que vous dsirez installer, cliquez sur [Installer les sous-

systmes slectionns] ; les composants seront installs. 6 Lorsque les composants sont installs, cliquez sur [OK], puis sur [Oui] lorsque le systme vous demande si vous dsirez redmarrer votre systme. 71 - Restaurer vos logiciels pr-installs CD de restauration et d'utilitaires Le disque d'utilitaires et de restauration contient quatre utilitaires :

Onglets Restauration et Utilitaires Onglet Diagnostics : L'outil de diagnostic est conu pour tre utilis par des informaticiens professionnels. Il y a peu de chances que vous ayez besoin de l'utiliser. Lorsque vous slectionnez des dispositifs dans la fentre Diagnostic et que vous cliquez ensuite sur [Excuter], ceux-ci sont soumis plusieurs tests. Onglet Restauration : L'onglet Restauration comprend deux outils : Restaurer l'image d'origine

(seulement le disque C :) et Restauration de l'image d'origine (restauration intgrale du disque dur) . Vous pouvez utiliser ces outils pour excuter une restauration complte du disque dur. Onglet Utilitaires : L'onglet Utilitaires comprend trois outils : Supprimer les donnes sur le disque 

dur , Restaurer la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires et Restauration complte dordinateur Windows .

L'utilitaire Supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur permet de supprimer toutes les donnes sur votre disque dur et d'en empcher leur rutilisation. REMARQUE : N'utilisez pas l'utilitaire Supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur , moins que vous soyez absolument certain de vouloir effacer votre disque dur en entier, y compris toutes les partitions.

Restaurer la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires permet de restaurer la premire partition cache.

Lutilitaire Restauration complte dordinateur Windows permet de restaurer une image cre avec le Centre de restauration et de sauvegarde Windows. Lutilitaire Restauration complte dordinateur Windows efface et rcrit toutes les donnes se trouvant sur le disque dur. Pour utiliser le disque, suivez les instructions donnes dans le livret Utilisation du disque de restauration et dutilitaires fourni avec ce disque. 72 - Restaurer vos logiciels pr-installs Chapitre 5 Entretien Entretien de votre PC Tablette Si vous prenez soin de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC, vous augmenterez sa dure de vie et sa fiabilit. Cette section fournit certains conseils relatifs lentretien de votre PC Tablette et de ses dispositifs. LE SYSTME CONTIENT DES COMPOSANTS POUVANT TRE FORTEMENT ENDOMMAGS PAR UNE DCHARGE LECTROSTATIQUE (DES). POUR MINIMISER CE RISQUE, VEUILLEZ PRENDRE LES PRCAUTIONS SUIVANTES :

SI VOUS LAISSEZ TOMBER VOTRE PC TABLETTE OU ENDOMMAGEZ LE BOTIER DUNE FAON OU DUNE AUTRE, TEIGNEZ IMMDIATEMENT LORDINATEUR ET DBRANCHEZ LA FICHE DALIMENTATION. DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, CELA RISQUE DE PROVOQUER UN COURT-CIRCUIT, DE LA FUME ET/OU UN INCENDIE. POUR SAVOIR COMMENT RPARER LORDINATEUR, CONTACTEZ LE SERVICE APRS-VENTE ET LE SOUTIEN TECHNIQUE FUJITSU PAR TLPHONE AU 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487), PAR COURRIEL AU , OU VIA NOTRE SITE INTERNET HTTP://WWW.COMPUTERS.US.FUJITSU.COM/SUPPORT.

AVANT DE CONNECTER OU DE DCONNECTER VOTRE PC TABLETTE STYLISTIC (LORSQUE VOUS UTILISEZ UN DUPLICATEUR DE PORTS), IL EST TOUJOURS RECOMMAND DE TOUCHER UN OBJET MTALLIQUE MIS LA TERRE AFIN DE DCHARGER LLECTRICIT STATIQUE QUI SEST ACCUMULE DANS VOTRE CORPS.

TOUT QUIPEMENT LECTRIQUE PEUT TRE DANGEREUX SIL EST UTILIS DE FAON INAPPROPRIE. LE FONCTIONNEMENT DE CE PRODUIT OU DAUTRES PRODUITS SIMILAIRES DOIT TOUJOURS SE FAIRE SOUS LA SUPERVISION DUN ADULTE. NE PERMETTEZ PAS AUX ENFANTS DACCDER LINTRIEUR DE TOUT PRODUIT LECTRIQUE ET NE LEUR PERMETTEZ PAS DEN MANIPULER LES CBLES. 73

Votre ordinateur portable est durable, mais cest un appareil lectronique sensible. Traitez-le avec respect et prcaution.

Prenez lhabitude de transporter votre ordinateur dans une mallette convenable.

Nessayez pas de rparer lordinateur vous-mme. Suivez toujours les instructions dinstallation la lettre.

Gardez-le loin de la nourriture et des boissons.

Si vous renversez par accident un liquide sur votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC :

1 teignez-le. 2 Positionnez-le de faon ce que le liquide puisse scouler et laissez-le scher pendant 24 heures, ou plus longtemps sil le faut. 3 Sil ne dmarre pas une fois sec, contactez le service dassistance clients.

Nutilisez pas votre PC Tablette dans un environnement trs humide ( proximit dune baignoire, dune piscine).

Utilisez toujours ladaptateur secteur dorigine et des batteries approuves pour votre ordinateur.

vitez dexposer lordinateur au sable, la poussire et dautres matires.

Nexposez pas votre ordinateur portable la lumire directe du soleil pendant de longues priodes, car les tempratures de plus de 60C (140F) pourraient lendommager.

Ne dposez pas dobjets lourds ou tranchants sur lordinateur. Nettoyage de votre PC Tablette

Dbranchez toujours la prise lectrique (tirez la fiche, pas le cordon).

Nettoyez votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC avec un chiffon humide, non pelucheux. Nutilisez pas de solvant ou dabrasif.

Utilisez un tissu doux pour enlever la poussire de lcran. Nutilisez jamais de liquide lave-vitre.

Avant de nettoyer ou de dsinfecter lextrieur de votre ordinateur ou lcran ACL, prenez garde toujours teindre le systme, dbrancher ladaptateur secteur et retirer la batterie. 74 - Entretien Suivez les procdures de nettoyage en utilisant des produits nettoyants recommands disponibles dans le commerce Extrieur de lordinateur. Pour nettoyer lextrieur, utilisez lun des nettoyants suivants :

Kit de nettoyage pour ordinateur portable Office Depot N 154-616

Lingettes Klear Screen de Meridrew Entreprises

Lingettes de nettoyage 3M CL563 Remarque : Aprs avoir nettoy votre systme avec lun de ces produits, faites-le reluire et retirez les traces de produit laide dun tissu doux non-pelucheux. Dsinfection des ordinateurs STYLISTIC Nettoyez la surface de lordinateur laide dun tissu doux imbib dune solution dthanol 50% ou dun autre germicide base dthanol homologu par lEPA ( Environment Protection Agency , ou Agence amricaine de protection de lenvironnement) en tant que dsinfectant hospitalier.

SI VOUS NUTILISEZ PAS LES BONS PRODUITS, LAFFICHAGE DE LCRAN ACL OU LORDINATEUR LUI-MME PEUT EN TRE ENDOMMAG. POUR SAVOIR COMMENT UTILISER ET MANIPULER CONVENABLEMENT LES PRODUITS NETTOYANTS, PRENEZ GARDE TOUJOURS CONSULTER LES PROCDURES DE NETTOYAGE DU FABRICANT, AINSI QUE LES FICHES TECHNIQUES DE SCURIT.

NUTILISEZ JAMAIS DE NETTOYANTS BASE ALCALINE, DAMMONIAQUE, DACIDE, OU DE PRODUITS CHIMIQUES BIOLOGIQUES TELS QUE DISSOLVANTS POUR PEINTURE, ACTONE, ALCOOL PROPYLIQUE OU ISOPROPYLIQUE OU PTROLE. LA FINITION DES SURFACES DE LORDINATEUR ET LA PELLICULE DE PROTECTION DE LCRAN ACL POURRAIENT EN TRE ENDOMMAGES.

NUTILISEZ JAMAIS DAIR COMPRIM POUR NETTOYER VOTRE ORDINATEUR. Entreposage de votre PC Tablette

Si vous entreposez votre PC Tablette durant un mois ou plus, teignez-le, chargez compltement les batteries au lithium-polymre, puis enlevez-les.

Rangez votre Fujitsu STYLISTIC dans un endroit frais et sec. Les tempratures doivent tre maintenues entre -25C et 60C (13F et 140F). 75 - Entretien

Rangez votre ordinateur portable et les batteries sparment. Si vous rangez votre ordinateur avec une batterie installe, la batterie se dchargera et sa dure de vie sera rduite. De plus, une batterie dfectueuse pourrait endommager votre ordinateur.

TEIGNEZ TOUJOURS VOTRE ORDINATEUR AVANT DE LE TRANSPORTER ET/OU DE LEMBALLER. APRS AVOIR TEINT LE SYSTME, ATTENDEZ QUE LE PANNEAU DE VOYANTS DTAT INDIQUE BIEN LE STATUT HORS TENSION

(CEST DIRE QUAUCUN VOYANT NEST ALLUM). IL EST POSSIBLE QUE LAPPAREIL NE SE METTE PAS AUTOMATIQUEMENT EN MODE HORS TENSION OU VEILLE PROLONGE APRS QUE VOUS AVEZ FERM LE COUVERCLE. CETTE SITUATION PEUT SE PRODUIRE EN FONCTION DES PARAMTRES DE SCURIT PAR MOT DE PASSE QUI GRENT LA PR-INITIALISATION DU SYSTME OU DUNE AUTRE APPLICATION EN COURS DUTILISATION SUR LORDINATEUR.

SI VOUS ESSAYEZ DE TRANSPORTER LORDINATEUR ALORS QUIL EST ALLUM, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LA TABLETTE CAUSE DES CHOCS ET SURCHAUFFES VENTUELS. Voyager avec votre PC Tablette

Ne transportez pas votre PC Tablette pendant quil est en marche.

Vous devriez toujours transporter votre ordinateur portable en cabine au lieu de lenregistrer comme bagage.

Ne faites jamais passer votre ordinateur portable au dtecteur de mtal. Demandez plutt quil soit vrifi la main par du personnel de scurit. Par contre, le disque dur peut tre soumis un appareil radioscopique. Pour viter les problmes, placez-le proximit de lentre de lappareil et retirez-le aussitt que possible ou faites inspecter votre ordinateur portable manuellement par le personnel de scurit. Il se peut que les responsables de la scurit vous demandent dallumer votre ordinateur, alors assurez-vous que vous avez une batterie charge disposition. 76 - Entretien

Apportez avec vous les adaptateurs de fiches ncessaires lorsque vous voyagez outre-mer. Vrifiez le diagramme suivant pour dterminer quel adaptateur de fiche vous serait ncessaire ou renseignez-vous auprs de votre agent de voyage. Type de prise Emplacement Type de prise Emplacement Canada, tats-Unis, Mexique, certains pays d Amrique latine, Japon, Core, Tawan, Philippines Royaume-Uni, Irlande, Malaisie, Singapour, certains pays dAfrique Russie et Communaut des tats indpendants

(CEI), la plupart des pays dEurope, certains pays dAmrique Latine, Moyen-Orient, certains pays dAfrique, Hongkong, Inde, la plupart des pays de lAsie du Sud Chine, Australie, Nouvelle-Zlande Batteries Entretien de la batterie

Manipulez toujours les batteries avec soin.

Ne court-circuitez pas les terminaux des batteries (cest dire, ne touchez pas les deux terminaux avec des objets mtalliques). Ne transportez pas des batteries dans votre poche ou sac main car elles pourraient entrer en contact avec de la monnaie, des cls ou dautres objets mtalliques. Cela pourrait causer une explosion ou un incendie. Il ne faut jamais laisser tomber, percer, dsassembler, abmer ou incinrer une batterie.

Rechargez les batteries uniquement selon les instructions de ce manuel et seulement dans des endroits ars.

Ne laissez pas les batteries dans des endroits chauds pendant plus dune journe ou deux. Les grandes chaleurs risquent de raccourcir la dure de vie de votre batterie.

Ne rangez pas la batterie pendant plus de 6 mois sans la recharger. 77 - Entretien Augmenter la dure de vie des batteries

Alimentez votre PC Tablette avec ladaptateur secteur ou ladaptateur dauto/avion optionnel chaque fois que vous le pouvez.

Si votre ordinateur portable fonctionne sur lalimentation par batterie pendant toute une journe, branchez-le sur ladaptateur secteur durant la nuit pour recharger la batterie.

Gardez la luminosit au niveau le plus bas possible.

Rglez la gestion de la consommation dnergie pour une dure de vie maximale de la batterie.

Lorsque votre PC Tablette est allum et que vous ne lutilisez pas, mettez-le en mode sommeil.

Limitez votre accs au lecteur multimdia.

Dsactivez la fonction de notification dinsertion automatique du lecteur mdia. Entretien de votre lecteur multimdia Entretien de vos lecteurs (lorsquun priphrique externe est install) Les disques multimdias sont des dispositifs prcis qui fonctionneront de manire fiable si vous en prenez bien soin.

Rangez toujours vos disques multimdias dans leurs tuis lorsquils ne sont pas utiliss.

Tenez toujours les disques par les bords et vitez den toucher la surface.

vitez de ranger les disques multimdias dans des endroits o les tempratures sont extrmes.

Ne courbez pas les disques multimdias, ne les rayez pas et ne dposez pas dobjets lourds par dessus.

Ne renversez pas de liquides sur les disques multimdia, ne les exposez pas la poussire.

Ncrivez jamais sur la surface de ltiquette avec un stylo bille ou un crayon. Utilisez toujours un crayon-feutre.

Si un disque est sale, utilisez seulement un nettoyant pour DVD/CD ou essuyez-le avec un chiffon doux, propre et non pelucheux : commencez par le bord intrieur et essuyez en direction du bord extrieur. 78 - Entretien

Si un disque subit un changement soudain de temprature, il est possible quune condensation se forme sur la surface. Essuyez lhumidit avec un chiffon doux et non pelucheux, puis laissez le disque scher temprature ambiante. NUTILISEZ PAS de sche-cheveux ou dautre appareil chauffant pour scher les disques multimdia. Entretien de votre lecteur optique optionnel Votre lecteur optique (en option) a une longue dure de vie mais vous devez en prendre soin. Veuillez faire attention aux points suivants :

Le lecteur fait pivoter le disque compact une vitesse trs leve. Lorsquil fonctionne, vitez de le dplacer ou de le soumettre des chocs ou des vibrations.

vitez dutiliser ou de ranger le lecteur dans un endroit o il serait expos des tempratures extrmes.

vitez dutiliser ou de ranger le lecteur dans un endroit humide ou poussireux.

vitez dutiliser ou de ranger le lecteur proximit daimants ou de dispositifs qui gnrent de forts champs magntiques.

Nutilisez pas et ne rangez pas le lecteur dans des endroits exposs des chocs ou des vibrations.

Ne dsassemblez pas ou ne dmontez pas le lecteur optique.

Lusage dun nettoyant spcial pour lentilles est recommand pour lentretien du lecteur. Cartes Secure Digital Entretien de vos cartes Les cartes ExpressCard sont durables, mais vous devez en prendre soin. La documentation fournie avec votre carte vous donnera des renseignements spcifiques, mais vous devriez aussi faire attention aux points suivants :

Pour les protger de la poussire et de la salet, rangez vos cartes dans leurs tuis de protection lorsquelles ne sont pas installes.

vitez toute exposition prolonge aux rayons du soleil ou une chaleur excessive. 79 - Entretien

Gardez les cartes au sec.

Ne flchissez pas ou ne courbez pas les cartes et ny placez pas dobjet lourd.

Ne faites pas entrer par force une carte dans une fente.

vitez de faire tomber les cartes ou de les exposer des vibrations excessives. 80 - Entretien Chapitre 6 Spcifications techniques Spcifications techniques du systme Cette partie prsente les spcifications techniques du matriel et de lenvironnement de votre PC Tablette STYLISTIC Fujitsu. Selon les configurations, les spcifications techniques peuvent varier. tiquette de configuration Ltiquette de configuration qui est situe sur le dessous de votre PC Tablette comporte des informations spcifiques propos des options que vous avez choisies pour votre ordinateur. Voici un exemple dtiquette de configuration :

Numro de pice Identifiant de configuration Configuration P/N:

FPC P/N: FPCMXXXXX STQ550, AtomZ670, W7Pro, 2GB, 62G, WLAN, 10.1WXGA AOUXXXXXXXXXXXXX N de modle Processeur Systme dexploitation 81 Mmoire Taille/type dcran Disque dur Communications Microprocesseur Processeur Intel Atom Z670 (1,5 GHz) Puce

Intel SM35 Mmoire Mmoire systme

Module de mmoire vive SDRAM DDR2, 800 MHz

Capacit totale de mmoire de 2 Go (embarque) Mmoire cache Cache intgr 512 Ko L2 Vido Couleur et rsolution Vido Grand cran IPS XGA antireflets DEL rtroclair de 10,1 pouces Interne : Rsolution 1 280 x 800 pixels, 16 mln couleurs

Externe : Rsolution de 1 280 x 720 pixels, 16 millions de couleurs

En simultan : Rsolution 1 280 x 800 pixels, 16 mln couleurs

Angle de vision verticale et horizontale de 160 Numriseur Technologie N-trig DuoSense. Numriseur double, comprenant le numriseur actif et le pav tactile

technologie capacitive (impulsion par le stylo et impulsion digitale jusqu 4 doigts) Mmoire vive vido Carte graphique Intel GMA600 avec acclrateur 3D Mmoire vive vido UMA dun maximum de 759 Mo 82 - Spcifications techniques du systme Audio

Codec Realtek ALC269

couteurs : couteurs stro/sortie audio, 3,5 mm, 1 Vrms ou moins, impdance minimale de 32 ohms

Un haut-parleur stro intgr, 18 mm de diamtre

Deux microphones analogues doubles intgrs Options de mmoire de masse Options de disque dur

Disque dur solide FDE, S-ATA/300 (3,0 Gbit/sec), 62 Go, avec soutien de commande TRIM

Disque dur solide FDE, S-ATA/300 (3,0 Gbit/sec), 30 Go, avec soutien de commande TRIM Communications

Rseau local sans fil : Carte de rseau local sans fil USB Ralink RT3572 802.11a/b/g/n

Bluetooth : Dispositif Bluetooth USB BCM20702 Broadcom pour communications personnelles sur rseau local sans fil

Rseau tendu sans fil : Carte de rseau tendu sans fil intgre 3G Gobi3000, en option (Sierra Wireless AirPrime MC8355) Fonctions de scurit Puce Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Certaines configurations du PC Tablette STYLISTIC Q550 peuvent tre dotes en option dune puce TPM pour amliorer la scurit du systme. Capteur dempreintes digitales Capteur de glissement pour scurit biomtrique. Fente pour carte SmartCard Fente intgre pour carte SmartCard (application tierce requise) 83 - Spcifications techniques du systme Ports de priphriques Sur le PC Tablette STYLISTIC :

Emplacement pour SD Card

Un connecteur USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) pour priphriques en entre/sortie

Une prise dentre c.c.

Un connecteur HDMI

Port de connexion ( 100 broches pour assurer la connexion avec le duplicateur de ports STYLISTIC en option)

Une prise couteur stro

Camra Web arrire de 1,3 mgapixel, camra Web avant VGA Duplicateur de ports STYLISTIC en option

Quatre connecteurs USB 2.0 pour priphriques dentre/sortie

Une entre c.c.

Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports (100 broches, pour arrimage au systme) Alimentation Options de batterie

Batterie au lithium-polymre, 2 accumulateurs ; 7,2 V ; 19 WH ; 2 640 mAh

Batterie au lithium-polymre, 4 accumulateurs ; 7,2 V ; 38 WH ; 5 240 mAh Adaptateur secteur Autodtection c.a. 100-240 V, fournissant c.c. de 19 V ; 2,1 A ; 40 W au PC Tablette, y compris un cble c.a. Gestion de lalimentation Conforme la norme ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface, ou Interface avance de configuration et de gestion de lnergie) 84 - Spcifications techniques du systme Dimensions et poids Dimensions gnrales Environ 275 mm de largeur x 192 mm de profondeur x 16,2 mm dpaisseur (10,8 po x 7,56 po x 0,64 po) Environnement dexploitation Temprature Utilisation : 5C 35C (41F 95F) Stockage : -15C 60C (5F 140F) Humidit Utilisation : 20 85 % dhumidit relative, sans condensation Stockage : 8 % 85 % dhumidit relative, sans condensation Altitude Utilisation : 3 048 m (10 000 pieds) maximum Accessoires prfrs des utilisateurs Pour commander des accessoires Fujitsu ou obtenir des renseignements supplmentaires, visitez le site 

www.shopfujitsu.com ou composez le 1-800-FUJITSU. Logiciels fournis Selon le systme dexploitation pr-install, votre PC Tablette est livr avec des logiciels inclus afin de vous permettre dcouter des fichiers audio et de visionner des fichiers vido de formats divers. De mme, lordinateur portable est fourni avec des logiciels de transfert de fichiers, de protection contre les virus

et de gestion de lalimentation. La liste suivante indique les logiciels fournis avec votre systme.

Adobe Reader

Fonction HomeLauncher de Fujitsu

OmniPass (application de reconnaissance des empreintes digitales)

Application multi-touches N-trig N-act

Saisie au clavier/manuscrite Nuance

Microsoft Office Starter 2010 85 - Spcifications techniques du systme Apprendre utiliser vos logiciels Tutoriaux Tous les systmes dexploitation et la plupart des logiciels dapplication ont des didacticiels intgrs ds leur installation. Nous vous recommandons vivement de passer en revue le tutorial avant dutiliser une application. Guides Sont compris dans votre PC Tablette, les guides dutilisation pour votre systme dexploitation et les autres applications pr-installes. Tous les guides dutilisation non prsents sont disponibles en ligne par lintermdiaire du systme daide du logiciel. Nous vous recommandons de passer en revue ces guides dutilisation pour obtenir des informations gnrales sur lutilisation des logiciels. Adobe Reader Adobe Reader vous permet de visualiser, de naviguer et dimprimer des fichiers pdf partir des principales plates-formes informatiques. Fonction HomeLauncher de Fujitsu La fonction HomeLauncher de Fujitsu offre divers outils et raccourcis pour lancer des applications et utilitaires frquemment utiliss. Parmi les possibilits offertes par HomeLauncher figurent le programme de la camra, utiliser avec la camra Web intgre, une calculatrice, ainsi que des liens vers des applications comme Explorer. OmniPass (application de reconnaissance des empreintes digitales) Le capteur dempreintes digitales utilise le logiciel Softex OmniPass qui fournit des fonctions de gestion de mot de passe aux systmes dexploitation Microsoft Windows. OmniPass vous permet dutiliser un mot de passe principal, ou matre pour toutes les applications Windows et mots de passe en ligne, avec une interface dutilisateur conviviale permettant de grer en toute scurit les mots de passe, les utilisateurs et les identits multiples pour chaque utilisateur. Application muti-touches N-trig N-act N-act permet de raliser des actions et des tches directement lcran grce des commandes gestuelles trs varies. N-act vous permet de raliser ces actions en bougeant les doigts sur lcran, avec des combinaisons pouvant impliquer jusqu quatre doigts. 86 - Spcifications techniques du systme Saisie au clavier/manuscrite Nuance XT9 Une application textuelle prdictive vous permet de raliser vos tches rapidement grce de nombreux outils, notamment : la prdiction du mot suivant, lcriture amliore des mots, la correction orthographique automatique, lajout automatique des accents, et la ponctuation intelligente. Microsoft Office Starter 2010 (32 bits) Le pack Microsoft Office Starter 2010 comprend les versions fonctions rduites de Microsoft Word et Microsoft Excel avec publicits. Ne sont pas fournis : Microsoft PowerPoint, Microsoft Outlook et Microsoft Publisher. Pour activer la version intgrale dOffice sur votre ordinateur, vous devrez acheter un disque Office 2010, la carte de cl produit (PKC ou Product Key Card), ou choisir une des suites compltes de Microsoft Office 2010. Fujitsu propose une carte de cl produit pour les ditions Famille et Etudiant 2010 et Famille et Entreprise 2010 de Microsoft Office (32-bit). Il vous suffit de saisir la cl produit et cest parti !

Vous pouvez aussi acheter la suite complte de Microsoft Office 2010 chez un revendeur informatique

ou en ligne sur le site de Microsoft. Systme dexploitation Votre ordinateur est quip du systme dexploitation suivant :

Microsoft Windows 7 dition Professionnelle 87 - Spcifications techniques du systme Renseignements sur la rglementation Avis Les changements ou modifications qui ne sont pas expressment approuvs par Fujitsu pourraient interdire aux utilisateurs dutiliser le matriel. AVIS DE LA FCC Avis aux utilisateurs de postes radio et de tlviseurs Cet appareil a t test et jug conforme aux limites tablies pour le matriel numrique de classe B, selon la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour assurer une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences nuisibles dans un environnement rsidentiel. Cet appareil gnre, utilise et met de lnergie radiofrquence et, si son installation et son utilisation ne sont pas conformes aux instructions, il peut tre la cause de parasites nuisibles aux communications radio. Il nest toutefois pas garanti quaucune interfrence ne sera observe dans un environnement particulier. Si ce matriel cause des interfrences nuisibles la rception des ondes de radio ou de tlvision, ce qui peut tre vrifi en le mettant hors tension puis sous tension, lutilisateur devra tenter de les corriger en procdant comme suit :

Rorienter ou dplacer lantenne rceptrice.

Accrotre la distance entre lappareil et le rcepteur.

Brancher lappareil sur une prise relie un circuit diffrent de celui sur lequel le rcepteur est branch.

Consulter le vendeur ou un technicien radio/tlvision expriment pour obtenir de laide. Des cbles de liaison paires torsades blindes doivent tre utiliss pour assurer la conformit aux limites dmission RF qui gouvernent ce dispositif. AVIS DOC (INDUSTRIE CANADA) Avis aux utilisateurs de postes radio et de tlviseurs Cet appareil numrique de classe B respecte toutes les exigences de la Rglementation canadienne sur le matriel brouilleur. 88 - Renseignements sur la rglementation Annexe A : Guide dutilisation de la carte de rseau local sans fil Renseignements sur la rglementation de la FCC Veuillez prendre note des renseignements suivants sur la rglementation relative la carte rseau sans fil en option. Remarques et dclarations rglementaires Sant et autorisation dutilisation Carte rseau sans fil Une carte rseau sans fil met de lnergie lectromagntique radiofrquence. Les niveaux dnergie lectromagntique de ces missions sont toutefois beaucoup moins levs que ceux dautres appareils sans fil, tels que les tlphones cellulaires. La carte rseau sans fil peut tre utilise en toute scurit car son fonctionnement est conforme aux recommandations et aux normes de scurit en matire de radiofrquences. Lusage dune carte rseau sans fil peut tre limit dans certaines situations ou certains environnements, notamment :

bord dun avion ;

dans un lieu contenant des matires explosives ;

dans des situations o le risque dinterfrence avec dautres appareils ou services est jug dangereux. Lorsque la politique dutilisation des cartes rseaux sans fil de certains lieux risque nest pas bien dfinie (par exemple, dans les aroports, les hpitaux, les usines de produits chimiques, les raffineries de ptrole ou de gaz et dans les difices privs), obtenez dabord une autorisation. 89 Renseignements sur la rglementation et avis de non-responsabilit Cette carte rseau sans fil doit tre installe et utilise conformment aux instructions de la documentation livre avec le produit. Toute modification apporte sans lapprobation expresse du fabricant peut annuler le droit de lutilisateur de sen servir. Le fabricant nest pas responsable des interfrences avec la rception des ondes de radio ou de tlvision causes par une modification non autorise ou par le remplacement ou le raccord de cbles et de matriel de connexion autres que ceux prescrits par le fabricant. Il incombe lutilisateur de remdier aux interfrences causes par une telle modification, substitution ou connexion non autorise. Le fabricant et ses revendeurs ou distributeurs autoriss ne peuvent tre tenus responsables des dommages ni de toute infraction la rglementation gouvernementale rsultant du non-respect de ces directives. Cet appareil ne doit pas tre utilis avec ou proximit immdiate dune antenne ou dun metteur. Avis concernant les rseaux sans fil IEEE 802.11a : Le matriel destin un usage sur la bande 5,15~5,25 GHz doit tre utilis uniquement lintrieur et son antenne doit tre intgrale. Dclarations concernant la rglementation de la FCC Ce matriel est conforme aux limites dfinies dans la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible ;

(2) cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris celles pouvant causer un mauvais fonctionnement de lappareil. Dclaration concernant les dispositions de la FCC sur les interfrences Cet appareil a t test et reconnu conforme aux limites tablies pour le matriel numrique de classe B, selon la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour assurer une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences nuisibles dans un environnement rsidentiel. Cet appareil gnre, utilise et peut mettre de lnergie radiofrquence. Sil nest pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut causer des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Il nest toutefois pas garanti quaucune interfrence ne sera observe dans un environnement particulier. Si ce matriel cause des interfrences nuisibles la rception des ondes de radio ou de tlvision, ce qui peut tre vrifi en le mettant hors tension puis sous tension, lutilisateur devra tenter de les corriger en procdant comme suit :

1 Rorienter ou dplacer lantenne rceptrice. 2 loigner le matriel du rcepteur. 3 Brancher le matriel sur une prise alimente par un circuit diffrent de celui du rcepteur. 4 Consulter le vendeur ou un technicien radio/tlvision expriment pour obtenir de laide. 90 Dclaration concernant la rglementation de la FCC sur lexposition aux radiofrquences Selon les donnes scientifiques disponibles, il nexiste pas de problmes de sant lis lutilisation des priphriques sans fil de faible puissance. En revanche il nexiste pas non plus de preuves qui dmontrent que ces priphriques sont absolument dpourvus de risques. Les priphriques sans fil de faible puissance METTENT, lors de leur utilisation, un taux de radiofrquence faible au mme niveau que la plage des micro-ondes. Alors que des niveaux levs de RF risquent dentraner des effets nfastes sur la sant (en chauffant les tissus), lexposition un faible niveau de RF ne provoque pas les effets calorifiques qui ont un effet adverse sur la sant. De nombreuses tudes portant sur lexposition de faibles taux de RF nindiquent aucun effet biologique. Certaines tudes laissent entendre que des effets biologiques sont possibles, mais ces conclusions nont pas t confirmes par des recherches supplmentaires. La carte de rseau local sans fil a t teste et les rsultats obtenus sont conformes aux limites tablies par la FCC en matire dexposition au rayonnement dun quipement non contrl ; ainsi que les directives de la FCC en matire dexposition aux radiofrquences selon le Supplment C du Bulletin lOET65. Restrictions concernant lexportation Ce produit ou logiciel contient du code de chiffrement qui ne peut tre export ou transfr du Canada ou des tats-Unis sans un permis dexportation du dpartement du commerce des tats-Unis. Ce matriel est conforme la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC, ainsi qu la norme ICES 003 B/NMB 003 B. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible ; (2) cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris celles pouvant causer un mauvais fonctionnement de lappareil. Toute modification nayant pas t expressment approuve par la socit Fujitsu America, Inc. peut annuler le droit de lutilisateur de se servir du matriel. Avis pour le Canada Le matriel destin un usage sur la bande 5 150 - 5 250 MHz doit tre utilis uniquement lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage nuisible caus aux systmes mobiles par satellite fonctionnant sur un mme canal. Un gain dantenne de 6 dBi est autoris (pour le matriel utilisant les bandes 5 250 - 5 350 MHz, 5 470 - 5 725 MHz et 5 725 -

5 825 MHz), conformment la limite p.i.r.e. maximale permise selon lannexe A9.2 affrent aux priphriques RSS210. En outre, les utilisateurs doivent prendre garde au fait que les radars de grande puissance sont considrs comme des utilisateurs principaux (ce qui signifie quils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5 250 - 5 350 MHz et 5 650 - 5 850 MHz et quils pourraient causer des interfrences ou des dommages aux appareils de rseau exempts de licence. 91 Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil en option Ce guide explique comment installer et configurer correctement la carte rseau sans fil mini-PCI intgre

(disponible en option), ci-aprs dsigne sous le nom de carte rseau sans fil . Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil, lisez attentivement le prsent guide afin de bien comprendre son fonctionnement. Conservez ce guide en lieu sr afin de pouvoir vous y rfrer ultrieurement. Cartes rseau sans fil prsentes dans ce document Ce document sapplique aux systmes quips du composant suivant :

Carte de rseau local sans fil USB Ralink RT3572 802.11a/b/g/n, intgre Caractristiques de la carte rseau sans fil

La carte rseau sans fil est un module USB connect la carte mre de l'ordinateur portable.

Elle fonctionne dans les bandes RF pouvant tre utilises sans autorisation spciale, ce qui limine le besoin dobtenir une licence de la FCC pour les radiocommunications. Elle fonctionne dans la bande industrielle, scientifique et mdicale (ISM) de 2,4 GHz et dans les bandes UNII (Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure) infrieures, intermdiaires et suprieures (5 GHz).

Les cartes rseau sans fil peuvent tre utilises selon quatre modes de fonctionnement : IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g et IEEE 802.11n (version prliminaire).

Les cartes rseau sans fil sont certifies Wi-Fi et fonctionnent un dbit maximal thorique de 150 Mbit/s en mode IEEE 802.11n (version prliminaire), de 54 Mbit/s en mode IEEE 802.11a ou IEEE 802.11g, et de 11 Mbit/s en mode IEEE 802.11b.

La carte rseau sans fil prend en charge les modes de chiffrement WEP, TKIP, CKIP et AES.

La carte rseau sans fil est conforme aux normes suivantes : WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0, CCX4.0, et CCX5.0. 92 Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil en option Modes de rseau sans fil compatibles avec cette carte Mode Ad hoc Le mode Ad hoc dsigne une topologie de rseau sans fil dans laquelle la connectivit entre les divers ordinateurs est tablie sans priphrique central de rseau sans fil, ou point daccs. La connectivit est tablie uniquement laide de priphriques clients dans une configuration gal gal. Les rseaux Ad hoc sont donc galement connus sous le nom de rseaux dgal gal. Un rseau Ad hoc est une mthode aise et peu coteuse de relier plusieurs ordinateurs en rseau. Le mode Ad hoc exige que les paramtres de nom de rseau SSID, dauthentification rseau et de cl de chiffrement soient configurs de faon identique sur tous les ordinateurs du rseau. Figure 23. Rseau en mode Ad hoc 93 Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil en option Mode point daccs (Infrastructure) Le mode Infrastructure dsigne une topologie de rseau sans fil dans laquelle les appareils communiquent au sein dun rseau sans fil ou cbl par lintermdiaire dun point daccs. En mode Infrastructure, les appareils sans fil peuvent communiquer directement entre eux ou sur un rseau cbl. Les rseaux sans fil dentreprise fonctionnent en mode Infrastructure car ils ncessitent une connexion au rseau local sans fil pour accder aux ordinateurs, aux priphriques et aux services (par exemple, serveurs de fichier, imprimantes et bases de donnes). Internet Modem ADSL modem cble, ou similaire Rseau local cbl Point daccs*

Rseau local sans fil

*Un concentrateur en option pour rseau local peut tre requis selon le type de point daccs utilis. Figure 24. Rseau en mode point daccs (Infrastructure) 94 Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil en option Manipulation de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau local sans fil est un dispositif en option qui peut tre fourni avec votre ordinateur portable. Normalement, vous ne devriez pas avoir besoin de la retirer ou de la rinstaller. Le systme dexploitation de lordinateur est dj configur pour utiliser la carte rseau sans fil.

Le rseau local sans fil fonctionne dans les modes IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g et IEEE802.11n. suprieures (5 GHz).

Elles fonctionnent dans la bande ISM de 2,4 GHz et dans les bandes UNII infrieures, intermdiaires et

Les fours micro-ondes peuvent interfrer avec la carte rseau sans fil car ils utilisent la mme bande de frquences (2,4 GHz) que les spcifications IEEE 802.11b/g/n. Les fours micro-ondes ne causent aucune interfrence en mode IEEE 802.11a car celui-ci utilise la bande radiofrquence de 5 GHz.

Les appareils sans fil qui mettent dans la bande de frquences de 2,4 GHz peuvent nuire au fonctionnement des priphriques IEEE 802.11b/g/n. Les symptmes associs aux interfrences incluent une rduction du dbit, des coupures intermittentes de connexion et un nombre important derreurs de trames. Il est FORTEMENT recommand de mettre hors tension les appareils gnrant des interfrences afin dassurer le bon fonctionnement de la carte rseau sans fil. Dsactivation/dconnexion de la carte rseau sans fil La dsactivation de la carte rseau sans fil peut tre souhaitable dans certaines circonstances (pour prolonger la vie de la batterie) ou dans des endroits o lutilisation des appareils lectroniques est rglemente (par exemple : hpitaux, cliniques, avions, etc.). La carte rseau sans fil peut tre dsactive avec le commutateur marche/arrt correspondant ou avec Windows, en utilisant licne correspondante dans la zone de notification (Remarque : cette deuxime procdure nteindra pas la radio : lmission et la rception continueront bien que la carte rseau ait t dsactive). AVANT DUTILISER VOTRE CARTE RSEAU SANS FIL, VOUS DEVEZ DABORD INSTALLER CLICK ME! POUR VOUS ASSURER QUE LE BON PROGRAMME DE CARTE EST INSTALL. VOIR EN PAGE 45. 95 Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil en option Dsactivation avec le commutateur de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau sans fil peut tre dsactive rapidement et efficacement en mettant le commutateur correspondant en position OFF (arrt). Le commutateur de la carte rseau sans fil na aucun effet sur les modles pour rseau local cbl. Commutateur de dispositif sans fil Figure 25. Commutateur marche/arrt pour rseau local sans fil/Bluetooth Dsactivation par licne dans la zone de notification Notez quavec cette procdure, la radio ne sera pas teinte, lmission et la rception sont toujours actives bien que la carte ne soit plus connecte. 1 Faites un clic droit sur licne Carte rseau sans fil dans la zone de notification en bas droite de lcran. 2 Choisir Se dconnecter dun rseau. Activation de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau sans fil peut tre active de la mme faon que pour sa dsactivation.

Avec le commutateur correspondant

Sous Windows, en cliquant laide du bouton droit de la souris licne de la carte rseau sans fil puis en cliquant sur Connexion un rseau 96 Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil en option Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau sans fil peut tre configure pour tablir la connectivit du rseau sans fil en utilisant le logiciel intgr dans Windows. Il prend galement en charge la plupart des solutions de scurit standard. Certains paramtres prdfinis seront requis pour cette procdure. Pour les obtenir, consulter votre administrateur de rseau :

Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil 1 Cliquez sur le bouton [Dmarrer], puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration. 2 Si le Panneau de configuration nest pas en affichage classique, slectionnez Basculer vers laffichage classique sur le panneau de gauche. Double-cliquez sur licne Connexions rseau. 3 Double-cliquez sur licne Connexions rseau sans fil. 4 Cliquez sur [Afficher les rseaux sans fil]

5 Choisissez un rseau sans fil. 6 Cliquez sur [Connexion]. 7 Entrez la cl de rseau si ncessaire. 8 Entrez les informations requises. Il se peut que vous deviez consulter votre administrateur de rseau pour certaines informations. 9 Si vous avez besoin daide, allez au menu [Dmarrer] -> Aide et soutien (ou support) -> Gestion du rseau et Web. Slectionnez le sujet qui vous intresse, puis tapez les mots-cls sy rapportant dans la case Rechercher. Connexion au rseau Aprs avoir configur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez vous connecter un rseau actif en ralisant les tapes suivantes :

1 Cliquez sur licne de la carte rseau sans fil de la zone de notification. 2 Slectionnez Connexion un rseau . 3 Slectionnez un rseau dans la liste qui apparat et cliquez sur le bouton [Connexion]

Une fois la configuration effectue, vous pouvez vous connecter un rseau actif en cliquant sur licne Connexion rseau sans fil de la zone de notification. 97 Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil Dpannage Le tableau ci-dessous prsente les causes possibles et les mesures correctives pour diffrents problmes de rseau sans fil. Si les tapes raliser ne vous sont pas connues, consultez votre administrateur systme ou allez dans [Dmarrer] -> Aide et soutien (ou support) -> Gestion du rseau et Web. Problme Cause possible Solution possible Connexion de rseau non disponible Nom de rseau

(SSID) ou cl WEP non valide Connexion en mode Ad hoc : Assurez-vous que le SSID et la cl WEP de tous les ordinateurs du rseau ont t configurs correctement. Les noms de rseau et les valeurs de la cl WEP doivent tre identiques sur chaque ordinateur. Connexion en mode point daccs (Infrastructure) : Attribuez aux ordinateurs le mme SSID et la mme cl WEP que ceux du point daccs. Attribuez la mme valeur dauthentification rseau que celle du point daccs. Consultez votre administrateur de rseau si cette valeur est requise. Signal faible et/ou mauvaise qualit de la liaison Connexion en mode Ad hoc : Essayez de rtablir la connexion aprs avoir rapproch lordinateur ou retir les ventuels obstacles. Connexion en mode point daccs (Infrastructure) : Essayez de rtablir la connexion aprs avoir rapproch le point daccs ou retir les ventuels obstacles. La carte rseau sans fil est dsactive Assurez-vous que linterrupteur de la carte rseau sans fil est sur ON. Allez dans [Dmarrer] -> Panneau de configuration, puis double-cliquez sur Centre de mobilit Windows. Si le rseau sans fil est teint, cliquez sur le bouton Allumer le rseau sans fil . Lordinateur connecter est teint Vrifiez si lordinateur est allum. 98 Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil Problme Cause possible Solution possible Connexion de rseau non disponible

(suite) Interfrences RF provenant de points daccs ou dautres rseaux sans fil chec de lauthentification de la carte rseau sans fil Paramtres rseau mal configurs Lutilisation de canaux RF identiques ou se chevauchant peut nuire au fonctionnement de la carte rseau sans fil. Changez le canal de votre point daccs en tenant compte du canal du priphrique nuisible. Vrifiez les paramtres dauthentification rseau, de chiffrement et de scurit. Si les paramtres de scurit sont mal configurs, en raison, par exemple, dune cl WEP comportant une faute de frappe, dun nom dutilisateur LEAP incorrect ou dun mauvais choix de mthode dauthentification, la carte rseau sans fil sassociera au rseau sans fil mais ne sy authentifiera pas. Vrifiez la configuration des paramtres rseau. Configuration incorrecte de ladresse IP Ceci sapplique uniquement aux rseaux qui utilisent des adresses IP statiques. Pour obtenir les paramtres appropris, consultez votre administrateur de rseau. 99 Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil Spcifications de la carte rseau sans fil Spcifications lment Type de rseau Dbit Frquence active Porte nominale**

Nombre de canaux Spcification La carte rseau sans fil intgre Ralink RT3572, IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n est conforme aux spcifications IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g et 802.11n, Wi-Fi*.

(Commutation automatique) dbit maximum de 150 Mbit/s

802.11n : 2,4 GHz ou 5 GHz

802.11b/g : 2 400 ~ 2 473 MHz

802.11a : 4 900 ~ 5 850 MHz

802.11a : 12 mtres (40 pi) 54 Mbit/s ; 91 mtres (300 pi) 6 Mbit/s

802.11b : 30 mtres (100 pi) 11 Mbit/s ; 91 mtres (300 pi) 1 Mbit/s

802,11g : 30 mtres (100 pi) 54 Mbit/s ; 91 mtres (300 pi) 1 Mbit/s

802.11n : selon les estimations, les portes des modes 802.11g et 802.11a, dans leurs frquences respectives, sont multiplies par deux.

802.11a : 8, indpendants

802.11b/g : 11, dont 3 sans chevauchement

802.11n : 2,4 GHz - 3 canaux sans chevauchement lorsque la liaison entre canaux nest pas utilise ; 2 canaux sans chevauchement lorsque la liaison entre canaux est utilise. 

5 GHz - 12 canaux UNII sans chevauchement, que la liaison entre canaux soit ou non utilise. Scurit Types de chiffrement compatible avec WEP, TKIP, AES*** et WPA 1.0 Nombre maximum recommand dordinateurs connects au rseau local sans fil (en mode Ad hoc) 10 ou moins****

100 Spcifications de la carte rseau sans fil

* Type Wi-Fi indique que le test dinterconnectivit de la Wi-Fi Alliance (organisation garantissant linterconnectivit des rseaux sans fil) a russi.

** La porte peut varier selon certains facteurs (par exemple, nombre de murs, rflectivit des matriaux ou interfrences provenant dautres sources de radiofrquences).

*** Le chiffrement par cl de rseau (WEP) est effectu avec le nombre de bits indiqu ci-dessus, mais lutilisateur peut dfinir une cl de 40 ou 104 bits aprs avoir soustrait la longueur fixe de 24 bits.

**** Selon lenvironnement, le nombre maximum dordinateurs peut tre infrieur. 101 Spcifications de la carte rseau sans fil Utilisation de Bluetooth Le module Bluetooth intgr (V 3.0) est un composant offert en option pour les ordinateurs portables Fujitsu. Prsentation de Bluetooth La technologie Bluetooth est conue pour assurer la liaison sans fil faible porte entre divers appareils mobiles, tels que tlphones, ordinateurs portables, imprimantes et camras. La technologie Bluetooth permet dtablir des rseaux personnels (PAN) entre des appareils situs courte distance les uns des autres. LE COMMUTATEUR DE LINTERFACE RSEAU SANS FIL / BLUETOOTH PERMET DTEINDRE SIMULTANMENT LES INTERFACES RSEAU SANS FIL ET BLUETOOTH. POUR ACTIVER OU DSACTIVER SPARMENT LUN OU LAUTRE, PROCDEZ COMME SUIT :

1 Faites glisser le commutateur de carte rseau sans fil/Bluetooth la position de 

marche (ON). Faites un clic droit sur licne Bluetooth situe dans la zone de notification Windows 

en bas droite, dans la barre de tches. Slectionnez Turn Adapter On (or Off) (Mettre ladaptateur sous/hors tension). Cliquez sur [OK]. 2 3 4 Sources dinformations supplmentaires sur Bluetooth Pour en savoir davantage sur la technologie Bluetooth, visitez le site Web : www.bluetooth.com. 102 Utilisation de Bluetooth nonc de la FCC relatif lexposition aux rayonnements Cet quipement respecte les normes de la FCC relatives lexposition aux rayonnements, dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Lantenne Bluetooth est situe sur le rebord avant du repose-mains droit et est exempte des critres de distance minimale en raison de sa faible puissance. Les metteurs de ce priphrique ne doivent pas tre utiliss avec ou proximit immdiate dune antenne ou dun autre metteur. Avis pour le Canada Pour viter que ce service fourni sous licence soit perturb par des interfrences radio, ce matriel doit tre utilis lintrieur et distance des fentres. Si lquipement (ou lantenne de transmission) est install lextrieur, une licence peut tre ncessaire. Garantie Les utilisateurs ne sont pas autoriss modifier ce produit. Toute modification annule la garantie. Cet quipement ne peut tre modifi, altr ou chang en aucune faon sans lautorisation crite de Fujitsu. Toute modification non autorise annulera les autorisations dquipement de la FCC et dIndustrie Canada, de mme que la garantie. 103 Utilisation de Bluetooth Annexe B : Capteur dempreintes digitales Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Votre systme est dot dun dispositif de reconnaissance des empreintes digitales, situ en bas gauche de lcran. Capteur dempreintes digitales Figure 28. Capteur dempreintes digitales Grce au capteur dempreintes digitales, il nest plus ncessaire de saisir votre nom dutilisateur et votre mot de passe chaque fois que vous voulez :

Ouvrir une session dans Windows

Reprise partir du mode sommeil

Annuler un conomiseur dcran protg par mot de passe

Ouvrir une session dans des pages daccueil ncessitant un nom dutilisateur et un mot de passe 104 Aprs avoir inscrit ou enregistr votre empreinte digitale, il vous suffit de glisser le bout de votre doigt sur le capteur pour que le systme vous reconnaisse. Le capteur dempreintes digitales utilise le logiciel Softex OmniPass qui fournit des fonctions de gestion de mot de passe aux systmes dexploitation Microsoft Windows. OmniPass vous permet dutiliser un mot de passe principal pour tous les crans en ligne, toutes les applications Windows et dautres applications demandant un mot de passe. OmniPass demande aux utilisateurs de sauthentifier laide du capteur dempreintes digitales avant de leur donner accs au bureau Windows. Ce priphrique comporte un systme dauthentification scuris qui limite laccs votre ordinateur, vos applications, vos sites Web et aux autres ressources protges par mot de passe. OmniPass prsente une interface graphique conviviale, qui permet de grer de faon scuritaire les mots de passe, les comptes utilisateur et les identits multiples pour chaque utilisateur. Premire mise en marche Cette section vous montre comment prparer votre systme linstallation de lapplication de reconnaissance dempreintes digitales OmniPass. Vous y trouverez des conseils qui vous guideront au long de la procdure dinstallation. Elle indique galement de faon dtaille comment enregistrer votre premier utilisateur dans OmniPass. Installation dOmniPass Si lapplication OmniPass a dj t installe sur votre systme, sautez cette section et allez directement Enregistrement des utilisateurs en page 108. Pour savoir si lapplication OmniPass est dj installe, vrifiez si les lments suivants sont prsents :

Une icne OmniPass, dore et en forme de cl, figure dans la zone de notification, dans le coin infrieur droit de lcran.

Lapplication Softex apparat dans le groupe de Programmes du menu Dmarrer. 105 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Configuration de systme ncessaire Lapplication OmniPass ncessite de lespace sur votre disque dur ainsi quun systme dexploitation (SE) spcifique. Les exigences minimales sont les suivantes :

Systme dexploitation Windows XP Professionnel ou systme dexploitation ultrieur

Au moins 35 Mo despace disque disponible Installation de lapplication OmniPass Si lapplication OmniPass est dj installe sur votre systme, allez directement Enregistrement des utilisateurs en page 108. Autrement, continuez suivre les instructions de cette section concernant linstallation du logiciel.

POUR INSTALLER LE LOGICIEL, VOUS DEVEZ AVOIR UN LECTEUR OPTIQUE EXTERNE RACCORD VOTRE

LUTILISATEUR DSIRANT INSTALLER OMNIPASS DOIT DISPOSER DE DROITS DADMINISTRATEUR DANS LE ORDINATEUR. SYSTME. SI VOUS NAVEZ PAS DE TELS DROITS, FERMEZ LA SESSION ET OUVREZ-EN UNE AUTRE AVEC UN NOM DUTILISATEUR POSSDANT CES DROITS AVANT DE POURSUIVRE LINSTALLATION DOMNIPASS. Pour installer OmniPass dans votre systme, vous devez excuter les oprations suivantes :

1 Insrez le disque dinstallation de lapplication OmniPass dans le lecteur appropri. Si vous installez OmniPass partir dun CD-ROM ou dun DVD-ROM, vous devez trouver et lancer le programme dinstallation (setup.Exe) se trouvant sur le disque. 2 Suivez les instructions figurant dans le programme dinstallation. Indiquez lendroit o vous souhaitez installer OmniPass. Il est recommand de NE PAS installer lapplication dans le rpertoire racine (par exemple : C:\). 3 Une fois linstallation dOmniPass termine, vous serez invit redmarrer votre systme. Vous pourrez ensuite utiliser OmniPass. Si vous dcidez de ne pas redmarrer votre systme immdiatement aprs linstallation, OmniPass ne sera pas disponible avant le prochain redmarrage. 4 Le programme dinstallation place automatiquement une icne (Softex OmniPass) dans le panneau de configuration Windows, ainsi quune icne dore en forme de cl dans la zone de notification. 106 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Vrification des informations concernant votre version dOmniPass Aprs avoir install OmniPass et redmarr votre systme, vous pouvez dcider de vrifier la version d logiciel. Pour vrifier votre version dOmniPass :

1 partir du bureau Windows, double-cliquez sur licne en forme de cl OmniPass dans la barre des tches

(situe habituellement dans le coin infrieur droit de lcran),

ou

cliquez sur le bouton Dmarrer , slectionnez Paramtres, puis cliquez sur Panneau de configuration. Double-cliquez sur Softex OmniPass dans le panneau de configuration et vous verrez apparatre le Centre de contrle OmniPass. Si ce nest pas le cas, le programme nest pas correctement install, 

ou

bien cliquez sur le bouton Dmarrer, slectionnez Programmes, puis Softex dans le groupe de programmes du sous-menu et cliquez ensuite sur Centre de contrle OmniPass. 2 Slectionnez longlet propos de en haut du Centre de contrle OmniPass. Une fentre indiquant la version du logiciel OmniPass apparat. Dsinstallation dOmniPass LUTILISATEUR DSIRANT DSINSTALLER OMNIPASS DOIT DISPOSER DE DROITS DADMINISTRATEUR DANS LE SYSTME. SI VOUS NAVEZ PAS DE TELS DROITS, FERMEZ LA SESSION ET OUVREZ-EN UNE AUTRE AVEC UN NOM DUTILISATEUR POSSDANT CES DROITS AVANT DE POURSUIVRE LA DSINSTALLATION DOMNIPASS. Pour supprimer lapplication OmniPass de votre systme :

1 Cliquez sur [Dmarrer] dans la barre des tches. Slectionnez Paramtres, puis Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des Programmes. 3 Slectionnez OmniPass, puis cliquez sur [Modifier/Supprimer]. 4 Suivez les instructions de dsinstallation de lapplication OmniPass. 5 Aprs la dsinstallation dOmniPass, redmarrez votre systme lorsque vous y tes invit. 107 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Enregistrement des utilisateurs Avant de pouvoir utiliser les fonctions dOmniPass, vous devez enregistrer un utilisateur dans ce programme. Concept du mot de passe principal Les ressources dun ordinateur sont souvent protges par des mots de passe. Lorsque vous vous connectez votre ordinateur, que vous consultez vos courriels, que vous effectuez des oprations bancaires sur Internet, que vous payez des factures en ligne ou que vous accdez aux ressources dun rseau, il vous est souvent demand de vous identifier. Il se peut alors que vous ayez besoin de dizaines de mots de passe dont vous devez vous rappeler. Lors de lenregistrement dun utilisateur, un mot de passe principal est cr son intention. Ce mot de passe remplace tous les autres mots de passe des sites sur lesquels lutilisateur senregistre avec OmniPass. Exemple : Un utilisateur, Jean, installe OmniPass sur son systme (son ordinateur de maison) et inscrit un utilisateur OmniPass avec le nom dutilisateur Jean_01 et mot de passe freq14 . Il se rend ensuite sur son site Internet de courriel pour ouvrir une session dans son compte. Il entre, comme dhabitude, son nom dutilisateur et son mot de passe (par exemple, Jean_02 et STYLISTIC ), mais au lieu de cliquer sur Ouvrir session, il demande OmniPass de Mmoriser le mot de passe. Dornavant, chaque fois quil retournera sur ce site, OmniPass linvitera fournir ses informations didentification. Jean saisira alors les informations OmniPass ( Jean_01 et freq14 ) dans linvite dauthentification dOmniPass et pourra accder son compte de courriel. Il peut rpter cette opration avec autant de sites Web ou de ressources protges par mot de passe quil le souhaite et pourra accder tous ces sites laide de ses informations didentification dutilisateur OmniPass ( Jean_01 et freq14 ). Pour ce faire, il devra utiliser le systme sur lequel il sest enregistr titre dutilisateur OmniPass. En fait, OmniPass ne change pas les informations didentification de la ressource protge par mot de passe. Si Jean veut accder son courriel depuis un ordinateur sur lequel le compte OmniPass nexiste pas, il devra saisir ses informations didentification originales ( Jean_02 et STYLISTIC ). Dans ce cas, sil tente dutiliser ses informations didentification OmniPass, laccs au site lui sera refus. 108 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales CETTE PROCDURE DENREGISTREMENT REPOSE SUR LHYPOTHSE QUE VOUS NE VOULEZ INTGRER OMNIPASS AUCUN PRIPHRIQUE DAUTHENTIFICATION OU AUTRE EMPLACEMENT DE STOCKAGE. SI VOUS SOUHAITEZ DISPOSER DE CETTE FONCTIONNALIT, CONSULTEZ LES SECTIONS CORRESPONDANTES DU PRSENT DOCUMENT. Enregistrement de base LAssistant denregistrement vous guidera travers les tapes denregistrement dun utilisateur. Sauf indication contraire de votre part, lAssistant denregistrement sera lanc aprs linstallation dOmniPass au moment de louverture dune session Windows. Si lassistant napparat pas, vous pouvez le lancer en cliquant sur Dmarrer dans la barre de tches Windows. Slectionnez ensuite Programmes, puis Softex et cliquez sur Assistant denregistrement OmniPass. 1 Cliquez sur [Enregistrement] pour procder la vrification de lutilisateur et du mot de passe. Par dfaut, lAssistant denregistrement entre les informations didentification de lutilisateur Windows actuellement connect. 2 Entrez le mot de passe qui vous sert ouvrir une session dans Windows. Il deviendra le mot de passe principal de cet utilisateur OmniPass. Dans la plupart des cas, la valeur de Domaine : correspondra au nom de votre ordinateur Windows. Dans un environnement dentreprise, ou lorsque vous accdez des ressources professionnelles, il se peut que Domaine : ne corresponde pas au nom de votre ordinateur. Cliquez sur

[Suivant] pour continuer. 3 Au cours de cette tape, OmniPass prend votre empreinte digitale. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-

vous Enregistrement dune empreinte digitale en page 110. 4 Ensuite, choisissez comment OmniPass doit vous avertir de diffrents vnements. Nous vous recommandons de laisser Astuces de la barre de tches sur Astuces de la barre des tches en mode dbutant et Invites audio sur au moins Invite avec signaux sonores uniquement, jusqu ce que le fonctionnement dOmniPass vous soit familier. Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour procder lenregistrement de lutilisateur. Un cran de flicitations, indiquant que lenregistrement de lutilisateur est termin, apparatra. 5 Cliquez sur [Termin] pour quitter lassistant denregistrement. Il vous sera demand si vous voulez vous connecter OmniPass avec les informations dutilisateur nouvellement enregistres. Cliquez sur [Oui]. 109 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Enregistrement dune empreinte digitale Lenregistrement dune empreinte digitale augmentera la scurit de votre systme et simplifiera la procdure dauthentification. Lenregistrement des empreintes digitales se fait partir du Centre de contrle OmniPass. Aprs vous tre connect titre dutilisateur OmniPass, cliquez deux fois sur licne OmniPass dans la zone de notification. Slectionnez longlet Paramtres utilisateur, puis cliquez sur [Enregistrement] dans la zone Paramtres utilisateur. Cliquez sur [Enregistrer le priphrique dauthentification] et authentifiez-vous linvite dauthentification dOmniPass. Le systme ouvre la procdure denregistrement du priphrique. 1 Pendant la procdure denregistrement initial de lutilisateur, vous serez invit slectionner le doigt qui sera enregistr. Les doigts dj enregistrs seront marqus dun crochet vert. Le doigt slectionn pour lenregistrement sera marqu dune flche rouge. OmniPass vous permet de renregistrer un doigt. Si vous choisissez un doigt qui a dj t enregistr et que vous poursuivez la procdure denregistrement, OmniPass enregistre lempreinte digitale actuelle la place de lancienne empreinte. Slectionnez un doigt enregistrer et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 2 Il est temps pour OmniPass de prendre lempreinte que vous avez choisie. Plusieurs tentatives peuvent tre ncessaires avant quOmniPass prenne votre empreinte digitale. Si OmniPass ny parvient pas ou si lcran de capture de lempreinte digitale expire, cliquez sur [Prcdent] pour redmarrer le processus denregistrement dempreinte digitale. 

Votre systme est quip dun capteur dempreintes digitales glissement . Les capteurs glissement sont de taille rduite et ressemblent un mince rectangle allong. Pour prendre une empreinte digitale, faites glisser ou tirez doucement vers vous le bout de votre doigt sur le capteur ( partir de la deuxime articulation). Un glissement trop rapide ou trop lent pourrait faire chouer la prise dempreintes. Lcran Choisir un doigt dispose dun bouton [Pratique] ; cliquez dessus pour pratiquer la prise de votre empreinte digitale. Lorsque vous matrisez la prise dempreintes digitales, vous pouvez procder lenregistrement dun doigt. 3 Lorsque OmniPass a correctement pris lempreinte digitale, lcran Vrifier lempreinte digitale saffiche automatiquement. Pour vrifier lenregistrement de votre empreinte, placez le bout de votre doigt sur le capteur comme lors dune prise dempreinte digitale. Si lempreinte a t vrifie avec succs, une empreinte digitale verte apparat dans la fentre de prise et le texte Vrification russie saffiche en dessous. 110 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Utilisation dOmniPass Vous pouvez maintenant commencer utiliser OmniPass. Son utilisation rgulire vous permettra de simplifier vos procdures dauthentification. Remplacement du mot de passe Vous utiliserez souvent la fonction de remplacement du mot de passe. Lorsque vous allez sur un site Internet accs restreint (par exemple, de votre banque, de votre courrier lectronique, de paiement ou denchres en ligne), vous serez toujours invit entrer vos rfrences de connexion. OmniPass peut dtecter ces invites et vous pouvez lui enseigner enregistrer vos rfrences. La prochaine fois que vous visiterez un de ces sites, vous pourrez vous authentifier laide de votre empreinte digitale pour y accder. Barre doutils dauthentification OmniPass Aprs avoir install OmniPass et redmarr votre ordinateur, vous remarquerez la prsence dune nouvelle bote de dialogue au dbut de votre session Windows. Il sagit de la barre doutils dauthentification OmniPass. Celle-ci saffiche chaque fois que le systme dauthentification est appel. Ce systme peut tre appel frquemment : pendant louverture dune session Windows, lors de la connexion OmniPass, lorsque vous dverrouillez votre poste de travail, lorsque vous reprenez le systme depuis le mode sommeil ou veille prolonge, lorsque vous dverrouillez un conomiseur dcran activ par mot de passe, lors du remplacement du mot de passe dun site mmoris ou des noms de connexion dapplications, etc. Lorsque cette barre doutils saffiche, OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier. La fentre Authentification de la connexion indique la fonction restreinte par OmniPass laquelle vous tentez de vous connecter. Les icnes en bas gauche (empreinte digitale et cl) indiquent les mthodes dauthentification disponibles. Les mthodes slectionnes sont en surbrillance, contrairement aux mthodes non slectionnes. Lorsque vous cliquez sur licne pour obtenir une mthode dauthentification non slectionne, linvite dauthentification associe cette mthode saffiche. linvite dauthentification, vous devez fournir les informations didentification appropries : un doigt enregistr dans la fentre dempreintes digitales ou votre mot de passe principal dans la case de mot de passe principal (licne en forme de cl). 111 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Mmorisation dun mot de passe OmniPass peut mmoriser toute application, toute interface graphique ou toute autre ressource protge par un mot de passe. laide de la procdure suivante, vous pourrez sauvegarder dans OmniPass toutes les informations permettant de vous identifier. Ces informations seront ensuite associes votre mot de passe principal ou votre empreinte digitale. Allez sur un site comportant une procdure de connexion (nom dutilisateur et mot de passe), mais ne vous connectez pas tout de suite. linvite de connexion au site, entrez votre nom dutilisateur et votre mot de passe dans les champs appropris, mais nentrez pas sur le site (nappuyez pas sur [Entrer], [Envoyer],

[OK], ou [Connexion]). Cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur licne OmniPass de la zone de notification et slectionnez Mmoriser le mot de passe dans le sous-menu. Le curseur flch Windows devient un curseur OmniPass en forme de cl dore. Cliquez sur ce curseur dans la zone dinvite de connexion, mais ne cliquez pas sur le bouton [Connexion] ou [Envoyer]. Association dun nom convivial Aprs avoir cliqu sur le curseur en forme de cl prs de linvite de connexion, OmniPass vous invitera entrer un nom convivial pour ce site. Vous devez entrer un terme qui vous rappelle le site Internet, la socit ou le service auquel vous vous connectez. Dans sa base de donnes scurise, OmniPass associe ce nom convivial au site Internet. Paramtres supplmentaires pour mmoriser un site Lorsque vous tes invit entrer un nom convivial , vous pouvez dfinir la manire dont OmniPass vous authentifie sur ce site. Trois choix sont votre disposition pour chaque site mmoris par OmniPass. Le paramtre par dfaut est Cliquer automatiquement sur le bouton OK ou Soumettre pour ce site protg par mot de passe une fois lutilisateur authentifi. Avec ce paramtre, chaque fois que vous accdez ce site, OmniPass vous demandera votre mot de passe principal ou votre priphrique dauthentification dempreintes digitales. Lorsque votre authentification est complte par OmniPass, vous tes automatiquement connect au site. 112 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales La deuxime option est moins scuritaire : Entrer automatiquement sur ce site protg par mot de passe lorsquil est activ. Ne pas demander dauthentification. Cochez la case suprieure pour slectionner ce choix. Ensuite, chaque fois que vous vous connectez ce site, OmniPass vous donnera accs sans vous demander de vous authentifier. CE PARAMTRE EST PLUS PRATIQUE CAR DS QUE VOUS DEMANDEZ UN SITE QUI Y EST ASSOCI, VOUS SAUTEZ LA PROCDURE DAUTHENTIFICATION ET VOUS ACCDEZ INSTANTANMENT AU SITE. CEPENDANT, SI VOUS LAISSEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR SANS SURVEILLANCE AVEC VOTRE CONNEXION OMNIPASS ACTIVE, TOUTE PERSONNE UTILISANT VOTRE SYSTME PEUT ENTRER SUR LES SITES PROTGS EN USURPANT VOTRE IDENTIT. Si vous dslectionnez les deux cases dans Paramtres pour ce site protg par mot de passe, OmniPass vous demande votre mot de passe principal ou votre priphrique dauthentification. Lorsque votre authentification est complte par OmniPass, vos informations didentification saffichent linvite de connexion du site. Toutefois, vous devez cliquer sur le bouton [OK], [Envoyer] ou [Connexion] pour accder au site. Cliquez sur [Terminer] pour achever la procdure de mmorisation du mot de passe. Lemplacement du site, les informations didentification pour y accder et les paramtres dauthentification OmniPass correspondant ce site sont dsormais sauvegards dans la base de donnes scurise dOmniPass. Les paramtres dauthentification dOmniPass (Paramtres pour ce site protg par mot de passe) peuvent toujours tre modifis dans Gestion du coffre-fort. Connexion un site mmoris Selon les informations contenues dans Paramtres pour ce site protg par mot de passe, OmniPass vous invitera ou non vous authentifier lorsque vous retournerez un site mmoris. Ces informations peuvent tre modifies dans Gestion du coffre-fort. Les cas suivants sappliquent lutilisation dOmniPass pour se connecter : Windows, aux sites mmoriss et toutes les autres ressources protges par mot de passe. 113 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Avec mot de passe principal Lorsque vous retournez un site mmoris avec OmniPass, il se peut que le systme vous demande un mot de passe principal. Entrez votre mot de passe principal et vous serez autoris accder au site. Connexion Windows avec un capteur dempreintes digitales Lorsque vous vous connectez Windows laide dun capteur dempreintes, la fentre de prise dempreintes digitales apparat ct de lcran de connexion Windows. Placez votre doigt enregistr sur le capteur pour que le systme vous identifie. Vous serez simultanment connect Windows et OmniPass. La fentre de prise dempreinte saffiche galement si vous avez utilis Ctrl-Alt-Suppr pour verrouiller le systme. En outre, le capteur dempreintes peut tre utilis pour vous reconnecter, comme indiqu ci-dessus. SI UN ORDINATEUR EST VERROUILL ET QUOMNIPASS DTECTE UN UTILISATEUR DIFFRENT SE RECONNECTANT AVEC SON EMPREINTE DIGITALE, LE PREMIER UTILISATEUR SERA DCONNECT ET LE SECOND CONNECT. Gestion des mots de passe OmniPass propose une interface qui vous permet de grer vos mots de passe. Pour accder cette interface graphique, cliquez deux fois sur la cl OmniPass dans la zone de notification. Cliquez sur Gestion du coffre-fort ; vous serez invit vous authentifier. Lorsque vous avez accd Gestion du coffre-fort, cliquez sur Grer les mots de passe sous Paramtres du coffre-fort. Linterface Grer les mots de passe apparat avec une liste de noms conviviaux. Si vous dsirez afficher les informations didentification sauvegardes pour un site Internet mmoris, mettez en surbrillance la ressource souhaite sous Bote de dialogue Protection par mot de passe et cliquez sur Afficher les valeurs. En cas de rinitialisation dun mot de passe ou dexpiration dun compte, vous pouvez supprimer les informations didentification sauvegardes dans OmniPass. Mettez en surbrillance la ressource souhaite sous Bote de dialogue Protection par mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Supprimer la page. Vous serez invit confirmer la suppression du mot de passe. Les deux cases cocher dans Grer les mots de passe dterminent si OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier ou vous connecte directement au site mmoris. 114 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Si vous tentez dutiliser Mmoriser le mot de passe sur un site dj connu, OmniPass efface les anciennes informations didentification. Le remplacement de votre mot de passe Windows constitue lexception la rgle ci-dessus. Si votre mot de passe est rinitialis dans Windows, le changement sera dtect par OmniPass qui vous invitera Mettre jour ou Reconfirmer le mot de passe. Entrez votre nouveau mot de passe Windows dans linvite, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Votre mot de passe principal Omnipass sera toujours votre mot de passe Windows. Identits dutilisateur OmniPass Les identits permettent aux utilisateurs OmniPass de possder plusieurs comptes sur un mme site (par exemple, claude@biblomail.com et claudepicard@biblomail.com). Si OmniPass ne vous a pas fourni didentits, vous ne pourrez mmoriser quun seul compte par site. Pour crer et grer des identits, cliquez deux fois sur la cl OmniPass dans la zone de notification. Cliquez sur Gestion du coffre-fort. OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier. Lorsque vous avez accd Gestion du coffre-fort, cliquez sur Grer les mots de passe sous Paramtres du coffre-fort. Vous pouvez seulement grer les identits de lutilisateur OmniPass actuellement connect. Pour ajouter une nouvelle identit, cliquez sur Nouvelle identit ou double-cliquez sur Cliquer ici pour ajouter une nouvelle identit. Nommez la nouvelle identit et cliquez sur [OK], puis sur [Appliquer]. Vous pouvez dsormais basculer vers la nouvelle identit et dmarrer la mmorisation des mots de passe. Pour supprimer une identit, mettez en surbrillance lidentit supprimer et cliquez sur [Supprimer lidentit], puis cliquez sur [Appliquer]. LORSQUE VOUS SUPPRIMEZ UNE IDENTIT, TOUS LES SITES MMORISS ET LES BOTES DE DIALOGUE PROTECTION PAR MOT DE PASSE ASSOCIS LIDENTIT SONT PERDUS. 115 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Pour dfinir lidentit par dfaut, mettez en surbrillance lidentit souhaite puis cliquez sur [Dfinir par dfaut] et cliquez sur [Appliquer] pour vrifier que les paramtres sont bien enregistrs. Si vous accdez OmniPass laide dun capteur dempreintes digitales, vous serez automatiquement connect lidentit par dfaut de lutilisateur OmniPass associ lempreinte. Si vous utilisez la procdure de connexion laide du mot de passe principal , vous pouvez choisir lidentit avec laquelle vous vous connectez. Choix de lidentit de lutilisateur lors de la connexion Pour choisir votre identit lors de la connexion, tapez votre nom dutilisateur dans le champ Nom dutilisateur :. Appuyez sur [Tab] et assurez-vous que le champ Domaine : se remplit automatiquement. Cliquez sur le champ Mot de passe : pour pointer le curseur dessus et vous verrez le menu droulant dans le champ Identit :. Slectionnez lidentit souhaite puis cliquez sur [OK]. Changement didentit de lutilisateur Pour changer les identits tout moment, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur licne OmniPass dans la zone de notification, puis cliquez sur Changer lidentit de lutilisateur dans le sous-menu. La bote de dialogue Changer didentit apparat. Slectionnez lidentit souhaite puis cliquez sur [OK]. Gestion des mots de passe et des identits Sur linterface Grer les mots de passe de longlet Gestion du coffre-fort du Centre de contrle OmniPass, il existe une liste de slection droulante nomme Identit. Ce champ vous permet de choisir lidentit pour laquelle vous dsirez grer les mots de passe. Lorsque vous slectionnez une identit dans cette liste, le systme affiche seulement les botes de dialogue Protection par mot de passe associes cette identit. Vous pouvez effectuer toutes les fonctions expliques dans Gestion des mots de passe en page 114. 116 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Configuration dOmniPass Cette section vous donne un aperu de la fonction Exportation/Importation et du Centre de contrle OmniPass. Exportation et importation dutilisateurs VOUS NE POUVEZ PAS IMPORTER UN UTILISATEUR DANS OMNIPASS SI UN UTILISATEUR PORTANT LE MME NOM Y EST DJ ENREGISTR. Vous pouvez importer et exporter des utilisateurs dans et hors dOmniPass laide du Centre de contrle. Le processus dexportation permet de sauvegarder tous les sites mmoriss, les informations didentification et les empreintes enregistres dun utilisateur OmniPass. Toutes les donnes OmniPass dun utilisateur sont sauvegardes dans un fichier de base de donnes crypt unique. Durant le processus dimportation, vous devez utiliser les informations de connexion Windows de lutilisateur export. Si les informations didentification appropries ne sont pas fournies, le profil utilisateur ne sera pas import.

VOUS DEVEZ EXPORTER PRIODIQUEMENT VOTRE PROFIL UTILISATEUR ET LE SAUVEGARDER DANS UN ENDROIT SR. SIL DEVAIT ARRIVER QUELQUE CHOSE VOTRE SYSTME, VOUS POUVEZ IMPORTER VOTRE PROFIL OMNIPASS SUR UN NOUVEAU SYSTME ET DISPOSER INSTANTANMENT DE TOUS VOS PARAMTRES ET EMPREINTES DIGITALES MMORISS.

NOUBLIEZ PAS VOS INFORMATIONS DIDENTIFICATION WINDOWS UTILISES LORS DE LEXPORTATION. LORSQUE VOUS PROCDEZ LIMPORTATION DUN PROFIL UTILISATEUR, OMNIPASS VOUS INVITE VOUS AUTHENTIFIER. LES INFORMATIONS DIDENTIFICATION PERMETTANT DIMPORTER UN PROFIL SONT LES RFRENCES DE CONNEXION WINDOWS DE LUTILISATEUR EXPORT. CES RFRENCES SONT CELLES QUIL FALLAIT SOUMETTRE LORSQUE LE PROFIL DUTILISATEUR A T EXPORT. VOUS AUREZ BESOIN DU NOM DUTILISATEUR, DU MOT DE PASSE ET DU DOMAINE. 117 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Exporter un profil dutilisateur OmniPass Pour exporter un profil utilisateur, ouvrez le Centre de contrle OmniPass et cliquez sur Importer/exporter un utilisateur sous Grer les utilisateurs. Cliquez sur Exporter un profil utilisateur OmniPass. OmniPass vous invitera vous authentifier. Une fois lauthentification russie, vous devez nommer le profil utilisateur OmniPass et dcider o lenregistrer. Un fichier .opi est gnr et vous devez en sauvegarder une copie dans un endroit sr. Ce fichier .opi contient toutes vos donnes dutilisateur OmniPass. Il est crypt et protg par mot de passe. Ce profil utilisateur ne contient AUCUN de vos fichiers de donnes crypts. Importer un profil dutilisateur OmniPass Pour importer un profil utilisateur, ouvrez le Centre de contrle OmniPass et cliquez sur [Importer/exporter un utilisateur] sous Grer les utilisateurs. Cliquez sur [Importer un nouvel utilisateur dans OmniPass], slectionnez Fichier dimportation/exportation OmniPass (*.opi) puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. OmniPass vous invite ensuite rechercher le fichier export auparavant (fichier .opi). Lorsque vous slectionnez le fichier .opi pour limporter, OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier. Les informations didentification permettant dimporter un profil sont les rfrences de connexion Windows de lutilisateur export. Ces rfrences sont celles quil fallait soumettre lorsque le profil dutilisateur a t export. Vous aurez besoin du Nom dutilisateur, du Mot de passe et du Domaine. Si vous avez oubli la valeur pour Domaine, celle-ci doit correspondre au nom de votre ordinateur dans un environnement PC ou SOHO. OmniPass vous informe si le profil utilisateur a t correctement import. Informations importantes sur les oprations dimportation et dexportation

Supposons que vous exportez un profil dutilisateur Windows local depuis OmniPass. Vous voulez importer ce profil sur un autre ordinateur dot dOmniPass. Avant de pouvoir importer le profil, un utilisateur Windows avec les mmes rfrences de connexion doit tre cr sur lordinateur important le profil.

Exemple : Jai un utilisateur Windows avec le nom dutilisateur Thomas et le mot de passe Soleil sur mon systme. Jai enregistr Thomas dans OmniPass et mmoris des mots de passe. Je veux transfrer tous mes mots de passe vers le nouveau systme. Jexporte le profil 118 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales utilisateur OmniPass de Thomas. Jaccde mon nouveau systme et laide du panneau de configuration, je cre un utilisateur avec le nom dutilisateur Thomas et le mot de passe Soleil . Je peux maintenant importer les donnes utilisateur OmniPass dans le nouveau systme.

Si vous exportez un utilisateur propre OmniPass, vous pouvez importer cet utilisateur dans tout ordinateur excutant OmniPass, condition quun utilisateur portant le mme nom ny soit pas dj enregistr.

Si vous tentez dimporter un profil utilisateur portant le mme nom quun utilisateur dj enregistr dans OmniPass, le processus dimportation choue. Centre de contrle OmniPass Cette section a pour but de prsenter les fonctions du Centre de contrle OmniPass qui nont pas t expliques auparavant. Vous pouvez accder au Centre de contrle OmniPass de trois faons :

Double-cliquez sur licne OmniPass en forme de cl dore dans la zone de notification Windows

(gnralement situe dans le coin infrieur droit du bureau).

Cliquez sur le bouton [Dmarrer], slectionnez Tous les programmes, puis le groupe de programmes Softex et enfin cliquez sur la slection Centre de contrle OmniPass.

Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration Windows (accessible partir du bouton Dmarrer >

Paramtres > Panneau de configuration) et double-cliquez sur licne Softex OmniPass. Gestion des utilisateurs Longlet Gestion des utilisateurs comporte deux interfaces principales : Ajouter/supprimer un utilisateur et Importer/exporter un utilisateur. La fonctionnalit Importer/exporter un utilisateur est explique dans Exportation et importation dutilisateurs en page 117. La fonctionnalit Ajouter/supprimer un utilisateur est explicite. Si vous cliquez sur Ajouter un nouvel utilisateur OmniPass, vous dmarrez lAssistant denregistrement OmniPass. LAssistant denregistrement est expliqu dans Enregistrement des utilisateurs en page 108. 119 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Si vous cliquez sur Supprimer un utilisateur OmniPass, vous tes invit vous authentifier. Authentifiez-

vous laide des informations didentification (ou de lempreinte digitale enregistre) de lutilisateur supprimer. OmniPass vous invite confirmer la suppression de lutilisateur. Cliquez sur [OK] pour terminer le processus de suppression. LA SUPPRESSION DUN UTILISATEUR DTRUIT AUTOMATIQUEMENT TOUTES LES DONNES OMNIPASS ASSOCIES CET UTILISATEUR. TOUTES LES IDENTITS ET TOUTES LES INFORMATIONS DIDENTIFICATION DE LUTILISATEUR SERONT PERDUES. SI VOUS TES CERTAIN DE DEVOIR SUPPRIMER LUTILISATEUR, NOUS VOUS RECOMMANDONS DEXPORTER LE PROFIL UTILISATEUR. 120 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Paramtres utilisateur Longlet Paramtres utilisateur comporte trois interfaces : Paramtres audio, Astuces de la barre de tches et Enregistrement. Les paramtres utilisateur vous permettent de personnaliser OmniPass pour rpondre vos prfrences. Sous Paramtres utilisateur (Paramtres audio et Astuces de la barre de tches), vous pouvez configurer la manire dont OmniPass vous informe des vnements dOmniPass

(par exemple, connexion russie, accs refus, etc.). Les dtails de chaque paramtre sous les interfaces Paramtres audio et Astuces de la barre des tches sont explicites. Linterface Enregistrement vous permet denregistrer des empreintes digitales. Si vous dsirez des informations sur la procdure denregistrement dun priphrique dauthentification, reportez-vous au Chapitre 2.3. Pour enregistrer des empreintes digitales supplmentaires, cliquez sur Enregistrer un priphrique dauthentification et authentifiez-vous dans OmniPass. Slectionnez le priphrique de reconnaissance dempreintes digitales dans lcran Slectionner un priphrique dauthentification

(il doit tre dj marqu dune coche verte si vous avez enregistr un doigt), puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. Paramtres de systme Vous trouverez linterface Options de dmarrage dans longlet Paramtres de systme . Les options de cette interface vous permettent de spcifier la manire dont votre ouverture de session OmniPass est associe votre ouverture de session Windows. La premire option, Se connecter automatiquement OmniPass en tant quutilisateur actuel, est explicite. Lors de louverture dune session Windows, vous tes connect OmniPass laide de vos rfrences de connexion Windows. Si lutilisateur ouvrant une session Windows na jamais t enregistr dans OmniPass, personne nest connect OmniPass au moment de la connexion. Ce paramtre convient une configuration de bureau ou toute configuration ncessitant la saisie dun nom dutilisateur et dun mot de passe pour utiliser lordinateur. Il sagit du paramtre par dfaut. Avec la deuxime option, Se connecter manuellement OmniPass au dmarrage, OmniPass vous invite vous connecter une fois que vous avez ouvert une session Windows. Si vous choisissez la troisime option, Ne pas se connecter OmniPass au dmarrage, OmniPass ninvite pas lutilisateur se connecter. 121 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Vous pouvez vous connecter manuellement OmniPass en cliquant avec le bouton droit de la souris sur licne dOmniPass dans la zone de notification et sur Connecter lutilisateur dans le menu gnr. Dpannage Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser OmniPass pour crer des utilisateurs Windows. Vous devez dabord crer lutilisateur Windows, ce qui ncessite des droits dadministrateur. Une fois lutilisateur Windows cr, vous pouvez lajouter dans OmniPass avec le mme nom dutilisateur et le mme mot de passe. Impossible dajouter des utilisateurs Windows dans OmniPass Si vous rencontrez des difficults pour ajouter un utilisateur Windows dans OmniPass, vous devrez peut-

tre modifier vos paramtres de scurit locale. Pour ce faire, allez Dmarrer, Panneau de configuration, Outils dadministration et Paramtres de scurit locale. Ouvrez Stratgies locales et Options de scurit, puis double-cliquez sur Accs rseau : Modle de partage et de scurit pour les comptes locaux. La configuration correcte doit tre Classique Les utilisateurs locaux sauthentifient eux-mmes. Impossible dajouter un utilisateur avec un mot de passe vide dans OmniPass Si vous rencontrez des difficults pour ajouter un utilisateur avec un mot de passe vide dans OmniPass, vous devrez peut-tre modifier vos paramtres de scurit locale. Essayez dabord la procdure explique dans la section Impossible dajouter un utilisateur Windows dans OmniPass. Si le problme persiste, essayez la procdure suivante. Cliquez sur [Dmarrer], Panneau de configuration, Outils dadministration et Paramtres de scurit locale. Ouvrez Stratgies locales et Options de scurit, puis double-cliquez sur Comptes :

restreindre lutilisation de mots de passe vierges par le compte local louverture de session console. Ce paramtre doit tre configur sur Dsactiv. Durant la procdure douverture dune session Windows, une bote de dialogue saffiche aprs lauthentification OmniPass 122 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Aprs avoir install OmniPass sur votre systme, vous pouvez choisir de vous connecter Windows laide dOmniPass. Vous vous authentifiez avec OmniPass ( laide du mot de passe principal ou dun priphrique de scurit enregistr) et OmniPass vous connecte Windows. Au cours du processus dauthentification, il se peut que la bote de dialogue Erreur de connexion saffiche. Cette bote de dialogue apparat si OmniPass na pas russi vous connecter Windows laide des informations didentification fournies (nom dutilisateur et mot de passe). Ceci peut arriver dans les circonstances suivantes :

Votre mot de passe Windows a chang.

Votre compte Windows a t dsactiv. Si vous rencontrez des difficults cause de la premire raison, vous devrez mettre jour OmniPass avec votre mot de passe de compte Windows modifi. Cliquez sur Mettre jour le mot de passe et une bote de dialogue vous invitera reconfirmer votre mot de passe. Entrez le nouveau mot de passe Windows et cliquez sur [OK]. Si lerreur persiste, il est peu probable que le problme soit d la modification de votre mot de passe Windows. 123 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Annexe C : Guide dutilisation de FujitsuHL Instructions de FujitsuHL FujitsuHL procure un affichage avec icnes des lanceurs daccueil, de photos et de documents, vous permettant de facilement les slectionner directement depuis votre cran. FujitsuHL vous aide excuter les fonctions suivantes :

Gadgets FujitsuHL

Liens vers les logiciels que vous utilisez frquemment

Ouverture de fichiers dans les dossiers Images et Documents

Prendre des photos avec la webcam POUR UTILISER FUJITSUHL, VOUS DEVEZ RGLER LA RSOLUTION DAFFICHAGE 1280 X 800 POINTS. Dmarrer FujitsuHL Deux mthodes sont votre disposition pour lancer FujitsuHL :

Appuyez sur le bouton [Clavier] de lordinateur pendant au moins deux secondes, ou

Slectionnez Dmarrer > Tous les programmes > FujitsuHL, puis slectionnez FujitsuHL. 124 Fermer FujitsuHL Pour fermer FujitsuHL, appuyez sur en haut droite de lcran. propos de FujitsuHL FujitsuHL offre trois crans de lancement dapplications, chacun tant dcrit de faon dtaille plus loin dans ce chapitre :

Lanceur de fonctions daccueil Le lanceur daccueil permet de slectionner et excuter des gadgets et des logiciels Lanceur de photos Le lanceur de photos permet de voir les photos conserves dans le dossier Images. Lanceur de documents Le lanceur de documents permet dafficher les fichiers conservs dans le dossier Documents. Fonctions supplmentaires Grce FujitsuHL, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Camra pour prendre des photos avec la webcam, puis la fonction Visualiseur de photos pour voir les photos. 125 Instructions de FujitsuHL Lanceur daccueil Zone donglets Zone dtat Barre de commande Lanceur rapide Zone donglets Touchez un des onglets et vous pourrez choisir le lanceur daccueil, de photos ou de documents. Barre de commande Touchez la barre de commande et vous pourrez choisir lcran de lanceurs ou lcran de gadgets 126 Instructions de FujitsuHL Zone dtat Utilisez les icnes de la zone dtat pour (en ordre de gauche droite) :

Rgler la luminosit de lcran Afficher le niveau de signal du rseau tendu (lorsque vous touchez ce bouton, lutilitaire de gestion de rseau tendu souvre) Rgler ou couper le volume sonore Afficher le niveau de charge de la batterie Ouvrir le gestionnaire de tches Fermer FujitsuHL Lanceur rapide Touchez une icne de cette zone et vous pourrez :

Lancer la webcam Ajouter des logiciels des positions de liens dans le Lanceur rapide conduisant des applications frquemment utilises 127 cran de gadgets Lcran de gadgets permet dutiliser les gadgets FujitsuHL pour excuter des tches utilises frquemment. Barre de commande Zone de gadgets Icnes de gadgets Barre de commande Touchez la barre de commande et vous pourrez choisir lcran de lanceurs ou lcran de gadgets. Zone de gadgets Cette zone identifie le gadget actuellement utilis. 128 Icnes de gadgets Les gadgets suivants sont disponibles dans la zone dicnes de gadgets. Lorsque vous touchez une icne, vous dclenchez automatiquement lexcution du programme ou de lutilitaire. Lancer le gadget Outlook Mail*

Lancer le gadget Outlook Schedule*

Lancer le gadget Outlook ToDo*

Lancer le gadget Horloge Mondiale

* Pour lancer ces fonctions, Microsoft Outlook doit tre configur sur votre systme. 129 cran de lanceurs L'cran de lanceurs permet d'excuter diverses applications. Zone de raccourcis Zone de raccourcis La zone de raccourcis affiche une icne pour chaque application bnficiant dun lien. Pour excuter une application, il suffit de toucher licne correspondante. Pour ajouter une icne dans la zone de raccourcis, ajoutez-la dans le Lanceur rapide 

(Voir Lanceur rapide en page 127.), puis glissez-dposez licne dans la zone de raccourcis. Pour supprimer une icne, appuyez sur cette icne jusqu ce que le systme offre de la supprimer, puis touchez [OK]. Veuillez prendre note que les icnes Courrier et Navigateur ne peuvent pas tre supprimes. 130 Lanceur de photos Si vous slectionnez longlet Photo dans le haut de lcran, vous voyez apparatre lcran du lanceur de photos. Zone de photos Zone de photos Cette zone affiche des miniatures des photos conserves dans le dossier Images. Si vous touchez une miniature, vous voyez apparatre limage dans le Visualiseur de photos. Voir Bouton du Visualiseur de photos en page 134. Cet utilitaire est compatible avec les formats suivants : JPG, BMP, PNG et GIF. 131 Lanceur de documents Si vous slectionnez longlet Documents dans le haut de lcran, vous voyez apparatre lcran du lanceur de documents. Zone de documents Zone de documents Cette zone affiche des icnes reprsentant les fichiers conservs dans le dossier Documents. Si vous touchez une icne, le document correspondant souvre. 132 Outil de camra Loutil de camra permet de prendre et de voir des photos, ainsi que de modifier les paramtres de la ou des camras. Zone de prvisualisation Bouton de changement de camra Bouton dobturateur Bouton de paramtres Bouton du Visualiseur de photos Bouton daccueil Zone de prvisualisation Ce zone affiche la scne que voit la webcam. 133 Bouton daccueil Lorsque vous touchez ce bouton, vous retournez au dernier cran de lanceur utilis. Bouton du Visualiseur de photos Lorsque vous touchez ce bouton, vous ouvrez le visualiseur de photos, lequel vous permet de voir 

vos images. Si certaines photos ont dj t enregistres, licne de ce bouton est remplace par une image de la photo la plus rcente. Bouton dobturateur Lorsque vous touchez ce bouton, vous photographiez limage actuelle. Les images sont conserves dans le dossier Camra, sous Images. Le nom de chaque fichier contient la date de la photo. Bouton de changement de camra Ce bouton permet de passer de la camra avant la camra arrire, ou vice versa. Bouton de paramtres Ce bouton permet de rgler la luminosit, le contraste et la tonalit de couleurs sur la webcam. 134 Visualiseur de photos Pour ouvrir le Visualiseur de photos, vous pouvez toucher la miniature dune photo dans le lanceur de photos ou toucher le bouton Visualiseur de photos sous Camra. Zone daffichage Bouton daccueil Bouton Choisir fond dcran Bouton Prcdent Bouton de camra Bouton Suivant Rotation en sens horaire Bouton Corbeille Rotation en sens anti-horaire 135 Zone daffichage Cette zone affiche la photo ou les donns graphiques que vous avez choisies. Bouton daccueil Lorsque vous touchez ce bouton, vous retournez au dernier cran de lanceur utilis. Bouton de camra Lorsque vous touchez ce bouton, vous ouvrez lutilitaire Camra. Voir Outil de camra en page 133. Bouton Choisir fond dcran Lorsque vous touchez ce bouton, vous pouvez changer la photo actuellement utilise comme fond 

dcran FujitsuHL. Si vous dsirez retourner au fond dcran prcdent, choisissez-le dans le lanceur de photos et touchez 

ce bouton. Bouton Prcdent Lorsque vous touchez ce bouton, vous voyez apparatre la photo prcdente. Vous pouvez galement obtenir le mme rsultat en tournant les pages vers larrire sur lcran. Bouton Suivant Lorsque vous touchez ce bouton, vous voyez apparatre la photo suivante. Vous pouvez galement obtenir le mme rsultat en tournant les pages vers lavant sur lcran. Bouton de rotations Lorsque vous touchez ce bouton, vous pouvez faire pivoter la photo affiche de 90 degrs dans le sens horaire ou dans le sens anti-horaire. Bouton Corbeille Lorsque vous touchez ce bouton, vous supprimez la photo actuellement visible dans la zone daffichage. 136 Index A propos de ce guide 12 Adaptateur auto/avion 38, 39 Alimentation adaptateur auto/avion 38 adaptateur secteur 38 gestion 46 mise hors tension 49 mise sous tension 40 panne 63 problmes 65 sources 38 Amorage du systme 43 Auto-diagnostic de mise sous tension 41, 69 B Batterie 50 augmentation de la dure de vie 78 batterie au lithium-polymre 50 conservation de l'nergie 46 court-circuite 52 dfectueuse 64 entretien 77 puise 64 faible 52 mode veille 52 problmes 64, 65 recharge 51 remplacement 53 remplacement hors tension 53 remplacement sous tension 55 Batterie amovible 19 Batterie au lithium-polymre 19 BIOS guide 43 utilitaire de configuration 42 Bluetooth informations supplmentaires 102 Boutons d'application 16 bouton Ctl-Alt-Suppr 36 bouton d'orientation 36 touche de fonction 37 C Cble de sortie c.c. 38 Camra Web arrire 18 Camra Web avant 15 Capteur d'empreintes digitales 18 Capteur dempreintes digitales 104 barre doutils d'authentification OmniPass 111 connexion un site mmoris 113 dsinstallation dOmniPass 107 enregistrement dune empreinte digitale 110 enregistrement des utilisateurs 108 installation dOmniPass 105 mmorisation dun mot de passe 112 premire mise en marche 105 remplacement du mot de passe 111 utilisation dOmniPass 111 137 Carte SD installation 56 retrait 57 Carte Secure Digital 56 retrait 57 CD de pilotes et dapplications 71 Click Me! 45 Cliquer 25 Commutateur d'alimentation/veille/reprise 18, 46 Commutateur Marche/Arrt du dispositif sans fil 16 Connecteur entre c. c. 16 Conventions utilises dans ce guide 12 Coordonnes 13 Coordonnes pour contacter Fujitsu 13 D Dpannage 58 affichage 66, 67 alimentation 63 batterie 64 disque dur 61 problmes audio 61 souris 61 USB 62 Disque dur problmes 61 E couteurs 18 cran cran tactile problmes 66, 67 cliquer 26 talonnage 28 glisser 27 Enregistrement 44 tiquette de configuration 81 138 F Fente pour carte SD 18 Fente pour carte Smart Card 18 Fonction de veille prolonge 48 G Garantie 13 Gestion de l'alimentation 46 Gestion de l'alimentation dans Windows 48 H Haut-parleurs incorpors 61 I icne d'alimentation 21, 22 L l'cran 23 Lecteur multimdia entretien 79 Logiciels pr-installs 85 Adobe Reader 86 guides d'utilisation 86 Loquet de dgagement de la batterie 17 M Messages d'erreurs 69 Microsoft Office Starter 2010 87 Mode sommeil (veille) 46 Mots de passe d'accs au disque dur 42 N Numriseur 25

P Point d'attache du cordon du stylet 16 Port HDMI 19 Ports USB (Universal Serial Bus) 18 Prise d'alimentation c.c. 38 Procdure d'amorage 41 R Redmarrage 48 Renseignements sur la rglementation 88 Rseau local sans fil avant d'utiliser la carte rseau sans fil 92 configuration 92 connexion au rseau 97 dpannage 98 dsactivation/dconnexion 95 modes 93 spcifications 100 Restaurer vos logiciels pr-installs 70 S Secteur adaptateur 38 adaptateurs de fiches 77 Site de vente par internet de Fujitsu 13 Souris problmes 61 Spcifications 81 alimentation 84 audio 83 clavier 84 dimensions et poids 84 environnement dexploitation 85 mmoire 82 microprocesseur 82 numriseur 82 options de stockage de masse 83 puce 82 vido 82 Stylet absence de raction 62 changement de la pile du stylet 33 entretien du stylet 32 installation du cordon 34 modification des paramtres du stylet 32 remplacement de l'embout du stylet 34 Syst 87 U Utilisation de lcran tactile capacitif 

optionnel 28 V Voyants (DEL) d'tat 15 W Windows 12 Z zone d'tat 20 icne d'alimentation, tats du 

systme indiqus par 21, 22 139

 

 

Gobi3000-FCC.fm Page 1 Friday, September 14, 2012 1:21 PM F u j i t s u A m e r i c a , I n c . 3G Mini-Card Gobi 3000 Regulatory and Safety Information Please read this document carefully prior to using the 3G Mini-Card Gobi 3000 modem in your Fujitsu computer. Important notice Because of the nature of wireless communications, transmission and reception of data can never be guar-

anteed. Data may be delayed, corrupted (that is, have errors) or be totally lost. Although significant delays or losses of data are rare when wireless devices such as the 3G Mini-Card modem are used in a normal manner with a well-constructed network, the card should not be used in situations where failure to trans-

mit or receive data could result in damage of any kind to the user or any other party, including but not lim-

ited to personal injury, death, or loss of property. Sierra Wireless and its affiliates accept no responsibil-

ity for damages of any kind resulting from delays or errors in data transmitted or received using the 3G Mini-Card modem, or for failure of the modem to transmit or receive such data. Gobi3000-FCC.fm Page 2 Friday, September 14, 2012 1:21 PM Safety and hazards The 3G Mini-Card modem MUST BE POWERED OFF in all areas that may be susceptible to radio interference. In particular:

Prohibited Areas Obey all signs and notices and follow all rules and regulations. Power off the 3G Mini-Card modem when instructed to do so or when you suspect that it may cause interference or danger. Where explosive atmospheres may be present Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are not always clearly marked. Such areas include gas sta-

tions, fuel depots, chemical transfer or storage facili-

ties, areas where blasting is in progress, areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your cellular phone or vehicle engine. Near medical or life-support equipment In areas where medical equipment may be susceptible to any form of radio interference. In such areas the 3G Mini-Card modem can transmit signals that could interfere with this equipment. On board aircraft In addition to Federal Aviation Authority (FAA) requirements, many airline regulations state that you must suspend wireless operations before boarding an aircraft. The 3G Mini-Card modem is capable of transmitting signals that could interfere with various 2 Gobi3000-FCC.fm Page 3 Friday, September 14, 2012 1:21 PM onboard systems and controls. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspen-

sion or denial of cellular telephone services to the offender, legal action, or both. Some airlines may permit the use of cellular phones while the aircraft is on the ground and the door is open. The 3G Mini-Card modem may be used nor-

mally at this time. While operating a vehicle The driver or operator of any vehicle should not use a wireless data device while in control of a vehicle. Doing so detracts from the driver or operator's ability to control and operate the vehicle. In some countries, using such communications devices while in control of a vehicle is an offence. Important safety/compliance information for North American users Caution: Unauthorized modifications or changes not expressly approved by Sierra Wireless, Inc. could void compliance with regulatory rules, and thereby your authority to use this equipment. The design of the 3G Mini-Card modem complies with U.S. Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) and Industry Canada (IC) guidelines respecting safety levels of radio frequency (RF) exposure for portable devices, which in turn are consistent with the following safety standards previously set by Cana-

dian, U.S. and international standards bodies:

3 Gobi3000-FCC.fm Page 4 Friday, September 14, 2012 1:21 PM ANSI / IEEE C95.1-1999, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300 GHz National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP) Report 86, -1986, Biologi-

cal Effects and Exposure Criteria for Radio Fre-

quency Electromagnetic Fields Health Canada, Safety Code 6, 1999, Limits of Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromag-

netic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz International Commission on Non-Ionising Radia-

tion Protection (ICNIRP) 1998, Guidelines for lim-

iting exposure to time-varying electric, magnetic, and electromagnetic fields (up to 300 GHz) 3G Mini-Card Modem Gobi 3000 FCC ID: N7NMC8355 IC: 2417C-MC8355 Caution: The 3G Mini-Card modem has been evalu-

ated for compliance with FCC/IC RF exposure limits in this laptop configuration. This 3G Mini-Card modem must not be co-located or operated in con-

junction with any other antenna or transmitter other than the transmitters that have been approved with this laptop. Use of this device in any other configura-

tion may exceed the FCC RF Exposure compliance limit. 4 Gobi3000-FCC.fm Page 5 Friday, September 14, 2012 1:21 PM FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can pro-

duce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposure have not found any biologi-

cal effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The WWAN and the WLAN radio devices have been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation expo-

sure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. 5 Gobi3000-FCC.fm Page 6 Friday, September 14, 2012 1:21 PM 1250 E. Arques Avenue, Sunnyvale, California 94085 For more information, call 1-877-372-3473 or visit our website at www.shopfujitsu.com. For technical support call 1-800-8fujitsu Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks of Fujitsu, Ltd. Gobi is a trademark of Qualcomm Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Product description data represents Fujitsu design objectives and is provided for comparative purposes; actual results may vary based upon a variety of factors. Specifications subject to change without notice. 2012 Fujitsu America, Incorporated. All rights reserved. FPC58-2970-03 6

 

 

Users Guide Learn how to use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC Copyright and Trademark Information Fujitsu America, Inc. has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document; however, as ongoing development efforts are continually improving the capabilities of our products, we cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes. Fujitsu, the Fujitsu logo, and LIFEBOOK are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited. Intel, Intel Core, Centrino, vPro, and Intel Centrino Pro are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, OneNote, and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., USA. PowerDirector, PowerDVD, MakeDisc, and YouCam are trademarks of CyberLink Corp. OmniPass is a trademark of Softex, Inc. Google and Picasa are trademarks or registered trademarks of Google Incorporated. Roxio is a trademark of Sonic Solutions. Energy Star and the Energy Star mark are registered U.S. marks. Adobe, Acrobat, and Acrobat Reader are either a registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Norton and Norton Internet Security are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. WARNING HANDLING THE CORD ON THIS PRODUCT WILL EXPOSE YOU TO LEAD, A CHEMICAL KNOWN TO THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA TO CAUSE BIRTH DEFECTS OR OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING. Copyright 2011 Fujitsu America, Incorporated. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or translated, without prior written consent of Fujitsu. No part of this publication may B6FJ-7081-01ENZ0-00 be stored or transmitted in any electronic form without the written consent of Fujitsu. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to FCC Part 15 Responsible Party Name:

Fujitsu America, Incorporated Address:

1250 E. Arques Avenue, Sunnyvale, CA 94085 Telephone:

(408) 746-6000 Declares that product:

Base Model Configuration:

LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operations are subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This unit requires an AC adapter to operate. Use only UL Listed I.T.E. Class II Adapters with an output rating of 19 VDC, with a current of 4.22 A (80 W). AC adapter output polarity:

When using your notebook equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:

CAUTION - HOT SURFACE: The bottom of this notebook computer can become hot when used for long periods of time. When using this notebook, take caution to limit long term or continuous use while resting it on exposed skin, such as the lap. Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. SEVERAL BULLETS DELETED TBD Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. For Authorized Repair Technicians Only SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF LITHIUM (CLOCK) BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTION. FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE AND RATING FUSE.

Recycling your battery Over time, the batteries that run your mobile computer will begin to hold a charge for a shorter amount of time; this is a natural occurrence for all batteries. When this occurs, you may want to replace the battery with a fresh one*. If you replace it, it is important that you dispose of the old battery properly because batteries contain materials that could cause environmental damage if disposed of improperly. Fujitsu is very concerned with environmental protection, and has enlisted the services of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation (RBRC)**, a non-profit public service organization dedicated to protecting our environment by recycling old batteries at no cost to you. RBRC has drop-off points at tens of thousands of locations throughout the United States and Canada. To find the location nearest you, go to www.RBRC.org or call 1-800-822-8837. If there are no convenient RBRC locations near you, you can also go to the EIA Consumer Education Initiative website (http://EIAE.org/) and search for a convenient disposal location. Remember protecting the environment is a cooperative effort, and you should make every effort to protect it for current and future generations.

* To order a new battery for your Fujitsu mobile computer, go to the Fujitsu shopping site at www.shopfujitsu.com in the US or www.fujitsu.ca/products/notebooks in Canada.

** RBRC is an independent third party to which Fujitsu provides funding for battery recycling; RBRC is in no way affiliated with Fujitsu. Contents Preface About This Guide . 13 Conventions Used in the Guide . 13 Fujitsu Contact Information . 14 Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your LIFEBOOK Overview . 16 Locating the Controls and Connectors . 17 Top Components . 20 Left-Side Panel Components . 23 Right-Side Panel Components . 25 Back Panel Components. 26 Bottom Components. 28 Status Indicator Panel . 30 Power Indicator . 30 External Power Indicator . 31 Battery Charging Indicators . 31 Battery Level Indicator. 31 Display Panel . 33 Opening the Display Panel . 33 Using the System as a Tablet . 34 Adjusting Display Panel Brightness . 36 Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor (Windows 7 only). 37 Keyboard . 39 Using the Keyboard . 39 Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen. 42 Using the Touchpad . 42 Active Digitizer Display . 47 Using the Optional Capacitive Touchscreen . 51 Installing a Pen Tether . 52 Volume Control . 53 Controlling the Volume . 53 Modular Bay Devices . 54 Removing and Installing Modular Devices . 55 LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons . 56 Security Button Functions . 56 Pre-logon button functions . 57 Post-logon button functions . 59 Changing Tablet PC Button Functions . 61 Setting up LIFEBOOK Security Panel . 62 Passwords . 62 Using Your LIFEBOOK Security Panel. 64 Precautions . 65 Uninstalling/Re-installing the Security Panel Application. 65 7 Chapter 2 Getting Started with Your LIFEBOOK Power Sources . 68 Connecting the Power Adapters . 68 Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 70 Power On . 70 Boot Sequence . 71 Hard Disk Drive Passwords . 72 BIOS Setup Utility . 72 Booting the System. 73 Starting Windows the first time . 73 Registering Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC with Fujitsu. 75 Installing ClickMe! . 75 Fujitsu Driver Update Utility . 75 Power Management. 76 Power/Suspend/Resume Switch . 76 Sleep Mode . 76 Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) Feature . 78 Windows Power Management . 78 Restarting the System . 78 Powering Off . 79 ENERGY STAR Compliance . 79 Chapter 3 User-Installable Features Lithium ion Battery. 81 Recharging the Batteries. 82 Replacing the Battery . 84 8 Memory Stick/Secure Digital Cards . 86 Installing Memory Stick/SD Cards. 87 Removing A Memory Stick/SD Card. 87 ExpressCards. 88 Installing ExpressCards . 88 Removing ExpressCards. 89 Memory Upgrade Module . 90 Installing Memory Upgrade Modules. 90 Removing a Memory Upgrade Module . 92 Checking the Memory Capacity . 92 Optical Drive . 93 Media Player Software . 93 Loading Media on Your Drive . 94 Removing Media . 96 Emergency Optical Drive Tray Release . 96 Using the Media Player Software . 96 Using Media Player on Battery Power . 98 Device Ports . 99 Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack . 99 Port Replicator Connector . 99 Universal Serial Bus Ports . 100 IEEE 1394 Port . 101 Headphone Jack . 102 Microphone Jack. 102 HDMI Port . 103 External Video Port . 103 9 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Your LIFEBOOK Troubleshooting. 105 Identifying the Problem . 105 Specific Problems . 107 Power On Self Test Messages . 117 Restoring Your Pre-installed Software . 118 Saving your Factory Image. 118 Creating Backup Images of Factory Image, DAR, and Discs . 119 Recovering Your Factory Image . 120 Backing Up a System Image . 120 Managing Your Backup Images . 122 Using the Recovery and Utility Tools . 122 Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility . 125 Automatically Downloading Driver Updates . 127 Chapter 5 Care and Maintenance Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 128 Cleaning your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 130 Cleaning the dust filter . 131 Storing your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 131 Traveling with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 132 Batteries . 133 Media Care . 134 Express Cards . 135 Chapter 6 System Specifications Specifications . 136 Configuration Label . 136 Microprocessor . 137 10 Chipset . 137 Memory. 137 Video. 137 Digitizer . 138 Audio . 138 Mass Storage Device Options. 138 Modular Bay Devices . 138 Features. 139 Device Ports . 140 Keyboard. 141 Power . 141 Dimensions and Weight . 142 Environmental Requirements . 142 Popular Accessories . 142 Pre-Installed Software . 143 Learning About Your Software . 144 Glossary/Regulatory Glossary . 147 Regulatory Information . 163 Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN . 167 Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document. 167 Characteristics of the WLAN Device . 167 Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device . 168 Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device . 170 Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch . 171 Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar. 171 Activating the WLAN Device . 171 11 Configuring the Wireless LAN. 172 Configuring the WLAN . 172 Connection to the network . 172 Troubleshooting the WLAN. 173 Troubleshooting . 173 WLAN Specifications . 175 Specifications . 175 Using the Bluetooth Device. 177 What is Bluetooth . 177 Where to Find Information About Bluetooth . 177 Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device . 179 Getting Started . 180 Installing OmniPass . 180 User Enrollment . 183 Using OmniPass . 185 Configuring OmniPass . 191 OmniPass Control Center . 193 Troubleshooting . 195 Index . 197 12 Preface About This Guide The LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC from Fujitsu America is a powerful convertible computer. It can be used either as a standard notebook using keyboard input, or in tablet configuration using pen input. It is powered by the new 2nd Generation Intel Core Processor, has a built-in color display with either an active digitizer or optional dual digitizer, and brings the computing power of desktop personal computers to a portable and versatile environment. This manual explains how to operate your LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PCs hardware and pre-installed system software. Conventions Used in the Guide Keyboard and on-screen keys appear in brackets. Example: [Fn], [F1], [ESC], [ENTER] and [CTRL]. Pages with additional information about a specific topic are cross-referenced within the text. For example: (See Installation Procedure on page 43.) Note that all cross-references are linked to the referenced items, so by clicking the link, you will automatically go to the referenced item or page. On-screen menu items appear in bold. Example: Click Fujitsu Menu, and select your choice. 13 THE INFORMATION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT WILL ENHANCE YOUR UNDERSTANDING OF THE SUBJECT MATERIAL. THE CAUTION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT IS IMPORTANT TO THE SAFE OPERATION OF YOUR COMPUTER, OR TO THE INTEGRITY OF YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL CAUTION INFORMATION CAREFULLY. THE WARNING ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO EITHER YOU, YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC, OR YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL WARNING INFORMATION CAREFULLY. Fujitsu Contact Information Service and Support You can contact Fujitsu Service and Support in the following ways:

Toll free: 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487)

Website: http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:

Product name

Product configuration number

Product serial number

Purchase date 14 - About This Guide

Conditions under which the problem occurred

Any error messages that have occurred

Type of device connected, if any Fujitsu Shopping Online You can go directly to the online store by going to the website at: www.shopfujitsu.com. YOU MUST HAVE AN ACTIVE INTERNET CONNECTION TO USE THE ONLINE URL LINKS. Limited Warranty Your LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC is backed by a Fujitsu International Limited Warranty. Check the service kit that came with your Tablet PC for the Limited Warranty period and terms and conditions. 15 - About This Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your LIFEBOOK Overview This section describes the components of your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC. We strongly recommend that you read it before using your Tablet PC even if you are already familiar with notebook computers. Figure 1. Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC 16 Locating the Controls and Connectors Connectors and peripheral interfaces on the LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC and the optional port replicator allow you to connect a variety of devices. Specific locations are illustrated in Figures 2 through 6. The table below provides a short description of each icon on the LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC and/or optional port replicator. Each of the icons is either molded into or printed on the Tablet PC or port replicator chassis. Connection Tablet PC Icon Purpose DC in connector Security lock slot USB 2.0 Port/ USB 3.0 Port USB 2.0 / Anytime USB Charge Port HDMI Connect an external power source such as the AC adapter or auto/airline adapter. The security slot allows you to secure the Tablet PC using compatible locking devices. Connect Universal Serial Bus 2.0 or 1.1 compliant devices to the USB 2.0 port. Connect Universal Serial Bus 3.0, 2.0 or 1.1 compliant devices to the USB 3.0 port. For location of the specific ports, see the left-side and back panel illustrations later in this chapter. Note that the USB 3.0 port can also be recognized by the blue tongue in the port. One of the USB 2.0 ports has Anytime USB Charge capability, meaning that even when your system is shut down, this port can still be used to provide power to an external device. It can also be used as a standard USB 2.0 port. The HDMI port allows you to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as a high-definition television or AV receiver). Microphone/Line In Jack Connect an external microphone. The internal microphone is disabled when you plug in an external microphone. 17 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Connection Tablet PC Icon Purpose Headphone/Line Out Jack SD Card/ Memory Stick Slot Dock port Suspend/ Resume button Local Area Network (LAN) Wireless Device On-Off Switch External Video port Digital Video Interface IEEE1394 port Connect stereo headphones or powered external speakers. The internal speaker is disabled when you plug in external headphones or powered speakers. The Secure Digital (SD) card/Memory Stick slot allows you to insert a flash memory card for data storage. Flash memory cards allow you to transfer data to and from a variety of different digital devices. Connect the Tablet PC port replicator or other approved docking device. Refer to documentation accompanying the dock for more information. The Suspend/Resume button allows you to suspend Tablet PC activity without powering off, resume your Tablet PC from suspend mode, and power on the system when it has been shut down from Windows. The LAN (RJ-45) jack is used to connect the internal 10/100/1000* Base-

T/Tx Ethernet to a Local Area Network (LAN) in your office or home, or broadband devices such as a cable modem, DSL, or satellite Internet. *1000 Mbps, commonly referred to as Gigabit Ethernet. The Wireless Device On-Off switch allows you to turn power to the optional wireless devices on and off. The external video port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector to your computer. The DVI-D port on the optional port replicator allows you to connect a flat-

panel LCD monitor or television that is equipped with a DVI-D port for ultra-

crisp digital images and graphics. The IEEE 1394 jack allows you to connect IEEE 1394 (Firewire) devices such as digital video cameras and external hard drives to your Tablet PC. 18 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Built-in Microphone Stereo Speaker Fingerprint Sensor Touchpad Cursor Control Status Indicator Panel Headphone Jack Microphone Jack IEEE 1394 Jack Wireless LAN/Bluetooth/

On/Off Switch Memory Stick/

SD Card Slot Display Latch Button Figure 2. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC with display open 19 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Display Latch Optional Web Cam Display Panel Stereo Speaker LIFEBOOK Security/

Tablet PC Buttons Power/Suspend/

Resume Switch Ambient Light Sensor Built-in Microphone Status Indicator Panel Keyboard Top Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs top components. Display Latch The display latch is used to secure the tablet PC display when it is closed. Web Camera The optional 2.0 megapixel web cam can be used to take pictures of yourself to send over the internet. Display Panel The display panel is a color LED panel with backlighting for the display of text and graphics. There are two different displays available: an active digitizer that is used with a stylus, and a dual digitizer that can be used with either a stylus or your fingers. Dual Stereo Speakers The built-in dual speakers provide stereo sound. LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons The LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons provide password security for your system, as well as one-

touch application launch capability. See LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons on page 56. Power/Suspend/Resume Switch The Power/Suspend/Resume switch allows you to suspend Tablet PC activity without powering off, resume your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from sleep mode, and power on your Tablet PC when it has been shut down from Windows. See Power/Suspend/Resume Switch on page 76. Ambient Light Sensor The ambient light sensor measures the light in which the computer is operating and automatically adjusts the brightness of the display to suit the lighting conditions. See Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor (Windows 7 only) on page 37. 20 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Status Indicator Panels The Status Indicator Panels display symbols that correspond to specific components of your Tablet PC. Status indicators are located in two locations: on the left front edge of the system (system status indicators) and below the application buttons (button status indicators). See Status Indicator Panel on page 30. Keyboard A full-size keyboard with dedicated Windows keys. See Keyboard on page 39. Display Latch Button The display latch button allows you to unlatch the front of the display from the case. Memory Stick/SD Card Slot The Memory Stick/SD card slot allows you to install a Memory Stick or a Secure Digital (SD) card for data storage. This architecture allows you to transfer data from a variety of different digital devices. See Installing Memory Stick/SD Cards on page 87. Wireless LAN/Bluetooth On/Off Switch The wireless LAN/Bluetooth On/Off switch is used to turn on and off the optional wireless devices. Switching the device off when not in use will help to extend battery life. See Activating the WLAN Device on page 171. Note that there is no wireless WAN available for systems with the optional dual digitizer. IEEE 1394 (4-pin) Jack The 4-pin 1394 jack is used to connect between your Tablet PC and an IEEE 1394 peripheral such as a digital video camera for fast file transfer. See IEEE 1394 Port on page 101. Microphone Jack The microphone jack allows you to connect an external mono microphone. See Microphone Jack on page 102. 21 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to connect headphones. See Headphone Jack on page 102. Touchpad Pointing Device The Touchpad pointing device is a mouse-like cursor control with a left and right button. See Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen on page 42. Fingerprint Sensor The fingerprint sensor device allows you to log onto your system and password-protected websites and applications by swiping your finger over the sensor. See Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device on page 179. Dual Built-in Microphones The built-in microphones allows you to record voice and annotations. 22 - Locating the Controls and Connectors ExpressCard Slot ExpressCard Eject Button DC Power Jack USB 2.0 Port Air Vents Figure 3. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC left-side panel Left-Side Panel Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs left-side components. DC Power Jack The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and charge the internal Lithium ion battery. USB 2.0 Ports The USB 2.0 TBD TBD - WHICH IS AUC 2,0, 3.0?ports (one on the left side, two on the rear) allow you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 2.0 transfers data at up to 480 Mbps and is backward-

compatible with USB 1.1 devices, which transfer data at up to 12 Mbps. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 100. Air Vents The air vents are used to cool the system to prevent overheating. 23 - Locating the Controls and Connectors TO PROTECT YOUR TABLET PC FROM DAMAGE AND TO OPTIMIZE PERFORMANCE, BE SURE TO KEEP ALL AIR VENTS UNOBSTRUCTED, CLEAN, AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS. THIS MAY REQUIRE PERIODIC CLEANING, DEPENDING UPON THE ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH THE SYSTEM IS USED. DO NOT OPERATE THE TABLET PC IN AREAS WHERE THE AIR VENTS CAN BE OBSTRUCTED, SUCH AS IN TIGHT ENCLOSURES OR ON SOFT SURFACES LIKE A BED OR CUSHION. ExpressCard Slot The ExpressCard Slot allows you to install an ExpressCard. See ExpressCards on page 88. ExpressCard Eject Button The ExpressCard eject button is used for removing an ExpressCard from the slot. 24 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Pen Garage Pen Tether Attachment Point Modular Bay Figure 4. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC right-side panel Modular Bay Release Latch Right-Side Panel Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs right-side components. Pen Garage The pen garage is used to store the pen (also called a stylus) when not in use.The pen is used as the interface with the active digitizer display. Modular Bay The Modular Bay can accommodate one of the following devices. See Modular Bay Devices on page 54.

Modular Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer

Modular bay battery

Modular 2nd hard disk drive

Weight Saver Modular Bay Release Latch The modular bay release latch is used to release the modular bay device from the modular bay. Pen Tether Attachment Point The pen tether attachment point is used to attach your pen to the system to prevent its loss. 25 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Anti-Theft Lock Slot Air Vents Gigabit LAN

(RJ-45) Jack HDMI Port External Video Port USB 2.0 Ports Figure 5. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC back panel Back Panel Components Following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs back panel components. Anti-theft Lock Slot The anti-theft lock slot allows you to attach an optional physical lock down device. Air Vents The air vents allow air to circulate through the system to cool down the components. 26 - Locating the Controls and Connectors TO PROTECT YOUR TABLET PC FROM DAMAGE AND TO OPTIMIZE PERFORMANCE, BE SURE TO KEEP ALL AIR VENTS UNOBSTRUCTED, CLEAN, AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS. THIS MAY REQUIRE PERIODIC CLEANING, DEPENDING UPON THE ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH THE SYSTEM IS USED. DO NOT OPERATE THE TABLET PC IN AREAS WHERE THE AIR VENTS CAN BE OBSTRUCTED, SUCH AS IN TIGHT ENCLOSURES OR ON SOFT SURFACES LIKE A BED OR CUSHION. External Video Port The external monitor port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector. See External Video Port on page 103. USB 2.0 Ports The USB 2.0 ports TBD TBD - WHICH IS AUC 2,0, 3.0? allow you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 2.0 transfers data at up to 480Mbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices, which transfer data at up to 12Mbps. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 100. HDMI Port The HDMI port is used to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as a high-

definition television or AV receiver). See HDMI Port on page 103. Gigabit LAN (RJ-45) Jack The internal LAN (RJ-45) jack is used for an internal Gigabit (10Base-T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T) Ethernet LAN connection. See Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack on page 99. 27 - Locating the Controls and Connectors New graphic to come Port Replicator Connector Dust Filter Memory Upgrade Compartment Battery Latch Battery Latch Lithium ion Battery Bay Air Vents Figure 6. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC bottom panel Bottom Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs bottom panel components. Memory Upgrade Compartment Your Tablet PC comes with high speed Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic RAM (DDR3 1066 MHz SDRAM). The memory upgrade compartment allows you to expand the system memory capacity of your Tablet PC, thus improving overall performance. See Memory Upgrade Module on page 90. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary to open this compartment. 28 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Port Replicator Connector This connector allows you to connect the optional Port Replicator to your Tablet PC. Dust Filter The dust filter is used to help remove dust and dirt from your system. See Cleaning the dust filter on page 131. Air Vents The air vents allow air to circulate through the system to cool down the components. TO PROTECT YOUR TABLET PC FROM DAMAGE AND TO OPTIMIZE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, BE SURE TO KEEP ALL AIR VENTS UNOBSTRUCTED, CLEAN, AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS. THIS MAY REQUIRE PERIODIC CLEANING, DEPENDING UPON THE ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH THE SYSTEM IS USED. DO NOT OPERATE THE TABLET PC IN AREAS WHERE THE AIR VENTS CAN BE OBSTRUCTED, SUCH AS IN TIGHT ENCLOSURES OR ON SOFT SURFACES LIKE A BED OR CUSHION. Lithium ion Battery Bay The battery bay contains the internal Lithium ion battery. It can be opened for the removal of the battery when stored over a long period of time or for swapping a discharged battery with a charged Lithium ion battery. See Lithium ion Battery on page 81. Battery Latches The battery latches are used to secure the Lithium ion battery in the battery bay. 29 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Security CapsLk NumLk ScrLk Power Optical/Hard Drive Access Batt 1 Level Batt 2 Level External Power Batt 1 Charging Batt 2 Charging Figure 7. Status Indicator Panel Status Indicator Panel The Status Indicator Panel displays symbols and associated LEDs that correspond to specific components of your Tablet PC. These symbols tell you how each of those components is operating.(Figure 7) Power Indicator

The Power indicator symbol shows whether your system is operational. It has several different states, each of which tells you what mode your Tablet PC is in at that time.

Steady On: This means that there is power to your Tablet PC and that it is ready for use.

Flashing: This means that your Tablet PC is in Sleep mode. 30 - Status Indicator Panel

Steady Off: This means that your system is either in Hibernate mode, or that your Tablet PC has been turned off. If you are charging your battery, the Power indicator symbol will remain on even if your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is shut off. External Power Indicator The external power indicator shows whether your tablet is operating from the AC adapter, the auto/airline adapter or the batteries. This icon has two different states that can tell you what power source your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is using.

On: This means that either of the adapters are currently in use.

Off: Power is only coming from the batteries, and you do not have an adapter connected. Even if the system was shut down from Windows, the External Power indicator symbol will remain on if you have an adapter connected. Hard Drive/Optical Drive Access Indicator The Hard Drive/Optical Drive Access indicator shows whether your internal hard drive or optical drive is being accessed. 1 Battery Charging Indicators The Battery Charging and Battery Level indicators state whether the Lithium ion battery (Battery 1) or the optional modular battery (Battery 2) are installed and charging. 1 Battery Level Indicator The Battery Level indicators display the charge level of the indicated battery pack, as follows:

Green, solid: Battery is between 50% and 100% charged.

Orange, solid: Battery is between 13% and 49% charged. 31 - Status Indicator Panel

Red, solid: Battery is between 0% and 12% charged.

Orange, blinking: Blinks during battery status measurement (Four seconds after the battery is installed).

Red, blinking: There is a problem with the battery.

Off: There is no battery installed. If the battery pack is installed while the power is turned off, the battery level indicator will display the charge level for five seconds after it blinks orange. If the AC adapter is not connected or the battery pack is not fully charged when the computer is switched to sleep mode, the indicator will blink. The LED blinks at the rate of one second on/five seconds off.

Batteries subjected to shocks, vibration or extreme temperatures can be permanently damaged.

A shorted battery is damaged and must be replaced. Security Indicator The Security Indicator flashes (if a password was set) when the system resumes from Off or Sleep modes. You must enter the password that was set in the Security Panel before your system will resume operation. NumLk Indicator The NumLk indicator glows green when the integrated keyboard is set in ten-key numeric keypad mode. CapsLock Indicator The CapsLock indicator glows green when your keyboard is set to type in all capital letters. ScrLk Indicator The ScrLk indicator glows green when your scroll lock is active. 32 - Status Indicator Panel

Figure 8. Opening the Display Panel Display Panel Your LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC contains an LED display panel that is backlit for easier viewing in bright environments. The convertible design of your Tablet PC allows you to open the display fully, rotate it in either direction 180 degrees, and lay it face up on the keyboard. This allows you to use the system as a tablet, much as you would a pad of paper. Opening the Display Panel Press the display latch to release it, then lift the display backwards, being careful not to touch the screen with your fingers, until it is at a comfortable viewing angle. (Figure 8) 33 - Display Panel Using the System as a Tablet If you would like to use the system as a tablet, perform the following steps. The display can be rotated in either direction, but when returning the system to notebook mode, be sure to turn it back to its original position (i.e., the reverse of how you turned it when you opened it. Turning the display in the incorrect direction could cause hinge damage. The screen should rotate easily; if it does not rotate easily, you are probably attempting to turn it in the wrong direction. In the following step, be sure to position the display perpendicular to the keyboard, otherwise the keyboard or display cover could get scratched. It is important to note that no matter which mode your tablet is in, the latch should always be engaged to prevent damage to it. 1 Press the latch button and lift the display until it is perpendicular to the keyboard. (Figure 10). 2 When the display is perpendicular to the keyboard, rotate it 180 degrees in either direction (Figure 11) so that it is facing backwards. 3 Holding the top edge of the display panel, pull it forward until it is lying nearly atop the keyboard. 4 Push the latch towards the display (See A in Figure 9). The latch will pivot so the top latch disappears, and the bottom latch appears

(See B in Figure 9). Holding the latch down, lay the display flush against the system so that the latch engages. You can now use your system as a tablet. (Figure 12) Top Latch Bottom Latch Display Side A B Figure 9. Latching/unlatching To return the system to notebook configuration:

1 Press the latch button and lift the display until it is perpendicular to the keyboard. 34 - Display Panel

2 When the display is perpendicular to the keyboard, rotate it 180 degrees in either direction so that it is facing forward. Figure 10. Fully Open Display Figure 11. Rotating Display Figure 12. Tablet Mode Holding the Tablet PC Your LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC can be held in any of four orientations, depending upon how you would like to use it. There are primary and secondary landscape orientations and primary and secondary portrait orientations. When you rotate the system using the Rotation button, the order in which it rotates is illustrated below. 35 - Display Panel

. Primary Landscape Orientation Primary Portrait Orientation Secondary Landscape Orientation Secondary Portrait Orientation Figure 13. Orientations for Tablet PC in Tablet Mode Adjusting Display Panel Brightness Once you have turned on your Tablet PC, you may want to adjust the brightness level of the screen to a more comfortable viewing level. There are three ways to adjust the brightness: keyboard, power management utility, and Fujitsu Menu. Using Keyboard to Adjust Brightness Adjusting the brightness using the keyboard changes the system setting (i.e., the settings you make via the function keys automatically changes the brightness settings in the systems Pen and Tablet Settings).

[Fn+F6]: Pressing repeatedly will lower the brightness of your display.

[Fn+F7]: Pressing repeatedly will increase the brightness of the display. Note that changing the brightness with the [Fn] key is temporary. When you resume or restart, you will need to reset them if you used this method. 36 - Display Panel

Using Power Management to Adjust Brightness (Windows 7) Windows 7: To adjust brightness with the power management utility in Windows 7:

Click Start -> Control Panel. In View by:, select one of the icon views. Select Display, then click Adjust brightness in the left pane. Under Select a power plan, select the plan settings you want to use. Drag Screen brightness: bar to the left or right, depending on your preference. Using the Fujitsu Menu to Adjust Brightness To adjust brightness using the Fujitsu menu, click on the Fujitsu Menu icon in the system tray in the lower right corner of the screen. Double-click Windows Mobility Center, then double-click the icon adjacent to Display brightness. Set the screen brightness sliders for On battery and Plugged in scenarios. IF USING AC POWER, YOUR BRIGHTNESS SETTING IS SET TO ITS HIGHEST LEVEL BY DEFAULT. IF USING BATTERY POWER, YOUR BRIGHTNESS SETTING IS SET TO APPROXIMATELY MID-LEVEL BY DEFAULT. THE HIGHER THE BRIGHTNESS, THE MORE POWER THE SYSTEM WILL CONSUME AND THE FASTER YOUR BATTERIES WILL DISCHARGE. FOR MAXIMUM BATTERY LIFE, SET THE BRIGHTNESS AS LOW AS POSSIBLE. Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor (Windows 7 only) Systems which are running the Windows 7 operating system have an ambient light sensor (just below the Power/Suspend/Resume switch) that automatically senses the light conditions in which the computer is operating. If the lighting is very bright, the brightness of the LCD will increase to make it easier to see the display. Conversely, if it is used in a darkened room, the display will automatically dim. NOTE THAT WHEN YOU FIRST START YOUR SYSTEM, THE AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR IS DISABLED. YOU WILL INITIALLY NEED TO ENABLE IT USING THE FOLLOWING STEPS. The light sensor can be enabled or disabled from the Control Panel as follows:

1 Open the system Control Panel and click in the View by: field, select either large or small icons. 2 Click on the Location and Other Sensors icon. 3 To enable or disable the Light Sensor utility, check or uncheck the box in the Enabled column. 37 - Display Panel 4 For more information about the light sensor, click on Light Sensor icon in the Sensor column to the right of the light sensor icon to open the Sensor Properties window. 5 From the Sensor Properties window, you can change the sensors description, uninstall the sensor, or enable or disable selected users. To change the sensors description, click the [Change description] button, enter the new description, and click the [OK] button. To limit who can access the sensors, click Change who can access sensors, then check or uncheck the box adjacent to the individual you would like to grant or prohibit access. To uninstall the sensor, click Uninstall this sensor. 38 - Display Panel

Keyboard Function Keys Fn Key Start Key Numeric Keypad

(surrounded by heavy line) Figure 14. Keyboard Application Key Cursor Keys Using the Keyboard Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has an integral anti-microbial 84-key keyboard. The keys perform all the standard functions of a 101-key keyboard, including the Windows keys and other special function keys. This section describes the following keys (Figure 14):

Numeric keypad: Your Tablet PC allows certain keys to serve dual purposes, both as standard characters and as numeric and mathematical keys. The ability to toggle between the standard character and numerical keys is controlled through the [NumLk] key.

Cursor keys: Your keyboard contains four arrow keys for moving the cursor or insertion point to the right, left, up, or down within windows, applications and documents. 39 - Keyboard

Function keys: The keys labeled [F1] through [F12], are used in conjunction with the [Fn] key to produce special actions that vary depending on what program is running.

Windows keys: These keys work with your Windows operating system and function the same as the onscreen Start menu button, or the right button on your pointing device. Numeric Keypad Certain keys on the keyboard perform dual functions as both standard character keys and numeric keypad keys. NumLk can be activated by pressing the [NumLk] keys. Turning off the NumLk feature is done the same way. Once this feature is activated you can enter numerals 0 through 9, perform addition ( + ), subtraction ( - ), multiplication ( * ), or division ( / ), and enter decimal points ( . ) using the keys designated as ten-key function keys. The keys in the numeric keypad are marked on the front edge of the key to indicate their secondary functions. Windows Keys Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has two Windows keys, consisting of a Start key and an Application key. The Start key displays the Start menu. This button functions the same as your onscreen Start menu button. The Application key functions the same as your right mouse button and displays shortcut menus for the selected item. (Please refer to your Windows Help and Support documentation in the Start menu for additional information regarding the Windows keys.) Cursor Keys The cursor keys are the four arrow keys on the keyboard which allow you to move the cursor up, down, left and right in applications. In programs such as Windows Explorer, it moves the focus (selects the next item up, down, left, or right). Function Keys Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has 12 function keys, F1 through F12. Functions assigned to these keys differ for each application. You should refer to your software documentation to find out how these keys are used.

The [Fn] key provides extended functions for the Tablet PC and is always used in conjunction with another key. 40 - Keyboard

[Fn+F3]: Pressing [F3] while holding [Fn] will toggle the Audio Mute on and off.

[Fn+F4]: Pressing [F4] while holding [Fn] will toggle the Quick Point feature on and off. Note that the [Fn+F4] combination only works if Manual Setting is selected in the BIOS. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 72)

[Fn+F6]: Pressing [F6] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will lower the brightness of your display.

[Fn+F7]: Pressing [F7] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the brightness of the display.

[Fn+F8]: Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will decrease the volume of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC.

[Fn+F9]: Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC.

[Fn+F10]: Pressing [F10] while holding [Fn] allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. The order is determined by which type of external video device(s) is connected. Each time you press the key combination, you will step to the next choice. If you only have an external CRT connected, the order is: internal display -> external CRT ->

simultaneous display -> internal display. If you only have an HDMI device connected, the order is: internal display -> HDMI display

-> simultaneous display -> internal display. If you have external CRT and HDMI devices connected, the order is: internal display ->

external CRT -> simultaneous internal and external CRT -> HDMI display - simultaneous internal and HDMI display -> internal display. If you have an external CRT and DVI devices connected to the port replicator, the order is:

internal display -> external CRT -> simultaneous internal and external CRT -> DVI display -

> simultaneous internal and DVI display. -> internal display. 41 - Keyboard

Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Scroll Sensor Figure 15. Touchpad pointing device Using the Touchpad The touchpad is built into your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. It is used to control the movement of the cursor to select items on your display panel. The touchpad is composed of a cursor control below the center of the keyboard, two buttons below it, and a scroll sensor on the right edge of the cursor control. The left button functions the same as a left mouse button while the right button has the same function as a right mouse button. When used with the cursor control, the scroll sensor allows you to scroll up and down a screen. The actual functionality of the buttons may vary depending on the application that is being used. 42 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Clicking Clicking means pushing and releasing a button. To left-click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the left button once, and then immediately release it. To right-click, move the mouse cursor to the item you wish to select, press the right button once, and then immediately release it. You also have the option to perform the clicking operation by tapping lightly on the touchpad once. Figure 17. Clicking with Touchpad Figure 16. Clicking with button Figure 18. Right-clicking with button 43 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Double-Clicking Double-clicking means pushing and releasing the left button twice in rapid succession. This procedure does not function with the right button. To double-click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the left button twice, and immediately release it. You can also perform the double-click operation by tapping lightly on the Touchpad twice. Figure 19. Double-clicking with button Figure 20. Double-clicking with Touchpad IF THE INTERVAL BETWEEN CLICKS IS TOO LONG, THE DOUBLE-CLICK WILL NOT BE EXECUTED. PARAMETERS FOR THE TOUCH PAD CAN BE ADJUSTED FROM THE MOUSE DIALOG BOX LOCATED IN THE WINDOWS CONTROL PANEL. 44 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen

Dragging Dragging means pressing and holding the left button, while moving the cursor. To drag, move the cursor to the item you wish to move. Press and hold the left button while moving the item to its new location and then release it. Dragging can also be done using the Touchpad. First, tap the Touchpad twice over the item you wish to move making sure to leave your finger on the pad after the final tap. Next, move the object to its new location by moving your finger across the Touchpad, and then release your finger. Figure 21. Dragging with button Figure 22. Dragging with Touchpad 45 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Scrolling Using the scrolling strip allows you to navigate through a document quickly without using the windows scroll bars. This is particularly useful when you are navigating through on-line pages. To scroll, slide your finger up and down the scroll strip on the right side of the cursor control pad. Figure 23. Scrolling with the Scroll Strip Touchpad Control Adjustment The Windows Control Panel allows you to customize your touchpad with selections made from within the Mouse Properties dialog box. There are three aspects of operation which you can adjust:

Buttons: This tab lets you set up the buttons for right or left handed operation, in addition to setting up the time interval allowed between clicks in double-clicking.

Pointers: This tab lets you set up the scheme for the cursor depending on its functionality.

Pointer Options: This tab lets you set up a relation between the speed of your finger motion and the speed of the cursor. It also allows you to enable a Pointer Trail for the cursor arrow. 46 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Active Digitizer Display NOTE: Depending upon your system configuration, in addition to the active digitizer, you may also have a capacitive touch panel that responds to finger touch and touch gestures. (This configuration is called a Dual Digitizer.) For more information about the touchscreen, refer to Using the Optional Capacitive Touchscreen on page 51. The integrated active digitizer allows you to use the included stylus as a pointing device. You can use the stylus to click, double-click, drag items and icons, write text, or to draw like a pen or pencil in applications that support this behavior, such as drawing or painting programs. See the documentation that came with your application for details. Figure 24. Using the Active Digitizer Display DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING OR WRITING ON THE SCREEN WITH THE STYLUS. EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR ACTIVE DIGITIZER. TO PURCHASE ADDITIONAL OR REPLACEMENT STYLUSES, VISIT FUJITSUS ACCESSORIES WEBSITE AT:

WWW.SHOPFUJITSU.COM. 47 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen

Clicking on Active Digitizer Display To left-click, touch the object you wish to select and then lift the stylus tip immediately. Figure 25. Clicking on the Active Digitizer Display Figure 26. Right-clicking Active Digitizer Right-Clicking on Active Digitizer Right-click can be accomplished by holding the front of the toggle button down while tapping on the screen. To change the settings for the right-

click feature, go to Start -> Control Panel -> Pen and Touch. In the Pen Options tab, select Press and Hold then click the [Settings] button. 48 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Double-Clicking To double-click, touch the item twice, and then immediately remove the stylus tip. Figure 27. Double-clicking the Display Dragging Dragging means moving an item with the stylus by touching the screen, moving and then lifting the stylus. To drag, touch the Active Digitizer Display with your stylus on the item you wish to move. While continuing to touch the screen with the stylus, drag the item to its new location by moving the stylus across the screen, and then lifting the stylus to release it. Figure 28. Dragging on the Display 49 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Calibrating the Active Digitizer Display In order to ensure accurate tracking between the stylus and cursor, you must run the Calibration Utility before you use the system for the first time, or after you change the display resolution. To run the calibration utility in Windows 7:

1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Double-click the Tablet PC Settings icon and select the Display tab 3 Click the [Calibrate] button. 4 Adjust the display of your Tablet PC to a comfortable angle and find the (+) symbol in the upper-left corner of the display. DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING ON THE SCREEN DURING CALIBRATION. USE OF EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR TOUCH PANEL. 5 Using the stylus, firmly touch the screen directly on the (+) symbol. Lift the stylus from the screen and the target will move to a different location on the screen. 6 Repeat step 5 until you have selected all of the (+) symbols. 7 Once you have selected all the symbols, press the [OK] button. 8 Touch the stylus to various points on the screen to verify that the screen is correctly calibrated. If you are not satisfied with the screens calibration, press the [Calibrate]) button to begin again. 50 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Using the Optional Capacitive Touchscreen Certain configurations of this Tablet PC have an optional dual digitizer that allows you to use either the stylus or your finger(s) as a pointing device. This type of display also allows you to use gestures to perform such actions as scroll, zoom, and rotate. GESTURE SUPPORT IS DETERMINED BY THE APPLICATION IN USE. THE STYLUS TAKES PRECEDENCE OVER FINGER TOUCH. IF THE STYLUS IS WITHIN ACTIVE RANGE OF THE SCREEN, FINGER TOUCH WILL BE DISABLED.

WHEN ONE FINGER IS USED ON THE TOUCHSCREEN, IT BEHAVES IN THE SAME MANNER AS A STYLUS. Right-clicking the touchscreen To perform a right-click action using two fingers, press the first finger at the location you want to perform a right-click, then quickly tap and release the second finger on the screen. Gesture Mode To initiate gesture mode, two fingers must touch the screen within one 10th of a second of each other. If the second finger touches the screen after one 10th of a second has elapsed, the second finger is ignored. Gesture mode ends when both fingers are removed from the screen. Note that if a gesture cant be recognized, no action is taken. In that case, remove both fingers from the screen and try again. Scrolling Gesture To scroll through long documents or on a web page, place both fingers on the screen and move them in parallel in the same direction; if only one finger moves, no scrolling will occur. You can scroll vertically or horizontally, depending upon the direction of the gesture. Zoom Gesture The zoom gesture is especially helpful when viewing pictures. To zoom in, place two fingers on the item you want to enlarge, then spread them away from each other. To zoom out, place two fingers on the item you want to reduce, then move them towards each other. Rotate Gesture To change the orientation of an object on the screen, place two fingers on the image you want to rotate, then move them in opposite directions (as if you were turning a knob). The direction the item turns is dependant upon the direction you move your fingers. 51 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen

Installing a Pen Tether To prevent dropping or losing your pen, you should attach it to your system using the pen tether that is included with the system. To attach the pen tether to your Tablet PC, perform the following steps:

1 Attach the end of the pen tether with the smaller loop to your pen. To do so, push the end of the tether through the hole in the pen, then thread the opposite end of the tether through the loop. 2 Attach the end of the pen tether with the larger loop to the attachment point on your tablet. To do so, insert the end of the pen tether through the attachment point, then feed the pen through the large loop in the tether. Figure 29. Installing a Pen Tether 52 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Volume Control Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has multiple volume controls which interact with each other. ANY SOFTWARE THAT CONTAINS AUDIO FILES WILL ALSO CONTAIN A VOLUME CONTROL OF ITS OWN. IF YOU INSTALL AN EXTERNAL AUDIO DEVICE THAT HAS AN INDEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL, THE HARDWARE VOLUME CONTROL AND THE SOFTWARE VOLUME CONTROL WILL INTERACT WITH EACH OTHER. IT SHOULD BE NOTED THAT IF YOU SET YOUR SOFTWARE VOLUME TO OFF, YOU WILL OVERRIDE THE EXTERNAL VOLUME CONTROL SETTING. Controlling the Volume The volume can be controlled in several different ways:

Volume can be changed or muted from within the Volume Control in the system tray.

Volume can be controlled with the F8 and F9 functions keys. Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding

[Fn] will decrease the volume of your Tablet PC. Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your Tablet PC.

Volume can be muted by pressing the [F3] key while holding down the [Fn] key. To restore audio, repeat the [Fn+F3] procedure.

Volume can be controlled by many volume controls that are set within individual applications.

Certain external audio devices you might connect to your system may have hardware volume controls. Each source discussed above puts an upper limit on the volume level that must then be followed by the other sources. We recommend that you experiment with the various volume controls to discover the optimal sound level. 53 - Volume Control Modular Bay Figure 30. Modular Bay Modular Bay Release Latch Modular Bay Devices Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC contains a Modular Bay. The Modular Bay can house an optical drive, a Lithium ion battery, a modular second hard disk drive and a weight saver. Your Modular Bay will have one of the following devices installed.

Modular Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer: This allows you to access movies, software, and audio DVD/CDs and record to DVD, CD, and DVD-RAM discs.

TBD - Blu-ray?

Modular Lithium ion battery: This is a rechargeable battery that can be used to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC when an adapter is not connected.

Modular hard drive: This allows you to increase the storage capacity of your Tablet PC.

Weight Saver: This is used to fill the bay when no device is needed. YOU SHOULD NEVER LEAVE YOUR MODULAR BAY EMPTY WHEN THE TABLET PC IS IN OPERATION. IF LEFT EMPTY, DUST OR FOREIGN MATTER MAY ACCUMULATE INSIDE THE TABLET PC. 54 - Modular Bay Devices Removing and Installing Modular Devices There are two ways to remove and install modular devices in the Modular Bay:

Cold-swapping: swapping devices while your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is powered off.

Hot-swapping: swapping devices while your system is active using the Safely Remove Hardware icon from your system tray. Cold-swapping To cold-swap modular devices in your Modular Bay follow these easy steps:

1 Close any open files. 2 Shut down your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 3 Press the Modular Bay release latch in the direction shown in Figure 31. 4 While holding the latch, slide your device out until it is clear of the bay. This will require light force. 5 Slide the device you are installing into your Tablet PC until it clicks into place. 6 It is now safe to turn your Tablet PC back on. 7 You can now access and use the device. Your Tablet PC will automatically detect the device and activate it within your system. The drive letters associated with the device will be created and listed under My Computer and Windows Explorer. Hot-swapping Modular Bay Release Latch Figure 31. Removing/Installing Modular Bay Device Hot-swapping is provided through the Safely Remove Hardware utility. The icon for the utility appears in the system tray. Click on the icon and follow the on-screen instructions. 55 - Modular Bay Devices Figure 32. LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC Security/Tablet PC Buttons LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons A unique feature of your LIFEBOOK T731 Tablet PC is the array of Security and Tablet PC buttons. These buttons allow you to secure your Tablet PC from unauthorized use and to launch specific applications and functions with the touch of a button. Security Button Functions If the security system is activated, upon starting your Tablet PC or resuming from Sleep, Hibernate, or shutdown mode, the security system will require you to enter a password code using the security buttons. After you enter the correct password, your system will resume operation. The five security/Tablet PC buttons are located on the bottom right-hand side of the display when it is configured to be used as a notebook. 56 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons All five buttons are used when implementing security functions. Four of the buttons are used to enter the password, and the fifth is used as an Enter button. See Table 1 for information about each of the buttons. Button Icon System State Security Panel Function System is pre-boot or resuming from suspend Security Button 1 Security Button 2 Security Button 3 Security Button 4 Security Enter Button Table 1. Security Panel Button Functions Pre-logon button functions All five buttons can be used before logging on to Windows (i.e., when the Windows logon screen is displayed). Three of the buttons have secondary functions. See Table 2 for information about the pre-

logon functions.

<Tab>/<Shift><Tab>

When you press the [Page Down] button when the system is pre-logon, each press of the button will act as if you had pressed the [Tab] key. When you press the [Fn] button then press and release the [Page Down] button, each press of the button will act as if you had pressed the [Shift]+[Tab] key combination. 57 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons

<Enter>/<Escape>

When you press the [Page Up] button when the system is pre-logon, each press of the button will act as if you had pressed the [Enter] key. Button Icon System State Tablet PC Function System is pre-

logon (Windows logon screen is displayed)

<Tab>

<Enter>

Rotate screen Used to invoke secondary function Ctl+Alt+Del Button Secondary Functions

(Fn + Button)

<Shift><Tab>

<Escape>

None None None Table 2. Pre-logon Tablet PC Button Functions When you press the [Fn] button then press and release the [Page Up] button, each press of the button will act as if you had pressed the [Escape] key. Screen Rotation The screen rotation feature would normally be used when the system is configured as a tablet. When you would like to use the tablet as an eBook, for example, you would use the portrait orientation; when accessing spreadsheets or using the system as a notebook, you would more typically use landscape orientation. When the system is changed to tablet configuration, the orientation automatically changes to portrait mode by default. 58 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons THE SCREEN ORIENTATION DEFAULT CAN BE CHANGED BY GOING TO THE CONTROL PANEL AND DOUBLE-CLICKING ON TABLET PC SETTINGS AND THEN CLICKING ON THE GO TO ORIENTATION ICON AND SELECTING THE DESIRED SETTINGS IN THE DISPLAY PROPERTIES. AFTER CHANGING THE SETTINGS, SAVE THEM IN FUJITSU TABLET CONTROLS. When you press the [Screen Rotation] button when the system is in pre-boot, the system screen orientation changes from portrait (vertical) to landscape (horizontal) or from landscape to portrait. Function / Fujitsu Menu Utility Button The [Function] button works in conjunction with the other application buttons to provide additional functionality for the buttons. Refer to specific details above. Post-logon button functions All five buttons can be used after logging on to Windows. Four of the buttons have secondary functions. See Table 3 for information about each of the post-logon functions. Page Down / Application A Button When you press the [Page Down] button when the system is running, each press of the button will scroll the screen down one frame. This allows you to navigate quickly through large documents. When you press the [Fn] button then press and release the [Page Down/Application A] button, you will automatically start whichever program is assigned to the button. The default application for this button is Calculator. See Changing Tablet PC Button Functions on page 61 to select a different application for this button. Page Up / Application B Button When you press the [Page Up] button when the system is running, each press of the button will scroll the screen up one frame. This allows you to navigate quickly through large documents. 59 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons When you press the [Fn] button then press and release the [Page Up/Application B] button, you will automatically start whichever program is assigned to the button. The default application for this button is Microsoft Journal. See Changing Tablet PC Button Functions on page 61 to select a different application for this button. Button Icon System State Primary Tablet PC Function System is post-logon

(Windows desktop is displayed) Page Down Page Up Screen Rotation Secondary Functions

(Fn + Button) User-defined Application A

(Default = Calculator) User-Defined Application B

(Default = MS Journal) Display Switching:

1. LED only 2. CRT only 3. Dual Display Secondary Function Selection Fujitsu Menu Utility Ctl+Alt+Del Button None Screen Rotation /Display Switching Button Table 3. Post-logon Tablet PC Button Functions The screen rotation feature would normally be used only when the system is configured as a tablet. When you would like to use the tablet as an eBook, for example, you would use the portrait orientation; when accessing spreadsheets or using the system as a notebook, you would more typically use landscape orientation. When the system is changed to tablet configuration, the orientation automatically changes to portrait mode by default. 60 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons THE SCREEN ORIENTATION DEFAULT CAN BE CHANGED BY GOING TO THE CONTROL PANEL AND DOUBLE-CLICKING ON TABLET PC SETTINGS AND THEN CLICKING ON THE GO TO ORIENTATION ICON AND SELECTING THE DESIRED SETTINGS IN THE DISPLAY TAB. AFTER CHANGING THE SETTINGS, SAVE THEM IN FUJITSU TABLET CONTROLS. When you press the [Screen Rotation /Display Switching] button, the system screen orientation changes from portrait (vertical) to landscape (horizontal) or from landscape to portrait. Pressing the [Fn] button while pressing the [Screen Rotation] button will switch the display output in the following order: built-in display only, external display only, dual display. Function / Fujitsu Menu Utility Button The [Function] button works in conjunction with the other application buttons to provide additional functionality for the buttons. Refer to specific details above. Pressing the [Fn] button twice in succession causes the Fujitsu Menu Utility to appear on your screen, allowing you to modify certain system settings. Ctl+Alt+Del Button Pressing and holding the [Ctl-Alt-Del] button for up to 8 seconds launches the Logon screen or the Windows Task Manager. Changing Tablet PC Button Functions The Application A and B buttons can be changed to launch a program or perform an action you select. By default, the Application A button launches the Calculator, and the Application B button launches MS Journal. To launch different applications or cause the Application A or B buttons to perform a specific action:

1 Click on the Tablet PC Settings icon in the Control Panel. 61 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons 2 Select the Buttons tab and select the button you would like to change from the list. 3 Click [Change] and open the drop down list in the Press: field. 4 Select the action you would like the button to perform. If you want to launch a program, click on Launch an Application then browse to the location of the program. 5 Click [OK], then click [OK] again. The buttons will now perform the actions you have assigned to them. Setting up LIFEBOOK Security Panel When you receive your Tablet PC, the security panel application is pre-installed without any passwords. The following sections provide detailed information on your security panel, how to set, change or remove passwords. Numbered Buttons Use these buttons to enter your password. Enter Button After entering the button strokes, push this button to enter the password into the Tablet PC. Passwords The user and supervisor password may be set on this Tablet PC. A supervisor password is typically the same for all tablets and notebooks in a work group, office, or company to allow for system management. Individual computers in a group environment should not use a common password. A password consists of one to five button strokes plus the enter button. A valid stroke consists of pushing one or up to four buttons simultaneously. The following are valid button strokes:

Pushing [4] by itself

Pushing [2] and [3] at the same time

Pushing [1], [2], and [4] at the same time

Pushing [1], [2], [3], and [4] at the same time 62 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons The following are valid passwords. The numbers within braces ({ }) are button strokes using more than one button.

{[2]+[3]}, [1], [Enter]

[4], [enter]

{[1]+[3]}, {[2]+[3]+[4]}, [1], [4], [2], [Enter]

Setting Passwords When shipped from the factory, no passwords are set. You have a choice of having no password or setting a supervisor and user password. You must set the supervisor password before the user password. THE PURPOSE OF SUPERVISOR PASSWORD IS TO BE ABLE TO BYPASS THE USER PASSWORD IN CASE THE USER PASSWORD IS FORGOTTEN. THE SUPERVISOR PASSWORD ALONE WILL NOT LOCK THE SYSTEM. YOU MUST SET THE SUPERVISOR AND USER PASSWORDS FOR THE SECURITY PANEL TO WORK. Setting Supervisor Password You must have set a supervisor password before setting any user passwords. The supervisor password can bypass the user password. 1 Go to the Start menu. 2 Click on Run. 3 Type in: C:\Program Files\Fujitsu\Security Panel Application\Supervisor\ FJSECS.EXE, then press [Enter]

4 Follow the on-screen instructions to set the Supervisor password. Setting User Password 1 Go to the Start menu. 2 Click on All Programs. 3 Click on Security Panel Application -> Security Panel Application. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to set the user password. 63 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons

YOU MAY CHANGE OR REMOVE THE SUPERVISOR OR USER PASSWORD BY REPEATING THE STEPS DEFINED ABOVE. Using Your LIFEBOOK Security Panel The security lock feature is in effect both when the system resumes from Off, Sleep, or Hibernation state. You always need to push the Security Panel buttons to input the user password. Your system will not begin the boot sequence until you enter your supervisor/user password. From Off State 1 Turn on your system. 2 When the Security Indicator flashes, enter the password and press Enter button (e.g., if the password is 22222, first press Button 2 five times, then press the Enter button). The Tablet PC will boot to normal operation. From Sleep/Hibernation State 1 Press your Suspend/Resume button. 2 When the Security Indicator flashes, enter the password and press Enter button.The Tablet PC should resume normal operation. Incorrect Password Entry If an invalid supervisor or user password is entered three times in succession, the system will beep for about one minute. If a valid password is entered within a minute (while system beeps), the beeping will stop and the Tablet PC will resume normal operation. If no password is entered or an invalid password is entered while the system beeps, the system will return to its previous locked state (sleep or off) and the Security Indicator will go off. To reactivate the Tablet PC after a password failure, you must press the Suspend/Resume button, then enter a correct password. 64 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons REMEMBER THE USER PASSWORD YOU SPECIFIED ON THE SECURITY PANEL APPLICATION. IF YOU FORGET THE PASSWORD YOU WILL NOT BE ABLE TO USE YOUR COMPUTER. THE SUPERVISOR PASSWORD CAN OVERRIDE THE USER PASSWORD. Precautions Opening and Closing the Cover By default, closing the cover automatically places your system into Sleep mode. To change the default when the cover is closed:

1 Open the system Control Panel and select Power Options. 2 Click Choose what closing the lid does in the left pane. 3 Select the desired action for When I close the lid, then click the [Save changes] or [Apply] button (depending upon your operating system). Low Battery Operations If your Tablet PC has a low battery, pushing the suspend/resume button only turns on the Security Indicator. Your Tablet PC does not unlock, the Security Indicator turns off after one minute. To resume normal operation, first attach a power supply to the Tablet PC. Then you may unlock the Tablet PC. Uninstalling/Re-installing the Security Panel Application You have two options when uninstalling the security panel application:

Remove passwords and uninstall the security panel application software. This will disable all security features.

Uninstall the security panel application with password still active. This will not allow any changes to the password. 65 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons Uninstalling the Security Panel Application Software Remove passwords when User wants no password protection whatsoever and doesnt want to give anybody the utility to set a password on their computer. In this case, if passwords (supervisor, user, or both) are set, the passwords must first be cleared BEFORE removing the application. To clear passwords, follow same procedure in SETTING PASSWORD CODES except this time, select REMOVE, enter current password then click Next. When asked to confirm select Yes. Removing Security Panel Application with Passwords Still Active Using this feature will not allow any changes to the password. REMOVING THE APPLICATIONS DOES NOT REMOVE THE PASSWORD. IT SIMPLY REMOVES THE ABILITY TO CHANGE/ADD/REMOVE PASSWORDS. TO CHANGE YOUR PASSWORD YOU MUST REINSTALL THE APPLICATION. User:

1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Open Programs and Features in the Control Panel. 3 Select Security Panel for User in the list, and click Uninstall/Change. 4 When User Account Control box appears, click Continue. Supervisor:

1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Open Add or Remove Programs Properties in the Control Panel. 3 Select the Security Panel for Supervisor in the list, and click Uninstall/Change. 4 When User Account Control box appears, click Continue. 66 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons Reinstalling the Security Panel Application To reinstall supervisor or user security application, you will need your Drivers and Applications CD. The Utilities\Security Panel Application folder contains two separate folders: Supervisor and User. The setup files for supervisor and user security applications are contained in those folders. 1 Go to the Utilities\Security Panel Application\ Supervisor folder on the CD and double-click the setup.exe file. The Installing Security Panel Application window will appear. Follow the instructions on the screen. 2 Go to the Utilities\Security Panel Application\User folder on the CD and double-click the setup.exe file. The Installing Security Panel Application window will appear. Follow the instructions on the screen. Supervisor and user passwords can be set via Windows software using the FJSECS.exe and FJSECU.exe files, respectively. FJSECU.exe for the user password cannot run without first setting a supervisor password. You need to run FJSECS.exe first to set the supervisor password. Follow instructions under Setting Passwords on page 63. If you forget both passwords, please contact Fujitsu America Service and Support at 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-

800-838-5487). Fujitsu America charges a service fee for unlocking a password-restricted Tablet PC. When calling please have a valid credit card and provide proof of ownership. You will then be given instructions on where to ship your Tablet PC. 67 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons Chapter 2 Getting Started with Your LIFEBOOK Power Sources Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has three possible power sources: a primary Lithium ion battery, an AC adapter or an optional Auto/Airline adapter. Connecting the Power Adapters The AC adapter or optional Auto/Airline adapter provides power for operating your Tablet PC and charging the batteries. Connecting the AC Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 2 Plug the AC adapter into an AC electrical outlet. Connecting the Optional Auto/Airline Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack on your Tablet PC. 2 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the cigarette lighter of an automobile, or, 3 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the DC power jack on an airplane seat. 68 DC Power Jack AC Adapter Switching from AC Adapter Power or the Auto/Airline Adapter to Battery Power Figure 33. Connecting the AC Adapter 1 Be sure that you have at least one charged battery installed. 2 Remove the AC adapter or the Auto/Airline adapter. THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY IS NOT CHARGED UPON PURCHASE. INITIALLY, YOU WILL NEED TO CONNECT EITHER THE AC ADAPTER OR THE AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER TO USE YOUR TABLET PC. 69 - Power Sources Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Power On Power/Suspend/Resume Switch The Power/Suspend/Resume switch is used to turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from its off state. Once you have connected your AC adapter or charged the internal Lithium ion battery, you can power on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. WHEN YOU TURN ON YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC BE SURE YOU HAVE A POWER SOURCE. THIS MEANS THAT AT LEAST ONE BATTERY IS INSTALLED AND CHARGED, OR THAT THE AC OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER IS CONNECTED AND HAS POWER. To turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from its off state, slide the Power/Suspend/Resume switch, located above the keyboard to the right. When you are done working you can either leave your Tablet PC in Suspend mode or you can turn it off. See Sleep Mode on page 76 and Powering Off on page 79. Figure 34. Power/Suspend/Resume Switch 70 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC DO NOT CARRY YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC AROUND WITH THE POWER ON OR SUBJECT IT TO SHOCKS OR VIBRATION, AS YOU RISK DAMAGING YOUR TABLET PC. When you power on your LIFEBOOK, it will perform a Power On Self Test (POST) to check the internal parts and configuration for correct functionality. If a fault is found, your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC will emit an audio warning and/or an error message will be displayed. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 117. Depending on the nature of the problem, you may be able to continue by starting the operating system or by entering the BIOS setup utility and revising the settings. After satisfactory completion of the POST, your Tablet PC will load your operating system. NEVER TURN OFF YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC DURING THE POWER ON SELF TEST (POST) OR IT WILL CAUSE AN ERROR MESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED WHEN YOU TURN YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC ON THE NEXT TIME. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 117. Boot Sequence The procedure for starting-up your Tablet PC is termed the Bootup sequence and involves your Tablet PCs BIOS. When your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is first turned on, the main system memory is empty, and it needs to find instructions to start up your Tablet PC. This information is in the BIOS program. Each time you power up or restart your Tablet PC, it goes through a boot sequence which displays a Fujitsu logo until your operating system is loaded. During booting, your Tablet PC is performing a standard boot sequence including a Power On Self Test (POST). When the boot sequence is completed without a failure and without a request for the BIOS Setup Utility, the system displays the operating systems opening screen. 71 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC The boot sequence is executed when:

You turn on the power to your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC.

You restart your Tablet PC from the Windows Shut Down dialog box.

The software initiates a system restart. Example: When you install a new application. Hard Disk Drive Passwords To provide additional security for your data, you can assign passwords to your hard disk drive(s). This feature is managed in the system BIOS Setup Utility. See BIOS Setup Utility below for information about accessing the utility. REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORDS. IF YOU SET AND FORGET YOUR USER AND MASTER HARD DISK PASSWORDS, FUJITSU WILL NOT BE ABLE TO RESET IT. YOU MAY LOSE DATA AND HAVE TO REPLACE YOUR SYSTEM BOARD OR HARD DISK DRIVE. BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS Setup Utility is a program that sets up the operating environment for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Your BIOS is set at the factory for normal operating conditions, therefore there is no need to set or change the BIOS environment to operate your Tablet PC. The BIOS Setup Utility configures:

Device control feature parameters, such as changing I/O addresses and boot devices.

System Data Security feature parameters, such as passwords. Entering the BIOS Setup Utility To enter the setup utility, do the following:

1 Turn on or restart your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 2 To enter the BIOS Setup Utility, press the [F2] key once the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. This will open the main menu of the BIOS Setup Utility with the current settings displayed. 72 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC 3 Press the [RIGHT ARROW] or [LEFT ARROW] key to scroll through the other setup menus to review or alter the current settings. The Boot Menu can also be invoked by pressing the [F12] key when the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. BIOS Guide A guide to your Tablet PCs BIOS is available online. Please visit our service and support website at http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support, then select Users Guides under Online Support. Select your Product, Series, and Model, then click [Go]. Under the Manuals tab, select the BIOS Guide. Booting the System We strongly recommend that you not attach any external devices until you have gone through the initial power on sequence. When you turn on your Tablet PC for the first time, it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen. If you do nothing the system will load the operating system, and then the Windows Welcome will begin. Starting Windows the first time THE FIRST TIME YOU INITIALIZE YOUR WINDOWS SYSTEM, THE SCREEN WILL BE BLANK FOR APPROXIMATELY TWO MINUTES. THIS IS NORMAL. AFTER INITIALIZATION, A SET UP WINDOWS DIALOG BOX WILL APPEAR. IMPORTANT: DURING THE SETUP PROCEDURE, DO NOT DISCONNECT THE POWER SUPPLY, PRESS ANY BUTTONS, OR USE ANY PERIPHERAL DEVICES SUCH AS A MOUSE, KEYBOARD, OR REMOTE CONTROL. In order to ensure that you receive the most benefits from the Windows operating system, it should be registered the first time you use it. 73 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC 1 First of all, you will need to read and accept the End User License Agreements (EULAs). IF YOU REJECT THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENTS YOU WILL BE ASKED TO REVIEW THE LICENSE AGREEMENTS FOR INFORMATION ON RETURNING WINDOWS OR TO SHUT DOWN YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC. YOU CANNOT USE YOUR TABLET PC UNTIL YOU HAVE ACCEPTED THE LICENSE AGREEMENTS. IF YOU STOP THE PROCESS YOUR TABLET PC WILL RETURN TO THE BEGINNING OF THE WINDOWS WELCOME PROCESS, EVEN IF YOU SHUT YOUR TABLET PC DOWN AND START IT UP AGAIN. 2 You will be prompted to enter your User Name and Password and you will be given a chance to select an icon for your account. 3 The next screen asks for a Computer Name and allows you to choose a desktop background. 4 You will next see a "Help protect Windows automatically" screen in which the default choice is "Use recommended settings. The other two choices are "Install important updates only" and "Ask me later". Select from the three choices. 5 On the next screen set your time and date settings. 6 You will next see the "Select your computer's current location" screen. Make your selection from Home, Work

(Default), and Public location. 7 The "Thank you" screen follows and an offer for free Norton Internet Security is extended. Following are several screens while Windows checks the system performance. 8 Windows will then boot up for the first time. As noted above, the first time you initialize your system, the screen will be blank for approximately two minutes. This is normal. During this period, do not disconnect the power supply, press any buttons, or use any peripheral devices such as mouse, keyboard, or remote control. Registering Windows with Microsoft 1 After Windows has booted up for the first time, the Control Panel Welcome Center will appear. If the Register Windows Online icon is not seen in the window, click on Show all xx items (where xx is the number of topics in the Welcome Center). 2 Click on Register Windows Online and follow the instructions that appear to register your copy of Windows. 74 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC

Registering Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC with Fujitsu You can register your LIFEBOOK by going to our website at: http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/. You will need to be set up with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to register online.

Installing ClickMe!

ClickMe!

BEFORE INSTALLING THE CLICKME! UTILITY, BE SURE THE WIRELESS LAN SWITCH IS TURNED ON. The first time you boot up your system, you will see a Primary Settings for the PC window. This window explains the installations which will be performed by the Click Me! utility. If you click [Execute], ClickMe! will begin installing. If after clicking the button you receive a User Account Control window, you will be asked for your permission to continue. Click [Continue] to continue. If you cancel the operation, the ClickMe! icon will appear on your desktop for later installation. THERE MAY BE SOME THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS THAT DO NOT GET INSTALLED USING THE CLICKME!

UTILITY. FOR MORE INFORMATION, REFER TO YOUR GETTING STARTED GUIDE.

Fujitsu Driver Update Utility

Your system has a tool called the Fujitsu Driver Update (FDU) utility. With FDU, you can choose to automatically or manually go to the Fujitsu site to check for new updates for your system. For more information about the FDU utility, refer to Automatically Downloading Driver Updates on page 127. 75 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Power Management Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has many options and features for conserving battery power. Some of these features are automatic and need no user intervention. However, others depend on the parameters you set to best suit your operating conditions, such as those for the display brightness. Internal power management for your Tablet PC may be controlled from settings made in your operating system, pre-

bundled power management application, or from settings made in BIOS setup utility. Besides the options available for conserving battery power, there are also some things that you can do to prevent your battery from running down as quickly. For example, you can create an appropriate power saving profile, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode when it is not performing an operation, and you can limit the use of high power devices. As with all mobile, battery powered computers, there is a trade-off between performance and power savings. Power/Suspend/Resume Switch When your Tablet PC is active, the Power/Suspend/Resume switch can be used to manually put the Tablet PC into Sleep mode. Push the Power/Suspend/Resume switch when the Tablet PC is active, but not actively accessing anything, and immediately release the button. If your Tablet PC is suspended, pushing the Power/Suspend/Resume switch returns it to active operation. You can tell whether the system is Suspended by looking at the Power indicator. If the indicator is visible and not flashing, your Tablet PC is fully operational. If the indicator is visible and flashing, the Tablet PC is in Sleep mode. If the indicator is not visible, the power is off or your Tablet PC is in Hibernation mode. Sleep Mode Sleep mode in Windows saves the contents of your system memory during periods of inactivity by maintaining power to critical parts. This mode turns off the CPU, display, hard drive, and all other internal components except those necessary to maintain system memory and for restarting. Your Tablet PC can be put in sleep mode by:

Pressing the Power/Suspend/Resume switch when your system is turned on. 76 - Power Management

Selecting Sleep after clicking [Start] then clicking the small arrow at the bottom right of the window.

Timing out from lack of activity.

Allowing the battery to reach the Dead Battery Warning condition. Your Tablet PCs system memory typically stores the file on which you are working, open application information, and any other data required to support operations in progress. When you resume operation from Sleep mode, your Tablet PC will return to the point where it left off. You must use the Power/Suspend/Resume switch to resume operation, and there must be an adequate power source available, or your Tablet PC will not resume. IF RUNNING YOUR TABLET PC ON BATTERY POWER, BE AWARE THAT THE BATTERY CONTINUES TO DISCHARGE WHILE YOUR TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, THOUGH NOT AS QUICKLY AS WHEN FULLY OPERATIONAL. DISABLING THE POWER/SUSPEND/RESUME SWITCH PREVENTS IT FROM BEING USED TO PUT THE TABLET PC INTO SLEEP OR HIBERNATION (SAVE-TO-DISK) MODE. THE BUTTON RESUME FUNCTION CANNOT BE DISABLED. THE SLEEP OR HIBERNATION MODE SHOULD NOT BE USED WITH CERTAIN EXPRESSCARDS. CHECK YOUR EXPRESSCARD DOCUMENTATION FOR MORE INFORMATION. WHEN EXPRESSCARDS OR EXTERNAL DEVICES ARE IN USE, HIBERNATION MODE CANNOT RETURN TO THE EXACT STATE PRIOR TO SUSPENSION, BECAUSE ALL OF THE PERIPHERAL DEVICES WILL BE RE-INITIALIZED WHEN THE SYSTEM RESTARTS. IF YOUR TABLET PC IS ACTIVELY ACCESSING INFORMATION WHEN YOU ENTER THE SLEEP OR HIBER-

NATION MODE, CHANGES TO OPEN FILES ARE NOT LOST. THE FILES ARE LEFT OPEN AND MEMORY IS KEPT ACTIVE DURING SLEEP MODE OR THE MEMORY IS TRANSFERRED TO THE INTERNAL HARD DRIVE DURING HIBERNATION MODE. THE MAIN ADVANTAGE OF USING HIBERNATION IS THAT POWER IS NOT REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN YOUR DATA. THIS IS PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT IF YOU WILL BE LEAVING YOUR TABLET PC IN A SUSPENDED STATE FOR A PROLONGED PERIOD OF TIME. THE DRAWBACK OF USING HIBERNATION MODE IS THAT IT LENGTHENS THE POWER DOWN AND POWER UP SEQUENCES AND RESETS PERIPHERAL DEVICES. 77 - Power Management Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) Feature The Hibernation feature saves the contents of your Tablet PCs system memory to the hard drive as a part of the Suspend/Resume mode. You can enable or disable this feature. Enable or Disable the Hibernation Feature The default settings are not enabled. To enable or disable the Hibernation feature follow these steps:

1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, then select the Power Options icon. 2 Select Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing the lid does, then make your selections

(Do Nothing, Sleep, Hibernate, or Shut Down). Windows Power Management The Power Options icon located in the Windows Control Panel allows you to configure some of the power management settings. For example, you can use the Power Options to set the timeout values for turning off the display and hard disks whether you are running the Tablet PC on battery power or one of the adapters. Restarting the System If your system is on and you need to restart it, be sure that you use the following procedure. 1 Click the [Start] button, and then move the mouse over the small arrow at the bottom right of the right-hand pane. 2 Select Restart from the list. TURNING OFF YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC WITHOUT EXITING WINDOWS OR TURNING ON YOUR TABLET PC WITHIN 10 SECONDS OF THE SYSTEM BEING SHUT OFF MAY CAUSE AN ERROR WHEN YOU START THE NEXT TIME. 78 - Power Management Powering Off Before turning off the power, check that the hard drive/optical drive access indicator is off. If you turn off the power while accessing a disk there is a risk of data loss. To ensure that your Tablet PC shuts down without error, use the Windows shut down procedure. BE SURE TO CLOSE ALL FILES, EXIT ALL APPLICATIONS, AND SHUT DOWN YOUR OPERATING SYSTEM PRIOR TO TURNING OFF THE POWER. IF FILES ARE OPEN WHEN YOU TURN THE POWER OFF, YOU WILL LOSE ANY CHANGES THAT HAVE NOT BEEN SAVED, AND MAY CAUSE DISK ERRORS. Using the correct procedure to shut down from Windows allows your Tablet PC to complete its operations and turn off power in the proper sequence to avoid errors. The proper sequence is:

1 Click the [Start] button, and then move the mouse over the small arrow at the bottom right of the right-hand pane. 2 Select Shut Down from the list. If you are going to store your Tablet PC for a month or more, see Care and Maintenance Section. ENERGY STAR Compliance Your Fujitsu system is an ENERGY STAR qualified mobile PC. By choosing a computer with the latest energy-saving technology, youre helping to preserve our environment for future generations. ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, U.S. Department of Energy, Natural Resources Canada, and other governments around the world helping us save money while protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. With energy costs and global warming top-of-mind for consumers, Fujitsu is committed to offering solutions that help consumers conserve energy and improve the quality of our environment. 79 - Power Management Sleep Mode: You will notice that your computer is initially set so that the display turns off after 15 minutes of user inactivity, and the computer goes into Sleep mode after 20 minutes of user inactivity. When going into Sleep mode, the computer also reduces the speed of any active Ethernet network links. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, press the Suspend/Resume Button. Energy saving benefits:

Fujitsu ENERGY STAR qualified mobile PCs use about half as much electricity as standard equipment saving half in utility costs. But more than that, ENERGY STAR also makes a difference for the environment. Did you know that the average house can be responsible for twice the greenhouse gas emissions as the average car? Thats because every time you flip on a light switch, run your dishwasher, or turn on your PC, you use energy, which means more greenhouse gas emissions from power plants. So the more energy we can save through energy efficiency, the more we help to reduce greenhouse gases and the risks of global warming. To learn more about the important ENERGY STAR program, visit: www.energystar.gov. To read about how Fujitsu is supporting Sustainable Management along with several other environmental activities, visit the Fujitsu Corporate Citizenship page at:

http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/aboutus/environmental/environment.php 80 - Power Management Chapter 3 User-Installable Features Lithium ion Battery Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has a Lithium ion battery that provides power for operating your Tablet PC when no external power source is available. The battery is durable and long lasting, but should not be exposed to extreme temperatures, high voltages, chemicals or other hazards. The Lithium ion battery operating time may become shorter if it is used under the following conditions:

When used at temperatures that exceed a low of 5C or a high of 35C (41 to 95 F). Extreme temperatures not only reduce charging efficiency, but can also cause battery deterioration. The Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when you try to charge a battery that is outside its operating temperature range.

When using a high current device such as a modem, external optical drive, or the hard drive, using the AC adapter will conserve your battery life. DO NOT LEAVE A FAULTY BATTERY IN YOUR TABLET PC. IT MAY DAMAGE YOUR AC ADAPTER, OPTIONAL AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER, ANOTHER BATTERY OR YOUR TABLET PC ITSELF. IT MAY ALSO PREVENT OPERATION OF YOUR TABLET PC BY DRAINING ALL AVAILABLE CURRENT INTO THE BAD BATTERY. 81

ACTUAL BATTERY LIFE WILL VARY BASED ON SCREEN BRIGHTNESS, APPLICATIONS, FEATURES, POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGS, BATTERY CONDITION AND OTHER CUSTOMER PREFERENCES. OPTICAL DRIVE OR HARD DRIVE USAGE MAY ALSO HAVE A SIGNIFICANT IMPACT ON BATTERY LIFE. THE BATTERY CHARGING CAPACITY IS REDUCED AS THE BATTERY AGES. IF YOUR BATTERY IS RUNNING LOW QUICKLY, YOU SHOULD REPLACE IT WITH A NEW ONE.

UNDER FEDERAL, STATE, OR LOCAL LAW IT MAY BE ILLEGAL TO DISPOSE OF BATTERIES BY PUTTING THEM IN THE TRASH. PLEASE TAKE CARE OF OUR ENVIRONMENT AND DISPOSE OF BATTERIES PROPERLY. CHECK WITH YOUR LOCAL GOVERNMENT AUTHORITY FOR DETAILS REGARDING RECYCLING OR DISPOSING OF OLD BATTERIES. IF YOU CANNOT FIND THIS INFORMATION ELSEWHERE, CONTACT YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE AT 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Recharging the Batteries If you want to know the condition of the primary Lithium ion battery, check the Battery Level indicator located on the Status Indicator panel. The indicator changes as the battery level changes. The Lithium ion battery is recharged internally using the AC adapter or Auto/Airline adapter. To recharge the battery make sure the battery that needs to be charged is installed in your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and connect the AC or Auto/Airline adapter. MAKE SURE THAT THE PERCENTAGE CHARGE IS INDICATED BY THE BATTERY CHARGING INDICATOR ON THE STATUS INDICATOR PANEL. There is no memory effect on the Lithium ion battery therefore you do not need to discharge the battery completely before recharging. The charge times will be significantly longer if your Tablet PC is in use while the battery is charging. If you want to charge the battery more quickly, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode, or turn it off while the adapter is charging the battery. (See Power Management on page 76 for more information on Sleep mode and shutdown procedure) 82 - Lithium ion Battery USING HEAVY CURRENT DEVICES OR FREQUENT EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ACCESSES MAY PREVENT CHARGING COMPLETELY. Low Battery State When the battery is running low, a low battery notification message will appear. If you do not respond to the low battery message, the batteries will continue to discharge until they are too low to operate. When this happens, your Tablet PC will go into Sleep mode. There is no guarantee that your data will be saved once the Tablet PC reaches this point. ONCE THE LOW BATTERY NOTIFICATION MESSAGE APPEARS, YOU NEED TO SAVE ALL YOUR ACTIVE DATA AND PUT YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC INTO SLEEP MODE UNTIL YOU CAN PROVIDE A NEW POWER SOURCE. YOU SHOULD PROVIDE A CHARGED BATTERY, AN AC POWER ADAPTER, OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. WHEN YOU ARE IN SLEEP MODE THERE MUST ALWAYS BE AT LEAST ONE POWER SOURCE ACTIVE. IF YOU REMOVE ALL POWER SOURCES WHILE YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, ANY DATA THAT HAS NOT BEEN SAVED TO THE HARD DRIVE WILL BE LOST. Dead Battery Suspend mode shows on the Status indicator just like the normal Sleep mode. Once your Tablet PC goes into Dead Battery Suspend mode you will be unable to resume operation until you provide a source of power either from an adapter, or a charged battery. Once you have provided power, you will need to press the Power/Suspend/Resume switch to resume operation. In the Dead Battery Suspend mode, your data can be maintained for some time, but if a power source is not provided promptly, the Power indicator will stop flashing and go out, meaning that you have lost the data that was not stored. Once you provide power, you can continue to use your Tablet PC while an adapter is charging the battery. 83 - Lithium ion Battery Shorted Batteries The Status Indicator panel indicator associated with the Battery Level indicator displays the operating level available in that battery. If this display shows a flashing red LED, it means the battery is damaged and must be replaced so it does not damage other parts of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Replacing the Battery With the purchase of an additional battery, you can have a fully charged spare to swap with one that is not charged. There are two ways to swap batteries, cold-swapping and hot-swapping:

Cold-swapping Batteries To cold-swap batteries in your battery bay, follow these easy steps (Figure 35):

1 Have a charged battery ready to install. 2 Shut down your Tablet PC and disconnect the AC adapter. 3 While pushing the battery bay release latches towards each other, slide the battery out of the bay. 4 Insert a new battery into the bay, and press it in firmly so that the latches click into place. 5 Plug in the AC adapter and turn the power on. Hot-swapping Batteries To hot-swap batteries in your battery bay follow these easy steps:

BE SURE TO PLUG IN AN AC ADAPTER PRIOR TO REMOVING THE BATTERY. THERE IS NO BRIDGE BATTERY PRESENT TO SUPPORT THE SYSTEM WHILE THE BATTERY IS BEING REPLACED. IF YOU DO NOT USE AN AC ADAPTER YOU WILL LOSE ANY UNSAVED FILES. 1 Plug an AC Adapter into the system and connect it to a power outlet. 84 - Lithium ion Battery Battery Pack Battery Bay Release Latches 2 Follow steps 3 through 5 in Cold Swapping Batteries. Figure 35. Removing a Battery IF THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY CONNECTOR IS NOT FULLY SEATED, YOU MAY NOT BE ABLE TO USE YOUR TABLET PC OR CHARGE YOUR BATTERY. 85 - Lithium ion Battery SD/Memory Stick Card Slot SD Card Figure 36. Installing a Memory Stick or SD Card Memory Stick Memory Stick/Secure Digital Cards Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC supports Memory Sticks and Secure Digital (SD) cards, on which you can store and transfer data to and from a variety of digital devices. These cards use flash memory architecture, which means they dont need a power source to retain data. Memory Stick is a flash memory technology that allows you to record, transfer and share digital content, such as digital pictures, movies, music, voice, and computer data and applications. Secure Digital (SD) Cards are very similar to Memory Sticks. Like Memory Sticks, SD Cards allow portable storage among a variety of devices, such as cell phones, GPS systems, digital cameras, and PDAs. SD Cards transfer data quickly, with low battery consumption. Like the memory stick, it uses flash memory architecture. 86 - Memory Stick/Secure Digital Cards Installing Memory Stick/SD Cards Memory Stick and SD Cards are installed in the Memory Stick/SD Card slot. To install a Memory Stick or SD Card, follow these steps:

INSTALLING OR REMOVING A MEMORY STICK OR SD CARD DURING YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PCS SHUTDOWN OR BOOTUP PROCESS MAY DAMAGE THE CARD AND/OR YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC. DO NOT INSERT A CARD INTO A SLOT IF THERE IS WATER OR ANY OTHER SUBSTANCE ON THE CARD AS YOU MAY PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE CARD, YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC, OR BOTH. 1 See your specific card manual for instructions on the installation of your card. Some cards may require that your Tablet PC is off while installing them. 2 Make sure there is no card currently in the slot. If there is, see Removing a Memory Stick/SD Card. 3 Insert your card into the slot with the product label facing up. 4 Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in the connector. Removing A Memory Stick/SD Card To remove a Memory Stick or SD Card, follow these easy steps:

SEE YOUR CARD MANUAL FOR SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS ON THE REMOVAL OF YOUR CARD. SOME CARDS MAY REQUIRE YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC TO BE IN SLEEP MODE OR OFF WHILE REMOVING THEM. 1 Select Safely Remove Hardware from the System Tray. Highlight the card in the list, then click [Stop]. 2 Push the Memory Stick or SD Card in until it unlatches. It will then eject from the slot for removal. 87 - Memory Stick/Secure Digital Cards ExpressCard Eject Button ExpressCard (54 mm) ExpressCard (34 mm) ExpressCard Slot Figure 37. Installing/Removing an ExpressCard ExpressCards Your LIFEBOOK supports ExpressCardsTM which can perform a variety of functions depending on which type of card you install. There are two different width ExpressCards: 34 mm and 54 mm. The connector inside the slot is located on the left-hand side of the slot. If you insert a 34 mm card, be sure to align it with the left side of the slot when inserting it. For further information, refer to the instructions supplied with your card(s). Installing ExpressCards ExpressCards are installed in the ExpressCard slot on the left-hand side of the system. INSTALLING OR REMOVING AN EXPRESSCARD DURING YOUR NOTEBOOKS SHUTDOWN OR BOOTUP PROCESS MAY DAMAGE THE CARD AND/OR YOUR NOTEBOOK.

DO NOT INSERT AN EXPRESSCARD INTO A SLOT IF THERE IS WATER OR ANY OTHER SUBSTANCE ON THE CARD AS YOU MAY PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE CARD, YOUR NOTEBOOK, OR BOTH. 88 - ExpressCards

YOU MAY BE REQUIRED TO LOG ON AS ADMINISTRATOR OR A MEMBER OF THE ADMINISTRATORS GROUP TO COMPLETE THIS PROCEDURE. IF YOUR COMPUTER IS CONNECTED TO A NETWORK, NETWORK POLICY SETTINGS MAY ALSO PREVENT YOU FROM COMPLETING THIS PROCEDURE. See your ExpressCard manual for instructions on the installation of your card. Some cards may require that your notebook is off while installing them. To install an ExpressCard, follow these steps (see Figure 37):

1 Make sure there is no ExpressCard currently in the slot. If there is, see Removing ExpressCards. 2 If the eject button is extended, press it in until it clicks. 3 Insert your ExpressCard into the slot with the product label facing up. If you are inserting a 34 mm card, be sure to align it with the left side of the slot when inserting it. 4 Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in the connector. Removing ExpressCards See your ExpressCard manual for specific instructions on removing your card. Some cards may require your notebook to be in Sleep Mode or Off during removal.

REMOVE DEVICES USING THE SAFELY REMOVE HARDWARE ICON IN THE SYSTEM TRAY AT THE BOTTOM RIGHT OF YOUR SCREEN. IF THE DIALOG BOX STATES THAT THE DEVICE CANNOT BE REMOVED, YOU MUST SAVE ALL OF YOUR OPEN FILES, CLOSE ANY OPEN APPLICATIONS AND SHUT DOWN YOUR NOTEBOOK. To remove an ExpressCard, follow these steps:

1 Unlock the card from the slot by pressing the eject button to the right of the slot in which the card is located. When pressed, the button will pop out. 2 Firmly press the button again until it is flush with the notebook. This will eject the card slightly out of the slot allowing you to remove the card. 89 - ExpressCards

Memory Upgrade Module Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC comes with a minimum of 1 GB of high speed Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic RAM (DDR3-1066 SDRAM) factory installed. To increase your Tablet PCs memory capacity, you may install an additional memory upgrade module. The memory upgrade must be a dual-in-line (DIMM) SDRAM module. To ensure 100% compatibility, purchase the SDRAM module only from the Fujitsu web store at www.shopfujitsu.com.

DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS FROM THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE COMPARTMENT EXCEPT THE ONES SPECIFICALLY SHOWN IN THE DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLING AND REMOVING THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE. THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE

(ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE MODULE, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

BEFORE HANDLING A MEMORY MODULE, TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY.

WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING A MEMORY MODULE, HOLD IT BY THE EDGE SO AS NOT TO TOUCH ANY CONTACTS OR CHIPS. BE CAREFUL NOT TO TOUCH ANY INTERNAL COMPUTER TERMINALS OR COMPONENTS; THE OIL FROM YOUR FINGERS COULD CAUSE A SHORT TO THE COMPONENTS.

BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING MEMORY MODULES. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE OR SLEEP STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR THE MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. Installing Memory Upgrade Modules 1 Turn off power to your Tablet PC, remove any power adapter (AC or auto/airline). Remove the battery. 2 Make sure that all the connector covers are closed. 3 Turn the Tablet PC bottom side up, and remove the screws from the memory upgrade module compartment. 4 Slide the cover towards the battery compartment slightly, then lift it and remove it (Figure 38). 5 Remove the memory upgrade module from the static guarded sleeve. 6 Align the memory upgrade module with the part side up. Align the connector edge of the memory upgrade module with the connector slot in the compartment.(Figure 39) 90 - Memory Upgrade Module

Retaining Clip Figure 38. Opening Memory Compartment Figure 39. Installing a Second Memory Module 7 Insert the memory upgrade module at a 45 angle. Press the connector edge of the module firmly down and into the connector until it lodges under the retaining clip. Youll hear a click when it is properly in place. 8 Replace the cover and reinstall the screws. THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE IS NOT SOMETHING YOU ROUTINELY REMOVE FROM YOUR TABLET PC. ONCE IT IS INSTALLED, YOU CAN LEAVE IT IN PLACE UNLESS YOU WANT TO CHANGE SYSTEM MEMORY CAPACITY. 91 - Memory Upgrade Module Removing a Memory Upgrade Module 1 Perform steps 1 through 4 of Installing a Memory Upgrade Module. 2 Pull the clips sideways away from each side of the memory upgrade module at the same time. 3 While holding the clips out, remove the module by lifting it up and pulling it away from your Tablet PC. 4 Store the memory upgrade module in a static guarded sleeve. Replace the cover and reinstall the screws. Checking the Memory Capacity Once you have changed the system memory capacity by replacing the installed module with a larger one, be sure to check that your Tablet PC has recognized the change. If you are in Control Panel Category view, check the memory capacity by clicking [Start] -> Control Panel -> System and Security -> System -> View amount of RAM and processor speed. The amount of memory is displayed next to Memory - RAM:

If you are in one of the icon views, check the memory capacity by clicking [Start] -> Control Panel

-> System. The amount of memory is displayed next to Memory - RAM:

There may be a variation between the actual memory size and what is displayed. This is possible if your system is configured with an integrated Intel Graphics Media Accelerator which dynamically allocates system memory to accelerate graphics performance. IF THE TOTAL MEMORY DISPLAYED IS INCORRECT, CHECK THAT YOUR MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED. (IF THE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED AND THE CAPACITY IS STILL NOT CORRECTLY RECOGNIZED, SEE TROUBLESHOOTING ON PAGE 105. 92 - Memory Upgrade Module

Media Holder Tray Emergency Tray Release Figure 40. Optical Drive Media Tray Eject Button Optical Drive There is a variety of media available to use with your Multi-Format DVD Writer, also known as an optical drive. DVD-R and DVD-RW discs hold up to 4.7 GB of data (DVD-R discs used with Multi-Format Dual-Layer DVD writer hold up to 8.5 GB). A DVD-R disc can only be written to once; DVD-RW discs can be written to over and over. DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be played on most standard players.CD-R and CD-RW discs hold up to 700 MB of data. A CD-R disc can only be written to once; CD-RW discs can be written to over and over. Your system contains the following optical drive:

Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer: This drive allows you to access movies, software, and audio DVD/CDs as well as to read and write to CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-RW, DVD+RW, and DVD RAM discs. The dual-layer architecture allows you to record up to 8.5 GB of data on DVD+R discs. Media Player Software With the Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer and media player software you can play DVD movies and music CDs on your notebook. The media player includes controls which allow you to take full advantage of the features of a DVD movie, as well as standard features such as fast forward, fast reverse, pause, etc. With this drive you can also burn onto recordable DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW, or CD-R/RW discs. 93 - Optical Drive

DO NOT OPERATE YOUR OPTICAL DRIVE UNLESS YOUR LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK IS SITTING ON A FLAT SURFACE. USING A DRIVE WHEN THE SYSTEM IS NOT LEVEL MAY DAMAGE THE DRIVE OR PREVENT PROPER OPERATION. PROLONGED USE OF THE OPTICAL DRIVE, SUCH AS WATCHING A DVD MOVIE, WILL SUBSTANTIALLY REDUCE YOUR BATTERY LIFE IF NO EXTERNAL POWER SOURCE IS ATTACHED. Loading Media on Your Drive To load a disc into your optical drive:

1 Push and release the eject button on the front of the optical drive to open the holder tray. The tray will come out of the LIFEBOOK notebook a short distance. 2 Gently pull the tray out until a media disc can easily be placed in the tray.

YOU SHOULD PERIODICALLY CHECK THE FUJITSU WEBSITE AT US.FUJITSU.COM/COMPUTERS FOR THE MOST CURRENT DRIVERS.

ALL LIFEBOOK DVD PLAYERS ARE SET TO PLAY DVD TITLES WITH REGION CODE NUMBER 1 WHICH IS SPECIFIED FOR THE NORTH AMERICAN MARKET. THE REGION NUMBER IS A REGIONAL RESTRICTION CODE DEFINED BY THE DVD FORUM ACTING ON HOLLYWOOD REQUIREMENTS. DIFFERENT REGION CODES ARE RECORDED ON VIDEO DVD TITLES FOR PUBLICATION IN DIFFERENT AREAS OF THE WORLD. IF THE REGIONAL CODE OF THE DVD PLAYER DOES NOT MATCH THE REGIONAL CODES ON THE TITLES, THEN PLAYBACK IS IMPOSSIBLE.

YOU CAN CHANGE THE REGION CODE ON THE DVD PLAYER USING THE PROPERTIES MENU OF THE DVD SOFTWARE. NOTE, HOWEVER, THAT YOU CAN ONLY CHANGE THE REGION CODE UP TO FOUR TIMES. AFTER THE 4TH CHANGE, THE LAST CODE ENTERED BECOMES PERMANENT, AND CANNOT BE CHANGED. 3 Place the media into the tray, label side up, with the hole in the center of the disc. Snap the disc onto the raised circle in the center of the tray. 94 - Optical Drive

4 Gently push the holder tray back in until you hear a click IF YOU HAVE DISABLED THE AUTO INSERT NOTIFICATION FUNCTION, YOU WILL HAVE TO START THE DRIVE EITHER BY USING MY COMPUTER OR FROM WITHIN WINDOWS EXPLORER, SINCE YOUR NOTEBOOK WILL NOT AUTOMATICALLY RECOGNIZE THAT MEDIA HAS BEEN LOADED. b. a. c. d. Figure 41. Loading/Ejecting Media 95 - Optical Drive Removing Media 1 Push and release the eject button on the front of the optical drive. This will stop the drive and the holder tray will come out of the LIFEBOOK notebook a short distance. 2 Gently pull the tray out until the disc can easily be removed from the tray. 3 Carefully remove the media disc from the holder tray. 4 Gently push the holder tray back in until you hear a click. Emergency Optical Drive Tray Release If for some reason the eject button fails, you can open the media tray with a paper clip or similar tool inserted into the eject hole in the right side of the front of the tray. Straighten one side of a paper clip and push it gently into the hole. The tray will pop out. Using the Media Player Software Figure 42. Emergency Tray Release DEPENDING UPON ITS CONFIGURATION, YOUR SYSTEM MAY NOT HAVE THE MEDIA PLAYER SOFTWARE PRE-INSTALLED. IF IT IS NOT INSTALLED, REFERENCE THE DOCUMENTATION THAT ACCOMPANIES THE MEDIA APPLICATION. 96 - Optical Drive Starting a DVD Movie 1 Insert the DVD into the optical drive of the notebook. If the CD AutoRun feature activates, skip Step 2. 2 The first time you insert a movie into the DVD/CD-RW tray, you will be prompted to select what you want the system to do when discs are inserted (e.g., start automatically or wait for a prompt). Until you make a selection, you will receive the same prompt whenever you insert a disc. 3 Click OK to close the About DVD Player Performance dialog box and the movie will begin. Opening the Media Player Control Panel With most DVD-ROMs, you have the option of altering how the movie should play and what you wish to view. You can do this by using the media player control panel and the mouse. 1 Right-click on the movie screen to open a dropdown menu for options. 2 Select View, then Player for all controls available. This will open the control panel at the bottom of the screen. Using the Media Player Control Panel The media player software allows you to watch the movie much like a VCR player. You can pause, rewind, fast-forward and stop the movie at any point. 1 To pause the movie, click the on-screen button. 2 To rewind the movie, click the button to rewind to a specific portion of the movie, or the button to return to the opening screen. 3 To fast-forward the movie, click the button to forward to a specific portion of the movie, or the button to jump to the ending credits. 4 To stop the movie, click the button. Exiting the Media Player 1 Click the located in the upper right corner of the title bar. This will open a media player dialog box. 2 Click Yes to stop and exit the movie, or No to close the media player dialog box and return to the movie. 97 - Optical Drive Using Media Player on Battery Power Since optical drives consume a lot of power, your overall battery life will be significantly shorter when operating the optical drive continuously (such as watching a DVD movie) than during standard operation.

MANY MOVIE RUN-TIMES ARE LONGER THAN YOUR SYSTEM CAN SUPPORT ON A SINGLE BATTERY. IF YOU ARE WATCHING A DVD MOVIE ON BATTERY POWER YOU MAY NEED TO SWAP IN AN ADDITIONAL, CHARGED BATTERY OR ATTACH AC POWER DURING THE MOVIE TO VIEW IT IN ITS ENTIRETY. AN ADDITIONAL FULLY-CHARGED BATTERY IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED IF YOU WILL BE WATCHING DVD MOVIES ON BATTERY POWER. IF YOU DONT HAVE AN ADDITIONAL BATTERY, YOU MAY PURCHASE ONE EITHER ONLINE AT: HTTP://WWW.COMPUTERS.US.FUJITSU.COM OR BY CALLING 1-877-372-3473. To Watch a Movie on Battery Power:

1 Have an additional full-charged battery or your AC adapter ready for use. 2 Start watching your DVD movie. 3 When the low battery warning occurs, immediately stop the movie and exit the media player. IF YOU DO NOT STOP THE MEDIA PLAYER QUICKLY AND THE LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK ATTEMPTS TO AUTO-SUSPEND (CRITICAL BATTERY LOW STATE) THE LIFEBOOK NOTEBOOK WILL SHUT DOWN IMPROPERLY. IF THIS OCCURS, YOU MAY NEED TO PERFORM A HARD RESET AND FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS, IF ANY, PRESENTED TO YOU BEFORE THE SYSTEM WILL REBOOT. 4 Power down your notebook and replace the discharged battery with an additional fully-charged battery. If you do not have an additional battery, you may attach AC power as soon as you see the low battery warning. 5 Resume operation by pressing the Suspend button again. This is not required if you attached AC power without entering standby mode. 6 Restart your media player, locate and skip to the chapter of the movie you were last watching, then continue watching your DVD movie. SOME SHORTER DVD MOVIES MAY NOT REQUIRE YOU TO SWAP BATTERIES OR ATTACH AC POWER TO COMPLETE THEM. HOWEVER, IT IS BEST TO BE PREPARED SINCE ACTUAL BATTERY LIFE WHILE OPERATING THE OPTICAL DRIVE CANNOT BE GUARANTEED. 98 - Optical Drive

Device Ports Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and the optional Port Replicator come equipped with multiple ports to which you can connect external devices including: disk drives, keyboards, printers, etc. Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack The internal LAN (RJ-45) jack is used for a Gigabit (10Base-T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T) Ethernet LAN connection. You may need to configure your Tablet PC to work with your particular network. (Please refer to your network administrator for information on your network configuration.) To connect the LAN cable follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 3 Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN outlet. LAN Connector Figure 43. Connecting the LAN Port Replicator Connector The port replicator connector located on the bottom of your system is used for the connection of your Tablet PC to an optional port replicator. (See Figure 6 for location). In order to connect your Tablet PC to this device, follow the instructions that came with your port replicator. 99 - Device Ports Universal Serial Bus Ports The Universal Serial Bus (USB) ports allow you to connect USB devices such as external game pads, pointing devices, keyboards and/or speakers. There are two USB 2.0 ports and one USB 3.0 port on your Tablet PC: one on the left side and two on the rear.Note that the TBD USB 2.0 port is also a USB Anytime Charge port.

In order to connect a USB device follow these steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. Figure 44. Connecting a USB Device THERE ARE THREE DIFFERENT TYPES OF USB PORTS ON THIS SYSTEM: USB 3.0, USB 2.0, AND USB 2.0 ANYTIME CHARGE. TO DIFFERENTIATE BETWEEN THEM, PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING:

THE INSIDE OF A USB 3.0 PORT IS BLUE IN COLOR. THE ICON ASSOCIATED WITH THE ANYTIME USB CHARGE PORT HAS A PLUG ICON NEXT TO THE USB ICON. DUE TO THE ONGOING CHANGES IN USB TECHNOLOGY AND STANDARDS, NOT ALL USB DEVICES AND/OR DRIVERS ARE GUARANTEED TO WORK. 100 - Device Ports

IEEE 1394 Port The 4-pin 1394 port allows you to connect digital devices that are compliant with IEEE 1394 standard. The IEEE 1394 standard is easy to use, connect, and disconnect. This port can allow up to 400 Mbps transfer rate. A third-party application may be required to operate your device with the 1394 port. THE 1394 PORT USED IN THIS SYSTEM USES A FOUR-PIN CONFIGURATION. IF YOU INTEND TO INTERFACE WITH DEVICES WHICH USE A SIX-PIN CONFIGURATION, YOU WILL NEED TO PURCHASE AN ADAPTER.

In order to connect a 1394 device, follow these steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. IEEE 1394 Connector Figure 45. Connecting an IEEE1394 Device 101 - Device Ports Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to connect headphones or powered external speakers to your Tablet PC. Your headphones or speakers must be equipped with a 1/8 (3.5 mm) stereo mini-plug. In order to connect headphones or speakers follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. Microphone Jack The microphone jack allows you to connect an external microphone. Your microphone must be equipped with a 1/8(3.5 mm) mono mini-plug in order to fit into the microphone jack of your Tablet PC. In order to connect a microphone follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening and push the connector into the port until it is seated. 102 - Device Ports HDMI Port The High-Definition Multimedia Interface

(HDMI) port is a digital audio/video interface over which uncompressed streams can be transmitted. HDMI is used to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as big-screen TVs and video recorders). See the note on the next page regarding the steps for selecting the HDMI device using keyboard shortcuts. To connect an HDMI device:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. HDMI Connector HDMI Port Figure 46. Connecting an HDMI device External Video Port The external video port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector. In order to connect an external video device, follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 3 Tighten the two hold-down screws, located on each end of the connector. 103 - Device Ports PRESSING THE [FN] + [F10] KEYS ALLOWS YOU TO CHANGE YOUR SELECTION OF WHERE TO SEND YOUR DISPLAY VIDEO. THE ORDER IS DETERMINED BY WHICH TYPE OF EXTERNAL VIDEO DEVICE(S) IS CONNECTED. EACH TIME YOU PRESS THE KEY COMBINATION, YOU WILL STEP TO THE NEXT CHOICE. IF YOU ONLY HAVE AN EXTERNAL CRT CONNECTED, THE ORDER IS: INTERNAL DISPLAY -> EXTERNAL CRT -> SIMULTANEOUS DISPLAY -> INTERNAL DISPLAY. IF YOU ONLY HAVE AN HDMI DEVICE CONNECTED, THE ORDER IS: INTERNAL DISPLAY -> HDMI DISPLAY ->

SIMULTANEOUS DISPLAY -> INTERNAL DISPLAY. IF YOU HAVE EXTERNAL CRT AND HDMI DEVICES CONNECTED, THE ORDER IS:

INTERNAL DISPLAY -> EXTERNAL CRT ->

SIMULTANEOUS INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL CRT -> HDMI DISPLAY - SIMULTANEOUS INTERNAL AND HDMI DISPLAY ->

INTERNAL DISPLAY. IF YOU HAVE AN EXTERNAL CRT AND DVI DEVICES CONNECTED TO THE PORT REPLICATOR, THE ORDER IS: INTERNAL DISPLAY -> EXTERNAL CRT ->

SIMULTANEOUS INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL CRT -> DVI DISPLAY -> SIMULTANEOUS INTERNAL AND DVI DISPLAY. -> INTERNAL DISPLAY. External Video Port External Video Cable Figure 47. Connecting an External Video Device 104 - Device Ports Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Your LIFEBOOK Troubleshooting There may be occasions when you encounter simple setup or operating problems that you can solve on the spot, or problems with peripheral devices that can be solved by replacing the device. The information in this section helps you isolate and resolve some of these straightforward issues and identify failures that require service. Identifying the Problem If you encounter a problem, go through the following procedure before pursuing complex troubleshooting:

1 Turn off your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 2 Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into your Tablet PC and to an active AC power source. 3 Make sure that any card installed in the ExpressCard slot is seated properly. You can also remove the card from the slot, thus eliminating it as a possible cause of failure. 4 Make sure that any devices connected to the external connectors are plugged in properly. You can also disconnect such devices, thus eliminating them as possible causes of failure. 5 Turn on your Tablet PC. Make sure it has been off at least 10 seconds before you turn it back on. 6 Go through the boot sequence. 105 7 If the problem has not been resolved, refer to the Troubleshooting Table, that follows, for more detailed troubleshooting information. IF YOU KEEP NOTES ABOUT WHAT YOU HAVE TRIED, YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE MAY BE ABLE TO HELP YOU MORE QUICKLY BY GIVING ADDITIONAL SUGGESTIONS OVER THE PHONE. 8 If you have tried the solutions suggested in the Troubleshooting Table without success, contact your support representative:

Toll free: 1-800-8Fujitsu (1-800-838-5487) E-mail: 8fujitsu@us.fujitsu.com Web site: http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/support. Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:

Product name

Product configuration number

Product serial number

Purchase date

Conditions under which the problem occurred

Any error messages that have occurred

Type of device connected, if any See the Configuration Label on the bottom of your Tablet PC for configuration and serial numbers. 106 - Troubleshooting Specific Problems Using the Troubleshooting Table When you have problems with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC, try to find the symptoms under the Problem column of the troubleshooting table for the feature giving you difficulty. You will find a description of common causes for that symptom under the column Possible Cause and what, if anything, you can do to correct the condition under Possible Solutions. All possible causes or solutions may not apply to your Tablet PC. Troubleshooting Table ProblemPage ProblemPage Audio Problems . page 108 USB Device Problems . page 110 Optical Drive Problems. page 108 ExpressCard Problems . page 111 Port Replicator Problems . page 109 Power Failures . page 111 Hard Drive Problems . page 109 Shutdown and Startup Problems. page 113 Keyboard or Mouse Problems . page 110 Video Problems . page 114 Memory Problems . page 110 Miscellaneous Problems . page 116 107 - Troubleshooting Problem Audio Problems Possible Cause Possible Solutions There is no sound coming from the built-in speaker. The volume is turned too low. The software volume control is set too low. Adjust the volume control on your Tablet PC and operating system. Use the [Fn+F9] key combination on your keyboard. Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your Tablet PC. Manually adjusting the volume (i.e., keyboard "hot keys") should dynamically adjust the volume of the operating sys-

tem (see above). If that doesnt work, adjust the sound vol-

ume control settings in your software or application. Headphones are plugged into your Tablet PC. Plugging in headphones disables the built-in speakers. Remove the headphones. BIOS audio settings are incor-

rect. Set the BIOS setup utility to the default values within the Mul-

timedia Device Configuration menu. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 72. Software driver is not configured correctly. The speakers have been muted using the Volume icon in the system tray. The audio driver may be installed or reinstalled using the Drivers and Applications CD that came with your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK. Refer to your application and operating system documentation for help. Click the Volume icon in the system tray on the bottom right of the screen. (It looks like a speaker). If the Mute box has a red circle on it, click on it to unselect it. You can also use the

[Fn+F3] key combination to toggle the volume on and off. Pressing [F3] while holding [Fn] will toggle the audio mute. Optical Drive Problems (optional external device) LIFEBOOK Tablet PC fails to recognize DVD/CD-

RW/CD-ROMs. The disc is not pushed down onto raised center circle of the drive. Incorrect DVD Player or no DVD Player software is installed. 108 - Troubleshooting Open optical drive tray and re-install the disc properly. Install DVD Player software. (See Media Player Software on page 93 for more information.) Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions LIFEBOOK Tablet PC fails to recognize DVD/CD-

RW/CD-ROMs. Optical drive tray is not latched shut.

(continued) Wrong drive designator was used for the disc in the appli-

cation. Push on the front of the optical drive tray until it latches. If that doesnt work, pull out the modular drive latch to remove the device from the bay, then re-insert the drive until it latched; this ensures that the drive is properly seated. Verify the drive designator used by the application is the same as the one used by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a DVD/CD, drive designa-

tions are automatically adjusted. Note that the drive designa-

tion can be changed with the Disk Management tool located at Administrative Tools -> Computer Management. DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM is dirty or defective. Wipe the disc with a non-abrasive CD cleaning cloth and reinsert. If it still will not work try another DVD/CD-RW/CD-

ROM in the drive. The drive access indicator on the Status Indicator Panel blinks regularly with no disc in the tray or the drive is not installed. Port Replicator Problems The Windows auto insertion function is active and is checking to see if a disc is ready to run. This is normal. However, you may disable this feature. Note: Be sure to power down your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC before adding a printer to the Port Replicator parallel port. Tablet PC does not turn on when installed in the optional Port Replicator Port Replicator AC adapter is not plugged in. Tablet PC is not properly seated in the Port Replicator. Provide power to the Port Replicator. Remove and re-dock your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Hard Drive Problems You cannot access your hard drive. The wrong drive designator was used by an application when a bootable disc was used to start the Tablet PC. 109 - Troubleshooting Verify drive designator used by application is in use by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a CD, drive designations are automatically adjusted. Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions You cannot access your hard drive.

(continued) Security is set so your operat-

ing system cannot be started without a password. Keyboard or Mouse Problems Verify your password and security settings. The built-in keyboard does not seem to work. The Tablet PC has gone into Sleep mode. Push the Power/Suspend/Resume switch. You have installed an external keyboard or mouse, and it does not seem to work. You have connected an external keyboard or a mouse and it seems to be locking up the system. Memory Problems Your System screen in the Control Panel does not show the correct amount of installed memory. USB Device Problems Your system does not rec-

ognize a USB device you have installed, or the device does not seem to work properly. Your application has locked out your keyboard. Try to use your integrated pointing device to restart your sys-

tem. Your external device is not properly installed. Your operating system is not set up with correct software driver for that device. Your operating system is not setup with correct software driver for that device. Re-install your device. See Device Ports on page 99. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Your system has crashed. Try to restart your Tablet PC. Your memory upgrade mod-

ule is not properly installed. Remove and re-install your memory upgrade module. See Memory Upgrade Module on page 90. You have a memory failure. Check for Power On Self Test (POST) messages. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 117. The device is not properly installed. Remove and re-install the device. See Device Ports on page 99. 110 - Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Your system does not rec-

ognize a USB device you have installed, or the device does not seem to work properly.

(continued) ExpressCard Problems A card inserted in the ExpressCard slot does not work or is locking up the system. Power Failures You turn on your LIFE-

BOOK Tablet PC and noth-

ing seems to happen. The device may have been installed while an application was running, so your system is not aware of its installation. Close the application and restart your Tablet PC. Your device may not have the correct software driver active. See your software documentation and activate the correct driver. Card is not properly installed. Remove and re-install the card. See ExpressCards on page 88. Card may have been installed while an application was run-

ning, so your Tablet PC is not aware of its installation. Close the application and restart your Tablet PC. Your software may not have the correct driver active. See your software documentation and activate the correct driver. The installed battery is com-

pletely discharged or there is no Power adapter (AC or Auto/Airline) installed. The battery is installed but is faulty. The battery is low. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 30. Install a charged battery or a Power adapter. Use the Status Indicator panel to verify the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 30. If the battery indicates a short, remove it and operate from another power source or replace that battery. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 30. Use a Power adapter to operate until a battery is charged or install a charged battery. 111 - Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions You turn on your LIFE-

BOOK Tablet PC and noth-

ing seems to happen.

(continued) The power adapter (AC or auto/airline) is not plugged in properly. Verify that your adapter is connected correctly. See Power Sources on page 68. The power adapter (AC or auto/airline) has no power from the AC outlet, airplane jack, or car cigarette lighter. Move the AC cord to a different outlet, check for a line switch or tripped circuit breaker for the AC outlet. If you are using an auto/airline adapter in a car make sure the ignition switch is in the On or Accessories position. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC turns off all by itself. The power adapter (AC or auto/airline) is faulty. The power management parameters are set for auto timeouts which are too short for your operating needs. You ignored a low battery alarm until the battery entered Dead Battery Suspend mode. You have a battery failure. Try a different power adapter. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Sus-

pend/Resume switch. Check your power management set-

tings, or close your applications and go to the Power Options located in the Control Panel to adjust the timeout values to better suit your needs. Install a power adapter, then push the Power/Sus-

pend/Resume switch. See Power Sources on page 68. Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel. If the battery is shorted, replace or remove it. See Status Indicator Panel on page 30. Your power adapter has failed or lost its power source. Make sure the adapter is plugged in and the outlet has power. Your Tablet PC will not work on battery alone. The installed battery is dead. Replace the battery with a charged one or install a power adapter. No battery is installed. Install a charged battery. The battery is improperly installed. 112 - Troubleshooting Verify that the battery is properly connected by re-installing it. Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions Your Tablet PC will not work on battery alone.

(continued) Your installed battery is faulty. Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel and replace or remove any batteries that are shorted. See Status Indicator Panel on page 30. The battery seems to discharge too quickly. The power savings features may be disabled. Check the Power Options menu settings and adjust accord-

ing to your operating needs. Use a power adapter for this application when at all possible. Youre running an application that uses a lot of power due to frequent optical drive access, or use of a LAN ExpressCard, WLAN, or Bluetooth device. The brightness is turned all the way up. Turn down the brightness adjustment. The higher the bright-

ness the more power your display uses. The battery is very old. Replace the battery. The battery was exposed to high temperatures. The battery is too hot or too cold. Shutdown and Startup Problems The Suspend/Resume button does not work. Suspend/Resume button is disabled. Replace the battery. Restore the Tablet PC to normal operating temperature. Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when battery is outside of operating range. To enable the button, go to the Control Panel -> Power Options and click on the Advanced tab. In the Power buttons area, select the Change what the power button does option. There may be application software. conflict Close all applications and try the button again. The system powers up and displays power on information, but fails to load the operating system. You have a secured system requiring a password to load your operating system. Make sure you have the right password. Enter the setup util-

ity and verify the Security settings and modify them as accordingly. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 72. 113 - Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions The system powers up, and displays power on information, but fails to load the operating system.

(continued) The boot sequence settings of the setup utility are not compatible with your configu-

ration. Set the operating source by pressing the [ESC] key while the Fujitsu logo is on screen or use the [F2] key and enter the setup utility and adjust the source settings from the Boot menu. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 72. Internal hard drive was not detected. Use the BIOS setup utility to try to auto detect the internal hard drive. An error message is dis-

played on the screen dur-

ing the boot sequence. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a problem. Your Tablet PC appears to change setup parameters when you start it. BIOS setup changes were not saved when made and you exited the setup utility. See the Power On Self Test (POST) messages to determine the meaning and severity of the problem. Not all messages are errors; some are simply status indicators. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 117. Make sure you select Save Changes And Exit when exiting the BIOS setup utility. The BIOS CMOS hold-up bat-

tery has failed. Contact your support representative for repairs. This is not a user serviceable part but has a normal life of 3 to 5 years. Your system display wont turn on when the system is turned on or has resumed. You have installed the LIFE-

BOOK/Security Application panel. Check the Status Indicator Panel for presence of the Security icon. If it is visible, enter your password See Status Indicator Panel on page 30. Video Problems The built-in display is blank when you turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Display angle and brightness settings are not adequate for your lighting conditions. Move the display and the brightness control until you have adequate visibility. Pressing either the [F6] or [F7] keys while holding down the [Fn] key also allows you to change the brightness level of the display. Power management timeouts are set for short intervals and you didnt see the display go on and off again. Press a keyboard button or move the mouse to restore oper-

ation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume switch.

(The display may be shut off by Sleep mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) 114 - Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions The built-in display is blank when you turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC.

(continued) The Tablet PC turned on with a series of beeps and the built-in display is blank. The display goes blank by itself after you have been using it. Your display wont turn on when the system is turned on or when it has resumed. The display does not close. The Tablet PC is set for an external monitor only. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a failure which does not allow the display to operate. The Tablet PC has gone into Video timeout, Sleep mode, or Save-to-Disk mode because you have not used it for a period of time. The power management time-

outs may be set for very short intervals and you failed to notice the display come on and go off again. Pressing [F10] while holding down the [Fn] key allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in order are: built-in display only, external moni-

tor only, both built-in display and external monitor. Contact your support representative. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Sus-

pend/Resume switch. Check your power management set-

tings, or close your applications and go to the Power Savings menu of the setup utility to adjust the timeout values to better suit your operation needs. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 72. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Sus-

pend/Resume switch. (The display may be shut off by Sleep Mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) The system may be pass-

word-protected. Check the status indicator panel to verify that the Security icon is blinking. If it is blinking, enter your password. A foreign object, such as a paper clip, is stuck between the display and keyboard. Remove all foreign objects from the keyboard. 115 - Troubleshooting Problem Possible Cause Possible Solutions The display has bright or dark spots. If the spots are very tiny and few in number, this is normal for a large LCD display. If the spots are numerous or large enough to interfere with your operation needs. This is normal; do nothing. Display is faulty; contact your support representative. The Display is dark when on battery power. The Power Management util-

ity default is set on low bright-

ness to conserve power. Press [Fn] + [F7] to increase brightness or click the battery gauge, click on More power options, and select Adjust the display brightness. You have connected an external monitor and it does not display any infor-

mation. Your BIOS setup is not set to enable your external monitor. Toggle the video destination by pressing [Fn]+ [F10] together, or check your BIOS setup and enable your external monitor.

(See the Video Features submenu, located within the Advanced Menu of the BIOS. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 72. Your external monitor is not properly installed. Reinstall your device. See External Video Port on page 103. Your operating system is not setup with the correct soft-

ware driver for that device. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. You have connected an external monitor and it does not come on. Your external monitor is not compatible with your LIFE-

BOOK Tablet PC. See your monitor documentation and the External Monitor Support portions of the Specifications section. See Specifi-

cations on page 136. Miscellaneous Problems Error message is dis-

played on the screen dur-

ing the operation of an application. Application software often has its own set of error message displays. See your application manual and help displays screens for more information. Not all messages are errors some may simply be status. 116 - Troubleshooting Power On Self Test Messages The following is a list of error-and-status messages that the Phoenix BIOS and/or your operating system can generate and an explanation of each message. Error messages are marked with an *. If an error message is displayed that is not in this list, write it down and check the operating system documentation on screen and in the manual. If you can find no reference to the message, contact a support representative.

*Invalid NVRAM Data Problem with NVRAM access. In the unlikely case that you see this message you may have a display problem. You can continue operating but should contact your support representative for more information.

*Keyboard controller error The keyboard controller test failed. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.

*Keyboard not detected Keyboard not working. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.

*Operating system not found Operating system cannot be located on either drive A: or drive C: Enter the setup utility and see if both the fixed disk, and drive A: are properly identified and that the boot sequence is set correctly. Unless you have changed your installation greatly, the operating system should be on drive C:. If the setup utility is correctly set, your hard drive may be corrupted.

*Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP Displayed after any recoverable error message. Press [F1] key to Continue or [F2] key to Enter Setup.

*Real time clock error - Check date and time settings Real-time clock fails BIOS test. May require board repair. Contact your support representative.

*Fan error, system shutdown in 30s. Contact Fujitsu tech support Fan error occurred. Please contact your sales representative.

*Fan error occurred during previous boot. Fan error occurred during previous boot. Please contact your sales representative. 117 - Troubleshooting Restoring Your Pre-installed Software It is very important that you create DVD copies of your Factory Image before beginning to use your system. To do so, follow the instructions below in the Saving Your Factory Image section. Along with instructions on saving your Factory Image, this document outlines several other important procedures, such as making a system image, restoring your Factory Image and system images, managing your images, and restoring the partitions on a hard drive. IN ORDER TO INSTALL APPLICATIONS AND DRIVERS, MAKE COPIES OF FACTORY AND SYSTEM IMAGES, AND BURN DRIVERS AND APPLICATION RESTORE DISCS, APPLICATION MEDIA, AND BOOTABLE DISCS YOU MUST HAVE AN INTERNAL OR EXTERNALLY CONNECTED WRITABLE DVD DRIVE. IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT YOU COPY YOUR FACTORY IMAGE TO REMOVABLE MEDIA (E.G., DVD DISCS). FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN AN INABILITY TO RESTORE THE IMAGE AT A FUTURE DATE.

WE RECOMMEND THAT YOU USE DVD-R OR DVD+R DISCS FOR YOUR BACKUP, BUT SUPPORTED MEDIA* FOR IMAGE BACKUPS INCLUDE: FOR FACTORY IMAGE, DAR, APPLICATION DATA, AND BOOTABLE DISC: DVD-R/+R. FOR USER-CREATED BACKUP IMAGE: DVD-R/+R, DVD-RW/+RW, DVD-DL.

* DEPENDING UPON YOUR OPTICAL DRIVE AND MEDIA FORMAT USED, SOME MEDIA TYPES MAY BE INCOMPATIBLE FOR CREATING IMAGE BACKUPS. DUE TO CERTAIN LICENSING REQUIREMENTS, SOME THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED SEPARATELY USING THE APPLICATION MEDIA BUNDLED WITH YOUR SYSTEM. Saving your Factory Image When you purchased your system, a copy of the pre-installed Factory Image was loaded into a hidden partition on your hard disk drive. Having a copy of the original Factory Image available to you means that in the event of system failure, you will be able to restore it to its original state. 118 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software

After you launch the ClickMe! utility when you first start up your system, you should make a copy of the Factory Image to DVD discs. You will need several blank discs (DVD-R or DVD+R discs are recommended) in order to create the copy. After creating the copy, be sure to label the discs and keep them in a safe place to ensure they do not get damaged. Creating Backup Images of Factory Image, DAR, and Discs SOME CONFIGURATIONS OF CERTAIN LIFEBOOK MODELS DO NOT HAVE APPLICATIONS LOADED ON THE HARD DRIVE; RATHER, THEY ARE LOADED ON THE DAR DISC. PLEASE TAKE THAT INTO ACCOUNT WHEN READING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES. Using the [Manage/Change] button, you can create backup images of the Factory Image, DAR, Application Disc, or Bootable Disc. 1 Launch My Recovery from the desktop icon. 2 Select [Manage/Create] -> [Backup Images] The Backup Images menu displays a list from which you can choose which type of disc you want to burn:

Bootable Disc, Drivers and Applications Restore Disc, Application Disc, or Recovery Disc. 3 Select Recovery Disc, then click [Make DVD]

4 Confirm that the # box has 2 (Note that in some cases the box may display a larger number for the factory image, depending upon its size.) 5 The message Recovery Disc #1. will be created. Enter your comments and number of media on the DVD. Click [YES] to burn the Factory Image. IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, DO NOT USE THE SYSTEM UNTIL THE COPY IS COMPLETE. 6 While the copy is being made, a Writing to the media screen displays a progress bar. When the copy is complete, a dialog will appear informing you of the successful completion of the backup. 119 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 7 Repeat the process for the remaining three images on disc (Bootable Disc, Drivers and Applications Restore Disc, and Application Disc). The number of images available may vary depending on your system model; some models do not have the applications loaded on the hard drive. Recovering Your Factory Image In the event you need to restore your original Factory Image, perform the following steps. Note that there may be some third-party applications that need to be installed from the application media bundled with your system. ALL USER-CREATED DATA WILL BE DELETED FROM YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE FACTORY IMAGE IS RESTORED. In order to recover your Factory Image, perform the steps outlined in Running Recovery and Utility from hard disk on page 3. Backing Up a System Image User-Configured System Backups: On your desktop, there is a [MyRecovery] icon that allows you to make backups of your current system image either to another location on your hard drive or on removable media. A system image is the configuration of your C: drive at a particular point of time. You may want to make system image backups occasionally in order to have points to which you can return without having to go all the way back to the Factory Image. My Recovery By default, system images are saved in the D: drive in the MyRecovery folder. You can also elect to save the image to an external hard drive. 1 Click the [MyRecovery] icon on your desktop. 2 Click the [Backup] button on the MyRecovery screen. 3 On the next screen that appears, you can enter up to 200 characters of information about the backup file. This information will help you to identify the image at a later date. 4 Click the [OK] button and the system will reboot. 120 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 5 After rebooting, the Creating of the backup image window appears, in which you can either click [Create the image on D drive] or [Select the drive] if you want to save to an external hard disk drive. 6 An image appears showing you graphically how the image will be stored. Click the [Next] button. 7 Click [Execute] to start the backup. 121 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software Managing Your Backup Images With the MyRecovery tool you can also make copies of backup images, archive them on DVD, or delete them from your hard drive. 1 To begin, click the [MyRecovery] icon on your desktop. 2 Click the [Manage/Create] button in the MyRecovery window. 3 When the MyRecovery Manager window appears, click [Manage Backup Images]. 4 In the next window, a list of your backup images appears. Below the list are three buttons allowing you to [Make DVD], [Copy], or [Delete] your backup images. 5 Select an image title from the list, then click the action button you would like to perform. 6 Note that you need to have an external disk drive connected for the [Copy] button to be enabled. If you elect to copy the image, you will be prompted to enter the destination. If you are ready to copy, click [OK] to proceed. A progress screen appears while the backup copy is being made. 7 Note that if you copy an image to an external hard drive, both the original and the copy will appear in the [Backup Images] window with identical names, dates, and file sizes, but with the different drive letter to distinguish them. Before you select [Make DVD], be sure you have a recordable DVD drive connected and blank DVDs available. Using the Recovery and Utility Tools The Recovery and Utility tools consist of a variety of tools that will help you recover your Factory Image, recover system images, and delete the data from your hard disk. Methods for accessing the utilities Recovery and Utility Tools are preinstalled in a hidden partition by the factory, or they can be accessed by using the bootable disc. Please note that you can delete Recovery and Utility tools from your hard disk drive if you modify the partitions. In this case you will not be able to use the hidden partition for booting to Recovery and Utility Tools, but you will still be able to boot from the disc. Determining whether Recovery and Utility is pre-loaded 1 Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press [F12] key. 122 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 2 From the Boot Menu that appears, check whether the <Recovery and Utility> option is present. If it is not present, it means that the utility must be used from the disc. Proceed to Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable Disc if <Recovery and Utility> is unavailable. Running Recovery and Utility from hard disk 1 Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press [F12] key. 2 Cursor down to <Recovery and Utility> and press the [Enter] key. 3 While the files are being loaded from the disc, a progress bar will appear at the bottom of the screen. 4 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 5 When the Operating System dialog appears, select Use recovery tools..., then click [Next]. 6 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 7 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on Recovery and Utility. 8 The Recovery and Utility screen appears on the screen with three tabs: Diagnostics, Recovery and Utility. Please note that Diagnostics tab is not supported on certain LIFEBOOK/Stylistic models when running Recovery and Utility from the hard disk. In order to restore the operating system, please use the middle icon Restoring the Factory Image (only C:\drive) under the Recovery tab. Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable disc To verify/change boot-up priority (rather than booting-up from a hard drive or external floppy drive), perform the following steps:

THE BOOTABLE DISC CAN ONLY BE USED WITH THE SYSTEM WITH WHICH IT WAS PURCHASED. 1 Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. press the [F12] key. 2 Select the Boot Menu from the menu that appears. 3 Highlight the CD/DVD option and move it to the top of the list using the up arrow. 4 Insert the bootable disc into the drive tray. 5 Click [OK]. While the files are being loaded from the disc, a progress bar will appear at the bottom of the screen. 123 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 6 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 7 When the Operating System dialog appears, click [Next]. 8 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 9 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on Recovery and Utility. 10 When the Recovery and Utility screen appears, three tabs will be present: Diagnostics, Recovery, and Utility. Recovery and Utility tabs Diagnostics tab: The Diagnostics tool is designed for use by IT professionals. It is not likely you will need to use this tool. When you select devices from the Diagnosis window then click [Execute], several tests are performed on the selected components. Recovery tab: The Recovery tab contains three tools: Recovering User-Configured System Backups, Restoring the Factory Image (only C: drive), and Restoring the Factory Image (full hard drive recovery). You can use these tools to restore the Factory Image from the hidden partition, restore backup image(s) you created or images stored on DVD discs, and perform a full hard drive recovery. Refer to instructions above for details on how to create Factory Image Recovery DVDs, user backup DVDs and system image backup. Utility tab: The Utility tab contains three tools: Hard Disk Data Delete, Restore Recovery and Utility, and Windows Complete PC Restore.

The Hard Disk Data Delete utility is used to delete all data on the hard disk and prevent the data from being reused. NOTE: Do not use the Hard Disk Data Delete utility unless you are absolutely certain that you want to erase your entire hard disk, including all partitions.

Restore Recovery and Utility allows you to restore the first hidden partition.

Windows Complete PC Restore utility allows you to restore an image created with Windows Backup and Restore Center. Windows Complete PC Restore will overwrite the data on your hard disk drive. 124 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility

(new or non-bootable hard drive) If you have installed a new hard drive or your hard drive is not bootable, perform the following steps. Note that first you will need to create new partitions on the hard drive, then restore the Factory Image:

1 Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. press the [F12] key. 2 Select the Boot Menu from the menu that appears. 3 Highlight the CD/DVD option and move it to the top of the list using the up arrow.. 4 Insert the bootable disc in your DVD drive, then click [OK]. 5 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on <Recovery and Utility>. 6 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 7 When the Operating System dialog appears, click [Next]. 8 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 9 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on <Recovery and Utility>. 10 Click the Recovery tab in the Recovery and Utility window, then click <Restoring the Factory Image (full hard drive recovery> icon. 11 Click [Execute]. 12 Read the precautions, then select I Agree. 13 Click [Next], then click [Next] to start the recovery process. 14 1. Recovery Disc Check will be in bold and the rest will be grayed out. Follow the instructions and Insert the Recovery Disc #1. In some cases, you may prompted to Insert the Recovery Disc #2, depending upon the size of the Recovery Image 15 Click [Next] to begin the check. Click [Next] again when the check is complete. 16 2. Initializing hard disk drive will be in bold with the message Please insert the Bootable Disc into your optical drive. Insert the bootable disc. Click [Next] to proceed. A dialog box appears, with a checking disc message. 17 Warning All DATA on the Hard Disk will be completely erased!!! will appear. Select [OK]. The partition creation process will begin. 125 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 18 3. Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition will be in bold with the message Please insert the Recovery Disk#1 into the optical drive. Click [Next] to proceed. 19 After completion, the tool will automatically go back to "3.Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition" but will include the note "Please insert your Application Disc(s) starting with #1, then click [OK]. After installation of each disc, insert the next and continue until all have been installed. If you don't have your Application Disc(s) or you have inserted all your application discs. Please click [Cancel] to continue." At this point, you can either:

Insert Application Disc(s) to restore back to hidden partition, or,

Click [Cancel] to skip restoring Application disc(s) and continue with restore. 20 If you select to insert Application Disc, after copying of application disc(s) to hidden partition is completed, the message will appear again. Repeat inserting application disc(s) until all discs have been copied, then click

[Cancel] to continue with Restore. 21 After clicking [Cancel], a confirmation message will appear "If you want to skip copying or copy has been finished, click [OK]. Click [Cancel] to return to Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition."

22 Click [OK] and Restoring Factory Image will begin. 23 When restoration is complete, you will see the message Restoration has been completed. Click [OK] to reboot the computer. Click [OK]. 126 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software

Automatically Downloading Driver Updates Your system has a convenient tool called the Fujitsu Driver Update (FDU) utility. With FDU, you can choose to automatically or manually go to the Fujitsu site to check for new updates for your system. The FDU icon should appear in the system tray at the bottom right of your screen (roll the cursor over the icons to find the correct one). If the icon does not appear in the system tray, go to [Start] -> All Programs, and click on Fujitsu Driver Update; this will create the icon automatically. To invoke the FDU menu, right-click on the FDU icon. The menu contains the following items:

Check for updates now Allows for manual driver update search. The first time it is used, you are prompted to agree to a user agreement. After you click the icon, FDU automatically connects with the Fujitsu site to check for updates and downloads them. While downloading, the icon has a red bar through it, indicating that it cannot be used while the download is in process. When the update is complete, a message appears informing you. Enable Automatic Update Notifications Automatically searches for new updates on a regular basis (approximately every 3 days). Show update history Brings up a screen that displays a history of updates that have been made via the FDU. About Fujitsu Driver Update Displays the FDU version number and copyright information. Fujitsu Driver Update Readme Displays the FDU readme. 127 - Restoring Your Pre-installed Software Chapter 5 Care and Maintenance Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC If you use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC carefully, you will increase its life and reliability. This section provides some tips for looking after the Tablet PC and its devices. THE SYSTEM CONTAINS COMPONENTS THAT CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE

(ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE COMPONENTS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

BEFORE DOCKING OR UNDOCKING YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC (WHEN USING A PORT REPLICATOR), IT IS A GOOD PRACTICE TO ALWAYS TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE OR SLEEP STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM.

WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING A MEMORY MODULE, HOLD IT BY THE EDGE SO AS NOT TO TOUCH ANY CONTACTS OR CHIPS. BE CAREFUL NOT TO TOUCH ANY INTERNAL COMPUTER TERMINALS OR COMPONENTS; THE OIL FROM YOUR FINGERS COULD CAUSE A SHORT TO THE COMPONENTS. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAY BE HAZARDOUS IF MISUSED. OPERATIONS OF THIS PRODUCT OR SIMILAR PRODUCTS, MUST ALWAYS BE SUPERVISED BY AN ADULT. DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF ANY ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS AND DO NOT PERMIT THEM TO HANDLE ANY CABLES. 128

Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is a durable but sensitive electronic device. Treat it with respect and care.

Make a habit of transporting it in a suitable carrying case.

Do not attempt to service the computer yourself. Always follow installation instructions closely.

Keep it away from food and beverages.

To protect your Tablet PC from damage and to optimize system performance, be sure to keep all air vents unobstructed, clean, and clear of debris. This may require periodic cleaning, depending upon the environment in which the system is used.

Do not operate the Tablet PC in areas where the air vents can be obstructed, such as in tight enclosures or on soft surfaces like a bed or cushion. If you accidentally spill liquid on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC:

1 Turn it off. 2 Position it so that the liquid can run out. 3 Let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer if needed. 4 If your Tablet PC will not boot after it has dried out, call your support representative.

Do not use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC in a wet environment (near a bathtub, swimming pool).

Always use the AC adapter and batteries that are approved for your Tablet PC.

Avoid exposure to sand, dust and other environmental hazards.

Do not expose your Tablet PC to direct sunlight for long periods of time as temperatures above 140 F (60 C) may damage your Tablet PC.

Keep the covers closed on the connectors and slots when they are not in use.

Do not put heavy or sharp objects on the computer. If you are carrying your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC in a briefcase, or any other carrying case, make sure that there are no objects in the case pressing on the lid.

Never position your Tablet PC such that the optical drive is supporting the weight of the Tablet PC. 129 - Care and Maintenance

Cleaning your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC

Always disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug, not the cord.)

Clean your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC with a damp, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents.

Use a soft cloth to remove dust from the screen. Never use glass cleaners.

Always shut down the computer, unplug the power adapter, and remove the battery when cleaning

or disinfecting the computer exterior, keyboard or LCD display. NOTE: Avoid wetting the thermal suede in all cases. Cleaning guidelines using recommended off-the-shelf cleaners Computer exterior, computer keyboard To clean the exterior and keyboard, use one of the following off-the-shelf products:

Office Depot #154-616 Notebook Cleaning Kit

Meridrew Enterprises Klear Screen Wipes 3M CL563 Cleaner Wipes Note: After cleaning with one of these products, gently polish with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth until the solution is no longer visible. Disinfecting LIFEBOOK computers Wipe the surface with a soft cloth wipe and a 50% ethanol solution or use another ethanol-based germicide which has been registered as a hospital disinfectant by the EPA.

USE OF INCORRECT CLEANERS CAN RESULT IN OPTICAL IMPAIRMENT OF THE LCD AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE COMPUTER. ALWAYS REFER TO THE CLEANER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES AND MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR PROPER HANDLING AND USE OF THE PRODUCTS.

NEVER USE AMMONIA, ACIDIC, OR ALKALINE CLEANERS OR ORGANIC CHEMICALS SUCH AS PAINT THINNER, ACETONE, PROPYL OR ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL, OR KEROSENE. IT MAY DAMAGE SURFACE FINISHES AND THE COATING OF THE LCD SCREEN.

NEVER USE COMPRESSED AIR FOR CLEANING STYLISTIC AND LIFEBOOK PCS. 130 - Care and Maintenance

Cleaning the dust filter Your LIFEBOOK is equipped with fans to make air flow inside by pulling in outside air to cool the inside of the system. Depending on the environment in which the system is used, dust and dirt may be pulled in along with the air. Accumulated dust and dirt could impair the function of the system. REMOVE AC ADAPTER: BEFORE REMOVING THE FILTER, TURN OFF THE SYSTEM AND PERIPHERALS AND DISCONNECT THE AC ADAPTER. CLEANING THE FILTER:

- DO NOT USE DETERGENT

- AVOID DAMAGING THE FILTER; DAMAGE TO THE FILTER IS NOT COVERED BY WARRANTY.

- USE PLASTIC TOOLS TO CLEAN THE FILTER. METAL OR WOODEN TOOLS COULD DAMAGE THE FILTER. ESD: BEFORE CLEANING THE FILTER, TOUCH A METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY. ALWAYS BE SURE THE DUST FILTER IS INSTALLED WHEN RUNNING YOUR SYSTEM. NOT USING THE FILTER COULD CAUSE CONTAMINATION AND POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE SYSTEM. 1 Turn off your computer and disconnect the AC adapter. 2 Close the display panel and turn the system upside down. 3 Remove the dust filter by pressing the latch towards the filter and lifting it out (Figure 48). 4 Carefully clean the dust filter and the air-cooling duct. 5 Put back the dust filter by inserting the end without latch first and pushing in the filter until it latches. Storing your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Dust Filter Figure 48. Removing the dust filter If storing your Tablet PC for a month or longer, turn your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC off, fully charge the battery, then remove and store all Lithium ion batteries. 131 - Care and Maintenance

Store your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK in a cool, dry location. Temperatures should remain between 13F

(-25C) and 140F (60C).

Store your Tablet PC and batteries separately. If you store your LIFEBOOK with a battery installed, the battery will discharge, and battery life will be reduced. In addition, a faulty battery might damage your LIFEBOOK. ALWAYS POWER OFF THE COMPUTER BEFORE TRANSPORTING AND/OR PACKAGING IT. AFTER SHUTTING DOWN THE SYSTEM, WAIT UNTIL THE STATUS LED PANEL INDICATES POWER OFF CONDITION (I.E., NO LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINATED). IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE UNIT MAY NOT AUTOMATICALLY GO TO POWER OFF OR HIBERNATE MODE WHEN YOU CLOSE THE LID. THIS SITUATION MAY OCCUR DUE TO PRE-OS BOOT PASSWORD SECURITY SETTINGS OR SOME OTHER APPLICATION RUNNING ON THE COMPUTER. ATTEMPTING TO TRANSPORT THE COMPUTER WHILE POWER IS ON MAY DAMAGE THE TABLET PC DUE TO SHOCK OR OVERHEATING SINCE THE AIR VENTS MAY BE BLOCKED OR RESTRICTED. Traveling with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC

Do not transport your Tablet PC while it is turned on. It is recommended that you carry your Tablet PC with you while traveling, rather than checking it in as baggage.

Always bring your System Recovery CD that came with your Tablet PC when you travel. If you experience system software problems while traveling, you may need it to correct any problems.

Never put your Tablet PC through a metal detector. Have your Tablet PC hand-inspected by security personnel. You can however, put your Tablet PC through a properly tuned X-ray machine. To avoid problems, place your Tablet PC close to the entrance of the machine and remove it as soon as possible or have your Tablet PC hand-inspected by security personnel. Security officials may require you to turn your Tablet PC on, so make sure you have a charged battery on hand. 132 - Care and Maintenance

Take the necessary plug adapters if you're traveling overseas. Check the following diagram to determine which plug adapter you'll need or ask your travel agent. Outlet Type Location Outlet Type Location United States, Canada, parts of Latin America, Mexico, Japan, Korea, the Philippines, Taiwan Russia and the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS), most of Europe, parts of Latin America, the Middle East, parts of Africa, Hong Kong, India, most of South Asia United Kingdom, Ireland, Malaysia, Singapore, parts of Africa China, Australia, New Zealand Batteries Caring for your Batteries

Always handle batteries carefully.

Do not short-circuit the battery terminals (that is, do not touch both terminals with a metal object). Do not carry lose batteries in a pocket or purse where they may mix with coins, keys, or other metal objects. Doing so may cause an explosion or fire.

Do not drop, puncture, disassemble, mutilate or incinerate the battery.

Recharge batteries only as described in this manual and only in ventilated areas.

Do not leave batteries in hot locations for more than a day or two. Intense heat can shorten the life of your battery.

Do not leave a battery in storage for longer than 6 months without recharging it. 133 - Care and Maintenance Increasing Battery Life

Power your Tablet PC through the AC or optional auto/airline adapter whenever possible. If your tablet runs on battery power all day, connect it to an AC adapter overnight to recharge it.

Keep brightness to the lowest level comfortable.

Set the power management for maximum battery life.

Put your Tablet PC in Sleep mode when it is turned on and you are not actually using it.

Limit your media drive access.

Disable the Media Player auto insert notification function.

Eject ExpressCards when not in use. Media Care Caring for your Media (DVD/CD/CD-R) Media discs are precision devices and will function reliably if given reasonable care.

Always store your media disc in its case when it is not in use.

Always handle discs by the edges and avoid touching the surface.

Avoid storing any media discs in extreme temperatures.

Do not bend or scratch media discs or set heavy objects on them.

Do not spill liquids on media discs.

Do not get dust on media discs.

Never write on the label surface with a ballpoint pen or pencil. Always use a felt pen. If a disc is subjected to a sudden change in temperature, condensation may form on the surface. Wipe moisture off with a soft, lint free cloth and let it dry at room temperature. DO NOT use a hair dryer or heater to dry media discs. If a disc is dirty, use only a DVD/CD cleaner or wipe it with a clean, soft, lint free cloth starting from the inner edge and wiping to the outer edge. 134 - Care and Maintenance

Caring for your Optical Drive Your optical drive is durable but you must treat it with care. Please pay attention to the following points:

The drive rotates the compact disc at a very high speed. Do not carry it around or subject it to shock or vibration with the power on.

Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be exposed to extreme temperatures.

Avoid using or storing the drive where it is damp or dusty.

Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets or devices that generate strong magnetic fields.

Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be subjected to shock or vibration.

Do not disassemble or dismantle the optical drive.

Use of a commercially available lens cleaner is recommended for maintenance of your drive. Express Cards Caring for your Cards Express Cards are durable, but you must treat them with care. The documentation supplied with your card will provide specific information, but you should pay attention to the following points:

To keep out dust and dirt, store cards in their protective sleeves when they are not installed in your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC.

Avoid prolonged exposure to direct sunlight or excessive heat.

Keep the cards dry.

Do not flex or bend the cards, and do not place heavy objects on top of them.

Do not force cards into the slot.

Avoid dropping cards, or subjecting them to excessive vibration. 135 - Care and Maintenance Chapter 6 System Specifications Specifications This section provides the hardware and environmental specifications for your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Specifications of particular configurations will vary. Configuration Label The configuration label located on the bottom of your Tablet PC contains specific information regarding the options youve chosen for your Tablet PC. Following is an example configuration label. Part Number Configuration ID Configuration P/N: A4XXXXXXXXXXXXX FPC P/N: FPCXXXXXX T731, i5-2520M, 12.1 WXGA, W7Pro, 320G, 4GB Processor Model #

Screen Size/Type Operating System Hard Drive Memory 136 Microprocessor New 2nd Generation Intel Core Processor (Refer to the system label to determine the speed of your processor). Chipset

Mobile Intel QM67 Express

Platform Control Hub (PCH) Memory System Memory

DDR3-1333 MHz SDRAM dual-channel memory module.

Two DIMM slots; upgradeable to 8 GB of total memory (4 GB x 2). Cache Memory Up to 4MB L3 cache on-die (depending upon CPU) Video Built-in color flat-panel TFT active matrix LED backlit display with simultaneous display capability. Video Color and Resolution 12.1" Wide XGA display Internal: 1280 x 800 pixel resolution, 16M colors

External: 1920 x 1200 pixel resolution, 16M colors

Simultaneous: 1280 x 800, 16M colors Video RAM Intel(R) HD Graphics with dynamic frequency. Automatically distributes performance to CPU and graphics applications that need an extra boost up to approximately 20%. 137 - Specifications

Digitizer Depending upon the configuration of your system, one of two digitizer options is included:

Active digitizer (uses active stylus input), or,

Dual Digitizer, consisting of active digitizer and capacitive touch panel (uses active stylus input and two finger touch input). Audio

Realtek codec ALC269 with High Definition (HD) audio.

Headphones: Stereo headphone jack, 3.5 mm, 1 Vrms or less, minimum impedance 32 Ohms

Microphone: Stereo microphone jack, 3.5 mm, 100 mVp-p or less, minimum impedance 10K Ohms

Two built-in speakers, 25 mm x 16 mm, 0.6 W

Two built-in digital microphones Mass Storage Device Options Hard Drive Serial ATA, 2.5, 9.5 mm, shock-mounted with Shock Sensor utility. Capacity and speed of the hard drive are determined by system configuration. Modular Bay Devices One of the following devices is pre-installed:

Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer: 24x CD-ROM, 24x CD-R, 10x CD-RW, 8x DVD-ROM, 5x DVD-RAM, 8x DVD+/-R, 4x DVD+/-R(DL), 6x DVD-RW, 8x DVD+RW

Modular Bay Battery

Weight Saver 138 - Specifications Features Integrated Pointing Device Touchpad cursor control buttons, with scroll strip built-in Communications

Gigabit LAN: Intel 82579LM 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet LAN

WLAN: Optional integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (a/b/g/n) or Atheros XSPAN 802.11bgn

Bluetooth: Optional Bluetooth V3.0 device for wireless personal area network communication Web Camera Optional built-in 2.0 megapixel web camera. Security Trusted Platform Module: The LIFEBOOK T731 has a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) installed for added system security. Theft Prevention Lock: Lock slot for use with security restraint systems. Fingerprint Reader: The fingerprint sensor uses biometric readings to ensure that only a person with a registered fingerprint can access the system. iAMT Support (using Intel vPro technology): Intel vPro technology is a set of features that work together to allow for remote wired or wireless access of a computer. This technology can be used whether or not the computer is running, and enhances the administrator's ability to maintain the system, enhance security, and increase the cost benefits by allowing off-site service 139 - Specifications Device Ports On the LIFEBOOK Tablet PC:

Express Card slot for one Express Card

Memory Stick/SD Card slot

One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external monitor (see Display specifications)

Two USB 2.0 (Universal Serial Bus) connectors (one of which has Anytime USB Charge feature)

One USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus) connector

One DC In connector

One IEEE 1394 (4-pin type) jack

One LAN (RJ-45) connector

One HDMI port

Docking port (100-pin, to dock with port replicator)

One stereo headphone jack

One stereo microphone/line-in jack On the Optional Port Replicator:

One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external monitor

Four USB 2.0 connectors for input/output devices

One LAN (RJ-45) connector

One DC-in connector

One DVI-D connector

One Headphone-Out connector 140 - Specifications Keyboard Built-in keyboard with all functions of 101 key keyboard.

Total number of keys: 84

Function keys: F1 through F12, plus Fn extension key

Two Windows keys: one Start key, one application key

Key pitch: 19 mm; key stroke: 3.0 mm

Built-in Touchpad pointing device with two left and two right buttons and scroll strip.

Built-in Palm Rest

Spill-resistant

Anti-microbial

External USB keyboard/mouse support Power Battery

Standard Lithium ion battery, rechargeable, 6-cell, 10.8V, 6200 mAh

Optional Lithium ion bay battery, rechargeable, 6-cell 10.8V, 3800 mAh AC Adapter Autosensing 100-240V AC, supplying 19V DC, 4.22A, 80W to the LIFEBOOK; includes an AC cable Power Management Conforms to ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface). 141 - Specifications Dimensions and Weight Overall Dimensions 11.69"(w) x 9.17"(d) x 1.54(h) (297 mm x 233 mm x 39.0 mm). The height dimensions include the rubber feet. Weight Wide-view display, active digitizer with weight saver - 3.95 lbs. (1.79 kg) Wide-view display, active digitizer with optical drive: 4.32 lbs. (1.96 kg) Standard display, dual-digitizer with optical drive: 4.56 lbs. (2.07 kg) Environmental Requirements Temperature Operating: 41 to 95 F (5 to 35 C). Non-operating: 5 to 140 F (15 to 60 C) Humidity Operating: 20% to 85%, relative, non-condensing. Non-operating: 8% to 85%, relative, non-condensing Altitude Operating: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) maximum Popular Accessories For ordering or additional information on Fujitsu accessories please visit our Web site at www.shopfujitsu.com or call 1-800-FUJITSU. 142 - Specifications Pre-Installed Software Depending on your pre-installed operating system, your Tablet PC comes with pre-installed software for playing audio and video files of various formats. In addition there is file transfer software and virus protection software. THE FOLLOWING LIST CONSTITUTES THE SOFTWARE THAT MAY BE INSTALLED ON YOUR COMPUTER. THE PRE-INSTALLED SOFTWARE MAY VARY, AND IS DETERMINED BY YOUR OPERATING SYSTEM AND CONFIGURATION.

Adobe Reader

Norton Internet Security (60-day free trial)

CyberLink PowerDirector

CyberLink PowerDVD

CyberLink MakeDisc (Windows 7 models only)

CyberLink YouCam

Google Toolbar

Roxio Creator

OmniPass Fingerprint application

Fujitsu Driver Update utility

TBD - TOUCHPACK REMOVED

Microsoft Windows Live Essentials

Microsoft Office 2010 Starter 143 - Specifications Learning About Your Software Tutorials All operating systems and most application software have tutorials built into them upon installation. We highly recommend that you step through the tutorial before you use an application. Manuals Included with your Tablet PC you will find manuals for your installed operating system and other pre-

installed software. Any manuals that are not included are available online through the softwares Help menu. We recommend that you review these manuals for information on the use of these applications. Adobe Reader Adobe Reader allows you to view, navigate, and print PDF files across all major computing platforms. Norton Internet Security Your system is preinstalled with a free 60-day trial version of Symantecs Norton Internet Security. Internet Security is a suite of tools designed to protect your LIFEBOOK from viruses, hackers, spam, and spyware. It helps you protect data currently on your hard disk from destruction or contamination. The trial version is activated upon your acceptance of software license agreement. After 60 days, you will need to purchase a subscription from Symantec to download latest virus, spyware, and spam definitions. CyberLink MakeDisc

(Windows 7 systems only) CyberLink MakeDisc allows you to burn data, videos and photographs to CDs or DVDs. CyberLink PowerDVD CyberLink PowerDVD allows you to produce and edit home movies and slideshows on discs. CyberLink YouCam CyberLink YouCam allows you to capture photos or movies on the embedded webcam, add special effects to them, and share them in a variety of formats or via social networks. 144 - Specifications CyberLink PowerDirector CyberLink PowerDirector allows you to edit and enhance your videos, and add special effects to them. Roxio Creator Roxio Creator lets you burn CDs and organize, edit and share digital photos, music, data, or videos. OmniPass Fingerprint application The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass lets you use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-line passwords, and presents a convenient user interface through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. Google Toolbar Google Toolbar lets you to search the Internet quickly, block pop-ups, and perform a variety of other tasks to make your Internet experience easier and more pleasant. Fujitsu Driver Update Utility The Fujitsu Driver Update (FDU) utility is pre-installed on your system. With FDU, you can choose to automatically or manually go to the Fujitsu site to check for new updates for your system. See Automatically Downloading Driver Updates on page 127. TBD - TOUCHPACK REMOVED Microsoft Windows Live Essentials Windows Live Essentials is a suite of programs that make it easier and more enjoyable to use your LIFE-

BOOK. Live Essentials consists of six Live applications: Messenger, Photo Gallery, Writer, Mail, Movie Maker, and Silverlight. Messenger lets you quickly communicate and interact with individuals and groups. Photo Gallery is a flexible application that lets you organize, edit, and share your photos. Writer can be used to generate blog entries, upload videos and photos to your blogs, and publish your entries 145 - Specifications online. Mail makes it easy for you to manage your email accounts. Movie Maker makes great-looking movies and slideshows from your videos and photos. Its simple to import standard or high definition video and photos, and then have AutoMovie add animations, music, and a title in minutes. Silverlight powers rich application experiences and delivers high quality, interactive video across the Web and mobile devices. Microsoft Office Starter 2010 Microsoft Office Starter 2010 includes reduced-functionality versions of Word 2010 and Excel 2010 with advertising. PowerPoint, Outlook and Publisher are NOT included. Purchase an Office 2010 Product Key Card to activate full-featured Office software on this PC. Operating System Options Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 146 - Specifications Glossary AC Adapter A device which converts the AC voltage from a wall outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Access point Wireless network device used to bridge wireless and wired network traffic. ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Active-Matrix Display A type of technology for making flat-panel displays which has a transistor or similar device for every pixel on the screen. Ad Hoc Mode Ad Hoc Mode refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Points. Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. 147 ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line. Technology for transporting high bit-rate services over ordinary phone lines. AGP Accelerated Graphics Port. Graphics port specifically designed for graphics-intensive devices, such as video cards and 3D accelerators. Auto/Airline Adapter A device which converts the DC voltage from an automobile cigarette lighter or aircraft DC power outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. BIOS Basic Input-Output System. A program and set of default parameters stored in ROM which tests and operates your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC when you turn it on until it loads your installed operating system from disk. Information from the BIOS is transferred to the installed operating system to provide it with information on the configuration and status of the hardware. Bit An abbreviation for binary digit. A single piece of information which is either a one (1) or a zero (0). bps An abbreviation for bits per second. Used to describe data transfer rates. Boot To start-up a computer and load its operating system from disk, ROM or other storage media into RAM. 148 - Glossary Bus An electrical circuit which passes data between the CPU and the sub-assemblies inside your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Byte 8 bits of parallel binary information. Cache Memory A block of memory built into the micro-processor which is much faster to access than your system RAM and used in specially structured ways to make your overall data handling time faster. CD-ROM Compact disk read only memory. This is a form of digital data storage which is read optically with a laser rather than a magnetic head. A typical CD-ROM can contain about 600MB of data and is not subject to heads crashing into the surface and destroying the data when there is a failure nor to wear from reading. Channel Range of narrow-band frequencies used by the WLAN device to transmit data. IEEE802.11b/g - 11 channels, 22 MHz wide channels. CMOS RAM Complementary metal oxide semiconductor random access memory. This is a technology for manufacturing random access memory which requires very low levels of power to operate. Command An instruction which you give your operating system. Example: run a particular application or format a floppy disk. 149 - Glossary Configuration The combination of hardware and software that makes up your system and how it is allocated for use. CRT Cathode Ray Tube. A display device which uses a beam of electronic particles striking a luminescent screen. It produces a visual image by varying the position and intensity of the beam. Data The information a system stores and processes. DC Direct current. A voltage or current that does not fluctuate periodically with time. Default Value A pre-programmed value to be used if you fail to set your own. DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used to automatically acquire parameters required for the communication, such as IP address. The sender of IP address is called a DHCP server, and the receiver is called a DHCP client. DIMM Dual-in-line memory module. Disk A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media. If the platter is very stiff it is a hard drive, if it is highly flexible it is a floppy disk, if it is a floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter it is commonly called a diskette. 150 - Glossary Disk Drive The hardware which spins the disk and has the heads and control circuitry for reading and writing the data on the disk. Diskette A floppy disk in a hard housing with a shutter. DMA Direct Memory Access. Special circuitry for memory to memory transfers of data which do not require CPU action. DMI Desktop Management Interface. A standard that provides PC management applications with a common method of locally or remotely querying and configuring PC computer systems, hardware and software components, and peripherals. DNS Domain Name System. A function to control the association between the IP address and the name assigned to the computer. If you do not know the IP address but if you know the computer name, you can still communicate to that computer. DOS Disk Operating System (MS-DOS is a Microsoft Disk Operating System). Driver A computer program which converts application and operating system commands to external devices into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of device in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. 151 - Glossary DVMT Dynamic Video Memory Technology. A video memory architecture that increases the efficiency of the motherboard by using innovative memory utilization and direct AGP. ECP Extended Capability Port. A set of standards for high speed data communication and interconnection between electronic devices. Encryption Key (Network Key) Data encryption key used to encrypt message text and for computing message integrity checks. Data encryption protects data from unauthorized viewing. This device uses the same encryption key to encode and decode the data, and the identical encryption key is required between the sender and receiver. ESD Electro-Static Discharge. The sudden discharge of electricity from a static charge which has built-up slowly. Example: the shock you get from a doorknob on a dry day or the sparks you get from brushing hair on a dry day. FCC Federal Communications Commission. Floppy Disk A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media which is highly flexible. GB Gigabyte. One billion bytes. 152 - Glossary Hard drive A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media where the platter is very stiff. I/O Input/Output. Data entering and leaving your Tablet PC in electronic form. I/O Port The connector and associated control circuits for data entering and leaving your Tablet PC in electronic form. IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics. A type of control interface for a hard drive which is inside the hard drive unit. IEEE802.11a Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11a devices operate in the 5 GHz lower and middle UNII bands. IEEE802.11b Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 11 Mbps. 802.11b devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. IEEE802.11g Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11g devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. Infrared Light just beyond the red portion of the visible light spectrum which is invisible to humans. 153 - Glossary Infrastructure A name of a wireless LAN configuration. This type of communication uses an access point. Another type of communication is called Ad Hoc. IP Address An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP/IP network. Networks using the TCP/IP protocol route messages based on the IP address of the destination. The format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods. Each number can be zero to 255. For example, 1.160.10.240 could be an IP address. Within an isolated network, you can assign IP addresses at random as long as each one is unique. However, connecting a private network to the Internet requires using registered IP addresses (called Internet addresses) to avoid duplicates. The four numbers in an IP address are used in different ways to identify a particular network and a host on that network. Three regional Internet registries -- ARIN, RIPE NCC and APNIC -- assign Internet addresses from the following three classes. Class A - supports 16 million hosts on each of 126 networks Class B - supports 65,000 hosts on each of 16,000 networks Class C - supports 254 hosts on each of 2 million networks The number of unassigned Internet addresses is running out, so a new classless scheme called CIDR is gradually replacing the system based on classes A, B, and C and is tied to adoption of IPv6. IR An abbreviation for infrared. IrDA Infrared Data Association. An organization which produces standards for communication using infrared as the carrier. 154 - Glossary IRQ Interrupt Request. An acronym for the hardware signal to the CPU that an external event has occurred which needs to be processed. KB Kilobyte. One thousand bytes. LAN Local Area Network. An interconnection of computers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves. LCD Liquid Crystal Display. A type of display which makes images by controlling the orientation of crystals in a crystalline liquid. Lithium ion Battery A type of rechargeable battery which has a high power-time life for its size and is not subject to the memory effect as Nickel Cadmium batteries. LPT Port Line Printer Port. A way of referring to parallel interface ports because historically line printers were the first and latter the most common device connected to parallel ports. MAC Address Media Access Control Address. A unique physical address of a network card. For Ethernet, the first three bytes are used as the vendor code, controlled and assigned by IEEE. The remaining three bytes are controlled by each vendor (preventing overlap), therefore, every Ethernet card is given a unique physical address in the world, being assigned with a different address from other cards. For Ethernet, frames are sent and received based on this address. 155 - Glossary MB Megabyte. One million bytes. Megahertz 1,000,000 cycles per second. Memory A repository for data and applications which is readily accessible to your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs CPU. MHz Megahertz. MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface. A standard communication protocol for exchange of information between computers and sound producers such as synthesizers. Modem A contraction for MOdulator-DEModulator. The equipment which connects a computer or other data terminal to a communication line. Monaural A system using one channel to process sound from all sources. MTU Maximum Transmission Unit The maximum data size that can be transferred at a time through the Internet or other networks. You can set a smaller MTU size to obtain successful communication, if you have difficulty transferring data due to the fact that the maximum size is too large. 156 - Glossary Network key Data that is used for encrypting data in data communication. The personal computer uses the same network key both for data encryption and decryption, therefore, it is necessary to set the same network key as the other side of communication. Network name (SSID: Service Set Identifier ) When a wireless LAN network is configured, grouping is performed to avoid interference or data theft. This grouping is performed with Network name (SSID). In order to improve security, the network key is set allowing no communication unless Network name (SSID) coincides with the network key. NTSC National TV Standards Commission. The standard for TV broadcast and reception for the USA. Open system authentication Null authentication method specified in the 802.11 standard that performs no authentication checks on a wireless client before allowing it to associate. Operating System A group of control programs that convert application commands, including driver programs, into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of microprocessor in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. Partition A block of space on a hard drive which is set aside and made to appear to the operating system as if it were a separate disk, and addressed by the operating system accordingly. PCMCIA PCMCIA is a trademark of the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. The Personal Computer Memory Card International Association is an organization that sets standards for add-in cards for personal computers. 157 - Glossary Peripheral Device A piece of equipment which performs a specific function associated with but not integral to a computer. Examples: a printer, a modem, a CD-ROM. Pitch (keyboard) The distance between the centers of the letter keys of a keyboard. Pixel The smallest element of a display, a dot of color on your display screen. The more pixels per area the clearer your image will appear. POST Power On Self Test. A program which is part of the BIOS which checks the configuration and operating condition of your hardware whenever power is applied to your Tablet PC. Status and error messages may be displayed before the operating system is loaded. If the self test detects failures that are so serious that operation cannot continue, the operating system will not be loaded. PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. A protocol for Ethernet, using a Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), which is used for connection on the phone line. Program An integrated set of coded commands to your computers telling your hardware what to do and how and when to do it. 158 - Glossary Protocol Procedures and rules use to send and receive data between computers.

- Method of sending and receiving data

- Process used to handle communication errors Conditions required for communication are organized in procedures for correct transfer of information. RAM Random Access Memory. A hardware component of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC that holds binary information (both program and data) as long as it has the proper power applied to it. RAM Module A printed circuit card with memory and associated circuitry which allows the user to add additional memory to the computer without special tools. Reset The act of reloading the operating system. A reset erases all information stored in RAM. Restart See Reset. Resume To proceed after interruption. In your Tablet PC this refers to returning to active operation after having been in one of the suspension states. ROM Read Only Memory. A form of memory in which information is stored by physically altering the material. Data stored in this way cannot be changed by your Tablet PC and does not require power to maintain it. 159 - Glossary SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory. Serial Port A connection to another device through which data is transferred one bit at a time on a single wire with any other wires only for control of the device not for transfer of data. Shared key authentication 802.11 network authentication method in which the AP sends the client device a challenge text packet that the client must then encrypt with the correct WEP key and return to the AP. If the client has the wrong key or no key, authentication will fail and the client will not be allowed to associate with the AP. Shared key authentication is not considered secure, because a hacker who detects both the clear-

text challenge and the same challenge encrypted with a WEP key can decipher the key. Sleep To make inoperative for a period of time. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC uses various suspension states to reduce power consumption and prolong the charge of your battery. SSID Service Set Identifier, a 32-character unique identifier attached to the header of packets sent over a WLAN that acts as a password when a mobile device tries to connect to the BSS. The SSID differentiates one WLAN from another, so all access points and all devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. A device will not be permitted to join the BSS unless it can provide the unique SSID. Because the SSID is broadcast in plain text, it does not supply any security to the network. Status Indicator A display which reports the condition of some portion of your hardware. On your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC this is an LCD screen just above the keyboard. 160 - Glossary Stereo (audio) A system using two channels to process sound from two different sources. Subnet mask TCP-IP network is controlled by being divided into multiple smaller networks (subnets). IP address consists of the subnet address and the address of each computer. Subnet mask defines how many bits of IP address comprise the subnet address. The same value shall be set among computers communicating with each other. SVGA Super VGA. S-Video Super Video. A component video system for driving a TV or computer monitor. System Clock An oscillator of fixed precise frequency which synchronizes the operation of the system and is counted to provide time of day and date. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A standard Internet protocol that is most widely used. TFT Thin Film Transistor A technology for flat display panels which uses a thin film matrix of transistors to control each pixel of the display screen individually. UL Underwriters Laboratories An independent organization that tests and certifies the electrical safety of devices. 161 - Glossary USB Universal Serial Bus. Standard that allows you to simultaneously connect up to 127 USB devices such as game pads, pointing devices, printers, and keyboards to your computer. VRAM Video Random Access Memory. A memory dedicated to video display data and control. WFM Wired for Management is Intels broad-based initiative to reduce the total cost of ownership (TCO) of business computing without sacrificing power and flexibility. Wi-Fi Compatible Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) Identifies that the product has passed the interoperability test, supplied by the WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance), which guarantees the interoperability of wireless IEEE 802.11 LAN products. For more information on the Wi-Fi standard, go to the WECA Web site at: www.wirelessethernet.com. WLAN Wireless Local Area Network. A wireless interconnection of computers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves. 162 - Glossary Regulatory Information Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Fujitsu could void this users authority to operate the equipment. FCC NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limit for class B digital devices, pursuant to parts 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit than the receiver.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device. DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numrique de classe B respecte la norme canadienne ICES-003 163 - Regulatory Information

Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide FCC Regulatory Information Please note the following regulatory information related to the optional wireless LAN device. Regulatory Notes and Statements Wireless LAN, Health and Authorization for use Radio frequency electromagnetic energy is emitted from Wireless LAN devices. The energy levels of these emissions, however, are far much less than the electromagnetic energy emissions from wireless devices such as mobile phones. Wireless LAN devices are safe for use by consumers because they operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. The use of Wireless LAN devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as:

On board an airplane, or In an explosive environment, or In situations where the interference risk to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. In cases in which the policy regarding use of Wireless LAN devices in specific environments is not clear (e.g., airports, hospitals, chemical/oil/gas industrial plants, private buildings), obtain authorization to use these devices prior to operating the equipment. 164

Regulatory Information/Disclaimers Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of this device, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by the manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any damage or violation of government regulations arising from failure to comply with these guidelines. This device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN: For operation within 5.15~5.25 GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environments, and the antenna of this device must be integral. Federal Communications Commission statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. FCC Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from the one the receiver is connected to. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. 165 FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposure have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The wireless LAN radio device has been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. Export restrictions This product or software contains encryption code which may not be exported or transferred from the US or Canada without an approved US Department of Commerce export license. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules., as well as ICES 003 B / NMB 003 B. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation. Modifications not expressly authorized by Fujitsu America, Inc. may invalidate the user's right to operate this equipment. Canadian Notice The device for the 5150 - 5250 MHz band is only for indoor usage to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. The maximum antenna gain of 6 dBi permitted (for devices in the 5250 - 5350 MHz, 5470 - 5725 MHz and 5725 - 5825 MHz bands) to comply with the e.i.r.p. limit as stated in A9.2 of RSS210. In addition, users are cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 - 5350 MHz and 5650 - 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. 166 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN This manual describes the procedures required to properly set up and configure the optional integrated Wireless LAN Mini-PCI device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read this manual carefully to ensure its correct operation. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document This document is applicable to systems containing one of the following optional devices:

Optional integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 (a/b/g/n, 2 x 2)

Optional integrated Atheros XSPAN 802.11bgn Characteristics of the WLAN Device The WLAN device is a Mini-PCI card attached to the main board of the mobile computer. The WLAN device operates in license-free RF bands, eliminating the need to procure an FCC operating license. The WLAN operates in the 2.4GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band and the lower, middle, and upper bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands. The WLAN devices are capable of four operating modes, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n (draft) The WLAN devices are Wi-Fi certified and operate (as applicable) at a the maximum data rate of 540 Mbps

(theoretical) in IEEE802.11n (draft) mode; 54 Mbps in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode; and 11 Mbps in IEEE802.11b mode. The WLAN devices support the following encryption methods - WEP, TKIP, CKIP, and AES encryption. The Wireless LAN devices are compliant with the following standards: WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0, and CCX4.0. 167 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN

Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device Ad Hoc Mode

"Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer networks. Ad Hoc networks are an easy and inexpensive method for establishing network connectivity between multiple computers. Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID, network authentication, and encryption key settings are identically configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network. Figure 49. Ad Hoc Mode Network 168 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless network architecture in which devices communicate with wireless or wired network devices by communicating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode, wireless devices can communicate with each other or with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks operate in infrastructure mode because they require access to the WLAN in order to access services, devices, and computers (e.g., file servers, printers, databases). Internet ADSL modem, cable modem, or similar Wired LAN Access Point*

Wireless LAN

*An optional hub for a wired LAN may be required depending upon the type of access point used. Figure 50. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Network 169 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN How to Handle This Device The WLAN device is an optional device that may come pre-installed in your mobile computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The operating system that your mobile computer comes with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN device. The Wireless LAN devices support IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n. The WLAN devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and the 5 GHz lower, middle, and upper UNII bands.

Microwave ovens may interfere with the operation of WLAN devices since they operate in the same 2.4 GHz frequency range as IEEE802.11b/g/n devices. Interference by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band.

Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4 GHz range may interfere with operation of WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g/n modes. Symptoms of interference include reduced throughput, intermittent disconnects, and many frame errors. It is HIGHLY recommended that these interfering devices be powered off to ensure proper operation of the WLAN device. Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device Disconnecting the WLAN device may be desired in certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics, airplanes, etc.). The WLAN device can be deactivated by using the Wireless On/Off Switch, and it can be disconnected in Windows using the WLAN icon in the system tray (Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio;

it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected.). BEFORE USING THE WIRELESS LAN DEVICE, YOU MUST FIRST INSTALL CLICKME! TO ENSURE THAT THE CORRECT SOFTWARE FOR YOUR DEVICE IS INSTALLED. SEE INSTALLING CLICKME! ON PAGE 75. 170 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN

Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch The WLAN device can be deactivated quickly and efficiently by toggling the Wireless LAN/Bluetooth On/Off Switch to the Off position. The switch has no effect on non-Wireless LAN models. WLAN/Bluetooth Switch Figure 51. Wireless LAN/Bluetooth On/Off Switch Location Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected. 1 Right-click the WLAN icon in the taskbar at the bottom right of your screen. 2 Choose Disconnect from a network. Activating the WLAN Device Activation of the WLAN device can be accomplished using the same methods as the deactivation process

Using the Wireless On/Off Switch In Windows, by right-clicking the WLAN icon then clicking Connect to a network 171 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN

Configuring the Wireless LAN The WLAN device can be configured to establish wireless network connectivity using the software that is built into Windows. Support for most industry standard security solutions is contained in this software. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network administrator for these parameters:

Configuring the WLAN 1 Click the Start button, then select Control Panel. 2 If the Control Panel is not in Classic View, select Classic View from the left panel. Double-click the Network Connections icon. 3 Double-click on the Wireless Network Connection icon. 4 Click on [View Wireless Networks]

5 Choose a wireless network. 6 Click [Connect]. 7 Enter the Network Key, if required. 8 Enter any required information. It may be necessary to consult with your network administrator for some of the information. 9 If you require assistance, go to [Start] -> Help and Support -> Networking and the Web. Select the main topic in which you are interested, then type in relevant keywords in the Search box. Connection to the network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by performing the following steps:

1 Click on the WLAN icon in the system tray. 2 Select Connect to a network. 3 Select a network from the list that appears, and click the [Connect] button. After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by clicking on the Wireless Network icon in the system tray:

172 Configuring the Wireless LAN Troubleshooting the WLAN Troubleshooting Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the following table. If you are unfamiliar with the steps required, consult your System Administrator or go to [Start] -> Help and Support -> Networking and the Web Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection Incorrect network name (SSID) or network key Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSIDs) and network keys

(WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured correctly. SSIDs and WEP key values must be identical on each machine. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set network name (SSID) and network key to the same values as those of the access point. Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access Point. Please consult your network administrator for this value, if necessary. Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for better transmission. Check if the wireless switch is turned On. Go to Start -> Control Panel, and double-click on Windows Mobility Center. If the wireless network is off, click the

[Turn wireless on] button. Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON. Weak received signal strength and/or link quality The WLAN device has been deactivated or disabled The computer to be connected is turned off 173 Troubleshooting the WLAN Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection

(continued) RF interference from Access Points or other wireless networks Wireless network authentication has failed Incorrectly configured network settings The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering device. Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly typed WEP key, a misconfigured LEAP username, or an incorrectly chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate but not authenticate to the wireless network. Recheck the configuration of your network settings. Incorrect IP address configuration This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact your network administrator for the correct settings. 174 Troubleshooting the WLAN WLAN Specifications Specifications Item Type of network Transfer rate Active frequency Typical operating distances**

Number of channels Specification The optional integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6200 (a/b/g/n, 2 x 2) and Atheros XSPAN 802.11bgn) WLAN devices conform to IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g, and 802.11n

(draft-compliant), Wi-Fi based*.

(Automatic switching) 54 Mbps maximum data rate (IEEE802.11n to be determined) 802.11n (draft): 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz 802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz 802.11a: 4900 ~ 5850 MHz 802.11a: 40 ft. (12 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 6 Mbps 802.11b: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 11 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11g: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11n (draft): Estimated double the operating distance of 802.11g and 802.11a in their respective frequencies. 802.11a: 8 independent channels 802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels 802.11n (draft): 2.4 GHz - 3 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is not used; 2 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is used. 5 GHz - 12 non-overlapping UNII channels with or without Channel Bonding Security Encryption Types - WEP, TKIP, AES***, WPA 1.0 compliant Encryption Key lengths Supported: 64 bits and 128 bits 802.1x/EAP Maximum recommended number of computers to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc connection) 10 units or less ****

175 WLAN Specifications

* Wi-Fi based indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.

** The communication ranges shown above will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls, reflective material, or interference from external RF sources.

*** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/ 104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.

**** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased. 176 WLAN Specifications Using the Bluetooth Device The optional Integrated Bluetooth module (BSMAN3) is a wireless device installed in selected Fujitsu mobile computers. What is Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is designed as a short-range wireless link between mobile devices, such as laptop computers, phones, printers, and cameras. Bluetooth technology is used to create Personal Area Networks

(PANs) between devices in short-range of each other. THE WIRELESS LAN/BLUETOOTH ON/OFF SWITCH WILL POWER OFF BOTH THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS LAN AND BLUETOOTH DEVICES AT THE SAME TIME. TO ENABLE OR DISABLE EITHER ONE OF THE DEVICES INDIVIDUALLY, PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS:

1 Slide the Wireless LAN/Bluetooth on/off switch to On position. 2 Go to Start > All Programs > Bluetooth. 3 Click on Options under the Bluetooth menu and click on the Bluetooth Radio Power button. 4 Click [OK]. Where to Find Information About Bluetooth The Bluetooth module contains a robust Help users guide to assist you in learning about operation of the Bluetooth device. To access the Help file, click [Start] -> All Programs, and click on Bluetooth, then select Users Guide. For additional information about Bluetooth Technology, visit the Bluetooth Web site at:

www.bluetooth.com. 177 Using the Bluetooth Device FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The Bluetooth antenna is located on the front edge of the right palm rest and is exempt from minimum distance criteria due to its low power. The transmitters in this device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Notice To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Warranty Users are not authorized to modify this product. Any modifications invalidate the warranty. This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without signed written permission from Fujitsu. Unauthorized modification will void the equipment authorization from the FCC and Industry Canada and the warranty. 178 Using the Bluetooth Device Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Your system has a fingerprint sensor device at the bottom left below the display screen. Fingerprint Sensor Device With a fingerprint sensor, you can avoid having to enter a username and password every time you want to:

Figure 52. Fingerprint sensor

Log onto Windows

Resume from sleep mode

Cancel a password-protected screen saver 179

Log into homepages that require a username and password After you have enrolled - or registered - your fingerprint, you can simply swipe your fingertip over the sensor for the system recognize you. The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass enables you to use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-line passwords. OmniPass requires users to authenticate themselves using the fingerprint sensor before granting access to the Windows desktop. This device results in a secure authentication system for restricting access to your computer, applications, web sites, and other password-protected resources. OmniPass presents a convenient graphical user interface, through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. Getting Started This section guides you through the preparation of your system for the OmniPass fingerprint recognition application. You will be led through the OmniPass installation process. You will also be led through the procedure of enrolling your first user into OmniPass. Installing OmniPass If OmniPass has already been installed on your system, skip this section and go directly to User Enrollment on page 183. You can determine whether OmniPass has already been installed by checking to see if the following are present:

The gold key-shaped OmniPass icon in the system tray at the bottom right of the screen.

The Softex program group in the Programs group of the Start menu System Requirements The OmniPass application requires space on your hard drive; it also requires specific Operating Systems

(OSs). The minimum requirements are as follows:

180 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device

Windows XP Professional operating system

At least 35 MB available hard disk space Installing the OmniPass Application If OmniPass is already installed on your system, go to User Enrollment on page 183. Otherwise continue with this section on software installation. INSTALLATION OF THE APPLICATION REQUIRES THAT YOU HAVE AN EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ATTACHED TO YOUR SYSTEM. FOR INSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER INSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS INSTALLATION. To install OmniPass on your system you must:

1 Insert the installation media for the OmniPass application into the appropriate drive. If you are installing from CD-ROM or DVD-ROM, you must find and launch the OmniPass installation program (setup.exe) from the media. 2 Follow the directions provided in the OmniPass installation program. Specify a location to which you would like OmniPass installed. It is recommended that you NOT install OmniPass in the root directory (e.g. C:\). 3 Once OmniPass has completed installation you will be prompted to restart you system. Once your system has rebooted you will be able to use OmniPass. If you choose not to restart immediately after installation, OmniPass will not be available for use until the next reboot. 4 The installation program automatically places an icon (Softex OmniPass) in the Windows Control Panel as well as a golden key shaped icon in the taskbar. Verifying Information about OmniPass After you have completed installing OmniPass and restarted your system, you may wish to check the version of OmniPass on your system. To check the version information of OmniPass:

181 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device

1 From the Windows Desktop, double-click the key-shaped OmniPass icon in the taskbar (usually located in the lower right corner of the screen), or, Click the Start button, select Settings, and click Control Panel. Double-click Softex OmniPass in the Control Panel, and the OmniPass Control Center will appear. If it does not appear, then the program is not properly installed, or, Click the Start button, select Programs, and from the submenu select the Softex program group, from that submenu click OmniPass Control Center. 2 Select the About tab at the top of the OmniPass Control Center. The About tab window appears with version information about OmniPass. Uninstalling OmniPass FOR UNINSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER UNINSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS UNINSTALLATION. To remove the OmniPass application from your system:

1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar. Select Settings, and then Control Panel. 2 Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 3 Select OmniPass, and then click Change/Remove. 4 Follow the directions to uninstall the OmniPass application. 5 Once OmniPass has finished uninstalling, reboot your system when prompted. 182 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device User Enrollment Before you can use any OmniPass features you must first enroll a user into OmniPass. Master Password Concept Computer resources are often protected with passwords. Whether you are logging into your computer, accessing your email, e-banking, paying bills online, or accessing network resources, you often have to supply credentials to gain access. This can result in dozens of sets of credentials that you have to remember. During user enrollment a "master password is created for the enrolled user. This master password replaces all other passwords for sites you register with OmniPass. Example: A user, John, installs OmniPass on his system (his home computer) and enrolls an OmniPass user with username John_01 and password freq14. He then goes to his webmail site to log onto his account. He inputs his webmail credentials as usual (username John_02 and password lifebook), but instead of clicking [Submit], he directs OmniPass to Remember Password. Now whenever he returns to that site, OmniPass will prompt him to supply access credentials. John enters his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14) in the OmniPass authentication prompt, and he is allowed into his webmail account. He can do this with as many web sites or password protected resources he likes, and he will gain access to all those sites with his OmniPass user credentials

(John_01 and freq14). This is assuming he is accessing those sites with the system onto which he enrolled his OmniPass user. OmniPass does not actually change the credentials of the password protected resource. If John goes to another computer without he OmniPass account to access his webmail, he would need to enter his original webmail credentials (John_02 and lifebook) to gain access. If he attempts his OmniPass user credentials on a system other than a system hes enrolled on, he will not gain access. THE ENROLLMENT PROCEDURE ASSUMES YOU HAVE NO HARDWARE AUTHENTICATION DEVICES OR ALTERNATE STORAGE LOCATIONS THAT YOU WISH TO INTEGRATE WITH OMNIPASS. IF YOU DESIRE SUCH FUNCTIONALITY, CONSULT THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THIS DOCUMENT. 183 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Basic Enrollment The Enrollment Wizard will guide you through the process of enrolling a user. Unless you specified otherwise, after OmniPass installation the Enrollment Wizard will launch on Windows login. If you do not see the Enrollment Wizard, you can bring it up by clicking Start on the Windows taskbar; select Programs; select Softex; click OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. 1 Click Enroll to proceed to username and password verification. By default, the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard enters the credentials of the currently logged in Windows user. 2 Enter the password you use to log in to Windows. This will become the master password for this OmniPass user. In most cases, the Domain: value will be your Windows computer name. In a corporate environment, or when accessing corporate resources, the Domain: may not be your Windows computer name. Click [Next] to continue. 3 In this step OmniPass captures your fingerprint. Refer to Enrolling a Fingerprint on page 184 for additional information. 4 Next, choose how OmniPass notifies you of various events. We recommend you keep Taskbar Tips on Beginner mode taskbar tips and Audio Tips on at least Prompt with system beeps only until you get accustomed to how OmniPass operates. Click [Next] to proceed with user enrollment. You will then see a Congratulations screen indicating your completion of user enrollment. 5 Click [Done] to exit the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. You will be asked if youd like to log in to OmniPass with your newly enrolled user; click [Yes]. Enrolling a Fingerprint Enrolling a fingerprint will increase the security of your system and streamline the authentication procedure. You enroll fingerprints in the OmniPass Control Center. With an OmniPass user logged in, double-click the system tray OmniPass icon. Select the User Settings tab and click Enrollment under the User Settings area. Click Enroll Authentication Device and authenticate at the authentication prompt to start device enrollment. 184 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device 1 During initial user enrollment, you will be prompted to select the finger you wish to enroll. Fingers that have already been enrolled will be marked by a green check. The finger you select to enroll at this time will be marked by a red arrow. OmniPass will allow you re-enroll a finger. If you choose a finger that has already been enrolled and continue enrollment, OmniPass will enroll the fingerprint, overwriting the old fingerprint. Select a finger to enroll and click [Next]. 2 It is now time for OmniPass to capture your selected fingerprint. It may take a several capture attempts before OmniPass acquires your fingerprint. Should OmniPass fail to acquire your fingerprint, or if the capture screen times out, click [Back] to restart the fingerprint enrollment process.

Your system has a swipe fingerprint sensor. A swipe sensor is small and resembles a skinny elongated rectangle. To capture a fingerprint, gently swipe or pull your fingertip over the sensor (starting at the second knuckle) towards yourself. Swiping too fast or too slow will result in a failed capture. The Choose Finger screen has a [Practice] button; click it to practice capturing your fingerprint. When you are comfortable with how your fingerprint is captured, proceed to enroll a finger. 3 Once OmniPass has successfully acquired the fingerprint, the Verify Fingerprint screen will automatically appear. To verify your enrolled fingerprint, place your fingertip on the sensor and hold it there as if you were having a fingerprint captured. Successful fingerprint verification will show a green fingerprint in the capture window and the text Verification Successful under the capture window. Using OmniPass You are now ready to begin using OmniPass. Used regularly, OmniPass will streamline your authentications. Password Replacement You will often use the password replacement function. When you go to a restricted access website (e.g., your bank, your web-based email, online auction or payment sites), you are always prompted to enter your login credentials. OmniPass can detect these prompts and you can teach OmniPass your login credentials. The next time you go to that website, you can authenticate with your fingerprint to gain access. 185 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device OmniPass Authentication Toolbar After installing OmniPass and restarting, you will notice a dialog you have not seen before at Windows Logon. This is the OmniPass Authentication Toolbar, and it is displayed whenever the OmniPass authentication system is invoked. The OmniPass authentication system may be invoked frequently: during Windows Logon, during OmniPass Logon, when unlocking your workstation, when resuming from sleep or hibernate, when unlocking a password-enabled screensaver, during password replacement for remembered site or application logins, and more. When you see this toolbar, OmniPass is prompting you to authenticate. The Logon Authentication window indicates what OmniPass-restricted function you are attempting. The icons in the lower left (fingerprint and key) show what authentication methods are available to you. Selected authentication methods are highlighted while unselected methods are not. When you click the icon for an unselected authentication method, the authentication prompt associated with that method is displayed. When prompted to authenticate, you must supply the appropriate credentials: an enrolled finger for the fingerprint capture window or your master password for the master password prompt (the key icon). Remembering a Password OmniPass can remember any application, GUI, or password protected resource that has a password prompt. Using the following procedure, you can store a set of credentials into OmniPass. These credentials will then be linked to your master password or fingerprint. Go to a site that requires a login (username and password), but do not log in yet. At the site login prompt, enter your username and password in the prompted fields, but do not enter the site (do not hit [Enter],

[Submit], [OK], or Login). Right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and select Remember Password from the submenu. The Windows arrow cursor will change to a golden key OmniPass cursor. Click the OmniPass cursor in the login prompt area, but dont click [Login] or [Submit]. 186 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Associating a Friendly Name After clicking the OmniPass key cursor near the login prompt, OmniPass will prompt you to enter a friendly name for this site. You should enter something that reminds you of the website, the company, or the service you are logging into. In its secure database, OmniPass associates this friendly name with this website. Additional Settings for Remembering a Site When OmniPass prompts you to enter a friendly name you also have the opportunity to set how OmniPass authenticates you to this site. There are three effective settings for how OmniPass handles a remembered site. The default setting is Automatically click the OK or Submit button for this password protected site once the user is authenticated. With this setting, each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass, you will automatically be logged into the site. Less secure is the option to Automatically enter this password protected site when it is activated. Do not prompt for authentication. Check the upper box to get this setting, and each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will log you into the site without prompting you to authenticate. THIS SETTING IS MORE CONVENIENT IN THAT WHENEVER YOU GO TO A SITE REMEMBERED WITH THIS SETTING, YOU WILL BYPASS ANY AUTHENTICATION PROCEDURE AND GAIN INSTANT ACCESS TO THE SITE. BUT SHOULD YOU LEAVE YOUR SYSTEM UNATTENDED WITH YOUR OMNIPASS USER LOGGED IN, ANYONE USING YOUR SYSTEM CAN BROWSE TO YOUR PASSWORD PROTECTED SITES AND GAIN AUTOMATIC ACCESS. If you uncheck both boxes in Settings for this Password Site, OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass your credentials will be filled in to the site login prompt, but you will have to click the website [OK], [Submit], or [Login] button to gain access to the site. 187 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Click Finish to complete the remember password procedure. The site location, the credentials to access the site, and the OmniPass authentication settings for the site are now stored in the OmniPass secure database. The OmniPass authentication settings (Settings for this Password Site) can always be changed in Vault Management. Logging in to a Remembered Site Whether or not OmniPass prompts you to authenticate when you return to a remembered site is determined by Settings for this Password Site and can be changed in Vault Management. The following cases are applicable to using OmniPass to login to: Windows, remembered web sites, and all other password protected resources. With Master Password Once you return to a site you have remembered with OmniPass, you may be presented with a master password prompt. Enter your master password and you will be allowed into the site. Logging into Windows with a Fingerprint Device When logging into Windows with a fingerprint device, the fingerprint capture window will now appear next to the Windows Login screen. Place your enrolled fingertip on the sensor to authenticate. You will be simultaneously logged into Windows and OmniPass. The capture window will also appear if you have used Ctrl-Alt-Del to lock a system, and the fingerprint device can be used to log back in as stated above. IF A MACHINE IS LOCKED AND OMNIPASS DETECTS A DIFFERENT USER LOGGING BACK IN WITH A FINGERPRINT, THE FIRST USER WILL BE LOGGED OUT AND THE SECOND USER LOGGED IN. 188 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Password Management OmniPass provides an interface that lets you manage your passwords. To access this GUI, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management; you will be prompted to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Passwords under Vault Settings. You will see the Manage Passwords interface, with a list of friendly names. You can view the credentials stored for any remembered website by highlighting the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and clicking Unmask Values. Should a password be reset, or an account expire, you can remove stored credentials from OmniPass. Highlight the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and click Delete Page. You will be prompted to confirm the password deletion. The two check boxes in Manage Passwords govern whether OmniPass prompts you to authenticate or directly logs you into the remembered site. OmniPass will overwrite an old set of credentials for a website if you attempt to use Remember Password on an already remembered site. The exception to the above rule is when resetting the Windows password. If your password is reset in Windows, the next time you login to Windows, OmniPass will detect the password change and prompt you to Update or Reconfirm the password with OmniPass. Enter your new Windows password in the prompt and click OK. Your OmniPass "master password" will still be your Windows password. OmniPass User Identities Identities allow OmniPass users to have multiple accounts to the same site (e.g., bob@biblomail.com and boballen@biblomail.com). If OmniPass did not provide you identities, you would be limited to remembering one account per site. To create and manage identities, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management; OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Identities under Vault Settings. You can only manage the identities of the currently logged in OmniPass user 189 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device To add a new identity, click New Identity or double-click Click here to add a new identity. Name the new identity and click [OK], then click [Apply]. You can now switch to the new identity and start remembering passwords. To delete an identity, highlight the identity you want to delete and click [Delete Identity], then [Apply]. WHEN YOU DELETE AN IDENTITY, ALL OF ITS ASSOCIATED REMEMBERED SITES AND PASSWORD PROTECTED DIALOGS ARE LOST. To set the default identity, highlight the identity you want as default and click [Set as Default]; click

[Apply] to ensure the settings are saved. If you log in to OmniPass with a fingerprint device, you will automatically be logged in to the default identity for that OmniPass user. You can choose the identity with which you are logging in if you login using "master password". Choosing User Identity during Login To choose your identity during login, type your username in the User Name: field. Press [Tab] and see that the Domain: field self-populates. Click the Password: field to bring the cursor to it, and you will see the pull-down menu in the Identity: field. Select the identity to login as, then click OK. Switch User Identity To switch identities at any time, right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and click Switch User Identity from the submenu. The Switch Identity dialog will appear. Select the desired identity and then click OK. Identities and Password Management On the Manage Passwords interface of the Vault Management tab of the OmniPass Control Center, there is a pull-down selection box labeled, Identity. This field lets you choose which identity you are managing passwords for. When you select an identity here, only those password protected dialogs that are associated with that identity are shown. You can perform all the functions explained in Password Management on page 189. 190 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Configuring OmniPass This section gives an overview of both the Export/Import function and the OmniPass Control Center. Exporting and Importing Users YOU CANNOT IMPORT A USER INTO OMNIPASS IF THERE ALREADY IS A USER WITH THE SAME NAME ENROLLED IN OMNIPASS. Using OmniPass Control Center, you can export and import users in and out of OmniPass. The export process backs up all remembered sites, credentials, and enrolled fingerprints for an OmniPass user. All OmniPass data for a user is backed up to a single encrypted database file. During the import process, the Windows login of the exported user is required. If the proper credentials cannot be supplied, the user profile will not be imported.

YOU SHOULD PERIODICALLY EXPORT YOUR USER PROFILE AND STORE IT IN A SAFE PLACE. IF ANYTHING HAPPENS TO YOUR SYSTEM, YOU CAN IMPORT YOUR OMNIPASS PROFILE TO A NEW SYSTEM AND HAVE ALL YOUR REMEMBERED SETTINGS AND FINGERPRINTS INSTANTLY.

YOU DON'T FORGET THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS WHEN EXPORTING. WHEN YOU EXAMINE THE IMPORTATION, YOU ARE PROMPTED FOR AUTHENTICATION. THE CREDENTIALS THAT WILL ALLOW A USER PROFILE TO BE IMPORTED ARE THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS OF THE EXPORTED USER. THEY ARE THE CREDENTIALS THAT HAD TO BE SUBMITTED WHEN THE USER PROFILE WAS EXPORTED. YOU WILL NEED USER NAME, PASSWORD, AND DOMAIN. Exporting an OmniPass User Profile To export a user, open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Import/Export User under Manage Users. Click Exports an OmniPass user profile. OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Upon successfully authentication, you must name the OmniPass user profile and decide where to save it. An .opi file is generated, and you should store a copy of it in a safe place. 191 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device This .opi file contains all your user specific OmniPass data, and it is both encrypted and password protected. This user profile does NOT contain any of your encrypted data files. Importing an OmniPass User Profile To import an OmniPass user open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Import/Export User under Manage Users. Click Imports a new user into OmniPass and then select OmniPass Import/Export File

(*.opi) and click Next. OmniPass will then prompt you to browse for the file you had previously exported

(.opi file). When you select the .opi file for importation, OmniPass will prompt you for authentication. The credentials that will allow a user profile to be imported are the Windows login credentials of the exported user. They are the credentials that had to be submitted when the user profile was exported. You will need User Name, Password, and Domain. If you dont remember the value for Domain, in a PC or SOHO environment Domain should be your computer name. OmniPass will notify you if the user was successfully imported. Things to Know Regarding Import/Export

Assume you export a local Windows User profile from OmniPass. You want to import that profile to another machine that has OmniPass. Before you can import the profile, a Windows user with the same login credentials must be created on the machine importing the profile.

Example: I have a Windows user with the username Tom and the password Sunshine on my system. I have enrolled Tom into OmniPass and remembered passwords. I want to take all my passwords to new system. I export Toms OmniPass user profile. I go to my new system and using the Control Panel I create a user with the username "Tom" and the password "Sunshine". I can now successfully import the OmniPass user data to the new system. If you export an OmniPass-only user, you can import that user to any computer running OmniPass, provided that a user with that name is not already enrolled in OmniPass. If you attempt to import a user profile who has the same name as a user already enrolled in OmniPass, the OmniPass import function will fail. 192 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device

OmniPass Control Center This section will serve to explain functions within the OmniPass Control Center that werent explained earlier. You can access the OmniPass Control Center any of three ways:

Double-click the golden OmniPass key shaped icon in the Windows taskbar (typically in the lower-

right corner of the desktop)

Click the Start button; select the Programs group; select the Softex program group; and click the OmniPass Control Center selection.

Open the Windows Control Panel (accessible via Start button --> Settings --> Control Panel) and double-click the Softex OmniPass icon. User Management The User Management tab has two major interfaces: Add/Remove User and Import/Export User. Import/Export User functionality is documented in Exporting and Importing Users on page 191. Add/Remove User functionality is straightforward. If you click Adds a new user to OmniPass you will start the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. The Enrollment Wizard is documented in User Enrollment on page 183. If you click Removes a user from OmniPass, OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Authenticate with the credentials (or enrolled fingerprint) of the user you wish to remove. OmniPass will prompt you to confirm user removal. Click OK to complete user removal. REMOVING A USER WILL AUTOMATICALLY DESTROY ALL OMNIPASS DATA ASSOCIATED WITH THAT USER. ALL IDENTITIES AND CREDENTIALS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USER WILL BE LOST. IF YOURE SURE YOU WANT TO REMOVE THE USER, WE RECOMMEND YOU EXPORT THE USER PROFILE. 193 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device User Settings The User Settings tab has four interfaces: Audio Settings, Taskbar Tips, and Enrollment. User settings allow users to customize OmniPass to suit their individual preferences. Under User Settings (Audio Settings and Taskbar Tips) you can set how OmniPass notifies the user of OmniPass events (e.g., successful login, access denied, etc.). The details of each setting under the Audio Settings and Taskbar Tips interfaces are self-explanatory. The Enrollment interface allows you to enroll fingerprints. For the procedure to enroll and authentication device refer to Chapter 2.3. To enroll additional fingerprints, click Enroll Authentication Device, and authenticate with OmniPass. Select the fingerprint recognition device in the Select Authentication Device screen (it should already be marked by a green check if you have a finger enrolled) and click Next. System Settings The OmniPass Startup Options interface can be found in the System Settings tab. With these options you can specify how your OmniPass Logon is tied to your Windows Logon. The first option, Automatically log on to OmniPass as the current user, will do just as it says; during Windows login, you will be logged on to OmniPass using your Windows login credentials. If the user logging into Windows was never enrolled into OmniPass, upon login no one will be logged on to OmniPass. This setting is appropriate for an office setting or any setting where users must enter a username and password to log into a computer. This is the default setting. With the second option, Manually log on to OmniPass at startup, OmniPass will prompt you to login once you have logged on to Windows. With the third option, Do not log on to OmniPass at startup, OmniPass will not prompt for a user to be logged on. You can manually log on to OmniPass by right-clicking the OmniPass taskbar icon and clicking Log in User from the right-click menu. 194 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Troubleshooting You cannot use OmniPass to create Windows users. You must first create the Windows user, and you will need administrative privileges to do that. Once the Windows user is created, you can add that user to OmniPass using the same username and password Cannot add Windows users to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a Windows user to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. You can do this by going to Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Network Access: Sharing and Security Model for Local Accounts. The correct setting should be Classic -

Local Users Authenticate as Themselves. Cannot add a User with a Blank Password to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a user with a blank password to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. First attempt the procedure explained in the Cannot add Windows user to OmniPass section. If the difficulties persist, then try the following procedure. Click Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Accounts: Limit local account use of blank passwords to console login only. This setting should be set to Disabled. Dialog appears after OmniPass authentication during Windows Logon After installing OmniPass on your system, you can choose to logon to Windows using OmniPass. You authenticate with OmniPass (via master password, or an enrolled security device) and OmniPass logs you into Windows. You may, during this OmniPass authentication, see a Login Error dialog box. This dialog box occurs when OmniPass was unable to log you into Windows with the credentials supplied (username and password). This could happen for any of the following reasons:

Your Windows password has changed

Your Windows account has been disabled 195 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device If you are having difficulties due to the first reason, you will need to update OmniPass with your changed Windows account password. Click Update Password and you will be prompted with a dialog to reconfirm your password. Enter the new password to your Windows user account and click OK. If the error persists, then it is unlikely the problem is due to your Windows user account password changing. 196 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Index A About This Guide 13 AC adapter 68 indicator 31 plug adapters 133 Active Digitizer 47 Air Vents 27, 29 Anti-theft lock slot 26 Anytime USB Charge 17 Auto/Airline Adapter 68, 69 B Battery 81 care 133 cold-swapping 84 conserving power 76 dead 112 faulty 113 hot-swapping 84 increasing life 134 level indicator 31 lithium ion battery 81 low 83 problems 112, 113 recharging 82 replacing 84 shorted 84 Standby mode 83 197 Battery Latches 29 BIOS guide 73 setup utility 72 Bluetooth Where to Find Information 177 Boot Sequence 71 Booting the System 73 Built-in Speakers 108 Button Icons 57, 60 C CapsLock 32 CD-ROM 108, 109 Click Me! 75 Cold-swapping 55 Configuration Label 136 Contact Information 14 Controls and Connectors 17 Conventions Used in the Guide 13 Cursor Keys 40 D DC in connector 17 DC Output Cable 68 DC Power Jack 68 Device Ports 99 DIMM 90 Display Panel 20, 33 brightness 36 opening 33 problems 114, 115 Dock port 18 Docking Port 99 Double-Clicking 43 Dragging 43, 45 Dual Built-in Microphones 22 DVD drive problems 108, 109 E Error Messages 117 ExpressCard problems 111 ExpressCard Eject Button 24 ExpressCard Slot 24 ExpressCards 88 installing 88 removing 89 External Monitor Port 103 External Video Port 28 External Video port 18 F FDU 75, 127, 145 Fingerprint Sensor 22 Fingerprint Sensor Device 179 enrolling a fingerprint 184 getting started 180 installing OmniPass 180 logging into a remembered site 188 OmniPass authentication toolbar 186 password replacement 185 remembering a password 186 uninstalling OmniPass 182 user enrollment 183 using OmniPass 185 Fujitsu Contact Information 14 Fujitsu Driver Update utility 75, 127, 145 Fujitsu LifeBook storing 131 traveling 132 Fujitsu Shopping Online 15 Function Key F10 41 F3 41 F4 41 F6 41 F7 41 F8 41, 53 F9 41, 53 FN 40 G Gigabit LAN (RJ-45) Jack 27 Glossary 147 H Hard Disk Drive access indicator 31 problems 109, 110 Hard Disk Drive Passwords 72 Headphone Jack 18, 102 Hibernation Feature 78 disable/enable 78 I IEEE 1394 (4-pin) Jack 21 IEEE 1394 Port 101 198 Internal LAN Jack 99 K Keyboard 21, 39 cursor keys 39 function keys 40 numeric keypad 39 problems 110 windows keys 40 L LifeBook Security Panel operating 64 passwords 62 setting up 62 uninstalling 65 LifeBook Security/Tablet PC Buttons 56 LifeBook SecurityTablet PC Buttons 20 Lithium ion Battery Bay 29 Local Area Network (LAN) 18 M Media Player battery power 98 care 135 Control Panel 97 loading 94 removing 96 Software 93, 96 using 98 Memory capacity 92 checking capacity 92 compartment 28, 90 199 Memory Stick/Secure Digital Cards 86 Microphone Jack 17, 23, 102 Modular Bay 54 installing 90 problems 110 upgrade module 90 Memory Stick installing 87 removing 87 cold-swapping 55 devices 54 installing 55 removing 55 Modular Devices 55 installing 55 removing 55 Mouse problems 110 N NumLk 32 O Optical Drive 93 Modular Multi-Format DVD Writer 93 tray release 96 P Pen installing a pen tether 52 Pen tether 52 Pen Tether Attachment Point 25 Port Replicator connector 29 problems 109 Post-logon button functions 59 Power AC adapter 68 Auto/Airline adapter 68 failure 111, 112 indicator 30 management 76 off 79 on 70 problems 113 sources 68 Power Management 76 Power On Self Test 71, 117 Power/Suspend/Resume Switch 20, 76 Pre-Installed Software 143 Adobe Acrobat Reader 144 Google Toolbar 145 manuals 144 Pre-logon button functions 57 R Registration 75 Regulatory Information 163 Restarting 78 Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 118 RJ-45 99 S ScrLk 32 Scrolling 46 SD Card installing 87 removing 87 SD/Memory Stick Slot 18 SDRAM 28, 90 200 Secure Digital Card removing 87 Security Buttons Functions 56 Security lock slot 17 Specifications 136 Audio 138 Chipset 137 Device Ports 140 Dimensions and Weight 142 Environmental Requirements 142 Keyboard 141 mass storage device options 138 Memory 137 Microprocessor 137 Power 141 Video 137 Status Indicator Panel 20, 30 Suspend/ Resume button 18 T Tablet Configuration 34 Tablet PC Button Functions changing 61 Touch Screen calibrating 50 clicking 48 dragging 49 Touchpad pointing device 22 scroll button 22 Touchpad Control Adjustment 46 Troubleshooting 105 U Universal Serial Bus Ports 100 USB 100, 110 USB 2.0 Ports 26, 27 USB Port 17 Using the Optional Capacitive Touchscreen 51 V Volume control 53 W Warranty 15 Windows keys 40 Application key 40 Start keys 40 Windows Power Management 78 Wireless LAN Before Using the Wireless LAN 167 configuring 167 connection to the network 172 deactivating/disconnecting 170 modes 168 Specifications 175 Troubleshooting 173 Wireless LAN On-Off Switch 18 201

 

 

LTE Gobi 3000.fm Page 1 Wednesday, June 27, 2012 12:02 PM Wireless Wide Area Network

(WWAN) Getting Started Guide Congratulations on your purchase of a Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC in Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) or WWAN-ready configuration. This document first instructs you on how to determine whether there is a WWAN module already installed in your system. If you not have a WWAN module installed (i.e., your system is WWAN-ready), you will learn how to order and install a module, and (for AT&T and Verizon Wireless LTE customers) how to install and acti-

vate a SIM card. NOTE: This document is applicable to the Sierra Wireless MC8355 Gobi 3000 WWAN Module. Verifying whether you have a WWAN module installed Check the icons on your desktop to see if there is an Install WWAN icon present (see the graphic on the right). If the icon is present, it indicates that your system is WWAN-ready, but there is no WWAN module; if the icon is not present, it indicates that the WWAN module is already installed. If you have a WWAN module installed in your system, it is not necessary for you to complete the rest of this procedure; please proceed to the WWAN Activation flier to connect your device. If you dont have a WWAN module installed in your system, please continue with the rest of this procedure. Obtaining a WWAN module for your system To obtain a WWAN module for your WWAN-ready system, go to the Fujitsu online store at:

http://store.shopfujitsu.com/fpc/Ecommerce/accstore.jsp ONLY WWAN MODULES OBTAINED FROM FUJITSU ARE FUNCTIONAL ON THIS COMPUTER. YOU ARE STRONGLY ADVISED TO ORDER YOUR WWAN MODULE FROM A FUJITSU-AUTHORIZED SOURCE. IN THE EVENT YOU INSTALL A WWAN MODULE THAT HAS NOT BEEN AUTHORIZED BY FUJITSU, FUJITSU ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGES TO THE DEVICE OR YOUR COMPUTER THAT MAY RESULT FROM ITS INSTALLATION. Installing a WWAN module in a WWAN-ready system If you have a WWAN-ready system, and you would like to install a WWAN module, there are two different things that could occur when your click the Install WWAN icon. If you dont have a WWAN module installed yet:

A message will appear stating This unit is WWAN-ready (upgradeable), please shut down the system and then install your WWAN module and SIM card (if applicable) before continuing. If you want to install a WWAN module at a later date:

Be sure you install Sierra AirCard Watcher from Fujitsu Bonus Apps by launching the "Fujitsu Bonus Apps"

desktop icon, selecting Sierra AirCard Watcher, and pressing the [Install] button. After you complete the installation, the Sierra AirCard Watcher icon will appear on your desktop. Note: The first time you click the icon, you will be prompted to accept the license agreement. Click [Accept] to proceed. To install the module, follow the instructions below:

Material Required: WWAN Upgrade Kit Tools Required: Philips Screwdriver, #0 Tools Recommended: Tweezers (for attaching cables to antenna posts) 1 LTE Gobi 3000.fm Page 2 Wednesday, June 27, 2012 12:02 PM Procedure For location of components listed below, reference your system user guide. The system contains components that can be severely damaged by electrostatic discharge

(ESD). To minimize risk to components, observe the following precautions:

BEFORE CHANGING COMPONENTS IN YOUR SYSTEM, IT IS A GOOD PRACTICE TO FIRST TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING A MODULE, HOLD IT BY THE EDGE SO AS NOT TO TOUCH ANY CONTACTS OR CHIPS. BE CAREFUL NOT TO TOUCH ANY INTERNAL TERMINALS OR COMPONENTS; THE OIL FROM YOUR FIN-

GERS COULD CAUSE A SHORT TO THE COMPONENTS. 1. Turn off the power to your notebook and unplug the power adapter. 2. Turn the unit bottom side up and remove the battery. 3. Using a Philips #0 screwdriver, remove the two screws that are securing the WWAN cover. (See Fig. 1). Lift and remove the cover. 4. Locate the module attachment standoff to which the WWAN module will be attached (Fig. 2). 5. Holding the module with the label side up (Figure 3), align the connector edge of the module with the mini card connector slot in the compartment (the card and connector are both keyed so that there is only one way to install it). Cover Screws WWAN Compartment Cover Figure 1. Removing WWAN cover 6. 7. Insert the module at a 45 angle. Press the module edge down so that it lies flat. The hole in the mod-

ule furthest from the battery bay should be aligned over the hole in the attachment standoff. Insert the screw that was contained in the Wireless WAN Upgrade Kit through the module and secure it to the module attachment standoff. Module standoff WWAN Module

(label sideup) Figure 2. Module attachment standoff Figure 3. Installing WWAN module 2 LTE Gobi 3000.fm Page 3 Wednesday, June 27, 2012 12:02 PM PERSONS WITH LARGER HANDS MAY HAVE DIFFICULTY CONNECTING THE CABLES TO THE POSTS MANUALLY. IF NECESSARY, USE A SET OF TWEEZERS, BUT TAKE CARE NOT TO CONTACT OTHER COMPONENTS WITHIN THE COMPARTMENT, AS FRAGILE COMPONENTS COULD BE DAMAGED BY THE TWEEZERS. 8. The yellow cable should be attached to the MAIN antenna post on the module, and the salmon-colored cable to the AUX antenna post as shown in Figure 4. (Be very sure they are connected to the correct posts; MAIN and AUX are printed on the module circuit board adjacent to the posts. The GPS post is between the other two, and is not to be used for this configuration.) Connect the two antenna cables by pressing the cap at the end of the cable over the post associated with each terminal. 9. Route the cables around the module such that they wont be pinched between the module and the cover when it is replaced. 10. Replace the cover and reinstall the screws removed in step 3. 11. If you need or want to install an AT&T or Verizon Wireless LTE SIM card, proceed to Obtaining and install-

ing a SIM card (AT&T 3G/Verizon Wireless LTE users only) . 12. If you are not installing a SIM card, continue with the following steps 13. Replace the battery and apply power to your system. 14. Verify that the WLAN/Bluetooth/WWAN switch is in the ON position. 15. Proceed to the activation flier for your carrier. If it is not readily available, go to:

http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/mobile/accessory to download one. Antenna Posts with Connectors Attached WWAN Module Figure 4. Connecting to Antenna Posts Obtaining and installing a SIM card (AT&T 3G/Verizon Wireless LTE users only) To obtain a SIM card, you will need to contact your WWAN account representative or your local provider. To install the SIM card in your notebook, perform the following steps carefully:

1. Verify that your system is powered down and unplug any connected power adapter. 2. Turn your system upside down and rest it on a flat surface. 3. Remove the battery as directed in your system user guide. 4. Locate the SIM Slot as shown in Figure 5. 3 LTE Gobi 3000.fm Page 4 Wednesday, June 27, 2012 12:02 PM 5. Position the SIM card as shown in the small orientation figure in Figure 5, and push it into the SIM card slot until flush with the slot edge. 6. Replace the battery. Turn the system so the top is facing up. 7. Apply power to your system. 8. Verify that the WLAN/Bluetooth/

WWAN switch is in the ON posi-

tion. SIM card slot SIM Card Slot SIM card Battery Bay with Battery Removed SIM Card SIM Slot Orientation Icon Figure 5. SIM slot location 9. To remove the SIM card, push the SIM card in slightly to unlock it. It will pop out of the slot slightly, allowing you to remove it. After installing the SIM, refer to the providers activation flier to connect to AT&T or Verizon Wireless LTE. If the flier is not readily available, you can download one from:

http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/mobile/accessory Once the activation request is initiated, activation should occur within 10 minutes, but under some cir-

cumstances the process could take up to 48 hours. THE GPS OPTION ONLY PROVIDES COORDINATES. A GPS APPLICATION (COMPATIBLE WITH NMEA V3.1 OR LATER) MUST BE PURCHASED SEPARATELY. NOTE: The available Cellular signal strength will vary from location to location. Buildings, natural obsta-

cles such as mountains, and tower locations play a large part in the performance. Your system is designed to achieve the maximum signal strength available in notebook mode, since the antennas are located at the top of the display housing. If your signal strength seems weak or the performance seems slower in tablet mode, please convert to notebook mode and try again. Fujitsu, the Fujitsu logo, and LIFEBOOK are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Ltd. in the United States and other countries. AT&T and other AT&T product/service names and logos are trademarks and service marks of AT&T Intellec-

tual Property or AT&T affiliated company (AT&T Marks). Verizon Wireless and the Verizon Wireless logo are trade-

marks of Verizon Trademark Services, LLC.Sierra, AirCard, and Watcher are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sierra Wireless, Inc. in the United States and other coun-

tries. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the prop-

erty of their respective owners.

 

 

Users Guide Learn how to use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC Guide dutilisation Dcouvrez comment utiliser votre ordinateur portable Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T902 Users Guide Learn how to use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC 1 -

Copyright and Trademark Information Fujitsu America, Inc. has made every effort to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document; however, as ongoing development efforts are continually improving the capabilities of our products, we cannot guarantee the accuracy of the contents of this document. We disclaim liability for errors, omissions, or future changes. Fujitsu, the Fujitsu logo, and LIFEBOOK are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited. Intel, Intel Core, and Centrino are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Atheros is a registered trademark of Atheros Communications, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., USA. OmniPass is a trademark of Softex, Inc. PowerDirector, PowerDVD, MakeDisc, and YouCam are trademarks of CyberLink Corp. Adobe and Adobe Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Norton and Norton Internet Security are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation in the United States and other countries. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, and DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Boost is a trademark of DTS (BVI) Limited (in Hong Kong and China) and DTS, Inc. (outside of Hong Kong and China). DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Copyright 2012 Fujitsu America, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or translated, without prior written consent of Fujitsu. No part of this publication may be stored or transmitted in any electronic form without the written consent of Fujitsu. B6FJ-8321-01ENZ0-00 1 WARNING: HANDLING THE CORD ON THIS PRODUCT WILL EXPOSE YOU TO LEAD, A CHEMICAL KNOWN TO THE STATE OF CALIFORNIA TO CAUSE BIRTH DEFECTS OR OTHER REPRODUCTIVE HARM. WASH HANDS AFTER HANDLING. USER GUIDE FOR WIRELESS BROADBAND CONNECTION IF YOU HAVE THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS WAN (WWAN) DEVICE INSTALLED IN YOUR NOTEBOOK, THE WWAN USERS GUIDE IS LOCATED AT:

HTTP://SOLUTIONS.US.FUJITSU.COM/WWW/CONTENT/SUPPORT/MOBILE/SUPPORT_NOTICES PLEASE CLICK 3G MINI-CARD GOBI3000 REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION TO OPEN THE FULL USER GUIDE CONTAINING WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS ASSOCIATED WITH RF SAFETY WHEN USING THE WWAN DEVICE. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY according to FCC Part 15 Responsible Party Name:

Address:

Telephone:

Declares that product:

Fujitsu America, Inc. 1250 E. Arques Avenue Sunnyvale, CA 94085

(408) 746-6000 Base Model Configuration: LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operations are subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. 2 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This unit requires an AC adapter to operate. Use only UL Listed I.T.E. Adapters with an output rating of 19 VDC, with a current of 4.22 A (80 W). AC adapter output polarity:

When using your notebook equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:

The bottom of this notebook computer can become hot when used for long periods of time. When using this notebook, take caution to limit long term or continuous use while resting it on exposed skin, such as the lap. Do not use this product near water for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. Use only the power cord and batteries indicated in this manual. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire. They may explode. Check with local codes for possible special disposal instructions. CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions on the next page. For Authorized Repair Technicians Only SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF LITHIUM (CLOCK) BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTION. FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME TYPE AND RATING FUSE. 3 Recycling your battery Over time, the batteries that run your mobile computer will begin to hold a charge for a shorter amount of time; this is a natural occurrence for all batteries. When this occurs, you may want to replace the battery with a fresh one*. If you replace it, it is important that you dispose of the old battery properly because batteries contain materials that could cause environmental damage if disposed of improperly. Fujitsu is very concerned with environmental protection, and has enlisted the services of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation

(RBRC)**, a non-profit public service organization dedicated to protecting our environment by recycling old batteries at no cost to you. RBRC has drop-off points at tens of thousands of locations throughout the United States and Canada. To find the location nearest you, go to www.RBRC.org or call 1-800-822-8837. If there are no convenient RBRC locations near you, you can also go to the EIA Consumer Education Initiative website (http://EIAE.org/) and search for a convenient disposal location. Remember protecting the environment is a cooperative effort, and you should make every effort to protect it for current and future generations.

* To order a new battery for your Fujitsu mobile computer, go to the Fujitsu shopping site at www.shopfujitsu.com in the US or www.fujitsu.ca/products/notebooks in Canada.

** RBRC is an independent third party to which Fujitsu provides funding for battery recycling; RBRC is in no way affiliated with Fujitsu. 4 Contents Chapter 1 About This Guide . 8 Conventions Used in the Guide. 8 Fujitsu Contact Information . 9 Getting to Know Your LIFEBOOK Overview . 11 Locating the Controls and Connectors . 12 Top Components . 15 Left-Side Panel Components. 17 Right-Side Panel Components . 19 Back Panel Components . 21 Bottom Components . 22 Status Indicator Panel . 24 Power Indicator . 24 Battery Charging Indicators . 25 Battery Level Indicator . 25 Display Panel . 27 Opening the Display Panel . 27 Using the System as a Tablet . 28 Changing Auto Rotation Feature . 29 Adjusting Display Panel Brightness . 30 Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor . 31 1 Keyboard. 32 Using the Keyboard. 32 Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen. 35 Using the Touchpad . 35 Active Digitizer Display . 38 Using the Capacitive Touchscreen . 42 General Gesture Mode: One- and Two-Finger Gestures. 42 Installing a Pen Tether . 44 Volume Control. 45 Controlling the Volume. 45 Modular Bay Devices . 46 Removing and Installing Modular Devices . 46 LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons. 48 Security Button Functions. 48 Post-logon button functions. 50 Changing Tablet PC Button Functions . 51 Setting up LIFEBOOK Security Panel. 52 Passwords . 52 Using Your LIFEBOOK Security Panel . 54 Precautions . 54 Uninstalling/Re-installing the Security Panel Application . 55 Getting Started with Your LIFEBOOK Power Sources . 57 Connecting the Power Adapters . 57 Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 59 Power On . 59 Boot Sequence . 60 Hard Disk Drive Passwords . 61 BIOS Setup Utility . 61 2 -

Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Booting the System. 62 Starting Windows the First Time. 62 Power Management . 64 Power/Suspend/Resume Slide . 64 Sleep Mode . 64 Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) Feature. 65 Windows Power Management . 65 Restarting the System. 66 Powering Off . 66 ENERGY STAR Compliance. 67 User-Installable Features Lithium ion Battery . 68 Recharging the Batteries . 69 Replacing the Battery . 71 Secure Digital Cards. 73 Installing SD Cards . 74 Removing an SD Card . 74 Memory Upgrade Module . 75 Installing Memory Upgrade Modules. 75 Removing a Memory Upgrade Module . 77 Checking the Memory Capacity . 77 Device Ports . 79 Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack . 79 Port Replicator Connector . 79 Universal Serial Bus Ports . 80 Information About Anytime USB Charge Utility. 81 Headphone Jack . 81 Microphone Jack . 81 HDMI Port.. 82 External Video Port . 82 3 -

Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Port Replicator . 83 Port Replicator Components. 84 Attaching the Port Replicator . 86 Detaching Port Replicator. 86 Troubleshooting Your LIFEBOOK Troubleshooting. 87 Identifying the Problem . 87 Specific Problems . 89 Power On Self Test Messages . 98 Restoring Your System Image and Software. 99 Saving and Recovering Your Factory and System Images . 99 Backing Up a System Image . 101 Recovery and Utility tabs . 105 Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility . 106 Downloading Driver Updates . 107 Care and Maintenance Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 108 Cleaning your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 109 Cleaning the dust filter . 111 Storing your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 112 Traveling with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC . 112 Batteries . 113 Media Care . 114 4 -

Chapter 6 System Specifications Specifications . 116 Microprocessor . 116 Chipset. 116 Memory . 116 Video . 117 Digitizer. 117 Audio . 117 Mass Storage Device Options . 117 Modular Bay Devices. 118 Features. 118 Device Ports. 119 Keyboard . 120 Power. 120 Dimensions and Weight . 121 Environmental Requirements. 121 Popular Accessories. 121 Pre-Installed Software . 122 Learning About Your Software . 122 Glossary/Regulatory Glossary. 125 Regulatory Information . 138 5 -

Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN. 142 Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document . 142 Characteristics of the WLAN Device . 142 Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device. 143 Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device. 145 Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch . 146 Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar. 146 Activating the WLAN Device . 146 Configuring the Wireless LAN. 147 Configuring the WLAN . 147 Connection to the network . 147 Troubleshooting the WLAN. 148 Troubleshooting . 148 WLAN Specifications . 150 Specifications . 150 Using the Bluetooth Device . 151 What is Bluetooth . 151 Where to Find Information About Bluetooth . 151 Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device . 153 Getting Started . 154 Installing OmniPass . 154 User Enrollment . 156 Using OmniPass . 159 Configuring OmniPass . 164 OmniPass Control Center . 166 Troubleshooting . 166 6 -

Appendix C: Using Intel Wireless Display Using the Wireless Display technology . 168 Starting the WiDi application . 169 Index . 170 7 -

Preface About This Guide The LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC from Fujitsu America is a powerful convertible computer. It can be used either as a standard notebook using keyboard input, or in tablet configuration using pen input. It is powered by the new 3rd Generation Intel Core Processor, has a built-in color display with a dual digitizer, and brings the computing power of desktop personal computers (PCs) to a portable and versatile environment. This manual explains how to operate your LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PCs hardware and pre-installed system software. Conventions Used in the Guide Keyboard and on-screen keys appear in brackets. Example: [Fn], [F1], [ESC], [ENTER] and [CTRL]. Pages with additional information about a specific topic are cross-referenced within the text. For example: (See Installation Procedure on page 43.) Note that all cross-references are linked to the referenced items, so by clicking the link, you will automatically go to the referenced item or page. On-screen menu items appear in bold. Example: Click Fujitsu Menu, and select your choice. THE INFORMATION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT WILL ENHANCE YOUR UNDERSTANDING OF THE SUBJECT MATERIAL. 8 THE CAUTION ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT IS IMPORTANT TO THE SAFE OPERATION OF YOUR COMPUTER, OR TO THE INTEGRITY OF YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL CAUTION INFORMATION CAREFULLY. THE WARNING ICON HIGHLIGHTS INFORMATION THAT CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO EITHER YOU, YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC, OR YOUR FILES. PLEASE READ ALL WARNING INFORMATION CAREFULLY. Fujitsu Contact Information Service and Support Service and Support You can contact Fujitsu Service and Support in the following ways:

Toll free: 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Website:

U.S.A. - us.fujitsu.com/solutions Canada - www.fujitsu.ca Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:

Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any 9 - About This Guide Fujitsu Shopping Online You can go directly to the online by going to the website at: www.shopfujitsu.com. Maintaining Latest Configuration To ensure that you always have the most current driver updates related to your system, you should occasionally access the Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility. The FSDM utility is available to allow you to download the latest drivers, utilities, and applications from the Fujitsu Support site. If you have a Windows 7 operating system, you will need to go to the Support Site (http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS). Limited Warranty Your LIFEBOOK notebook is backed by a Fujitsu International Limited Warranty. Check the service kit that came with your notebook for the Limited Warranty period and terms and conditions. 10 - About This Guide Chapter 1 Getting to Know Your LIFEBOOK Overview This section describes the components of your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC. We strongly recommend that you read it before using your Tablet PC even if you are already familiar with notebook computers. Figure 1. Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC 11 Locating the Controls and Connectors Connectors and peripheral interfaces on the LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC and the optional port replicator allow you to connect a variety of devices. Specific locations are illustrated in Figures 2 through 6. The table below provides a short description of each icon on the LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC and/or optional port replicator. Each of the icons is either molded into or printed on the Tablet PC or port replicator chassis. Connection Tablet PC Icon Purpose SD/SDHC slot Smart Card Slot USB Port USB Port with Anytime USB Charge Microphone Jack Headphone Jack HDMI Port The Secure Digital (SD)/SHDC card slot allows you to insert a flash memory card for data storage. Flash memory cards allow you to transfer data to and from a variety of different digital devices. A dedicated Smart Card slot allows you to insert a Smart Card on which you can store such data as medical information or electronic cash. Connect Universal Serial Bus devices to the Tablet PC. Note that USB ports with a black tab in the center are for 2.0 or 1.1 compliant USB devices; those with a blue tab are for USB 3.0 devices.

Connect Universal Serial Bus 2.0 or 1.1 compliant USB devices. This port can also be used to charge USB devices whether the system is powered on or not. Connect an external microphone. The internal microphone is disabled when you plug in an external microphone. Connect stereo headphones or powered external speakers. The internal speaker is disabled when you plug in external headphones or powered speakers. The HDMI port allows you to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as a high-definition television or AV receiver). Security lock slot The security slot allows you to secure the Tablet PC using compatible locking devices. 12 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Connection Tablet PC Icon Purpose Suspend/

Resume slide Local Area Network

(LAN) Wireless Device On-

Off Switch External Video port Digital Video Interface DisplayPort The Suspend/Resume slide allows you to suspend Tablet PC activity without powering off, resume your Tablet PC from suspend mode, and power on the system when it has been shut down from Windows. The LAN (RJ-45) jack is used to connect the internal 10/100/1000* Base-T/Tx Ethernet to a Local Area Network (LAN) in your office or home, or broadband devices such as a cable modem, DSL, or satellite Internet.

*1000 Mbps, commonly referred to as Gigabit Ethernet. The Wireless Device switch allows you to turn power to the optional wireless devices on and off. The external video port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector to your computer. The DVI-D port on the optional port replicator allows you to connect a flat-panel LCD monitor or television that is equipped with a DVI-D port for ultra-crisp digital images and graphics. The DisplayPort on the optional port replicator lets you to connect DisplayPort-compatible digital display devices such flat panel displays and digital projectors using a DisplayPort cable. 13 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Optional Web Cam Web Cam Access LED Display Panel Windows Button LIFEBOOK Security/

Tablet PC Buttons Power/Suspend/

Resume Slide Built-in Microphone Ambient Light Sensor Keyboard Status Indicator Panel Built-in Microphone Fingerprint Sensor Stereo Speaker Status Indicator Panel Wireless Device On/Off Switch SD/SDHC Card Slot Stereo Speaker Touchpad Cursor Control Figure 2. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC with display open 14 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Top Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs top components. Web Camera The optional FHD (1920 x 1080 pixel) digital web camera can be used to take pictures of yourself to send over the internet. Web Cam Access LED The web cam access LED indicates when the web camera is activated. Display Panel The display panel is a color LED panel with backlighting for the display of text and graphics. The display has an active digitizer that is used with a stylus, and a dual digitizer that can be used with either a stylus or your fingers. Windows Button After you log on, the Windows button can be used to perform two functions. When pressed alone, it opens up the Start menu. When pressed at the same time as the power button, it acts the same as if pressing [Ctl] + [Alt] + [Del]. LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons The LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Buttons provide password security for your system, as well as one-touch application launch capability. See LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons on page 48. Power/Suspend/Resume Slide The Power/Suspend/Resume slide allows you to suspend Tablet PC activity without powering off, resume your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from sleep mode, and power on your Tablet PC when it has been shut down from Windows. See Power/Suspend/Resume Slide on page 64. Dual Built-in Microphones The built-in microphones allows you to record voice and annotations. Keyboard A full-size keyboard with dedicated Windows keys. See Keyboard on page 32. 15 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Dual Stereo Speakers The built-in dual speakers provide stereo sound. Touchpad Cursor Control The touchpad cursor control offers an additional method for moving the cursor. See Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen on page 35. SD/SDHC Card Slot The SD/SDHC card slot allows you to install a Secure Digital (SD) card for data storage. This architecture allows you to transfer data from a variety of different digital devices. See Installing SD Cards on page 74. Wireless Device On/Off Switch The wireless device on/off switch is used to turn on and off the optional wireless devices. Switching it off when not in use will help to extend battery life. See Activating the WLAN Device on page 146. Status Indicator Panels The Status Indicator Panels display symbols that correspond to specific components of your Tablet PC. Status indicators are located in two locations: on the front edge of the system (system status indicators) and below the application buttons (button status indicators). See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Fingerprint Sensor The fingerprint sensor device allows you to log onto your system and password-protected websites and applications by swiping your finger over the sensor. See Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device on page 153. Ambient Light Sensor The ambient light sensor measures the light in which the computer is operating and automatically adjusts the brightness of the display to suit the lighting conditions. See Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor on page 31. 16 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Air Vents HDMI Port Smart Card Slot DC Power Jack External Video Port USB 3.0 Port with Anytime USB Charge Headphone Jack Microphone Jack Figure 3. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC left-side panel USB 3.0 Port Left-Side Panel Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs left-side components. Air Vents The air vents are used to cool the system to prevent overheating. TO PROTECT YOUR TABLET PC FROM DAMAGE AND TO OPTIMIZE PERFORMANCE, BE SURE TO KEEP ALL AIR VENTS UNOBSTRUCTED, CLEAN, AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS. THIS MAY REQUIRE PERIODIC CLEANING, DEPENDING UPON THE ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH THE SYSTEM IS USED. DO NOT OPERATE THE TABLET PC IN AREAS WHERE THE AIR VENTS CAN BE OBSTRUCTED, SUCH AS IN TIGHT ENCLOSURES OR ON SOFT SURFACES LIKE A BED OR CUSHION. HDMI Port The HDMI port is used to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as a high-definition television or AV receiver). See HDMI Port. on page 82. 17 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Smart Card Slot A dedicated Smart Card slot is provided on your Tablet PC. Smart Cards are the same size and shape as a credit card, but they contain embedded integrated circuits. To use the embedded Smart Card Reader, you must purchase optional third-party software for installation. Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to connect headphones. See Headphone Jack on page 81. Microphone Jack The microphone jack allows you to connect an external stereo microphone. See Microphone Jack on page 81. USB 3.0 Port with Anytime USB Charge The USB 3.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 3.0 transfers data at up to 5Gbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 and 2.0 devices, which transfer data at up to 12 Mbps and 480 Mbps, respectively. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 80. Note that this USB 3.0 port has Anytime USB Charge capability, which allows you to charge a USB device whether or not the system is powered on. USB 3.0 Port The USB 3.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 3.0 transfers data at up to 5Gbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 and 2.0 devices, which transfer data at up to 12 Mbps and 480 Mbps, respectively. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 80. External Video Port The external monitor port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector. See External Video Port on page 82. DC Power Jack The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and charge the internal Lithium ion battery. 18 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Modular Bay Device USB 2.0 Port Pen Tether Attachment Point Modular Bay Eject Lever Figure 4. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC right-side panel Anti-theft Lock Slot Pen Garage Right-Side Panel Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs right-side components. Modular Bay The Modular Bay can accommodate one of the following devices. See Modular Bay Devices on page 46. Modular Blu-ray RW Drive. Modular Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer Modular Lithium ion battery Weight Saver USB 2.0 Port The USB 2.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 2.0 transfers data at up to 480 Mbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices, which transfer data at up to 1 2Mbps. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 80. Pen Tether Attachment Point The pen tether attachment point is designed to securely hold a pen tether to prevent loss of the pen. See Installing a Pen Tether on page 44 for additional information. 19 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Pen Garage The pen garage is used to store the pen (also called a stylus) when not in use.The pen is used as the interface with the active digitizer display. Anti-theft Lock Slot The anti-theft lock slot allows you to attach an optional physical lock down device. Modular Bay Eject Lever The Modular Bay Eject Lever allows you to release the modular bay device so that it can be removed. See Modular Bay Devices on page 46. 20 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Gigabit LAN (RJ-45) Jack Figure 5. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC back panel USB 2.0 Port Back Panel Components Following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs back panel components. Gigabit LAN (RJ-45) Jack The internal LAN (RJ-45) jack is used for an internal Gigabit (10Base-T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T) Ethernet LAN connection. See Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack on page 79. USB 2.0 Port The USB 2.0 port allows you to connect Universal Serial Bus devices. USB 2.0 transfers data at up to 480 Mbps and is backward-compatible with USB 1.1 devices, which transfer data at up to 1 2Mbps. See Universal Serial Bus Ports on page 80. 21 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Cleanable Dust Filter Air Vents

(multiple locations) Memory Upgrade Compartment Wireless WAN Module ompartment Battery Latch Battery Latch Port Replicator Connector Lithium ion Battery Figure 6. LIFEBOOK Tablet PC bottom panel Bottom Components The following is a brief description of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs bottom panel components. Memory Upgrade Compartment Your Tablet PC comes with high speed Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic RAM (DDR3 1600 MHz SDRAM). The memory upgrade compartment allows you to expand the system memory capacity of your Tablet PC, thus improving overall performance. See Memory Upgrade Module on page 75. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary to open this compartment. 22 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Air Vents The air vents allow air to circulate through the system to cool down the components. TO PROTECT YOUR TABLET PC FROM DAMAGE AND TO OPTIMIZE SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, BE SURE TO KEEP ALL AIR VENTS UNOBSTRUCTED, CLEAN, AND CLEAR OF DEBRIS. THIS MAY REQUIRE PERIODIC CLEANING, DEPENDING UPON THE ENVIRONMENT IN WHICH THE SYSTEM IS USED. DO NOT OPERATE THE TABLET PC IN AREAS WHERE THE AIR VENTS CAN BE OBSTRUCTED, SUCH AS IN TIGHT ENCLOSURES OR ON SOFT SURFACES LIKE A BED OR CUSHION. Wireless WAN Module Compartment The Wireless WAN module compartment contains the WWAN device. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary to open this compartment. Battery Latches The battery latches are used to secure the Lithium ion battery in the battery bay. Lithium ion Battery Bay The battery bay contains the internal Lithium ion battery. It can be opened for the removal of the battery when stored over a long period of time or for swapping a discharged battery with a charged Lithium ion battery. See Lithium ion Battery on page 68. Cleanable Dust Filter The dust filter is used to help remove dust and dirt fin your system. See Cleaning the dust filter on page 111. Port Replicator Connector This connector allows you to connect the optional Port Replicator to your Tablet PC. 23 - Locating the Controls and Connectors Power Indicator Battery 1 Level Optical/Hard Drive Access Battery Charging Battery 2 Level NumLk ScrLk CapsLk Security Figure 7. Status Indicator Panel Status Indicator Panel There are two Status Indicator Panels on your notebook: on the left front and under the display. The Status Indicator Panels display symbols and associated LEDs that correspond to specific components of your Tablet PC. These symbols tell you how each of those components is operating.(Figure 7) Power Indicator The Power indicator symbol shows whether your system is operational. It has several different states, each of which tells you what mode your Tablet PC is in at that time. 24 - Status Indicator Panel Steady On (Blue): This means that there is power to your Tablet PC and that it is ready for use. Flashing: This means that your Tablet PC is in Sleep mode. Steady Off: This means that your system is either in Hibernate mode, or that your tablet has been turned off. If you are charging your battery, the Power indicator symbol will remain on even if your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is shut off. Even if the system was shut down from Windows, the Power indicator symbol will remain on if you have an adapter connected. Battery Charging Indicators The Battery Charging and Battery Level indicators state whether the Lithium ion battery (Battery 1) or the optional modular battery (Battery 2) are installed and charging. 111 2 Battery Level Indicator The Battery Level indicators display the charge level of the indicated battery pack, as follows:

Green, solid: Battery is between 51% and 100% charged. Orange, solid: Battery is between 13% and 50% charged. Red, solid: Battery is between 0% and 12% charged. Orange, blinking: Blinks during battery status measurement (Four seconds after the battery is installed). Red, blinking: There is a problem with the battery. Off: There is no battery installed. IF THE BATTERY PACK IS INSTALLED WHILE THE POWER IS TURNED OFF, THE BATTERY LEVEL INDICATOR WILL DISPLAY THE CHARGE LEVEL FOR FIVE SECONDS AFTER IT BLINKS ORANGE. IF THE AC ADAPTER IS NOT CONNECTED OR THE BATTERY PACK IS NOT FULLY CHARGED WHEN THE COMPUTER IS SWITCHED TO SLEEP MODE, THE INDICATOR WILL BLINK. THE LED BLINKS AT THE RATE OF ONE SECOND ON/FIVE SECONDS OFF. BATTERIES SUBJECTED TO SHOCKS, VIBRATION OR EXTREME TEMPERATURES CAN BE PERMANENTLY DAMAGED. A SHORTED BATTERY IS DAMAGED AND MUST BE REPLACED. 25 - Status Indicator Panel Hard Drive/Optical Drive Access Indicator The Hard Drive/Optical Drive Access indicator shows whether your internal hard drive or optical drive are being accessed is being accessed. Security Indicator The Security Indicator flashes (if a password was set) when the system resumes from Off or Sleep modes. You must enter the password that was set in the Security Panel before your system will resume operation. NumLk Indicator The NumLk indicator states that the integral keyboard is set in ten-key numeric keypad mode. CapsLock Indicator The CapsLock indicator states that your keyboard is set to type in all capital letters. ScrLk Indicator The ScrLk indicator states that your scroll lock is active. 26 - Status Indicator Panel Display Panel Figure 8. Opening the Display Panel Display Panel Your LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC contains an LED display panel that is backlit for easier viewing in bright environments. The convertible design of your Tablet PC allows you to open the display fully, rotate it in either direction 180 degrees, and lay it face up on the keyboard. This allows you to use the system as a tablet, much as you would a pad of paper. Opening the Display Panel Simply lift the display up and backwards, (being careful not to touch the screen with your fingers), until it is at a comfortable viewing angle. (Figure 8) 27 - Display Panel Using the System as a Tablet If you would like to use the system as a tablet, perform the following steps. THE DISPLAY CAN BE ROTATED IN EITHER DIRECTION, BUT WHEN RETURNING THE SYSTEM TO NOTEBOOK MODE, BE SURE TO TURN IT BACK TO ITS ORIGINAL POSITION (I.E., THE REVERSE OF HOW YOU TURNED IT WHEN YOU OPENED IT. TURNING THE DISPLAY IN THE INCORRECT DIRECTION COULD CAUSE HINGE DAMAGE. IN THE FOLLOWING STEP, BE SURE TO POSITION THE DISPLAY PERPENDICULAR TO THE KEYBOARD, OTHERWISE THE KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY COVER COULD GET SCRATCHED. 1 Lift the display until it is perpendicular to the keyboard. (Figure 9). 2 When the display is perpendicular to the keyboard, rotate it 180 degrees in either direction (Figure 10) so that it is facing backwards. 3 Holding the top edge of the display panel, pull it forward until it is lying nearly atop the keyboard. 4 To return the system to notebook configuration, repeat steps 3 and 2. C A B D Figure 9. Fully Open Display Figure 10. Rotating Display Figure 11. Tablet Mode 28 - Display Panel Holding the Tablet PC Your computer can be used in tablet configuration in four different orientations: 0o, 90o, 180o, and 270o.

(Figure ). Letters associated with each orientation refer to the position of the system when the arrow is facing up.

(A) Portrait Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned vertically with the web camera on the

(B) 2nd Portrait Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned vertically with the web camera on

(C) Landscape Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned horizontally with the web camera on left. the right. the top. IF YOU HAVE A SYSTEM WITH A WIRELESS WAN MODULE INSTALLED, PLEASE NOTE THE FOLLOWING: WHILE HOLDING THE SYSTEM HORIZONTALLY WITH THE WEB CAMERA AT THE BOTTOM (2ND LANDSCAPE ORIENTATION, AS NOTED BELOW) WWAN MUST NOT BE OPERATED WITH THE ANTENNA OPEN. OPERATING IN THIS POSITION COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE WWAN ANTENNA.

(D) 2nd Landscape Orientation: Hold the system with the display positioned horizontally with the web camera on the bottom. Changing Auto Rotation Feature Your Tablet PC has an Auto Rotation utility that allows you to determine how you would like the display to act when the tablet is rotated. When Auto Rotation is enabled, the display will automatically rotate in the same direction as the screen. When you receive your Tablet PC, Pause and Automatic Pause are set as the defaults for the Auto Rotation utility. When Pause is enabled, the system will not enter Auto Rotate until it is enabled. When Automatic Pause state is enabled, the screen will not rotate automatically if it has been rotated by a means other than Auto Rotation (such as when using the rotate button on the tablet). If the system is in Automatic Pause state, there are several ways to resume Auto Rotate:

Position the display and screen in the same orientation. When the system wakes from standby or hibernate mode. 29 - Display Panel When the system is rebooted or a logoff/logon is performed. When the system is in Pause state, there are several ways to enable it:

Go to the Start menu > All Programs > Auto Rotation Utility, and click Resume. Right-click on the Auto Rotation Utility icon in the system tray and click Resume. Open the Fujitsu Menu by pressing the [A] button or by clicking the Fujitsu Menu icon in the system tray, then clicking the [AutoRotation Resume] button on the second page of the Fujitsu Menu. Adjusting Display Panel Brightness Once you have turned on your Tablet PC, you may want to adjust the brightness level of the screen to a more comfortable viewing level. There are three ways to adjust the brightness: keyboard, power management utility, and Fujitsu Menu. Using Keyboard to Adjust Brightness Adjusting the brightness using the keyboard changes the system setting (i.e., the settings you make via the function keys automatically changes the brightness settings in the systems Pen and Tablet Settings).

[Fn+F6]: Pressing repeatedly will lower the brightness of your display.

[Fn+F7]: Pressing repeatedly will increase the brightness of the display. Using Power Management to Adjust Brightness To adjust brightness with the power management utility:

Click Start -> Control Panel. In View by:, select one of the icon views. Select Display, then click Adjust brightness in the left pane. Drag the Screen brightness: slider to the left or right, depending upon your preference. Using the Fujitsu Menu to Adjust Brightness To adjust brightness using the Fujitsu menu, click on the Fujitsu Menu icon in the system tray in the lower right corner of the screen. (You can also open the Fujitsu menu by pressing the [A] button.) Scroll down to the Windows Mobility Center and double-click it, then double-click the icon adjacent to Display brightness. Set the screen brightness sliders for On battery and Plugged in scenarios. You can also use the Fujitsu Menu as a quick way to reduce the brightness to a minimum or increase it to a maximum. This is done by clicking the corresponding button in the Fujitsu Menu: LCD Brightness Min or LCD Brightness Max. 30 - Display Panel IF USING AC POWER, YOUR BRIGHTNESS SETTING IS SET TO ITS HIGHEST LEVEL BY DEFAULT. IF USING BATTERY POWER, YOUR BRIGHTNESS SETTINGS IS SET TO APPROXIMATELY MID-LEVEL BY DEFAULT. THE HIGHER THE BRIGHTNESS LEVEL, THE MORE POWER THE TABLET PC WILL CONSUME AND THE FASTER YOUR BATTERIES WILL DISCHARGE. FOR MAXIMUM BATTERY LIFE, MAKE SURE THAT THE BRIGHTNESS IS SET AS LOW AS POSSIBLE. Enabling/Disabling Ambient Light Sensor This system has an ambient light sensor (just below the Tablet buttons) that automatically senses the light conditions in which the computer is operating. If the lighting is very bright, the brightness of the LCD will increase to make it easier to see the display. Conversely, if it is used in a darkened room, the display will automatically dim. NOTE THAT WHEN YOU FIRST START YOUR SYSTEM, THE AMBIENT LIGHT SENSOR IS DISABLED. YOU WILL INITIALLY NEED TO ENABLE IT USING THE FOLLOWING STEPS. The light sensor can be enabled or disabled from the Control Panel as follows:

1 Open the system Control Panel and click in the View by: field, select either large or small icons. 2 Click on the Location and Other Sensors icon. 3 To enable or disable the Light Sensor utility, check or uncheck the box in the Enabled column. 4 For more information about the light sensor, click on Light Sensor in the Sensor column to open the Sensor Properties window. 5 From the Sensor Properties window, you can change the sensors description, uninstall the sensor, or enable or disable selected users. To change the sensors description, click the [Change description] button, enter the new description, and click the [OK] button. To limit who can access the sensors, click Change who can access sensors, then check or uncheck the box adjacent to the individual you would like to grant or prohibit access. To uninstall the sensor, click Uninstall this sensor. 31 - Display Panel Keyboard Function Keys Fn Key Start Key Numeric Keypad

(surrounded by heavy line) Figure 12. Keyboard Application Key Cursor Keys Using the Keyboard Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has an integral 84-key keyboard. The keys perform all the standard functions of a 101-key keyboard, including the Windows keys and other special function keys. This section describes the following keys (Figure 12):

Numeric keypad: Your Tablet PC allows certain keys to serve dual purposes, both as standard characters and as numeric and mathematical keys. The ability to toggle between the standard character and numeric keys is controlled through the [NumLk] key. 32 - Keyboard Cursor keys: Your keyboard contains four arrow keys for moving the cursor or insertion point to the right, left, up, or down within windows, applications and documents. Function keys: The keys labeled [F1] through [F12], are used in conjunction with the [Fn] key to produce special actions that vary depending on what program is running. Windows keys: These keys work with your Windows operating system and function the same as the onscreen Start menu button, or the right button on your pointing device. Numeric Keypad Certain keys on the keyboard perform dual functions as both standard character keys and numeric keypad keys. NumLk can be activated by pressing the [NumLk] keys. Turning off the NumLk feature is done the same way. Once this feature is activated you can enter numerals 0 through 9, perform addition ( + ), subtraction ( - ), multiplication

( * ), or division ( / ), and enter decimal points ( . ) using the keys designated as ten-key function keys. The keys in the numeric keypad are marked on the front edge of the key to indicate their secondary functions. Windows Keys Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has two Windows keys, consisting of a Start key and an Application key. The Start key displays the Start menu. This button functions the same as your onscreen Start menu button. The Application key functions the same as your right mouse button and displays shortcut menus for the selected item. (Please refer to your Windows Help and Support documentation in the Start menu for additional information regarding the Windows keys.) Cursor Keys The cursor keys are the four arrow keys on the keyboard which allow you to move the cursor up, down, left and right in applications. In programs such as Windows Explorer, it moves the focus (selects the next item up, down, left, or right). 33 - Keyboard Function Keys Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has 12 function keys, F1 through F12. Functions assigned to these keys differ for each application. You should refer to your software documentation to find out how these keys are used. The [Fn] key provides extended functions for the Tablet PC and is always used in conjunction with another key.

[Fn+F2]: On backlit computers, pressing [F2] while holding [Fn] will toggle the backlight on (brighter) and off

(darker).

[Fn+F3]: Pressing [F3] while holding [Fn] will toggle the Audio Mute on and off.

[Fn+F4]: Pressing [F4] while holding [Fn] will toggle the Quick Point feature on and off. Note that the [Fn+F4]

combination only works if Manual Setting is selected in the BIOS. (See BIOS Setup Utility on page 61)

[Fn+F6]: Pressing [F6] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will lower the brightness of your display.

[Fn+F7]: Pressing [F7] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the brightness of the display.

[Fn+F8]: Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will decrease the volume of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC.

[Fn+F9]: Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC.

[Fn+F10]: Pressing [F10] while holding [Fn] allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the combination of keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in order, are:

built-in display panel only, external monitor only, and both built-in display panel and external monitor. 34 - Keyboard Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Left Button Cursor Control Right Button Figure 13. Touchpad pointing device Using the Touchpad The touchpad is built into your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. It is used to control the movement of the cursor to select items on your display panel. The touchpad is composed of a cursor control below the center of the keyboard and two buttons below it. The left button functions the same as a left mouse button while the right button has the same function as a right mouse button. The actual functionality of the buttons may vary depending on the application that is being used. 35 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Clicking Clicking means pushing and releasing a button. To left-click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the left button once, and then immediately release it. To right-click, move the mouse cursor to the item you wish to select, press the right button once, and then immediately release it. You also have the option to perform the clicking operation by tapping lightly on the touchpad once. Figure 14. Clicking with button Figure 15. Clicking with Touchpad Figure 16. Right-clicking with button Double-Clicking Double-clicking means pushing and releasing the left button twice in rapid succession. This procedure does not function with the right button. To double-click, move the cursor to the item you wish to select, press the left button twice, and immediately release it. You can also perform a double-click operation by tapping lightly on the pad twice. Figure 17. Double-clicking with button Figure 18. Double-clicking with Touchpad 36 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen IF THE INTERVAL BETWEEN CLICKS IS TOO LONG, THE DOUBLE-CLICK WILL NOT BE EXECUTED. PARAMETERS FOR THE QUICK POINT CAN BE ADJUSTED FROM THE MOUSE DIALOG BOX LOCATED IN THE WINDOWS CONTROL PANEL. Dragging Dragging means pressing and holding the left button, while moving the cursor. To drag, move the cursor to the item you wish to move. Press and hold the left button while moving the item to its new location and then release it. Dragging can also be done using the Touchpad. First, tap the Touchpad twice over the item you wish to move making sure to leave your finger on the pad after the final tap. Next, move the object to its new location by moving your finger across the Touchpad, and then release your finger. Figure 19. Dragging with button Figure 20. Dragging with Touchpad Touchpad Control Adjustment The Windows Control Panel allows you to customize your touchpad with selections made from within the Mouse Properties dialog box. There are three aspects of operation which you can adjust:

Buttons: This tab lets you set up the buttons for right or left handed operation, in addition to setting up the time interval allowed between clicks in double-clicking. 37 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Pointers: This tab lets you set up the scheme for the cursor depending on its functionality. Pointer Options: This tab lets you set up a relation between the speed of your finger motion and the speed of the cursor. It also allows you to enable a Pointer Trail for the cursor arrow. Active Digitizer Display NOTE: Your system has a capacitive touch panel that responds to finger touch and gestures. (This configuration is called a Dual Digitizer.) For more information about the touchscreen, refer to Using the Capacitive Touchscreen on page 42. The integrated active digitizer allows you to use the included stylus as a pointing device. You can use the stylus to click, double-click, right-click, drag items and icons, write text, or to draw and erase like a pen or pencil in applications that support this behavior, such as drawing or painting programs. The front half of the barrel button works the same as a right-click button. The back half of the barrel button and the eraser button on the end of the pen both act as erasers. If using the eraser button, be sure to depress it by pressing it on the display in order to activate the eraser function. Figure 21. Using Active Digitizer Display 38 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Right-Click Toggle Eraser Button Eraser Toggle Pen Tether Attachment Point Figure 22. Stylus Features DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING OR WRITING ON THE SCREEN WITH THE STYLUS. EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR ACTIVE DIGITIZER. TO PURCHASE ADDITIONAL OR REPLACEMENT STYLUSES, VISIT THE FUJITSU ACCESSORIES WEBSITE AT: WWW.SHOPFUJITSU.COM. Clicking on Active Digitizer Display To left-click, touch the object you wish to select and then lift the stylus tip immediately (Figure 23). Right-Clicking on Active Digitizer Right-click can be accomplished by holding the front of the toggle button down while tapping on the screen

(Figure 24). To turn off the right-click feature, go to Start -> Control Panel -> Hardware and Sound -> Pen and Touch. 39 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Figure 23. Clicking on the Active Digitizer Display Figure 24. Right-clicking Active Digitizer Double-Clicking To double-click, touch the item twice, and then immediately remove the stylus tip (Figure 25). Figure 25. Double-clicking the Display 40 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Dragging Dragging means moving an item with the stylus by touching the screen, moving and then lifting the stylus. To drag, touch the Active Digitizer Display with your stylus on the item you wish to move. While continuing to touch the screen with the stylus, drag the item to its new location by moving the stylus across the screen, and then lifting the stylus to release it (Figure 26). Calibrating the Active Digitizer Display In order to ensure accurate tracking between the stylus and cursor, you must run the Calibration Utility before you use the system for the first time, or after you change the display resolution. Figure 26. Dragging on the Display THE FIRST TIME YOU PERFORM A CALIBRATION, THE SYSTEM DISPLAY SHOULD BE IN LANDSCAPE MODE. SUBSEQUENT CALIBRATIONS CAN BE PERFORMED IN LANDSCAPE OR PORTRAIT MODE. THE FIRST TIME YOU CALIBRATE, THERE WILL BE 16 CALIBRATION POINTS; SUBSEQUENT CALIBRATIONS WILL REQUIRE ONLY FOUR CALIBRATION POINTS. To run the calibration utility:

1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Click Hardware and Sound, then select Tablet PC Settings 3 Under the Display tab, click the [Calibrate] button.(Note: If you have the optional capacitive touchscreen, you will need to click on either Pen input or Touch input, depending upon which method you want to calibrate.) 4 Adjust the display of your Tablet PC to a comfortable angle and find the (+) symbol in the upper-left corner of the display. 41 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen DO NOT USE EXCESSIVE FORCE WHEN TAPPING ON THE SCREEN DURING CALIBRATION. USE OF EXCESSIVE FORCE COULD RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE LED AND/OR TOUCH PANEL. 5 Depending upon whether you are calibrating pen input or touch input, firmly touch the screen with the stylus or your finger directly on the (+) symbol. Lift the stylus or your finger from the screen and the target will move to a different location on the screen. 6 Repeat step 4 until you have selected all of the (+) symbols. 7 Once you have selected all the symbols, press the [OK] button. 8 Touch the stylus or your finger to various points on the screen to verify that the screen is correctly calibrated. If you are not satisfied with the screens calibration, press the [Calibrate]) button to begin again. Using the Capacitive Touchscreen This Tablet PC has a dual digitizer that allows you to use either the stylus or your finger(s) as a pointing device. This type of display also allows you to use gestures to perform such actions as scroll, zoom, and rotate. GESTURE SUPPORT IS DETERMINED BY THE APPLICATION IN USE. WHEN ONE FINGER IS USED ON THE TOUCHSCREEN, IT BEHAVES IN THE SAME MANNER AS A STYLUS. THE STYLUS TAKES PRECEDENCE OVER FINGER TOUCH. IF THE STYLUS IS WITHIN ACTIVE RANGE OF THE SCREEN, FINGER TOUCH WILL BE DISABLED. General Gesture Mode: One- and Two-Finger Gestures Right-clicking the touchscreen To perform a right-click action using two fingers, press the first finger at the location you want to perform a right-click, then quickly tap and release the second finger on the screen. 42 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Gesture Mode To initiate gesture mode, two fingers must touch the screen within 200 ms of each other. If the second finger touches the screen after 200 ms has elapsed, the second finger is ignored. If more than two fingers touch the screen in that time, Advanced Gesture Mode is activated instead. When Gesture Mode is activated, no cursor movement is sent to the system. When both fingers are removed, Gesture mode ends. When a third finger is added, gesture mode ends and Advanced gesture mode is activated. Note that if a gesture cant be recognized, no action is taken. In that case, remove both fingers from the screen and try again. Scrolling Gesture To scroll through long documents or on a web page, place both fingers on the screen (one finger quickly followed by the second). If at least one finger has moved at least 3 mm, a scroll is considered. If both fingers are moving in the same direction and parallel (given a tolerance of 5 mm), Scroll Mode is activated. If one finger is stationary, it is not considered a scroll. If either finger is lifted, Scroll Mode is canceled. Zoom Gesture The zoom gesture is especially helpful when viewing pictures. To zoom in, place two fingers on the item you want to enlarge (one finger quickly followed by the second), then spread them away from each other. If at least one finger has moved at least 10 mm, a zoom event is considered. If the distance between the fingers has changed by at least 10 mm, and both fingers have stayed on approximately the same line, Zoom Mode is entered. If either finger strays more than 10 mm from the "zoom line" created when the fingers first made contact, the zoom is canceled. To zoom out, place two fingers on the item you want to reduce (one finger quickly followed by the second), then move them towards each other. Rotate Gesture To change the orientation of an object on the screen, place two fingers on the image you want to rotate (one finger quickly followed by the second), then move them in opposite directions (as if you were turning a knob). The direction the item turns is dependant upon the direction you move your fingers. 43 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen If at least one finger moves at least 12 mm, a rotate is considered. If one finger is stationary (moving less than 5 mm in any direction), and the other is moving, a rotate is considered. If the fingers begin moving in the same direction, the rotation is canceled. If the distance between the fingers changes by more than 10 mm, the rotation is canceled. Installing a Pen Tether To prevent dropping or losing your pen, you should attach it to your system using the pen tether that is included with the system. To attach the pen tether to your Tablet PC, perform the following steps:

1 Attach the end of the pen tether with the smaller loop to your pen. To do so, push the end of the tether through the hole in the pen, then thread the opposite end of the tether through the loop. 2 Attach the end of the pen tether with the larger loop to the attachment point on your tablet. To do so, insert the end of the pen tether through the attachment point, then feed the pen through the large loop in the tether. Figure 27. Installing a Pen Tether 44 - Touchpad/Active Digitizer/Touchscreen Volume Control Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has multiple volume controls which interact with each other. ANY SOFTWARE THAT CONTAINS AUDIO FILES WILL ALSO CONTAIN A VOLUME CONTROL OF ITS OWN. IF YOU INSTALL AN EXTERNAL AUDIO DEVICE THAT HAS AN INDEPENDENT VOLUME CONTROL, THE HARDWARE VOLUME CONTROL AND THE SOFTWARE VOLUME CONTROL WILL INTERACT WITH EACH OTHER. IT SHOULD BE NOTED THAT IF YOU SET YOUR SOFTWARE VOLUME TO OFF, YOU WILL OVERRIDE THE EXTERNAL VOLUME CONTROL SETTING. Controlling the Volume The volume can be controlled in several different ways:

Volume can be changed or muted from within the Volume Control in the system tray. Volume can be controlled using the Volume Up and Volume Down buttons on the button panel Volume can be controlled with the F8 and F9 functions keys. Pressing [F8] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will decrease the volume of your Tablet PC. Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your Tablet PC. Volume can be changed by opening the Control Panel and selecting Windows Mobility Center. From there, you can either mute or adjust the sound in the Volume area. Volume can be muted by pressing the [F3] key while holding down the [Fn] key. To restore audio, repeat the

[Fn+F3] procedure. Volume can be controlled by many volume controls that are set within individual applications. Certain external audio devices you might connect to your system may have hardware volume controls. Each source discussed above puts an upper limit on the volume level that must then be followed by the other sources. We recommend that you experiment with the various volume controls to discover the optimal sound level. 45 - Volume Control Modular Bay Figure 28. Modular Bay Modular Bay Devices Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC contains a Modular Bay. The Modular Bay can house an optical drive, a Lithium ion battery, and a weight saver. Your Modular Bay will have one of the following devices installed. Modular Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer: This allows you to access movies, software, and audio DVD/CDs and record to DVD, CD, and DVD-RAM discs. Modular Blu-ray RW Drive. This drive allows you to read from and write to Blu-ray discs. Modular Lithium ion battery: This is a rechargeable battery that can be used to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC when an adapter is not connected. Weight Saver: This is used to fill the bay when no device is needed. YOU SHOULD NEVER LEAVE YOUR MODULAR BAY EMPTY WHEN THE TABLET PC IS IN OPERATION. IF LEFT EMPTY, DUST OR FOREIGN MATTER MAY ACCUMULATE INSIDE THE TABLET PC. Removing and Installing Modular Devices There are two ways to remove and install modular devices in the Modular Bay:

Cold-swapping: swapping devices while your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is powered off. Hot-swapping: swapping devices while your system is active using the Safely Remove Hardware icon from your system tray. 46 - Modular Bay Devices Cold-swapping To cold-swap modular devices in your Modular Bay follow these easy steps:

1 Close any open files and shut down your LifeBook notebook. 2 Pull out the Flexible Bay release latch. This will push your device out slightly, allowing you to remove it. 3 Slide your device out until it is clear of the bay. This will require light force. 4 Slide the device you are installing into your notebook until it clicks into place. 5 It is now safe to turn your notebook back on. 6 You can now access and use the device. Your Tablet PC will automatically detect the device and activate it within your system. The drive letters associated with the device will be created and listed under My Computer and Windows Explorer. Hot-swapping Hot-swapping is provided through the Safely Remove Hardware utility. The icon for the utility appears in the system tray. Click on the icon and follow the on-screen instructions. 47 - Modular Bay Devices Modular Bay Release Latch Figure 29. Removing/Installing Modular Device Modular Bay Device Windows Button Power Button shown for reference only) Figure 30. LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC Security/Tablet PC Buttons LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons A unique feature of your LIFEBOOK T902 Tablet PC is the array of Security and Tablet PC buttons as well as a standalone Windows button. These buttons allow you to secure your Tablet PC from unauthorized use and to launch specific applications and functions with the touch of a button. Security Button Functions If the security system is activated, upon starting your Tablet PC or resuming from Hibernate or shutdown mode, the security system will require you to enter a password code using the security buttons. After you enter the correct password, your system will resume operation. The five security/Tablet PC buttons are located on the bottom right-hand side of the display when it is configured to be used as a notebook. All five buttons are used when implementing security functions. Four of the buttons are used to enter the password;

the fifth is used as an Enter button. See Table 3 for information about each Security button. 48 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Button Icon System State Security Panel Function System is pre-boot or resuming from suspend Security Button 1 Security Button 2 Security Button 3 Security Button 4 Security Enter Button Table 3. Security Panel Button Functions 49 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Post-logon button functions All six buttons can be used after logging on. See Table 3 for information about each of the post-logon functions. Button Icon System State Tablet PC Function System is post-logon (Windows desktop is displayed) Windows Button has two functions. Primary action: opens up the Start menu

[Windows] button + [Power] button: Opens up CTRL+ALT+DEL screen Volume Down Volume Up Pauses and resumes the rotation lock feature. Opens the Fujitsu Menu utility Opens the Windows Journal application. Table 3. Post-logon Tablet PC Button Functions Windows Button In post-logon, the Windows button can be used to perform two functions. When pressed alone, it opens up the Start menu. When pressed at the same time as the power button, it acts the same as if pressing [Ctl] + [Alt] + [Del]. 50 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Volume Down/Volume Up Buttons The Volume Down and Volume Up buttons allow you to decrease and increase the volume. Rotation Lock The rotation lock feature is used to Pause or Resume the auto rotation feature. When the system is in tablet mode, if the auto rotation feature is resumed, the display rotates automatically when the system is rotated. When the auto rotation feature is paused, the display doesn't rotate automatically when the tablet is rotated. Button A When Button A is pressed post-logon, the Fujitsu Menu utility opens. When Button A is pressed, the Battery LED shows the remaining capacity of the battery (See Status Indicator Panel on page 24.) Five seconds after releasing the button, the LED will turn off automatically. Button B When Button B is pressed post-logon, the Windows Journal opens. Changing Tablet PC Button Functions The Application A and B buttons can be changed to launch a program or perform an action you select. By default, the Application A button launches the Calculator, and the Application B button launches MS Journal. To launch different applications or cause the Application A or B buttons to perform a specific action:

1 Double-click on the Tablet PC Settings icon in the Control Panel. 2 Select the Buttons tab and select the button you would like to change from the list. 3 Click [Change] and open the drop down list in the Press: field. 4 Select the action you would like the button to perform. If you want to launch a program, click on Start a Program, then browse to the location of the program. 5 Click [OK], then click [OK] again. The buttons will now perform the actions you have assigned to them. 51 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Setting up LIFEBOOK Security Panel When you receive your Tablet PC, the security panel application is pre-installed without any passwords. The following sections provide detailed information on your security panel, how to set, change or remove passwords. Numbered Buttons Use these buttons to enter your password. Enter Button After entering the button strokes, push this button to enter the password into the Tablet PC. Passwords The user and supervisor password may be set on this Tablet PC. A supervisor password is typically the same for all tablets and notebooks in a work group, office, or company to allow for system management. Individual computers in a group environment should not use a common password. A password consists of one to five button strokes plus the enter button. A valid stroke consists of pushing one or up to four buttons simultaneously. The following are valid button strokes:

Pushing [4] by itself Pushing [2] and [3] at the same time Pushing [1], [2], and [4] at the same time Pushing [1], [2], [3], and [4] at the same time The following are valid passwords. The numbers within braces ({ }) are button strokes using more than one button.

{[2]+[3]}, [1], [Enter]

[4], [enter]

{[1]+[3]}, {[2]+[3]+[4]}, [1], [4], [2], [Enter]

Setting Passwords When shipped from the factory, no passwords are set. You have a choice of having no password or setting a supervisor and user password. You must set the supervisor password before the user password. 52 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons THE PURPOSE OF SUPERVISOR PASSWORD IS TO BE ABLE TO BYPASS THE USER PASSWORD IN CASE THE USER PASSWORD IS FORGOTTEN. THE SUPERVISOR PASSWORD ALONE WILL NOT LOCK THE SYSTEM. YOU MUST SET THE SUPERVISOR AND USER PASSWORDS FOR THE SECURITY PANEL TO WORK. Setting Supervisor Password You must have set a supervisor password before setting any user passwords. The supervisor password can bypass the user password. 1 Go to the Start menu. 2 Click on Run. 3 Type in: C:\Program Files\Fujitsu\Security Panel Application\Supervisor\ FJSECS.EXE, then press [Enter]

4 Follow the on-screen instructions to set the Supervisor password. Setting User Password 1 Go to the Start menu. 2 Click on All Programs. 3 Click on Security Panel Application -> Security Panel Application. 4 Follow the on-screen instructions to set the user password. YOU MAY CHANGE OR REMOVE THE SUPERVISOR OR USER PASSWORD BY REPEATING THE STEPS DEFINED ABOVE. 53 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Using Your LIFEBOOK Security Panel The security lock feature is in effect both when the system resumes from Off or Hibernation state. You always need to push the Security Panel buttons to input the user password. Your system will not begin the boot sequence until you enter your supervisor/user password. From Off State 1 Turn on your system. 2 When the Security Indicator flashes, enter the password and press Enter button (e.g., if the password is 22222, first press Button 2 five times, then press the Enter button). The Tablet PC will boot to normal operation. From Hibernation State 1 Press your Suspend/Resume slide. 2 When the Security Indicator flashes, enter the password and press Enter button.The Tablet PC should resume normal operation. Incorrect Password Entry If an invalid supervisor or user password is entered three times in succession, the system will beep for about one minute. If a valid password is entered within a minute (while system beeps), the beeping will stop and the Tablet PC will resume normal operation. If no password is entered or an invalid password is entered while the system beeps, the system will return to its previous locked state (off) and the Security Indicator will go off. To reactivate the Tablet PC after a password failure, you must press the Suspend/Resume slide, then enter a correct password. REMEMBER THE USER PASSWORD YOU SPECIFIED ON THE SECURITY PANEL APPLICATION. IF YOU FORGET THE PASSWORD YOU WILL NOT BE ABLE TO USE YOUR COMPUTER. THE SUPERVISOR PASSWORD CAN OVERRIDE THE USER PASSWORD. Precautions Opening and Closing the Cover To change what the system does when the cover is closed:

54 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons 1 Open the system Control Panel. If the display is in Category view, click one of the icon selections in the View by:

field. Click on Power Options. 2 Click Choose what closing the lid does in the left pane. 3 Select the desired action for When I close the lid, then click the [Save changes] button. Low Battery Operations If your Tablet PC has a low battery, pushing the suspend/resume slide only turns on the Security Indicator. Your Tablet PC does not unlock, the Security Indicator turns off after one minute. To resume normal operation, first attach a power supply to the Tablet PC. Then you may unlock the Tablet PC. Uninstalling/Re-installing the Security Panel Application You have two options when uninstalling the security panel application:

Remove passwords and uninstall the security panel application software. This will disable all security features. Uninstall the security panel application with password still active. This will not allow any changes to the password. Uninstalling the Security Panel Application Software Remove passwords when User wants no password protection whatsoever and doesnt want to give anybody the utility to set a password on their computer. In this case, if passwords (supervisor, user, or both) are set, the passwords must first be cleared BEFORE removing the application. To clear passwords, follow same procedure in SETTING PASSWORD CODES except this time, select REMOVE, enter current password then click Next. When asked to confirm select Yes. Removing Security Panel Application with Passwords Still Active Using this feature will not allow any changes to the password. REMOVING THE APPLICATIONS DOES NOT REMOVE THE PASSWORD. IT SIMPLY REMOVES THE ABILITY TO CHANGE/ADD/REMOVE PASSWORDS. TO CHANGE YOUR PASSWORD YOU MUST REINSTALL THE APPLICATION. 55 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons User:

1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Open Programs and Features in the Control Panel. 3 Select Security Panel for User in the list, and click Uninstall/Change. 4 When User Account Control box appears, click Continue. Supervisor:

1 Go to Start -> Control Panel. 2 Open Add or Remove Programs Properties in the Control Panel. 3 Select the Security Panel for Supervisor in the list, and click Uninstall/Change. 4 When User Account Control box appears, click Continue. Reinstalling the Security Panel Application To reinstall the supervisor or user security application, you will need to access the Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility. The FSDM utility allows you to download the latest drivers, utilities, and applications from the Fujitsu Support site. To access the FSDM utility, you will need to go to the Support Site at

<http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS>tal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS. The Security/Application Panel software consists of two software packages: Security Application Panel/Supervisor and Security Application Panel/User. 1 Download both software packages to your system from the support website. 2 Double-click setupS.exe in the Security Application Panel\Supervisor package. The Installing Security Panel Application window will appear. Follow the instructions on the screen. 3 Double-click setup.exe from Security Application Panel\User package. The Installing Security Panel Application window will appear. Follow the instructions on the screen. 56 - LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons Chapter 2 Getting Started with Your LIFEBOOK Power Sources Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has four possible power sources: a primary Lithium ion battery, a secondary modular bay battery, an AC adapter or an optional Auto/Airline adapter. Connecting the Power Adapters The AC adapter or optional Auto/Airline adapter provides power for operating your Tablet PC and charging the batteries. Connecting the AC Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 2 Plug the AC adapter into an AC electrical outlet. Connecting the Optional Auto/Airline Adapter 1 Plug the DC output cable into the DC power jack on your Tablet PC. 2 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the cigarette lighter of an automobile, or, 3 Plug the Auto/Airline adapter into the DC power jack on an airplane seat. 57 DC Power Jack AC Adapter Figure 31. Connecting the AC Adapter Switching from AC Adapter Power or the Auto/Airline Adapter to Battery Power 1 Be sure that you have at least one charged battery installed. 2 Remove the AC adapter or the Auto/Airline adapter. THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY IS NOT CHARGED UPON PURCHASE. INITIALLY, YOU WILL NEED TO CONNECT EITHER THE AC ADAPTER OR THE AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER TO USE YOUR TABLET PC. 58 - Power Sources Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Power On Power/Suspend/Resume Slide The Power/Suspend/Resume slide is used to turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from its off state. Once you have connected your AC adapter or charged the internal Lithium ion battery, you can power on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. WHEN YOU TURN ON YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC BE SURE YOU HAVE A POWER SOURCE. THIS MEANS THAT AT LEAST ONE BATTERY IS INSTALLED AND CHARGED, OR THAT THE AC OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER IS CONNECTED AND HAS POWER. To turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from its off state, slide the Power/Suspend/Resume slide, located above the keyboard to the right. When you are done working you can either leave your Tablet PC in Suspend mode, you can turn it off. See Sleep Mode on page 64 and Powering Off on page 66 Power/Suspend/Resume Slide Figure 32. Starting the Tablet PC DO NOT CARRY YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC AROUND WITH THE POWER ON OR SUBJECT IT TO SHOCKS OR VIBRATION, AS YOU RISK DAMAGING YOUR TABLET PC. 59 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC When you power on your LIFEBOOK, it will perform a Power On Self Test (POST) to check the internal parts and configuration for correct functionality. If a fault is found, your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC will emit an audio warning and/or an error message will be displayed. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 98. Depending on the nature of the problem, you may be able to continue by starting the operating system or by entering the BIOS setup utility and revising the settings. After satisfactory completion of the POST, your Tablet PC will load your operating system. NEVER TURN OFF YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC DURING THE POWER ON SELF TEST (POST) OR IT WILL CAUSE AN ERROR MESSAGE TO BE DISPLAYED WHEN YOU TURN YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC ON THE NEXT TIME. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 98. Boot Sequence The procedure for starting-up your Tablet PC is termed the Bootup sequence and involves your Tablet PCs BIOS. When your Tablet PC is first turned on, the main system memory is empty, and it needs to find instructions to start up your Tablet PC. This information is in the BIOS program. Each time you power up or restart your Tablet PC, it goes through a boot sequence which displays a Fujitsu logo until the operating system is found. During booting, your Tablet PC is performing a standard boot sequence including a Power On Self Test (POST). When the boot sequence is completed without a failure and without a request for the BIOS Setup Utility, the system displays the operating systems opening screen. The boot sequence is executed when:

You turn on the power to your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. You restart your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC from the Windows Shut Down dialog box. The software initiates a system restart; for example, when you install a new application. 60 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Hard Disk Drive Passwords To provide additional security for your data, you can assign passwords to your hard disk drive(s). This feature is managed in the system BIOS Setup Utility. See BIOS Setup Utility below for information about accessing the utility. REMEMBER YOUR PASSWORDS. IF YOU SET AND FORGET YOUR USER AND MASTER HARD DISK PASSWORDS, FUJITSU AMERICA WILL NOT BE ABLE TO RESET IT. YOU MAY LOSE DATA AND HAVE TO REPLACE YOUR SYSTEM BOARD OR HARD DISK DRIVE. BIOS Setup Utility The BIOS Setup Utility sets up the operating environment for your Tablet PC. Your BIOS is set at the factory for normal operating conditions, therefore there is no need to set or change the BIOS environment to operate your Tablet PC. The BIOS Setup Utility also allows you to configure such features as the System Data Security feature parameters, such as passwords. Entering the BIOS Setup Utility To enter the BIOS Setup Utility do the following:

1 Turn on or restart your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 2 To enter the BIOS Setup Utility, press the [F2] key once the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. This will open the main menu of the BIOS Setup Utility with the current settings displayed. Press the right or left arrow keys key to scroll through the other setup menus to review or alter the current settings. BIOS Guide A guide to your Tablet PCs BIOS is available online at our service and support Website at:

http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php. Once there, select Users Guides under Online Support. Select your Product, Series, and Model, then click [Go]. IF YOUR DATA SECURITY SETTINGS REQUIRE IT, YOU MAY BE ASKED FOR A PASSWORD BEFORE THE BIOS MAIN MENU WILL APPEAR. 61 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Booting the System We strongly recommend that you not attach any external devices or put a DVD/CD in your drive until you have gone through the initial power on sequence. When you turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC for the first time, it will display a Fujitsu logo on the screen. If you do nothing the system will load the operating system, and then the Windows Welcome will begin. Starting Windows the First Time After you boot up the system the first time and follow the instructions on the screen, you will eventually come to the Welcome window. After the Welcome window appears, the screen will black out for up to several minutes. This is normal. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO POWER DOWN THE SYSTEM AT THIS POINT. While the screen is blacked out, your system configuration is being set up and the necessary files are being installed. During the course of the first start up, you will need to read and accept the End User License Agreements (EULAs) for Microsoft and Fujitsu. IF YOU REJECT THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT YOU WILL BE ASKED TO REVIEW THE LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR INFORMATION ON RETURNING WINDOWS OR TO SHUT DOWN YOUR TABLET PC. YOU CANNOT USE YOUR TABLET PC UNTIL YOU HAVE ACCEPTED THE LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU STOP THE PROCESS YOUR TABLET PC WILL RETURN TO THE BEGINNING OF THE WINDOWS WELCOME PROCESS, EVEN IF YOU SHUT YOUR TABLET PC DOWN AND START IT UP AGAIN. Several additional windows will appear, prompting you to enter a name and description for your computer, an Administrator password, and a domain name. Read the instructions on the screens carefully and fill in the information as directed. Installing Bonus Apps After you have started your system the first time, you will see a Bonus Apps icon on your desktop. Click on the icon to see which additional applications are available for you to install. Applications that are already installed appear in grey; those that are available for installation appear in blue. Select the applications you wish to install by selecting the checkbox adjacent to your selection, or click [Select All] if you would like to install all available applications. Once you have made your selections, click [Install]. 62 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Note that in some cases (depending upon which application was selected for installation) after installation completes, the system will prompt you to reboot. There are also cases in which if multiple applications are selected to install but one of them needs a reboot, the system will reboot and continue installing the rest of the selected applications. Registering your LIFEBOOK with Fujitsu You can register your Tablet PC by going to our website at: https://store.shopfujitsu.com/fpc/Ecommerce/Service.jsp. You will need to be set up with an Internet Service Provider (ISP) to register online. 63 - Starting Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Power Management Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has many options and features for conserving battery power. Some of these features are automatic and need no user intervention. However, others depend on the parameters you set to best suit your operating conditions, such as those for the display brightness. Internal power management for your Tablet PC may be controlled from settings made in your operating system, pre-bundled power management application, or from settings made in BIOS setup utility. Besides the options available for conserving battery power, there are also some things that you can do to prevent your battery from running down as quickly. For example, you can create an appropriate power saving profile, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode when it is not performing an operation, and you can limit the use of high power devices. As with all mobile, battery powered computers, there is a trade-off between performance and power savings. Power/Suspend/Resume Slide When your Tablet PC is active, the Power/Suspend/Resume slide can be used to manually put the Tablet PC into Sleep mode. Push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide when the Tablet PC is active, but not actively accessing anything, and immediately release the button. If your Tablet PC is suspended, pushing the Power/Suspend/Resume slide returns your Tablet PC to active operation. You can tell whether the system is Suspended by looking at the Power indicator. If the indicator is visible and not flashing, your Tablet PC is fully operational. If the indicator is visible and flashing, your Tablet PC is in Sleep mode. If the indicator is not visible, the power is off or your Tablet PC is in Hibernation mode. Sleep Mode Sleep mode in Windows saves the contents of your system memory during periods of inactivity by maintaining power to critical parts. This mode turns off the CPU, display, hard drive, and all other internal components except those necessary to maintain system memory and for restarting. Your Tablet PC can be put in sleep mode by:

Pressing the Power/Suspend/Resume slide when your system is turned on. Selecting Sleep after clicking [Start] then clicking the small arrow at the bottom right of the window. Timing out from lack of activity. Allowing the battery to reach the Dead Battery Warning condition. 64 - Power Management Your Tablet PCs system memory typically stores the file on which you are working, open application information, and any other data required to support operations in progress. When you resume operation from Sleep mode, your Tablet PC will return to the point where it left off. You must use the Power/Suspend/Resume slide to resume operation, and there must be an adequate power source available, or your Tablet PC will not resume. IF RUNNING YOUR TABLET PC ON BATTERY POWER, BE AWARE THAT THE BATTERY CONTINUES TO DISCHARGE WHILE YOUR TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, THOUGH NOT AS QUICKLY AS WHEN FULLY OPERATIONAL. DISABLING THE POWER/SUSPEND/RESUME SLIDE PREVENTS IT FROM BEING USED TO PUT THE TABLET PC INTO SLEEP OR HIBERNATION (SAVE-

TO-DISK) MODE. THE BUTTON RESUME FUNCTION CANNOT BE DISABLED. IF YOUR TABLET PC IS ACTIVELY ACCESSING INFORMATION WHEN YOU ENTER THE SLEEP OR HIBERNATION MODE, CHANGES TO OPEN FILES ARE NOT LOST. THE FILES ARE LEFT OPEN AND MEMORY IS KEPT ACTIVE DURING SLEEP MODE OR THE MEMORY IS TRANSFERRED TO THE INTERNAL HARD DRIVE DURING HIBERNATION MODE. THE MAIN ADVANTAGE OF USING HIBERNATION IS THAT POWER IS NOT REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN YOUR DATA. THIS IS PARTICULARLY IMPORTANT IF YOU WILL BE LEAVING YOUR TABLET PC IN A SUSPENDED STATE FOR A PROLONGED PERIOD OF TIME. THE DRAWBACK OF USING HIBERNATION MODE IS THAT IT LENGTHENS THE POWER DOWN AND POWER UP SEQUENCES AND RESETS PERIPHERAL DEVICES. Hibernation (Save-to-Disk) Feature The Hibernation feature saves the contents of your Tablet PCs system memory to the hard drive as a part of the Suspend/Resume mode. You can enable or disable this feature. Enable or Disable the Hibernation Feature The default settings are not enabled. To enable or disable the Hibernation feature follow these steps:

1 From the Start menu, select Control Panel, then select the Power Options icon. 2 Select Choose what the power button does or Choose what closing the lid does, then make your selections (Do Nothing, Sleep, Hibernate, or Shut Down). Windows Power Management The Power Options icon located in the Windows Control Panel allows you to configure some of the power management settings. For example, you can use the Power Options to set the timeout values for turning off the display and hard disks whether you are running the Tablet PC on battery power or one of the adapters. 65 - Power Management Restarting the System If your system is on and you need to restart it, be sure that you use the following procedure. 1 Click the [Start] button, and then move the mouse over the small arrow at the bottom right of the right-hand pane. 2 Select Restart from the list. TURNING OFF YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC WITHOUT EXITING WINDOWS OR TURNING ON YOUR TABLET PC WITHIN 10 SECONDS OF THE SYSTEM BEING SHUT OFF MAY CAUSE AN ERROR WHEN YOU START THE NEXT TIME. Powering Off Before turning off the power, check that the hard drive/optical drive access indicator is off. If you turn off the power while accessing a disk there is a risk of data loss. To ensure that your Tablet PC shuts down without error, use the Windows shut down procedure. BE SURE TO CLOSE ALL FILES, EXIT ALL APPLICATIONS, AND SHUT DOWN YOUR OPERATING SYSTEM PRIOR TO TURNING OFF THE POWER. IF FILES ARE OPEN WHEN YOU TURN THE POWER OFF, YOU WILL LOSE ANY CHANGES THAT HAVE NOT BEEN SAVED, AND MAY CAUSE DISK ERRORS. Using the correct procedure to shut down from Windows allows your Tablet PC to complete its operations and turn off power in the proper sequence to avoid errors. The proper sequence is:

1 Click the [Start] button, and then move the mouse over the small arrow at the bottom right of the right-hand pane. 2 Select Shut Down from the list. If you are going to store your Tablet PC for a month or more, see Care and Maintenance Section. 66 - Power Management ENERGY STAR Compliance Your Fujitsu system is an ENERGY STAR qualified mobile PC. By choosing a computer with the latest energy-saving technology, youre helping to preserve our environment for future generations. ENERGY STAR is a joint program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, U.S. Department of Energy, Natural Resources Canada, and other governments around the world helping us save money while protecting the environment through energy efficient products and practices. With energy costs and global warming top-of-mind for consumers, Fujitsu is committed to offering solutions that help consumers conserve energy and improve the quality of our environment. Sleep Mode:

You will notice that your computer is initially set so that the display turns off after 15 minutes of user inactivity, and the computer goes into Sleep mode after 20 minutes of user inactivity. When going into Sleep mode, the computer also reduces the speed of any active Ethernet network links. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, press the Suspend/Resume Button. Energy saving benefits:

Fujitsu ENERGY STAR qualified mobile PCs use about half as much electricity as standard equipment saving half in utility costs. But more than that, ENERGY STAR also makes a difference for the environment. Did you know that the average house can be responsible for twice the greenhouse gas emissions as the average car? Thats because every time you flip on a light switch, run your dishwasher, or turn on your PC, you use energy, which means more greenhouse gas emissions from power plants. So the more energy we can save through energy efficiency, the more we help to reduce greenhouse gases and the risks of global warming. To learn more about the important ENERGY STAR program, visit: www.energystar.gov. To read about how Fujitsu is supporting Sustainable Management along with several other environmental activities, visit the Fujitsu Corporate Citizenship page at:

http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/aboutus/environmental/environment.php 67 - Power Management Chapter 3 User-Installable Features Lithium ion Battery Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC has a Lithium ion battery that provides power for operating your Tablet PC when no external power source is available. The battery is durable and long lasting, but should not be exposed to extreme temperatures, high voltages, chemicals or other hazards. The Lithium ion battery operating time may become shorter if it is used under the following conditions:

When used at temperatures that exceed a low of 5C or a high of 35C (41 to 95 F). Extreme temperatures not only reduce charging efficiency, but can also cause battery deterioration. The Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when you try to charge a battery that is outside its operating temperature range. When using a high current device such as a modem, external optical drive, or the hard drive, using the AC adapter will conserve your battery life. DO NOT LEAVE A FAULTY BATTERY IN YOUR TABLET PC. IT MAY DAMAGE YOUR AC ADAPTER, OPTIONAL AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER, ANOTHER BATTERY OR YOUR TABLET PC ITSELF. IT MAY ALSO PREVENT OPERATION OF YOUR TABLET PC BY DRAINING ALL AVAILABLE CURRENT INTO THE BAD BATTERY. 68 ACTUAL BATTERY LIFE WILL VARY BASED ON SCREEN BRIGHTNESS, APPLICATIONS, FEATURES, POWER MANAGEMENT SETTINGS, BATTERY CONDITION AND OTHER CUSTOMER PREFERENCES. OPTICAL DRIVE OR HARD DRIVE USAGE MAY ALSO HAVE A SIGNIFICANT IMPACT ON BATTERY LIFE. THE BATTERY CHARGING CAPACITY IS REDUCED AS THE BATTERY AGES. IF YOUR BATTERY IS RUNNING LOW QUICKLY, YOU SHOULD REPLACE IT WITH A NEW ONE. UNDER FEDERAL, STATE, OR LOCAL LAW IT MAY BE ILLEGAL TO DISPOSE OF BATTERIES BY PUTTING THEM IN THE TRASH. PLEASE TAKE CARE OF OUR ENVIRONMENT AND DISPOSE OF BATTERIES PROPERLY. CHECK WITH YOUR LOCAL GOVERNMENT AUTHORITY FOR DETAILS REGARDING RECYCLING OR DISPOSING OF OLD BATTERIES. IF YOU CANNOT FIND THIS INFORMATION ELSEWHERE, CONTACT YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE AT 1-800-

8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Recharging the Batteries If you want to know the condition of the primary Lithium ion battery, check the Battery Level indicator located on the Status Indicator panel. The indicator changes as the battery level changes. The Lithium ion battery is recharged internally using the AC adapter or Auto/Airline adapter. To recharge the battery make sure the battery that needs to be charged is installed in your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and connect the AC or Auto/Airline adapter. MAKE SURE THAT THE PERCENTAGE CHARGE IS INDICATED BY THE BATTERY CHARGING INDICATOR ON THE STATUS INDICATOR PANEL. There is no memory effect on the Lithium ion battery therefore you do not need to discharge the battery completely before recharging. The charge times will be significantly longer if your Tablet PC is in use while the battery is charging. If you want to charge the battery more quickly, put your Tablet PC into Sleep mode, or turn it off while the adapter is charging the battery. (See Power Management on page 64 for more information on Sleep mode and shutdown procedure) 69 - Lithium ion Battery USING HEAVY CURRENT DEVICES OR FREQUENT EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ACCESSES MAY PREVENT CHARGING COMPLETELY. Low Battery State When the battery is running low, a low battery notification message will appear. If you do not respond to the low battery message, the batteries will continue to discharge until they are too low to operate. When this happens, your Tablet PC will go into Sleep mode. There is no guarantee that your data will be saved once the Tablet PC reaches this point. ONCE THE LOW BATTERY NOTIFICATION MESSAGE APPEARS, YOU NEED TO SAVE ALL YOUR ACTIVE DATA AND PUT YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC INTO SLEEP MODE UNTIL YOU CAN PROVIDE A NEW POWER SOURCE. YOU SHOULD PROVIDE A CHARGED BATTERY, AN AC POWER ADAPTER, OR AUTO/AIRLINE ADAPTER AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. WHEN YOU ARE IN SLEEP MODE THERE MUST ALWAYS BE AT LEAST ONE POWER SOURCE ACTIVE. IF YOU REMOVE ALL POWER SOURCES WHILE YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC IS IN SLEEP MODE, ANY DATA THAT HAS NOT BEEN SAVED TO THE HARD DRIVE WILL BE LOST. Dead Battery Suspend mode shows on the Status indicator just like the normal Sleep mode. Once your Tablet PC goes into Dead Battery Suspend mode you will be unable to resume operation until you provide a source of power either from an adapter, or a charged battery. Once you have provided power, you will need to press the Power/Suspend/Resume slide to resume operation. In the Dead Battery Suspend mode, your data can be maintained for some time, but if a power source is not provided promptly, the Power indicator will stop flashing and go out, meaning that you have lost the data that was not stored. Once you provide power, you can continue to use your Tablet PC while an adapter is charging the battery. Shorted Batteries The Status Indicator panel indicator associated with the Battery Level indicator displays the operating level available in that battery. If this display shows a flashing red LED, it means the battery is damaged and must be replaced so it does not damage other parts of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. 70 - Lithium ion Battery Replacing the Battery With the purchase of an additional battery, you can have a fully charged spare to swap with one that is not charged. There are two ways to swap batteries, cold-swapping and hot-swapping:

Cold-swapping Batteries To cold-swap batteries in your battery bay, follow these easy steps:

1 Have a charged battery ready to install. 2 Shut down your Tablet PC and disconnect the AC adapter. 3 Turn the system upside down and orient it as shown in Figure 33. 4 While pushing the battery lock towards the battery, slide the batter release latch to the right, then lift the battery out of the bay as in Figure 34. 5 Insert a new battery into the bay, and press it in firmly so that the latches click into place. 6 Plug in the AC adapter and turn the power on. Hot-swapping Batteries To hot-swap batteries in your battery bay follow these easy steps:

BE SURE TO PLUG IN AN AC ADAPTER PRIOR TO REMOVING THE BATTERY. THERE IS NO BRIDGE BATTERY PRESENT TO SUPPORT THE SYSTEM WHILE THE BATTERY IS BEING REPLACED. IF YOU DO NOT USE AN AC ADAPTER YOU WILL LOSE ANY UNSAVED FILES. 1 Plug an AC Adapter into the system and connect it to a power outlet. 2 Follow steps 3 through 6 in Cold Swapping Batteries. IF THE LITHIUM ION BATTERY CONNECTOR IS NOT FULLY SEATED, YOU MAY NOT BE ABLE TO USE YOUR TABLET PC OR CHARGE YOUR BATTERY. 71 - Lithium ion Battery s Battery lock Battery pack Battery release latch Figure 33. Unlatching a Battery Figure 34. Removing a Battery 72 - Lithium ion Battery SD Card Figure 35. Installing an SD Card Secure Digital Cards Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC supports Secure Digital (SD), Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC), and Secure Digital eXtended Capacity (SDXC) cards, on which you can store and transfer data to and from a variety of digital devices. These cards use flash memory architecture, which means they dont need a power source to retain data. Secure Digital (SD) Cards are flash memory technology that allows you to record, transfer and share digital content, such as digital pictures, movies, music, voice, and computer data and applications. SD Cards allow portable storage among a variety of devices, such as cell phones, GPS systems, digital cameras, and PDAs. SD Cards transfer data quickly, with low battery consumption. SD cards use flash memory architecture. 73 - Secure Digital Cards Installing SD Cards SD Cards are installed in the SD Card slot. To install an SD Card, follow these steps:

INSTALLING OR REMOVING AN SD CARD DURING YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PCS SHUTDOWN OR BOOTUP PROCESS MAY DAMAGE THE CARD AND/OR YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC. DO NOT INSERT A CARD INTO A SLOT IF THERE IS WATER OR ANY OTHER SUBSTANCE ON THE CARD AS YOU MAY PERMANENTLY DAMAGE THE CARD, YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC, OR BOTH. 1 See your specific card manual for instructions on the installation of your card. Some cards may require that your Tablet PC is off while installing them. 2 Make sure there is no card currently in the slot. If there is, see Removing an SD Card below. 3 Insert your card into the slot with the product label facing up. 4 Push the card firmly into the slot until it is seated in the connector. Removing an SD Card To remove an SD Card, follow these easy steps:

SEE YOUR CARD MANUAL FOR SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS ON THE REMOVAL OF YOUR CARD. SOME CARDS MAY REQUIRE YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC TO BE IN SLEEP MODE OR OFF WHILE REMOVING THEM. 1 Select Safely Remove Hardware from the System Tray. Highlight the card in the list, then click [Stop]. 2 Push the SD Card in until it unlatches. It will then eject from the slot for removal. 74 - Secure Digital Cards Memory Upgrade Module Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC comes with a minimum of 2GB of high speed Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic RAM (DDR3-1600 SDRAM) factory installed. To increase your Tablet PCs memory capacity, you may install an additional memory upgrade module. The memory upgrade must be a dual-in-line (DIMM) SDRAM module. To ensure 100%

compatibility, purchase the SDRAM module only from the Fujitsu web store at www.shopfujitsu.com. DO NOT REMOVE ANY SCREWS FROM THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE COMPARTMENT EXCEPT THE ONES SPECIFICALLY SHOWN IN THE DIRECTIONS FOR INSTALLING AND REMOVING THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE. THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE MODULE, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

BEFORE HANDLING A MEMORY MODULE, TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING A MEMORY MODULE, HOLD IT BY THE EDGE SO AS NOT TO TOUCH ANY CONTACTS OR CHIPS. BE CAREFUL NOT TO TOUCH ANY INTERNAL COMPUTER TERMINALS OR COMPONENTS; THE OIL FROM YOUR FINGERS COULD CAUSE A SHORT TO THE COMPONENTS. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING MEMORY MODULES. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE OR SLEEP STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR THE MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. Installing Memory Upgrade Modules 1 Turn off power to your Tablet PC, remove any power adapter (AC or auto/airline). Remove the battery. 2 Make sure that all the connector covers are closed. 3 Turn the Tablet PC bottom side up, and remove the screw from the memory upgrade module compartment. 4 Lift and remove the cover from the memory module compartment (Figure 36). 5 Remove the memory upgrade module from the static guarded sleeve. 6 Align the memory upgrade module with the part side up. Align the connector edge of the memory upgrade module with the connector slot in the compartment.(Figure 37) 75 - Memory Upgrade Module Figure 36. Opening Memory Compartment 7 Insert the memory upgrade module at a 45 angle. Press the connector edge of the module firmly down and into the connector until it lodges under the retaining clip. Youll hear a click when it is properly in place. 8 Replace the cover and reinstall the screws. THE MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE IS NOT SOMETHING YOU ROUTINELY REMOVE FROM YOUR TABLET PC. ONCE IT IS INSTALLED, YOU CAN LEAVE IT IN PLACE UNLESS YOU WANT TO CHANGE SYSTEM MEMORY CAPACITY. Figure 37. Installing a Memory Module 76 - Memory Upgrade Module Removing a Memory Upgrade Module 1 Perform steps 1 through 4 of Installing a Memory Upgrade Module. 2 Pull the clips sideways away from each side of the memory upgrade module at the same time. 3 While holding the clips out, remove the module by lifting it up and pulling it away from your Tablet PC. 4 Store the memory upgrade module in a static guarded sleeve. 5 Replace the cover and reinstall the screws. Figure 38. Removing a Memory Module Checking the Memory Capacity Once you have changed the system memory capacity by replacing the installed module with a larger one, be sure to check that your notebook has recognized the change. Check the memory capacity by clicking [Start] -> Settings -> Control Panel, then clicking the System icon. Check the amount of memory next to Installed memory (RAM):. IF THE TOTAL MEMORY DISPLAYED IS INCORRECT, CHECK THAT YOUR MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED. (IF THE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED AND THE CAPACITY IS STILL NOT CORRECTLY RECOGNIZED, SEE TROUBLESHOOTING ON PAGE 83. 77 - Memory Upgrade Module There may be a variation between the actual memory size and what is displayed. This is possible if your system is configured with an integrated Intel Graphics Media Accelerator which dynamically allocates system memory to accelerate graphics performance. IF THE TOTAL MEMORY DISPLAYED IS INCORRECT, CHECK THAT YOUR MEMORY UPGRADE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED. (IF THE MODULE IS PROPERLY INSTALLED AND THE CAPACITY IS STILL NOT CORRECTLY RECOGNIZED, SEE TROUBLESHOOTING ON PAGE 87. 78 - Memory Upgrade Module Device Ports Your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC and the optional Port Replicator come equipped with multiple ports to which you can connect external devices including: disk drives, keyboards, printers, etc. Internal LAN (RJ-45) Jack The internal LAN (RJ-45) jack is used for a Gigabit (10Base-

T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T) Ethernet LAN connection. You may need to configure your Tablet PC to work with your particular network. (Please refer to your network administrator for information on your network configuration.) To connect the LAN cable follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 3 Plug the other end of the cable into a LAN outlet. Port Replicator Connector The port replicator connector is used for the connection of your Tablet PC to an optional port replicator. In order to connect your Tablet PC to this device, refer to Port Replicator on page 83. Figure 39. Connecting the LAN 79 - Device Ports Universal Serial Bus Ports The Universal Serial Bus ports (USB) allow you to connect USB devices such as external game pads, pointing devices, keyboards and/or speakers. There are four USB ports on your Tablet PC; on the left-hand side are two USB 3.0 ports, one of which is an Anytime USB Charge port (See Information About Anytime USB Charge Utility. on page 81) and there are USB 2.0 ports on the right side and rear. In order to connect a USB device follow these steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. USB 2.0 Port Figure 40. Connecting a USB Device DUE TO THE ONGOING CHANGES IN USB TECHNOLOGY AND STANDARDS, NOT ALL USB DEVICES AND/OR DRIVERS ARE GUARANTEED TO WORK. 80 - Device Ports Information About Anytime USB Charge Utility. The Anytime USB Charge feature can be disabled and enabled from the BIOS Setup Utility; the feature is enabled by default. The settings for the Anytime USB Charge feature can be changed by going to Start > All Programs > Anytime USB Charge Utility and clicking on Settings. There are three possible settings for this feature: Disable Anytime USB Charge function, Only enable Anytime USB Charge function with AC Adapter, and Enable Anytime USB Charge function with AC Adapter or battery. Note that if the setting is selected, the function will eventually drain the battery if the AC Adapter is not plugged in. Certain USB devices may require that a driver be installed in order for this feature to work. Please check the documentation for your USB device to ensure proper charging with the Anytime USB Charge utility. Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to connect headphones or powered external speakers to your Tablet PC. Your headphones or speakers must be equipped with a 1/8 (3.5 mm) stereo mini-plug. In order to connect headphones or speakers follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening, then push the connector into the port until it is seated. Microphone Jack The microphone jack allows you to connect an external stereo microphone. Your microphone must be equipped with a 1/8(3.5 mm) mini-plug in order to fit into the microphone jack of your Tablet PC. In order to connect a microphone follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening, then push the connector into the port until it is seated. 81 - Device Ports HDMI Port. The High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) port is a digital audio/video interface over which uncompressed streams can be transmitted. HDMI is used to connect compatible digital devices with your computer (such as big-

screen TVs and video recorders). To connect an HDMI device:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. External Video Port The external video port allows you to connect an external monitor or LCD projector. In order to connect an external video device, follow these easy steps:

1 Align the connector with the port opening. 2 Push the connector into the port until it is seated. 3 Tighten the two hold-down screws, located on each end of the connector. Figure 41. Connecting an HDMI Device Figure 42. Connecting an External Video Device PRESSING THE [FN] + [F10] KEYS ALLOWS YOU TO CHANGE YOUR SELECTION OF WHERE TO SEND YOUR DISPLAY VIDEO. EACH TIME YOU PRESS THE KEY COMBINATION, YOU WILL STEP TO THE NEXT CHOICE, STARTING WITH THE BUILT-IN DISPLAY PANEL ONLY, MOVING TO THE EXTERNAL MONITOR ONLY, FINALLY MOVING TO BOTH THE BUILT-IN DISPLAY PANEL AND AN EXTERNAL MONITOR. 82 - Device Ports Port Replicator The port replicator extends the functionality of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC by providing ports to connect an external VGA monitor, a LAN (RJ-45) cable, four USB 3.0 devices, a DVI device, a DisplayPort device, headphones, and DC power. The port replicator connects to the bottom of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Docking Connector Power Button Moveable Bar Latch/Unlatch Button USB 3.0 Ports (Qty. 4) DC Power Jack DVI-D Port DisplayPort External VGA Port Security Lock Slot Headphone Jack LAN (RJ-45) Figure 43. Port Replicator - Rear 83 - Port Replicator Port Replicator Components The following is a brief description of the port replicators back panel components. (Figure 43) Power Button The power button allows you to power the port replicator on and off. Docking Connector The docking connector allows you to connect the Port Replicator to your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. THE SYSTEM CONTAINS COMPONENTS THAT CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE COMPONENTS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

BEFORE DOCKING OR UNDOCKING YOUR LIFEBOOK WHEN USING A PORT REPLICATOR, YOU SHOULD TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE OR SLEEP STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. DVI-D Port The DVI-D port lets you to connect digital display devices such flat panel displays and digital projectors using a DVI-

D cable. DVI-D is primarily used to connect a computer with a home theater system. DisplayPort The DisplayPort lets you to connect DisplayPort-compatible digital display devices such flat panel displays and digital projectors using a DisplayPort cable. ALTHOUGH DISPLAYPORT AND DVI-D DEVICES ARE SUPPORTED BY THE PORT REPLICATOR, ONLY ONE CAN BE USED AT ANY TIME. AN INTERNAL SWITCH RECOGNIZES WHICH TYPE OF DEVICE IS CONNECTED. IF BOTH ARE CONNECTED AT THE SAME TIME, DISPLAYPORT HAS THE HIGHER PRIORITY. A DISPLAYPORT OR DVI-D DEVICE CAN BE USED CONCURRENTLY WITH AN EXTERNAL VIDEO DEVICE THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE ANALOG EXTERNAL VGA PORT. HOT PLUG IS NOT SUPPORTED BY THE DISPLAYPORT OR DVI-D PORTS. IF A DISPLAYPORT-TO-HDMI CONVERTER IS CONNECTED TO THE DISPLAYPORT, SOUND WILL NOT BE OUTPUT FROM THE HDMI DEVICE. TO USE AN HDMI DEVICE, PLUG IT INTO THE HDMI PORT ON THE SYSTEMS LEFT SIDE. 84 - Port Replicator USB 3.0 Ports (Qty. 4) Universal Serial Bus (USB) 3.0 ports allow you to connect USB devices. USB 3.0 ports are backward-compatible with USB 2.0 and 1.1 devices. Moveable Bar Latch/Unlatch Button The moveable bar latch/unlatch button allows you to adjust the moveable bar in order to align your system so that it aligns properly with the port replicator connector. Viewing the port replicator from the front, the moveable bar should be moved as far to the left side of the port replicator as possible. External VGA Port The external VGA port lets you connect an external monitor or projector. Note that if a Port Replicator is attached, you must use the external VGA port on the Port Replicator, not the one on your system. Headphone Jack The headphone jack allows you to listen to stereo sound from your Tablet PC with portable headphones. LAN (RJ-45) Jack The LAN jack allows you to connect a LAN to the Port Replicator. Note that when the system is attached to the Port Replicator, the LAN Jack on the Port Replicator should be used, not the one on the system. Security Lock Slot The security lock slot allows you to attach an optional physical lock down device. DC Power Jack The DC power jack allows you to plug in the AC adapter to power your Tablet PC and charge the internal Lithium ion battery. 85 - Port Replicator Attaching the Port Replicator To attach the Port Replicator, align the Port Replicator connector on the bottom of your Tablet PC with the connector on the Port Replicator and push the corners down simultaneously. (Figure 44) Detaching Port Replicator To detach the Port Replicator:

1 Pull the Port Replicators release latch away from the Port Replicator to release it from your Tablet PC.

(Figure 45) 2 Lift the Tablet PC away from the Port Replicator to Docking Connector detach it. (Figure 46) Figure 44. Attaching the Port Replicator Release Latch Figure 45. Unlatching the Port Replicator Figure 46. Removing the System 86 -

Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Your LIFEBOOK Troubleshooting There may be occasions when you encounter simple setup or operating problems that you can solve on the spot, or problems with peripheral devices that can be solved by replacing the device. The information in this section helps you isolate and resolve some of these straightforward issues and identify failures that require service. Identifying the Problem If you encounter a problem, go through the following procedure before pursuing complex troubleshooting:

1 Turn off your LIFEBOOK notebook. 2 Make sure the AC adapter is plugged into your notebook and to an active AC power source. 3 Make sure that any card installed in the PC Card slot is seated properly. You can also remove the card from the slot, thus eliminating it as a possible cause of failure. 4 Make sure that any devices connected to the external connectors are plugged in properly. You can also disconnect such devices, thus eliminating them as possible causes of failure. 5 Turn on your notebook. Make sure it has been off at least 10 seconds before you turn it back on. 6 Go through the boot sequence. 7 If the problem has not been resolved, refer to the Troubleshooting Table, that follows, for more detailed troubleshooting information. 87 IF YOU KEEP NOTES ABOUT WHAT YOU HAVE TRIED, YOUR SUPPORT REPRESENTATIVE MAY BE ABLE TO HELP YOU MORE QUICKLY BY GIVING ADDITIONAL SUGGESTIONS OVER THE PHONE. 8 If you have tried the solutions suggested in the Troubleshooting Table without success, contact your support representative:

Toll free: 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Web site: http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php. Before you place the call, you should have the following information ready so that the customer support representative can provide you with the fastest possible solution:

Product name Product configuration number Product serial number Purchase date Conditions under which the problem occurred Any error messages that have occurred Type of device connected, if any See the Configuration Label on the bottom of your notebook for configuration and serial numbers. 88 - Troubleshooting Specific Problems Using the Troubleshooting Table When you have problems with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC, try to find the symptoms under the Problem column of the troubleshooting table for the feature giving you difficulty. You will find a description of common causes for that symptom under the column Possible Cause and what, if anything, you can do to correct the condition under Possible Solutions. All possible causes or solutions may not apply to your Tablet PC. Troubleshooting Table ProblemPage ProblemPage Audio Problems . page 90 USB Device Problems. page 92 Optical Drive Problems . page 90 Power Failures . page 93 Port Replicator Problems . page 91 Shutdown and Startup Problems. page 95 Hard Drive Problems . page 91 Video Problems . page 96 Keyboard or Mouse Problems . page 91 Miscellaneous Problems . page 97 Memory Problems . page 92 89 - Troubleshooting Problem Audio Problems There is no sound coming from the built-in speaker. Possible Cause Possible Solutions The volume is turned too low. Adjust the volume control on your Tablet PC and operating system. Use the

[Fn+F9] key combination on your keyboard. Pressing [F9] repeatedly while holding [Fn] will increase the volume of your Tablet PC. The software volume control is set too low. Manually adjusting the volume (i.e., keyboard "hot keys") should dynamically adjust the volume of the operating system (see above). If that doesnt work, adjust the sound volume control settings in your software or application. Headphones are plugged into your Tablet PC. Plugging in headphones disables the built-in speakers. Remove the head-

phones. Software driver is not configured correctly. The audio driver may be installed or reinstalled using the Drivers and Applica-

tions CD that came with your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK. Refer to your application and operating system documentation for help. The speakers have been muted using the Volume icon in the system tray. Click the Volume icon in the system tray on the bottom right of the screen. (It looks like a speaker). If the Mute box has a red circle on it, click on it to unselect it. You can also use the [Fn+F3] key combination to toggle the volume on and off. Pressing [F3] while holding [Fn] will toggle the audio mute. Optical Drive Problems LIFEBOOK Tablet PC fails to recognize DVD/CD-

RW/CD-ROMs. The disc is not pushed down onto raised center circle of the drive. Optical drive tray is not latched shut. Open optical drive tray and re-install the disc properly. Push on the front of the optical drive tray until it latches. If that doesnt work, pull out the modular drive latch to remove the device from the bay, then re-

insert the drive until it latched; this ensures that the drive is properly seated. Incorrect DVD Player or player software is installed. Install DVD Player software. DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM is dirty or defective. Wipe the disc with a non-abrasive CD cleaning cloth and reinsert. If it still will not work try another DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM in the drive. 90 - Troubleshooting Problem LIFEBOOK Tablet PC fails to recognize DVD/CD-

RW/CD-ROMs.

(continued) Possible Cause Wrong drive designator was used for the disc in the appli-

cation. Possible Solutions Verify the drive designator used by the application is the same as the one used by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a DVD/CD, drive designations are automatically adjusted. Note that the drive designation can be changed with the Disk Management tool located at Control Panel ->

Administrative Tools -> Computer Management. The Windows auto insertion function is active and is checking to see if a disc is ready to run. Drive access indicator on the Status Indicator Panel blinks at regular intervals with no disc in the tray or the drive is not installed. Port Replicator Problems Note: Be sure to power down your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC before adding a printer to the Port Replicator parallel port. This is normal. However, you may disable this feature. Tablet PC does not turn on when installed in the optional Port Replicator Hard Drive Problems You cannot access your hard drive. Port Replicator AC adapter is not plugged in. Tablet PC is not properly seated in the Port Replicator. The wrong drive designator was used by an application when a bootable disc was used to start the Tablet PC. Security is set so your operat-

ing system cannot be started without a password. Provide power to the Port Replicator. Remove and re-dock your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Verify drive designator used by application is in use by the operating system. When the operating system is booted from a CD, drive designations are auto-

matically adjusted. Verify your password and security settings. Keyboard or Mouse Problems The built-in keyboard does not seem to work. The Tablet PC has gone into Sleep mode. Push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. 91 - Troubleshooting Problem You have installed an external keyboard or mouse, and it does not seem to work. Possible Cause Your application has locked out your keyboard. Your external device is not properly installed. Your operating system is not set up with correct software driver for that device. Possible Solutions Try to use your integrated pointing device to restart your system. Re-install your device. See Device Ports on page 79. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. You have connected an external keyboard or a mouse and it seems to be locking up the system. Memory Problems Your System screen in the Control Panel does not show the correct amount of installed memory. USB Device Problems Your LIFEBOOK doesnt recognize an installed USB device, or it doesnt work. Your OS is not setup with cor-

rect driver for that device. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Your system has crashed. Try to restart your Tablet PC. Your memory upgrade mod-

ule is not properly installed. Remove and re-install your memory upgrade module. See Memory Upgrade Module on page 75. You have a memory failure. Check for Power On Self Test (POST) messages. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 98. The device is not properly installed. Your device may not have the correct software driver active. The device may have been installed while an application was running, so your system is not aware of its installation. Remove and re-install the device. See Device Ports on page 79. See your software documentation and activate the correct driver. Close the application and restart your Tablet PC. 92 - Troubleshooting Problem Power Failures You turn on your LIFE-

BOOK Tablet PC and nothing seems to happen. Possible Cause Possible Solutions The installed battery is com-

pletely discharged or there is no power adapter installed. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Install a charged battery or a Power adapter. The battery is installed but is faulty. The battery is low. Use the Status Indicator panel to verify the presence and condition of the bat-

tery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. If the battery indicates a short, remove it and operate from another power source or replace that battery. Check the Status Indicator Panel to determine the presence and condition of the battery. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Use a Power adapter to operate until a battery is charged or install a charged battery. The power adapter is not plugged in properly. Verify that your adapter is connected correctly. See Power Sources on page 57. The power adapter (AC or auto/airline) has no power from the AC outlet, airplane jack, or car cigarette lighter. The power adapter (AC or auto/airline) is faulty. Move the AC cord to a different outlet, check for a line switch or tripped circuit breaker for the AC outlet. If you are using an auto/airline adapter in a car make sure the ignition switch is in the On or Accessories position. Try a different power adapter. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC turns off all by itself. The power management parameters are set for auto timeouts which are too short for your operating needs. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. Check your power management settings, or close your applications and go to the Power Options located in the Control Panel to adjust the timeout values to better suit your needs. Install a power adapter, then push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. See Power Sources on page 57. You are operating on battery power and ignored a low bat-

tery alarm until the battery was at the dead battery state and the system has entered Dead Battery Suspend mode. 93 - Troubleshooting Problem Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC turns off all by itself.

(continued) Possible Cause You have a battery failure. Possible Solutions Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel. If the battery is shorted, replace or remove it. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. Your power adapter has failed or lost its power source. Make sure the adapter is plugged in and the outlet has power. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC will not work on battery alone. The installed battery is dead. Replace the battery with a charged one or install a power adapter. Battery is improperly installed. Verify that the battery is properly connected by re-installing it. Your installed battery is faulty. Verify the condition of the battery using the Status Indicator panel and replace or remove any batteries that are shorted. See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. The battery seems to discharge too quickly. The power savings features may be disabled. Check the Power Options menu settings and adjust according to your operating needs. The brightness is turned all the way up. Turn down the brightness adjustment. The higher the brightness the more power your display uses. The battery is very old. Replace the battery. You are running an applica-

tion that uses a lot of power due to frequent hard drive access or optical drive access, or use of a Wireless LAN, or Bluetooth device. The battery has been ex-

posed to high temperatures. Use a power adapter for this application when at all possible. Replace the battery. The battery is too hot or too cold. Restore the Tablet PC to normal operating temperature. Charging icon on the Status Indicator panel will flash when battery is outside of operating range. 94 - Troubleshooting Possible Cause Problem Shutdown and Startup Problems The Suspend/Resume slide does not work. Suspend/Resume slide is disabled. Possible Solutions To enable the button, go to the Control Panel -> Power Options Properties and click the Advanced tab. In the Power buttons area, select Change what the power button does . There may be application software. conflict Close all applications and try the button again. The system powers up, and displays power on information, but fails to load the operating system. The boot sequence settings of the setup utility are not compatible with your configu-

ration. Set the operating source by pressing the [ESC] key while the Fujitsu logo is on screen or use the [F2] key and enter the setup utility and adjust the source set-

tings from the Boot menu. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 61. You have a secured system requiring a password to load your operating system. Make sure you have the right password. Enter the setup utility and verify the Security settings and modify them as accordingly. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 61. Internal hard drive was not detected. Use the BIOS setup utility or Primary Master submenu, located within the Main menu, to try to auto detect the internal hard drive. An error message is dis-

played on the screen dur-

ing the Boot sequence. Power On Self Test (POST) has detected a problem. See the POST messages to determine the meaning and severity of the prob-

lem. Not all messages are errors; some are simply status indicators. See Power On Self Test Messages on page 98. Your Tablet PC appears to change setup parameters when you start it. BIOS setup changes were not saved when made and you exited the setup utility. Make sure you select Save Changes And Exit when exiting the BIOS setup utility. The BIOS CMOS hold-up bat-

tery has failed. Contact your support representative for repairs. This is not a user serviceable part but has a normal life of 3 to 5 years. Your system display wont turn on when the system is turned on or has resumed. You have installed the LIFE-

BOOK/Security Application panel. Check the Status Indicator Panel for presence of the Security icon. If it is visi-

ble, enter your password See Status Indicator Panel on page 24. 95 - Troubleshooting Problem Video Problems The built-in display is blank when you turn on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Possible Cause Possible Solutions The Tablet PC is set for an external monitor only. Pressing [F10] while holding down the [Fn] key allows you to change your selection of where to send your display video. Each time you press the keys you will step to the next choice. The choices, in order are: built-in display only, external monitor only, both built-in display and external monitor. Display angle and brightness settings are not adequate for your lighting conditions. Move the display and the brightness control until you have adequate visibility. Pressing either the [F6] or [F7] keys while holding down the [Fn] key also allows you to change the brightness level of the display. Power management time-

outs are set for short intervals and you didnt see the display go on and off again. Press a keyboard button or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. (The display may be shut off by Sleep mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) The Tablet PC turned on with a series of beeps and the built-in display is blank. Power On Self Test has detected a failurethat doesnt allow the display to operate. Contact your support representative. The display goes blank by itself after you have been using it. The Tablet PC has gone into Video timeout, Sleep mode, or Save-to-Disk mode because you have not used it for a period of time. Press any keyboard button, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. Check your power management settings, or close your applications and go to the Power Savings menu of the setup utility to adjust the timeout values to better suit your operation needs. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 61. The power management time-

outs may be set for very short intervals and you failed to notice the display come on and go off again. Press any button on the keyboard, or move the mouse to restore operation. If that fails, push the Power/Suspend/Resume slide. (The display may be shut off by Sleep Mode, Auto Suspend or Video Timeout) The system may be pass-

word-protected. Check the status indicator panel to verify that the Security icon is blinking. If it is blinking, enter your password. Your display wont turn on when the system is turned on or when it has resumed. 96 - Troubleshooting Problem The display does not close. The display has bright or dark spots. The display is dark when on battery power. Possible Cause A foreign object, such as a paper clip, is stuck between the display and keyboard. If the spots are very tiny and few in number, this is normal for a large LCD display. If the spots are numerous or large enough to interfere with your operation needs. The Power Management util-

ity default is set on low bright-

ness to conserve power. Possible Solutions Remove all foreign objects from the keyboard. This is normal; do nothing. Display is faulty; contact your support representative. Press [Fn] + [F7] to increase brightness or click the battery gauge, click on More power options, and select Adjust the display brightness. You have connected an external monitor but it does not display anything. Your operating system is not setup with the correct soft-

ware driver for that device. Check your device and operating system documentation and activate the proper driver. Your BIOS setup is not set to enable your external monitor. Toggle the video destination by pressing [Fn]+ [F10] together, or check your BIOS setup and enable your external monitor. (See the Video Features sub-

menu, located in the Advanced Menu of the BIOS. See BIOS Setup Utility on page 61. Your external monitor is not properly installed. Your external monitor is not compatible with your LIFE-

BOOK Tablet PC. Application software often has its own set of error message displays. You have connected an external monitor and it does not come on. Miscellaneous Problems Error message is dis-

played on the screen dur-

ing the operation of an application. Reinstall your device. See External Video Port on page 82. See your monitor documentation and the External Monitor Support portions of the Specifications section. See Specifications on page 116. See your application manual and help displays screens for more information. Not all messages are errors some may simply be status. 97 - Troubleshooting Power On Self Test Messages The following is a list of error-and-status messages that the Phoenix BIOS and/or your operating system can generate and an explanation of each message. Error messages are marked with an *. If an error message is displayed that is not in this list, write it down and check the operating system documentation on screen and in the manual. If you can find no reference to the message, contact a support representative.

*Invalid NVRAM Data Problem with NVRAM access. In the unlikely case that you see this message you may have a display problem. You can continue operating but should contact your support representative for more information.

*Keyboard controller error The keyboard controller test failed. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.

*Keyboard not detected Keyboard not working. You may have to replace your keyboard or keyboard controller but may be able to use an external keyboard until then. Contact your support representative.

*Operating system not found Operating system cannot be located on either drive A: or drive C: Enter the setup utility and see if both the fixed disk, and drive A: are properly identified and that the boot sequence is set correctly. Unless you have changed your installation greatly, the operating system should be on drive C:. If the setup utility is correctly set, your hard drive may be corrupted.

*Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP Displayed after any recoverable error message. Press [F1] key to Continue or [F2] key to Enter Setup.

*Real time clock error - Check date and time settings Real-time clock fails BIOS test. May require board repair. Contact your support representative.

*Fan error, system shutdown in 30s. Contact Fujitsu tech support Fan error occurred. Please contact your sales representative.

*Fan error occurred during previous boot. Fan error occurred during previous boot. Please contact your sales representative. 98 - Troubleshooting Restoring Your System Image and Software It is very important that you create DVD copies of your Factory Image and Bootable Disc (along with other applicable media such as application discs) before beginning to use your system. To do so, follow the instructions in the Saving Your Factory Image and Creating Backup Images of Factory Image and Discs sections of this chapter. Saving and Recovering Your Factory and System Images Along with instructions on saving your Factory Image, this document outlines several other important procedures, such as making a system image, restoring your Factory Image and system images, managing your images, and restoring the partitions on a hard drive. IN ORDER TO INSTALL APPLICATIONS, MAKE COPIES OF FACTORY AND SYSTEM IMAGES, AND BURN APPLICATION MEDIA AND BOOTABLE DISCS YOU MUST HAVE AN INTERNAL OR EXTERNALLY CONNECTED WRITABLE DVD DRIVE. IT IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT YOU COPY YOUR FACTORY IMAGE TO REMOVABLE MEDIA (E.G., DVD DISCS). FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN AN INABILITY TO RESTORE THE IMAGE AT A FUTURE DATE. WE RECOMMEND THAT YOU USE DVD-R OR DVD+R DISCS FOR YOUR BACKUP, BUT SUPPORTED MEDIA* FOR IMAGE BACKUPS INCLUDE:

FOR FACTORY IMAGE, APPLICATION DATA, AND BOOTABLE DISC: DVD-R/+R. FOR USER-CREATED BACKUP IMAGE: DVD-R/+R, DVD-RW/+RW, DVD-DL.

* DEPENDING UPON YOUR OPTICAL DRIVE AND MEDIA FORMAT USED, SOME MEDIA TYPES MAY BE INCOMPATIBLE FOR CREATING IMAGE BACKUPS. DUE TO CERTAIN LICENSING REQUIREMENTS, SOME THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS WILL NEED TO BE INSTALLED SEPARATELY USING THE APPLICATION MEDIA BUNDLED WITH YOUR SYSTEM. Saving your Factory Image When you purchased your new system, a copy of the pre-installed Factory Image was loaded into a hidden partition on your hard disk drive. Having a copy of the original Factory Image available to you means that in the event of system failure, you will be able to restore it to its original state. 99 - Restoring Your System Image and Software To make a copy of the Factory Image to DVD discs, you will need several blank discs (DVD-R or DVD+R discs are recommended) to create the copy. After creating the copy, be sure to label the discs and keep them in a safe place to ensure they do not get damaged. Creating Backup Images of Factory Image and Discs SOME CONFIGURATIONS OF CERTAIN LIFEBOOK MODELS DO NOT HAVE APPLICATIONS LOADED ON THE HARD DRIVE; RATHER, THEY ARE AVAILABLE AT THE FUJITSU SUPPORT SITE FOR DOWNLOAD. PLEASE TAKE THAT INTO ACCOUNT WHEN READING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES. ALL USER-CREATED DATA WILL BE DELETED FROM YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE FACTORY IMAGE IS RESTORED. Using the [Manage/Change] button, you can create backup images of the Factory Image, Application Disc(s), or Bootable Disc. 1 Launch My Recovery from desktop icon 2 Select [Manage/Create]-> [Manage Backup Images]. The Backup Images menu displays a list from which you can choose which type of disc you want to burn: Bootable Disc, Application Discs, or Recovery Disc. 3 Select Recovery Disc, then click [Make DVD]. 4 Confirm that the # box has 2 (Note that in some cases the box may display a larger number for the factory image, depending upon its size.) 5 The message Recovery Disc #1 will be created. Enter your comments and the number of media on the DVD. Click

[YES] to burn the Factory Image. 6 While the copy is being made, a Writing to the media screen displays a progress bar. When the copy is complete, a dialog will appear informing you of the successful completion of the backup. 7 Repeat the process for the remaining images on disc (Bootable Disc and Application Discs). The number of images available may vary depending on your system model; some models do not have the applications loaded on the hard drive. 100 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Recovering Your Factory Image In the event you need to restore your original Factory Image, perform the following steps. Note that there may be some third-party applications that need to be installed from the application media bundled with your system. ALL USER-CREATED DATA WILL BE DELETED FROM YOUR SYSTEM WHEN THE FACTORY IMAGE IS RESTORED. In order to recover your Factory Image, perform the steps outlined in Running Recovery and Utility from hard disk. Backing Up a System Image Optional Step: Launch the Fujitsu Bonus Apps utility from your desktop, and select the components you wish to install. User-Configured System Backups: On your desktop, there is a [MyRecovery] icon that allows you to make backups of your current system image either to another location on your hard drive or on removable media. A system image is the configuration of your C: drive at a particular point of time. You may want to make system image backups occasionally in order to have points to which you can return without having to go all the way back to the Factory Image. By default, system images are saved in the MyRecovery folder (either on D:\ or external hard drive, depending on your hardware type). 1 Click the [MyRecovery] icon on your desktop. The My Recovery screen will appear (See Figure 47). Note that the My Recovery screen illustrated may vary, depending upon your system configuration.) 2 Click the [Backup] button on the MyRecovery screen. 3 On the next screen that appears, you can enter up to 200 characters of information about the backup file. This information will help you to identify the image at a later date. 101 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Figure 47. MyRecovery screen 4 Click the [Next] button and the system will reboot. 5 After rebooting, the Creating of the backup image window appears, in which you can either click [Create the image on D drive] or [Select the drive] if you want to save to an external hard disk drive. (Note that the [Create the image on D drive may not be available on all configurations.) 6 An image appears showing you graphically how the image will be stored. Click the [Next] button. 7 Click [Execute] to start the backup. 102 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Managing Your Backup Images With the MyRecovery tool you can also make copies of backup images, archive them on DVD, or delete them from your hard drive. 1 To begin, click the [MyRecovery] icon on your desktop. 2 Click the [Manage/Create] button in the MyRecovery window. 3 When the MyRecovery Manager window appears, click [Manage Backup Images]. 4 In the next window, a list of your backup images appears. Below the list are three buttons allowing you to [Make DVD], [Copy], or [Delete] your backup images. 5 Select an image title from the list, then click the action button you would like to perform. 6 Note that you need to have an external disk drive connected for the [Copy] button to be enabled. If you elect to copy the image, you will be prompted to enter the destination. If you are ready to copy, click [OK] to proceed. A progress screen appears while the backup copy is being made. 7 Note that if you copy an image to an external hard drive, both the original and the copy will appear in the [Backup Images] window with identical names, dates, and file sizes, but with the different drive letter to distinguish them. Before you select [Make DVD], make sure you have a recordable DVD drive connected and blank DVDs available. Using the Recovery and Utility Tools The Recovery and Utility tools consist of a variety of tools that will help you recover your Factory Image, recover system images, and delete the data from your hard disk. Methods for accessing the utilities Recovery and Utility Tools are preinstalled in a hidden partition by the factory, or they can be accessed by using the bootable disc. Please note that you can delete Recovery and Utility tools from your hard disk drive if you modify the partitions. In this case you will not be able to use the hidden partition for booting to Recovery and Utility Tools, but you will still be able to boot from the Bootable Disc. 103 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Determining whether Recovery and Utility is pre-loaded 1 Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press [F12] key. The Boot Menu will appear. 2 Press the Tab key to select Application menu. 3 Check whether the <Recovery and Utility> option is present. If it is not present, it means that the utility must be used from the disc. Proceed to Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable Disc if <Recovery and Utility> is unavailable. Running Recovery and Utility from hard disk 1 Turn on or reboot your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears, press [F12] key. The Boot Menu will appear. 2 Press the Tab key to select Application menu. 3 Cursor down to <Recovery and Utility> and press the [Enter] key. 4 While the files are being loaded from the disc, a progress bar will appear at the bottom of the screen. 5 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 6 When the Operating System dialog appears, select Use recovery tools..., then click [Next]. 7 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 8 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on Recovery and Utility. 9 The Recovery and Utility screen appears on the screen with three tabs: Diagnostics, Recovery and Utility. Please note that Diagnostics tab is not supported on certain LIFEBOOK/STYLISTIC models when running Recovery and Utility from the hard disk. In order to restore the operating system, please use the middle icon Restoring the Factory Image (only C:\drive) under the Recovery tab. Running Recovery and Utility from the Bootable disc To verify/change the boot-up priority (rather than booting-up from the hard drive or an external floppy disk drive), perform the following steps:

1 Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. press the [F12] key to get to the Boot Menu. 2 Highlight the CD/DVD option. 3 Insert the bootable disc into the drive tray. 104 - Restoring Your System Image and Software 4 Click [OK]. While the files are being loaded from the disc, a progress bar will appear at the bottom of the screen. 5 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 6 When the Operating System dialog appears, click [Next]. 7 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 8 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on Recovery and Utility. 9 When the Recovery and Utility screen appears, three tabs will be present: Diagnostics, Recovery, and Utility. Recovery and Utility tabs Diagnostics tab: The Diagnostics tool is designed for use by IT professionals. It is not likely you will need to use this tool. When you select devices from the Diagnosis window then click [Execute], several tests are performed on the selected components. Recovery tab: The Recovery tab contains three tools: Recovering User-Configured System Backups, Restoring the Factory Image (only C: drive), and Restoring the Factory Image (full hard drive recovery). You can use these tools to restore the Factory Image from the hidden partition, restore backup image(s) created by you or images stored on DVD discs, and perform a full hard drive recovery. Please refer to instructions above for details on how to create Factory Image Recovery DVDs, user backup DVDs and system image backup. Utility tab: The Utility tab contains three tools: Hard Disk Data Delete, Restore Recovery and Utility, and Windows Complete PC Restore. The Hard Disk Data Delete utility is used to delete all data on the hard disk and prevent the data from being reused. NOTE: Do not use the Hard Disk Data Delete utility unless you are absolutely certain that you want to erase your entire hard disk, including all partitions. Restore Recovery and Utility allows you to restore the first hidden partition. Windows Complete PC Restore utility allows you to restore an image created with Windows Backup and Restore Center. Complete PC Restore will overwrite the data on your hard disk drive. 105 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Recovering your Factory Image using Recovery and Utility (for new hard drive or non-bootable hard drive) If you have installed a new hard drive or your hard drive is not bootable, perform the following steps. Note that first you will need to create new partitions on the hard drive, then restore the Factory Image:

1 Power on your system. When the Fujitsu logo appears on the screen. press the [F12] key. 2 Highlight the CD/DVD option. 3 Insert the bootable disc in your DVD drive, then click [OK]. 4 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on <Recovery and Utility>. 5 When the System Recovery Options dialog opens, select a new keyboard layout, if necessary, then click [Next]. 6 When the Operating System dialog appears, click [Next]. 7 If necessary, enter your password, then click [OK]. 8 When System Recovery Options window appears, click on Recovery and Utility. 9 Click the Recovery tab in the Recovery and Utility window, then click Restoring the Factory Image icon. 10 Click [Execute]. 11 Read the precautions, then select I Agree. 12 Click [Next], then click [Execute] to start the recovery process. 13 1. Recovery Disc Check will be in bold and the rest will be grayed out. Follow the instructions and Insert the Recovery Disc #1. In some cases, you may prompted to Insert the Recovery Disc #2, depending upon the size of the Recovery Image 14 Click [Next] to begin the check. Click [Next] again when the check is complete. 15 2. Initializing hard disk drive will be in bold with the message Please insert the Bootable Disc into your optical drive. Insert the bootable disc. Click [Next] to proceed. A dialog box appears, with a checking disc message. 16 Warning All DATA on the Hard Disk will be completely erased!!! will appear. Select [OK]. The partition creation process will begin. 17 3. Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition will be in bold with the message Please insert the Recovery Disk#1 into the optical drive. Click [Next] to proceed. 106 - Restoring Your System Image and Software After completion, the tool will automatically go back to "3.Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition" but will include the note Please insert your Third Party Applications Disc or CyberLink DVD, then click [OK]. After installation of each disc, insert the next and continue until all have been installed. If you don't have your Third Party Applications Disc and/or CyberLink DVD, or you have already inserted these discs, please click [Skip] to continue. NOTE: In some cases (products without an optical drive) you will not have a CyberLink DVD". At this point, you can either:

Insert Application Disc(s) to restore back to hidden partition, or, Click [Skip] to skip restoring Application disc(s) and continue with restore. 18 If you select to insert Application Disc, after copying of application disc(s) to hidden partition is completed, the message will appear again. Repeat inserting application disc(s) until all discs have been copied, then click [Skip]

to continue with Restore. 19 After clicking [Skip], a confirmation message will appear "If you want to skip copying or you have finished copying, click [OK]. Click [Cancel] to go back to Restoring Factory Image to hidden partition. 20 Click [OK] and Restoring Factory Image will begin. 21 When restoration is complete, you will see the message Restoration has been completed. Click [OK] to reboot the computer. Click [OK]. Downloading Driver Updates To ensure that you always have the most current driver updates related to your system, you should occasionally access the Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM) utility. The FSDM utility is available from the Fujitsu Support site. FSDM will allow you to view a list of the most current drivers, utilities, and applications to determine whether you have the latest versions. If you have a Windows 7 operating system, you will need to go to the Support Site to download the FSDM Utility: http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS. 107 - Restoring Your System Image and Software Chapter 5 Care and Maintenance Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC If you use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC carefully, you will increase its life and reliability. This section provides some tips for looking after the Tablet PC and its devices. THE SYSTEM CONTAINS COMPONENTS THAT CAN BE SEVERELY DAMAGED BY ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD). TO MINIMIZE RISK TO THE COMPONENTS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS:

BEFORE DOCKING OR UNDOCKING YOUR LIFEBOOK TABLET PC (WHEN USING A PORT REPLICATOR), IT IS A GOOD PRACTICE TO ALWAYS TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE OR SLEEP STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING A MEMORY MODULE, HOLD IT BY THE EDGE SO AS NOT TO TOUCH ANY CONTACTS OR CHIPS. BE CAREFUL NOT TO TOUCH ANY INTERNAL COMPUTER TERMINALS OR COMPONENTS; THE OIL FROM YOUR FINGERS COULD CAUSE A SHORT TO THE COMPONENTS. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MAY BE HAZARDOUS IF MISUSED. OPERATIONS OF THIS PRODUCT OR SIMILAR PRODUCTS, MUST ALWAYS BE SUPERVISED BY AN ADULT. DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN ACCESS TO THE INTERIOR OF ANY ELECTRICAL PRODUCTS AND DO NOT PERMIT THEM TO HANDLE ANY CABLES. Your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC is a durable but sensitive electronic device. Treat it with care. Make a habit of transporting it in a suitable carrying case. Do not attempt to service the computer yourself. Always follow installation instructions closely. 108 Keep it away from food and beverages. To protect your Tablet PC from damage and to optimize system performance, be sure to keep all air vents unobstructed, clean, and clear of debris. This may require periodic cleaning, depending upon the environment in which the system is used. Do not operate the Tablet PC in areas where the air vents can be obstructed, such as in tight enclosures or on soft surfaces like a bed or cushion. If you accidentally spill liquid on your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC:

1 2 3 4 Turn it off. Position it so that the liquid can run out. Let it dry out for 24 hours, or longer if needed. If your Tablet PC will not boot after it has dried out, call your support representative. Do not use your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC in a wet environment (near a bathtub, swimming pool). Always use the AC adapter and batteries that are approved for your Tablet PC. Avoid exposure to sand, dust and other environmental hazards. Do not expose your Tablet PC to direct sunlight for long periods of time as temperatures above 140 F (60 C) may damage your Tablet PC. Keep the covers closed on the connectors and slots when they are not in use. Do not put heavy or sharp objects on the computer. If you are carrying your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC in a briefcase, or any other carrying case, make sure that there are no objects in the case pressing on the lid. Never position your Tablet PC such that the optical drive is supporting the weight of the Tablet PC. Cleaning your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Always disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug, not the cord.) Clean your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC with a damp, lint-free cloth. Do not use abrasives or solvents. Use a soft cloth to remove dust from the screen. Never use glass cleaners. Always shut down the computer, unplug the power adapter, and remove the battery when cleaning or disinfecting the computer exterior, keyboard or LCD display. 109 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Cleaning guidelines using recommended off-the-shelf cleaners Computer exterior, computer keyboard To clean the exterior and keyboard, use one of the following off-the-shelf products:

Office Depot #154-616 Notebook Cleaning Kit Meridrew Enterprises Klear Screen Wipes 3M CL563 Cleaner Wipes Note: After cleaning with one of these products, gently polish with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth until the solution is no longer visible. LCD display To clean the LCD display, use one of the following off-the-shelf products:

Office Depot #154-616 Notebook Cleaning Kit Meridrew Enterprises Klear Screen Wipes Applies to Tablet PC, convertible PC with LCD shield, and standard notebook LCD displays. Wipe the LCD surface gently, allowing it to dry before turning on the computer. Disinfecting LIFEBOOK computers Wipe the surface with a soft cloth wipe and a 50% ethanol solution or use another ethanol-based germicide which has been registered as a hospital disinfectant by the EPA. USE OF INCORRECT CLEANERS CAN RESULT IN OPTICAL IMPAIRMENT OF THE LCD AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE COMPUTER. ALWAYS REFER TO THE CLEANER MANUFACTURER'S GUIDELINES AND MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS FOR PROPER HANDLING AND USE OF THE PRODUCTS. NEVER USE AMMONIA, ACIDIC, OR ALKALINE CLEANERS OR ORGANIC CHEMICALS SUCH AS PAINT THINNER, ACETONE, PROPYL OR ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL, OR KEROSENE. IT MAY DAMAGE SURFACE FINISHES AND THE COATING OF THE LCD SCREEN. NEVER USE COMPRESSED AIR FOR CLEANING STYLISTIC AND LIFEBOOK PCS. 110 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Cleaning the dust filter Your LIFEBOOK is equipped with fans to make air flow inside by pulling in outside air to cool the inside of the system. Depending on the environment in which the system is used, dust and dirt may be pulled in along with the air. Accumulated dust and dirt could impair the function of the system. REMOVE AC ADAPTER: BEFORE REMOVING THE FILTER, TURN OFF THE SYSTEM AND PERIPHERALS AND DISCONNECT THE AC ADAPTER. CLEANING THE FILTER:

- DO NOT USE DETERGENT

- AVOID DAMAGING THE FILTER; DAMAGE TO THE FILTER IS NOT COVERED BY WARRANTY.

- USE PLASTIC TOOLS TO CLEAN THE FILTER. METAL OR WOODEN TOOLS COULD DAMAGE THE FILTER. ESD: BEFORE CLEANING THE FILTER, TOUCH A METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY. 1 Turn off your computer and disconnect the AC adapter. 2 Close the display panel and turn the system upside down. 3 Remove the dust filter by pressing the latch towards the filter and lifting it out (Figure 48). 4 Carefully clean the dust filter and the air-cooling duct. 5 Put back the dust filter by inserting the end without latch first and pushing in the filter until it latches. Dust Filter Cover Filter Cover Latch Figure 48. Removing the Dust Filter Cover 111 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC ALWAYS BE SURE THE DUST FILTER IS INSTALLED WHEN RUNNING YOUR SYSTEM. NOT USING THE FILTER COULD CAUSE CONTAMINATION AND POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE SYSTEM. Storing your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC If storing your Tablet PC for a month or longer, turn it off, fully charge the battery, then remove and store all Lithium ion batteries. Store the Tablet PC and batteries separately. If you store your tablet with a battery installed, the battery will discharge, and battery life will be reduced. In addition, a bad battery might damage the system. Store your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK in a cool, dry location. Temperatures should remain between 13F

(-25C) and 140F (60C). ALWAYS POWER OFF THE COMPUTER BEFORE TRANSPORTING AND/OR PACKAGING IT. AFTER SHUTTING DOWN THE SYSTEM, WAIT UNTIL THE STATUS LED PANEL INDICATES POWER OFF CONDITION (I.E., NO LIGHTS ARE ILLUMINATED). IT IS POSSIBLE THAT THE UNIT MAY NOT AUTOMATICALLY GO TO POWER OFF OR HIBERNATE MODE WHEN YOU CLOSE THE LID. THIS SITUATION MAY OCCUR DUE TO PRE-OS BOOT PASSWORD SECURITY SETTINGS OR SOME OTHER APPLICATION RUNNING ON THE COMPUTER. ATTEMPTING TO TRANSPORT THE COMPUTER WHILE POWER IS ON MAY DAMAGE THE TABLET PC DUE TO SHOCK OR OVERHEATING SINCE THE AIR VENTS MAY BE BLOCKED OR RESTRICTED. Traveling with your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Do not transport your Tablet PC while it is turned on. It is recommended that you carry your Tablet PC with you while traveling, rather than checking it in as baggage. Always bring your System Recovery CD that came with your Tablet PC when you travel. If you experience system software problems while traveling, you may need it to correct any problems. Never put your Tablet PC through a metal detector. Have your Tablet PC hand-inspected by security personnel. You can however, put your Tablet PC through a properly tuned X-ray machine. To avoid problems, place your Tablet PC close to the entrance of the machine and remove it as soon as possible or have your Tablet PC hand-

inspected by security personnel. Security officials may require you to turn your Tablet PC on, so make sure you have a charged battery on hand. 112 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Take the necessary plug adapters if you're traveling overseas. Check the following diagram to determine which plug adapter you'll need or ask your travel agent. Outlet Type Location Outlet Type Location United States, Canada, parts of Latin Amer-

ica, Mexico, Japan, Korea, the Philippines, Taiwan United Kingdom, Ire-

land, Malaysia, Singa-

pore, parts of Africa Russia and the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS), most of Europe, parts of Latin America, the Middle East, parts of Africa, Hong Kong, India, most of South Asia China, Australia, New Zealand Batteries Caring for your Batteries Always handle batteries carefully. Do not short-circuit the battery terminals (that is, do not touch both terminals with a metal object). Do not carry lose batteries in a pocket or purse where they may mix with coins, keys, or other metal objects. Doing so may cause an explosion or fire. Do not drop, puncture, disassemble, mutilate or incinerate the battery. Recharge batteries only as described in this manual and only in ventilated areas. Do not leave batteries in hot locations for more than a day or two. Intense heat can shorten battery life. Do not leave a battery in storage for longer than 6 months without recharging it. 113 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Increasing Battery Life Power your Tablet PC through the AC or optional auto/airline adapter whenever possible. If your Tablet PC is running on battery power all day, connect it to the AC adapter overnight to recharge the battery. Keep brightness to the lowest level comfortable. Set the power management for maximum battery life. Put your Tablet PC in Sleep mode when it is turned on and you are not actually using it. Limit your media drive access. Disable the Media Player auto insert notification function. Always use fully charged batteries. Media Care Caring for your Media (DVD/CD/CD-R) Media discs are precision devices and will function reliably if given reasonable care. Always store your media disc in its case when it is not in use. Always handle discs by the edges and avoid touching the surface. Avoid storing any media discs in extreme temperatures. Do not bend media discs or set heavy objects on them. Do not spill liquids on media discs. Do not scratch or get dust on media discs. Never write on the label surface with a ballpoint pen or pencil. Always use a felt pen. If a media disc is dirty, use only a DVD/CD cleaner or wipe it with a clean, soft, lint free cloth starting from the inner edge and wiping to the outer edge. If a media disc is subjected to a sudden change in temperature, cold to warm condensation may form on the surface. Wipe the moisture off with a clean, soft, lint free cloth and let it dry at room temperature. DO NOT use a hair dryer or heater to dry media discs. 114 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Caring for your Optical Drive Your optical drive is durable but you must treat it with care. Please pay attention to the following points:

The drive rotates the compact disc at a very high speed. Do not carry it around or subject it to shock or vibration with the power on. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be exposed to extreme temperatures. Avoid using or storing the drive where it is damp or dusty. Avoid using or storing the drive near magnets or devices that generate strong magnetic fields. Avoid using or storing the drive where it will be subjected to shock or vibration. Do not disassemble or dismantle the optical drive. Use of a commercially available lens cleaner is recommended for regular maintenance of your drive. 115 - Caring for your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC Chapter 6 System Specifications Specifications This section provides the hardware and environmental specifications for your Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Specifications of particular configurations will vary. Microprocessor New 3rd Generation Intel Core Processor family. (Refer to system label to determine your processor.) Chipset Mobile Intel QM77 Express Platform Control Hub (PCH) Memory System Memory DDR3-1600 MHz SDRAM dual-channel memory module. Two DIMM slots; upgradeable to 16 GB of total memory (8 GB x 2). Cache Memory Up to 4 MB L3 cache on-die (depending upon CPU) 116 Video Built-in color flat-panel TFT active matrix LED backlit display with simultaneous display capability. Video Color and Resolution 13.3" HD+ anti-glare display Internal: 1600 x 900 pixel resolution, 16M colors External (CRT, HDMI, DVI): 1920 x 1200 pixel resolution, 16M colors DisplayPort (on port replicator): 2560 x 1600 pixel resolution, 16M colors Simultaneous: 1600 x 900, 16M colors Screen Orientations Supported: 0o, 90o, 180o, 270o Graphics Controller Intel HD 4000 integrated graphics Digitizer touch input) Dual Digitizer, consisting of active digitizer and capacitive touch panel (uses active stylus input and ten finger Audio Realtek codec ALC269 VB6 with High Definition (HD) audio. Headphones: Stereo headphone jack, 3.5 mm, 1 Vrms or less, minimum impedance 32 Ohms Microphone: Stereo microphone jack, 3.5 mm, 100 mVp-p or less, minimum impedance 10K Ohms Two built-in speakers, 20 mm x 12 mm Two built-in digital microphones Mass Storage Device Options Hard Drive Serial ATA II, 3.0Gb/s, 2.5, 9.5 mm or 7 mm, shock-mounted with Shock Sensor utility. Capacity, depth, and speed of the hard drive are determined by system configuration. 32 GB m-SATA SSD cache for fast boot. 117 - Specifications BTO 2.5" 7mmH/9.5mmH SATA HDD 5400rpm: 320, 500GB HDD 7200rpm: 320, 500GB TCG Opal-compliant Self-Encrypted Drive (SED) HDD 7200rpm: 320GB TCG Opal-compliant Self-Encrypted Drive (SED) SSD: 128GB non-FDE SSD(MLC): 128, 256GB Modular Bay Devices One of the following devices is pre-installed:

Modular Blu-ray RW drive Dual-Layer Multi-Format DVD Writer Modular Bay Battery Weight Saver Features Integrated Pointing Device Touchpad cursor control buttons Communications Gigabit LAN: Intel wired 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet LAN WLAN: Optional Integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11abgn 2x2), or, Atheros XSPAN HB116 802.11abgn Bluetooth: Bluetooth V4+LE device for wireless personal area network communication 118 - Specifications LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC Panel See LIFEBOOK Security/Tablet PC/Windows Buttons on page 48. Trusted Platform Module The LIFEBOOK T902 has a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) installed for added system security. Theft Prevention Lock Lock slots for use with security restraint systems. Web Camera Optional FHD (1920 x 1080 pixel) digital web camera with access indicator LED Device Ports On the LIFEBOOK Tablet PC:

Secure Digital Card slot HDMI Port One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external monitor (see Display specifications) Two USB 2.0 connectors for input/output devices Two USB 3.0 connectors for input/output devices (one of which features Anytime USB Charge support) One DC In connector One LAN (RJ-45) connector Docking port (100-pin, to dock with port replicator) One stereo headphone/line-out jack One stereo microphone/line-in jack Dedicated Smart Card slot (requires third-party application) On the Optional Port Replicator:

One 15-pin D-SUB connector for VGA external monitor Four USB 3.0 connectors for input/output devices One LAN (RJ-45) connector 119 - Specifications One DC-in connector One DVI-D connector One DisplayPort connector One Headphone connector Docking connector (100-pin, to dock with system) Keyboard Built-in keyboard with all functions of 101 key keyboard. Total number of keys: 84 Function keys: F1 through F12, plus Fn extension key Two Windows keys: one Start key, one application key Key pitch: 19 mm; key stroke: 1.7 mm Built-in Touchpad pointing device with left and right buttons Built-in Palm Rest Spill-resistant External USB keyboard/mouse support Optional anti-microbial keyboard Power Batteries Lithium ion battery, rechargeable, 6-cell, 72Wh, or, Optional Lithium ion modular bay battery, rechargeable, 6-cell, 28 Wh AC Adapter Autosensing 100-240V AC, supplying 19V DC, 4.22A, 80W to the LIFEBOOK; includes an AC cable Power Management Conforms to ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface). 120 - Specifications Dimensions and Weight Overall Dimensions With foot and 6-cell main battery: 13.15"(w) x 9.60"(d) x 1.28 (h) (334 mm x 244 mm x 32.6 mm) Without foot, with 6-cell main battery: 13.15"(w) x 9.60"(d) x 1.06/1.22(h) (334 mm x 244 mm x 26.8/31.0 mm) Weight With weight saver: Approximately 4.69 lbs. (2.13 kg) With optical drive: Approximately 5.05 lbs. (2.29 kg) With bay battery: Approximately 5.31 lbs. (2.41 kg) Environmental Requirements Temperature Operating: 41 to 95 F (5 to 35 C). Non-operating: 5 to 140 F (15 to 60 C) Humidity Operating: 20% to 85%, relative, non-condensing. Non-operating: 8% to 85%, relative, non-condensing Altitude Operating: 10,000 feet (3,048 m) maximum Popular Accessories For ordering or additional information on Fujitsu accessories please visit our Web site at www.shopfujitsu.com or call 1-800-FUJITSU. 121 - Specifications Pre-Installed Software Depending on your operating system, your Tablet PC comes with pre-installed software for playing audio and video files of various formats. In addition, there is virus protection software and applications that can bring additional value during your daily use of the system. Some software is pre-installed while other apps are a part of Fujitsu Bonus Apps THE FOLLOWING LIST CONSTITUTES THE SOFTWARE THAT MAY BE INSTALLED ON YOUR COMPUTER. THE PRE-INSTALLED SOFTWARE MAY VARY, AND IS DETERMINED BY YOUR OPERATING SYSTEM AND CONFIGURATION. Adobe Reader Norton Internet Security 2012 (60-day free trial) CyberLink PowerDirector CyberLink PowerDVD CyberLink MakeDisc CyberLink YouCam Google Toolbar Fujitsu Touch Launcher DTS Boost OmniPass Fingerprint application Microsoft Windows Live Essentials Microsoft Office 2010 Starter Edition Learning About Your Software Tutorials All operating systems and most application software have tutorials built into them upon installation. We highly recommend that you step through the tutorial before you use an application. 122 - Specifications Manuals Included with your Tablet PC you will find manuals for your installed operating system and other pre-installed software. Any manuals that are not included are available online through the softwares Help menu. We recommend that you review these manuals for information on the use of these applications. Adobe Reader Adobe Reader allows you to view, navigate, and print PDF files across all major computing platforms. Norton Internet Security 2012 Your system is preinstalled with a free 60-day trial version of Symantecs Norton Internet Security 2012. Internet Security is a suite of tools designed to protect your LIFEBOOK from viruses, hackers, spam, and spyware. It helps you protect data currently on your hard disk from destruction or contamination. The trial version is activated upon your acceptance of software license agreement. After 60 days, you will need to purchase a subscription from Symantec to download latest virus, spyware, and spam definitions. CyberLink MakeDisc CyberLink MakeDisc allows you to burn data, videos and photographs to CDs or DVDs. CyberLink PowerDVD CyberLink PowerDVD allows you to produce and edit home movies and slideshows on discs. CyberLink YouCam CyberLink YouCam allows you to capture photos or movies on the embedded webcam, add special effects to them, and share them in a variety of formats or via social networks. CyberLink PowerDirector CyberLink PowerDirector allows you to edit and enhance your videos, and add special effects to them. Google Toolbar Google Toolbar lets you to search the Internet quickly, block pop-ups, and perform a variety of other tasks to make your Internet experience easier and more pleasant. 123 - Specifications OmniPass Fingerprint application The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass lets you use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-line passwords, and presents a convenient user interface through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. Fujitsu Touch Launcher The Touch Launcher is a handy on-screen method for quickly launching commonly-used applications and performing Internet tasks. DTS Boost DTS Boost maximizes acoustic power beyond the volume limits of PC hardware, allowing users to create an overall louder or fuller master by limiting the dynamic range and boosting the perceived overall level of the mix. Microsoft Windows Live Essentials Windows Live Essentials is a suite of programs that make it easier and more enjoyable to use your notebook. Live Essentials consists of four Live applications: Messenger, Photo Gallery, Writer, and Mail. Messenger lets you communicate and interact with individuals and groups. Photo Gallery lets you organize, edit, and share your photos. Writer can be used to generate blog entries, upload videos and photos to your blogs, and publish entries online. Mail makes it easy for you to manage your email. Microsoft Office Starter 2010 Edition Office Starter 2010 Edition is a software suite containing basic tools for writing letters and reports, tracking family and friends with address books, managing home finances, and creating a home inventory. Microsoft Office Starter 2010 Edition contains Office Word Starter 2010 for writing, editing, and viewing documents, and Office Excel Starter 2010 for creating and viewing spreadsheets. Office Starter 2010 edition also contains full versions of Office Home & Student 2010, Office Home & Business 2010, and Office Professional 2010. These full-

featured suites can be accessed by purchasing a Product Key Card. Operating System Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Edition (32- or 64-bit) 124 - Specifications Glossary AC Adapter A device which converts the AC voltage from a wall outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your system. Access point Wireless network device used to bridge wireless and wired network traffic. ACPI Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Active-Matrix Display A type of technology for making flat-panel displays which has a transistor or similar device for every pixel on the screen. Ad Hoc Mode Ad Hoc Mode refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Points. Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. AGP Accelerated Graphics Port. Graphics port specifically designed for graphics-intensive devices, such as video cards and 3D accelerators. 125 Auto/Airline Adapter A device which converts the DC voltage from an automobile cigarette lighter or aircraft DC power outlet to the DC voltage needed to power your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. BIOS Basic Input-Output System. A program and set of default parameters stored in ROM which tests and operates your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC when you turn it on until it loads your installed operating system from disk. Information from the BIOS is transferred to the installed operating system to provide it with information on the configuration and status of the hardware. Bit An abbreviation for binary digit. A single piece of information which is either a one (1) or a zero (0). b/s or bps An abbreviation for bits per second. Used to describe data transfer rates. Boot To start-up a computer and load its operating system from disk, ROM or other storage media into RAM. Bus An electrical circuit which passes data between the CPU and the sub-assemblies inside your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC. Byte 8 bits of parallel binary information. Cache Memory A block of memory built into the micro-processor which is much faster to access than your system RAM and used in specially structured ways to make your overall data handling time faster. 126 -

CD-ROM Compact disk read only memory. This is a form of digital data storage which is read optically with a laser rather than a magnetic head. A typical CD-ROM can contain about 600MB of data and is not subject to heads crashing into the surface and destroying the data when there is a failure nor to wear from reading. Channel Range of narrow-band frequencies used by the WLAN device to transmit data. IEEE802.11b/g - 11 channels, 22 MHz wide channels. CMOS RAM Complementary metal oxide semiconductor random access memory. This is a technology for manufacturing random access memory which requires very low levels of power to operate. Command An instruction which you give your operating system. Example: run a particular application or format a floppy disk. Configuration The combination of hardware and software that makes up your system and how it is allocated for use. CRT Cathode Ray Tube. A display device which uses a beam of electronic particles striking a luminescent screen. It produces a visual image by varying the position and intensity of the beam. Data The information a system stores and processes. DC Direct current. A voltage or current that does not fluctuate periodically with time. Default Value A pre-programmed value to be used if you fail to set your own. 127 -

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. A protocol used to automatically acquire parameters required for the communication, such as IP address. The sender of IP address is called a DHCP server, and the receiver is called a DHCP client. DIMM Dual-in-line memory module. Disk A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media. Disk Drive The hardware which spins the disk and has the heads and control circuitry for reading and writing the data. DMA Direct Memory Access. Special circuitry for memory to memory transfers of data which do not require CPU action. DMI Desktop Management Interface. A standard that provides PC management applications with a common method of locally or remotely querying and configuring PC computer systems, hardware and software components, and peripherals. DNS Domain Name System. A function to control the association between the IP address and the name assigned to the computer. If you do not know the IP address but if you know the computer name, you can still communicate to that computer. DOS Disk Operating System (MS-DOS is a Microsoft Disk Operating System). 128 -

Driver A computer program which converts application and operating system commands to external devices into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of device in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. ECP Extended Capability Port. A set of standards for high speed data communication and interconnection between electronic devices. Encryption Key (Network Key) Data encryption key used to encrypt message text and for computing message integrity checks. Data encryption protects data from unauthorized viewing. This device uses the same encryption key to encode and decode the data, and the identical encryption key is required between the sender and receiver. ESD Electro-Static Discharge. The sudden discharge of electricity from a static charge which has built-up slowly. Example:

the shock you get from a doorknob on a dry day or the sparks you get from brushing hair on a dry day. FCC Federal Communications Commission. GB Gigabyte. One billion bytes. Hard drive A spinning platter of magnetic data storage media where the platter is stiff. I/O Input/Output. Data entering and leaving your Tablet PC in electronic form. 129 -

I/O Port The connector and associated circuits for data entering and leaving your computer in electronic form. IDE Intelligent Drive Electronics. A type of control interface for a hard drive that is inside the hard drive unit. IEEE802.11a Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11a devices operate in the 5 GHz lower and middle UNII bands. IEEE802.11b Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 11 Mbps. 802.11b devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. IEEE802.11g Wireless LAN standard that supports a maximum data rate of 54 Mbps. 802.11g devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band. IEEE802.11n Wireless LAN standard using multiple data streams supporting a maximum data rate of 450 Mbps. 802.11n devices operate in both the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz UNII bands and are backward compatible with 802.11g and 802.11a. Infrastructure A name of a wireless LAN configuration. This type of communication uses an access point. Another type of communication is called Ad Hoc. IP Address An identifier for a computer or device on a TCP/IP network. Networks using the TCP/IP protocol route messages based on the IP address of the destination. The format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four numbers separated by periods. Each number can be zero to 255. For example, 1.160.10.240 could be an IP address. 130 -

Within an isolated network, you can assign IP addresses at random as long as each one is unique. However, connecting a private network to the Internet requires using registered IP addresses (called Internet addresses) to avoid duplicates. The four numbers in an IP address are used in different ways to identify a particular network and a host on that network. Three regional Internet registries -- ARIN, RIPE NCC and APNIC -- assign Internet addresses from the following three classes. Class A - supports 16 million hosts on each of 126 networks Class B - supports 65,000 hosts on each of 16,000 networks Class C - supports 254 hosts on each of 2 million networks The number of unassigned Internet addresses is running out, so a new classless scheme called CIDR is gradually replacing the system based on classes A, B, and C and is tied to adoption of IPv6. IRQ Interrupt Request. An acronym for the hardware signal to the CPU that an external event has occurred which needs to be processed. KB Kilobyte. One thousand bytes. LAN Local Area Network. An interconnection of computers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves. LCD Liquid Crystal Display. A type of display which makes images by controlling the orientation of crystals in a crystalline liquid. Lithium ion Battery A type of rechargeable battery which has a high power-time life for its size and is not subject to the memory effect as Nickel Cadmium batteries. 131 -

MAC Address Media Access Control Address. A unique physical address of a network card. For Ethernet, the first three bytes are used as the vendor code, controlled and assigned by IEEE. The remaining three bytes are controlled by each vendor

(preventing overlap), therefore, every Ethernet card is given a unique physical address in the world, being assigned with a different address from other cards. For Ethernet, frames are sent and received based on this address. MB Megabyte. One million bytes. Megahertz 1,000,000 cycles per second. Memory A repository for data and applications which is readily accessible to your LIFEBOOK Tablet PCs CPU. MHz Megahertz. MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface. A standard communication protocol for exchange of information between computers and sound producers such as synthesizers. Modem A contraction for MOdulator-DEModulator. The equipment which connects a computer or other data terminal to a communication line. Monaural A system using one channel to process sound from all sources. 132 -

MTU Maximum Transmission Unit The maximum data size that can be transferred at a time through the Internet or other networks. You can set a smaller MTU size to obtain successful communication, if you have difficulty transferring data due to the fact that the maximum size is too large. Network key Data that is used for encrypting data in data communication. The personal computer uses the same network key both for data encryption and decryption, therefore, it is necessary to set the same network key as the other side of communication. Network name (SSID: Service Set Identifier ) When a wireless LAN network is configured, grouping is performed to avoid interference or data theft. This grouping is performed with Network name (SSID). NTSC National TV Standards Commission. The standard for TV broadcast and reception for the USA. Open system authentication Null authentication method specified in the 802.11 standard that performs no authentication checks on a wireless client before allowing it to associate. Operating System A group of control programs that convert application commands, including driver programs, into the exact form required by a specific brand and model of microprocessor in order to produce the desired results from that particular equipment. Partition A block of space on a hard drive which is set aside and made to appear to the operating system as if it were a separate disk, and addressed by the operating system accordingly. 133 -

Peripheral Device A piece of equipment which performs a specific function associated with but not integral to a computer. Examples: a printer, a modem, a CD-ROM. Pitch (keyboard) The distance between the centers of the letter keys of a keyboard. Pixel The smallest element of a display, a dot of color on your display screen. The more pixels per area the clearer your image will appear. POST Power On Self Test. A program which is part of the BIOS which checks the configuration and operating condition of your hardware whenever power is applied to your Tablet PC. Status and error messages may be displayed before the operating system is loaded. If the self test detects failures that are so serious that operation cannot continue, the operating system will not be loaded. PPPoE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet. A protocol for Ethernet, using a Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), which is used for connection on the phone line. Program Set of coded commands to your computers telling your hardware what to do and how and when to do it. Protocol Procedures and rules use to send and receive data between computers.

- Method of sending and receiving data

- Process used to handle communication errors Conditions required for communication are organized in procedures for correct transfer of information. 134 -

RAM Random Access Memory. A hardware component of your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC that holds binary information (both program and data) as long as it has the proper power applied to it. RAM Module A printed circuit card with memory and associated circuitry which allows the user to add additional memory to the computer without special tools. Reset The act of reloading the operating system. A reset erases all information stored in RAM. Resume To proceed after interruption. In your Tablet PC this refers to returning to active operation after having been in one of the suspension states. ROM Read Only Memory. A form of memory in which information is stored by physically altering the material. Data stored in this way cannot be changed by your Tablet PC and does not require power to maintain it. SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory. Shared key authentication 802.11 network authentication method in which the AP sends the client device a challenge text packet that the client must then encrypt with the correct WEP key and return to the AP. If the client has the wrong key or no key, authentication will fail and the client will not be allowed to associate with the AP. Shared key authentication is not considered secure, because a hacker who detects both the clear-text challenge and the same challenge encrypted with a WEP key can decipher the key. 135 -

SSID Service Set Identifier, a 32-character unique identifier attached to the header of packets sent over a WLAN that acts as a password when a mobile device tries to connect to the BSS. The SSID differentiates one WLAN from another, so all access points and all devices attempting to connect to a specific WLAN must use the same SSID. A device will not be permitted to join the BSS unless it can provide the unique SSID. Because the SSID is broadcast in plain text, it does not supply any security to the network. Status Indicator A display which reports the condition of some portion of your hardware. On your LIFEBOOK Tablet PC this is an LCD screen just above the keyboard. Stereo (audio) A system using two channels to process sound from two different sources. Subnet mask TCP-IP network is controlled by being divided into multiple smaller networks (subnets). IP address consists of the subnet address and the address of each computer. Subnet mask defines how many bits of IP address comprise the subnet address. The same value shall be set among computers communicating with each other. SVGA Super VGA. S-Video Super Video. A component video system for driving a TV or computer monitor. System Clock An oscillator of fixed precise frequency which synchronizes the operation of the system and is counted to provide time of day and date. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A standard Internet protocol that is most widely used. 136 -

TFT Thin Film Transistor A technology for flat display panels which uses a thin film matrix of transistors to control each pixel of the display screen individually. UL Underwriters Laboratories An independent organization that tests and certifies the electrical safety of devices. USB Universal Serial Bus. Standard that allows you to simultaneously connect up to 127 USB devices such as game pads, pointing devices, printers, and keyboards to your computer. VRAM Video Random Access Memory. A memory dedicated to video display data and control. WFM Wired for Management is Intels broad-based initiative to reduce the total cost of ownership (TCO) of business computing without sacrificing power and flexibility. Wi-Fi Compatible Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity). Identifies that a product has passed an interoperability test supplied by WECA (Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance), which guarantees the interoperability of wireless IEEE 802.11 LAN products. WLAN Wireless Local Area Network. A wireless interconnection of computers and peripherals within a single limited geographic location which can pass programs and data amongst themselves. 137 -

Regulatory Information Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Fujitsu could void this users authority to operate the equipment. FCC NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limit for class B digital devices, pursuant to parts 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit than the receiver. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device. DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. 138 - Regulatory Information Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide FCC Regulatory Information Please note the following regulatory information related to the optional wireless LAN device. Regulatory Notes and Statements Wireless LAN, Health and Authorization for use Radio frequency electromagnetic energy is emitted from Wireless LAN devices. The energy levels of these emissions, however, are far much less than the electromagnetic energy emissions from wireless devices such as mobile phones. Wireless LAN devices are safe for use by consumers because they operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. The use of Wireless LAN devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as:

On board an airplane, or In an explosive environment, or In situations where the interference risk to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. In cases in which the policy regarding use of Wireless LAN devices in specific environments is not clear (e.g., airports, hospitals, chemical/oil/gas industrial plants, private buildings), obtain authorization to use these devices prior to operating the equipment. Regulatory Information/Disclaimers Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of this device, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by the manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any damage or violation of government regulations arising from failure to comply with these guidelines. 139 This device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN: For operation within 5.15~5.25 GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environments, and the antenna of this device must be integral. Federal Communications Commission statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. FCC Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from the one the receiver is connected to. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposure have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The wireless LAN radio device has been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. 140 -

Figure A-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network Export restrictions This product or software contains encryption code which may not be exported or transferred from the US or Canada without an approved US Department of Commerce export license. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules., as well as ICES 003 B / NMB 003 B. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation. Modifications not expressly authorized by Fujitsu America, Inc. may invalidate the user's right to operate this equipment. Canadian Notice The device for the 5150 - 5250 MHz band is only for indoor usage to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. The maximum antenna gain of 6 dBi permitted (for devices in the 5250 - 5350 MHz, 5470 - 5725 MHz and 5725 - 5825 MHz bands) to comply with the e.i.r.p. limit as stated in A9.2 of RSS210. In addition, users are cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 -

5350 MHz and 5650 - 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. 141 -

Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN This manual describes the procedures required to properly set up and configure the optional integrated Wireless LAN Mini-PCI device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read this manual carefully to ensure its correct operation. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document This document is applicable to systems containing one of the following optional devices:

Integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11a/b/g/n) Atheros XSPAN 802.11abgn Characteristics of the WLAN Device The WLAN device is a Mini-PCI card attached to the main board of the mobile computer. The WLAN device operates in license-free RF bands, eliminating the need to procure an FCC operating license. The WLAN operates in the 2.4GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band and the lower, middle, and upper bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands. The WLAN devices are capable of four operating modes, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and The WLAN devices are Wi-Fi certified and operate (as applicable) at a the maximum data rate of 450 Mbps

(theoretical) in IEEE802.11n mode; 54 Mbps in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode; and 11 Mbps in IEEE802.11b mode. The WLAN devices support the following encryption methods - WEP, TKIP, CKIP, and AES encryption. The Wireless LAN devices are compliant with the following standards: WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0, and IEEE802.11n CCX4.0. 142 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device Ad Hoc Mode

"Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer networks. Ad Hoc networks are an easy and inexpensive method for establishing network connectivity between multiple computers. Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID, network authentication, and encryption key settings are identically configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network. Figure 49. Ad Hoc Mode Network 143 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless network architecture in which devices communicate with wireless or wired network devices by communicating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode, wireless devices can communicate with each other or with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks operate in infrastructure mode because they require access to the WLAN in order to access services, devices, and computers (e.g., file servers, printers, databases). Internet ADSL modem, cable modem, or similar Wired LAN Access Point*

Wireless LAN

*An optional hub for a wired LAN may be required depending upon the type of access point used. Figure 50. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Network 144 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN How to Handle This Device The WLAN device is an optional device that may come pre-installed in your mobile computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The operating system that your mobile computer comes with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN device. The Wireless LAN devices support IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n. The WLAN devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and the 5 GHz lower, middle, and upper UNII bands. Microwave ovens may interfere with the operation of WLAN devices since they operate in the same 2.4 GHz frequency range as IEEE802.11b/g/n devices. Interference by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band. Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4 GHz range may interfere with operation of WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g/n modes. Symptoms of interference include reduced throughput, intermittent disconnects, and many frame errors. It is HIGHLY recommended that these interfering devices be powered off to ensure proper operation of the WLAN device. Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device Disconnecting the WLAN device may be desired in certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics, airplanes, etc.). The WLAN device can be deactivated by using the Wireless On/Off Switch, and it can be disconnected in Windows using the WLAN icon in the system tray (Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected.). 145 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch The WLAN device can be deactivated quickly and efficiently by toggling the Wireless Device On/Off Switch to the Off position. The switch has no effect on non-Wireless LAN models. Wireless Device Switch Figure 51. Wireless Device On/Off Switch Location Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected. 1 Right-click the WLAN icon in the taskbar at the bottom right of your screen. 2 Choose Disconnect from a network. Activating the WLAN Device Activation of the WLAN device can be accomplished using the same methods as the deactivation process Using the Wireless On/Off Switch In Windows, by right-clicking the WLAN icon then clicking Connect to a network 146 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Configuring the Wireless LAN The optional WLAN device can be configured to establish wireless network connectivity using the software that is built into Windows. Support for most industry standard security solutions is contained in this software. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network administrator for these parameters:

Configuring the WLAN 1 Click the Start button, then select Control Panel. (If you are in Windows Vista and the Control Panel is not in Classic View, select Classic View from the left panel.) 2 Double-click the Network and Sharing Center icon. 3 Select Manage wireless networks from the left panel. 4 Click on the [Add] button. 5 Depending upon what type of connection you would like to make, make a selection. For an infrastructure network, select Manually create a network profile. For ad hoc network, select Create an ad hoc network. 6 Enter the required information. If necessary, consult with your network administrator for some of the information. 7 In the event you require assistance, go to the Network and Sharing Center window (Start -> Control Panel ->

Network and Sharing Center), and type in relevant keywords in the Search box. Connecting to a Network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by performing the following steps:

1 Click on the WLAN icon in the system tray. 2 Select Connect to a network. 3 Select a network from the list that appears, and click the [Connect] button. Connection to the network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by clicking on the Wireless Network icon in the system tray:

147 - Configuring the Wireless LAN Troubleshooting the WLAN Troubleshooting Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the following table. If you are unfamiliar with the steps required, consult your System Administrator or go to [Start] ->

Help and Support -> Networking and the Web Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection Incorrect network name (SSID) or network key Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSIDs) and network keys (WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured correctly. SSIDs and WEP or WPA/WPA2 Pre-

Shared key values must be identical on each machine. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set network name (SSID) and network key to the same values as those of the access point. Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access Point. Please consult your network administrator for this value, if necessary. Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for better transmission. Check if the wireless switch is turned On. Go to Start -> Control Panel, and double-click on Windows Mobility Center. If the wireless network is off, click the [Turn wireless on] button. Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON. Weak received signal strength and/or link quality The WLAN device has been deactivated or disabled The computer to be connected is turned off 148 - Troubleshooting the WLAN Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection

(continued) RF interference from Access Points or other wireless networks Wireless network authentication has failed Incorrectly configured network settings The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering device. Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly typed WEP key, a misconfigured LEAP username/password, or an incorrectly chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate but not authenticate to the wireless network. Recheck the configuration of your network settings. Incorrect IP address configuration This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact your network administrator for the correct settings. 149 - Troubleshooting the WLAN WLAN Specifications Specifications Item Specification Type of network Transfer rate Active frequency Typical operating distances**

Number of channels The integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11abgn 2x2) and Atheros XSPAN 802.11a/b/g/n WLAN devices conform to IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g, and 802.11n, Wi-Fi based*.

(Automatic switching) 54 Mbps maximum data rate (IEEE802.11n to be determined) 802.11n: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz 802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz 802.11a: 4900 ~ 5850 MHz 802.11a: 40 ft. (12 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 6 Mbps 802.11b: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 11 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11g: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11n: Estimated double the operating distance of 802.11g and 802.11a in their respective frequencies. 802.11a: 8 independent channels 802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels 802.11n: 2.4 GHz - 3 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is not used; 2 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is used. 5 GHz - 12 non-overlapping UNII channels with or without Channel Bonding Security Encryption Types - WEP, TKIP, AES***, CKIP, WPA 1.0 and WPA 2.0 compliant Maximum recommended number of computers to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc connection) 10 units or less ****

* Wi-Fi based indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.

** The communication ranges shown above will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls, reflective material, or interference from external RF sources.

*** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/ 104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.

**** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased. 150 - WLAN Specifications Using the Bluetooth Device The Integrated Bluetooth module is a wireless device installed in selected Fujitsu mobile computers. What is Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is designed as a short-range wireless link between mobile devices, such as laptop computers, phones, printers, and cameras. Bluetooth technology is used to create Personal Area Networks (PANs) between devices in short-range of each other. SLIDING THE WIRELESS DEVICE SWITCH ON THE FRONT OF THE SYSTEM WILL TURN BOTH THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS LAN AND BLUETOOTH DEVICES ON AND OFF AT THE SAME TIME. TO ENABLE OR DISABLE BLUETOOTH INDIVIDUALLY, PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS:

CLICK ON THE BLUETOOTH ICON IN THE SYSTEM NOTIFICATION AREA LOCATED IN THE LOWER RIGHT CORNER OF THE SCREEN. SELECT TURN ADAPTER OFF. Where to Find Information About Bluetooth The Bluetooth module contains a robust Help users guide to assist you in learning about operation of the Bluetooth device. To access the Help file:

1 Click on the Bluetooth icon in notification area. 2 Select Open Settings. The "Bluetooth Settings" dialog will be opened. 3 Select the Share tab. 4 Click on "Learn more about Bluetooth sharing" link. The Bluetooth User Guide will open. For additional information about Bluetooth Technology, visit the Bluetooth Web site at: www.bluetooth.com. 151 - Using the Bluetooth Device FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The Bluetooth antenna is exempt from minimum distance criteria due to its low power. The transmitters in this device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Notice To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Warranty Users are not authorized to modify this product. Any modifications invalidate the warranty. This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without signed written permission from Fujitsu. Unauthorized modification will void the equipment authorization from the FCC and Industry Canada and the warranty. 152 - Using the Bluetooth Device Appendix B: Fingerprint Sensor Device Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Your system has a fingerprint sensor device at the bottom left below the display screen. Fingerprint Sensor Device With a fingerprint sensor, you can avoid having to enter a username and password every time you want to:

Figure 52. Fingerprint sensor Log onto Windows Cancel a password-protected screen saver Log into homepages that require a username and password After you have enrolled - or registered - your fingerprint, you can simply swipe your fingertip over the sensor for the system recognize you. 153 The fingerprint sensor uses Softex OmniPass which provides password management capabilities to Microsoft Windows operating systems. OmniPass enables you to use a "master password" for all Windows, applications, and on-

line passwords. OmniPass requires users to authenticate themselves using the fingerprint sensor before granting access to the Windows desktop. This device results in a secure authentication system for restricting access to your computer, applications, web sites, and other password-protected resources. OmniPass presents a convenient graphical user interface, through which you can securely manage passwords, users, and multiple identities for each user. CERTAIN MODELS SUPPORT PRE-BOOT AUTHENTICATION OR PBA. PBA ALLOWS THE USER TO LOG IN PRIOR TO WINDOWS' OWN AUTHENTICATION MECHANISM. A PBA ENVIRONMENT SERVES AS AN EXTENSION OF THE BIOS OR BOOT FIRMWARE AND ALLOWS FOR A MORE SECURE ENVIRONMENT EXTERNAL TO THE OPERATING SYSTEM. Getting Started This section guides you through the preparation of your system for the OmniPass fingerprint recognition application. You will be led through the OmniPass installation process. You will also be led through the procedure of enrolling your first user into OmniPass. Installing OmniPass If OmniPass has already been installed on your system, skip this section and go directly to User Enrollment on page 156. You can determine whether OmniPass has already been installed by checking to see if the following are present:

The gold key-shaped OmniPass icon in the system tray at the bottom right of the screen. The Softex program group in the Programs group of the Start menu System Requirements The OmniPass application requires space on your hard drive; it also requires specific Operating Systems (OSs). The minimum requirements are as follows:

154 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Windows XP Professional operating system or later At least 35 MB available hard disk space Installing the OmniPass Application If OmniPass is already installed on your system, go to User Enrollment on page 156. Otherwise continue with this section on software installation. INSTALLATION OF THE APPLICATION REQUIRES THAT YOU HAVE AN EXTERNAL OPTICAL DRIVE ATTACHED TO YOUR SYSTEM. FOR INSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER INSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS INSTALLATION. To install OmniPass on your system you must:

1 Omnipass is included in the Fujitsu Bonus Apps. To install Omnipass, start the Fujitsu Bonus Apps application from the desktop icon, select Softex Omnipass and click [Install]. 2 Once OmniPass has completed installation you will be prompted to restart you system. Once your system has rebooted you will be able to use OmniPass. If you choose not to restart immediately after installation, OmniPass will not be available for use until the next reboot. 3 The installation program automatically places an icon (Softex OmniPass) in the Windows Control Panel as well as a golden key shaped icon in the taskbar. Verifying Information about OmniPass After you have completed installing OmniPass and restarted your system, you may wish to check the version of OmniPass on your system. 155 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device To check the version information of OmniPass:

1 From the Windows Desktop, double-click the key-shaped OmniPass icon in the taskbar (usually located in the lower right corner of the screen), or, Click the Start button and click Control Panel. Double-click Softex OmniPass in the Control Panel, and the OmniPass Control Center will appear. If it does not appear, then the program is not properly installed, or, Click the Start button, select Programs, and from the submenu select the Softex program group, from that submenu click OmniPass Control Center. 2 Version information is listed on the left side of OmniPass Control center window. Uninstalling OmniPass FOR UNINSTALLATION, OMNIPASS REQUIRES THAT THE USER UNINSTALLING OMNIPASS HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES TO THE SYSTEM. IF YOUR CURRENT USER DOES NOT HAVE ADMINISTRATIVE PRIVILEGES, LOG OUT AND THEN LOG IN WITH AN ADMINISTRATOR USER BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH OMNIPASS UNINSTALLATION. To remove the OmniPass application from your system:

1 Click Start on the Windows taskbar. Select Control Panel. 2 Double-click Add/Remove Programs (In Windows 7: Programs and Features). 3 Select OmniPass, and then click Change/Remove. 4 Follow the directions to uninstall the OmniPass application. 5 Once OmniPass has finished uninstalling, reboot your system when prompted. User Enrollment Before you can use any OmniPass features you must first enroll a user into OmniPass. Master Password Concept 156 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Computer resources are often protected with passwords. Whether you are logging into your computer, accessing email, e-banking, paying bills online, or accessing network resources, you often have to supply credentials to gain access. This can result in dozens of sets of credentials that you have to remember. During user enrollment a "master password is created for the enrolled user. This master password replaces all other passwords for sites you register with OmniPass. Example: A user, John, installs OmniPass on his system (his home computer) and enrolls an OmniPass user with username John_01 and password freq14. He then goes to his webmail site to log onto his account. He inputs his webmail credentials as usual (username John_02 and password lifebook), but instead of clicking [Submit], he directs OmniPass to Remember Password. Now whenever he returns to that site, OmniPass will prompt him to supply access credentials. John enters his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14) in the OmniPass authentication prompt, and he is allowed into his webmail account. He can do this with as many web sites or password protected resources he likes, and he will gain access to all those sites with his OmniPass user credentials (John_01 and freq14). This is assuming he is accessing those sites with the system onto which he enrolled his OmniPass user. OmniPass does not actually change the credentials of the password protected resource. If John goes to another computer without he OmniPass account to access his webmail, he would need to enter his original webmail credentials (John_02 and lifebook) to gain access. If he attempts his OmniPass user credentials on a system other than a system hes enrolled on, he will not gain access. THE ENROLLMENT PROCEDURE ASSUMES YOU HAVE NO HARDWARE AUTHENTICATION DEVICES OR ALTERNATE STORAGE LOCATIONS THAT YOU WISH TO INTEGRATE WITH OMNIPASS. IF YOU DESIRE SUCH FUNCTIONALITY, CONSULT THE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THIS DOCUMENT. 157 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Basic Enrollment The Enrollment Wizard will guide you through the process of enrolling a user. Unless you specified otherwise, after OmniPass installation the Enrollment Wizard will launch on Windows login. If you do not see the Enrollment Wizard, you can bring it up by clicking Start on the Windows taskbar; select Programs; select Softex; click Enroll a new user. 1 Click Enroll to proceed to username and password verification. By default, the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard enters the credentials of the currently logged in Windows user. 2 Enter the password you use to log in to Windows. This becomes the master password for this OmniPass user. In most cases, the Domain: value will be your Windows computer name. In a corporate environment, or when accessing corporate resources, Domain: may not be your Windows computer name. Click [Next] to continue. 3 In this step OmniPass captures your fingerprint. See Enrolling a Fingerprint on page 158 for more information. 4 You will then see a Congratulations screen indicating your completion of user enrollment. 5 Click [OK] to exit the OmniPass Enrollment Wizard. You will be asked if youd like to log in to OmniPass with your newly enrolled user; click [Yes]. Enrolling a Fingerprint Enrolling a fingerprint increases the security of your system and streamlines the authentication procedure. You enroll fingerprints in the OmniPass Control Center. With an OmniPass user logged in, click the Start button >

Select Programs > Select Softex > Select Enroll a new user. 1 During initial user enrollment, you will be prompted to select the finger you wish to enroll. Fingers that have already been enrolled will be marked by a green check. The finger you select to enroll at this time will be marked by a red arrow. OmniPass will allow you re-enroll a finger. If you choose a finger that has already been enrolled and continue enrollment, OmniPass will enroll the fingerprint, overwriting the old fingerprint. Select a finger to enroll and click [Next]. 2 It is now time for OmniPass to capture your selected fingerprint. It may take a several capture attempts before OmniPass acquires your fingerprint. Should OmniPass fail to acquire your fingerprint, or if the capture screen times out, click [Back] to restart the fingerprint enrollment process. 158 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Your system has a swipe fingerprint sensor. A swipe sensor is small and resembles a skinny elongated rectangle. To capture a fingerprint, gently swipe or pull your fingertip over the sensor (starting at the second knuckle) towards yourself. Swiping too fast or too slow will result in a failed capture. The Choose Finger screen has a

[Practice] button; click it to practice capturing your fingerprint. When you are comfortable with how your fingerprint is captured, proceed to enroll a finger. 3 Once OmniPass has successfully acquired the fingerprint, the Verify Fingerprint screen will automatically appear. To verify your enrolled fingerprint, place your fingertip on the sensor and hold it there as if you were having a fingerprint captured. Successful fingerprint verification will show a green fingerprint in the capture window and the text Verification Successful under the capture window. 4 After you finish enrolling and verifying your fingerprints, you have the option to Enable PBA with enrolled finger. If you enable this option, then you must choose two fingers to save in PBA. If you have enrolled successfully, the Finger Enrollment Status in PBA screen will state Finger saved in PBA successfully. IF YOU ENABLE PBA ON YOUR SYSTEM, YOU MUST SET THE SUPERVISOR PASSWORD AND PASSWORD ON BOOT SETTINGS. SEE HARD DISK DRIVE PASSWORDS ON PAGE 61 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. Using OmniPass You are ready to begin using OmniPass. Used regularly, OmniPass will streamline your authentications. Password Replacement You will often use the password replacement function. When you go to a restricted access website (e.g., your bank, your web-based email, online auction or payment sites), you are always prompted to enter your login credentials. OmniPass can detect these prompts and you can teach OmniPass your login credentials. The next time you go to that website, you can authenticate with your fingerprint to gain access. 159 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device OmniPass Authentication Toolbar After installing OmniPass and restarting, you will notice a dialog you have not seen before at Windows Logon. This is the OmniPass Authentication Toolbar, and it is displayed whenever the OmniPass authentication system is invoked. The OmniPass authentication system may be invoked frequently: during Windows Logon, during OmniPass Logon, when unlocking your workstation, when resuming from hibernate, when unlocking a password-enabled screensaver, during password replacement for remembered site or application logins, and more. When you see this toolbar, OmniPass is prompting you to authenticate. The Logon Authentication window indicates what OmniPass-restricted function you are attempting. The icons in the lower left (fingerprint and key) show what authentication methods are available to you. Selected authentication methods are highlighted while unselected methods are not. When you click the icon for an unselected authentication method, the authentication prompt associated with that method is displayed. When prompted to authenticate, you must supply the appropriate credentials: an enrolled finger for the fingerprint capture window or your master password for the master password prompt (the key icon). Remembering a Password OmniPass can remember any application, GUI, or password protected resource that has a password prompt. Using the following procedure, you can store a set of credentials into OmniPass. These credentials will then be linked to your master password or fingerprint. Go to a site that requires a login (username and password), but do not log in yet. At the site login prompt, enter your username and password in the prompted fields, but do not enter the site (do not hit [Enter], [Submit], [OK], or Login). Right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and select Remember Password from the submenu. The Windows arrow cursor will change to a golden key OmniPass cursor. Click the OmniPass cursor in the login prompt area, but dont click [Login] or [Submit]. Associating a Friendly Name After clicking the OmniPass key cursor near the login prompt, OmniPass will prompt you to enter a friendly name for this site. You should enter something that reminds you of the website, the company, or the service you are logging into. In its secure database, OmniPass associates this friendly name with this website. 160 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Additional Settings for Remembering a Site When OmniPass prompts you to enter a friendly name you have the opportunity to set how OmniPass authenticates you to this site. There are three settings for how OmniPass handles a remembered site. The default setting is Automatically click the OK or Submit button for this password protected site once the user is authenticated. With this setting, each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass, you will automatically be logged into the site. Less secure is the option to Automatically enter this password protected site when it is activated. Do not prompt for authentication. Check the upper box to get this setting, and each time you navigate to this site OmniPass will log you into the site without prompting you to authenticate. THIS SETTING IS MORE CONVENIENT IN THAT WHENEVER YOU GO TO A SITE REMEMBERED WITH THIS SETTING, YOU WILL BYPASS ANY AUTHENTICATION PROCEDURE AND GAIN INSTANT ACCESS TO THE SITE. BUT SHOULD YOU LEAVE YOUR SYSTEM UNATTENDED WITH YOUR OMNIPASS USER LOGGED IN, ANYONE USING YOUR SYSTEM CAN BROWSE TO YOUR PASSWORD PROTECTED SITES AND GAIN AUTOMATIC ACCESS. If you uncheck both boxes in Settings for this Password Site, OmniPass will prompt you for your master password or fingerprint authentication device. Once you have authenticated with OmniPass your credentials will be filled in to the site login prompt, but you will have to click the website [OK], [Submit], or [Login] button to gain access to the site. Click Finish to complete the remember password procedure. The site location, the credentials to access the site, and the OmniPass authentication settings for the site are now stored in the OmniPass secure database. The OmniPass authentication settings (Settings for this Password Site) can always be changed in Vault Management. Logging in to a Remembered Site Whether or not OmniPass prompts you to authenticate when you return to a remembered site is determined by Settings for this Password Site and can be changed in Vault Management. The following cases are applicable to using OmniPass to login to: Windows, remembered web sites, and all other password protected resources. 161 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device With Master Password Once you return to a site you have remembered with OmniPass, you may be presented with a master password prompt. Enter your master password and you will be allowed into the site. Logging into Windows with a Fingerprint Device When logging into Windows with a fingerprint device, the fingerprint capture window will now appear next to the Windows Login screen. Place your enrolled fingertip on the sensor to authenticate. You will be simultaneously logged into Windows and OmniPass. The capture window will also appear if you have used Ctrl-Alt-Del to lock a system, and the fingerprint device can be used to log back in as stated above. IF A MACHINE IS LOCKED AND OMNIPASS DETECTS A DIFFERENT USER LOGGING BACK IN WITH A FINGERPRINT, THE FIRST USER WILL BE LOGGED OUT AND THE SECOND USER LOGGED IN. Password Management OmniPass provides an interface that lets you manage your passwords. To access this GUI, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management; you will be prompted to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Passwords under Vault Settings. You will see the Manage Passwords interface, with a list of friendly names. You can view credentials stored for any remembered website by highlighting the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and clicking Unmask Values. Should a password be reset, or an account expire, you can remove stored credentials from OmniPass. Highlight the desired resource under Password Protected Dialog and click Delete Page. You will be prompted to confirm the password deletion. The two check boxes in Manage Passwords govern whether OmniPass prompts you to authenticate or directly logs you into the remembered site. OmniPass will overwrite an old set of credentials for a website if you attempt to use Remember Password on an already remembered site. 162 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device The exception to the above rule is when resetting the Windows password. If your password is reset in Windows, the next time you login to Windows, OmniPass will detect the password change and prompt you to Update or Reconfirm the password with OmniPass. Enter your new Windows password in the prompt and click OK. Your OmniPass "master password" will still be your Windows password. OmniPass User Identities Identities allow OmniPass users to have multiple accounts to the same site (e.g., bob@biblomail.com and boballen@biblomail.com). If OmniPass did not provide you identities, you would be limited to remembering one account per site. To create and manage identities, double-click the OmniPass key in the system tray. Click Vault Management;

OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Once you gain access to Vault Management, click Manage Identities under Vault Settings. You can only manage the identities of the currently logged in OmniPass user To add a new identity, click New Identity or double-click Click here to add a new identity. Name the new identity and click [OK], then click [Apply]. You can now switch to the new identity and start remembering passwords. To delete an identity, highlight the identity you want to delete and click [Delete Identity], then [Apply]. WHEN YOU DELETE AN IDENTITY, ALL OF ITS ASSOCIATED REMEMBERED SITES AND PASSWORD PROTECTED DIALOGS ARE LOST. To set the default identity, highlight the identity you want as default and click [Set as Default]; click [Apply] to ensure the settings are saved. If you log in to OmniPass with a fingerprint device, you will automatically be logged in to the default identity for that OmniPass user. You can choose the identity with which you are logging in if you login using

"master password". Choosing User Identity during Login To choose your identity during login, type your username in the User Name: field. Press [Tab] and see that the Domain: field self-populates. Click the Password: field to bring the cursor to it, and you will see the pull-down menu in the Identity: field. Select the identity to login as, then click OK. 163 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Switch User Identity To switch identities at any time, right-click the OmniPass system tray icon and click Switch User Identity from the submenu. The Switch Identity dialog will appear. Select the desired identity and then click OK. Identities and Password Management On the Manage Passwords interface of the Vault Management tab of the OmniPass Control Center, there is a pull-

down selection box labeled, Identity. This field lets you choose which identity you are managing passwords for. When you select an identity here, only those password protected dialogs that are associated with that identity are shown. You can perform all the functions explained in Password Management on page 162. Configuring OmniPass This section gives an overview of both the Export/Import function and the OmniPass Control Center. Exporting and Importing Users YOU CANNOT IMPORT A USER INTO OMNIPASS IF THERE ALREADY IS A USER WITH THE SAME NAME ENROLLED IN OMNIPASS. Using OmniPass Control Center, you can export and import users in and out of OmniPass. The export process backs up all remembered sites, credentials, and enrolled fingerprints for an OmniPass user. All OmniPass data for a user is backed up to a single encrypted database file. During the import process, the Windows login of the exported user is required. If the proper credentials cannot be supplied, the user profile will not be imported. YOU SHOULD PERIODICALLY EXPORT YOUR USER PROFILE AND STORE IT IN A SAFE PLACE. IF ANYTHING HAPPENS TO YOUR SYSTEM, YOU CAN IMPORT YOUR OMNIPASS PROFILE TO A NEW SYSTEM AND HAVE ALL YOUR REMEMBERED SETTINGS AND FINGERPRINTS INSTANTLY. YOU DON'T FORGET THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS WHEN EXPORTING. WHEN YOU EXAMINE THE IMPORTATION, YOU ARE PROMPTED FOR AUTHENTICATION. THE CREDENTIALS THAT WILL ALLOW A USER PROFILE TO BE IMPORTED ARE THE WINDOWS LOGIN CREDENTIALS OF THE EXPORTED USER. THEY ARE THE CREDENTIALS THAT HAD TO BE SUBMITTED WHEN THE USER PROFILE WAS EXPORTED. YOU WILL NEED USER NAME, PASSWORD, AND DOMAIN. 164 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Exporting an OmniPass User Profile To export a user, open OmniPass Control Center, and click Run User Management Wizard. Click Backup a user's OmniPass profile. OmniPass will prompt you to authenticate. Upon successfully authentication, you must name the OmniPass user profile and decide where to save it. An .opi file is generated, and you should store a copy of it in a safe place. This .opi file contains all your user specific OmniPass data, and it is both encrypted and password protected. This user profile does NOT contain any of your encrypted data files. Importing an OmniPass User Profile To import an OmniPass user open the OmniPass Control Center, and click Run User Management Wizard. Click Restore a user's OmniPass profile. OmniPass will then prompt you to browse for the file you had previously exported

(.opi file). When you select the .opi file for importation, OmniPass will prompt you for authentication. The credentials that will allow a user profile to be imported are the Windows login credentials of the exported user. They are the credentials that had to be submitted when the user profile was exported. You will need User Name, Password, and Domain. If you dont remember the value for Domain, in a PC or SOHO environment Domain should be your computer name. OmniPass will notify you if the user was successfully imported. Things to Know Regarding Import/Export Assume you export a local Windows User profile from OmniPass. You want to import that profile to another machine that has OmniPass. Before you can import the profile, a Windows user with the same login credentials must be created on the machine importing the profile. Example: I have a Windows user with the username Tom and the password Sunshine on my system. I have enrolled Tom into OmniPass and remembered passwords. I want to take all my passwords to new system. I export Toms OmniPass user profile. I go to my new system and using the Control Panel I create a user with the username "Tom" and the password "Sunshine". I can now successfully import the OmniPass user data to the new system. If you export an OmniPass-only user, you can import that user to any computer running OmniPass, provided that a user with that name is not already enrolled in OmniPass. 165 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device If you attempt to import a user profile who has the same name as a user already enrolled in OmniPass, the OmniPass import function will fail. OmniPass Control Center The Omnipass Control Center allows you to perform a variety of Omnipass "housekeeping" tasks. For details about the features offered by the Control Center:

1 Go to Start > All Programs > Softex > Omnipass Control Center. 2 When the Omnipass Control Center opens, click the Help link on the left side of the Control Center window. Troubleshooting You cannot use OmniPass to create Windows users. You must first create the Windows user, and you will need administrative privileges to do that. Once the Windows user is created, you can add that user to OmniPass using the same username and password Cannot add Windows users to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a Windows user to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. You can do this by going to Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Network Access: Sharing and Security Model for Local Accounts. The correct setting should be Classic - Local Users Authenticate as Themselves. Cannot add a User with a Blank Password to OmniPass If you experience difficulties adding a user with a blank password to OmniPass, you may need to adjust your local security settings. First attempt the procedure explained in the Cannot add Windows user to OmniPass section. If the difficulties persist, then try the following procedure. Click Start, Control Panel, Administrative Tools, and Local Security Settings. Expand Local Policies, expand Security Options, and double-click Accounts: Limit local account use of blank passwords to console login only. This setting should be set to Disabled. 166 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Dialog appears after OmniPass authentication during Windows Logon After installing OmniPass on your system, you can choose to logon to Windows using OmniPass. You authenticate with OmniPass (via master password, or an enrolled security device) and OmniPass logs you into Windows. You may, during this OmniPass authentication, see a Login Error dialog box. This dialog box occurs when OmniPass was unable to log you into Windows with the credentials supplied

(username and password). This could happen for any of the following reasons:

Your Windows password has changed Your Windows account has been disabled If you are having difficulties due to the first reason, you will need to update OmniPass with your changed Windows account password. Click Update Password and you will be prompted with a dialog to reconfirm your password. Enter the new password to your Windows user account and click OK. If the error persists, then it is unlikely the problem is due to your Windows user account password changing. 167 - Introducing the Fingerprint Sensor Device Appendix C: Using Intel Wireless Display Using the Wireless Display technology Intel Wireless Display (WiDi) is a new technology that is available as an option on selected Fujitsu LIFEBOOK computers. If you have Intel WiDi on your system, please read these instructions and information regarding its use. Intel WiDi lets users enjoy and share PC content from an Intel Core processor-based notebook with their big screen TV. With Intel WiDi, you can use your big screen TV to view data and applications from your hard drive, home network, or the Internet. Its no longer necessary for friends and families to crowd around the PC to enjoy content stored or accessed there. As its name implies, Intel WiDi is a wireless technology. Note, however, that it requires a third-party display adapter in order to be used. The display adapter is attached to the TV via HDMI (preferred) or composite A/V cables. FIRST GENERATION DISPLAY ADAPTERS ARE AVAILABLE FROM ELECTRONICS RETAILERS. ANY DISPLAY ADAPTER THAT IS COMPATIBLE WITH INTEL WIRELESS DISPLAY CAN BE USED WITH THIS TECHNOLOGY. IF YOUR TELEVISION HAS HDMI PORTS, THAT IS THE PREFERRED METHOD OF CONNECTION AS OPPOSED TO COMPOSITE CABLE CONNECTION. 168 IF YOU PURCHASED A SYSTEM WITH AN INTEL WIRELESS LAN AND OPTIONAL INTEL WIDI TECHNOLOGY, THE WIDI APPLICATION MAY OR MAY NOT BE PRE-INSTALLED (DEPENDING UPOON YOUR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION). SYSTEMS WITH INTEL WIDI PRE-INSTALLED WILL HAVE A WIDI ICON LOCATED ON THEIR DESKTOP. IF THE ICON IS NOT PRESENT, INTEL WIDI WILL BE INSTALLED AS SOON AS YOU RUN CLICKME. THE INTEL WIDI TECHNOLOGY WILL ONLY WORK IN COMBINATION WITH AN INTEL WIRELESS LAN. ONLY WINDOWS MEDIA PLAYER CAN BE USED AS THE MEIA PLAYER FOR WIDI 2.0. BEFORE USING INTEL WIDI, BE SURE THAT THE SYSTEMS WIRELESS DEVICE SWITCH IS TURNED ON. NOTE THAT SECURE CONTENTS ARE NOT SUPPORTED BY INTEL WIDI 2.0. CONTENT REQUIRING OUTPUT PROTECTION SUCH AS BLU-RAY AND DVD MOVIE PLAYBACK IS NOT SUPPORTED BY WIDI. THERE MAY BE A SLIGHT TIME LAG WHEN USING WIDI WHEN YOU MOVE THE MOUSE OR TYPE IN CHARACTERS. THE FIRST TIME YOU USE WIDI, THE DEFAULT DISPLAY RESOLUTION IS 1280X720. IF YOU WOULD LIKE TO CHANGE THE RESOLUTION, GO TO THE CONTROL PANEL -> DISPLAY PROPERTIES UNDER THE SETTINGS TAB. ONCE YOU HAVE SET THE RESOLUTION, IT WILL BECOME THE DEFAULT UNLESS YOU CHANGE IT AGAIN. Starting the WiDi application To launch Intel Wireless Display, perform the following steps:

1 Verify that you have a display adapter connected to the television on which you want to use WiDi and turn on the television. 2 If you havent yet turned on the wireless device switch on your notebook, do so now. 3 Click on the WiDi icon on your desktop or the Start menu shortcut. 4 The PC content is displayed on the big screen TV. After the initial set-up between the laptop and a compatible display adapter, you can set the adapter as the default to auto-connect. In the future, simply opening the application will automatically connect the two. For detailed information about using and troubleshooting the WiDi technology, click on the WiDi icon then click the

[Help] button in the upper right-hand corner to open the Wireless Display Help file. 169 - Using the Wireless Display technology Figure A-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network Index A About This Guide 1, 8 AC adapter 57 plug adapters 113 Active Digitizer 38 Air Vents 23 Anti-theft lock slot 21 Auto/Airline Adapter 57, 58 B Battery 68 care 113 cold-swapping 71 conserving power 64 dead 94 faulty 94 hot-swapping 71 increasing life 114 level indicator 25 level indicators 25 lithium ion battery 68 low 70 problems 94 recharging 69 replacing 71 shorted 70 Standby mode 70 170 Battery Latches 23 BIOS Guide 61 setup utility 61 Bluetooth 151 Built-in Speakers 90 Button Icons 49 C Capacitive Touchscreen 42 CapsLock 26 CD-ROM 90, 91 Cold-swapping 47 Configuration Label 116 Contact Information 9 Controls and Connectors 12 Conventions Used in the Guide 8 Cursor Keys 33 D DC Output Cable 57 DC Power Jack 57 Device Ports 79 DIMM 75 Display Panel 15, 27 brightness 30 opening 27 problems 96 Docking Port 79 Double-Clicking 36 Dragging 36, 37 Dual Built-in Microphones 17 DVD drive 90, 91 E Error Messages 98 External Video Port 13, 82 F Fingerprint Sensor Device 17, 153 enrolling a fingerprint 158 getting started 154 installing OmniPass 154 logging into a remembered site 161 OmniPass authentication toolbar 160 password replacement 159 remembering a password 160 uninstalling OmniPass 156 user enrollment 156 using OmniPass 159 Fujitsu Contact Information 9 Fujitsu LifeBook storing 111 traveling 112 Function Key F10 34 F3 34 F4 34 F6 34 F7 34 F8 34, 45 F9 34, 45 FN 34 G Gestures 42 Gigabit LAN (RJ-45) Jack 21 Glossary 125 H Hard Disk Drive access indicator 26 problems 91 HDMI Port 17 Headphone Jack 12, 18, 81 Hibernation Feature 65 disable/enable 65 I IEEE 1394 Port 19, 81, 82 Internal LAN Jack 79 K Keyboard 16, 32 cursor keys 33 function keys 33 numeric keypad 32 problems 91 windows keys 33 L LifeBook Security Panel 15, 48 operating 54 passwords 52 setting up 52 uninstalling 55 Local Area Network (LAN) 13 171 M Memory capacity 77 checking capacity 77 compartment 22, 75 installing 75 problems 92 removing 77 upgrade module 75 Microphone Jack 12, 19, 81 Modular Bay 46 cold-swapping 47 devices 46 installing 46 removing 46 Mouse problems 91 N NumLk 26 P Pen tether 44 Pen Tether Attachment Point 19 Pointing Device 35 Port Replicator 84 attaching 86 back panel components 84 connector 23 detaching 86 problems 91 Post-logon button functions 50 Power AC adapter 57 Auto/Airline adapter 57 failure 93 indicator 24 management 64 off 66 on 59 problems 95 sources 57 Power Management 64 Power On Self Test 60, 98 Power/Suspend/Resume Slide 15, 64 Pre-Installed Software 122 Q Quick Point Pointing Device 35 R Registration 63 Regulatory Information 138 Restarting 66 Restoring Your Pre-installed Software 99 Right Button 17 RJ-45 79 S ScrLk 26 SD Card Slot 12 SDRAM 22, 75 Secure Digital Cards 73 Security Buttons 48 Security lock slot 12 Smart Card Slot 12 172 Specifications 116 Audio 117 Chipset 116 Device Ports 119 Dimensions and Weight 121 Environmental Requirements 121 Keyboard 120 mass storage device options 117 Memory 116 Microprocessor 116 Power 120 Video 117 Status Indicator Panel 15, 24 Suspend/ Resume button 13 T Tablet Configuration 28 Touch Screen calibrating 41 clicking 40 dragging 41 Touchpad Control Adjustment 37 Troubleshooting 87 U USB Ports 12, 18, 21, 80, 92 V Volume control 45 W Warranty 10 Web Cam Access LED 15 Windows keys 33 Application key 33 Start keys 33 Windows Power Management 65 Wireless Device On/Off Switch 13 Wireless LAN Before Using the Wireless LAN 142 configuring 142 connection to the network 147 deactivating/disconnecting 145 modes 143 Specifications 150 Troubleshooting 148 173

 

 

Guide dutilisation Dcouvrez comment utiliser votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu T902 1 -

Informations sur les droits dauteurs et les marques commerciales La socit Fujitsu America, Inc. a fait tous les efforts possibles pour vrifier lexactitude des informations figurant dans ce document et sassurer quil ny manque rien. Cependant, puisque nos produits font continuellement lobjet damliorations, nous ne pouvons garantir lexactitude de tout le contenu de ce document. Nous rfutons toute responsabilit relative des erreurs, des omissions ou des modifications futures. Fujitsu, le logo Fujitsu et LIFEBOOK sont des marques dposes de Fujitsu Limited. Centrino, Intel Core et Centrino sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de la socit Intel ou des ses filiales aux tats-Unis et dans dautres pays. Microsoft et Windows sont des marques dposes de la socit Microsoft aux tats-Unis et/ou dans dautres pays. Atheros est une marque dpose de la socit Atheros Communications, Inc. Bluetooth est une marque de commerce de Bluetooth SIG, Inc., USA. OmniPass est une marque de commerce de la socit Softex, Inc. PowerDVD, PowerDirector, MakeDisc et YouCam sont des marques de commerce de la socit CyberLink. Fabriqu sous licence de DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, le symbole DTS et la combinaison nom/symbole DTS sont des marques dposes, alors que DTS Boost est une marque de commerce, appartenant toutes DTS (BVI) Limited ( Hong Kong et en Chine) et DTS, Inc.

(hors de Hong Kong et de la Chine). DTS, Inc. Tous droits rservs. Adobe et Adobe Reader sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de la socit Adobe Systems Incorporated aux tats-Unis et/ou dans dautres pays. Norton et Norton Internet Security sont des marques de commerce ou des marques dposes de la socit Symantec aux tats-Unis et dans dautres pays. Toutes les autres marques de commerce mentionnes dans le prsent document sont la proprit de leurs dtenteurs respectifs. Copyright 2012 Fujitsu America, Inc. Tous droits rservs. Aucune partie de cette publication ne peut tre copie, reproduite ou traduite sans le consentement pralable de Fujitsu. Aucune partie de cette publication ne peut tre enregistre ou transmise lectroniquement sans le consentement crit de Fujitsu. B6FJ-8321-01ENZ0-00 1 AVERTISSEMENT: LA MANIPULATION DU CORDON DE CE PRODUIT VOUS EXPOSE AU PLOMB, UNE SUBSTANCE CHIMIQUE QUI, SELON LTAT DE CALIFORNIE, PEUT CAUSER DES ANOMALIES CONGNITALES OU DAUTRES PROBLMES DE REPRODUCTION. LAVEZ-VOUS LES MAINS APRS CHAQUE MANIPULATION. GUIDE DUTILISATION POUR LA CONNEXION SANS FIL EN LARGE BANDE SI UN PRIPHRIQUE GRAND RSEAU SANS FIL (WWAN) OPTIONNEL EST INSTALL SUR VOTRE ORDINATEUR, LE GUIDE DUTILISATION DU WWAN EST DISPONIBLE SUR:

HTTP://SOLUTIONS.US.FUJITSU.COM/WWW/CONTENT/SUPPORT/MOBILE/SUPPORT_NOTICES LA VERSION COMPLTE DU GUIDE DUTILISATION CONTIENT DES AVERTISSEMENTS ET DES MISES EN GARDE SUR LA SCURIT DES RADIOFRQUENCES LORSQUON UTILISE UN DISPOSITIF DE RSEAU TENDU SANS FIL, POUR LES CONSULTER, CLIQUEZ SUR 3G MINI-CARD GOBI3000 REGULATORY AND SAFETY INFORMATION. DCLARATION DE CONFORMIT selon la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC Nom de la partie responsable :

Adresse:

Tlphone :

Dclare que le produit:

Fujitsu America, Inc. 1250 E. Arques Avenue, Sunnyvale, CA 94085

(408) 746-6000 Configuration du modle de base: PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T902 est conforme aux exigences de la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC. Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences de la partie 15 des rgles de la FCC. Lutilisation est sujette aux deux conditions suivantes:

(1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible; (2) cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris celles pouvant causer un mauvais fonctionnement de lappareil. 2 CONSIGNES DE SCURIT IMPORTANTES Pour fonctionner, cet appareil ncessite un adaptateur secteur. Utilisez uniquement un adaptateur de classe 2 pour quipement informatique, homologu UL I.T.E., avec une sortie nominale de 19 V c.c. et un courant de 4,22 A (80 W). Polarit de sortie de ladaptateur secteur :

Le dessous de cet ordinateur peut schauffer lorsque lappareil est utilis pendant une longue priode. Lorsque vous utilisez cet ordinateur et quil repose mme la peau (sur les jambes nues), prenez garde ne pas lutiliser pendant trop longtemps ou de manire continue. Pendant lutilisation de lordinateur portable, observez toujours les consignes de scurit lmentaires ci-aprs afin de rduire au minimum le risque dincendie, dlectrocution ou dautres blessures. Dautre part:

Nutilisez pas ce produit proximit dun point deau (baignoire, lavabo, vier de cuisine, vier de buanderie) ni dans un sous-sol humide ou ct Utilisez uniquement le cordon dalimentation et les piles recommands dans ce manuel. Ne jetez pas les batteries dans le feu. Elles risquent dexploser. Vrifiez si la rglementation locale comporte des instructions spciales dlimination. ATTENTION : Il y a un risque d'explosion si la batterie n'est pas remplace par une batterie approprie. Jetez les batteries uses conformment aux instructions du fabricant. dune piscine. Avis rserv des rparateurs qualifis CONSERVEZ CES INSTRUCTIONS DANGER DEXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE AU LITHIUM (HORLOGE) EST INCORRECTEMENT REMPLACE. LA PILE DOIT TRE REMPLACE UNIQUEMENT PAR UNE PILE IDENTIQUE OU DUN TYPE QUIVALENT RECOMMAND PAR LE FABRICANT. JETEZ LES BATTERIES USES CONFORMMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT. POUR BNFICIER DUNE PROTECTION CONTINUE CONTRE LES RISQUES DINCENDIE, LE FUSIBLE NE DOIT TRE REMPLAC QUE PAR UN AUTRE FUSIBLE DE MME TYPE ET DE MME CAPACIT. 3 Recyclage de la batterie Avec le temps, lautonomie des batteries qui alimentent votre ordinateur portable finira par diminuer; cest un phnomne naturel pour toutes les batteries. Lorsque vous remarquerez cela, songez installer une batterie neuve*. Si vous remplacez votre ancienne batterie, il est important que vous la jetiez comme il convient car, dans le cas contraire, les matriaux quelle contient risquent de nuire lenvironnement. Chez Fujitsu, nous portons une attention particulire la protection de lenvironnement et nous collaborons donc avec la Rechargeable Battery Recycle Corporation (RBRC**), une organisation de service publique but non lucratif qui sengage dans la protection de lenvironnement par le recyclage des batteries usages sans cot pour vous. La RBRC dispose de dizaines de milliers de points de collecte aux tats-Unis et au Canada. Pour trouver le lieu de collecte le plus proche de chez vous, visitez www.RBRC.org ou appelez au 1-800-822-8837. Si aucun des lieux proposs par la RBRC ne vous convient, vous pouvez en trouver un en visitant le site de la Consumer Education Initiative (Initiative pour lducation des consommateurs) de lEIA ladresse http://EIAE.org/. Rappelez-vous que la protection de lenvironnement est laffaire de tous, vous devriez donc faire tout votre possible afin dy contribuer, pour la gnration actuelle et les gnrations suivantes.

* Pour commander une nouvelle batterie compatible avec votre ordinateur portable Fujitsu, allez sur www.shopfujitsu.com (tats-Unis) ou www.fujitsu.ca/products/notebooks (Canada).

** La RBRC est une organisation indpendante dont Fujitsu finance une partie des activits de recyclage ; la RBRC nest en aucune faon affilie Fujitsu. 4 Table des matires Prface propos de ce guide . 8 Conventions utilises dans ce guide. 8 Coordonnes pour contacter Fujitsu. 9 Chapitre 1 Prsentation de votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK Aperu gnral . 11 Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs . 12 Composants suprieurs. 15 Composants sur le ct gauche de lordinateur . 17 Composants sur le ct droit de lordinateur . 19 Composants de la face arrire . 21 Composants sous lordinateur. 22 Tableau de voyants dtat. 24 Voyant dalimentation . 24 Voyants de charge en cours . 25 Voyant de niveau de charge . 25 cran . 27 Ouverture de lcran . 27 Utilisation du systme comme une tablette . 28 1 Modification de la fonction de pivotement automatique . 29 Rglage de la luminosit de lcran . 30 Activation/Dsactivation du capteur de lumire ambiante. 31 Clavier . 33 Utilisation du clavier. 33 Pav tactile/Numriseur actif/Pav tactile . 36 Utilisation du pav Touchpad. 36 cran de numriseur actif. 39 Utilisation de lcran tactile capacitif . 43 Installation du cordon de stylet . 45 Rglage du volume . 46 Rglage du volume . 46 Priphriques de baie modulaire. 47 Retrait et installation de priphriques modulaires . 47 Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK . 49 Fonctions des boutons de scurit . 49 Fonctions des boutons post-identification. 51 Modification des fonctions des boutons PC Tablette. 52 Configuration du tableau de scurit LIFEBOOK . 53 Mots de passe . 53 Utilisation de votre tableau de scurit LIFEBOOK . 55 Mises en garde . 55 Dsinstallation/rinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit . 56 2 -

Chapitre 2 Chapitre 3 Premire mise en marche de votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK Sources dalimentation . 59 Connexion des adaptateurs dalimentation. 59 Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK . 61 Mise sous tension . 61 Procdure damorage . 62 Mots de passe daccs au disque dur . 63 Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS . 63 Amorage du systme. 64 Premier dmarrage de Windows . 64 Gestion de lalimentation . 66 Glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise . 66 Mode veille . 66 Mode veille prolonge (enregistrement sur le disque). 67 Gestion de lalimentation dans Windows. 67 Redmarrage du systme. 68 Mise hors tension . 68 Conformit ENERGY STAR . 69 Options installables par lutilisateur Batterie au lithium . 70 Recharge des batteries . 71 Remplacement de la batterie. 73 Cartes Secure Digital . 75 Installation dune carte SD . 76 Retirer une carte SD . 76 Module de mmoire additionnelle . 77 Installer un module de mmoire additionnelle. 77 Retirer un module de mmoire additionnelle . 79 Vrification de la capacit de mmoire . 79 3 -

Chapitre 4 Ports de priphriques . 81 Prise de rseau local (RJ-45) interne . 81 Connecteur de duplicateur de ports . 81 Ports USB. 82 Informations sur lutilitaire de charge USB en tout temps. 83 Prise dcouteurs . 83 Prise de micro . 83 Port HDMI.. 84 Port vido externe. 84 Duplicateur de ports . 85 Composants du duplicateur de ports . 86 Installation du duplicateur de ports. 88 Dsinstallation du duplicateur de ports. 88 Dpannage de votre LIFEBOOK Dpannage . 89 Identification du problme. 89 Problmes spcifiques . 91 Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension . 100 Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels . 101 Enregistrement et restauration de vos images dorigine et de systme . 101 Cration dune image de systme . 103 Onglets Restauration et Utilitaires. 107 Restauration de limage dorigine avec la fonctionnalit . 107 Restauration et Utilitaires ( partir dun nouveau disque dur ou dun disque dur sans auto-amorage) . 108 Tlchargement des mises jour de pilotes . 109 4 -

Chapitre 5 Chapitre 6 Entretien Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK . 110 Nettoyage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. 111 Nettoyage du filtre anti-poussire . 113 Entreposage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK . 114 Voyager avec votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK . 114 Batteries . 115 Entretien de votre lecteur multimdia. 116 Spcifications techniques Spcifications . 118 Microprocesseur . 118 Puce. 118 Mmoire . 118 Vido . 119 Numriseur . 119 Audio . 119 Options de stockage . 120 Priphriques de baie modulaire. 120 Caractristiques techniques . 120 Ports de priphriques . 121 Clavier . 122 Gestion de lalimentation . 122 Dimensions et poids . 123 Environnement requis . 123 Accessoires prfrs des utilisateurs . 123 Logiciels prinstalls . 124 Apprendre utiliser vos logiciels . 124 5 -

Glossaire et Renseignements sur la rglementation Glossaire . 128 Renseignements sur la rglementation . 141 Avis . 141 AVIS DE LA FCC. 141 AVIS DOC (INDUSTRIE CANADA) . 141 Annexe A: Guide dutilisation de la carte de rseau local sans fil Renseignements sur la rglementation de la FCC . 142 Remarques et dclarations rglementaires. 142 Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil optionnelle. 145 Cartes rseau sans fil prsentes dans ce document . 145 Caractristiques de la carte rseau sans fil . 145 Modes de rseau sans fil compatibles avec cette carte. 146 Dsactivation/dconnexion de la carte rseau sans fil . 148 Dsactivation avec le commutateur de la carte rseau sans fil . 149 Dsactivation par licne dans la zone de notification . 149 Activation de la carte rseau sans fil . 149 Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil. 150 Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil . 150 Connexion au rseau . 150 Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil. 151 Dpannage . 151 Spcifications de la carte de rseau local sans fil . 153 Spcifications . 153 6 -

Utilisation de Bluetooth . 155 Prsentation de Bluetooth . 155 Sources dinformations supplmentaires sur Bluetooth . 155 Annexe B: Capteur dempreintes digitales Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales . 157 Premire mise en marche. 158 Installer OmniPass . 158 Enregistrement des utilisateurs . 160 Utilisation dOmniPass . 163 Configuration dOmniPass . 168 Centre de contrle OmniPass . 170 Dpannage . 170 Annexe C: Utilisation de laffichage Intel Wireless Display Utilisation de la technologie Wireless Display. 172 Dmarrer lapplication WiDi . 173 Index . 174 7 -

Prface propos de ce guide Le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Srie T902 de la socit Fujitsu America est un ordinateur compact, mais puissant. Il peut tre utilis en configuration dordinateur portable classique, avec un clavier, ou en configuration tablette, avec un stylet. Son fonctionnement est assur par le nouveau processeur Intel Core de troisime gnration et son cran intgr en couleurs est dot d'un numriseur double ; cela fait de votre ordinateur portable un outil aussi puissant qu'un PC normal, capable de fonctionner dans des environnements varis. Ce manuel prsente le mode demploi du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T902 et de ses logiciels intgrs. Conventions utilises dans ce guide Les touches du clavier et lcran apparaissent entre crochets. Exemple: [Fn], [F1], [chap], [Entre] et [Ctrl]. Le texte contient plusieurs renvois vers des pages contenant des informations supplmentaires sur un sujet quelconque. Exemple: (Voir Procdure dinstallation en page 43). Remarque: tous les renvois sont relis aux lments concerns, il vous suffit donc de cliquer sur le lien et vous serez automatiquement redirig(e) vers llment ou la page en question. Les lments des menus lcran sont indiqus en caractres gras. Exemple: Cliquez sur Menu Fujitsu, puis faites votre slection. LICNE DINFORMATIONS MET EN VIDENCE DES RENSEIGNEMENTS QUI VOUS AIDERONT MIEUX COMPRENDRE LE SUJET TRAIT. 8 LICNE DE MISE EN GARDE MET EN VIDENCE DES INFORMATIONS IMPORTANTES POUR LUTILISATION SCURITAIRE DE VOTRE ORDINATEUR OU POUR LINTGRIT DE VOS FICHIERS. VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT TOUTES LES MISES EN GARDE. LICNE DAVERTISSEMENT MET EN VIDENCE DES INFORMATIONS SUR DES DANGERS POUR VOUS, VOTRE PC TABLETTE LIFEBOOK OU VOS FICHIERS. VEUILLEZ LIRE ATTENTIVEMENT TOUS LES AVERTISSEMENTS. Coordonnes pour contacter Fujitsu Service et assistance Plusieurs faons soffrent vous pour contacter lquipe de service et assistance de Fujitsu :

Appel sans frais : 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Site Internet:

U.S.A. - us.fujitsu.com/solutions Canada - www.fujitsu.ca Avant de nous contacter, veuillez avoir les informations suivantes porte de main pour que notre prpos du service la clientle puisse vous venir en aide le plus rapidement possible:

Nom du produit Numro de configuration du produit Numro de srie du produit Date dachat Conditions dans lesquelles le problme est survenu Texte des messages derreur reus Types de priphriques connects, si applicable 9 - propos de ce guide Site de vente par internet de Fujitsu Vous pouvez vous rendre sur ce site directement : www.shopfujitsu.com. Maintien de la plus rcente configuration Pour vous assurer de toujours disposer des versions les plus actuelles des pilotes de votre systme, il vous est suggr dutiliser priodiquement lutilitaire de mise jour Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM). Lutilitaire FSDM est votre disposition pour tlcharger les plus rcentes versions des pilotes, utilitaires et applications depuis le site dassistance Fujitsu. Si vous avez un systme dexploitation Windows 7, vous devez vous connecter au site dassistance

(http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS). Garantie limite Votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK est accompagn dune garantie limite internationale de Fujitsu. Pour connatre les conditions gnrales et la dure de votre garantie limite, consultez la pochette de service livre avec votre ordinateur. 10 - propos de ce guide Chapitre 1 Prsentation de votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK Aperu gnral Cette section dcrit les composants de votre PC Tablette Fujitsu LIFEBOOK T902. Nous vous suggrons fortement de la lire avant de commencer utiliser votre PC Tablette, mme si vous avez dj utilis des ordinateurs de ce type. Figure 1. PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu T902 11 Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Les interfaces de connecteurs et de priphriques sur le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T902 et sur le duplicateur de ports optionnel vous permettent de connecter divers priphriques. Les emplacements spcifiques sont illustrs dans les figures 2 6. Le tableau ci-dessous fournit une brve description de chacune des icnes figurant sur le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T902 et/ou le duplicateur de ports en option. Chacune des icnes est soit moule, soit imprime sur le chssis du systme. Connexion Icne PC Tablette Objectif Fente SD/SDHC Fente pour carte Smart Card Port USB Port USB avec charge en tout temps Prise de micro Prise dcouteurs La fente pour carte Secure Digital (SD)/SHDC permet dinsrer une carte mmoire pour la conservation des donnes. Cette carte mmoire vous permet de transfrer des donnes partir de et vers une varit de priphriques numriques. La fente rserve vous permet dinsrer une carte Smart Card sur laquelle vous pouvez enregistrer des informations importantes, telles que renseignements mdicaux, ou de largent lectronique. Connecter des priphriques USB au PC Tablette. Veuillez prendre note que les ports USB ayant une patte noire dans leur centre sont destins des priphriques USB 2.0 ou 1.1, alors que ceux ayant une patte bleue sont destins des priphriques USB 3.0.

Connecter des priphriques compatibles USB 2.0 et 1.1. Ce port peut galement tre utilis pour charger des priphriques USB peu importe que le systme soit allum ou non. Connecter un micro externe. Le micro interne est dsactiv lorsque vous branchez un micro externe. Connecter des couteurs stros ou des haut-parleurs externes avec amplificateur. Le haut-parleur interne est dsactiv lorsque vous branchez des couteurs externes ou des haut-parleurs avec amplificateur. Port HDMI Le port HDMI vous permet dutiliser des priphriques numriques compatibles avec votre ordinateur, tels quune tlvision haute dfinition ou un rcepteur AV (audio-vido). 12 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Connexion Icne PC Tablette Objectif Fente dantivol Glissire Veille/

Reprise Rseau local Commutateur Marche/Arrt du dispositif sans fil Port vido externe Interface vido numrique (DVI) Port DisplayPort La fente dantivol vous permet de scuriser le PC Tablette en y branchant un dispositif antivol compatible. La glissire veille/reprise vous permet de mettre votre systme en veille sans lteindre, de reprendre lutilisation du systme lorsquil a t mis en veille et de le faire dmarrer sil est teint. La prise de rseau local (RJ-45) est utilise pour connecter la carte Ethernet Base-T/Tx 10/100/1000*

interne un rseau local de votre bureau (ou domicile) ou des priphriques tels que cble modem, DSL ou Internet par satellite.

*1000 Mbit/s, galement connue sous le nom de Gigabit Ethernet. Le commutateur de carte sans fil vous permet de mettre sous tension ou hors tension ces dispositifs sans fil (disponibles en option). Le port vido externe permet de connecter un moniteur externe ou un projecteur ACL. Le port DVI-D situ sur le duplicateur de ports (en option) vous permet de raccorder un moniteur ACL plat ou un poste de tlvision quip dun port DVI-D; vous obtenez des graphismes et images dune trs grande nettet. Ce port, en option sur le duplicateur de ports, permet de connecter des priphriques d'affichage numriques compatibles avec la technologie DisplayPort, notamment un cran plat ou un projecteur numrique, l'aide d'un cble DisplayPort. 13 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Camra web en option DEL daccs la camra Web cran Bouton Windows Scurit LifeBook/

Boutons de tablette PC Bouton dalimentation/

Reprise (glissire) Microphone intgr Capteur de lumire ambiante Clavier Tableau de voyants dtat Microphone intgr Capteur dempreintes digitales Haut-parleur stro Tableau de voyants dtat Interrupteur de communications sans fil Fente pour carte SD/SDHC Commande du curseur TouchPad Haut-parleur stro Figure 2. PC Tablette LIFEBOOK avec cran ouvert 14 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Composants suprieurs Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant sur le dessus de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Camra Web La camra web optionnelle trs haute rsolution (1920 x 1080 pixels) permet de prendre des photos de vous-mme et de les envoyer par Internet. DEL daccs la camra Web Le voyant daccs la camra web sallume lorsque la camra web est active. cran Lordinateur est quip dun cran couleur diodes lectroluminescentes avec rtro-clairage, permettant dafficher des textes et des images. Vous pouvez utiliser l'cran numrisation double soit avec un stylet, soit avec vos doigts. Bouton Windows Aprs ouverture de la session Windows, le bouton Windows peut servir deux fonctions. Lorsque vous appuyez sur ce bouton seul, il ouvre le menu Dmarrer. Lorsque vous appuyez sur ce bouton en mme temps que sur le commutateur marche/arrt, il ouvre le gestionnaire des tches [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Suppr]. Boutons de scurit/PC Tablette du LIFEBOOK Les boutons de scurit/PC Tablette permettent de scuriser votre systme grce un mot de passe et de lancer des applications au simple toucher dun bouton. Voir Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK en page 49. Glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise La glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise vous permet de mettre votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK en veille sans lteindre, de reprendre lutilisation de lordinateur lorsquil a t mis en sommeil et de le faire dmarrer sil est teint. Voir Glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise en page 66. Microphones intgrs doubles Le microphone intgr vous permet denregistrer de la voix et des annotations. 15 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Clavier Clavier complet avec plusieurs touches spciales Windows. Voir Clavier en page 33. Deux haut-parleurs stro Les deux haut-parleurs intgrs permettent une coute en strophonie. Commande du curseur Touchpad La commande de curseur TouchPad vous offre une faon supplmentaire de dplacer le curseur. Voir Pav tactile/Numriseur actif en page 36. Fente pour carte SD/SDHC La fente pour carte SD/SDHC permet dintroduire une carte Secure Digital (SD) de stockage de donnes. Cette architecture vous permet de transfrer des donnes partir dune grande varit de priphriques numriques. Voir Installation dune carte SD en page 76. Interrupteur de communications sans fil Ce commutateur permet dallumer/teindre les dispositifs sans fil optionnels. Pour prolonger la longvit de la batterie, teignez ces priphriques entre les utilisations. Voir Activation de la carte rseau sans fil en page 149. Tableau de voyants dtat Les tableaux de voyants dtat affichent des symboles qui correspondent des composants spcifiques du PC Tablette. Les voyants dtat sont situs deux endroits diffrents : sur le devant de lordinateur (voyants dtat relatifs au systme) et sous les boutons dapplications (voyants dtat relatifs aux boutons). Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. Capteur dempreintes digitales Le capteur dempreintes digitales vous permet de vous connecter votre systme ainsi qu des sites Internets et dautres applications protgs par mot de passe: il suffit de glisser votre doigt sur le capteur. Voir Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales en page 157. Capteur de lumire ambiante Lorsque lordinateur est en cours dutilisation, ce capteur value la lumire ambiante et ajuste automatiquement la luminosit de lcran en consquence. Voir Activation/Dsactivation du capteur de lumire ambiante en page 31. 16 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Grilles de ventilation Port HDMI Fente pour carte Smart Card Prise dalimentation c.c. Port vido externe Port USB 3.0 avec capacit de charge USB en tout temps Prise de micro Figure 3. Ct gauche du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Port USB 3.0 Prise dcouteurs Composants sur le ct gauche de lordinateur Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant sur le ct gauche de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Grilles de ventilation Permettent de refroidir le systme afin dviter une surchauffe. POUR PROTGER VOTRE PC TABLETTE DES DOMMAGES ET OPTIMISER SES PERFORMANCES, GARDEZ TOUJOURS LES GRILLES DE VENTILATION DGAGES, PROPRES ET SANS DBRIS. IL EST POSSIBLE QUE VOUS DEVIEZ LES NETTOYER PRIODIQUEMENT, SELON LENVIRONNEMENT DANS LEQUEL VOUS UTILISEZ LORDINATEUR. NE PLACEZ PAS LORDINATEUR DANS UN ENDROIT O LES GRILLES DE VENTILATION POURRAIENT TRE OBSTRUES, NOTAMMENT DANS UN PETIT ESPACE FERM OU SUR UNE SURFACE MOLLE COMME UN LIT OU UN COUSSIN. Port HDMI Le port HDMI est conu pour tre utilis avec des priphriques numriques compatibles avec votre ordinateur, tels quune tlvision haute dfinition ou un rcepteur AV (audio-vido). Voir Port HDMI. en page 84. 17 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Fente pour carte Smart Card Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK est dot dune fente pour cartes intelligentes, aussi appeles cartes puce. Ces cartes ressemblent des cartes de crdit mais elles contiennent des circuits imprims. Pour pouvoir utiliser le lecteur de carte puce, vous devez acqurir un logiciel tiers qui nest pas fourni. Prise dcouteurs La prise dcouteurs vous permet de connecter des couteurs. Voir Prise dcouteurs en page 83. Prise de micro Permet de connecter un microphone stro externe. Voir Prise de micro en page 83. Port USB 3.0 avec capacit de charge USB en tout temps Le port USB 3.0 vous permet de connecter des priphriques USB. Chaque port USB 3.0 permet de transfrer des donnes une vitesse atteignant 5 Gbit/s. Il est galement rtrocompatible avec les priphriques USB 1.1 et 2.0, lesquels permettent de transfrer des donnes des vitesses atteignant respectivement 12 Mbit/s et 480 Mbit/s. Voir Ports USB en page 82. Veuillez prendre note que le port USB 3.0 offre la fonction de charge USB en tout temps, laquelle permet de charger un priphrique USB peu importe que le systme soit allum ou non. Port USB 3.0 Le port USB 3.0 vous permet de connecter des priphriques USB. Chaque port USB 3.0 permet de transfrer des donnes une vitesse atteignant 5 Gbit/s. Il est galement rtrocompatible avec les priphriques USB 1.1 et 2.0, lesquels permettent de transfrer des donnes des vitesses atteignant respectivement 12 Mbit/s et 480 Mbit/s. Voir Ports USB en page 82. Port vido externe Le port vido externe permet de connecter un moniteur externe ou un projecteur ACL. Voir Port vido externe en page 84. Prise dalimentation c.c. La prise dalimentation c.c. sert brancher ladaptateur secteur, lequel permet dalimenter le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK et de charger la batterie interne au lithium. 18 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Priphrique de baie modulaire Port USB 2.0 Point dattache du cordon du stylet Levier djection de la baie modulaire Figure 4. Ct droit du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fente pour dispositif antivol Support de stylet Composants sur le ct droit de lordinateur Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant sur le ct droit de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Baie modulaire La baie modulaire permet dinstaller lun des priphriques suivants. Voir Priphriques de baie modulaire en page 47. Lecteur modulaire Blu-ray RW. Graveur de DVD multiformat double couche Batterie au lithium modulaire Volet rducteur de poids Port USB 2.0 Le port USB 2.0 vous permet de connecter des priphriques USB. La norme USB 2.0 transfre des donnes un dbit thorique de 480 Mbit/s. Elle est rtrocompatible avec les priphriques USB 1.1 dont le dbit atteint 12 Mbit/s. Voir Ports USB en page 82. Point dattache du cordon du stylet Ce point dattache est conu pour retenir le stylet prs de lordinateur et viter quil ne sgare. Pour de plus amples informations, reportez-vous Installation du cordon de stylet en page 45. 19 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Support de stylet Le support sert tenir le stylet lorsque ce dernier nest pas utilis. Le stylet sert dinterface avec lcran numriseur actif. Fente pour dispositif antivol La fente de dispositif antivol vous permet dinstaller un dispositif antivol disponible en option. Levier djection de la baie modulaire Le levier djection de la baie modulaire permet djecter un priphrique de baie modulaire, afin de pouvoir le retirer. Voir Priphriques de baie modulaire en page 47. 20 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Prise de rseau local Gigabit (RJ-45) Figure 5. Arrire du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Port USB 2.0 Composants de la face arrire Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant larrire de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Prise de rseau local Gigabit (RJ-45) Cette prise est utilise pour une connexion Gigabit Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-Tx/1000Base-T) interne. Voir Prise de rseau local (RJ-45) interne en page 81. Port USB 2.0 Le port USB 2.0 vous permet de connecter des priphriques USB. La norme USB 2.0 transfre des donnes un dbit thorique de 480 Mbit/s. Elle est rtrocompatible avec les priphriques USB 1.1 dont le dbit atteint 12 Mbit/s. Voir Ports USB en page 82. 21 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Filtre intgr pouvant tre netoy Grilles de ventilation

(plusieurs emplacements) Compartiment de module de mmoire Compartiment du module de rseau tendu sans fil Loquet de batterie Loquet de batterie Connecteur de duplicateur de ports Compartiment de batterie au lithium Figure 6. Dessous du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Composants sous lordinateur Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant sous votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Compartiment de mmoire supplmentaire Votre PC Tablette est quip en usine dune mmoire vive synchrone dynamique de type 3 double dbit et haute vitesse (SDRAM DDR3 1600 MHz). Le compartiment de mmoire permet daugmenter la capacit de mmoire systme de votre ordinateur pour en amliorer les performances globales. Voir Module de mmoire additionnelle en page 77. Normalement, vous ne devriez pas avoir ouvrir ce compartiment. 22 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Grilles de ventilation Les grilles permettent lair de circuler dans le systme afin de refroidir les composants. POUR PROTGER VOTRE PC TABLETTE DES DOMMAGES ET OPTIMISER SES PERFORMANCES, GARDEZ TOUJOURS LES GRILLES DE VENTILATION DGAGES, PROPRES ET SANS DBRIS. IL EST POSSIBLE QUE VOUS DEVIEZ LES NETTOYER PRIODIQUEMENT, SELON LENVIRONNEMENT DANS LEQUEL VOUS UTILISEZ LORDINATEUR. NE PLACEZ PAS LORDINATEUR DANS UN ENDROIT O LES GRILLES DE VENTILATION POURRAIENT TRE OBSTRUES, NOTAMMENT DANS UN PETIT ESPACE FERM OU SUR UNE SURFACE MOLLE COMME UN LIT OU UN COUSSIN. Loquets de batterie Les loquets servent maintenir la batterie lintrieur de son compartiment. Compartiment du module de rseau tendu sans fil Ce compartiment contient le module de rseau tendu sans fil. Normalement, vous ne devriez pas avoir louvrir. Compartiment de batterie au lithium Le compartiment de batterie contient la batterie interne au lithium. Le couvercle de ce compartiment peut tre ouvert pour enlever la batterie lorsque lordinateur doit tre entrepos pendant une longue priode ou pour remplacer une batterie plat par une autre batterie charge. Voir Batterie au lithium en page 70. Filtre intgr pouvant tre nettoy Le filtre anti-poussire aide viter que la poussire et la salet sinfiltrent dans votre ordinateur. Voir Nettoyage du filtre anti-poussire en page 113. Connecteur de duplicateur de ports Ce connecteur permet de brancher le duplicateur de ports en option sur votre ordinateur portable. 23 - Emplacement des commandes et des connecteurs Voyant dalimetation Batterie 1 niveau de charge Accs au lecteur optique/disque dur Chargement de la batterie Batterie 2 niveau de charge Verr num Verr dfil Verr maj Scurit Figure 7. Tableau de voyants dtat Tableau de voyants dtat Votre ordinateur comprend deux tableaux de voyants d'tat : un sur l'avant, gauche, et l'autre sous lcran. Le tableau de voyants dtat contient des symboles et DEL associes correspondant des composants spcifiques de votre PC Tablette. Ces symboles vous renseignent sur le fonctionnement des composants correspondants. (Figure 7) Voyant dalimentation Le voyant dalimentation indique si le systme est oprationnel. Il prsente diffrents tats, chacun dentre eux indiquant le mode dalimentation de votre PC Tablette au moment donn. 24 - Tableau de voyants dtat Allum en continu (bleu): Le PC Tablette est sous tension et prt tre utilis. Clignotant : Le PC Tablette est en mode Sommeil. teint : Votre systme est en veille prolonge ou hors tension. Si la batterie est en cours de charge, le voyant dalimentation demeure allum mme si lordinateur est teint. Et mme si le systme a t teint avec Windows, le voyant dalimentation restera allum si un adaptateur est branch lordinateur. Voyants de charge en cours Les voyants Chargement de la batterie et Niveau de charge indiquent laquelle des batteries est en cours de chargement (Batterie 1: batterie au lithium principale; Batterie 2: batterie au lithium modulaire optionnelle). 111 2 Voyant de niveau de charge Le voyant de niveau de charge de la batterie affiche le niveau de charge de la batterie comme suit :

Vert continu : batterie charge entre 51% et 100% de sa capacit maximale. Orange continu : batterie charge entre 13% et 50% de sa capacit maximale. Rouge continu : batterie charge entre 0% et 12% de sa capacit maximale. Orange clignotant : Le clignotement indique quune mesure de chargement est en cours (quatre secondes aprs linstallation de la batterie). Rouge clignotant: Problme au niveau de la batterie. teint : Aucune batterie nest installe. LORSQUE LA BATTERIE EST INSTALLE ET QUE LORDINATEUR NEST PAS SOUS TENSION, LE VOYANT DE CHARGE DE LA PILE INDIQUERA LE NIVEAU DE CHARGE PENDANT CINQ SECONDES APRS LE CLIGNOTEMENT ORANGE. LORSQUE LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR NEST PAS BRANCH OU QUE LA BATTERIE NEST PAS COMPLTEMENT CHARGE ET QUE LORDINATEUR SE TROUVE EN MODE SOMMEIL, LE VOYANT CLIGNOTE. IL CLIGNOTE EN SALLUMANT UNE SECONDE TOUTES LES CINQ SECONDES. LES BATTERIES SOUMISES DES CHOCS, DES VIBRATIONS OU DES TEMPRATURES EXTRMES RISQUENT DE SUBIR DES DGTS PERMANENTS. SI UNE BATTERIE EST COURT-CIRCUITE, ELLE EST FORCMENT ABME ET DOIT TRE REMPLACE. 25 - Tableau de voyants dtat Voyant daccs au disque dur/lecteur optique Ce voyant daccs indique si le disque dur interne ou le lecteur optique est en cours dutilisation. Voyant de scurit Si un mot de passe a t dfini, ce voyant clignote lorsque le systme est ractiv partir de ltat Hors tension ou du mode Sommeil. Vous devez entrer le mot de passe dfini dans le Tableau de scurit pour que le systme redevienne oprationnel. Voyant de verrouillage du pav numrique Le voyant Verr num rvle si le clavier intgr est en mode de pav numrique dix touches. Voyant de verrouillage des majuscules Le voyant Verr maj rvle si le clavier inscrira les lettres en majuscules. Voyant Verr dfil Le voyant Verr dfil indique si le verrouillage du dfilement est actif. 26 - Tableau de voyants dtat cran Figure 8. Ouverture de lcran cran Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T902 est dot dun cran daffichage DEL rtro-clair vous permettant de mieux voir son contenu lorsque la lumire environnante est intense. La conception convertible de votre PC Tablette vous permet douvrir compltement lcran, de le tourner 180 degrs dans les deux sens et le placer face vers le haut sur le clavier. Cela vous permet dutiliser le systme comme une tablette, de la mme manire quavec un bloc-note en papier. Ouverture de lcran Soulevez simplement lcran vers le haut et vers larrire jusqu une position confortable, en faisant attention de ne pas toucher la surface daffichage. (Figure 8) 27 - cran Utilisation du systme comme une tablette Si vous souhaitez utiliser le systme comme une tablette, effectuez les tapes suivantes. LCRAN PEUT PIVOTER DANS UN SENS COMME DANS LAUTRE; MAIS LORSQUE VOUS SOUHAITEZ REVENIR LA CONFIGURATION PORTABLE, PRENEZ GARDE LE FAIRE PIVOTER DANS LE SENS INVERSE CELUI DANS LEQUEL VOUS LAVEZ OUVERT. SI VOUS TOURNEZ LCRAN DANS UNE DIRECTION INAPPROPRIE, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LA CHARNIRE. LTAPE SUIVANTE, ASSUREZ-VOUS DE PLACER LCRAN PERPENDICULAIREMENT AU CLAVIER, SINON LE CLAVIER ET LE COUVERCLE DE LCRAN POURRAIENT SGRATIGNER. 1 Soulevez lcran jusqu ce quil soit perpendiculaire au clavier. (Figure 9). 2 Lorsque lcran est perpendiculaire au clavier, tournez de 180 degrs dans lune ou lautre direction (Figure 10) afin quil soit face vers larrire. 3 En tenant lextrmit suprieure de lcran, tirez vers lavant jusqu ce quil repose pratiquement au dessus du clavier. 4 Pour revenir la configuration portable, reprenez les tapes 3 et 2. C A B D Figure 9. cran compltement ouvert Figure 10. Rotation de lcran Figure 11. Mode tablette 28 - cran Comment tenir le PC Tablette Votre ordinateur peut tre utilis en configuration tablette et orient de quatre faons diffrentes : 0o, 90o, 180o et 270o (Figure 11). Les lettres associes chaque orientation dsignent la position du systme lorsque la flche est tourne vers le haut.

(A) Orientation verticale: Positionnez lcran la verticale, la camra gauche.

(B) 2e orientation verticale: Positionnez lcran la verticale, la camra droite.

(C) Orientation horizontale: Positionnez lcran lhorizontale, la camra au-dessus. SI UN MODULE DE RSEAU SANS FIL A T INSTALL SUR VOTRE SYSTME, VEUILLEZ PRENDRE NOTE : TOUT EN TENANT LE SYSTME HORIZONTALEMENT AVEC LE VERROU EN DESSOUS (2E ORIENTATION HORIZONTALE, CONFORMMENT AUX INDICATIONS CI-DESSOUS), LA CARTE DE GRAND RSEAU SANS FIL NE DOIT PAS TRE UTILISE AVEC LANTENNE OUVERTE. UNE UTILISATION DANS CETTE POSITION POURRAIT ENDOMMAGER LANTENNE DE LA CARTE DE GRAND RSEAU SANS FIL.

(D) 2e orientation horizontale: Positionnez lcran lhorizontale, la camra au-dessous. Modification de la fonction de pivotement automatique Votre PC Tablette possde un utilitaire de pivotement automatique permettant de dterminer comment vous souhaitez que lcran ragisse lorsque la tablette est tourne. Lorsque le pivotement automatique est activ, laffichage pivote automatiquement dans le mme sens que lcran. Lorsque vous recevez votre PC tablette, les valeurs Pause et Pause automatique sont les paramtres par dfaut de lutilitaire de pivotement automatique. Lorsque loption Pause est active, le systme ne se place pas en Pivotement automatique tant que ce mode nest pas activ. Lorsque loption Pause automatique est active, lcran ne pivote pas automatiquement sil a t tourn autrement quavec la fonction de pivotement automatique (notamment avec le bouton de pivotement sur la tablette). Si loption Pause automatique est active, il existe plusieurs faons de ractiver le pivotement automatique:

Positionnez laffichage et lcran dans le mme sens. Lorsque le systme quitte le mode veille ou le mode veille prolonge. Lorsque le systme est redmarr ou que la session est ferme puis rouverte. Lorsque le systme est en Pause, il existe plusieurs faons de lactiver:

29 - cran Slectionnez Dmarrer > Tous les programmes > Utilitaire de pivotement automatique, puis cliquez sur Reprendre. Avec le bouton droit, cliquez sur licne de lutilitaire de pivotement automatique dans la barre de tches, puis cliquez sur Reprendre. Ouvrez le menu Fujitsu en appuyant sur la touche [A] ou en cliquant sur licne du menu Fujitsu dans la barre de tches, puis cliquez sur [Reprendre pivotement automatique] dans la deuxime page du menu Fujitsu. Rglage de la luminosit de lcran Lorsque vous avez allum votre ordinateur PC Tablette, vous pouvez rgler la luminosit de lcran un niveau plus confortable. Vous pouvez ajuster la luminosit de trois faons: avec le clavier, avec lutilitaire de gestion de lalimentation, avec le menu Fujitsu. Utilisation du clavier Si vous rglez la luminosit en vous servant du clavier, vous modifiez les paramtres du systme (c.--d., le paramtrage ralis avec les touches de fonction modifient automatiquement les paramtres de luminosit dans les paramtres de la tablette et du stylet).

[Fn+F6] : Appuyez plusieurs fois sur cette combinaison de touches pour diminuer la luminosit de votre cran.

[Fn+F7]: Appuyez plusieurs fois sur cette combinaison de touches pour augmenter la luminosit de votre cran. Utilisation de lutilitaire de gestion de lalimentation Pour rgler la luminosit avec lutilitaire de gestion de lalimentation:

Cliquez sur Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration. Dans Affichage par: , slectionnez un des affichages par icnes. Slectionnez Affichage, puis cliquez sur Rgler la luminosit dans la partie gauche de lcran. Faites glisser la barre Luminosit de lcran vers la gauche ou la droite selon votre prfrence. Utilisation du menu Fujitsu pour rgler la luminosit Pour rgler la luminosit en vous servant du menu Fujitsu, cliquez sur licne Menu Fujitsu de la barre de tches dans le coin infrieur droit de lcran. (Vous pouvez aussi ouvrir le menu Fujitsu en appuyant sur la touche [A].) Faites dfiler vers le bas jusquau Centre de mobilit de Windows, puis double-cliquez sur licne situe ct de Luminosit de lcran. Rglez la luminosit en faisant glisser le bouton sur la position On battery (Alimentation batterie) ou Plugged in 30 - cran

(Alimentation secteur). Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le menu Fujitsu comme moyen rapide pour rgler la luminosit de lcran au minimum ou au maximum. Pour ce faire, cliquez sur le bouton correspondant dans le menu Fujitsu. LCD Brightness Min or LCD Brightness Max (Luminosit ACL min. ou Luminosit ACL max.). LORSQUE VOUS EMPLOYEZ UNE ALIMENTATION SECTEUR, LCRAN UTILISE PAR DFAUT LE NIVEAU DE LUMINOSIT LE PLUS LEV. LORSQUE VOUS EMPLOYEZ UNE ALIMENTATION SUR BATTERIE, LCRAN UTILISE PAR DFAUT UN NIVEAU DE LUMINOSIT MOYEN. PLUS LA LUMINOSIT EST LEVE, PLUS LORDINATEUR CONSOMME DNERGIE ET PLUS LA LONGVIT DE VOTRE BATTERIE SERA RDUITE. SI VOUS DSIREZ MAXIMISER LA LONGVIT DE LA BATTERIE, RGLEZ LA LUMINOSIT AU PLUS BAS NIVEAU POSSIBLE. Activation/Dsactivation du capteur de lumire ambiante Ce systme possde un capteur de lumire ambiante (juste en dessous de bouton de tablette) qui mesure automatiquement les conditions de luminosit dans lesquelles lordinateur est utilis. Si lenvironnement est trs clair, la luminosit de lcran ACL augmentera pour faciliter la lecture. Au contraire, dans la pnombre, la luminosit de lcran diminuera automatiquement. NOTEZ QUAU PREMIER DMARRAGE DU SYSTME, LE CAPTEUR DE LUMIRE AMBIANTE EST DSACTIV. VOUS DEVREZ LACTIVER EN SUIVANT LA PROCDURE SUIVANTE. Le capteur de lumire peut tre activ ou dsactiv partir du Panneau de configuration, comme suit:

1 Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration et cliquez sur Affichage par: puis slectionnez la taille des icnes souhaite. 2 Cliquez sur licone Capteurs demplacement et autres. 3 Pour activer ou dsactiver le capteur de lumire, cochez ou dcochez la case situe dans la colonne Activ . 4 Pour de plus amples informations propos du capteur de lumire, ouvrez la fentre Proprits du capteur en cliquant sur Capteur de lumire dans la colonne Capteur . 5 Dans la fentre Proprits du capteur , vous pouvez modifier la description du capteur, dsinstaller le capteur ou encore activer ou dsactiver les utilisateurs slectionns. Pour modifier la description du capteur, cliquez sur le bouton [Modifier la description], saisissez les nouveaux lments, puis cliquez sur le bouton [OK]. 31 - cran Pour limiter le nombre dutilisateurs ayant accs aux capteurs, cliquez sur Modifier les accs aux capteurs, puis cochez ou librez la case situe ct de lutilisateur auquel vous souhaitez autoriser ou refuser laccs. Pour dsinstaller le capteur, cliquez sur Dsinstaller ce capteur. 32 - cran Clavier Touches de fonction Touche Fn Touche Dmarrer Pav numrique

(dlimit par la ligne noire) Touche dapplication Touches de dfilement Figure 12. Clavier Utilisation du clavier Votre PC Tablette Fujitsu LIFEBOOK est dot dun clavier 84 touches. Ce clavier excute toutes les fonctions dun clavier 101 touches, y compris les touches Windows et diverses touches de fonction spciales. Cette section dcrit les touches suivantes (Figure 12) :

Pav numrique : Certaines touches de votre PC Tablette remplissent une double fonction, servant la fois de caractre standard et de touche numrique ou mathmatique. Pour passer du caractre standard la fonction numrique, utilisez la touche [Verr num]. 33 - Clavier Touches de defilement: Votre clavier contient quatre touches flches permettant de dplacer le curseur ou le point dinsertion vers la droite, vers la gauche, vers le haut ou vers le bas, dans les fentres, dans les applications et dans les documents. Touches de fonction: Les touches [F1] [F12] sutilisent avec la touche [Fn] pour excuter des actions spciales, selon le programme en cours dutilisation. Touches Windows : Ces touches fonctionnent de concert avec votre systme dexploitation Windows et produisent le mme rsultat que si vous cliquiez sur le menu Dmarrer ou avec le bouton droit de votre pointeur. Pav numrique Certaines touches du clavier remplissent une double fonction en servant de touche standard et de touche numrique. Pour utiliser la fonction numrique de ces touches, appuyez sur [Verr num]. Pour dsactiver la fonction numrique, appuyez de nouveau sur la mme touche. Lorsque cette fonction est active, vous pouvez saisir des chiffres de 0 9, excuter des additions ( + ), des soustractions ( - ), des multiplications ( * ) et des divisions ( / ), ainsi que saisir des dcimales ( , ) en vous servant des touches de fonction dsignes du pav numrique. Les fonctions secondaires des touches du pav numrique sont indiques sur leur face avant. Touches Windows Votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK PC Tablette comporte deux touches Windows, soit une touche [Dmarrer] et une touche

[Application]. La touche [Dmarrer] affiche le menu Dmarrer. Ce bouton fonctionne un peu comme le bouton du menu Dmarrer sur votre cran. La touche [Application] fonctionne comme le bouton droit de votre souris et affiche un menu de raccourcis sappliquant llment slectionn (Pour plus dinformations sur les touches Windows, veuillez consulter lAide Windows et la documentation de soutien disponible dans le menu Dmarrer.) Touches de dfilement Les touches de dfilement sont les quatre touches flches qui permettent de dplacer le curseur vers le haut, vers le bas, vers la gauche et vers la droite dans les applications. Dans les programmes tels que lExplorateur Windows, elles servent dplacer la mise en vidence (slectionne llment suivant en haut, en bas, gauche ou droite). 34 - Clavier Touches de fonction Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK comporte 12 touches de fonction, F1 F12. Les fonctions affectes ces touches varient selon lapplication. Pour les connatre, consultez la documentation du logiciel utilis. La touche [Fn] permet daccder des fonctions supplmentaires de votre PC Tablette. Elle est toujours utilise conjointement avec une autre touche.

[Fn+F2] : Sur les ordinateurs rtroclairage, vous diminuer ou augmenter la luminosit en maintenant la touche [Fn] enfonce et en appuyant alternativement sur la touche [Fn].

[Fn+F3]: Maintenez [Fn] enfonce et appuyez sur [F3] pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction Silence.

[Fn+F4]: Maintenez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez sur [F4] pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction Quick Point. Veuillez prendre note que la combinaison de touches [Fn+F4] fonctionne uniquement lorsque le paramtre Manual Setting (Configuration manuelle) est slectionn dans le BIOS. (Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 63)

[Fn+F6]: Gardez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F6] pour diminuer la luminosit de lcran.

[Fn+F7]: Gardez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F7] pour augmenter la luminosit de lcran.

[Fn+F8]: Si vous appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F8] tout en maintenant la touche [Fn] enfonce, vous rduirez

[Fn+F9]: Si vous appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F9] tout en maintenant la touche [Fn] enfonce, vous augmenterez le volume sonore de votre systme. le volume sonore de votre systme.

[Fn+F10]: Gardez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez sur [F10] pour changer lemplacement de laffichage vido. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur cette combinaison de touches, vous passez au choix suivant. Les choix disponibles sont, dans lordre: cran intgr uniquement, moniteur externe uniquement et cran intgr plus moniteur externe. 35 - Clavier Pav tactile/Numriseur actif Bouton gauche Commande du curseur Bouton droit Figure 13. Pav tactile Touchpad Utilisation du pav Touchpad Le pav tactile Touchpad est intgr votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Ce dispositif permet de commander le dplacement du curseur et de slectionner des lments affichs lcran. Ce pav est compos dune commande de curseur sous le centre du clavier et de deux boutons juste en-dessous. Le bouton gauche fonctionne de la mme manire quun bouton gauche de souris tandis que le bouton droit a la mme fonction que le bouton droit dune souris. La fonction exacte des boutons peut varier selon lapplication utilise. 36 - Pav tactile/Numriseur actif Cliquer Cliquer signifie enfoncer et relcher un bouton. Pour cliquer gauche, placez le curseur sur llment que vous dsirez slectionner, puis enfoncez et relchez immdiatement le bouton gauche. Pour cliquer droite, placez le curseur sur llment que vous dsirez slectionner, puis enfoncez et relchez immdiatement le bouton droit. Vous pouvez galement cliquer en frappant une fois le pav Touchpad avec dlicatesse. Figure 15. Cliquer laide du pav TouchPad Figure 14. Cliquer laide du bouton Double-cliquer Double-cliquer signifie cliquer rapidement, deux fois de suite, avec le bouton gauche. Cette procdure ne fonctionne pas avec le bouton droit. Pour effectuer un double-clic, placez le pointeur sur lobjet voulu et appuyez rapidement deux fois sur le bouton gauche. Vous pouvez galement effectuer un double-clic en tapant deux fois lgrement sur le pav tactile. Figure 16. Faire un clic droit avec le bouton Figure 17. Double-cliquer laide du bouton Figure 18. Double-cliquer laide du pav Touchpad 37 - Pav tactile/Numriseur actif SI LINTERVALLE ENTRE LES DEUX CLICS EST TROP LONG, LE DOUBLE-CLIC NE SERA PAS EXCUT. LES PARAMTRES DU PAV TACTILE QUICK POINT PEUVENT TRE RGLS DANS LA BOTE DE DIALOGUE SOURIS DU PANNEAU DE CONFIGURATION WINDOWS. Glisser Glisser signifie enfoncer le bouton gauche, sans le relcher, en dplaant le curseur. Pour faire glisser un lment, placez dabord le curseur sur cet lment. Ensuite, enfoncez et tenez le bouton gauche tout en dplaant llment son nouvel emplacement, puis relchez. Vous pouvez galement glisser un lment avec le pav tactile Touchpad. Premirement, placez le curseur sur llment que vous dsirez dplacer et frappez lgrement le pav tactile Touchpad deux reprises en faisant attention de laisser le doigt sur le pav aprs la dernire frappe. Ensuite, glissez votre doigt sur le pav tactile jusqu ce que llment soit lemplacement dsir et retirez votre doigt. Figure 19. Glisser laide du bouton Figure 20. Glisser laide du pav Touchpad Rglage des commandes du pav TouchPad Le panneau de configuration Windows vous permet de personnaliser votre pav tactile TouchPad avec divers paramtres disponibles dans la bote de dialogue Proprits de la souris. Il y a trois aspects du fonctionnement du pav tactile que vous pouvez rgler:

38 - Pav tactile/Numriseur actif Boutons : Cet onglet vous permet de configurer les boutons pour une utilisation gaucher ou droitier, et de configurer lintervalle de temps permis entre deux clics lors des double-clics. Pointeurs: Cet onglet vous permet de paramtrer le rgime du curseur selon sa fonctionnalit. Options de Pointeur: Cet onglet vous permet de configurer une relation entre la vitesse de mouvement de votre doigt et la vitesse du curseur. Il vous permet aussi dactiver un sillage de pointeur pour la flche du curseur. cran de numriseur actif REMARQUE: Selon la configuration de votre systme, outre le numriseur actif, il est possible que vous ayez un pav tactile capacitif rpondant aux mouvements et aux pressions du doigt

(Cette configuration est appele numriseur double .) Pour obtenir davantage de renseignements sur lcran tactile, reportez-vous au Utilisation de lcran tactile capacitif en page 43. Le numriseur intgr vous permet dutiliser le stylet comme un pointeur. Vous pouvez utiliser le stylet pour cliquer, double-cliquer, cliquer droite, faire glisser des lments ou icnes ou pour dessiner et effacer comme avec un stylet ou un crayon dans des applications qui fonctionnent avec cette caractristique, notamment des programmes de dessin et de peinture. La moiti avant du manche fonctionne exactement comme un bouton droit de souris. La moiti arrire du manche et le commutateur deffacement lextrmit du stylet agissent comme des effaceurs. Si vous utilisez le bouton deffacement, assurez-vous de bien lenfoncer sur lcran pour activer la fonction deffacement. Figure 21. Utilisation de lcran numriseur actif 39 - Pav tactile/Numriseur actif Commutateur de clic droite Bouton deffacement Commutateur deffacement Point dattache du cordon du stylet Figure 22. Fonctionnalits du stylet LORSQUE VOUS TOUCHEZ LCRAN AVEC LE DOIGT ET LORSQUE VOUS CRIVEZ AVEC LE STYLET, NUTILISEZ PAS DE FORCE EXCESSIVE. DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LCRAN DEL ET/OU LCRAN TACTILE. POUR ACHETER DES STYLETS SUPPLMENTAIRES OU DE REMPLACEMENT, VISITEZ LE SITE INTERNET DES ACCESSOIRES DE FUJITSU :

WWW.SHOPFUJITSU.COM. Cliquer sur lcran numriseur actif Pour faire un clic gauche, touchez lobjet que vous voulez slectionner, puis soulevez immdiatement le bout du stylet (Figure 23). Faire un clic droit sur lcran numriseur Pour faire un clic droit, maintenez le bouton sur le devant du stylet enfonc en tapotant sur lcran (Figure 24). Pour dsactiver la fonction de clic droite, allez Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration -> Matriel et son -> Paramtres tactiles et du stylet. 40 - Pav tactile/Numriseur actif Figure 23. Cliquer sur lcran numriseur actif Figure 24. Faire un clic droit sur lcran numriseur Double-cliquer Pour double-cliquer, touchez llment deux fois, puis retirez immdiatement le bout du stylet (Figure 25). Figure 25. Faire un double clic sur lcran 41 - Pav tactile/Numriseur actif Glisser Glisser signifie dplacer un lment avec le stylet en touchant lcran, puis en dplaant et en soulevant le stylet. Pour glisser, touchez lcran tactile avec votre stylet sur llment que vous souhaitez dplacer. Tout en continuant de toucher lcran avec le stylet, glissez llment vers son nouvel emplacement en dplaant le stylet travers lcran, puis en soulevant le stylet pour le relcher (Figure 26). talonner lcran de numriseur actif Pour assurer une correspondance prcise entre le curseur et le stylet, vous devez excuter lUtilitaire dtalonnage de lcran tactile avant dutiliser lcran tactile pour la premire fois. Faites de mme si vous avez modifi la rsolution de lcran et/ou lorientation. Figure 26. Faire glisser un objet sur lcran LORS DU PREMIER TALONNAGE, LCRAN DE LORDINATEUR DOIT TRE EN POSITION HORIZONTALE (PAYSAGE). LA POSITION NA PLUS DIMPORTANCE POUR LES TALONNAGES SUIVANTS (PAYSAGE OU PORTRAIT). LE PREMIER TALONNAGE UTILISE 16 POINTS DE MESURE; LES TALONNAGES SUIVANTS NEN UTILISENT QUE 4. Pour excuter lutilitaire dtalonnage:

1 Allez Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration. 2 Cliquez sur Priphriques et sons, puis slectionnez Paramtres PC tablette. 3 Sous longlet Affichage, cliquez sur le bouton [talonner]. (Remarque: Si vous avez un cran tactile capacitif optionnel, vous devez cliquer sur Entre stylet ou sur Entre tactile, selon la mthode que vous dsirez talonner.) 4 Rglez lcran de votre portable un angle confortable, puis reprez le symbole (+) dans le coin suprieur gauche de lcran. 42 - Pav tactile/Numriseur actif LORSQUE VOUS TAPOTEZ SUR LCRAN PENDANT LTALONNAGE, NUTILISEZ PAS DE FORCE EXCESSIVE. DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LCRAN DEL ET/OU LCRAN TACTILE. 5 Selon que vous procdiez ltalonnage de lentre stylet ou de lentre tactile, touchez fermement lcran avec le stylet ou votre doigt, directement sur le symbole (+). Soulevez le stylet ou votre doigt de lcran et la cible se dplacera vers une position diffrente sur lcran. 6 Rptez ltape 4 jusqu ce que vous ayez slectionn tous les symboles (+). 7 Une fois cette opration termine, appuyez sur le bouton [OK]. 8 Avec le stylet ou votre doigt, touchez plusieurs points de lcran pour vrifier quil est bien talonn. Si vous ntes pas satisfait de ltalonnage de lcran, appuyez sur le bouton [talonner] pour recommencer. Utilisation de lcran tactile capacitif Ce PC Tablette comporte un numriseur double optionnel permettant dutiliser le stylet ou un(des) doigt(s) comme pointeur. Ce type dcran permet galement dutiliser des mouvements pour excuter diverses oprations, notamment pour dfiler, zoomer et pivoter. LA RECONNAISSANCE DES MOUVEMENTS EST ACTIVE SUIVANT LAPPLICATION UTILISE. LE STYLET EST PRIORITAIRE PAR RAPPORT LA COMMUNICATION TACTILE. SI LE STYLET SE TROUVE DANS LE RAYON DACTION DE LCRAN, LA COMMUNICATION TACTILE EST DSACTIVE. LORSQUE LUTILISATEUR POSE UN DOIGT SUR LCRAN TACTILE, CE DERNIER RAGIT COMME SI LE STYLET TAIT UTILIS. Faire un clic droit sur lcran tactile Pour excuter un clic droit avec deux doigts, placez un doigt lendroit o vous dsirez excuter le clic droit, puis tapotez rapidement une fois sur lcran. 43 - Pav tactile/Numriseur actif Mode mouvements Pour activer le mode mouvements, deux doigts doivent toucher lcran avec un intervalle de moins de 200 ms. Si le deuxime doigt touche lcran plus de 200 ms aprs le premier doigt, le deuxime doigt est ignor. Si plus de deux doigts touchent lcran pendant cet instant, cest plutt le mode mouvements avanc qui est activ. Lorsque le mode mouvements est activ, aucun mouvement de curseur nest envoy au systme. Lorsque les deux doigts quittent lcran tactile, le mode mouvements est dsactiv. Lorsquun troisime doigt est ajout, le mode mouvements normal est dsactiv au profit du mode mouvements avanc. Si le systme ne reconnat pas un mouvement, aucune opration nest excute. Dans ce cas, retirez les deux doigts de lcran et essayez de nouveau. Mouvement de dfilement Pour faire dfiler un long document ou une page Web, placez deux doigts sur lcran (un premier doigt rapidement suivi du deuxime). Si au moins un des doigts se dplace dau moins 3 mm, un dfilement est produit. Si les deux doigts se dplacent dans la mme direction de faon parallle (avec une tolrance de 5 mm), le mode dfilement est activ. Si un doigt demeure immobile, aucun dfilement nest produit. Si un des deux doigts est lev, le mode dfilement est dsactiv. Mouvement de zoom Le mouvement de zoom est particulirement utile pour voir des images. Pour faire un zoom avant, placez deux doigts sur llment que vous dsirez agrandir (posez un premier doigt rapidement suivi du deuxime), puis cartez-les lun de lautre. Si au moins un des doigts se dplace dau moins 10 mm, un zoom est produit. Si la distance entre les doigts change de 10 mm ou plus et que les deux doigts sont demeurs peu prs aligns, le mode zoom est activ. Si un des deux doigts scarte de plus de 10 mm de la ligne de zoom cre lors du contact initial des doigts, le mode zoom est dsactiv. Pour faire un zoom arrire, placez deux doigts sur llment que vous dsirez rduire (posez un premier doigt rapidement suivi du deuxime), puis dplacez-les lun vers lautre. Mouvement de rotation Si vous dsirez faire pivoter un objet sur lcran, placez deux doigts sur limage que vous dsirez faire pivoter (posez un premier doigt rapidement suivi du deuxime), puis dplacez-les en sens contraire, comme pour tourner une poigne. La direction du pivotement de lobjet dpend de la direction du mouvement des doigts. 44 - Pav tactile/Numriseur actif Si au moins un des doigts se dplace dau moins 12 mm, une rotation est produite. Si un doigt demeure immobile

(se dplaant de moins de 5 mm dans nimporte quelle direction) et que lautre est dplac, une rotation est produite. Si les doigts commencent se dplacer dans la mme direction, la rotation est annule. Si la distance entre les doigts change de plus de 10 mm, la rotation est annule. Installation du cordon de stylet Pour viter dchapper ou de perdre votre stylo, attachez-le votre ordinateur laide du cordon fourni. Pour attacher le cordon votre PC Tablette, suivez les tapes suivantes:

1 Attachez lextrmit du cordon (petite boucle) votre stylet. Pour ce faire, enfilez la petite boucle travers le trou du stylet, puis faites passer lautre extrmit du cordon travers la boucle. 2 Attachez la grande boucle du cordon au point dattache de votre ordinateur. Pour ce faire, enfilez le bout du cordon

(grande boucle) travers le point dattache, puis faites passer le stylo travers la grande boucle. Figure 27. Installation du cordon 45 - Pav tactile/Numriseur actif Rglage du volume Votre PC Tablette Fujitsu LIFEBOOK est dot de plusieurs commandes de volume fonctionnant en interaction. LES APPLICATIONS POUVANT REPRODUIRE DES FICHIERS AUDIO PROPOSENT GALEMENT LEUR PROPRE COMMANDE DE VOLUME (COMMANDE LOGICIELLE). SI VOUS INSTALLEZ UN PRIPHRIQUE AUDIO EXTERNE DOT DUNE COMMANDE DE VOLUME INDPENDANTE, LA COMMANDE DE VOLUME DE LAPPAREIL ET LA COMMANDE DE VOLUME LOGICIELLE FONCTIONNERONT EN INTERACTION. VOUS DEVEZ TOUTEFOIS SAVOIR QUE SI VOUS COUPEZ LE VOLUME AVEC LA COMMANDE LOGICIELLE, LA COMMANDE DE VOLUME EXTERNE SERA GALEMENT DSACTIVE. Rglage du volume Le volume peut tre rgl de plusieurs manires:

Vous pouvez aussi ajuster et couper/remettre le volume avec licne de volume dans la zone de notification. Pour rgler le volume, utilisez les touches [Augm. volume] ou [Dimin. volume] sur le clavier. Le volume peut galement tre rgl avec les touches de fonction [F8] et [F9]. Si vous appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F8] tout en maintenant la touche [Fn] enfonce, vous rduirez le volume sonore de votre systme. Si vous appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F9] tout en maintenant la touche [Fn] enfonce, vous augmenterez le volume sonore de votre PC Tablette. Pour rgler le volume, vous pouvez ouvrir le panneau de configuration et slectionner le Centre de mobilit Windows. Ensuite, dans la zone Volume , vous pourrez rgler le volume ou passer en sourdine. Gardez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez sur la touche [F3] pour couper le son. Pour rtablir le son, appuyez de nouveau sur [Fn+F3]. Le volume peut aussi tre rgl avec les commandes de volume proposes par diverses applications. Certains priphriques audio pouvant tre connects votre systme sont dots de commandes de volume. Chaque commande de volume ci-dessus impose une limite suprieure sappliquant aux autres commandes. Nous vous recommandons dessayer les diffrentes commandes pour dcouvrir le rglage vous convenant le mieux. 46 - Rglage du volume Baie modulaire Figure 28. Baie modulaire Priphriques de baie modulaire Votre PC Tablette Fujitsu LIFEBOOK est dot dune baie modulaire. La baie modulaire permet dinsrer un lecteur optique, une batterie au lithium ou un volet rducteur de poids. Lun des priphriques indiqus ci-dessous sera install dans la baie modulaire. Graveur de DVD multiformat double couche: Ce lecteur vous permet de lire des films, des logiciels et des DVD/CD audio, ainsi que denregistrer des DVD, des CD et des DVD-RAM. Lecteur modulaire Blu-ray RW. Ce lecteur permet de lire et graver des disques Blu-ray. Batterie au lithium modulaire: cette batterie rechargeable peut tre utilise pour alimenter votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK lorsque aucun adaptateur ny est connect. Volet rducteur de poids: Ce volet permet de remplir la baie lorsque vous ny insrez aucun priphrique. LA BAIE MODULAIRE NE DOIT JAMAIS TRE VIDE LORSQUE LORDINATEUR EST EN MARCHE. SI VOUS LA LAISSEZ VIDE, DE LA POUSSIRE ET DES CORPS TRANGERS PEUVENT SINFILTRER DANS LORDINATEUR. Retrait et installation de priphriques modulaires La baie modulaire permet dinstaller et retirer des priphriques de deux faons:

Installation hors tension: installation ou remplacement dun priphrique lorsque votre PC Tablette est teint. Installation sous tension: installation ou remplacement dun priphrique lorsque le systme fonctionne, grce licne Dconnecter/jecter en toute scurit de votre zone de notification. 47 - Priphriques de baie modulaire Remplacement hors tension Pour remplacer froid un priphrique modulaire dans la baie modulaire, procdez comme suit:

1 Fermez les fichiers ouverts et teignez votre ordinateur. 2 Tirez sur le loquet de dgagement du compartiment multifonction. Le priphrique install sort lgrement, vous permettant de le saisir. 3 Retirez compltement le priphrique de la baie. Vous devrez utiliser une force lgre. 4 Insrez le priphrique que vous dsirez installer dans lordinateur jusqu ce quil senclenche. 5 Vous pouvez maintenant rallumer votre ordinateur en toute scurit. 6 Vous pourrez ensuite accder au priphrique et lutiliser normalement. Votre PC Tablette dtectera automatiquement le nouveau priphrique et lactivera lors du dmarrage de votre systme. Une lettre de dsignation du priphrique sera attribue et visible dans le Poste de travail et lExplorateur Windows. Remplacement sous tension Pour remplacer un priphrique chaud, employez lutilitaire Dconnecter ou jecter un priphrique en toute scurit. Licne de cet utilitaire est disponible dans la zone de notification. Cliquez sur licne et suivez les instructions saffichant lcran. 48 - Priphriques de baie modulaire Loquet douverture du compartiment multifonctions Figure 29. Retrait/installation dun priphrique modulaire Dispositif modulaire du compartiment multifonctions Bouton Windows Bouton d'alimentation

(illustr titre de rfrence uniquement). Figure 30. Boutons Scurit/PC Tablette du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK T902 Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Le PC tablette LIFEBOOK T902 est dot dune fonctionnalit unique : le panneau de boutons Scurit et PC tablette, avec un bouton Windows indpendant. Ces boutons vous permettent de protger votre ordinateur contre toute utilisation non autorise et de lancer des applications et actions spcifique au simple toucher dun bouton. Fonctions des boutons de scurit Si le systme de scurit est activ au dmarrage de votre PC Tablette ou partir du mode Veille prolonge ou Hors tension, vous devrez entrer un mot de passe laide des boutons de scurit. Une fois le mot de passe valide entr, le systme reprend son fonctionnement. Cinq boutons de scurit/application tablette sont situs sur le ct infrieur droit de lcran lorsquil est configur pour une utilisation en ordinateur portable classique. Les cinq boutons sont utiliss pour lactivation des fonctions de scurit. Quatre des boutons sont utiliss pour entrer un mot de passe et le cinquime lest en tant que bouton dEntre. Pour plus dinformations sur chacun des boutons Scurit, consultez Table 3. 49 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Icne de bouton tat du systme Fonction du tableau de scurit Pr-dmarrage ou reprise partir du mode Veille Bouton de scurit 1 Bouton de scurit 2 Bouton de scurit 3 Bouton de scurit 4 Bouton de scurit [Entre]

Table 3. Fonctions des boutons de scurit 50 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Fonctions des boutons post-identification Les six boutons peuvent tre utiliss aprs louverture de session. Pour plus dinformations sur les fonctions de post-identification, consultez Table 3. Icne de bouton tat du systme Fonctions PC Tablette Post-dmarrage (bureau Windows affich) Le bouton Windows a deux fonctions :

Action principale : ouvre le menu Dmarrer bouton [Windows] + bouton [Alimentation]:

ouvre le gestionnaire des tches Ctrl+Alt+Suppr Diminution du volume Augmentation du volume dsactive et ractive la rotation automatique ouvre lutilitaire de menu Fujitsu ouvre lapplication Journal Windows Table 3. Fonctions des boutons PC Tablette pendant la post-identification Bouton Windows En postconnexion, le bouton Windows sert activer deux fonctions. Lorsque vous appuyez uniquement sur ce bouton, il ouvre le menu Dmarrer. Lorsque vous appuyez sur ce bouton en mme temps que sur le bouton dalimentation, il ouvre le gestionnaire des tches [Ctrl] + [Alt] + [Suppr]. 51 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Boutons Dim. volume/Augm. volume Ces boutons servent augmenter ou diminuer le volume. Blocage de la rotation La fonction de blocage de rotation sert dsactiver ou ractiver la rotation automatique. Lorsque lordinateur est en configuration tablette et si la fonction de rotation automatique est ractive, lcran tourne automatiquement ds que lordinateur est tourn. Lorsque la rotation automatique est dsactive, lcran reste en position quels que soient les mouvements de lordinateur. Bouton A Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton A aprs connexion, lutilitaire de menu Fujitsu saffiche. Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton A, le voyant de batterie indique la capacit restante de la batterie (Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24.); il steint automatiquement cinq secondes aprs que vous avez relch le bouton. Bouton B Lorsque vous appuyez sur le bouton B aprs connexion, le Journal Windows saffiche. Modification des fonctions des boutons PC Tablette Les boutons Applications A et B peuvent tre changs pour lancer un programme ou effectuer une tche que vous choisissez. Par dfaut, le bouton Application A lance la Calculatrice et le bouton Application B, le Journal MS. Pour lancer diffrentes applications ou amener les boutons Applications A et B effectuer une tche spcifique:

1 Dans le Panneau de configuration, double-cliquez sur licne Paramtres des boutons tablette 2 Slectionnez longlet Boutons tablette et, dans la liste, cliquez sur le bouton que vous souhaitez modifier. 3 Cliquez sur [Changer] et ouvrez la liste droulante dans le champ Appuyer. 4 Slectionnez laction que vous voulez voir le bouton effectuer. Si vous voulez lancer un programme, cliquez sur Dmarrer un programme, puis naviguez vers lemplacement du programme. 5 Cliquez sur [OK], puis cliquez nouveau sur [OK]. Les boutons effectueront maintenant les actions que vous leur avez assignes. 52 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Configuration du tableau de scurit LIFEBOOK Lorsque vous recevez votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK, lapplication du tableau de scurit est prinstalle, mais sans aucun mot de passe dfini. Les rubriques suivantes dcrivent en dtail le tableau de scurit et la faon de configurer, de changer ou de supprimer des mots de passe. Boutons numrots Utilisez ces boutons pour saisir votre mot de passe. Bouton Entre Aprs avoir entr les codes numrots, appuyez sur ce bouton pour enregistrer le mot de passe dans le PC Tablette. Mots de passe Des mots de passe dutilisateur et de superviseur peuvent tre dfinis sur lordinateur. Afin de faciliter la gestion des systmes, le mot de passe de superviseur est habituellement le mme sur tous les PC Tablette dun groupe de travail, dun bureau ou dune entreprise. Toutefois, les ordinateurs individuels utiliss dans un environnement de groupe ne devraient pas utiliser un mot de passe commun. Un mot de passe se compose de une cinq frappes de bouton, suivies du bouton Entrer. Une frappe valide peut faire intervenir un seul bouton ou jusqu quatre boutons simultanment. Voici des exemples de frappes valides:

Bouton [4] enfonc seul Boutons [2] et [3] enfoncs en mme temps Boutons [1], [2] et [4] enfoncs en mme temps Boutons [1], [2], [3] et [4] enfoncs en mme temps Voici maintenant des mots de passe valides. Les codes entre accolades ({ }) font intervenir plus dun bouton.

{[2]+[3]}, [1], [Entre]

[4], [Entre]

{[1]+[3]}, {[2]+[3]+[4]}, [1], [4], [2], [Entre]

53 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Dfinir des mots de passe Lorsque lordinateur est expdi de lusine, aucun mot de passe nest dfini. Vous avez le choix de le laisser tel quel ou de dfinir un mot de passe de superviseur et dutilisateur. Vous devez dfinir le mot de passe de superviseur avant celui de lutilisateur. LE MOT DE PASSE DU SUPERVISEUR PERMET DE CONTOURNER LE MOT DE PASSE DUTILISATEUR AU CAS O CE DERNIER SERAIT OUBLI. UTILIS SEUL, LE MOT DE PASSE DE SUPERVISEUR NE VERROUILLE PAS LE SYSTME. LES DEUX MOTS DE PASSE (SUPERVISEUR ET UTILISATEUR) DOIVENT TRE DFINIS POUR QUE LE TABLEAU DE SCURIT FONCTIONNE. Dfinition du mot de passe de superviseur Vous devez dtenir un mot de passe de superviseur avant de paramtrer tout mot de passe dutilisateur. Le mot de passe de superviseur permet de contourner le mot de passe dutilisateur. 1 Allez au menu Dmarrer. 2 Cliquez sur Excuter. 3 Entrez: C:\Program Files\Fujitsu\Security Panel Application\Supervisor\FJSECS.EXE, puis appuyez sur [Entre]

4 Suivez les instructions affiches lcran pour dfinir le mot de passe de superviseur. Dfinition du mot de passe dutilisateur 1 Allez au menu Dmarrer. 2 Cliquez sur Tous les programmes. 3 Cliquez sur Application Tableau de scurit et dapplications -> Application Tableau de scurit. 4 Suivez les instructions qui saffichent pour dfinir le mot de passe dutilisateur. VOUS POUVEZ CHANGER OU SUPPRIMER LE MOT DE PASSE DE SUPERVISEUR OU DUTILISATEUR EN RPTANT LES TAPES PRCDENTES. 54 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Utilisation de votre tableau de scurit LIFEBOOK La fonction de verrouillage de scurit est active la mise sous tension du systme, de mme qu sa reprise depuis le mode veille prolonge. Il faut toujours utiliser les boutons du tableau de scurit pour entrer le mot de passe dutilisateur. Votre systme nentamera la squence damorage quaprs lentre du mot de passe de superviseur ou dutilisateur. Lorsque le systme est hors tension 1 Mettez le systme sous tension. 2 Lorsque le voyant de scurit clignote, entrez le mot de passe puis appuyez sur le bouton [Entre] (par exemple:

si le mot de passe est 22222, appuyez dabord cinq fois sur le bouton 2, puis sur le bouton [Entre]. Le PC Tablette dmarrera normalement. Lorsque le systme est en veille prolonge 1 Appuyez sur la glissire veille/reprise. 2 Lorsque le voyant de scurit clignote, entrez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur le bouton [Entre];

lordinateur doit alors reprendre son fonctionnement normal. Entre dun mot de passe incorrect Aprs trois checs successifs de saisie dun mot de passe de superviseur ou dutilisateur, le systme met des bips pendant environ une minute. Si le mot de passe entr durant cet intervalle (pendant les bips) est valide, le signal sonore sarrte et le PC Tablette reprend son fonctionnement normal. Si aucun mot de passe nest saisi, ou si un mot de passe incorrect est nouveau saisi, le systme retourne son tat prcdent (hors tension) et le voyant de scurit steint. Pour ractiver le portable aprs un chec de la saisie du mot de passe, vous devez appuyer sur la glissire veille/reprise, puis saisir un mot de passe valide. NOUBLIEZ PAS LE MOT DE PASSE DUTILISATEUR DFINI DANS LAPPLICATION TABLEAU DE SCURIT. SINON, VOUS NE POURREZ PLUS UTILISER LORDINATEUR. LE MOT DE PASSE DE SUPERVISEUR PERMET TOUTEFOIS DE CONTOURNER LE MOT DE PASSE DUTILISATEUR. Mises en garde Ouverture et fermeture du couvercle de lcran Pour changer la procdure excute par le systme lorsque le couvercle est ferm :

55 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK 1 Ouvrez le Panneau de configuration. Si laffichage est en vue Catgorie, cliquez sur lun des choix dicne dans Affichage par: Cliquez sur Options dalimentation. 2 Dans le panneau de gauche, cliquez sur Choisir ce que fait la fermeture du couvercle. 3 Sous Lorsque je ferme le couvercle, slectionnez laction souhaite puis cliquez sur le bouton [Sauvegarder les modifications]. Fonctionnement avec une batterie faible Si la batterie de votre PC Tablette est faible, le fait denfoncer la glissire veille/reprise active simplement le voyant de scurit. Votre portable ne se dverrouille pas et le voyant de scurit steint aprs une minute. Pour revenir au fonctionnement normal, branchez dabord une source dalimentation lordinateur. Vous pouvez alors le dverrouiller. Dsinstallation/rinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit Deux mthodes peuvent tre utilises pour dsinstaller lapplication Tableau de scurit:

Supprimez les mots de passe et dsinstaller lapplication. Cette mthode dsactive toutes les fonctions de scurit. Dsinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit avec le mot de passe toujours actif. Si cette option est choisie, plus aucune modification du mot de passe ne sera possible. Dsinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit Cette opration est utile lorsque lutilisateur ne veut aucune protection par mot de passe et ne veut donner personne lutilitaire de dfinition de mot de passe sur son ordinateur. Dans ce cas, si des mots de passe (superviseur, utilisateur ou les deux) sont dfinis, les mots de passe doivent tre effacs AVANT de supprimer lapplication. Pour effacer les mots de passe, suivez la mme procdure qu la section DFINITION DES MOTS DE PASSE, mais slectionnez cette fois loption SUPPRIMER; ensuite, entrez le mot de passe actuel, puis cliquez sur le bouton Suivant. Rpondez [Oui]

la demande de confirmation. 56 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Suppression de lapplication Tableau de scurit avec des mots de passe encore actifs Lutilisation de cette fonction ne permettra aucune modification du mot de passe. LA SUPPRESSION DE LAPPLICATION NE SUPPRIME PAS LE MOT DE PASSE. LA DSINSTALLATION DE LAPPLICATION NE SUPPRIME PAS LE MOT DE PASSE, MAIS SIMPLEMENT LA CAPACIT DE MODIFIER, DAJOUTER ET DE SUPPRIMER DES MOTS DE PASSE. POUR CHANGER VOTRE MOT DE PASSE, VOUS DEVREZ RINSTALLER LAPPLICATION. Utilisateur:

1 Allez Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration. 2 Dans le panneau de configuration, ouvrez Programmes et fonctions. 3 Dans la liste, slectionnez Tableau de scurit / Utilisateur, puis cliquez sur Dsinstaller/Modifier. 4 Lorsque la bote Contrle du compte utilisateur apparat, cliquez sur Continuer. Superviseur:

1 Allez Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration. 2 Dans le Panneau de configuration, cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des proprits de programme. 3 Dans la liste, slectionnez Tableau de scurit / Superviseur, puis cliquez sur Dsinstaller/Modifier. 4 Lorsque la bote Contrle du compte utilisateur apparat, cliquez sur Continuer. Rinstallation du tableau de scurit Pour rinstaller le Tableau de scurit pour superviseur et utilisateur, vous devez utiliser lutilitaire de gestion des tlchargements (FSDM) de Fujitsu. Cet utilitaire vous permet de tlcharger les derniers pilotes, utilitaires et applications du site de soutien Fujitsu. Pour y accder, rendez-vous sur le site de soutien en ligne

<http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS>tal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS. Le logiciel du Tableau de scurit et dapplications se compose de deux progiciels : Tableau de scurit et dapplications/superviseur et Tableau de scurit et dapplications/utilisateur. 1 Allez sur le site dassistance et tlchargez les deux progiciels sur votre ordinateur. 57 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK 2 Double-cliquez sur setupS.exe dans le dossier du progiciel Tableau de scurit et dapplications/superviseur. La fentre dinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit saffiche. Suivez les directives fournies lcran. 3 Double-cliquez sur setup.exe dans le dossier du progiciel Tableau de scurit et dapplications/utilisateur. La fentre dinstallation de lapplication Tableau de scurit saffiche. Suivez les directives fournies lcran. 58 - Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK Chapitre 2 Premire mise en marche de votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK Sources dalimentation Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu peut utiliser quatre sources dalimentation diffrentes: une batterie au lithium principale, une batterie secondaire de baie modulaire, un adaptateur secteur et un adaptateur auto/avion. Connexion des adaptateurs dalimentation Ladaptateur secteur et ladaptateur auto/avion disponible en option permettent tous deux de faire fonctionner votre PC Tablette et de charger les batteries. Connexion de ladaptateur secteur 1 Branchez le cble de sortie c.c. dans la prise dalimentation c.c. de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. 2 Branchez ladaptateur secteur sur une prise lectrique secteur (c.a.). Connexion de ladaptateur auto/avion disponible en option 1 Branchez le cble de sortie c.c. sur la prise dalimentation c.c. de votre ordinateur. 2 Branchez ladaptateur auto/avion dans lallume-cigare dune automobile, ou 3 Branchez ladaptateur auto/avion sur la prise dalimentation c.c. de votre sige davion. 59 Prise dalimentation c.c. Adaptateur secteur Figure 31. Connexion de ladaptateur secteur Passer dune alimentation sur adaptateur secteur ou auto/avion une alimentation sur batterie 1 Assurez-vous quau moins une batterie charge est installe dans votre ordinateur. 2 Dbranchez ladaptateur secteur ou ladaptateur auto/avion. LORSQUE VOUS RECEVEZ VOTRE NOUVEL ORDINATEUR, LA BATTERIE AU LITHIUM NEST PAS CHARGE. LORS DE LA PREMIRE UTILISATION DE VOTRE ORDINATEUR, VOUS DEVEZ CONNECTER LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR OU LADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION. 60 - Sources dalimentation Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Mise sous tension Glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise Lorsque votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK est teint, la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise permet de lallumer. Pour allumer votre ordinateur, vous devez avoir connect votre adaptateur secteur ou disposer dune batterie au lithium charge. LORSQUE VOUS ALLUMEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR PORTABLE, ASSUREZ-VOUS DAVOIR UNE SOURCE DALIMENTATION. VOUS DEVEZ DONC AVOIR AU MOINS UNE BATTERIE INSTALLE ET CHARGE OU AVOIR BRANCH LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR OU LADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION UNE PRISE SOUS TENSION. Pour allumer lordinateur LIFEBOOK lorsquil est compltement teint, appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise situ en haut droite du clavier. Lorsque vous avez termin dutiliser votre ordinateur, vous pouvez soit le mettre en mode veille (sommeil), soit lteindre compltement. Voir Mode veille en page 66 et Mise hors tension en page 68 Glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise Figure 32. Dmarrer le PC Tablette LORSQUE LE LIFEBOOK EST ALLUM, NE LE TRANSPORTEZ PAS ET PROTGEZ-LE DES CHOCS ET DES VIBRATIONS CAR VOUS RISQUERIEZ ALORS DE LENDOMMAGER. 61 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Lorsque vous allumez votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK, ce dernier excute un auto-test de mise sous tension pour vrifier les composants internes et la configuration. Si une anomalie est dcouverte, votre systme met un avertissement audio et/ou affiche un message derreur. Voir Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 100. Selon la nature du problme, vous pourrez poursuivre le dmarrage du systme dexploitation ou vous devrez ouvrir lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS pour corriger certains paramtres. Une fois les diagnostics termins, le PC Tablette charge le systme dexploitation. VOUS NE DEVEZ JAMAIS TEINDRE VOTRE ORDINATEUR PORTABLE DURANT LAUTO-TEST DE MISE SOUS TENSION. AUTREMENT, LA PROCHAINE FOIS QUE VOUS ALLUMEREZ LORDINATEUR, CE DERNIER AFFICHERA UN MESSAGE DERREUR. Voir Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 100. Procdure damorage La procdure de dmarrage du PC Tablette invoque une procdure damorage qui fait dabord appel au BIOS. La premire fois que lordinateur LIFEBOOK est allum, la mmoire principale du systme est vide et doit trouver les instructions de dmarrage de lordinateur. Ces informations se trouvent dans le programme BIOS. Chaque fois que vous dmarrez ou redmarrez votre PC Tablette, il excute une procdure damorage et lcran affiche le logo Fujitsu jusqu ce que le systme dexploitation soit charg. Durant lamorage, votre systme excute une procdure damorage standard y compris un auto-test de mise sous tension. Si la procdure damorage est excute sans chec et sans demande daccs lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS, le message de bienvenue du systme dexploitation saffiche. La procdure damorage est excute lorsque :

Vous allumez votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Vous redmarrez le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK partir de la bote de dialogue darrt de Windows. Un logiciel dclenche un redmarrage du systme (par exemple, lorsque vous installez une nouvelle application). 62 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Mots de passe daccs au disque dur Pour mieux scuriser vos donnes, vous pouvez crer des mots de passe contrlant laccs au(x) disque(s) dur(s). Cette fonction est gre par lutilitaire de configuration BIOS. Pour savoir comment procder, reportez-vous la section Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS ci-aprs. RETENEZ BIEN VOS MOTS DE PASSE. SI VOUS CONFIGUREZ DES MOTS DE PASSE DE MATRE ET DUTILISATEUR, PUIS QUE VOUS LES OUBLIEZ, FUJITSU AMERICA NE POURRA PAS RINITIALISER VOTRE SYSTME. VOUS RISQUERIEZ ALORS DE PERDRE DES DONNES ET DE DEVOIR REMPLACER VOTRE CARTE SYSTME OU VOTRE DISQUE DUR. Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS Lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS dfinit lenvironnement de fonctionnement de votre PC Tablette. Votre BIOS a t configur en usine pour des conditions dutilisation normales. Vous ne devriez donc pas avoir configurer ni modifier votre environnement BIOS pour utiliser lordinateur. Lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS permet galement de paramtrer des proprits telles que la scurit des donnes systme ou les mots de passe. Entre dans lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS Pour ouvrir lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS, excutez les oprations suivantes :

1 Allumez ou redmarrez votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. 2 Pour accder lutilitaire, appuyez sur la touche [F2] lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat lcran. Le menu principal de lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS saffichera avec les paramtres courants. Avec la touche flche droite ou gauche, parcourez les autres menus de configuration et vrifiez/modifiez les paramtres actuels. Guide dinformation sur le BIOS Un guide sur le BIOS du PC Tablette est accessible en ligne sur le site Internet de support et dassistance de Fujitsu, ladresse:

http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php. Une fois sur le site, slectionnez Users Guides

(Guides dutilisation) sous Online Support (Assistance en ligne). Slectionnez votre produit, sa srie et son modle, puis cliquez sur [Go]. 63 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK SI VOS PARAMTRES DE SCURIT DE DONNES LEXIGENT, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE VOUS DEVIEZ SAISIR UN MOT DE PASSE AVANT DOUVRIR LE MENU PRINCIPAL DU BIOS. Amorage du systme Il est fortement recommand de ne pas installer de priphrique externe et de ne pas insrer de DVD/CD dans votre lecteur tant que la procdure de dmarrage nest pas entirement termine. La premire fois que vous allumez votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK, lcran affiche le logo Fujitsu. Si vous nintervenez pas, lordinateur charge le systme dexploitation et lance la procdure douverture Windows. Premier dmarrage de Windows La premire fois que vous faites dmarrer le systme et que vous suivez les instructions lcran, vous voyez apparatre une fentre de bienvenue. Aprs laffichage de la fentre de bienvenue, lcran se vide compltement pendant plusieurs minutes. Cela est normal. DURANT CETTE PRIODE, VOUS NE DEVEZ PAS TENTER DTEINDRE LE SYSTME. Pendant que lcran est vide, le systme se configure et plusieurs fichiers importants sont installs. Lors du premier dmarrage, vous devrez lire et accepter les contrats de licence dutilisation de Microsoft et Fujitsu. SI VOUS REFUSEZ DACCEPTER LE CONTRAT DE LICENCE, LE SYSTME VOUS DEMANDE DE REVOIR LE CONTRAT DE LICENCE ET DY LIRE LES INFORMATIONS TRAITANT DU RETOUR DE WINDOWS SON FABRICANT, OU DE SIMPLEMENT TEINDRE LE PC TABLETTE. VOUS NE POURREZ LUTILISER QUE SI VOUS ACCEPTEZ LE CONTRAT DE LICENCE. SI VOUS NALLEZ PAS AU BOUT DE CETTE PROCDURE, VOTRE PC TABLETTE RETOURNE LCRAN DE BIENVENUE WINDOWS, MME SI VOUS ESSAYEZ DE LTEINDRE ET DE LE REDMARRER. Plusieurs autres fentres safficheront, vous demandant de saisir un nom et une description pour votre ordinateur, ainsi quun mot de passe dadministrateur et un nom de domaine. Lisez attentivement les instructions saffichant lcran et remplissez les espaces mesure que le systme vous le demande. 64 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Installer des applications en prime Aprs le premier dmarrage de votre systme, une icne Applications en prime saffiche sur votre bureau Windows. Cliquez sur cette icne et vous verrez une liste dapplications supplmentaires pouvant tre installes. Les applications dj installes sont affiches en gris et celles que vous pouvez installer sont affiches en bleu. Pour slectionner une application que vous dsirez installer, cochez la case de choix ct de lapplication ou cliquez sur [Slectionner tout] si vous dsirez installer toutes les applications disponibles. Lorsque vous avez fait vos choix, cliquez sur [Installer]. Veuillez prendre note que dans certains cas (selon les applications slectionnes), il est possible que vous deviez redmarrer le systme aprs linstallation des applications. Si vous demandez linstallation de plusieurs applications et que lune delles ncessite un redmarrage du systme, le redmarrage est excut immdiatement et les applications restantes sont ensuite installes. Enregistrement de votre LIFEBOOK chez Fujitsu Pour enregistrer votre PC Tablette, vous pouvez aller sur notre site Internet:

https://store.shopfujitsu.com/fpc/Ecommerce/Service.jsp. Pour vous enregistrer en ligne, vous devez avoir un compte valide auprs dun fournisseur daccs Internet. 65 - Dmarrage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Gestion de lalimentation Votre PC Tablette Fujitsu LIFEBOOK possde plusieurs dispositifs permettant dconomiser lnergie des batteries. Certains dentre eux sont automatiques et ne ncessitent donc aucune intervention. Cependant, dautres dpendent de paramtres que vous pouvez configurer en fonction de vos conditions dutilisation, notamment en ce qui concerne la luminosit de lcran. Les paramtres de gestion interne de lalimentation de votre PC Tablette peuvent tre configurs dans votre systme dexploitation, dans une application intgre de gestion de lalimentation ou dans lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS. Outre les dispositifs prcdents de conservation de lnergie de la batterie, dautres moyens sont votre disposition pour viter lpuisement trop rapide de votre batterie. Par exemple, vous pouvez crer un profil de conservation de lnergie appropri, mettre votre ordinateur en mode sommeil lorsquil nexcute aucune opration et vous pouvez limiter lutilisation des priphriques consommant beaucoup dnergie. linstar de tous les ordinateurs portables aliments par batterie, vous devez trouver le meilleur compromis entre performance et rendement nergtique. Glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise Lorsque votre PC Tablette est allum, vous pouvez utiliser la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise pour placer manuellement votre systme en mode veille. Assurez-vous alors que le PC Tablette nest pas en train daccder des donnes, puis enfoncez et relchez immdiatement la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. Pour rveiller lordinateur lorsquil est en mode sommeil, appuyez de nouveau sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/

reprise. Pour savoir si lordinateur est en mode veille, regardez le voyant lumineux dalimentation. Si le voyant est allum sans clignoter, lordinateur est entirement fonctionnel. Si le voyant est allum et quil clignote, lordinateur est en mode sommeil. Si le voyant est teint, lordinateur est teint ou en veille prolonge. Mode veille Lorsque le mode sommeil est activ, Windows conserve le contenu de votre mmoire de systme durant la priode dinactivit en maintenant lalimentation de certains composants critiques. Ce mode teint lunit centrale, lcran, le disque dur et tous les autres composants internes sauf ceux qui sont ncessaires pour conserver la mmoire du systme et permettre son redmarrage. Votre PC Tablette peut tre mis en sommeil de plusieurs faons :

En appuyant sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise (si lordinateur est allum). En slectionnant Sommeil aprs avoir cliqu sur le bouton [Dmarrer] puis en cliquant sur la petite flche situe en bas droite de la fentre. Lorsque le dlai dinactivit est atteint. En laissant la charge de la batterie descendre au niveau Avertissement de batterie faible. 66 - Gestion de lalimentation Dans ces situations, la mmoire de systme du PC Tablette enregistre gnralement le fichier sur lequel vous travaillez, des informations sur les applications ouvertes et dautres donnes ncessaires aux oprations en cours. Lorsque vous quittez le mode veille, le PC Tablette retourne ltat o vous lavez laiss. Pour reprendre lutilisation du PC Tablette, vous devez employer la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise et vous devez disposer dune source dalimentation valide. SI LE PC TABLETTE UTILISE LALIMENTATION PAR BATTERIE, NOUBLIEZ PAS QUE LA BATTERIE CONTINUE SE DCHARGER MME EN MODE VEILLE, MAIS PLUS LENTEMENT QUEN MODE DE FONCTIONNEMENT NORMAL. SI VOUS DSACTIVEZ LA GLISSIRE DALIMENTATION/VEILLE/REPRISE, VOUS NE POURREZ PLUS LUTILISER POUR METTRE LORDINATEUR EN MODE SOMMEIL OU EN VEILLE PROLONGE (ENREGISTREMENT SUR LE DISQUE). LA FONCTION DE REPRISE DU BOUTON NE PEUT PAS TRE DSACTIVE. SI VOTRE PC TABLETTE ACCDE ACTIVEMENT DES INFORMATIONS AU MOMENT O VOUS LE METTEZ EN MODE SOMMEIL OU EN MODE VEILLE PROLONGE, LES MODIFICATIONS AUX FICHIERS OUVERTS NE SERONT PAS PERDUES. LORSQUE VOUS ACTIVEZ LE MODE SOMMEIL, LES FICHIERS SONT LAISSS OUVERTS ET LA MMOIRE DEMEURE ACTIVE. SI VOUS CHOISISSEZ LE MODE VEILLE PROLONGE, LA MMOIRE EST TRANSFRE SUR LE DISQUE DUR INTERNE. LE PRINCIPAL AVANTAGE DU MODE VEILLE PROLONGE EST QUAUCUNE NERGIE NEST NCESSAIRE POUR CONSERVER VOS DONNES. CET AVANTAGE EST PARTICULIREMENT IMPORTANT SI VOUS COMPTEZ LAISSER VOTRE PC TABLETTE EN VEILLE PENDANT DE LONGUES PRIODES. LES PRINCIPAUX INCONVNIENTS DE LA VEILLE PROLONGE SONT UNE PLUS LONGUE DURE DES PROCDURES DE MISE EN VEILLE ET DE REPRISE, AINSI QUE LA RINITIALISATION DES PRIPHRIQUES. Mode veille prolonge (enregistrement sur le disque) Le mode de veille prolonge enregistre le contenu de la mmoire du systme sur le disque dur du PC Tablette dans le cadre du mode veille/reprise. Cette fonction peut tre active et dsactive. Activation et dsactivation de la fonction de veille prolonge Dans la configuration par dfaut, cette fonction nest pas active. Pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction de veille prolonge, excutez les oprations suivantes:

1 Dans le menu Dmarrer, ouvrez le panneau de configuration et cliquez sur licne Options dalimentation. 2 Puis slectionnez Choisir ce que fait le bouton dalimentation ou Choisir ce que fait la fermeture du couvercle, puis faites votre slection (Ne rien faire, Sommeil, Veille prolonge ou Arrter). Gestion de lalimentation dans Windows Licne des options dalimentation disponible dans le Panneau de configuration Windows vous permet de configurer certains paramtres de gestion de lalimentation. Par exemple, vous pouvez utiliser les Options dalimentation pour rgler les valeurs de temporisation (dlai dinactivit) afin dteindre lcran et les disques durs selon que lordinateur est aliment par batterie ou par lun des adaptateurs. 67 - Gestion de lalimentation Redmarrage du systme Si votre systme est allum et que vous dsirez le redmarrer, vous devez excuter les oprations suivantes :

1 Cliquez sur le bouton [Dmarrer], puis positionnez le curseur sur la petite flche situe en bas droite du panneau de droite. 2 Dans la liste, slectionnez Redmarrer. SI VOUS ARRTEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR SANS FERMER WINDOWS OU SI VOUS LALLUMEZ MOINS DE 10 SECONDES APRS LAVOIR ARRT, VOUS RISQUEZ DE PROVOQUER UNE ERREUR LORS DU PROCHAIN DMARRAGE DU SYSTME. Mise hors tension Avant de mettre lordinateur hors tension, assurez-vous que le voyant daccs au disque dur/lecteur optique est teint. Si vous arrtez lordinateur alors quun disque est en cours dutilisation, vous risquez de perdre des donnes. Pour vous assurer que lordinateur sarrte sans erreur, utilisez la procdure darrt Windows. AVANT DE COUPER LALIMENTATION LECTRIQUE, NOUBLIEZ PAS DE FERMER TOUS LES FICHIERS, DE QUITTER TOUTES LES APPLICATIONS ET DARRTER VOTRE SYSTME DEXPLOITATION. SI DES FICHIERS SONT OUVERTS LORSQUE VOUS COUPEZ LALIMENTATION, VOUS PERDREZ TOUTES LES MODIFICATIONS NAYANT PAS T ENREGISTRES ET VOUS RISQUEZ DE CAUSER DES ERREURS DE DISQUE. Si vous arrtez votre systme depuis Windows, vous permettez au PC Tablette de terminer les oprations en cours, vous lui permettez aussi dexcuter les oprations de mise hors tension dans le bon ordre et vous vitez les risques derreur. La procdure approprie est la suivante :

1 Cliquez sur le bouton [Dmarrer], puis positionnez le curseur sur la petite flche situe en bas droite du panneau de droite. 2 Dans la liste, slectionnez Arrter. Si vous comptez entreposer votre PC Tablette pendant un mois ou plus, consultez la section Entretien. 68 - Gestion de lalimentation Conformit ENERGY STAR Votre systme Fujitsu est un ordinateur mobile homologu par ENERGY STAR. En choisissant un ordinateur dot de la dernire technologie dconomie de lnergie, vous contribuez prserver notre environnement pour les gnrations futures. Le programme ENERGY STAR a t mis en place conjointement par lU.S. Environmental Protection Agency

(Agence de protection de lenvironnement amricaine), lU.S. Department of Energy (Dpartement de lnergie amricain), Ressources naturelles Canada, ainsi que dautres gouvernements dans le monde. Grce aux pratiques et aux produits co-efficients que ce programme prconise, il est possible de faire des conomies et de protger lenvironnement. Dans un contexte o les cots nergtiques et le rchauffement climatique sont parmi les premires proccupations des consommateurs, Fujitsu sengage proposer des solutions pour les aider prserver lnergie et amliorer la qualit de notre environnement. Mode veille (sommeil) :

Vous remarquerez que daprs la configuration initiale de votre ordinateur, lcran steint aprs 15 minutes dinactivit, et que lordinateur lui-mme entre en mode sommeil aprs 20 minutes dinactivit. Lorsque lordinateur entre en mode sommeil, il rduit la vitesse de fonctionnement de toute linterface de rseau Ethernet. Pour rveiller lordinateur et le faire sortir du mode sommeil, appuyez sur le bouton de veille/reprise. Avantages lis lconomie dnergie:

Les ordinateurs portables Fujitsu homologus par ENERGY STAR utilisent environ deux fois moins dlectricit quun matriel standard, ce qui permet de diviser la facture dlectricit par deux. Mais ce nest pas tout, en effet, ENERGY STAR fait galement la diffrence en termes de protection de lenvironnement. Saviez-vous quun mnage moyen peut mettre deux fois plus de gaz effet de serre quune voiture ordinaire ? Cela sexplique ainsi: lorsque vous manipulez linterrupteur dune lampe, que vous faites marcher votre lave-vaisselle ou que vous mettez en route votre PC, vous utilisez de lnergie, et cela entrane un surcrot dmissions de gaz effet de serre par les centrales lectriques. Donc, plus nous conomisons lnergie grce lco-efficience, plus nous contribuons diminuer les gaz effet de serre et les risques de rchauffement climatique. Pour de plus amples informations sur cet important programme ENERGY STAR, visitez : www.energystar.gov. Pour en apprendre plus sur la faon dont Fujitsu soutient la Gestion durable et dautres activits de protection de lenvironnement, visitez la page Internet de Fujitsu Corporate Citizenship :

http://www.computers.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/aboutus/environmental/environment.php 69 - Gestion de lalimentation Chapitre 3 Options installables par lutilisateur Batterie au lithium Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK possde une batterie au lithium qui lui permet de fonctionner lorsque vous navez pas accs une source dalimentation externe. Cette batterie est robuste et durable, mais elle ne doit pas tre expose des tempratures extrmes, des tensions leves, des produits chimiques ou dautres situations dangereuses. Si la batterie au lithium est utilise dans les conditions suivantes, son autonomie peut en tre rduite :

Utilise des tempratures en de de 5C ou au-del de 35C (41F 95F). Les tempratures extrmes ne diminuent pas seulement lefficacit du chargement, elles risquent galement de provoquer la dtrioration de la batterie. Si vous tentez de charger une batterie sous une temprature ambiante dpassant les seuils de tolrance, vous voyez clignoter licne de charge en cours sur le tableau de voyants dtat. Lorsque vous vous servez dun dispositif courant lev tel quun modem, un lecteur optique externe ou un disque dur, lutilisation de ladaptateur secteur vous permettra de conserver la dure de vie de la batterie. NE LAISSEZ JAMAIS UNE BATTERIE DFECTUEUSE DANS VOTRE PC TABLETTE. ELLE POURRAIT ENDOMMAGER LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR, LADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION DISPONIBLE EN OPTION, LA DEUXIME BATTERIE SI VOUS EN POSSDEZ UNE OU LORDINATEUR LUI-MME. UNE BATTERIE ENDOMMAGE PEUT GALEMENT NUIRE AU FONCTIONNEMENT DU PC TABLETTE EN UTILISANT TOUT LE COURANT DISPONIBLE. 70 LAUTONOMIE RELLE DE LA BATTERIE PEUT VARIER SELON LA LUMINOSIT DE LCRAN, SELON LES APPLICATIONS, LES FONCTIONS ET LES PARAMTRES DE GESTION DE LALIMENTATION QUE VOUS UTILISEZ, SELON LTAT DE LA BATTERIE ET SELON DAUTRES PRFRENCES QUE VOUS POUVEZ CONFIGURER. LUTILISATION DU LECTEUR OPTIQUE OU DU DISQUE DUR PEUT GALEMENT AVOIR UN IMPACT SIGNIFICATIF SUR LA DURE DE VIE DE LA BATTERIE. EN OUTRE, LA CAPACIT DE CHARGE DE LA BATTERIE DIMINUE AVEC LUSAGE. SI VOTRE BATTERIE PERD RAPIDEMENT SA CHARGE, REMPLACEZ-LA PAR UNE NEUVE. IL EST POSSIBLE QUE DES LOIS FDRALES, PROVINCIALES OU LOCALES INTERDISENT DE JETER DES BATTERIES DANS LES DCHETS DOMESTIQUES. CONTRIBUEZ LA PROTECTION DE LENVIRONNEMENT ET JETEZ VOS BATTERIES USES CONFORMMENT AUX LOIS EN VIGUEUR. POUR OBTENIR DES INFORMATIONS SUR LE RECYCLAGE ET LA MISE AUX REBUTS DES VIEILLES BATTERIES, CONSULTEZ LES AUTORITS LOCALES OU PROVINCIALES COMPTENTES. SI VOUS NARRIVEZ PAS TROUVER CES INFORMATIONS, CONTACTEZ UN PRPOS DU SERVICE LA CLIENTLE AU 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487). Recharge des batteries Pour connatre le niveau de charge de votre batterie au lithium principale, vrifiez le voyant de batterie dans le tableau de voyants dtat. Ce voyant change selon le niveau de charge de la batterie. La batterie au lithium peut tre recharge avec ladaptateur secteur ou avec ladaptateur auto/avion. Pour recharger une batterie, assurez-vous quelle est bien installe dans le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK et connectez ladaptateur secteur ou ladaptateur auto/avion. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE LE VOYANT DE BATTERIE EN CHARGE SUR LE TABLEAU DE VOYANTS DTAT INDIQUE BIEN LE NIVEAU DE CHARGE EN COURS. Puisque les batteries au lithium nont aucun effet de mmoire, il nest pas ncessaire de dcharger compltement votre batterie avant de la recharger. La dure de charge sera nettement plus longue si vous utilisez le PC Tablette pendant que la batterie se charge. Si vous dsirez charger la batterie le plus rapidement possible, placez votre ordinateur en mode sommeil ou teignez-le pendant que la batterie se charge. (Pour de plus amples informations sur le mode veille et la procdure darrt, reportez-vous Gestion de lalimentation en page 66). 71 - Batterie au lithium SI VOUS UTILISEZ DES PRIPHRIQUES FORTE CONSOMMATION DNERGIE OU SI VOUS ACCDEZ FRQUEMMENT AU LECTEUR OPTIQUE EXTERNE, LA BATTERIE RISQUE DE NE PAS SE CHARGER COMPLTEMENT. Batterie faible Lorsque la batterie est faible, le systme affiche un avis de batterie faible. Si vous ne prtez pas attention cet avis de batterie faible, la batterie continuera se dcharger jusqu ce quelle ne puisse plus faire fonctionner le systme. Lorsque cela se produit, le PC Tablette se place en mode sommeil. Dans un tel cas, rien ne garantit que toutes vos donnes seront sauvegardes. LORSQUE LAVIS DE BATTERIE FAIBLE APPARAT, VOUS DEVEZ ENREGISTRER TOUTES VOS DONNES ACTIVES ET PLACER VOTRE ORDINATEUR LIFEBOOK EN MODE SOMMEIL JUSQU CE QUE VOUS PUISSIEZ DISPOSER DUNE AUTRE SOURCE DALIMENTATION. VOUS DEVEZ CONNECTER LE PLUS RAPIDEMENT POSSIBLE UNE BATTERIE CHARGE, UN ADAPTATEUR SECTEUR OU UN ADAPTATEUR AUTO/AVION. LORSQUE LORDINATEUR EST EN MODE SOMMEIL, IL DOIT TOUJOURS DISPOSER DUNE BONNE SOURCE DALIMENTATION. SI VOUS RETIREZ TOUTES LES SOURCES DALIMENTATION ALORS QUE LORDINATEUR EST EN MODE SOMMEIL, TOUTES LES DONNES NAYANT PAS T SAUVEGARDES SONT PERDUES. Si lordinateur se place en mode veille car batterie puise, le voyant dtat apparat comme si lordinateur tait en mode sommeil normal. Lorsque le PC Tablette est en mode Veille de batterie puise, il est impossible den reprendre lutilisation avant davoir connect une source dalimentation valide provenant dun adaptateur ou dune batterie charge. Lorsque vous avez connect une alimentation valide, vous devez ensuite appuyer sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise pour reprendre lutilisation de lordinateur. Lorsque lordinateur est en mode veille de batterie puise, vos donnes peuvent tre sauvegardes pendant une certaine priode, mais si vous ne connectez pas rapidement une source dalimentation valide, le voyant dalimentation cesse de clignoter et steint. Vous avez alors perdu toutes les donnes nayant pas t enregistres. Ds que vous fournissez une source dalimentation, vous pouvez poursuivre lutilisation du PC Tablette pendant que la batterie se recharge. Batteries court-circuites Le tableau de voyants dtat comprend un voyant de charge indiquant le niveau de charge disponible de la batterie. Si ce voyant affiche une DEL rouge clignotante, cela signifie que la batterie est endommage: elle doit donc tre remplace pour viter quelle ne nuise dautres composants de votre ordinateur. 72 - Batterie au lithium Remplacement de la batterie Si vous achetez une batterie supplmentaire de rechange, vous pourrez remplacer la batterie principale si elle vient se dcharger compltement. Deux mthodes soffrent vous pour remplacer votre batterie : le remplacement hors tension et le remplacement sous tension. Remplacement hors tension de la batterie Pour remplacer la batterie alors que le systme est hors tension, excutez les oprations suivantes :

1 Trouvez une batterie charge, prte linstallation. 2 Arrtez lordinateur et dbranchez ladaptateur secteur. 3 Retournez votre systme lenvers et orientez-le comme indiqu la Figure 33. 4 Tout en poussant le verrou de batterie vers la batterie, glissez le loquet douverture de la batterie vers la droite, puis sortez la batterie de son compartiment (voir la figure 34). 5 Insrez une nouvelle batterie et appuyez jusqu ce que vous sentiez lenclenchement des loquets. 6 Branchez ladaptateur secteur et allumez lordinateur. Remplacement sous tension de la batterie Pour remplacer la batterie alors que le systme est sous tension, excutez les oprations suivantes :

AVANT DENLEVER LA BATTERIE, ASSUREZ-VOUS QUE LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR EST BIEN CONNECT. LORDINATEUR NE DISPOSE DAUCUNE BATTERIE TEMPORAIRE POUR FAIRE FONCTIONNER LE SYSTME DURANT LE REMPLACEMENT DE LA BATTERIE. SI VOUS NUTILISEZ PAS LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR, VOUS PERDREZ TOUTES LES DONNES NON ENREGISTRES. 1 Branchez ladaptateur secteur sur votre ordinateur, puis sur une prise lectrique sous tension. 2 Suivez les tapes 3 5 de la section Remplacement hors tension. SI LE CONNECTEUR DE LA BATTERIE AU LITHIUM NEST PAS BIEN ENFONC, VOUS RISQUEZ DE NE PAS POUVOIR UTILISER LORDINATEUR OU RECHARGER LA BATTERIE. 73 - Batterie au lithium s Verrou de la batterie Batterie Loquet de dgagement de la batterie Figure 33. Dverrouillage de la batterie Figure 34. Retrait dune batterie 74 - Batterie au lithium Carte SD Figure 35. Installation dune carte SD Cartes Secure Digital Votre PC tablette LIFEBOOK peut accueillir des cartes Secure Digital (SD), Secure Digital High Capacity (SDHC) et Secure Digital eXtended Capacity (SDXC), sur lesquelles vous pouvez stocker et transfrer des donnes vers et partir de divers dispositifs numriques. Ces cartes utilisent une architecture de mmoire flash, ce qui veut dire que vous navez pas besoin dune source dnergie pour conserver les donnes. Les cartes Secure Digital (SD) sont des cartes de mmoire flash permettant lenregistrement, le transfert et le partage de contenus numriques, tels que photos, films, sons, voix, donnes et applications. Les cartes SD permettent un stockage mobile sur plusieurs types de dispositifs, tels que des tlphones cellulaires, des systmes de positionnement mondial, des appareils photo numriques et des assistants numriques personnels. Les cartes SD transfrent les donnes rapidement et sollicitent trs peu la batterie. Les cartes SD utilisent une architecture de mmoire flash. 75 - Cartes Secure Digital Installation dune carte SD Les cartes SD sont insres dans la fente pour carte SD . Pour installer une carte SD, excutez les oprations suivantes:

SI VOUS INSREZ OU RETIREZ UNE CARTE PC CARD PENDANT LE PROCESSUS DARRT OU DE DMARRAGE DE VOTRE PC TABLETTE, VOUS RISQUEZ DENDOMMAGER LA CARTE ET/OU VOTRE ORDINATEUR. NINSREZ PAS DE CARTE DANS LA FENTE SIL Y A DE LEAU OU TOUTE AUTRE SUBSTANCE SUR LA CARTE, CAR VOUS POURRIEZ ENDOMMAGER DE FAON PERMANENTE LA CARTE, VOTRE PC TABLETTE OU LES DEUX. 1 Le guide dutilisation de la carte mmoire vous indiquera comment linstaller. Certaines cartes pourraient ncessiter que votre ordinateur soit teint pendant que vous les insrez. 2 Avant dinsrer votre carte, assurez-vous quaucune autre carte nest dj installe dans la fente. Si cest le cas, consultez la rubrique Retirer une carte SD ci-dessous. 3 Enfoncez la carte dans la fente, tiquette vers le haut. 4 Poussez fermement la carte dans la fente jusqu ce quelle soit loge dans le connecteur. Retirer une carte SD Pour retirer une carte SD, suivez ces tapes faciles:

LE GUIDE DUTILISATION DE LA CARTE MMOIRE VOUS INDIQUERA COMMENT LA RETIRER. CERTAINES CARTES POURRAIENT NCESSITER QUE VOTRE PC TABLETTE SOIT EN MODE SOMMEIL OU QUIL SOIT TEINT PENDANT QUE VOUS LES RETIREZ. 1 Dans la zone de notification, cliquez sur licne Retirer le priphrique en toute scurit. Dans la liste, mettez la carte en surbrillance, puis cliquez sur Stop. 2 Enfoncez la carte SD jusqu ce que vous sentiez un dclic de dverrouillage. La carte sjecte ensuite de la fente pour que vous puissiez la retirer. 76 - Cartes Secure Digital Module de mmoire additionnelle Votre PC Tablette Fujitsu LIFEBOOK est fourni avec une mmoire dynamique synchrone haute vitesse et double dbit binaire dau moins 2 Go (SDRAM DDR3-1600), installe en usine. Pour augmenter la capacit mmoire de votre PC Tablette, vous pouvez installer un module (barrette) dextension mmoire. La mmoire additionnelle doit tre un module SDRAM (DIMM) double range de connexions. Pour vous assurer davoir une compatibilit 100%, achetez le module SDRAM uniquement auprs de la boutique virtuelle Fujitsu, ladresse suivante : www.shopfujitsu.com. NENLEVEZ AUCUNE VIS DU COMPARTIMENT DU MODULE DE MMOIRE ADDITIONNELLE LEXCEPTION DE CELLES SPCIFIQUEMENT INDIQUES DANS LES DIRECTIVES DINSTALLATION ET DE RETRAIT CORRESPONDANTES. LE MODULE DE MMOIRE ADDITIONNELLE PEUT TRE FORTEMENT ENDOMMAG PAR UNE DCHARGE LECTROSTATIQUE (DES). POUR MINIMISER CE RISQUE, VEUILLEZ PRENDRE LES PRCAUTIONS SUIVANTES:

AVANT DE MANIPULER UN MODULE DE MMOIRE, TOUCHEZ UN OBJET MTALLIQUE MIS LA TERRE POUR DCHARGER LLECTRICIT STATIQUE QUI SEST ACCUMULE DANS VOTRE CORPS. LORSQUE VOUS INSTALLEZ OU RETIREZ UN MODULE DE MMOIRE, TENEZ-LE PAR LE BORD DE FAON NE TOUCHER AUCUN CONTACT NI AUCUNE PUCE. ASSUREZ-VOUS DE NE TOUCHER AUCUNE BORNE DE CONNEXION NI AUCUN COMPOSANT INTERNE DE LORDINATEUR. LA PEAU DGAGE UNE SUBSTANCE HUILEUSE QUI POURRAIT CAUSER UN COURT-CIRCUIT AUX COMPOSANTS. ASSUREZ-VOUS DE METTRE VOTRE SYSTME HORS TENSION AVANT DAJOUTER OU DE RETIRER DES MODULES DE MMOIRE. MME SI LE SYSTME EST EN SOMMEIL OU EN VEILLE PROLONGE, DES DONNES RISQUENT DTRE PERDUES ET LA MMOIRE POURRAIT TRE ENDOMMAGE SI LE COURANT QUI ALIMENTE LE SYSTME NEST PAS COUP. Installer un module de mmoire additionnelle 1 Coupez le courant de votre ordinateur et dbranchez ladaptateur dalimentation (adaptateur secteur ou adaptateur auto/avion), le cas chant. Retirez la batterie. 2 Assurez-vous que tous les couvercles du connecteur sont ferms. 3 Tournez lordinateur portable lenvers et retirez la vis du compartiment du module de mmoire additionnelle. 4 Soulevez et retirez le couvercle du compartiment de mmoire supplmentaire (Figure 36). 5 Retirez le module de mmoire additionnelle de sa gaine protectrice antistatique. 6 Alignez le module de mmoire additionnelle avec la pice vers le haut. Alignez le bord du connecteur du module de mmoire additionnelle avec la fente du connecteur dans le compartiment (Figure 37). 77 - Module de mmoire additionnelle Figure 36. Ouverture du compartiment de mmoire 7 Insrez le module de mmoire additionnelle en oblique, 45. Poussez fermement le bord du connecteur du module vers le bas et appuyez sur le connecteur jusqu ce quil se loge sous la cl de serrage. Vous entendrez un clic lorsque celui-ci sera bien en place. 8 Replacez le couvercle et les vis. LE MODULE DE MMOIRE ADDITIONNELLE NEST PAS UN LMENT QUE VOUS RETIREZ DE VOTRE ORDINATEUR DE FAON ROUTINIRE. APRS LINSTALLATION, VOUS POUVEZ LE LAISSER EN PLACE JUSQU CE QUE VOUS DCIDIEZ DE CHANGER LA CAPACIT DE MMOIRE DU SYSTME. Figure 37. Installer un module de mmoire 78 - Module de mmoire additionnelle Retirer un module de mmoire additionnelle 1 Excutez les tapes 1 4 de la section Installation dun module de mmoire additionnelle. 2 Tirez les attaches latrales en les orientant vers les cts pour les loigner du module. 3 En maintenant les ergots carts, retirez la barrette en la tirant vers lextrieur de lordinateur. 4 Rangez le module de mmoire additionnelle dans une gaine protectrice antistatique. 5 Replacez le couvercle et les vis. Figure 38. Retrait dun module de mmoire Vrification de la capacit de mmoire Lorsque vous avez chang la capacit de mmoire du systme en remplaant le module install par un module plus puissant, assurez-vous que votre ordinateur a reconnu le changement. Vrifiez la capacit de la mmoire en cliquant sur [Dmarrer] -> Paramtres -> Panneau de configuration, puis cliquez sur licne Systme. Cochez sur la case correspondant la capacit de mmoire ct de Mmoire installe (RAM):. SI LA MMOIRE TOTALE AFFICHE EST INCORRECTE, VRIFIEZ SI LE MODULE DE MMOIRE ADDITIONNELLE EST BIEN INSTALL. (SI LE MODULE EST BIEN INSTALL MAIS QUE LA CAPACIT NEST TOUJOURS PAS BIEN RECONNUE, CONSULTEZ LA SECTION DPANNAGE EN PAGE 89). 79 - Module de mmoire additionnelle Il peut y avoir un cart entre la capacit de mmoire installe et celle qui est affiche. Cette situation peut dcouler du fait que votre systme est configur avec un contrleur vido Intel Graphics Media Accelerator intgr qui alloue la mmoire systme de manire dynamique afin dacclrer les performances graphiques. SI LA MMOIRE TOTALE AFFICHE EST INCORRECTE, VRIFIEZ SI LE MODULE DE MMOIRE ADDITIONNELLE EST BIEN INSTALL. (SI LE MODULE EST BIEN INSTALL MAIS QUE LA CAPACIT NEST TOUJOURS PAS BIEN RECONNUE, CONSULTEZ LA SECTION DPANNAGE EN PAGE 89). 80 - Module de mmoire additionnelle Ports de priphriques Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu et le duplicateur de ports optionnel sont quips de plusieurs ports auxquels vous pouvez brancher des dispositifs externes tels que: lecteurs de disque, claviers, imprimantes, etc. Prise de rseau local (RJ-45) interne La prise interne de rseau local (RJ-45) est utilise pour une connexion Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-

Tx/1000Base-T). Il est possible que vous deviez configurer votre PC Tablette selon les particularits de votre rseau. (pour de plus amples informations sur la configuration de votre rseau, veuillez consulter votre administrateur de rseau). Pour brancher le cble de rseau local, excutez ces oprations simples:

1 Alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port. 2 Poussez la fiche de connexion dans le port jusqu ce quelle senclenche. 3 Branchez lautre extrmit du cble sur une prise de rseau local. Figure 39. Connexion un rseau local Connecteur de duplicateur de ports Ce connecteur permet de raccorder votre PC Tablette un duplicateur de ports en option. Pour savoir comment connecter votre PC Tablette ce priphrique, consultez les instructions disponibles sous Duplicateur de ports en page 85. 81 - Ports de priphriques Ports USB Les ports Universal Serial Bus 1 (USB) vous permettent de connecter divers priphriques USB tels que des tablettes de jeu externes, des dispositifs de pointage, des claviers et/ou des haut-parleurs. Votre PC Tablette possde quatre ports USB: deux ports USB 3.0 sur le ct gauche, dont un avec fonction de charge USB en tout temps (Voir Informations sur lutilitaire de charge USB en tout temps. en page 83), et deux ports USB 2.0 sur le ct droit et larrire. Pour connecter un dispositif dinterface parallle, excutez ces oprations :

1 Alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port. 2 Poussez la fiche de connexion dans le port jusqu ce quelle senclenche. Port USB 2.0 Figure 40. Connexion dun priphrique USB EN RAISON DES CHANGEMENTS CONTINUS APPORTS LA TECHNOLOGIE ET AUX NORMES USB, IL EST IMPOSSIBLE DE GARANTIR LA COMPATIBILIT DE TOUS LES DISPOSITIFS ET/OU LECTEURS USB. 82 - Ports de priphriques Informations sur lutilitaire de charge USB en tout temps

. La fonction de charge USB en tout temps peut tre active et dsactive partir de lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS. Par dfaut, cette fonction est active. Vous pouvez modifier les paramtres de la fonction Anytime USB Charge via le menu Dmarrer > Tous les programmes > Utilitaire du chargeur USB Anytime, et en cliquant sur Paramtres. Trois positions de rglage sont disponibles avec cette fonction : Dsactiver la fonction de charge USB en tout temps , Activer la fonction de charge USB en tout temps uniquement avec ladaptateur secteur connect et Activer la fonction de charge USB en tout temps avec ladaptateur secteur ou la batterie . Veuillez prendre note que si ce rglage est choisi, la batterie risque de se vider de toute sa charge si ladaptateur secteur nest pas connect. Il est possible que certains priphriques USB ncessitent linstallation dun pilote pour garantir le bon fonctionnement de cette fonction. Veuillez consulter la documentation accompagnant votre priphrique USB pour correctement le charger laide de lUtilitaire du chargeur USB Anytime. Prise dcouteurs La prise dcouteurs permet de connecter votre PC Tablette des couteurs ou des haut-parleurs externes amplifis. Vos couteurs ou haut-parleurs doivent tre munis dune mini-prise stro de 3,5 mm (1/8 po). Pour connecter des couteurs ou des haut-parleurs, excutez ces oprations simples :

1 Alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port, puis pousser le connecteur lintrieur jusqu ce quil sy enclenche correctement. Prise de micro La prise de micro permet de connecter un microphone stro externe. Votre microphone doit tre muni dune mini-fiche de connexion de 1/8 po (3,5 mm) pour quil puisse tre branch sur la prise microphone de votre PC Tablette. Pour connecter un microphone, excutez ces oprations simples :

1 Alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port, puis pousser le connecteur lintrieur jusqu ce quil sy enclenche correctement. 83 - Ports de priphriques Port HDMI. Le port HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface, ou Interface multimdia haute dfinition) est une interface numrique audio/vido permettant de faire transiter des flux de donnes non compresses. Le HDMI sert brancher des priphriques numriques compatibles avec votre ordinateur (un tlviseur grand cran et des appareils vido, par exemple). Pour brancher un priphrique HDMI:

1 Alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port. 2 Poussez la fiche de connexion dans le port jusqu ce quelle senclenche. Port vido externe Le port vido externe permet de connecter un moniteur externe ou un projecteur ACL. Pour connecter un priphrique vido externe, effectuez ces oprations simples:

1 Alignez le connecteur avec louverture du port. 2 Poussez la fiche de connexion dans le port jusqu ce quelle senclenche. 3 Serrez les deux vis de fixation situes de chaque ct du connecteur. Figure 41. Branchement dun priphrique HDMI Figure 42. Branchement dun priphrique vido externe LORSQUE VOUS APPUYEZ SUR LES TOUCHES [FN] + [F10], VOUS POUVEZ CHANGER LEMPLACEMENT DE LAFFICHAGE VIDO. CHAQUE FOIS QUE VOUS APPUYEZ SUR LA COMBINAISON DE TOUCHES, VOUS PASSEREZ AU CHOIX SUIVANT, EN COMMENANT PAR LCRAN INTGR SEULEMENT, PUIS AU MONITEUR EXTERNE SEULEMENT, PUIS AUX DEUX, LCRAN INTGR ET LE MONITEUR EXTERNE. 84 - Ports de priphriques Duplicateur de ports Le duplicateur de ports augmente la fonctionnalit de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK en ajoutant des ports de connexion pour un moniteur VGA externe, un cble de rseau local (RJ-45) quatre priphriques USB 3.0, un priphrique DVI, un priphrique DisplayPort, des couteurs et une alimentation c.c. Le duplicateur de ports se connecte sur le dessous de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports Bouton dalimentation Bouton de verrouillage/

dverrouillage de la barre mobile Ports USB 3.0 (Qt: 4) Prise dalimentation c.c. Port DVI-D Port DisplayPort Port VGA externe Fente dantivol Prise dcouteurs Prise de rseau (RJ-45) Figure 43. Duplicateur de ports - Arrire 85 - Duplicateur de ports Composants du duplicateur de ports Voici une courte description des composants se trouvant larrire du duplicateur de ports. (Figure 43) Bouton dalimentation Le bouton dalimentation permet de mettre en marche et darrter le duplicateur de ports. Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports Ce connecteur permet de brancher le duplicateur de ports en option sur votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. LE SYSTME CONTIENT DES COMPOSANTS POUVANT TRE FORTEMENT ENDOMMAGS PAR UNE DCHARGE LECTROSTATIQUE (DES). POUR MINIMISER CE RISQUE, VEUILLEZ PRENDRE LES PRCAUTIONS SUIVANTES:

AVANT DE CONNECTER OU DE DCONNECTER VOTRE ORDINATEUR PORTABLE LIFEBOOK (LORSQUE VOUS UTILISEZ UN DUPLICATEUR DE PORTS), IL VOUS EST RECOMMAND DE TOUCHER UN OBJET MTALLIQUE MIS LA TERRE AFIN DE DCHARGER LLECTRICIT STATIQUE QUI SEST ACCUMULE DANS VOTRE CORPS. ASSUREZ-VOUS DE METTRE VOTRE SYSTME HORS TENSION AVANT DAJOUTER OU DE RETIRER DES COMPOSANTS DU SYSTME. MME SI LE SYSTME EST EN TAT DE SOMMEIL OU DE VEILLE PROLONGE, DES DONNES POURRAIENT TRE PERDUES ET LA MMOIRE ENDOMMAGE SI LE COURANT QUI ALIMENTE LE SYSTME NEST PAS COUP. Port DVI-D Le port DVI-D permet de connecter des priphriques daffichage numriques avec laide dun cble DVI-D, notamment un cran plat ou un projecteur numrique. Le port DVI-D sert principalement connecter un ordinateur un systme de cinma maison. Port DisplayPort Ce port permet de connecter des priphriques daffichage numriques compatibles avec la technologie DisplayPort, avec laide dun cble DisplayPort, notamment un cran plat ou un projecteur numrique. MME SI LE DUPLICATEUR DE PORTS OFFRE UNE PRISE EN CHARGE DISPLAYPORT ET DVI-D, VOUS NE POUVEZ UTILISER QUUNE SEULE DE CES TECHNOLOGIES LA FOIS. UN COMMUTATEUR INTERNE IDENTIFIE LE TYPE DE PRIPHRIQUE CONNECT. SI DES PRIPHRIQUES UTILISANT LES DEUX TECHNOLOGIES SONT CONNECTS SIMULTANMENT, LE PRIPHRIQUE DISPLAYPORT SERA PRIORITAIRE. IL EST CEPENDANT POSSIBLE DUTILISER UN PRIPHRIQUE DISPLAYPORT OU DVI-D EN MME TEMPS QUUN PRIPHRIQUE VIDO EXTERNE CONNECT AU PORT VGA EXTERNE ANALOGIQUE. LA TECHNOLOGIE HOT PLUG NEST PAS PRISE EN CHARGE PAR LES PORTS DISPLAYPORT ET DVI-D. SI VOUS CONNECTEZ UN CONVERTISSEUR DISPLAYPORT-HDMI AU PORT DISPLAYPORT, AUCUN SON NE SORTIRA DU PRIPHRIQUE HDMI. POUR UTILISER SANS PROBLME UN PRIPHRIQUE HDMI, BRANCHEZ-LE SUR LE PORT HDMI SITU SUR LE CT GAUCHE DU SYSTME. 86 - Duplicateur de ports Ports USB 3.0 (Qt: 4) Les ports USB 3.0 vous permettent de connecter des priphriques USB. Les ports USB 3.0 sont rtrocompatibles avec les priphriques USB 2.0 et 1.1. Bouton de verrouillage/dverrouillage de la barre mobile Le bouton de verrouillage/dverrouillage de la barre mobile permet de rgler la position de la barre mobile afin que votre systme soit bien align avec le connecteur du duplicateur de ports. Lorsque vous regardez le duplicateur de ports depuis l'avant, la barre mobile doit tre dplace le plus possible vers le ct gauche du duplicateur de ports. Port VGA externe Le port VGA externe permet de connecter un moniteur externe ou un projecteur. Veuillez prendre note que si un duplicateur de ports est install, vous devez utiliser le port VGA externe du duplicateur de ports, pas celui de lordinateur. Prise dcouteurs La prise dcouteurs permet dcouter en stro le son manant de votre PC Tablette, grce des couteurs. Prise de rseau local (RJ-45) La prise de rseau local vous permet de connecter un cble de rseau local au duplicateur de ports. Veuillez prendre note que si un duplicateur de ports est install, vous devez utiliser la prise de rseau local du duplicateur de ports, pas celle de lordinateur. Fente dantivol La fente de dispositif antivol vous permet dinstaller un dispositif antivol disponible en option. Prise dalimentation c.c. La prise dalimentation c.c. sert brancher ladaptateur secteur, lequel permet dalimenter le PC Tablette et de charger la batterie interne au lithium. 87 - Duplicateur de ports Installation du duplicateur de ports Pour installer le duplicateur de ports, alignez le port de connexion du duplicateur de ports sous votre PC Tablette avec le connecteur sur le duplicateur de ports, puis enfoncez simultanment les coins. (Figure 44) Dsinstallation du duplicateur de ports Pour enlever le duplicateur de ports:

1 Pour sparer le duplicateur de ports de votre PC Tablette, tirez le loquet de sparation loppos du duplicateur de ports. (Figure 45) 2 Sparez le PC Tablette du duplicateur de ports. Le duplicateur est enlev. (Figure 46) Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports Figure 44. Installation du duplicateur de ports Loquet douverture Figure 45. Dconnexion du duplicateur de ports Figure 46. Retrait du systme 88 -

Chapitre 4 Dpannage de votre LIFEBOOK Dpannage Il est possible que vous rencontriez parfois des problmes simples de configuration ou dexploitation pouvant tre rsolus sur le champ, ou des problmes au niveau dun priphrique pouvant tre rsolus en remplaant lquipement. Les informations contenues dans cette section vous aideront isoler et rsoudre certains de ces problmes simples et identifier les pannes qui ncessitent une rparation. Identification du problme Si vous prouvez un problme, consultez la procdure suivante avant dentreprendre un processus de dpannage complexe:

1 Arrtez votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK. 2 Assurez-vous que ladaptateur secteur est connect votre ordinateur portable et une source dalimentation secteur active. 3 Assurez-vous que toute carte insre dans la fente pour carte PC Card est bien en place. Vous pouvez galement enlever la carte de la fente pour vous assurer quelle nest pas la raison de la panne. 4 Assurez-vous que tous les priphriques connects aux connecteurs externes sont bien branchs. Vous pouvez galement dconnecter ces priphriques pour vous assurer quils ne sont pas lorigine de la panne. 5 Allumez votre ordinateur portable. Assurez-vous quil soit rest hors fonction pendant 10 secondes au moins avant de le remettre en marche. 89 6 Laissez sexcuter la procdure damorage. 7 Si le problme na pas t rsolu, consultez le tableau suivant pour obtenir des renseignements plus dtaills concernant le dpannage. SI VOUS PRENEZ EN NOTE TOUT CE QUE VOUS ESSAYEZ, LE SERVICE DASSISTANCE POURRA VOUS AIDER PLUS RAPIDEMENT EN VOUS DONNANT DES SUGGESTIONS SUPPLMENTAIRES AU TLPHONE. 8 Si vous avez essay les solutions suggres par le tableau de dpannage sans succs, communiquez avec le service dassistance:

Appel sans frais : 1-800-8FUJITSU (1-800-838-5487) Site Web: http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/contact/index.php. Avant de nous contacter, veuillez avoir les informations suivantes porte de main pour que notre prpos du service la clientle puisse vous venir en aide le plus rapidement possible:

Nom du produit Numro de configuration du produit Numro de srie du produit Date dachat Conditions dans lesquelles le problme est survenu Texte des messages derreur reus Types de priphriques connects, si applicable Pour les numros de srie et de configuration, consultez ltiquette de configuration sur le dessous de votre ordinateur. 90 - Dpannage Problmes spcifiques Utilisation du tableau de dpannage Lorsque vous prouvez des problmes avec votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK, essayez de trouver les symptmes sous la colonne Problme du tableau suivant pour la fonction qui vous cause des problmes. Vous trouverez une description des causes communes pour ce symptme sous la colonne Cause possible; le cas chant, ce que vous pouvez faire pour corriger la situation se trouve sous la colonne Solutions possibles. Il est possible que certaines causes et solutions possibles ne sappliquent pas votre ordinateur. Tableau de dpannage Problme Problme Page Page Problmes audio . page 92 Problmes de priphrique USB . page 94 Problmes de lecteur optique . page 92 Problmes dalimentation lectrique . page 95 Problmes de duplicateur de ports . page 93 Problmes darrt et de dmarrage. page 97 Problmes de disque dur . page 93 Problmes vido . page 98 Problmes de clavier ou de souris. page 93 Problmes divers . page 99 Problmes de mmoire . page 94 91 - Dpannage Problme Problmes audio Aucun son ne sort du haut-parleur incorpor. Problmes de lecteur optique Le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK ne reconnat pas les DVD/CD-

RW/CD-ROM. Cause possible Solutions possibles Le volume est rgl un niveau trs bas. Rglez le volume de votre ordinateur et de votre systme dexploitation. Pour ce faire, utilisez la combinaison de touches [Fn+F9] sur votre clavier. Si vous appuyez plusieurs fois sur [F9] tout en maintenant la touche [Fn] enfonce, vous augmenterez le volume sonore de votre PC Tablette. Le volume logiciel est rgl un niveau trop bas. Le rglage manuel du volume avec les touches du clavier devrait changer dynamiquement le niveau de volume du systme dexploitation (voir ci-dessus). Si cela ne fonctionne pas, rglez les paramtres de volume dans lapplication utilise. Des couteurs sont branchs sur votre PC Tablette. Le branchement dcouteurs dsactive le haut-parleur incorpor. Retirez les couteurs. Le lecteur de logiciel nest pas bien configur. Les haut-parleurs ont t bloqus en utilisant licne Volume situe dans la zone de notification. Le pilote audio peut tre install ou rinstall laide du CD de pilotes et dapplications livr avec votre LIFEBOOK Fujitsu. Consultez la documentation de votre application et de votre systme dexploitation pour obtenir de laide. Cliquez sur licne Volume dans la zone de notification, en bas droite de lcran (elle ressemble un haut-parleur). Si la case Mute (Sourdine) est entoure dun cercle rouge, cliquez dessus pour la dselectionner. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser la combinaison de touches [Fn+F3] pour activer ou dsactiver le volume. Appuyez sur [F3] en enfonant la touche [Fn] pour activer ou dsactiver la fonction Silence (ou Muet). Le disque nest pas bien log dans le cercle surlev au centre du lecteur. Le tiroir du lecteur optique nest pas bien ferm. Un mauvais lecteur de DVD ou logiciel de lecteur a t install. Le DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM est sale ou dfectueux. Ouvrez le plateau du lecteur optique et rinstallez correctement le disque. Appuyez sur le devant du tiroir du lecteur optique jusqu ce que le verrou senclenche. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, dverrouillez et retirez le lecteur optique modulaire du compartiment multifonction, puis rinsrez-le jusqu ce quil senclenche. Cela permet de bien le brancher. Installez un logiciel de lecture de DVD. Essuyez le disque avec un chiffon de nettoyage doux, puis rinsrez-le. Sil ne fonctionne toujours pas, essayez un autre disque (DVD/CD-RW/CD-ROM) dans le lecteur. 92 - Dpannage Problme Le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK ne reconnat pas les DVD/CD-

RW/CD-ROM.

(suite) Cause possible Un mauvais identificateur dunit a t utilis pour le disque. Solutions possibles Vrifiez si lidentificateur dunit utilis par lapplication est le mme que celui utilis par le systme dexploitation. Lorsque le systme dexploitation dmarre partir dun DVD/CD, les identifications des lecteurs sont automatiquement ajustes. Veuillez noter que lidentification dun lecteur peut tre change avec loutil Gestion des disques situ dans Panneau de configuration -> Outils administratifs -> Gestion de lordinateur. Cela est normal. Toutefois, vous pouvez dsactiver cette fonction. La fonction Windows dinsertion automatique est active et vrifie si un disque est prt tre lu. Le voyant daccs au lecteur optique du tableau de voyants dtat clignote lorsque le lecteur ne contient pas de disque ou quil ny a pas de lecteur optique install. Problmes de duplicateur de ports Remarque: Assurez-vous darrter votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK avant dajouter une imprimante au port parallle du duplicateur de ports. Le PC Tablette ne fonctionne pas lorsquil est install sur le duplicateur de ports optionnel. Ladaptateur c.a. du duplicateur de ports nest pas branch. Lordinateur nest pas bien log dans le duplicateur de ports. Alimentez le duplicateur de ports. Retirez votre ordinateur et reconnectez-le. Problmes de disque dur Vous ne pouvez pas accder votre disque dur. Un mauvais identificateur dunit a t utilis par une application lorsquun disque damorage a t utilis pour dmarrer votre ordinateur. Les paramtres de scurit exigent un mot de passe pour le dmarrage du systme dexploitation. Assurez-vous que la lettre dunit utilise par lapplication est bien celle quutilise le systme dexploitation. Lorsque le systme dexploitation est dmarr partir dun CD, les identifications du lecteur sont ajustes automatiquement. Vrifiez votre mot de passe et vos paramtres de scurit. Problmes de clavier ou de souris Le clavier intgr ne semble pas fonctionner. Le PC Tablette est tomb en mode sommeil. Appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. 93 - Dpannage Problme Vous avez install un clavier ou une souris externe et il/elle ne semble pas fonctionner. Vous avez connect un clavier externe ou une souris et il/elle semble bloquer le systme. Problmes de mmoire Dans le panneau de configuration, lcran Systme nindique pas le montant correct de mmoire installe. Cause possible Votre application a verrouill votre clavier. Votre priphrique externe nest pas bien install. Votre systme dexploitation nutilise pas le bon pilote pour ce priphrique. Votre systme dexploitation nest pas configur avec le bon pilote pour ce priphrique. Solutions possibles Essayez dutiliser votre dispositif de pointage intgr pour redmarrer votre systme. Rinstallez votre priphrique. Voir Ports de priphriques en page 81. Consultez la documentation du priphrique et du systme dexploitation, puis installez le pilote appropri. Consultez la documentation du priphrique et du systme dexploitation, puis installez le pilote appropri. Votre systme sest plant. Essayez de redmarrer votre systme. Votre module daugmentation de mmoire nest pas bien install. Votre mmoire est dfaillante. Enlevez et rinstallez votre module de mmoire additionnelle. Voir Module de mmoire additionnelle en page 77. Vrifiez les messages de lauto-diagnostic de dmarrage (POST). Voir Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 100. Problmes de priphrique USB Votre ordinateur LIFEBOOK ne reconnat pas un priphrique USB install ou le priphrique ne fonctionne pas correctement. Votre priphrique nest pas bien install. Votre priphrique pourrait ne pas disposer du bon pilote de logiciel actif. Le priphrique a peut-tre t install pendant quune application tait en excution, par consquent votre systme ne reconnat pas son installation. Retirez et rinstallez votre priphrique. Voir Ports de priphriques en page 81. Consultez la documentation relative votre logiciel et activez le bon pilote. Fermez lapplication et redmarrez votre ordinateur portable. 94 - Dpannage Problme Problmes dalimentation Lorsque vous allumez votre PC Tablette, rien ne semble se produire. Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK steint tout seul. Cause possible Solutions possibles La batterie installe est compltement dcharge ou aucun adaptateur de courant nest install. La batterie est installe, mais elle est dfectueuse. La batterie est faible. Vrifiez le tableau de voyants dtat pour dterminer la prsence et ltat de la batterie. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24.Installez une batterie charge ou branchez un adaptateur dalimentation. Vrifiez le tableau de voyants dtat pour dterminer la prsence et ltat de la batterie. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. Si le voyant indique que la batterie est endommage (court-circuite), retirez-la et passez une autre source dalimentation, ou remplacez-la. Vrifiez le tableau de voyants dtat pour dterminer la prsence et ltat de la batterie. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. Utilisez un adaptateur dalimentation en attendant que la batterie se charge ou installez une batterie charge. Ladaptateur secteur nest pas branch convenablement. Vrifiez si votre adaptateur est branch de faon approprie. Voir Sources dalimentation en page 59. Ladaptateur de courant (secteur ou auto/avion) ne reoit pas dnergie de la prise secteur, de la prise de sige davion ou de lallume-cigare de voiture. Ladaptateur de courant (secteur ou auto/avion) est dfectueux. Les paramtres de gestion dalimentation sont rgls des temporisations (dlais dinactivit) automatiques trop courtes par rapport vos besoins dexploitation. Lordinateur est aliment par batterie et vous navez pas tenu compte dun avertissement de batterie faible; lordinateur est donc maintenant en mode veille car batterie puise. Branchez le cordon dalimentation secteur dans une autre prise murale et vrifiez si un interrupteur ou un disjoncteur coupe le courant. Si vous utilisez un adaptateur auto/avion dans un vhicule, assurez-vous que la cl de contact est la position On (marche) ou Acc. (accessoires). Essayez un autre adaptateur dalimentation. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche du clavier ou bougez la souris. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. Vrifiez vos paramtres de gestion dalimentation, ou fermez vos applications et consultez les proprits des Options dalimentation du Panneau de configuration pour ajuster les valeurs de temporisation afin quelles rpondent mieux vos besoins. Installez un adaptateur dalimentation puis appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/

veille/reprise. Voir Sources dalimentation en page 59. 95 - Dpannage Problme Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK steint tout seul.

(suite) Cause possible Votre batterie est dfectueuse. Solutions possibles Vrifiez ltat des batteries laide du Tableau de voyants dtat. Si la batterie est court-circuite, remplacez-la ou retirez-la. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. Le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK ne fonctionne pas lorsquil est aliment uniquement par batterie. Votre adaptateur dalimentation est tomb en panne ou a perdu sa source dnergie. La batterie installe est puise. La batterie na pas t correctement installe. La batterie installe est dfectueuse. La batterie semble se dcharger trop rapidement. Les fonctions dconomies dnergie sont peut-tre dsactives. Assurez-vous que ladaptateur est branch et que la prise est alimente. Remplacez la batterie par une batterie charge ou branchez un adaptateur dalimentation. Vrifiez si la batterie est bien connecte en la rinstallant. Consultez le tableau de voyants dtat pour connatre ltat de la batterie et remplacez ou retirez la batterie si elle est court-circuite. Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. Consultez le menu Options dalimentation du Panneau de configuration pour changer les paramtres en fonction de vos besoins. La luminosit est rgle au maximum. Rduisez la luminosit. Plus la luminosit est leve, plus lcran daffichage consomme de lnergie. La batterie est trs vieille. Remplacez la batterie. Vous utilisez une application qui consomme beaucoup dnergie car elle sollicite souvent le disque dur, le lecteur optique, le dispositif de rseau sans fil ou Bluetooth. La batterie a t expose des tempratures leves. La batterie est trop chaude ou trop froide. Utilisez un adaptateur de courant pour cette application chaque fois que vous le pouvez. Remplacez la batterie. Rtablissez le PC Tablette la temprature dexploitation normale. Licne de chargement sur le tableau de voyants dtat clignote lorsque la batterie est en dehors de la plage de fonctionnement. 96 - Dpannage Cause possible Problme Problmes darrt et de dmarrage La glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise ne fonctionne pas. La glissire dalimentation/veille/

reprise est dsactive. Solutions possibles Pour la ractiver, allez Panneau de configuration -> Options dalimentation ->

Proprits, puis cliquez sur longlet Avancs. Dans la zone Alimentation, slectionnez loption Changer ce que fait le bouton dalimentation . Le systme se met en marche et affiche les informations sur la mise en marche, mais nest pas en mesure de charger le systme dexploitation. Il est possible quil y ait un conflit entre logiciels. Fermez toutes les applications et essayez le bouton nouveau. Les paramtres damorage de lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS sont incompatibles avec votre configuration. Configurez la source dexploitation en appuyant sur la touche [chap] pendant que le logo Fujitsu est affich sur lcran ou utilisez la touche [F2], accdez lutilitaire de configuration et ajustez les paramtres de source partir du menu Amorage. Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 63. Vous avez un systme protg qui requiert un mot de passe pour charger votre systme dexploitation. Assurez-vous davoir le bon mot de passe. Accdez lutilitaire de configuration et vrifiez les paramtres de scurit, puis modifiez-les en consquence. Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 63. Le disque dur interne na pas t dtect. Essayez de dtecter automatiquement le disque dur interne en utilisant lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS ou le sous-menu Matre principal situ dans le Menu principal. Un message derreur saffiche sur lcran durant la procdure damorage. Lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension (POST) a dtect un problme. Votre PC Tablette semble changer les paramtres de configuration lorsque vous le dmarrez. Les modifications que vous avez apportes la configuration du BIOS nont pas t sauvegardes et vous avez quitt lutilitaire sans les sauvegarder. La batterie de rtention du BIOS CMOS fait dfaut. Lcran ne sallume pas au dmarrage ou la sortie du mode Veille. Vous avez install le Tableau de scurit et dapplications du LIFEBOOK. Lisez les messages de lauto-test pour dterminer la signification et la svrit du problme. Tous les messages nindiquent pas des erreurs; certains sont simplement des indicateurs dtat. Voir Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension en page 100. Assurez-vous de slectionner loption Sauvegarder les changements et quitter lorsque vous quittez lutilitaire de configuration du BIOS. Communiquez avec le service dassistance concernant les rparations. Cela nest pas une pice rparable par lutilisateur mais elle est cense avoir une dure normale de vie de 3 5 ans. Consultez les indicateurs dtat pour voir si licne de scurit est affiche. Le cas chant, entrez votre mot de passe Voir Tableau de voyants dtat en page 24. 97 - Dpannage Problme Problmes vido Lcran daffichage intgr demeure vide lorsque vous mettez en marche votre PC Tablette. Cause possible Solutions possibles Le PC Tablette est rgl pour fonctionner avec un moniteur externe seulement. Langle de laffichage et les paramtres de luminosit ne sont pas adapts vos conditions dclairage. Les temporisations de gestion de lalimentation ont t rgles des intervalles trop courts et vous navez pas remarqu que lcran sallume et steint souvent. Gardez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez sur la touche [F10] pour changer votre slection et choisir o envoyer votre affichage. Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur ces touches, vous passez au choix suivant. Les choix, par ordre, sont: affichage intgr seulement, moniteur externe seulement, affichage intgr et moniteur externe ensemble. Dplacez lcran et actionnez la commande de luminosit jusqu ce que vous ayez une visibilit adquate. Pour rgler la luminosit, maintenez la touche [Fn] enfonce et appuyez sur [F6] ou [F7]. Appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou dplacez la souris. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. (lcran daffichage peut avoir t arrt par le mode sommeil, veille automatique ou temporisation vido). Le PC Tablette sest mis en marche en mettant une srie de tonalits et votre cran intgr est vide. Lauto-diagnostic de dmarrage

(POST) a dtect une dfaillance qui ne permet pas lcran de fonctionner. Communiquez avec le service dassistance. Lcran devient vide par lui-mme aprs avoir t utilis. Lordinateur portable sest retrouv en temporisation vido, en mode sommeil ou en mode veille prolonge car vous ne lavez pas utilis pendant un certain moment. Appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou dplacez la souris. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. Vrifiez vos paramtres de gestion de lalimentation, ou fermez vos applications et allez dans le menu conomies dnergie (ou Options dalimentation) de lutilitaire de configuration pour ajuster les valeurs de temporisation afin quelles rpondent mieux vos besoins. Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 63. Les temporisations de gestion de lalimentation peuvent tre trop courtes et vous navez pas remarqu que lcran sest allum, puis teint de nouveau. Appuyez sur nimporte quelle touche sur le clavier, ou dplacez votre souris pour restaurer le fonctionnement. Si cela ne fonctionne pas, appuyez sur la glissire dalimentation/veille/reprise. (Lcran daffichage peut avoir t arrt par le mode sommeil, veille automatique ou temporisation vido). Le systme est protg par mot de passe. Vrifiez le tableau de voyants dtat pour vous assurer que licne Scurit clignote. Le cas chant, entrez votre mot de passe. Lcran ne sallume pas au dmarrage ou la sortie du mode veille. 98 - Dpannage Problme Lcran daffichage ne se ferme pas. Lcran affiche des zones claires ou sombres. Lcran est sombre lorsquil fonctionne sur lalimentation par batterie. Vous avez connect un moniteur externe et il naffiche rien. Vous avez connect un moniteur externe et il ne sallume pas. Problmes divers Un message derreur saffiche sur lcran durant lexcution dune application. Cause possible Un corps tranger, tel quun trombone, est coinc entre lcran et le clavier. Si ces zones sont trs petites et si leur nombre est restreint, cela est normal pour un grand cran ACL. Si les zones sont nombreuses ou suffisamment grandes pour perturber vos besoins dexploitation. La valeur par dfaut de lutilitaire Gestion de lalimentation est rgle sur Faible luminosit pour conomiser lnergie. Solutions possibles Retirez tous les objets trangers du clavier. Ne faites rien. Lcran est dfectueux: communiquez avec le service dassistance. Appuyez sur les touches [Fn] + [F7] pour augmenter la luminosit ou cliquez sur la jauge de la batterie, puis cliquez sur Autres options dalimentation, et slectionnez enfin Rgler la luminosit de lcran. Le systme dexploitation nutilise pas le bon pilote. Consultez la documentation du priphrique et du systme dexploitation, puis installez le pilote appropri. La configuration de votre BIOS nest pas rgle pour activer votre moniteur externe. Basculez la destination vido en appuyant en mme temps sur [Fn]+ [F10], ou vrifiez la configuration du BIOS et validez votre moniteur externe. Consultez le sous-

menu Video Features (Fonctions vido) du menu Advanced (Avanc) du BIOS. Voir Utilitaire de configuration du BIOS en page 63. Votre moniteur externe nest pas bien install. Votre moniteur externe nest pas compatible avec votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK. Rinstallez votre priphrique. Voir Port vido externe en page 84. Consultez la documentation de votre moniteur, ainsi que les conseils concernant le moniteur externe dans la section Spcifications. Voir Spcifications en page 118. Les applications gnrent souvent leurs propres messages derreur. Pour obtenir de plus amples informations, consultez le guide dutilisation et les crans daide de votre application. Tous les messages nindiquent pas des erreurs; certains sont simplement des indicateurs dtat. 99 - Dpannage Messages de lauto-diagnostic de mise sous tension Voici une liste des messages derreur et dtat que le BIOS Phoenix et/ou votre systme dexploitation peuvent gnrer ainsi quune explication pour chacun deux. Les messages derreurs sont marqus dun *. Si un message derreur est affich et ne se trouve pas dans la liste, prenez-le en note et vrifiez-le dans la documentation du systme dexploitation ( lcran et dans le manuel imprim). Si vous ne trouvez pas dexplication au message, communiquez avec le service dassistance.

*Donnes NVRAM non valides Problme daccs la mmoire NVRAM. Au cas o ce message safficherait, ce qui est peu probable, vous pourriez avoir un problme daffichage. Vous pouvez continuer utiliser votre ordinateur mais vous devriez communiquer avec le service dassistance pour plus dinformations.

*Erreur du contrleur de clavier Le test du contrleur de clavier a chou. Vous pourriez avoir besoin de remplacer votre clavier ou le contrleur de votre clavier mais vous pourriez utiliser un clavier externe en attendant. Communiquez avec le service dassistance.

*Le clavier na pas t dtect Le clavier ne fonctionne pas. Vous pourriez avoir besoin de remplacer votre clavier ou le contrleur de votre clavier mais vous pourriez utiliser un clavier externe en attendant. Communiquez avec le service dassistance.

*Systme dexploitation introuvable Le systme dexploitation ne peut pas tre localis ni sur le lecteur A: ni sur le lecteur C: Accdez lutilitaire de configuration et vrifiez si le disque fixe et le lecteur A: sont bien identifis et si la squence damorage est bien configure. Le systme dexploitation devrait tre sur le lecteur C: sauf si vous avez chang sensiblement votre installation. Si lutilitaire de configuration est bien install, votre disque dur pourrait tre corrompu.

*Appuyez sur <F1> pour reprendre, sur <F2> pour CONFIGURER Affich aprs tout message derreur rcuprable. Appuyez sur [F1] pour continuer le dmarrage ou sur [F2] pour accder lutilitaire de configuration.

*Erreur de lhorloge de temps rel - Vrifiez les paramtres dheure et de date Lhorloge de temps rel a chou le test du BIOS. Une rparation de la carte mre pourrait tre ncessaire. Communiquez avec le service dassistance.

*Erreur de ventilateur, le systme sarrtera dans 30 secondes. Contactez le service de support technique Fujitsu. Une erreur de ventilateur sest produite. Communiquez avec votre reprsentant commercial.

*Une erreur de ventilateur sest produite durant lamorage. Une erreur de ventilateur sest produite durant lamorage. Communiquez avec votre reprsentant commercial. 100 - Dpannage Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels Avant de commencer utiliser votre ordinateur, il est trs important de faire des copies sur DVD de limage dorigine et du disque damorage (ainsi que dautres supports comme le disque de pilotes, dapplications et de restauration). Pour ce faire, suivez les instructions donnes dans les sections Sauvegarde de limage dorigine et Cration de sauvegardes de limage dorigine et des disques de ce chapitre. Enregistrement et restauration de vos images dorigine et de systme Outre les instructions sur lenregistrement de votre image dorigine, ce document explique plusieurs autres procdures importantes, notamment la cration dune image de systme, la restauration de limage dorigine et des images de systme, la gestion de vos images et la restauration des partitions sur un disque dur. POUR INSTALLER DES APPLICATIONS, POUR COPIER LIMAGE DORIGINE ET LES IMAGES DE SYSTME, POUR GRAVER UN DISQUE PRA, DES DISQUES NOUS VOUS RECOMMANDONS DUTILISER DES DISQUES DE TYPE DVD-R OU DVD+R POUR VOS SAUVEGARDES MAIS LES SUPPORTS* SUIVANTS DAPPLICATIONS OU DES DISQUES DAMORAGE, VOUS DEVEZ AVOIR UN GRAVEUR DE DVD INTERNE OU EXTERNE. IL EST EXTRMEMENT IMPORTANT DE COPIER VOTRE IMAGE DORIGINE SUR DES SUPPORTS AMOVIBLES (P. EX. DISQUES DVD). DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DE NE PAS POUVOIR RESTAURER LIMAGE UNE DATE ULTRIEURE. SONT AUSSI PRIS EN CHARGE:

POUR LIMAGE DORIGINE, LES DONNES DAPPLICATION ET LE DISQUE DAMORAGE POUR LES IMAGES DE SYSTME CRES PAR LUTILISATEUR

* SELON LE LECTEUR OPTIQUE ET LE FORMAT DU SUPPORT UTILIS, CERTAINS TYPES DE SUPPORTS PEUVENT NE PAS CONVENIR LA CRATION DIMAGES DE SYSTME.

: DVD-R/+R, DVD-RW/+RW, DVD-DL.

: DVD-R/+R. TANT DONN CERTAINES LIMITES LGALES, CERTAINES APPLICATIONS TIERCES DEVRONT TRE INSTALLES SPARMENT LAIDE DU SUPPORT DAPPLICATIONS JOINT VOTRE ORDINATEUR. Enregistrement de votre image dorigine Lorsque vous avez achet votre nouveau systme, limage dorigine a t pr-installe dans une partition cache de votre disque dur. Une copie de limage dorigine vous permettra, en cas de panne grave, de restaurer votre systme exactement comme il tait lorigine. 101 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels Pour crer une copie de scurit de limage dorigine sur des DVD, plusieurs disques vierges (les DVD-R ou DVD+R sont recommands) vous seront ncessaires. Lorsque vous avez termin la copie, assurez-vous dtiqueter clairement les disques et de les conserver en lieu sr. Cration dimages de sauvegarde de limage dorigine et des disques SUR CERTAINS MODLES DE LIFEBOOK, LES APPLICATIONS NE SONT PAS SUR LE DISQUE DUR. ELLES SONT PLUTT DISPONIBLES POUR TLCHARGEMENT SUR LE SITE WEB DASSISTANCE FUJITSU. VEUILLEZ EN TENIR COMPTE LORSQUE VOUS LISEZ LES PROCDURES SUIVANTES. TOUTES LES DONNES CRES PAR LUTILISATEUR SERONT SUPPRIMES DE VOTRE SYSTME LORSQUE LIMAGE DORIGINE SERA RESTAURE. Le bouton [Grer/Changer] permet galement de crer des copies de sauvegarde de limage dorigine, du ou des disques dapplications ou du disque damorage. 1 Lancez le programme My Recovery en cliquant sur licne correspondante disponible sur le bureau. 2 Slectionnez [Grer/Crer] -> [Grer les images de sauvegarde]. Vous trouverez dans le menu Images de sauvegarde une liste dans laquelle vous pouvez choisir le type de disque que vous souhaitez graver: disque damorage, disques dapplication ou disque de rcupration. 3 Slectionnez Disque de restauration, puis cliquez sur [Graver le DVD]. 4 Assurez-vous que le numro de la case est 2 (Remarque: en fonction de la taille de limage, il est possible que le chiffre de limage dorigine indiqu soit suprieur). 5 Vous voyez apparatre le message Le disque de restauration 1 sera cr. Inscrivez quelques commentaires et un numro de disque sur le DVD. Cliquez sur [OUI] pour commencer graver limage dorigine. 6 Lorsque le systme copie, il affiche un cran criture sur disque avec une barre de progression. Lorsque lopration est termine, une bote de dialogue vous informe que la copie de sauvegarde a t cre avec succs. 7 Rptez la procdure avec les autres disques dimages (disque damorage et disques dapplications). Le nombre dimages disponibles peut varier selon le modle du systme; sur certains modles, les applications ne sont pas charges sur le disque dur. 102 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels Restauration de votre image dorigine Si vous avez un jour besoin de restaurer votre image dorigine, excutez les oprations suivantes. Il ne faut pas oublier que vous pouvez avoir des applications de fabricants indpendants devant tre installes sparment laide du disque dapplications livr avec votre ordinateur. TOUTES LES DONNES CRES PAR LUTILISATEUR SERONT SUPPRIMES DE VOTRE SYSTME LORSQUE LIMAGE DORIGINE SERA RESTAURE. Si vous dsirez restaurer votre image dorigine, excutez les oprations indiques sous Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque dur . Cration dune image de systme tape facultative : Depuis votre bureau Windows, lancez lutilitaire Applications Fujitsu en prime, puis slectionnez les composants que vous dsirez installer. Copies de sauvegarde de limage systme configures par lutilisateur: Sur votre bureau, il existe une icne [MyRecovery] (Ma restauration) qui vous permet de faire une copie de scurit de votre image systme actuelle sur un autre emplacement de votre disque dur ou sur un support externe. Une image systme est un enregistrement de la configuration de votre unit de disque C: un moment prcis. Il est conseill de faire occasionnellement une copie de scurit de limage systme afin de pouvoir revenir certains stades prcdents sans avoir revenir au tout dbut, limage dorigine. Par dfaut, les images de systme sont enregistres dans le dossier MyRecovery (soit sur D:\ soit sur une unit de disque externe, selon la configuration de votre systme). 1 Cliquez sur licne [MyRecovery] de votre bureau Windows. Lcran My Recovery apparatra (voir la figure 47). My Recovery Il est possible que votre tiquette soit diffrente selon la configuration de votre systme.) 2 Dans lcran MyRecovery, cliquez sur [Sauvegarde]. 3 Sur lcran suivant, vous pouvez saisir jusqu 200 caractres dinformations se rapportant au fichier de sauvegarde. Ces informations vous aideront identifier limage ultrieurement. 103 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels Figure 47. cran MyRecovery 4 Cliquez sur [Suivant] et vous verrez le systme redmarrer. 5 Aprs le redmarrage, vous voyez apparatre une fentre Cration de limage de scurit vous proposant de Crer limage sur lunit de disque D ou de Slectionner une unit de disque pour le cas o vous prfreriez conserver limage sur un disque dur externe. (Veuillez prendre note que la fonction de cration dimage sur lunit D nest pas disponible avec toutes les configurations.) 6 Vous voyez apparatre une illustration graphique de la faon dont limage sera enregistre. Cliquez sur le bouton [Suivant]. 7 Cliquez sur [Excuter] pour dmarrer lenregistrement de la copie de sauvegarde. 104 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels Gestion de vos images de sauvegarde Loutil MyRecovery permet galement de copier vos images de sauvegarde, de les archiver sur des DVD, ou de les supprimer de votre disque dur lorsquelles ny sont plus utiles. 1 Tout dabord, cliquez sur licne [MyRecovery] de votre bureau Windows. 2 Dans la fentre MyRecovery, cliquez sur [Grer/Crer]. 3 Lorsque vous voyez apparatre la fentre Gestionnaire MyRecovery, cliquez sur [Grer les images de sauvegarde]. 4 Vous voyez ensuite apparatre une liste de vos images de sauvegarde. Sous cette liste, trois boutons [Crer DVD],

[Copier], [Supprimer] permettent de grer les images de sauvegarde. 5 Slectionnez un titre dimage dans la liste, puis cliquez sur le bouton correspondant laction que vous dsirez excuter. 6 Veuillez prendre note que le bouton [Copier] est disponible uniquement si un disque dur externe est connect votre systme. Si vous dcidez de copier une image, vous devez ensuite dsigner un emplacement de destination. Lorsque vous tes prt copier, cliquez sur [OK] pour continuer. Un cran de progression est affich pendant que le systme copie. 7 Veuillez prendre note que si vous copiez une image sur un disque dur externe, loriginal et la copie sont tous deux affichs dans la fentre Images de sauvegarde avec le mme nom, la mme date et la mme taille de fichier, mais avec une lettre dunit de disque diffrente. Si vous choisissez [Crer DVD], assurez-vous davoir un graveur de DVD et des DVD vierges. Utilisation du disque de restauration et dutilitaires Le disque Restauration et Utilitaires contient divers outils permettant de restaurer votre image dorigine ou une image de systme, ainsi que deffacer certaines donnes inutiles sur votre disque dur. Mthodes pour accder aux utilitaires Les outils Restauration et Utilitaires sont pr-installs en usine dans une partition cache et sont disponibles sur le disque auto-amorage. Veuillez prendre note que si vous modifiez la configuration des partitions de votre disque dur, vous risquez de supprimer les outils Restauration et Utilitaires . Dans un tel cas, vous ne pourrez plus utiliser la partition cache pour lancer les outils Restauration et Utilitaires , mais vous pourrez toujours amorcer le systme partir du disque damorage. 105 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels Comment dterminer si la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires est dj installe 1 Allumez ou redmarrez votre systme. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat, appuyez sur la touche [F12]. Le menu damorage saffiche. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Tab pour slectionner le menu Applications. 3 Vrifiez si la fonctionnalit <Restauration et Utilitaires> est installe. Si elle ny est pas, cela signifie que la fonctionnalit doit tre utilise partir du disque. Si loption <Restauration et Utilitaires> nest pas disponible, reportez-vous Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque damorage . Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque dur 1 Allumez ou redmarrez votre systme. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat, appuyez sur la touche [F12]. Le menu damorage saffiche. 2 Appuyez sur la touche Tab pour slectionner le menu Applications. 3 Avec le curseur, allez en bas de page jusqu <Restauration et Utilitaires>, puis appuyez sur [Entre]. 4 Une barre de progression apparatra en bas de lcran pendant le transfert des fichiers partir du disque. 5 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Options de restauration du systme apparat, choisissez une nouvelle configuration de clavier si ncessaire, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Systme dexploitation apparat, slectionnez Utiliser les outils de restauration... et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Si ncessaire, entrez votre mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 8 Lorsque la fentre Options de restauration du systme apparat, cliquez sur Restauration et Utilitaires. 9 Lcran Restauration et Utilitaires apparat avec trois onglets: Diagnostics, Restauration et Utilitaires. Veuillez noter que longlet Diagnostics nest pas pris en charge par certains modles LIFEBOOK/STYLISTIC lorsque vous excutez la fonction Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque dur. Si vous dsirez restaurer le systme dexploitation, utilisez licne du centre Restauration de limage dorigine (seulement unit de disque C:) sous longlet Restauration. Excution de la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires partir du disque damorage Si vous dsirez vrifier/changer la priorit damorage (plutt que de dmarrer partir du disque dur ou dun lecteur de disquette externe), excutez les oprations suivantes:

1 Mettez le systme sous tension. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat lcran, appuyez sur la touche [F12] pour aller au menu darmorage. 2 Surlignez loption CD/DVD. 106 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels 3 Mettez le disque damorage sur le plateau du lecteur. 4 Cliquez sur [OK]. Une barre de progression apparatra en bas de lcran pendant le transfert des fichiers partir du disque. 5 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Options de restauration du systme apparat, choisissez une nouvelle configuration de clavier si ncessaire, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Systme dexploitation apparat, cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Si ncessaire, entrez votre mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 8 Lorsque la fentre Options de restauration du systme apparat, cliquez sur Restauration et Utilitaires. 9 Lorsque lcran Restauration et utilitaires apparat, trois onglets sont prsents: Diagnostics, Restauration et Utilitaires. Onglets Restauration et Utilitaires Onglet Diagnostics: Loutil de diagnostic est conu pour tre utilis par des informaticiens professionnels. Il y a peu de chances que vous ayez besoin de lutiliser. Lorsque vous slectionnez des dispositifs dans la fentre Diagnostic et que vous cliquez ensuite sur [Excuter], ceux-ci sont soumis plusieurs tests. Onglet Restauration: Longlet Restauration comprend trois outils: Restauration de copies de systme configures par lutilisateur , Restauration de limage dorigine (uniquement lunit de disque C:) et Restauration de limage dorigine (restauration intgrale du disque dur). Vous pouvez utiliser ces outils pour restaurer limage dorigine partir de la partition cache, pour restaurer une image de sauvegarde cre par vous ou des images enregistres sur des DVD, et pour restaurer compltement votre disque dur. Si vous dsirez savoir comment crer des DVD de restauration de limage dorigine, des DVD de sauvegarde cr par lutilisateur, et une sauvegarde de limage de systme, reportez-vous aux sections appropries ci-dessus. Onglet Utilitaires: Longlet Utilitaires comprend trois outils: Supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur , Restaurer la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires et Restauration complte dordinateur Windows . Lutilitaire Supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur permet de supprimer toutes les donnes sur votre disque dur et den empcher leur rutilisation. REMARQUE: Nutilisez pas lutilitaire Supprimer les donnes sur le disque dur, moins que vous soyez absolument certain de vouloir effacer votre disque dur en entier, y compris toutes les partitions. Lutilitaire Restaurer la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires permet de restaurer la premire partition cache. Lutilitaire Restauration complte dordinateur Windows permet de restaurer une image cre avec le Centre de restauration et de sauvegarde Windows. Lutilitaire Restauration complte de lordinateur efface et rcrit toutes les donnes se trouvant sur le disque dur. 107 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels Restauration de limage dorigine avec la fonctionnalit Restauration et Utilitaires ( partir dun nouveau disque dur ou dun disque dur sans auto-amorage) Si vous avez install un nouveau disque dur ou si votre disque dur na pas de fonction dauto-amorage, excutez les oprations suivantes. Veuillez prendre note que vous devez dabord crer de nouvelles partitions sur le disque dur, puis restaurer limage dorigine. 1 Mettez le systme sous tension. Lorsque le logo Fujitsu apparat lcran, appuyez sur la touche [F12]. 2 Surlignez loption CD/DVD. 3 Insrez le disque amorable dans le lecteur de DVD, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 4 Lorsque la fentre Options de restauration du systme apparat, cliquez sur <Restauration et Utilitaires>. 5 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Options de restauration du systme apparat, choisissez une nouvelle configuration de clavier si ncessaire, puis cliquez sur [Suivant]. 6 Lorsque la bote de dialogue Systme dexploitation apparat, cliquez sur [Suivant]. 7 Si ncessaire, entrez votre mot de passe, puis cliquez sur [OK]. 8 Lorsque la fentre Options de restauration du systme apparat, cliquez sur Restauration et Utilitaires. 9 Dans la fentre Restauration et Utilitaires, cliquez sur longlet Restauration puis slectionnez licne Restauration de limage dorigine. 10 Cliquez sur [Excuter]. 11 Lisez lavis et cliquez sur Jaccepte . 12 Cliquez sur [Suivant], puis sur [Excuter] pour dmarrer le processus de restauration. 13 1. La mention Vrification du disque de restauration saffichera en caractres gras et le reste sera gris. Suivez les consignes et Insrez le disque de restauration N 1. Dans certains cas, vous pouvez tre invit Insrer le disque de restauration N 2, selon la taille de limage de restauration. 14 Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour dmarrer la vrification. Cliquez sur [Suivant] nouveau lorsque la vrification est termine. 15 2. La mention Initialisation du disque dur saffichera en gras avec le message Veuillez insrer le disque amorable dans le lecteur optique. Insrez le disque amorable. Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour continuer. Une bote de dialogue saffiche, avec un message de vrification de disque. 16 Le message Attention ! Toutes les donnes du disque dur seront compltement effaces ! apparatra. Slectionnez [OK]. Le processus de cration de partition dmarrera. 17 3. La mention Restauration de limage dorigine dans une partition cache est affiche en gras avec le message Veuillez insrer le disque de restauration N 1 dans le lecteur optique . Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour continuer. 108 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels la fin du processus, loutil retournera automatiquement 3. Restauration de limage dorigine dans une partition cache et affichera le message suivant: Veuillez insrer votre disque dapplications tierces ou le DVD CyberLink, puis cliquez sur [OK]. Insrez chaque disque lun aprs lautre jusqu les avoir tous installs. Si vous navez pas de disque dapplications tierces ni de DVD CyberLink ou si vous avez dj insr tous ces disques, cliquez sur [Sauter] pour continuer. REMARQUE: Certains produits (notamment ceux nayant pas de lecteur optique) sont livrs sans DVD CyberLink. Vous avez alors deux choix:

Insrer un ou plusieurs disques dapplications pour restaurer la partition cache, ou Cliquer sur [Sauter] pour sauter la restauration du ou des disques dapplications et poursuivre le processus de restauration. 18 Si vous slectionnez dinsrer un disque dapplication, le mme message apparatra de nouveau chaque fois quun disque dapplications aura t copi dans la partition cache. Insrez au besoin de nouveaux disques dapplications jusqu ce que tous les disques aient t copis, puis cliquez sur [Sauter] pour continuer le processus de restauration. 19 Lorsque vous avez cliqu sur [Sauter], le message de confirmation suivant apparat: Si vous dsirez sauter lopration de copie ou si vous avez termin de copier, cliquez sur [OK]. Cliquez sur [Annuler] si vous dsirez retourner Restauration de limage dorigine sur une partition cache. 20 Cliquez sur [OK] et le processus de restauration de limage dorigine commencera. 21 la fin de la restauration, vous verrez le message La restauration a t effectue. Cliquez sur [OK] pour redmarrer lordinateur. Cliquez sur [OK]. Tlchargement des mises jour de pilotes Pour vous assurer de toujours disposer des versions les plus actuelles des pilotes de votre systme, il vous est suggr dutiliser priodiquement lutilitaire de mise jour Fujitsu Software Download Manager (FSDM). Lutilitaire FSDM est disponible sur le site dassistance Fujitsu. Lutilitaire FSDM permet de voir une liste de la plus rcente version de plusieurs pilotes, utilitaires et applications, afin que vous puissiez dterminer si vous possdez ces plus rcentes versions. Si vous avez un systme dexploitation Windows 7, vous devez aller sur le site dassistance pour y tlcharger lutilitaire FSDM : http://support.fujitsupc.com/CS/Portal/support.do?srch=DOWNLOADS. 109 - Restauration de votre image de systme et de vos logiciels Chapitre 5 Entretien Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Si vous prenez soin de votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK, vous augmenterez sa dure de vie et sa fiabilit. Cette section fournit certains conseils relatifs lentretien de votre PC Tablette et de ses dispositifs. LE SYSTME CONTIENT DES COMPOSANTS POUVANT TRE FORTEMENT ENDOMMAGS PAR UNE DCHARGE LECTROSTATIQUE (DES). POUR MINIMISER CE RISQUE, VEUILLEZ PRENDRE LES PRCAUTIONS SUIVANTES:

AVANT DE CONNECTER OU DE DCONNECTER VOTRE PC TABLETTE LIFEBOOK (LORSQUE VOUS UTILISEZ UN DUPLICATEUR DE PORTS), IL EST TOUJOURS RECOMMAND DE TOUCHER UN OBJET MTALLIQUE MIS LA TERRE AFIN DE DCHARGER LLECTRICIT STATIQUE QUI SEST ACCUMULE DANS VOTRE CORPS. ASSUREZ-VOUS DE METTRE VOTRE SYSTME HORS TENSION AVANT DAJOUTER OU DE RETIRER DES COMPOSANTS DU SYSTME. MME SI LE SYSTME EST EN TAT DE SOMMEIL OU DE VEILLE PROLONGE, DES DONNES POURRAIENT TRE PERDUES ET LA MMOIRE ENDOMMAGE SI LE COURANT QUI ALIMENTE LE SYSTME NEST PAS COUP. LORSQUE VOUS INSTALLEZ OU RETIREZ UN MODULE DE MMOIRE, TENEZ-LE PAR LE BORD DE FAON NE TOUCHER AUCUN CONTACT NI AUCUNE PUCE. ASSUREZ-VOUS DE NE TOUCHER AUCUNE BORNE DE CONNEXION NI AUCUN COMPOSANT INTERNE DE LORDINATEUR. LA PEAU DGAGE UNE SUBSTANCE HUILEUSE QUI POURRAIT CAUSER UN COURT-CIRCUIT AUX COMPOSANTS. TOUT QUIPEMENT LECTRIQUE PEUT TRE DANGEREUX SIL EST UTILIS DE FAON INAPPROPRIE. LE FONCTIONNEMENT DE CE PRODUIT OU DAUTRES PRODUITS SIMILAIRES DOIT TOUJOURS SE FAIRE SOUS LA SUPERVISION DUN ADULTE. NE PERMETTEZ PAS AUX ENFANTS DACCDER LINTRIEUR DE TOUT PRODUIT LECTRIQUE ET NE LEUR PERMETTEZ PAS DEN MANIPULER LES CBLES. Votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK est durable, mais cest un appareil lectronique sensible. Prenez en soin. Prenez lhabitude de transporter votre ordinateur dans une mallette convenable. 110 Nessayez pas de rparer lordinateur vous-mme. Suivez toujours les instructions dinstallation la lettre. Gardez-le loin de la nourriture et des boissons. Pour protger votre PC Tablette des dommages et optimiser ses performances, gardez toujours les grilles de ventilation dgages, propres et sans dbris. Il est possible que vous deviez les nettoyer priodiquement, selon lenvironnement dans lequel vous utilisez lordinateur. Ne placez pas lordinateur dans un endroit o les grilles de ventilation pourraient tre obstrues, notamment dans un petit espace ferm ou sur une surface molle comme un lit ou un coussin. Si vous renversez par accident un liquide sur votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK:

1 2 3 4 teignez-le. Positionnez-le de sorte que le liquide puisse sortir. Laissez-le scher pendant 24 heures, ou plus si ncessaire. Sil ne dmarre pas une fois sec, contactez le service dassistance clients. Nutilisez pas votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu dans un environnement trs humide ( proximit dune baignoire, dune piscine). Utilisez toujours ladaptateur secteur dorigine et des batteries approuves pour votre ordinateur. vitez dexposer lordinateur au sable, la poussire et dautres matires. Nexposez pas votre ordinateur portable la lumire directe du soleil pendant de longues priodes, car les tempratures de plus de 60C (140F) pourraient lendommager. Gardez les caches des connecteurs et des fentes ferms lorsque ceux-ci ne sont pas en utilisation. Ne dposez pas dobjets lourds ou tranchants sur lordinateur. Si vous transportez votre ordinateur dans un porte-documents, ou toute autre mallette, assurez-vous quaucun objet dans ltui nappuie sur le couvercle. Ne placez jamais votre ordinateur de faon ce que le lecteur optique supporte le poids du portable. Nettoyage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Dbranchez toujours la prise lectrique (tirez la fiche, pas le cordon). Nettoyez votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK avec un chiffon humide, non pelucheux. Nutilisez pas de solvant ou dabrasif. Utilisez un tissu doux pour enlever la poussire de lcran. Nutilisez jamais de liquide lave-vitre. Avant de nettoyer ou de dsinfecter lextrieur de votre ordinateur, le clavier ou lcran ACL, prenez garde toujours teindre le systme, dbrancher ladaptateur secteur et retirer la batterie. 111 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Suivez les procdures de nettoyage en utilisant des produits nettoyants recommands disponibles dans le commerce. Extrieur et clavier de lordinateur Pour nettoyer lextrieur et le clavier, utilisez lun des nettoyants suivants:

Kit de nettoyage pour ordinateur portable Office Depot N 154-616 Lingettes Klear Screen de Meridrew Entreprises Lingettes de nettoyage 3M CL563

Remarque: Aprs avoir nettoy votre systme avec lun de ces produits, faites-le reluire et retirez les traces de produit laide dun tissu doux non-pelucheux. cran ACL Pour nettoyer lcran, utilisez lun des nettoyants suivants:

Kit de nettoyage pour ordinateur portable Office Depot N 154-616 Lingettes Klear Screen de Meridrew Entreprises Convient aux crans des PC Tablettes, PC convertibles avec protecteur ACL et ordinateurs portables standard. Nettoyez lcran doucement et laissez-le scher avant dallumer votre ordinateur. Dsinfection des ordinateurs LIFEBOOK Nettoyez la surface de lordinateur laide dun tissu doux imbib dune solution dthanol 50% ou dun autre germicide base dthanol homologu par lEPA (Environment Protection Agency, ou Agence amricaine de protection de lenvironnement) en tant que dsinfectant hospitalier. SI VOUS NUTILISEZ PAS LES BONS PRODUITS, LAFFICHAGE DE LCRAN ACL OU LORDINATEUR LUI-MME PEUT EN TRE ENDOMMAG. POUR SAVOIR COMMENT UTILISER ET MANIPULER CONVENABLEMENT LES PRODUITS NETTOYANTS, PRENEZ GARDE TOUJOURS CONSULTER LES PROCDURES DE NETTOYAGE DU FABRICANT, AINSI QUE LES FICHES TECHNIQUES DE SCURIT. NUTILISEZ JAMAIS DE NETTOYANTS BASE ALCALINE, DAMMONIAQUE, DACIDE, OU DE PRODUITS CHIMIQUES BIOLOGIQUES TELS QUE DISSOLVANTS POUR PEINTURE, ACTONE, ALCOOL PROPYLIQUE OU ISOPROPYLIQUE OU PTROLE. LA FINITION DES SURFACES DE LORDINATEUR ET LA PELLICULE DE PROTECTION DE LCRAN ACL POURRAIENT EN TRE ENDOMMAGES. NUTILISEZ JAMAIS DAIR COMPRIM POUR LE NETTOYAGE DES PC LIFEBOOK ET STYLISTIC. 112 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Nettoyage du filtre anti-poussire Votre LIFEBOOK est quip de ventilateurs qui attirent lair lintrieur pour refroidir les composants internes de lordinateur. Selon lenvironnement dutilisation, de la poussire et de la salet peuvent pntrer avec lair. Si elles saccumulent, elles peuvent nuire au bon fonctionnement du systme. RETIRER LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR: AVANT DE RETIRER LE FILTRE, TEIGNEZ LE SYSTME AINSI QUE LES PRIPHRIQUES, ET DBRANCHEZ LADAPTATEUR SECTEUR. NETTOYAGE DU FILTRE:

- NUTILISEZ PAS DE DTERGENT.

- VITEZ DENDOMMAGER LE FILTRE, LES DGTS CAUSS CE COMPOSANT NE SONT PAS COUVERTS PAR LA GARANTIE.

- UTILISEZ DES OUTILS EN PLASTIQUE POUR LE NETTOYER. LES OUTILS EN MTAL OU EN BOIS RISQUENT DE LENDOMMAGER. DES: AVANT DE NETTOYER LE FILTRE, TOUCHEZ UN OBJET EN MTAL AFIN DVACUER LLECTRICIT STATIQUE QUI SEST ACCUMULE DANS VOTRE CORPS. 1 teignez votre ordinateur et dbranchez ladaptateur c.a. 2 Fermez lcran et tournez lordinateur lenvers. 3 Retirez le filtre poussires en poussant le loquet en direction du filtre, puis soulevez-le et tirez-le vers lextrieur (Figure 48). 4 Nettoyez soigneusement le filtre ainsi que le conduit dair. 5 Mettez le filtre nouveau en place en insrant dabord une extrmit, puis poussez jusquau bout jusqu ce quil senclenche. Couvercle du filtre anti-poussire Verrou du couvercle du filtre Figure 48. Retrait du couvercle du filtre anti-poussire 113 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK ASSUREZ-VOUS TOUJOURS QUE LE FILTRE ANTI-POUSSIRE EST INSTALL AVANT DE METTRE VOTRE SYSTME EN MARCHE. DANS LE CAS CONTRAIRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DE CONTAMINER VOTRE SYSTME ET DE LENDOMMAGER. Entreposage de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK au lithium, puis enlevez-les. Si vous entreposez votre PC Tablette durant un mois ou plus, teignez-le, chargez compltement les batteries Rangez votre PC Tablette et les batteries sparment. Si vous rangez votre PC Tablette alors que la batterie est installe, la batterie se dchargera et sa dure de vie sera rduite. De plus, une batterie dfectueuse pourrait endommager votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK. Rangez votre Fujitsu LIFEBOOK dans un endroit frais et sec. Les tempratures acceptables sont comprises entre 13F

(-25C) et 140F (60C). TEIGNEZ TOUJOURS VOTRE ORDINATEUR AVANT DE LE TRANSPORTER ET/OU DE LEMBALLER. APRS AVOIR TEINT LE SYSTME, ATTENDEZ QUE LE PANNEAU DE VOYANTS DTAT INDIQUE BIEN LE STATUT HORS TENSION (CEST DIRE QUAUCUN VOYANT NEST ALLUM). IL EST POSSIBLE QUE LAPPAREIL NE SE METTE PAS AUTOMATIQUEMENT EN MODE HORS TENSION OU VEILLE PROLONGE APRS QUE VOUS AVEZ FERM LE COUVERCLE. CETTE SITUATION PEUT SE PRODUIRE EN FONCTION DES PARAMTRES DE SCURIT PAR MOT DE PASSE QUI GRENT LA PR-INITIALISATION DU SYSTME OU DUNE AUTRE APPLICATION EN COURS DUTILISATION SUR LORDINATEUR. SI VOUS TENTEZ DE TRANSPORTER LORDINATEUR SANS LTEINDRE, VOUS RISQUEZ DE LENDOMMAGER EN LE SOUMETTANT DES CHOCS OU EN LAMENANT EN TAT DE SURCHAUFFE CAR LES GRILLES DE VENTILATION PEUVENT TRE BLOQUES OU OBSTRUES. Voyager avec votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Ne transportez pas votre PC Tablette pendant quil est en marche. Il est recommand de garder lordinateur prs de vous pendant votre voyage au lieu de lenregistrer comme bagage. Lorsque vous partez en voyage, apportez toujours avec vous le CD de remise en tat du systme fourni avec votre ordinateur portable. Si vous prouvez des problmes de logiciel dexploitation pendant votre voyage, vous pourriez en avoir besoin pour trouver la solution au problme. Ne faites jamais passer votre ordinateur au dtecteur de mtal. Faites inspecter votre ordinateur manuellement par le personnel de scurit. Par contre, le PC Tablette peut tre soumis un appareil radioscopique correctement rgl. Pour viter les problmes, placez votre ordinateur proximit de lentre de lappareil et retirez-le aussitt que possible, ou faites-le inspecter manuellement par le personnel de scurit. Il se peut que les responsables de la scurit vous demandent dallumer votre ordinateur, alors assurez-vous que vous avez une batterie charge disposition. 114 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Apportez avec vous les adaptateurs de fiches ncessaires lorsque vous voyagez outre-mer. Vrifiez le diagramme suivant pour dterminer quel adaptateur de fiche vous serait ncessaire ou renseignez-vous auprs de votre agent de voyage. Type de prise Emplacement Type de prise Emplacement Canada, tats-Unis, Mexique, certains pays dAmrique latine, Japon, Core, Tawan, Philippines Russie et Communaut des tats indpendants

(CEI), la plupart des pays dEurope, certains pays dAmrique Latine, Moyen-Orient, certains pays dAfrique, Hongkong, Inde, la plupart des pays de lAsie du Sud Batteries Entretien de vos batteries Royaume-Uni, Irlande, Malaisie, Singapour, certains pays dAfrique Chine, Australie, Nouvelle-Zlande Manipulez toujours les batteries avec soin. Ne court-circuitez pas les terminaux des batteries (cest dire, ne touchez pas les deux terminaux avec des objets mtalliques). Ne transportez pas des batteries dans votre poche ou sac main car elles pourraient entrer en contact avec de la monnaie, des cls ou dautres objets mtalliques. Cela pourrait causer une explosion ou un incendie. Il ne faut jamais laisser tomber, percer, dsassembler, abmer ou incinrer une batterie. Rechargez les batteries uniquement selon les instructions de ce manuel et seulement dans des endroits ars. Ne laissez pas les batteries dans des endroits chauds pendant plus dune journe ou deux. La chaleur intense pourrait rduire la dure de vie des batteries. Ne rangez pas la batterie pendant plus de 6 mois sans la recharger. 115 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Augmenter la dure de vie des batteries Alimentez votre PC Tablette avec ladaptateur secteur ou ladaptateur dauto/avion optionnel chaque fois que vous le pouvez. Si votre ordinateur fonctionne sur lalimentation par batterie pendant tout une journe, branchez-le sur ladaptateur secteur durant la nuit pour recharger la batterie. Gardez la luminosit au niveau le plus bas possible. Rglez la gestion de la consommation dnergie pour une dure de vie maximale de la batterie. Lorsque votre PC Tablette est allum et que vous ne lutilisez pas, mettez-le en mode sommeil. Limitez votre accs au lecteur multimdia. Dsactivez la fonction davis automatique dinsertion de votre lecteur Utilisez toujours des batteries charges compltement. Entretien de votre lecteur multimdia Entretien de votre lecteur multimdia (DVD/CD/CD-R) Les disques multimdias sont des dispositifs prcis qui fonctionneront de manire fiable si vous en prenez bien soin. Rangez toujours vos disques multimdias dans leurs tuis lorsquils ne sont pas utiliss. Tenez toujours les disques par les bords et vitez den toucher la surface. vitez de ranger les disques multimdias dans des endroits o les tempratures sont extrmes. Ne courbez pas les disques multimdias et ne dposez pas dobjets lourds par dessus. Ne renversez pas de liquide sur les disques multimdias. Ne laissez pas la poussire saccumuler sur les disques multimdia, ne les rayez pas. Ncrivez jamais sur la surface de ltiquette avec un stylo bille ou un crayon. Utilisez toujours un crayon-feutre. Si un disque est sale, utilisez seulement un nettoyant pour DVD/CD ou essuyez-le avec un chiffon doux, propre et non pelucheux: commencez par le bord intrieur et essuyez en direction du bord extrieur. Si un disque multimdia subit un changement soudain de temprature, une condensation froid/chaud pourrait se former sur la surface. Essuyez lhumidit avec un chiffon doux, propre et non pelucheux, puis laissez le disque scher temprature ambiante. NUTILISEZ PAS de sche-cheveux ou dautre appareil chauffant pour scher les disques multimdia. 116 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Entretien du lecteur optique Votre lecteur optique est durable, mais vous devez en prendre soin. Veuillez faire attention aux points suivants:

Le lecteur fait pivoter le disque compact une vitesse trs leve. Lorsquil fonctionne, ne le transportez pas dun endroit un autre, et vitez quil subisse un choc ou des vibrations. vitez dutiliser ou de ranger le lecteur dans un endroit o il serait expos des tempratures extrmes. vitez dutiliser ou de ranger le lecteur dans un endroit humide ou poussireux. vitez dutiliser ou de ranger le lecteur proximit daimants ou de dispositifs qui gnrent de forts champs magntiques. Nutilisez pas et ne rangez pas le lecteur dans des endroits exposs des chocs ou des vibrations. Ne dsassemblez pas ou ne dmontez pas le lecteur optique. Lusage dun nettoyant spcial pour lentilles est recommand pour lentretien rgulier du lecteur. 117 - Entretien de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Chapitre 6 Spcifications techniques Spcifications Cette partie prsente les spcifications techniques du matriel et de lenvironnement de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Fujitsu. Selon les configurations, les spcifications techniques peuvent varier. Microprocesseur La nouvelle famille de processeurs Intel Core de 3e gnration. (Le type de votre processeur est indiqu sur ltiquette du systme) Puce Mobile Intel QM77 Express Concentrateur PCH (Platform Control Hub) Mmoire Mmoire systme Module mmoire vive double canal SDRAM DDR3 1066 MHz Deux fentes mmoire DIMM avec possibilit de mise niveau jusqu 16 Go de mmoire totale (8 Go x 2). Mmoire cache Jusqu 4 Mo de mmoire cache L3 intgre (selon lUC) 118 Vido cran couleur plat TFT rtroclair DEL et matrice active, avec possibilit daffichage simultan sur deux moniteurs. Couleur et rsolution Vido cran anti-reflet HD+ de 13,3 po Interne : Rsolution 1600 x 900 pixels, 16 mln couleurs Externe (CRT, HDMI, DVI): Rsolution 1920 x 1200 pixels, 16 mln couleurs Port DisplayPort (sur le duplicateur de ports) : Rsolution 2560 x 1600 pixels, 16 mln couleurs En simultan: Rsolution 1600 x 900 pixels, 16 mln couleurs Orientations dcran prises en charge : 0o, 90o, 180o et 270o Carte graphique Carte graphique intgre Intel HD 4000 Numriseur double, comprenant le numriseur actif et le pav tactile technologie capacitive (fonctionne avec les impulsions du stylet ou des dix doigts). Codec Realtek ALC269 VB6 avec systme audio haute dfinition (HD) couteurs: Prise dcouteurs stro de 3,5 mm, 1 Veff. ou moins, impdance minimale de 32 ohms Microphone: Prise de microphone stro, 3,5 mm, 100mV crte--crte ou moins, impdance minimale de 10K ohms Deux haut-parleurs intgrs de 20 mm x 12 mm Deux microphones numriques intgrs Numriseur Audio 119 - Spcifications Options de stockage Disque dur ATA II srie, 3 Gbit/s; 2,5 po; 9,5 mm ou 7 mm, rsistant aux chocs, avec utilitaire Capteur de chocs. La capacit, a profondeur et la vitesse du disque dur sont dtermines par la configuration du systme. Cache m-SATA SSD de 32 Mo pour dmarrages rapides. BTO 2,5 po 7 mmH/9,5 mmH SATA Disque dur 5400 tr/min : 320, 500 GB Disque dur 7200 tr/min : 320, 500 GB Disque dur TCG compatible Opal auto-chiffrement (SED) 7200 tr/min: 320 GB Mmoire cache TCG compatible Opal auto-chiffrement (SED): 128 GB Mmoire cache non FDE (MLC) : 128, 256 GB Priphriques de baie modulaire Lun des priphriques suivants est dj install:

Lecteur modulaire Blu-ray RW Graveur de DVD multiformat double couche Batterie de baie modulaire Volet rducteur de poids Caractristiques techniques Dispositif de pointage intgr Boutons de commande du curseur Touchpad Communications Rseau local Gigabit : Carte rseau local interne filaire 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet Rseau local sans fil: carte intgre Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11abgn 2x2), en option, ou carte Atheros XSPAN HB116 802.11abgn Bluetooth: Bluetooth V4+LE pour communications personnelles sur rseau local sans fil, en option 120 - Spcifications Tableau de scurit/PC Tablette LIFEBOOK Voir Boutons Scurit/PC tablette/Windows du LIFEBOOK en page 49. Puce Trusted Platform Module (TPM) Le LIFEBOOK T902 est pourvu dune puce Trusted Platform Module (TPM), installe pour plus de scurit sur le systme. Verrouillage antivol Fente pouvant tre utilise pour installer un dispositif antivol. Camra Web Camra Web numrique optionnelle trs haute dfinition (1920 x 1080 pixels) avec DEL indicatrice daccs Ports de priphriques Sur le PC Tablette LIFEBOOK:

Fente de carte Secure Digital Port HDMI Connecteur analogique D-SUB 15 broches pour moniteur VGA externe (cf. Spcifications techniques daffichage) Deux connecteurs USB 2.0 pour priphriques dentre/sortie Deux connecteurs USB 3.0 (Universal Serial Bus) pour priphriques dentre/sortie

(dont un avec capacit de charge USB en tout temps) Une prise dentre c.c. Un connecteur de rseau local (RJ-45) Port de connexion ( 100 broches pour assurer la connexion avec le duplicateur de ports) Une prise couteur stro/sortie audio Une prise microphone stro/entre audio Fente pour carte puce (ncessite un logiciel tiers) Sur le duplicateur de ports en option :

Connecteur D-SUB 15 broches pour moniteur VGA externe Quatre connecteurs USB 3.0 pour priphriques dentre/sortie 121 - Spcifications Un connecteur de rseau local (RJ-45) Une entre c.c. Un connecteur DVI-D Un port daffichage Un connecteur dcouteurs Connecteur pour duplicateur de ports (100 broches, pour arimage au systme) Clavier Clavier intgr avec toutes les fonctions dun clavier de 101 touches. Nombre total de touches: 84 Touches de fonction: Touches F1 F12 avec une touche Fn pour fonctions tendues Deux touches Windows: Une touche Dmarrage, une touche Applications Pas de touche: 19 mm; course: 1,7 mm Dispositif de pointage Touchpad avec boutons droit et gauche. Repose-main intgr Rsistant aux claboussures Prise en charge de clavier/souris USB externe Clavier antimicrobes en option Gestion de lalimentation Batteries Batterie rechargeable standard au lithium, 6 accumulateurs, 72 Wh, ou Batterie optionnelle au lithium pour baie modulaire, rechargeable, 6 accumulateurs, 28 Wh Adaptateur secteur Autodtection 100-240 V c.a., fournissant 19 V c.c.; 4,22 A; 80 W au portable LIFEBOOK, y compris un cble c.a. Gestion de lalimentation Conforme la norme ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface, ou Interface avance de configuration et de gestion de lnergie) 122 - Spcifications Dimensions et poids Dimensions gnrales Avec pied et batterie principale 6 accumulateurs : Environ 334 mm de largeur x 244 mm de profondeur x 32,6 mm dpaisseur (13,15 po x 9,60 po x 1,28 po) Sans pied, avec batterie principale 6 accumulateurs : 334 mm (larg.) x 244 mm (prof.) x 26,8/31,0 mm (haut.)

(13,15 po x 9,60 po x 1,06 po/1,22 po) Poids Avec volet rducteur de poids: Environ 2,13 kg (4,69 lb ) Avec lecteur optique : Environ 2,29 kg (5,05 lb) Avec batterie de baie : Environ 2,41 kg (5,31 lb) Environnement requis Temprature Utilisation: 5C 35C (41F 95F) Stockage: -15C 60C (5F 140F) Humidit Utilisation: 20 85% dhumidit relative, sans condensation Stockage: 8% 85% dhumidit relative, sans condensation Altitude Utilisation: 3 048 m (10 000 pieds) maximum Accessoires prfrs des utilisateurs Pour commander des accessoires ou demander des informations supplmentaires, veuillez visiter notre site Internet www.shopfujitsu.com ou appelez au 1-800-FUJITSU. 123 - Spcifications Logiciels prinstalls Selon le systme dexploitation pr-install, votre PC Tablette est livr avec des logiciels inclus afin de vous permettre dcouter des fichiers audio et de visionner des fichiers vido de formats divers.De plus, la prsence dun logiciel et dapplications antivirus rendent lutilisation quotidienne de votre ordinateur plus fiable. Certains de ces programmes sont prinstalls, dautres font partie des applications bonus de Fujitsu. LA LISTE SUIVANTE NONCE LES PROGRAMMES QUI PEUVENT TRE INSTALLS SUR VOTRE ORDINATEUR. CES PROGRAMMES PEUVENT TRE DIFFRENTS EN FONCTION DU SYSTME DEXPLOITATION ET DE LA CONFIGURATION. Adobe Reader Norton Internet Security 2012 (essai gratuit de 60 jours) CyberLink PowerDirector CyberLink PowerDVD CyberLink Makedisc CyberLink YouCam Google Toolbar (Barre doutils Google) Roxio Creator Fujitsu Touch Launcher (modles avec Windows 7 et numriseur double uniquement) OmniPass (application de reconnaissance des empreintes digitales) Microsoft Windows Live Essentials Microsoft Office Starter 2010 Apprendre utiliser vos logiciels Tutoriaux Tous les systmes dexploitation et la plupart des logiciels dapplication ont des didacticiels intgrs ds leur installation. Nous vous recommandons vivement de passer en revue le tutorial avant dutiliser une application. 124 - Spcifications Manuels Sont compris dans votre PC Tablette, les guides dutilisation pour votre systme dexploitation et les autres applications pr-installes. Tous les manuels non fournis avec votre ordinateur sont disponibles via le menu Aide de lapplication concerne. Nous vous recommandons de passer en revue ces guides dutilisation pour obtenir des informations sur lutilisation des logiciels. Adobe Reader Adobe Reader permet de consulter et dimprimer des fichiers PDF sur toutes les plateformes informatiques courantes. Norton Internet Security 2012 Votre systme est livr avec la version dessai de 60 jours de Norton Internet Security 2012 de Symantec. La gamme doutils Norton Internet Security est conue pour protger votre ordinateur portable LIFEBOOK contre les virus, les pirates, les logiciels espions et les pourriels. Il aide la protection des donnes actuellement sur votre disque dur contre toute infection ou destruction. La version dessai est active aprs acceptation du contrat de licence du logiciel. Aprs 60 jours, vous devrez vous procurer un abonnement auprs de Symantec pour pouvoir tlcharger les signatures de virus, de logiciels espions et de pourriel les plus rcentes. CyberLink Makedisc CyberLink MakeDisc vous permet de graver des donnes, des vidos et des photographies sur des CD ou des DVD. CyberLink PowerDVD CyberLink PowerDVD vous permet de raliser et dditer des films personnels et des prsentations sur disques. CyberLink YouCam La webcam intgre CyberLink YouCam vous permet de prendre des photos ou des films, dy ajouter des effets spciaux, et de les partager sous divers formats ou par lintermdiaire de rseaux sociaux. CyberLink PowerDirector CyberLink PowerDirector vous permet dditer et damliorer vos vidos en les agrmentant notamment deffets spciaux. 125 - Spcifications Google Toolbar (Barre doutils Google) La barre doutils Google vous permet de faire des recherches rapides sur Internet, de bloquer les fentres et de raliser une gamme varie de tches pour rendre votre utilisation dInternet plus facile et plus plaisante. OmniPass (application de reconnaissance des empreintes digitales) Le capteur dempreintes digitales utilise le logiciel Softex OmniPass qui fournit des fonctions de gestion de mot de passe aux systmes dexploitation Microsoft Windows. OmniPass vous permet dutiliser un mot de passe principal, ou matre pour toutes les applications Windows et mots de passe en ligne, avec une interface dutilisateur conviviale permettant de grer en toute scurit les mots de passe, les utilisateurs et les identits multiples pour chaque utilisateur. Roxio Creator Roxio Creator vous permet de graver facilement des CD ainsi que dorganiser, dditer et de partager des photos numriques, de la musique, des donnes, ou des vidos. Fujitsu Touch Launcher

(Modles Windows 7 avec numriseur double uniquement) Le Touch Launcher est un assistant apparaissant lcran qui permet de dmarrer facilement des applications souvent utilises et deffectuer des tches sur Internet. Microsoft Windows Live Essentials Windows Live Essentials est une suite de programmes vous permettant dutiliser votre ordinateur avec plus daisance et de plaisir. Live Essentials comprend quatre applications Live: Messenger, Photo Gallery, Writer et Mail. Messenger vous permet de communiquer et dchanger avec des personnes ou des groupes. Photo Gallery est une application vous permettant dorganiser, de modifier et de partager vos photos. Writer vous permet de publier des textes sur votre blog, dy tlcharger des vidos et des photos, et en gnral de publier des textes en ligne. Mail vous permet de grer votre messagerie. Microsoft Office Starter 2010 Microsoft Office Starter 2010 est une suite de logiciels contenant les outils de base pour crire des lettres et des rapports, garder le contact avec la famille et les amis, grer les finances familiales et crer un inventaire familial. Ldition 2010 de Microsoft Office Starter contient Office Word Starter 2010 pour la rdaction, la modification et la consultation de documents, et Office Excel Starter 2010 pour la cration et la consultation de tableurs. Office Starter dition 2010 126 - Spcifications contient galement les versions compltes des ditions Famille et tudiant 2010, Famille et Entreprise 2010, ainsi que ldition Professionnelle 2010. Vous pouvez accder nimporte laquelle de ces ditions en achetant une Carte de cl produit. Systme dexploitation Microsoft Windows 7 dition Professionnelle (32 ou 64 bits) 127 - Spcifications Glossaire ACL Affichage cristaux liquides. Type dcran produisant des images par contrle de lorientation de cristaux dans un liquide cristallin. ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) Interface avance de configuration et de gestion de lnergie. Adaptateur auto/avion Un dispositif qui convertit le courant continu dun allume-cigare de voiture ou une prise c.c. davion en courant continu la tension voulue pour alimenter votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. Adaptateur secteur Appareil convertissant une tension c.a. provenant dune prise murale en tension c.c. ncessaire lalimentation de votre systme. Adresse IP Un identifiant pour un ordinateur ou un priphrique sur un rseau TCP/IP. Les rseaux qui utilisent le protocole TCP/IP acheminent des messages en fonction de ladresse IP de la destination. Le format dune adresse IP est une adresse numrique de 32 bits qui scrit avec quatre nombres spars par des points. Chaque nombre peut tre une valeur de 0 255. Par exemple, 1.160.10.240 pourrait tre une adresse IP valide. Au sein dun rseau isol, vous pouvez attribuer des adresses IP au hasard tant que chacune delles reste unique. Toutefois, la connexion dun rseau priv Internet exige lutilisation dadresses IP enregistres (appeles adresses Internet) afin dviter les doublons. 128 Les quatre numros dans une adresse IP sont utiliss de diffrentes faons pour identifier un rseau particulier et un serveur hte. Trois registres rgionaux Internet (ARIN, RIPE NCC et APNIC) attribuent des adresses Internet partir des trois classes suivantes:

Classe A : accepte 16 millions de serveurs sur chacun des 126 rseaux. Classe B : accepte 65 000 serveurs sur chacun des 16 000 rseaux. Classe C : accepte 254 serveurs sur chacun des 2 millions de rseaux. Le nombre dadresses Internet non attribues commence manquer, aussi un nouveau schma sans classe, appel CIDR, remplace de plus en plus le systme bas sur les classes A, B et C et est rattach ladoption de la norme IPv6. Adresse MAC (Media Access Control) Adresse de contrle daccs au mdia. Adresse physique unique dune carte rseau. Pour Ethernet, les trois premiers octets sont utiliss pour indiquer le code du vendeur, contrl et attribu par lIEEE. Les trois autres octets sont contrls par chaque fabricant (pour empcher toute superposition); en consquence, chaque carte Ethernet reoit une adresse physique unique au monde, ce qui permet de la distinguer parmi dautres cartes. Lorsque la technologie Ethernet est utilise, des trames sont envoyes et reues en fonction de cette adresse. AGP (Accelerated Graphics Port) Littralement: Port graphique acclr . Port local spcialement conu pour les priphriques utilisant beaucoup dimages graphiques, notamment les cartes vido et les acclrateurs 3D. Amorage Dmarrage dun ordinateur et chargement de son systme dexploitation dans la mmoire vive (RAM), partir du disque, de la mmoire ROM ou dautres supports de stockage. Authentification cl partage Mthode dauthentification rseau tablie par la spcification 802.11, selon laquelle le point daccs transmet au client un paquet texte que le client doit crypter avec la bonne cl de rseau et renvoyer au point daccs. Si le client possde la mauvaise cl ou sil nen a pas, lauthentification chouera et il ne sera pas autoris sassocier au point daccs. Lauthentification cl partage nest pas considre comme une mthode sre, car un pirate qui accde au texte en clair et au texte crypt avec la cl WEP pourrait dchiffrer celle-ci. 129 -

Authentification ouverte Mthode dauthentification tablie dans la norme 802.11 selon laquelle un client sans fil nest pas authentifi avant de pouvoir sassocier. Batterie au lithium Type de batterie rechargeable ayant une puissance et une dure de vie importantes compte tenu de sa taille, et ne subissant pas leffet de mmoire qui caractrise les batteries au nickel-cadmium. BIOS Acronyme signifiant Basic Input-Output System. Programme et ensemble de paramtres par dfaut stocks dans la mmoire morte: il effectue des diagnostics et fait fonctionner votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK lorsque vous le mettez sous tension et agit ainsi jusqu ce que votre systme dexploitation se soit charg partir du disque. Les informations du BIOS sont transfres au systme dexploitation pour lui fournir des donnes sur la configuration et ltat du matriel. Bit Contraction de Binary digit . Unit simple dinformation pouvant adopter la valeur 1 (un) ou 0 (zro). bit/s Abrviation de bits par seconde . Unit utilise pour mesurer le dbit de transfert de donnes. Bus Circuit lectrique qui transmet des donnes entre lunit centrale et les sous-ensembles lintrieur du PC Tablette LIFEBOOK. c.c. Courant continu. Courant qui ne fluctue pas priodiquement dans le temps. Canal Plage de frquences bande troite utilise par la carte rseau sans fil pour transmettre des donnes. IEEE 802.11b/g:

11 canaux dans la bande de 22 MHz. Cathodique (CRT Cathode Ray Tube, ou Tube rayons cathodiques) Tube rayons cathodiques. Moniteur dont laffichage est assur par un faisceau de particules lectroniques qui frappe lcran luminescent. Une image est produite par la variation de la position et de lintensit du faisceau. 130 -

CD-ROM Disque compact mmoire morte. Forme de stockage de donnes numriques lues optiquement par un faisceau laser plutt que par une tte magntique. Gnralement, un CD-ROM peut contenir environ 600 Mo de donnes et permet dviter les problmes dcrasement de la tte qui dtruisent des donnes, ainsi que lusure durant la lecture. Cl de chiffrement (cl rseau) Cl de chiffrement utilise pour coder les textes de messages et pour effectuer les vrifications de lintgrit des messages. La cl de chiffrement protge les donnes contre les interceptions non autorises. Ce dispositif utilise la mme cl de chiffrement pour coder ou dcoder les donnes; cette dernire est obligatoire pour que lmetteur et le receveur puissent communiquer. Cl de rseau Cl utilise pour le chiffrement des donnes sur le rseau. La cl de rseau tant utilise par lordinateur personnel pour crypter et dcrypter les donnes, lmetteur et le rcepteur doivent utiliser la mme cl. Commande Instruction que vous transmettez au systme dexploitation. Exemple: excuter une application particulire ou formater une disquette. Compatibilit Wi-Fi Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity). Une conformit Wi-Fi indique que le produit a russi le test dinteroprabilit de la WECA

(Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance), ce qui garantit linteroprabilit de produits de rseau sans fil IEEE 802.11. Configuration lments matriels et logiciels qui composent le systme et en dfinissent son fonctionnement. DES Dcharge lectrostatique. Dcharge lectrostatique soudaine provenant dune charge statique qui sest accumule lentement. Exemple: la dcharge reue dune poigne de porte ou les tincelles gnres par un brossage des cheveux par temps sec. 131 -

DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Il sagit dun protocole qui permet un ordinateur qui se connecte sur un rseau dobtenir dynamiquement sa configuration. Il est utilis pour rcuprer automatiquement des paramtres ncessaires la communication, tels des adresses IP. Lmetteur dune adresse IP sappelle un serveur DHCP, et celui qui reoit est un client DHCP. DIMM Barrette de mmoire double range de connexions. Disque Support circulaire et plat pour le stockage magntique de donnes. Disque dur Support rotatif, circulaire, plat et rigide pour le stockage magntique de donnes. DMA (Direct Memory Access) Accs direct la mmoire. Circuit spcial de transferts de donnes de mmoire mmoire ne ncessitant pas lintervention de lUC. DMI (Desktop Management Interface) Interface de gestion du mode bureau. Norme qui permet aux applications de gestion dordinateur dinterroger et de configurer, localement ou distance, des systmes informatiques, des composants matriels et logiciels, ainsi que des priphriques. DNS (Domain Name System) Systme dadressage par domaines Fonction qui contrle la correspondance entre ladresse IP et le nom attribu lordinateur. Il est possible de communiquer avec les ordinateurs dont les adresses IP sont inconnues, mais dont le nom est connu. Donnes Les informations stockes et traites par un systme. DOS (Disk Operating System) Littralement Systme dexploitation de disque (MS-DOS est un systme dexploitation de disque Microsoft). 132 -

E/S Entre/Sortie. Donnes lectroniques entrant et sortant de votre PC Tablette. ECP (Extended Capability Port) Port capacits tendues. Ensemble de normes de transmission de donnes haute vitesse et dinterconnexions entre appareils lectroniques. cran matrice active Type dcran plat o un transistor ou un composant similaire est associ chaque pixel de lcran. FCC (Federal Communication Commission) Commission fdrale des communications (organisation gouvernementale amricaine). Go Giga-octet. Un milliard doctets. Horloge systme Oscillateur frquence prcise qui synchronise le fonctionnement du systme et tablit lheure et la date. IDE (Intelligent Drive Electronics) Interface IDE Linterface IDE se caractrise par le fait que le contrleur lectronique du disque dur est intgr dans le mme botier que ce dernier. IEEE 802.11a Norme de rseau sans fil autorisant un dbit maximum thorique de 54 Mbit/s. Les cartes de norme 802.11a fonctionnent dans les bandes de frquences UNII infrieures et intermdiaires de 5 GHz. IEEE 802.11b Norme de rseau sans fil autorisant un dbit maximum thorique de 11 Mbit/s. Les cartes de norme 802.11b fonctionnent dans les bandes de frquences ISM de 2,4 GHz. IEEE 802.11g Norme de rseau sans fil autorisant un dbit maximum thorique de 54 Mbit/s. Les cartes de norme 802.11g fonctionnent dans les bandes de frquences ISM de 2,4 GHz. 133 -

IEEE802.11n Norme de rseau sans fil utilisant plusieurs flux de donnes autorisant un dbit maximum thorique de 450 Mbit/s. Les priphriques 802.11n peuvent fonctionner dans les bandes UNII de 2,4 GHz et 5 GHz. Ils sont en outre rtrocompatibles avec les priphriques 802.11g and 802.11a. Infrastructure Nom dune configuration de rseau local (LAN) sans fil. Ce type de communication utilise un point daccs. Il existe galement un autre type de communications appel Ad hoc . IRQ (Interrupt Request) Demande dinterruption. Il sagit dun signal envoy par le matriel lunit centrale indiquant quil y a ncessit de traiter un vnement externe qui vient de se produire. Ko Kilo-octet. Mille octets. LAN (Local Area Network) Rseau local. Interconnexion dordinateurs et de priphriques dans un emplacement dlimit et permettant lchange de programmes et de donnes. Lecteur de disque Dispositif qui fait tourner le disque et qui contient les ttes et les circuits de commande permettant la lecture et lcriture de donnes. Masque de sous-rseau Le rseau TCP/IP est command laide dune division en plusieurs sous-rseaux. Une adresse IP se compose dune adresse de sous-rseau et de ladresse de lordinateur. Le masque de sous-rseau dtermine le nombre de bits formant ladresse de sous-rseau dans ladresse IP. La mme valeur doit tre utilise pour tous les ordinateurs qui doivent communiquer sur le rseau. Mgahertz 1 000 000 de cycles par seconde. 134 -

Mmoire Dpt de donnes et dapplications auquel lunit centrale de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK a directement accs. Mmoire cache Bloc de mmoire intgr au microprocesseur, auquel il est beaucoup plus rapide daccder qu la mmoire vive et utilis de manire spciale pour acclrer le dbit global des donnes. MHz Mga-hertz MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) Interface numrique pour instruments de musique. Protocole de communication standard pour lchange dinformations entre un ordinateur et un instrument dot dune interface numrique, notamment un synthtiseur. Mo Mga-octet. Un million doctets. Mode Ad Hoc Le mode Ad Hoc dsigne une topologie de rseau sans fil dans laquelle la connectivit entre les divers ordinateurs est tablie sans priphrique central de rseau sans fil, ou point daccs. La connectivit est tablie uniquement laide de priphriques clients dans une configuration gal gal. Modem Contraction de MOdulateur-DEModulateur . Lappareil qui relie un ordinateur ou un autre terminal de traitement de donnes une ligne de tlcommunication. Module RAM ou module de mmoire vive Carte de circuit imprim avec mmoire et circuit associ qui permet lutilisateur dajouter de la mmoire supplmentaire lordinateur sans outil spcial. Mono Systme qui utilise un seul canal pour traiter le son provenant de toutes les sources. 135 -

MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) Unit maximum de transmission Taille maximum de donnes pouvant tre transfres en une fois par Internet ou dautres rseaux. Si vous rencontrez des difficults transfrer des donnes cause dune taille maximum (MTU) trop leve, vous pouvez dfinir une MTU infrieure pour que la communication aboutisse. Nom de rseau (ou SSID, abrviation de Service Set Identifier. ) La configuration dun rseau local sans fil fait appel un regroupement pour viter les interfrences et le vol de donnes. Ce regroupement est effectu avec le Nom de rseau (SSID). NTSC (National TV Standards Commission) Commission nationale des normes TV. Norme de diffusion et de rception tlvisuelle aux tats-Unis. Octet Unit dinformation comprenant 8 bits dinformations binaires parallles. Partition Bloc despace rserv sur un disque dur, que le systme dexploitation considre comme tant un disque distinct et quil gre en consquence. Pas de touche (clavier) La distance entre les centres des touches de lettres dun clavier. Priphrique quipement qui effectue une fonction spcifique associe un ordinateur mais qui ne fait pas partie de cet ordinateur. Exemples: imprimante, modem, CD-ROM. Pilote Programme qui traduit les commandes envoyes par les applications et le systme dexploitation aux priphriques externes dans la forme exacte exige par une marque et un modle particulier afin de produire les rsultats voulus avec le matriel employ. 136 -

Pixel Le plus petit lment daffichage, point de couleur lcran. Plus la densit de pixels est leve, plus limage est nette. Point daccs Priphrique de rseau sans fil servant de pont de communication entre un rseau sans fil et un rseau cbl. Port E/S Connecteur et circuits de commande associs travers lesquels transitent les donnes lectroniques entrant et sortant de votre ordinateur. POST (Power On Self Test) Auto-diagnostic (ou auto-test) de mise sous tension. Programme faisant partie du BIOS, qui vrifie la configuration et les conditions de fonctionnement de votre matriel chaque fois que votre PC Tablette est allum. Des messages dtat et derreur peuvent tre affichs avant que le systme dexploitation ne se charge. Si lautotest dtecte une panne qui est si importante que le fonctionnement ne peut pas continuer, le systme dexploitation ne sera pas charg. PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) Littralement, Protocole Ethernet Point Point Protocole Ethernet faisant appel au protocole point point (PPP) et utilis pour la connexion une ligne tlphonique. Programme Ensemble de commandes codes indiquant lordinateur ce qui doit tre fait, ainsi que quand et comment le faire. Protocole Ensemble de procdures et de rgles rgissant la rception et lenvoi de donnes entre ordinateurs.

- Mthode denvoi et de rception de donnes

- Processus utilis pour traiter les erreurs de communication Pour assurer un transfert correct des informations, les conditions requises pour la communication sont organises dans des procdures. 137 -

RAM (Random Access Memory) Mmoire accs direct, ou mmoire vive. Composant matriel de votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK qui stocke des informations binaires (programme et donnes) tant quil est aliment par une source de courant. RAM CMOS (Complementary metal oxide semiconductor random access memory) Mmoire vive avec Semi-conducteur complmentaire loxyde de mtal. Technologie de fabrication de mmoire vive ncessitant une trs faible alimentation. Rinitialisation Le fait de charger nouveau le systme dexploitation. Une rinitialisation efface toutes les informations stockes dans la mmoire vive. Reprise Continuer aprs une interruption. Dans le cas de votre PC Tablette, ceci signifie la reprise des activits normales partir de lun des modes de veille. ROM (Read Only Memory) Mmoire en lecture seule, ou mmoire morte. Type de mmoire o les donnes sont stockes par transformation physique de la matire. Les donnes stockes de cette faon ne peuvent pas tre modifies par lordinateur et leur conservation nexige pas de source de courant. SDRAM Mmoire vive dynamique synchrone. Cest un type de mmoire vive. SSID (Service Set Identifier) Identificateur de services 32 caractres ajout lentte des paquets transmis sur un rseau sans fil, qui sert de mot de passe lorsquun priphrique mobile tente de se connecter lensemble de services de base (BSS, ou Basic Service Set en anglais). Lidentifiant SSID distingue un rseau sans fil dun autre, de telle manire que tous les points daccs et priphriques qui tentent de se connecter un rseau donn doivent utiliser le mme identifiant. Un priphrique ne peut tre autoris accder au BSS que sil fournit le SSID unique. Le SSID tant diffus en texte clair, il nassure aucune scurit du rseau. 138 -

Stro (audio) Systme qui utilise deux canaux pour traiter le son provenant de deux sources diffrentes. SVGA Super VGA. S-Vido Super Vido. Systme vido composantes servant grer un cran de tlviseur ou dordinateur. Systme dexploitation Groupe de programmes de contrle qui convertissent les commandes des applications, y compris les pilotes, dans la forme exacte exige par une marque et un modle particuliers de processeur afin de produire les rsultats voulus avec le matriel employ. TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol) Littralement, Protocole de Contrle de Transmission/Protocole Internet. Protocole Internet standard le plus utilis. TFT (Thin Film Transistor) Abrviation de Thin Film Transistor. Technologie dcrans plats qui utilise une mince matrice de transistors pour commander individuellement chaque pixel de lcran. UL (Underwriters Laboratories) LUnderwriters Laboratories est un organisme indpendant qui effectue les tests de scurit lectrique des appareils et accorde les homologations correspondantes. USB Bus srie universel. Norme permettant de connecter simultanment un ordinateur jusqu 127 priphriques USB comme des manettes de jeu, des dispositifs de pointage, des imprimantes ou des claviers. Valeur par dfaut Valeur prprogramme utiliser si vous nen dfinissez pas une autre. 139 -

Voyant dtat Voyant indiquant ltat de certains composants de votre systme. Sur votre PC Tablette LIFEBOOK, il sagit dun cran cristaux liquides situ juste au-dessus du clavier. VRAM (Video Random Access Memory) Mmoire vive vido. Mmoire rserve aux donnes et au contrle daffichage vido. WFM (Wired for Management) Abrviation de Wired for Management . Vaste programme dIntel visant rduire les cots globaux de linformatique de gestion, sans sacrifier la puissance et la souplesse. WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) Rseau local sans fil. Interconnexion sans fil dordinateurs et de priphriques dans un emplacement gographiquement dlimit et permettant lchange de programmes et de donnes. 140 -

Renseignements sur la rglementation Avis Les changements ou modifications qui ne sont pas expressment approuvs par Fujitsu pourraient interdire aux utilisateurs dutiliser le matriel. AVIS DE LA FCC Avis aux utilisateurs de postes radio et de tlviseurs Cet appareil a t test et jug conforme aux limites tablies pour le matriel numrique de classe B, selon la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour assurer une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences nuisibles dans un environnement rsidentiel. Cet appareil gnre, utilise et met de lnergie radiofrquence et, si son installation et son utilisation ne sont pas conformes aux instructions, il peut tre la cause de parasites nuisibles aux communications radio. Il nest toutefois pas garanti quaucune interfrence ne sera observe dans un environnement particulier. Si ce matriel cause des interfrences nuisibles la rception des ondes de radio ou de tlvision, ce qui peut tre vrifi en le mettant hors tension puis sous tension, lutilisateur devra tenter de les corriger en procdant comme suit:

Rorienter ou dplacer lantenne rceptrice. Accrotre la distance entre lappareil et le rcepteur. Brancher lappareil sur une prise relie un circuit diffrent de celui sur lequel le rcepteur est branch. Consulter le vendeur ou un technicien radio/tlvision expriment pour obtenir de laide. Des cbles de liaison paires torsades blindes doivent tre utiliss pour assurer la conformit aux limites dmission RF qui gouvernent ce dispositif. AVIS DOC (INDUSTRIE CANADA) Avis aux utilisateurs de postes radio et de tlviseurs Cet appareil numrique de classe B respecte toutes les exigences de la Rglementation canadienne sur le matriel brouilleur. 141 - Renseignements sur la rglementation Annexe A: Guide dutilisation de la carte de rseau local sans fil Renseignements sur la rglementation de la FCC Veuillez prendre note des renseignements suivants sur la rglementation relative la carte rseau sans fil en option. Remarques et dclarations rglementaires Sant et autorisation dutilisation Carte rseau sans fil Une carte rseau sans fil met de lnergie lectromagntique radiofrquence. Les niveaux dnergie de ces missions sont toutefois beaucoup moins levs que ceux dautres appareils sans fil, tels que les tlphones cellulaires. La carte rseau sans fil peut tre utilise en toute scurit car son fonctionnement est conforme aux recommandations et aux normes de scurit en matire de radiofrquences. Lusage dune carte rseau sans fil peut tre limit dans certaines situations ou certains environnements, notamment:

bord dun avion;

dans un lieu contenant des matires explosives;

dans des situations o le risque dinterfrence avec dautres appareils ou services est jug dangereux. Lorsque la politique dutilisation des cartes rseaux sans fil de certains lieux risque nest pas bien dfinie (par exemple, dans les aroports, les hpitaux, les usines de produits chimiques, les raffineries de ptrole ou de gaz et dans les difices privs), obtenez dabord une autorisation. Renseignements sur la rglementation et avis de non-responsabilit Cette carte rseau sans fil doit tre installe et utilise conformment aux instructions de la documentation livre avec le produit. Toute modification apporte sans lapprobation expresse du fabricant peut annuler le droit de lutilisateur de sen servir. Le fabricant nest pas responsable des interfrences avec la rception des ondes de radio ou de tlvision causes par une modification non autorise ou par le remplacement ou le raccord de cbles et de matriel de connexion autres que ceux prescrits par le fabricant. Il incombe lutilisateur de remdier aux interfrences causes par une telle modification, substitution ou connexion non autorise. Le fabricant et ses revendeurs ou distributeurs autoriss ne peuvent tre tenus responsables des dommages ni de toute infraction la rglementation gouvernementale rsultant du non-respect de ces directives. 142 Cet appareil ne doit pas tre utilis avec ou proximit immdiate dune antenne ou dun metteur. Avis concernant les rseaux sans fil IEEE 802.11a: Le matriel destin un usage sur la bande 5,15~5,25 GHz doit tre utilis uniquement lintrieur et son antenne doit tre intgrale. Dclarations concernant la rglementation de la FCC Ce matriel est conforme aux limites dfinies dans la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible; (2) cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris celles pouvant causer un mauvais fonctionnement de lappareil. Dclaration concernant les dispositions de la FCC sur les interfrences Cet appareil a t test et reconnu conforme aux limites tablies pour le matriel numrique de classe B, selon la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC. Ces limites sont conues pour assurer une protection raisonnable contre les interfrences nuisibles dans un environnement rsidentiel. Cet appareil gnre, utilise et peut mettre de lnergie radiofrquence. Sil nest pas install et utilis conformment aux instructions, il peut causer des interfrences nuisibles aux communications radio. Il nest toutefois pas garanti quaucune interfrence ne sera observe dans un environnement particulier. Si ce matriel cause des interfrences nuisibles la rception des ondes de radio ou de tlvision, ce qui peut tre vrifi en le mettant hors tension puis sous tension, lutilisateur devra tenter de les corriger en procdant comme suit:

1 Rorienter ou dplacer lantenne rceptrice. 2 loigner le matriel du rcepteur. 3 Brancher le matriel sur une prise alimente par un circuit diffrent de celui du rcepteur. 4 Consulter le vendeur ou un technicien radio/tlvision expriment pour obtenir de laide. Dclaration concernant la rglementation de la FCC sur lexposition aux frquences radio Selon les donnes scientifiques disponibles, il nexiste pas de problmes de sant lis lutilisation des priphriques sans fil de faible puissance. En revanche il nexiste pas non plus de preuves qui dmontrent que ces priphriques sont absolument dpourvus de risques. Les priphriques sans fil de faible puissance mettent, lors de leur utilisation, une faible nergie de frquences radio dans la plage des micro-ondes. Alors que des niveaux levs de frquences radio risquent dentraner des effets nfastes sur la sant (en chauffant les tissus), lexposition un faible niveau de frquences radio ne provoque pas les effets calorifiques qui ont un effet adverse sur la sant. De nombreuses tudes portant sur lexposition de faibles niveaux de frquences radio nindiquent aucun effet biologique. Certaines tudes laissent entendre que des effets biologiques sont possibles, mais ces conclusions nont pas t confirmes par des recherches supplmentaires. La carte de rseau local sans fil a t teste et les rsultats obtenus sont conformes aux limites tablies par la FCC en matire dexposition au rayonnement dun quipement non contrl; ainsi que les directives de la FCC en matire dexposition aux radiofrquences selon le Supplment C du Bulletin lOET65. 143 -

Restrictions concernant lexportation Ce produit ou logiciel contient du code de chiffrement qui ne peut tre export ou transfr du Canada ou des tats-Unis sans un permis dexportation du dpartement du commerce des tats-Unis. Ce matriel est conforme la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC, ainsi qu la norme ICES 003 B/NMB 003 B. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrence nuisible; (2) cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interfrences reues, y compris celles pouvant causer un mauvais fonctionnement de lappareil. Toute modification nayant pas t expressment approuve par la socit Fujitsu America, Inc. peut annuler le droit de lutilisateur de se servir du matriel. Avis pour le Canada Le matriel destin un usage sur la bande 5 150 - 5 250 MHz doit tre utilis uniquement lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage nuisible caus aux systmes mobiles par satellite fonctionnant sur un mme canal. Un gain dantenne de 6 dBi est autoris (pour le matriel utilisant les bandes 5 250 - 5 350 MHz, 5 470 - 5 725 MHz et 5 725 - 5 825 MHz), conformment la limite p.i.r.e. maximale permise selon lannexe A9.2 affrent aux priphriques RSS210. En outre, les utilisateurs doivent prendre garde au fait que les radars de grande puissance sont considrs comme des utilisateurs principaux

(ce qui signifie quils sont prioritaires) des bandes 5 250 - 5 350 MHz et 5 650 - 5 850 MHz et quils pourraient causer des interfrences ou des dommages aux appareils de rseau exempts de licence. 144 -

Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil optionnelle Ce guide explique comment installer et configurer correctement la carte rseau sans fil mini-PCI intgre (disponible en option), ci-aprs dsigne sous le nom de carte rseau sans fil. Avant dutiliser la carte rseau sans fil, lisez attentivement le prsent guide afin de bien comprendre son fonctionnement. Conservez ce guide en lieu sr afin de pouvoir vous y rfrer ultrieurement. Cartes rseau sans fil prsentes dans ce document Ce document sapplique aux systmes quips de lun des deux composants suivants en option:

Carte intgre Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11a/b/g/n) Carte Atheros XSPAN 802.11abgn Caractristiques de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau sans fil est une carte au format Mini-PCI connecte la carte mre de lordinateur portable. Elle fonctionne dans les bandes RF pouvant tre utilises sans autorisation spciale, ce qui limine le besoin dobtenir une licence de la FCC pour les radiocommunications. Elle fonctionne dans la bande industrielle, scientifique et mdicale (ISM) de 2,4 GHz et dans les bandes UNII (Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure) infrieures, intermdiaires et suprieures (5 GHz). Les cartes rseau sans fil peuvent tre utilises selon quatre modes de fonctionnement: IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g et IEEE 802.11n (version prliminaire). Les cartes rseau sans fil sont certifies Wi-Fi et fonctionnent un dbit maximal thorique de 450 Mbit/s en mode IEEE 802.11n (version prliminaire), de 54 Mbit/s en mode IEEE 802.11a ou IEEE 802.11g, et de 11 Mbit/s en mode IEEE 802.11b. La carte rseau sans fil prend en charge les modes de chiffrement WEP, TKIP, CKIP et AES. La carte rseau sans fil est conforme aux normes suivantes: WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0 et CCX4.0. 145 -

Modes de rseau sans fil compatibles avec cette carte Mode Ad Hoc Le mode Ad hoc dsigne une topologie de rseau sans fil dans laquelle la connectivit entre les divers ordinateurs est tablie sans priphrique central de rseau sans fil, ou point daccs. La connectivit est tablie uniquement laide de priphriques clients dans une configuration gal gal. Les rseaux Ad hoc sont donc galement connus sous le nom de rseaux dgal gal. Un rseau Ad hoc est une mthode aise et peu coteuse de relier plusieurs ordinateurs en rseau. Le mode Ad hoc exige que les paramtres de nom de rseau SSID, dauthentification rseau et de cl de chiffrement soient configurs de faon identique sur tous les ordinateurs du rseau. Figure 49. Rseau en mode Ad hoc 146 -

Mode point daccs (Infrastructure) Le mode Infrastructure dsigne une topologie de rseau sans fil dans laquelle les appareils communiquent au sein dun rseau sans fil ou cbl par lintermdiaire dun point daccs. En mode Infrastructure, les appareils sans fil peuvent communiquer directement entre eux ou sur un rseau cbl. Les rseaux sans fil dentreprise fonctionnent en mode Infrastructure car ils ncessitent une connexion au rseau local sans fil pour accder aux ordinateurs, aux priphriques et aux services (par exemple, serveurs de fichier, imprimantes et bases de donnes). Internet Modem ADSL modem cble, ou similaire Rseau local cbl Point daccs*

Rseau local sans fil

*Un concentrateur en option pour rseau local peut tre equis selon le type de point daccs utilis. Figure 50. Rseau en mode point daccs (Infrastructure) 147 -

Manipulation de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau local sans fil est un dispositif en option qui peut tre fourni avec votre ordinateur portable. Normalement, vous ne devriez pas avoir besoin de la retirer ou de la rinstaller. Le systme dexploitation de lordinateur est dj configur pour utiliser la carte rseau sans fil. Le rseau local sans fil fonctionne dans les modes IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g et IEEE802.11n. Elles fonctionnent dans la bande ISM de 2,4 GHz et dans les bandes UNII infrieures, intermdiaires et suprieures (5 GHz). Les fours micro-ondes peuvent interfrer avec la carte rseau sans fil car ils utilisent la mme bande de frquences

(2,4 GHz) que les spcifications IEEE 802.11b/g/n. Les fours micro-ondes ne causent aucune interfrence en mode IEEE 802.11a car celui-ci utilise la bande radiofrquence de 5 GHz. Les appareils sans fil qui mettent dans la bande de frquences de 2,4 GHz peuvent nuire au fonctionnement des priphriques IEEE 802.11b/g/n. Les symptmes associs aux interfrences incluent une rduction du dbit, des coupures intermittentes de connexion et un nombre important derreurs de trames. Il est FORTEMENT recommand de mettre hors tension les appareils gnrant des interfrences afin dassurer le bon fonctionnement de la carte rseau sans fil. Dsactivation/dconnexion de la carte rseau sans fil La dsactivation de la carte rseau sans fil peut tre souhaitable dans certaines circonstances (pour prolonger la vie de la batterie) ou dans des endroits o lutilisation des appareils lectroniques est rglemente (par exemple: hpitaux, cliniques, avions, etc.). La carte rseau sans fil peut tre dsactive avec le commutateur marche/arrt correspondant ou avec Windows, en utilisant licne correspondante dans la zone de notification (Remarque: cette deuxime procdure nteindra pas la radio: lmission et la rception continueront bien que la carte rseau ait t dsactive). 148 -

Dsactivation avec le commutateur de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau sans fil peut tre dsactive rapidement et efficacement en mettant le commutateur correspondant en position OFF (arrt). le commutateur de la carte rseau sans fil na aucun effet sur les modles pour rseau local cbl. Commutateur de dispositif sans fil Figure 51. Emplacement du commutateur de dispositif sans fil Dsactivation par licne dans la zone de notification Notez quavec cette procdure, la radio ne sera pas teinte, lmission et la rception sont toujours actives bien que la carte ne soit plus connecte. 1 Faites un clic droit sur licne Carte rseau sans fil dans la zone de notification en bas droite de lcran. 2 Choisir Se dconnecter dun rseau. Activation de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau sans fil peut tre active de la mme faon que pour sa dsactivation. Avec le commutateur correspondant Sous Windows, en cliquant laide du bouton droit de la souris licne de la carte rseau sans fil puis en cliquant sur Connexion un rseau 149 -

Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil La carte rseau sans fil en option peut tre configure pour tablir la connectivit du rseau sans fil en utilisant le logiciel intgr dans Windows. Il prend galement en charge la plupart des solutions de scurit standard. Certains paramtres prdfinis seront requis pour cette procdure. Pour les obtenir, consulter votre administrateur de rseau:

Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil 1 Cliquez sur le bouton [Dmarrer], puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration. (Si vous avez Windows Vista et que le Panneau de configuration nest pas en affichage classique, slectionnez Basculer vers laffichage classique sur le panneau de gauche.) 2 Double-cliquez sur licne du Centre de rseau et partage. 3 Slectionnez Gestion du rseau sans fil sur le panneau de gauche. 4 Cliquez sur le bouton [Ajouter]. 5 Selon le type de connexion que vous souhaitez faire, faites une slection. Pour un rseau en mode infrastructure, slectionnez Configurer ma connexion manuellement . Pour un rseau Ad hoc, slectionnez Crer un rseau Ad hoc . 6 Entrez les informations requises. Si ncessaire, consultez voter administrateur rseau pour obtenir des renseignements ce sujet. 7 Dans lventualit dun besoin daide, allez la fentre du Centre de rseau et partage (Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration -> Centre de rseau et partage) et entrez les mots-cls dans la bote Recherche. Se connecter un rseau Aprs avoir configur votre ordinateur, vous pouvez vous connecter un rseau actif en ralisant les tapes suivantes:

1 Cliquez sur licne de la carte rseau sans fil de la zone de notification. 2 Slectionnez Connexion un rseau. 3 Slectionnez un rseau dans la liste qui apparat et cliquez sur le bouton [Connexion]

Connexion au rseau Une fois la configuration effectue, vous pouvez vous connecter un rseau actif en cliquant sur licne Connexion rseau sans fil de la zone de notification. 150 - Configuration de la carte rseau sans fil Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil Dpannage Le tableau ci-dessous prsente les causes possibles et les mesures correctives pour diffrents problmes de rseau sans fil. Si les tapes raliser ne vous sont pas connues, consultez votre administrateur systme ou allez dans

[Dmarrer] -> Aide et soutien (ou support) -> Gestion du rseau et Web. Problme Cause possible Solution possible Connexion rseau indisponible Nom de rseau (SSID) ou cl WEP non valide Connexion en mode Ad hoc: Assurez-vous que le SSID et la cl WEP de tous les ordinateurs du rseau ont t configurs correctement. Les noms de rseau et les valeurs de la cl WEP ou WPA/WPA2 prpartage doivent tre identiques sur chaque ordinateur. Connexion en mode point daccs (Infrastructure): Attribuez aux ordinateurs le mme SSID et la mme cl WEP que ceux du point daccs. Attribuez la mme valeur dauthentification rseau que celle du point daccs. Consultez votre administrateur de rseau si cette valeur est requise. Signal faible et/ou mauvaise qualit de la liaison Connexion en mode Ad hoc: Essayez de rtablir la connexion aprs avoir rapproch lordinateur ou retir les ventuels obstacles. Connexion en mode point daccs (Infrastructure): Essayez de rtablir la connexion aprs avoir rapproch le point daccs ou retir les ventuels obstacles. La carte rseau sans fil est dsactive Assurez-vous que linterrupteur de la carte rseau sans fil est sur ON. Allez dans Dmarrer -> Panneau de configuration, puis double-cliquez sur Centre de mobilit Windows. Si le rseau sans fil est teint, cliquez sur le bouton Allumer le rseau sans fil. Lordinateur connecter est teint Vrifiez si lordinateur est allum. 151 - Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil Problme Cause possible Solution possible Connexion rseau indisponible

(suite) Interfrences RF provenant de points daccs ou dautres rseaux sans fil chec de lauthentification de la carte rseau sans fil Paramtres rseau mal configurs Configuration incorrecte de ladresse IP Lutilisation de canaux RF identiques ou se chevauchant peut nuire au fonctionnement de la carte rseau sans fil. Changez le canal de votre point daccs en tenant compte du canal du priphrique nuisible. Vrifiez les paramtres dauthentification rseau, de chiffrement et de scurit. Si les paramtres de scurit sont mal configurs, en raison, par exemple, dune cl WEP comportant une faute de frappe, dun nom dutilisateur/mot de passe LEAP incorrect ou dun mauvais choix de mthode dauthentification, la carte rseau sans fil sassociera au rseau sans fil mais ne sy authentifiera pas. Vrifiez la configuration des paramtres rseau. Ceci sapplique uniquement aux rseaux qui utilisent des adresses IP statiques. Pour obtenir les paramtres appropris, consultez votre administrateur de rseau. 152 - Dpannage de la carte rseau sans fil Spcifications de la carte de rseau local sans fil Spcifications lment Type de rseau Dbit Frquence active Porte nominale**

Nombre de canaux Spcification Les cartes rseau sans fil intgres Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11abgn 2x2) et Atheros XSPAN 802.11a/b/g/n respectent les normes IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g et 802.11n sur les applications Wi-Fi*.

(Commutation automatique) dbit maximum de 54 Mbit/s (IEEE 802.11n dterminer) 802.11n: 2,4 GHz ou 5 GHz 802.11b/g: 2 400 ~ 2 473 MHz 802.11a: 4 900 ~ 5 850 MHz 802.11a: 12 mtres (40 pi) 54 Mbit/s; 91 mtres (300 pi) 6 Mbit/s 802.11b: 30 mtres (100 pi) 11 Mbit/s; 91 mtres (300 pi) 1 Mbit/s 802.11g: 30 mtres (100 pi) 54 Mbit/s; 91 mtres (300 pi) 1 Mbit/s 802.11n: selon les estimations, les portes des modes 802.11g et 802.11a, dans leurs frquences respectives, sont multiplies par deux. 802.11a: 8, indpendants 802.11b/g: 11, dont 3 sans chevauchement 802.11n: 2,4 GHz - 3 sans chevauchement si la liaison entre canaux nest pas utilise, 2 sans chevauchement si la liaison entre canaux est utilise. 5 GHz - 12 canaux UNII sans chevauchement avec ou sans utilisation de la liaison entre canaux Scurit Types de chiffrement compatible avec WEP, TKIP, AES***, CKIP, WPA 1.0 et WPA 2.0 Nombre maximum recommand dordinateurs connects au rseau local sans fil (en mode Ad hoc) 10 ou moins****

* Type Wi-Fi indique que le test dinterconnectivit de la Wi-Fi Alliance (organisation garantissant linterconnectivit des rseaux sans fil) a russi. 153 - Spcifications de la carte de rseau local sans fil

** La porte peut varier selon certains facteurs (par exemple, nombre de murs, rflectivit des matriaux ou interfrences provenant dautres sources de radiofrquences).

*** Le chiffrement par cl de rseau (WEP) est effectu avec le nombre de bits indiqu ci-dessus, mais lutilisateur peut dfinir une cl de 40 ou 104 bits aprs avoir soustrait la longueur fixe de 24 bits.

**** Selon lenvironnement, le nombre maximum dordinateurs peut tre infrieur. 154 - Spcifications de la carte de rseau local sans fil Utilisation de Bluetooth Le module Bluetooth intgr est un composant offert en option pour les ordinateurs portables Fujitsu. Prsentation de Bluetooth La technologie Bluetooth est conue pour assurer la liaison sans fil faible porte entre divers appareils mobiles, tels que tlphones, ordinateurs portables, imprimantes et camras. La technologie Bluetooth permet dtablir des rseaux personnels (PAN) entre des appareils situs courte distance les uns des autres. LACTIONNEMENT DU COMMUTATEUR DE LINTERFACE RSEAU SANS FIL PERMET DTEINDRE SIMULTANMENT LES INTERFACES RSEAU SANS FIL ET BLUETOOTH. POUR ACTIVER OU DSACTIVER SPARMENT LINTERFACE BLUETOOTH, PROCDEZ COMME SUIT:

CLIQUEZ SUR LICONE BLUETOOTH DANS LA ZONE DE NOTIFICATION SITUE DANS LE COIN INFRIEUR DROIT DE LCRAN. SLECTIONNEZ TURN ADAPTER OFF (TEINDRE LADAPTATEUR). Sources dinformations supplmentaires sur Bluetooth Le module Bluetooth contient un guide de lutilisateur complet qui vous aidera matriser son fonctionnement. Pour accder au fichier daide, 1 1. Cliquez sur licne Bluetooth situe dans la zone de notification. 2 2. Slectionnez Paramtres. La bote de dialogue Paramtres de Bluetooth souvre. 3 3. Cliquez sur l'onglet Partager. 4 4. Cliquez sur le lien En apprendre plus sur le partage avec Bluetooth . Le guide dutilisation Bluetooth apparat. Pour en savoir davantage sur la technologie Bluetooth, visitez le site Web: www.bluetooth.com. 155 - Utilisation de Bluetooth nonc de la FCC relatif lexposition aux rayonnements Cet quipement respecte les normes de la FCC relatives lexposition aux rayonnements, dfinies pour un environnement non contrl. Lantenne Bluetooth est exempte des critres de distance minimale cause de sa faible puissance. Les metteurs de ce priphrique ne doivent pas tre utiliss avec ou proximit immdiate dune antenne ou dun autre metteur. Avis pour le Canada Pour viter que ce service fourni sous licence soit perturb par des interfrences radio, ce matriel doit tre utilis lintrieur et distance des fentres. Si lquipement (ou lantenne de transmission) est install lextrieur, une licence peut tre ncessaire. Garantie Les utilisateurs ne sont pas autoriss modifier ce produit. Toute modification annule la garantie. Cet quipement ne peut tre modifi, altr ou chang en aucune faon sans lautorisation crite de Fujitsu. Toute modification non autorise annulera les autorisations dquipement de la FCC et dIndustrie Canada, de mme que la garantie. 156 - Utilisation de Bluetooth Annexe B: Capteur dempreintes digitales Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Votre systme est dot dun dispositif de reconnaissance des empreintes digitales, situ en bas gauche de lcran. Capteur dempreintes digitales Grce au capteur dempreintes digitales, il nest plus ncessaire de saisir votre nom dutilisateur et votre mot de passe chaque fois que vous voulez:

Figure 52. Capteur dempreintes digitales Ouvrir une session dans Windows Annuler un conomiseur dcran protg par mot de passe Ouvrir une session dans des pages daccueil ncessitant un nom dutilisateur et un mot de passe 157 Aprs avoir inscrit ou enregistr votre empreinte digitale, il vous suffit de glisser le bout de votre doigt sur le capteur pour que le systme vous reconnaisse. Le capteur dempreintes digitales utilise le logiciel Softex OmniPass qui fournit des fonctions de gestion de mot de passe aux systmes dexploitation Microsoft Windows. OmniPass vous permet dutiliser un mot de passe principal pour tous les crans en ligne, toutes les applications Windows et dautres applications demandant un mot de passe. OmniPass demande aux utilisateurs de sauthentifier laide du capteur dempreintes digitales avant de leur donner accs au bureau Windows. Ce priphrique comporte un systme dauthentification scuris qui limite laccs votre ordinateur, vos applications, vos sites Web et aux autres ressources protges par mot de passe. OmniPass prsente une interface graphique conviviale, qui permet de grer de faon scuritaire les mots de passe, les comptes utilisateur et les identits multiples pour chaque utilisateur. CERTAINS MODLES PRENNENT EN CHARGE LA FONCTION DAUTHENTIFICATION AU DMARRAGE (OU PBA: PRE-BOOT AUTHENTICATION). LA PBA VOUS PERMET DE VOUS CONNECTER AVANT QUE LE MCANISME DAUTHENTIFICATION PROPRE WINDOWS NE COMMENCE. LENVIRONNEMENT PBA FONCTIONNE COMME UNE EXTENSION DU BIOS OU DU PROGRAMMA DE DMARRAGE DTERMIN (BOOT FIRMWARE), CE QUI VOUS PERMET DE TRAVAILLER DANS UN ENVIRONNEMENT PLUS SCURIS, INDPENDANT DU SYSTME DEXPLOITATION. Premire mise en marche Cette section vous montre comment prparer votre systme linstallation de lapplication de reconnaissance dempreintes digitales OmniPass. Vous y trouverez des conseils qui vous guideront au long de la procdure dinstallation. Elle indique galement de faon dtaille comment enregistrer votre premier utilisateur dans OmniPass. Installer OmniPass Si lapplication OmniPass a dj t installe sur votre systme, sautez cette section et allez directement Enregistrement des utilisateurs en page 160. Pour savoir si lapplication OmniPass est dj installe, vrifiez si le lments suivants sont prsents:

Une icne OmniPass, dore et en forme de cl, figure dans la zone de notification, dans le coin infrieur droit de lcran. Lapplication Softex apparat dans le groupe de Programmes du menu Dmarrer. 158 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Configuration de systme ncessaire Lapplication OmniPass ncessite de lespace sur votre disque dur ainsi quun systme dexploitation (SE) spcifique. Les exigences minimales sont les suivantes:

Systme dexploitation Windows XP Professionnel ou ultrieur Au moins 35 Mo despace disque disponible Installation de lapplication OmniPass Si lapplication OmniPass est dj installe sur votre systme, allez directement Enregistrement des utilisateurs en page 160. Autrement, continuez suivre les instructions de cette section concernant linstallation du logiciel. POUR INSTALLER LE LOGICIEL, VOUS DEVEZ AVOIR UN LECTEUR OPTIQUE EXTERNE RACCORD VOTRE ORDINATEUR. LUTILISATEUR DSIRANT INSTALLER OMNIPASS DOIT DISPOSER DE DROITS DADMINISTRATEUR DANS LE SYSTME. SI VOUS NAVEZ PAS DE TELS DROITS, FERMEZ LA SESSION ET OUVREZ-EN UNE AUTRE AVEC UN NOM DUTILISATEUR POSSDANT CES DROITS AVANT DE POURSUIVRE LINSTALLATION DOMNIPASS. Pour installer OmniPass dans votre systme, vous devez excuter les oprations suivantes:

1 Omnipass est compris dans les applications bonus de Fujitsu. Pour installer Omnipass, ouvrez les applications bonus de Fujitsu laide de licne correspondante situe sur le bureau, puis slectionnez Softex Omnipass et cliquez sur [Installer]. 2 Une fois linstallation dOmniPass termine, vous serez invit redmarrer votre systme. Vous pourrez ensuite utiliser OmniPass. Si vous dcidez de ne pas redmarrer votre systme immdiatement aprs linstallation, OmniPass ne sera pas disponible avant le prochain redmarrage. 3 Le programme dinstallation place automatiquement une icne (Softex OmniPass) dans le panneau de configuration Windows, ainsi quune icne dore en forme de cl dans la zone de notification. Vrification des informations concernant votre version dOmniPass Aprs avoir install OmniPass et redmarr votre systme, vous pouvez dcider de vrifier la version du logiciel. 159 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Pour vrifier votre version dOmniPass:

1 Double-cliquez sur licne en forme de cl OmniPass de votre barre de tches Windows (gnralement en bas droite de lcran), ou Cliquez sur le bouton Dmarrer, puis slectionnez Panneau de configuration. Double-cliquez sur Softex OmniPass dans le panneau de configuration et vous verrez apparatre le Centre de contrle OmniPass. Sil ne saffiche pas, cela signifie que le programme nest pas install correctement, ou Cliquez sur le bouton Dmarrer, slectionnez Tous les programmes, puis le groupe de programmes Softex et enfin, dans ce sous-menu, cliquez sur Centre de contrle OmniPass. 2 Les informations sur la version sont contenues dans la partie droite de la fentre Centre de contrle Omnipass. Dsinstallation dOmniPass LUTILISATEUR DSIRANT DSINSTALLER OMNIPASS DOIT DISPOSER DE DROITS DADMINISTRATEUR DANS LE SYSTME. SI VOUS NAVEZ PAS DE TELS DROITS, FERMEZ LA SESSION ET OUVREZ-EN UNE AUTRE AVEC UN NOM DUTILISATEUR POSSDANT CES DROITS AVANT DE POURSUIVRE LA DSINSTALLATION DOMNIPASS. Pour supprimer lapplication OmniPass de votre systme:

1 Cliquez sur Dmarrer dans la barre des tches. Slectionnez Paramtres, puis Panneau de configuration. 2 Double-cliquez sur Ajouter ou supprimer des Programmes (Windows 7: Programmes et fonctions). 3 Slectionnez OmniPass, puis cliquez sur Modifier/Supprimer. 4 Suivez les instructions de dsinstallation de lapplication OmniPass. 5 Aprs la dsinstallation dOmniPass, redmarrez votre systme lorsque vous y tes invit. Enregistrement des utilisateurs Avant de pouvoir utiliser les fonctions dOmniPass, vous devez dabord enregistrer un utilisateur dans ce programme. 160 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Concept du mot de passe principal Les ressources dun ordinateur sont souvent protges par des mots de passe. Lorsque vous vous connectez votre ordinateur, que vous consultez vos courriels, que vous effectuez des oprations bancaires sur Internet, que vous payez des factures en ligne ou que vous accdez aux ressources dun rseau, il vous est souvent demand de vous identifier. Il se peut alors que vous ayez besoin de dizaines de mots de passe dont vous devez vous rappeler. Lors de lenregistrement dun utilisateur, un mot de passe principal est cr son intention. Ce mot de passe remplace tous les autres mots de passe des sites sur lesquels lutilisateur senregistre avec OmniPass. Exemple: Un utilisateur, Jean, installe OmniPass sur son systme (son ordinateur de maison) et inscrit un utilisateur OmniPass avec le nom dutilisateur Jean_01 et mot de passe freq14. Il se rend ensuite sur son site Internet de courriel pour ouvrir une session dans son compte. Il entre, comme dhabitude, son nom dutilisateur et son mot de passe (par exemple, Jean_02 et lifebook ), mais demande OmniPass de Mmoriser le mot de passe au lieu de cliquer sur Ouvrir session. Dornavant, chaque fois quil retournera sur ce site, OmniPass linvitera fournir ses informations didentification. Jean saisira alors les informations OmniPass (Jean_01 et freq14) dans linvite dauthentification dOmniPass et pourra accder son compte de courriel. Il peut rpter cette opration avec autant de sites Web ou de ressources protges par mot de passe quil le souhaite et pourra accder tous ces sites laide de ses informations didentification dutilisateur OmniPass (Jean_01 et freq14). Pour ce faire, il devra utiliser le systme sur lequel il sest enregistr titre dutilisateur OmniPass. En fait, OmniPass ne change pas les informations didentification de la ressource protge par mot de passe. Si Jean veut accder son courriel depuis un ordinateur sur lequel le compte OmniPass nexiste pas, il devra saisir ses informations didentification originales (Jean_02 et lifebook). Dans ce cas, sil tente dutiliser ses informations didentification OmniPass, laccs au site lui sera refus. CETTE PROCDURE DENREGISTREMENT REPOSE SUR LHYPOTHSE QUE VOUS NE VOULEZ INTGRER OMNIPASS AUCUN PRIPHRIQUE DAUTHENTIFICATION OU AUTRE EMPLACEMENT DE STOCKAGE. SI VOUS SOUHAITEZ DISPOSER DE CETTE FONCTIONNALIT, CONSULTEZ LES SECTIONS CORRESPONDANTES DU PRSENT DOCUMENT. 161 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Enregistrement de base LAssistant denregistrement vous guidera travers les tapes denregistrement dun utilisateur. Sauf indication contraire de votre part, lAssistant denregistrement sera lanc aprs linstallation dOmniPass au moment de louverture dune session Windows. Si lassistant napparat pas, vous pouvez le lancer en cliquant sur Dmarrer dans la barre de tches Windows. Slectionnez ensuite Programmes, puis Softex et cliquez sur Enregistrer un nouvel utilisateur. 1 Cliquez sur Enregistrement pour procder la vrification de lutilisateur et du mot de passe. Par dfaut, lAssistant denregistrement entre les informations didentification de lutilisateur Windows actuellement connect. 2 Entrez le mot de passe qui vous sert ouvrir une session dans Windows. Celui-ci deviendra le mot de passe principal pour cet utilisateur OmniPass. Dans la plupart des cas, la valeur de Domaine: correspondra au nom de votre ordinateur Windows. Dans un environnement dentreprise, ou lorsque vous accdez des ressources professionnelles, il se peut que Domaine: ne corresponde pas au nom de votre ordinateur. Cliquez sur [Suivant] pour continuer. 3 Au cours de cette tape, OmniPass prend votre empreinte digitale. Pour de plus amples informations, voir Capteur dempreintes digitales en page 162. 4 Un cran de flicitations, indiquant que lenregistrement de lutilisateur est termin, apparatra. 5 Cliquez sur [OK] pour quitter lassistant denregistrement. Capteur dempreintes digitales Lenregistrement dune empreinte digitale augmentera la scurit de votre systme et simplifiera la procdure dauthentification. Lenregistrement des empreintes digitales se fait partir du Centre de contrle OmniPass. Une fois quun utilisateur Omnipass a ouvert une session, suivez le chemin suivant : Dmarrer > Tous les programmes > Tous les Softex > Enregistrer un nouvel utilisateur. 1 Pendant la procdure denregistrement initial de lutilisateur, vous serez invit slectionner le doigt qui sera enregistr. Les doigts dj enregistrs seront marqus dun crochet vert. Le doigt slectionn pour lenregistrement sera marqu dune flche rouge. OmniPass vous permet de renregistrer un doigt. Si vous choisissez un doigt qui a dj t enregistr et que vous poursuivez la procdure denregistrement, OmniPass enregistre lempreinte digitale actuelle la place de lancienne empreinte. Slectionnez un doigt enregistrer et cliquez sur [Suivant]. 162 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales 2 Il est temps pour OmniPass de prendre lempreinte que vous avez choisie. Plusieurs tentatives peuvent tre ncessaires avant quOmniPass prenne votre empreinte digitale. Si OmniPass ny parvient pas ou si lcran de capture de lempreinte digitale expire, cliquez sur [Prcdent] pour redmarrer le processus denregistrement dempreinte digitale. Votre systme est quip dun capteur dempreintes digitales glissement. Les capteurs glissement sont de taille rduite et ressemblent un mince rectangle allong. Pour prendre une empreinte digitale, faites glisser ou tirez doucement vers vous le bout de votre doigt sur le capteur ( partir de la deuxime articulation). Un glissement trop rapide ou trop lent pourrait faire chouer la prise dempreintes. Lcran Choisir un doigt dispose dun bouton [Pratique];

cliquez dessus pour pratiquer la prise de votre empreinte digitale. Lorsque vous matrisez la prise dempreintes digitales, vous pouvez procder lenregistrement dun doigt. 3 Lorsque OmniPass a correctement pris lempreinte digitale, lcran Vrifier lempreinte digitale saffiche automatiquement. Pour vrifier lenregistrement de votre empreinte, placez le bout de votre doigt sur le capteur comme lors dune prise dempreinte digitale. Si lempreinte a t vrifie avec succs, une empreinte digitale verte apparat dans la fentre de prise et le texte Vrification russie saffiche en dessous. 4 Aprs avoir enregistr et vrifi votre empreinte digitale, vous aurez la possibilit dActiver la PBA avec le doigt enregistr (Enable PBA with enrolled finger). Si vous activez cette option, vous devez choisir deux doigts qui seront enregistrs dans la procdure PBA. Si lenregistrement est russi, lcran Statut denregistrement du doigt dans la procdure PBA indiquera Enregistrement du doigt russi pour la procdure PBA . SI VOUS ACTIVEZ LA PBA SUR VOTRE SYSTME, VOUS DEVEZ DFINIR UN MOT DE PASSE UTILISATEUR ET UN MOT DE PASSE SUPERVISEUR DANS LES PARAMTRES DE DMARRAGE. POUR DE PLUS AMPLES INFORMATIONS, REPORTEZ-VOUS VOIR MOTS DE PASSE DACCS AU DISQUE DUR EN PAGE 63. Utilisation dOmniPass Vous pouvez maintenant commencer utiliser OmniPass. Son utilisation rgulire vous permettra de simplifier vos procdures dauthentification. 163 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Remplacement du mot de passe Vous utiliserez souvent la fonction de remplacement du mot de passe. Lorsque vous allez sur un site Internet accs restreint (par exemple, de votre banque, de votre courrier lectronique, de paiement ou denchres en ligne), vous serez toujours invit entrer vos rfrences de connexion. OmniPass peut dtecter ces invites et vous pouvez lui enseigner enregistrer vos rfrences. La prochaine fois que vous visiterez un de ces sites, vous pourrez vous authentifier laide de votre empreinte digitale pour y accder. Barre doutils dauthentification OmniPass Aprs avoir install OmniPass et redmarr votre ordinateur, vous remarquerez la prsence dune nouvelle bote de dialogue au dbut de votre session Windows. Il sagit de la barre doutils dauthentification OmniPass. Celle-ci saffiche chaque fois que le systme dauthentification est appel. Ce systme peut tre appel frquemment: pendant louverture dune session Windows, lors de la connexion OmniPass, lorsque vous dverrouillez votre poste de travail, lorsque vous reprenez le systme depuis le mode veille prolonge, lorsque vous dverrouillez un conomiseur dcran activ par mot de passe, lors du remplacement du mot de passe dun site mmoris ou des noms de connexion dapplications, etc. Lorsque cette barre doutils saffiche, OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier. La fentre Authentification de la connexion indique la fonction restreinte par OmniPass laquelle vous tentez de vous connecter. Les icnes en bas gauche (empreinte digitale et cl) indiquent les mthodes dauthentification disponibles. Les mthodes slectionnes sont en surbrillance, contrairement aux mthodes non slectionnes. Lorsque vous cliquez sur licne pour obtenir une mthode dauthentification non slectionne, linvite dauthentification associe cette mthode saffiche. linvite dauthentification, vous devez fournir les informations didentification appropries: un doigt enregistr dans la fentre dempreintes digitales ou votre mot de passe principal dans la case de mot de passe principal (licne en forme de cl). Mmorisation dun mot de passe OmniPass peut mmoriser toute application, toute interface graphique ou toute autre ressource protge par un mot de passe. laide de la procdure suivante, vous pourrez sauvegarder dans OmniPass toutes les informations permettant de vous identifier. Ces informations seront ensuite associes votre mot de passe principal ou votre empreinte digitale. Allez sur un site comportant une procdure de connexion (nom dutilisateur et mot de passe), mais ne vous connectez pas tout de suite. linvite de connexion au site, entrez votre nom dutilisateur et votre mot de passe dans les champs appropris, mais nentrez pas sur le site (nappuyez pas sur [Entrer], [Soumettre], [OK], ou Connexion). Cliquez avec 164 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales le bouton droit de la souris sur licne OmniPass de la zone de notification et slectionnez Mmoriser le mot de passe dans le sous-menu. Le curseur flch Windows devient un curseur OmniPass en forme de cl dore. Cliquez sur ce curseur dans la zone dinvite de connexion, mais ne cliquez pas sur le bouton [Connexion] ou [Envoyer]. Association dun nom convivial Aprs avoir cliqu sur le curseur en forme de cl prs de linvite de connexion, OmniPass vous invitera entrer un nom convivial pour ce site. Vous devez entrer un terme qui vous rappelle le site Internet, la socit ou le service auquel vous vous connectez. Dans sa base de donnes scurise, OmniPass associe ce nom convivial au site Internet. Paramtres supplmentaires pour mmoriser un site Lorsque vous tes invit entrer un nom convivial, vous pouvez dfinir la manire dont OmniPass vous authentifie sur ce site. Trois choix sont votre disposition pour chaque site mmoris par OmniPass. Le paramtre par dfaut est Cliquer automatiquement sur le bouton OK ou Soumettre pour ce site protg par mot de passe une fois lutilisateur authentifi. Avec ce paramtre, chaque fois que vous accdez ce site, OmniPass vous demandera votre mot de passe principal ou votre priphrique dauthentification dempreintes digitales. Lorsque votre authentification est complte par OmniPass, vous tes automatiquement connect au site. La deuxime option est moins scuritaire: Entrer automatiquement sur ce site protg par mot de passe lorsquil est activ. Ne pas demander dauthentification. Cochez la case suprieure pour slectionner ce choix. Ensuite, chaque fois que vous vous connectez ce site, OmniPass vous donnera accs sans vous demander de vous authentifier. CE PARAMTRE EST PLUS PRATIQUE CAR DS QUE VOUS DEMANDEZ UN SITE QUI Y EST ASSOCI, VOUS SAUTEZ LA PROCDURE DAUTHENTIFICATION ET VOUS ACCDEZ INSTANTANMENT AU SITE. CEPENDANT, SI VOUS LAISSEZ VOTRE ORDINATEUR SANS SURVEILLANCE AVEC VOTRE CONNEXION OMNIPASS ACTIVE, TOUTE PERSONNE UTILISANT VOTRE SYSTME PEUT ENTRER SUR LES SITES PROTGS EN USURPANT VOTRE IDENTIT. Si vous dslectionnez les deux cases dans Paramtres pour ce site protg par mot de passe, OmniPass vous demande votre mot de passe principal ou votre priphrique dauthentification. Lorsque votre authentification est complte par OmniPass, vos informations didentification saffichent linvite de connexion du site. Toutefois, vous devez cliquer sur le bouton [OK], [Envoyer] ou [Connexion] pour accder au site. 165 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Cliquez sur Terminer pour achever la procdure de mmorisation du mot de passe. Lemplacement du site, les informations didentification pour y accder et les paramtres dauthentification OmniPass correspondant ce site sont dsormais sauvegards dans la base de donnes scurise dOmniPass. Les paramtres dauthentification dOmniPass (Paramtres pour ce site protg par mot de passe) peuvent toujours tre modifis dans Gestion du coffre-fort. Connexion un site mmoris Selon les informations contenues dans Paramtres pour ce site protg par mot de passe, OmniPass vous invitera ou non vous authentifier lorsque vous retournerez un site mmoris. Ces informations peuvent tre modifies dans Gestion du coffre-fort. Les cas suivants sappliquent lutilisation dOmniPass pour se connecter : Windows, aux sites mmoriss et toutes les autres ressources protges par mot de passe. Avec mot de passe principal Lorsque vous retournez un site mmoris avec OmniPass, il se peut que le systme vous demande un mot de passe principal. Entrez votre mot de passe principal et vous serez autoris accder au site. Connexion Windows avec un capteur dempreintes digitales Lorsque vous vous connectez Windows laide dun capteur dempreintes, la fentre de prise dempreintes digitales apparat ct de lcran de connexion Windows. Placez votre doigt enregistr sur le capteur pour que le systme vous identifie. Vous serez simultanment connect Windows et OmniPass. La fentre de prise dempreinte saffiche galement si vous avez utilis Ctrl-Alt-Suppr pour verrouiller le systme. En outre, le capteur dempreintes peut tre utilis pour vous reconnecter, comme indiqu ci-dessus. SI UN ORDINATEUR EST VERROUILL ET QUOMNIPASS DTECTE UN UTILISATEUR DIFFRENT SE RECONNECTANT AVEC SON EMPREINTE DIGITALE, LE PREMIER UTILISATEUR SERA DCONNECT ET LE SECOND CONNECT. Gestion des mots de passe OmniPass propose une interface qui vous permet de grer vos mots de passe. Pour accder cette interface graphique, cliquez deux fois sur la cl OmniPass dans la zone de notification. Cliquez sur Gestion du coffre-fort; vous serez invit vous authentifier. Lorsque vous avez accd Gestion du coffre-fort, cliquez sur Grer les mots de passe sous Paramtres du coffre-fort. Linterface Grer les mots de passe apparat avec une liste de noms conviviaux. 166 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Si vous dsirez afficher les informations didentification sauvegardes pour un site Internet mmoris, mettez en surbrillance la ressource souhaite sous Bote de dialogue Protection par mot de passe et cliquez sur Afficher les valeurs. En cas de rinitialisation dun mot de passe ou dexpiration dun compte, vous pouvez supprimer les informations didentification sauvegardes dans OmniPass. Mettez en surbrillance la ressource souhaite sous Bote de dialogue Protection par mot de passe, puis cliquez sur Supprimer la page. Vous serez invit confirmer la suppression du mot de passe. Les deux cases cocher dans Grer les mots de passe dterminent si OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier ou vous connecte directement au site mmoris. Si vous tentez dutiliser Mmoriser le mot de passe sur un site dj connu, OmniPass efface les anciennes informations didentification. Le remplacement de votre mot de passe Windows constitue lexception la rgle ci-dessus. Si votre mot de passe est rinitialis dans Windows, le changement sera dtect par OmniPass qui vous invitera Mettre jour ou Reconfirmer le mot de passe. Entrez votre nouveau mot de passe Windows dans linvite, puis cliquez sur OK. Votre mot de passe principal Omnipass sera toujours votre mot de passe Windows. Identits dutilisateur OmniPass Les identits permettent aux utilisateurs OmniPass de possder plusieurs comptes sur un mme site (par exemple, claude@biblomail.com et claudepicard@biblomail.com). Si OmniPass ne vous a pas fourni didentits, vous ne pourrez mmoriser quun seul compte par site. Pour crer et grer des identits, cliquez deux fois sur la cl OmniPass dans la zone de notification. Cliquez sur Gestion du coffre-fort. OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier. Lorsque vous avez accd Gestion du coffre-fort, cliquez sur Grer les identits sous Paramtres du coffre-fort. Vous pouvez seulement grer les identits de lutilisateur OmniPass actuellement connect. Pour ajouter une nouvelle identit, cliquez sur Nouvelle identit ou double-cliquez sur Cliquer ici pour ajouter une nouvelle identit. Nommez la nouvelle identit et cliquez sur [OK], puis sur [Appliquer]. Vous pouvez dsormais basculer vers la nouvelle identit et dmarrer la mmorisation des mots de passe. Pour supprimer une identit, mettez en surbrillance lidentit supprimer et cliquez sur [Supprimer lidentit], puis cliquez sur [Appliquer]. LORSQUE VOUS SUPPRIMEZ UNE IDENTIT, TOUS LES SITES MMORISS ET LES BOTES DE DIALOGUE PROTECTION PAR MOT DE PASSE ASSOCIS LIDENTIT SONT PERDUS. 167 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Pour dfinir lidentit par dfaut, mettez en surbrillance lidentit souhaite puis cliquez sur [Dfinir par dfaut]

et cliquez sur [Appliquer] pour vrifier que les paramtres sont bien enregistrs. Si vous accdez OmniPass laide dun capteur dempreintes digitales, vous serez automatiquement connect lidentit par dfaut de lutilisateur OmniPass associ lempreinte. Si vous utilisez la procdure de connexion laide du mot de passe principal, vous pouvez choisir lidentit avec laquelle vous vous connectez. Choix de lidentit de lutilisateur lors de la connexion Pour choisir votre identit lors de la connexion, tapez votre nom dutilisateur dans le champ Nom dutilisateur : Appuyez sur [Tab] et assurez-vous que le champ Domaine: se remplit automatiquement. Cliquez sur le champ Mot de passe: pour pointer le curseur dessus et vous verrez le menu droulant dans le champ Identit : Slectionnez lidentit souhaite puis cliquez sur OK. Changement didentit de lutilisateur Pour changer les identits tout moment, cliquez avec le bouton droit de la souris sur licne OmniPass dans la zone de notification, puis cliquez sur Changer lidentit de lutilisateur dans le sous-menu. La bote de dialogue Changer didentit apparat. Slectionnez lidentit souhaite puis cliquez sur OK. Gestion des mots de passe et des identits Sur linterface Grer les mots de passe de longlet Gestion du coffre-fort du Centre de contrle OmniPass, il existe une liste de slection droulante nomme Identit. Ce champ vous permet de choisir lidentit pour laquelle vous dsirez grer les mots de passe. Lorsque vous slectionnez une identit dans cette liste, le systme affiche seulement les botes de dialogue Protection par mot de passe associes cette identit. Vous pouvez effectuer toutes les fonctions expliques dans Gestion des mots de passe en page 166. Configuration dOmniPass Cette section vous donne un aperu de la fonction Exportation/Importation et du Centre de contrle OmniPass. Exportation et importation dutilisateurs VOUS NE POUVEZ PAS IMPORTER UN UTILISATEUR DANS OMNIPASS SI UN UTILISATEUR PORTANT LE MME NOM Y EST DJ ENREGISTR. 168 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Vous pouvez importer et exporter des utilisateurs dans et hors dOmniPass laide du Centre de contrle. Le processus dexportation permet de sauvegarder tous les sites mmoriss, les informations didentification et les empreintes enregistres dun utilisateur OmniPass. Toutes les donnes OmniPass dun utilisateur sont sauvegardes dans un fichier de base de donnes crypt unique. Durant le processus dimportation, vous devez utiliser les informations de connexion Windows de lutilisateur export. Si les informations didentification appropries ne sont pas fournies, le profil utilisateur ne sera pas import. VOUS DEVEZ EXPORTER PRIODIQUEMENT VOTRE PROFIL UTILISATEUR ET LE SAUVEGARDER DANS UN ENDROIT SR. SIL DEVAIT ARRIVER QUELQUE CHOSE VOTRE SYSTME, VOUS POUVEZ IMPORTER VOTRE PROFIL OMNIPASS SUR UN NOUVEAU SYSTME ET DISPOSER INSTANTANMENT DE TOUS VOS PARAMTRES ET EMPREINTES DIGITALES MMORISS. NOUBLIEZ PAS VOS INFORMATIONS DIDENTIFICATION WINDOWS UTILISES LORS DE LEXPORTATION. LORSQUE VOUS PROCDEZ LIMPORTATION DUN PROFIL UTILISATEUR, OMNIPASS VOUS INVITE VOUS AUTHENTIFIER. LES INFORMATIONS DIDENTIFICATION PERMETTANT DIMPORTER UN PROFIL SONT LES RFRENCES DE CONNEXION WINDOWS DE LUTILISATEUR EXPORT. CES RFRENCES SONT CELLES QUIL FALLAIT SOUMETTRE LORSQUE LE PROFIL DUTILISATEUR A T EXPORT. VOUS AUREZ BESOIN DU NOM DUTILISATEUR, DU MOT DE PASSE ET DU DOMAINE. Exporter un profil dutilisateur OmniPass Pour exporter un profil utilisateur, ouvrez le Centre de contrle OmniPass et cliquez sur Excutez lassistant de gestion des utilisateurs. Cliquez sur Sauvegarder le profil dun utilisateur OmniPass. OmniPass vous invitera vous authentifier. Une fois lauthentification russie, vous devez nommer le profil utilisateur OmniPass et dcider o lenregistrer. Un fichier .opi est gnr et vous devez en sauvegarder une copie dans un endroit sr. Ce fichier .opi contient toutes vos donnes dutilisateur OmniPass. Il est crypt et protg par mot de passe. Ce profil utilisateur ne contient AUCUN de vos fichiers de donnes crypts. Importer un profil dutilisateur OmniPass Pour importer un profil utilisateur, ouvrez le Centre de contrle OmniPass et cliquez sur [Importer/exporter un utilisateur]

sous Grer les utilisateurs. Cliquez sur Restaurer le profil dun utilisateur OmniPass. OmniPass vous invite ensuite rechercher le fichier export auparavant (fichier .opi). Lorsque vous slectionnez le fichier .opi pour limporter, OmniPass vous invite vous authentifier. Les informations didentification permettant dimporter un profil sont les rfrences de connexion Windows de lutilisateur export. Ces rfrences sont celles quil fallait soumettre lorsque le profil dutilisateur a t export. Vous aurez besoin du Nom dutilisateur, du Mot de passe et du Domaine. Si vous avez oubli la valeur pour Domaine, celle-ci doit correspondre au nom de votre ordinateur dans un environnement PC ou SOHO. OmniPass vous informe si le profil utilisateur a t correctement import. 169 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Informations importantes sur les oprations dimportation et dexportation Supposons que vous exportez un profil dutilisateur Windows local depuis OmniPass. Vous voulez importer ce profil sur un autre ordinateur dot dOmniPass. Avant de pouvoir importer le profil, un utilisateur Windows avec les mmes rfrences de connexion doit tre cr sur lordinateur important le profil. Exemple: Jai un utilisateur Windows avec le nom dutilisateur Thomas et le mot de passe Soleil sur mon systme. Jai enregistr Thomas dans OmniPass et mmoris des mots de passe. Je veux transfrer tous mes mots de passe vers le nouveau systme. Jexporte le profil utilisateur OmniPass de Thomas. Jaccde mon nouveau systme et laide du panneau de configuration, je cre un utilisateur avec le nom dutilisateur Thomas et le mot de passe Soleil. Je peux maintenant importer les donnes utilisateur OmniPass dans le nouveau systme. Si vous exportez un utilisateur propre OmniPass, vous pouvez importer cet utilisateur dans tout ordinateur excutant OmniPass, condition quun utilisateur portant le mme nom ny soit pas dj enregistr. Si vous tentez dimporter un profil utilisateur portant le mme nom quun utilisateur dj enregistr dans OmniPass, le processus dimportation choue. Centre de contrle OmniPass Le Centre de contrle Omnipass souvre, vous pouvez alors excutez diffrentes tches mnagres dans Omnipass. Pour plus de dtails sur les fonctions offertes par le Centre de contrle, allez :

1 1. Dmarrer > Tous les programmes > Softex > Centre de contrle Omnipass. 2 2. Lorsque le Centre de contrle Omnipass souvre, cliquez sur le lien Aide situ dans la partie gauche de la fentre. Dpannage Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser OmniPass pour crer des utilisateurs Windows. Vous devez dabord crer lutilisateur Windows, ce qui ncessite des droits dadministrateur. Une fois lutilisateur Windows cr, vous pouvez lajouter dans OmniPass avec le mme nom dutilisateur et le mme mot de passe. Impossible dajouter des utilisateurs Windows dans OmniPass Si vous rencontrez des difficults pour ajouter un utilisateur Windows dans OmniPass, vous devrez peut-tre modifier vos paramtres de scurit locale. Pour ce faire, allez Dmarrer, Panneau de configuration, Outils dadministration et Paramtres de scurit locale. Ouvrez Stratgies locales et Options de scurit, puis double-cliquez sur Accs rseau: Modle de partage et de scurit pour les comptes locaux. La configuration correcte doit tre Classique Les utilisateurs locaux sauthentifient eux-mmes. 170 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Impossible dajouter un utilisateur avec un mot de passe vide dans OmniPass Si vous rencontrez des difficults pour ajouter un utilisateur avec un mot de passe vide dans OmniPass, vous devrez peut-tre modifier vos paramtres de scurit locale. Essayez dabord la procdure explique dans la section Impossible dajouter un utilisateur Windows dans OmniPass. Si le problme persiste, essayez la procdure suivante. Cliquez sur Dmarrer, Panneau de configuration, Outils dadministration et Paramtres de scurit locale. Ouvrez Stratgies locales et Options de scurit, puis double-cliquez sur Comptes: restreindre lutilisation de mots de passe vierges par le compte local louverture de session console. Ce paramtre doit tre configur sur Dsactiv. Durant la procdure douverture dune session Windows, une bote de dialogue saffiche aprs lauthentification OmniPass Aprs avoir install OmniPass sur votre systme, vous pouvez choisir de vous connecter Windows laide dOmniPass. Vous vous authentifiez avec OmniPass ( laide du mot de passe principal ou dun priphrique de scurit enregistr) et OmniPass vous connecte Windows. Au cours du processus dauthentification, il se peut que la bote de dialogue Erreur de connexion saffiche. Cette bote de dialogue apparat si OmniPass na pas russi vous connecter Windows laide des informations didentification fournies (nom dutilisateur et mot de passe). Ceci peut arriver dans les circonstances suivantes:

Votre mot de passe Windows a chang. Votre compte Windows a t dsactiv. Si vous rencontrez des difficults cause de la premire raison, vous devrez mettre jour OmniPass avec votre mot de passe de compte Windows modifi. Cliquez sur Mettre jour le mot de passe et une bote de dialogue vous invitera reconfirmer votre mot de passe. Entrez le nouveau mot de passe Windows et cliquez sur OK. Si lerreur persiste, il est peu probable que le problme soit d la modification de votre mot de passe Windows. 171 - Prsentation du capteur dempreintes digitales Annexe C: Utilisation de laffichage Intel Wireless Display Utilisation de la technologie Wireless Display La nouvelle technologie Intel Wireless Display (WiDi) est offerte en option sur certains ordinateurs Fujitsu LIFEBOOK. Si votre systme est dot de la technologie Intel WiDi, veuillez lire ces informations sur son utilisation. La technologie Intel WiDi vous permet dafficher et de partager sur un tlviseur grand cran les images dun ordinateur microprocesseur Intel Core. La technologie Intel WiDi permet donc dafficher sur un tlviseur grand cran les donnes et les applications disponibles sur votre disque dur, sur votre rseau maison ou sur Internet. Votre famille et vos amis nauront plus se bousculer autour de lordinateur pour profiter pleinement des images stockes. Comme son nom lindique, la technologie Intel WiDi fonctionne sans fil. Veuillez cependant prendre note que pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez vous procurer un adaptateur daffichage produit par une autre entreprise. Ladaptateur daffichage est reli au tlviseur via le port HDMI (prfrable) ou avec des cble A/V composite. LES PREMIERS ADAPTATEURS DAFFICHAGE SONT DISPONIBLES CHEZ LES DTAILLANTS DE PRODUITS LECTRONIQUES. VOUS POUVEZ UTILISER NIMPORTE QUEL ADAPTATEUR DAFFICHAGE COMPATIBLE AVEC INTEL WIRELESS DISPLAY. SI VOTRE TLVISEUR POSSDE DES PORTS HDMI, CETTE MTHODE DE CONNEXION EST PRFRABLE UNE CONNEXION PAR CBLES COMPOSITES. 172 SI VOUS AVEZ ACHET UN SYSTME AVEC CARTE RSEAU LOCAL SANS FIL INTEL ET TECHNOLOGIE INTEL WIDI EN OPTION, IL POSSIBLE QUE LAPPLICATION WIDI SOIT PR-INSTALLE (SELON LA CONFIGURATION DE VOTRE SYSTME). LES SYSTMES AYANT LA FONCTION INTEL WIDI PR-INSTALLE AFFICHENT UN ICNE WIDI SUR LEUR BUREAU WINDOWS. SI CETTE ICNE NEST PAS AFFICHE, LA FONCTIONNALIT INTEL WIDI SERA INSTALLE DS QUE VOUS EXCUTEREZ LE LOGICIEL CLICKME. LA FONCTIONNALIT INTEL WIDI NE PEUT FONCTIONNER QUAVEC UNE CARTE DE RSEAU LOCAL SANS FIL INTEL. SEUL LE LECTEUR WINDOWS MEDIA PEUT TRE UTILIS POUR LIRE DES DOCUMENTS AVEC WIDI 2.0. AVANT DUTILISER LA FONCTIONNALIT INTEL WIDI, VRIFIEZ SI LE COMMUTATEUR DE RSEAU SANS FIL EST LA POSITION DE MARCHE. VEUILLEZ PRENDRE NOTE QUE LE CONTENU SCURIS NE PEUT TRE AFFICH AVEC INTEL WIDI 2.0. LES DOCUMENTS AVEC PROTECTION DE LECTURE DE CONTENU, COMME LES DISQUES BLU-RAY ET LES FILMS SUR DVD, NE SONT PAS PRIS EN CHARGE PAR WIDI. EN MODE DAFFICHAGE WIDI, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE VOUS OBSERVIEZ UN LGER DCALAGE LORSQUE VOUS DPLACEZ LA SOURIS OU QUE VOUS TAPEZ DU TEXTE. LA PREMIRE FOIS QUE VOUS UTILISEZ LAFFICHAGE WIDI, LA RSOLUTION DAFFICHAGE CHOISIE PAR DFAUT EST 1280X720. SI VOUS DSIREZ CHOISIR UNE AUTRE RSOLUTION, ALLEZ PANNEAU DE CONFIGURATION - PROPRITS DAFFICHAGE, SOUS LONGLET PARAMTRES. LORSQUE VOUS CHOISISSEZ UNE RSOLUTION, ELLE CONTINUE SAPPLIQUER PAR DFAUT JUSQU CE QUE VOUS CHOISISSIEZ UNE AUTRE RSOLUTION. Dmarrer lapplication WiDi Pour activer laffichage Intel WiDi, excutez les oprations suivantes:

1 Assurez-vous quun adaptateur daffichage appropri est connect au tlviseur sur lequel vous dsirez utiliser laffichage WiDi et allumez le tlviseur. 2 Si vous navez pas encore activ le commutateur de communication sans fil sur votre portable, faites-le maintenant. 3 Cliquez sur licne WiDi de votre bureau Windows ou sur le raccourci correspondant de votre menu Dmarrer. 4 Limage de lordinateur est automatiquement affiche sur le tlviseur grand cran. Aprs le jumelage initial entre lordinateur portable et un adaptateur daffichage compatible, vous pouvez paramtrer ladaptateur pour quil soit automatiquement connect par dfaut. Dans le futur, vous naurez plus qu ouvrir lapplication pour connecter les deux appareils. Si vous dsirez des informations dtailles sur lutilisation et le dpannage de la fonctionnalit WiDi, cliquez sur licne WiDi, puis cliquez sur le bouton [Aide] dans le coin suprieur droit afin douvrir le fichier daide daffichage sans fil. 173 - Utilisation de la technologie Wireless Display Index A propos de ce guide 1, 8 Adaptateur secteur 59 Adaptateur auto/avion 59, 60 adaptateurs de fiches 115 Alimentation adaptateur auto/avion 59 adaptateur secteur 59 allumer 61 dfectuosit 95 teindre 68 gestion 66 problmes 97 sources 59 voyant 24 Auto-diagnostic de mise sous tension 62, 100 B Baie modulaire 47 installation 47 remplacement hors tension 48 retrait 47 Batterie 70 augmentation de la longvit 116 batterie au lithium 70 conservation de l'nergie 66 court-circuite 72 174 dfectueuse 96 entretien 115 puise 96 faible 72 mode veille 72 niveau de charge 25 problmes 96 remplacement 73 remplacement hors tension 73 remplacement sous tension 73 BIOS guide 63 utilitaire de configuration 63 Bluetooth informations supplmentaires 155 Bouton de veille/reprise 13 Bouton droit 17 Boutons de scurit fonctions 49 Boutons de scurit/PC Tablette LIFEBOOK 15, 49 C Cble de sortie c.c. 59 Capteur d'empreintes digitales barre doutils dauthentification OmniPass 164 connexion un site mmoris 166 dsinstallation dOmniPass 160 enregistrement dune empreinte digitale 162 enregistrement des utilisateurs 160 mmorisation dun mot de passe 164 premire mise en marche 158 remplacement du mot de passe 163 utilisation dOmniPass 163 Capteur dempreintes digitales 17, 157 Carte Memory Stick/Secure Digital installation 76 Carte MS/SD installation 76 Carte rseau ans fil Connexion au rseau 150 Carte rseau sans fil avant d'utiliser la carte rseau sans fil 144 configuration 145 dpannage 151 dsactivation/dconnexion 148 modes 146 spcifications 153 Cartes Secure Digital 75 CD-ROM 92, 93 Clavier 16, 33 problmes 93 Commandes et connecteurs 12 Compartiment de mmoire 22, 77 Compartiment de batterie au lithium 23 Configuration Tablette 28 Conventions utilises dans ce guide 8 Coordonnes 9 Coordonnes pour contacter Fujitsu 9 Cordon du stylet 45 D DEL d'accs la camra Web 15 Dpannage 89 DIMM 77 Dispositif de pointage rapide 36 Disque dur problmes 93 Double-cliquer 37 Duplicateur de ports 86 composants de la face arrire 86 connecteur 23 dsinstallation 88 installation 88 problmes 93 E cran 15, 27 problmes 98 cran tactile cliquer 41 talonner 42 glisser 42 cran tactile capacitif 43 Emplacement 12 Enregistrement 65 tiquette de configuration 118 F Fente d'antivol 13 Fente de dispositif antivol 21 Fente pour carte SD 12 Fente pour carte SIM 21 Fente pour carte Smart Card 12 Fonction de veille prolonge 67 Fonctions des boutons de post-identification 51 Fonctions des boutons de pr-identification 51 Fonctions des boutons PC Tablette changer 52 175 G Garantie 10 Gestion de l'alimentation dans Windows 67 Gestion de lalimentation 66 Glisser 37, 38 Glissire d'alimentation/veille/reprise 15, 66 Glossaire 128 Grilles de ventilation 23 H Haut-parleurs incorpors 92 I Icnes de bouton 50 Interrupteur de communications sans fil 13 L Lecteur de DVD problmes 92, 93 Lecteur multimdia entretien 117 Logiciels pr-installs 124 Logiciels prinstalls Adobe Acrobat Reader 125 barre doutils Google 125, 126 manuels 125 Loquets de la batterie 23 Luminosit de l'cran 30 M Mmoire capacit 79 installation 77 module de mmoire additionnelle 77 problmes 94 176 retrait 79 vrifier la capacit 79 Messages d'erreurs 100 Microphones intgrs doubles 17 Mouvements 43 N Numriseur 39 O Ordinateur Fujitsu LIFEBOOK stockage 113 voyager 114 Ouverture de l'cran 27 P Pav numrique du clavier 33 Pav tactile Touchpad 36 Priphriques modulaires 47 installation 47 retrait 47 Priphriques pour baie modulaire 47 Point d'attache du cordon du stylet 19 Port de connexion 81 Port HDMI 17 Port IEEE 1394 19, 83, 84 Port vido externe 13, 22, 84 Ports de priphriques 81 Ports USB 2.0 12, 18, 21, 82, 94 Prise d'alimentation c.c. 59 Prise dcouteurs 12, 18, 83 Prise de micro 12, 19, 83 Prise de rseau local Gigabit (RJ-45) 21 Tableau de voyants d'tat 15, 24 Touche de fonction F10 35 F3 35 F4 35 F6 35 F7 35 F8 35, 46 F9 35, 46 FN 35 clavier 34 clavier 34 Touches de dfilement 34 Touches de dfilement du Touches de fonction du Touches Windows 34 touche dapplication 34 touches de dmarrage 34 Touches Windows du clavier 34 activation/dsactivation 67 V Veille prolonge Verr dfil 26 Verr maj 26 Verr num 26 Voyant daccs au disque dur 26 Prise de rseau local interne 81 Problmes de souris 93 R Recharge des batteries 71 Redmarrage 68 Rglage des commandes du pav Touchpad 38 Rglage du volume 46 Remplacement hors tension 48 Renseignements sur la rglementation 141 Rseau local 13 Restaurer vos logiciels pr-installs 101 RJ-45 81 S SDRAM 22, 77 Spcifications 118 alimentation 122 audio 119 clavier 122 dimensions et poids 123 environnement requis 123 mmoire 118 Microprocesseur 118 options de mmoire de masse 120 ports de priphriques 121 puce 118 vido 119 T Tableau de scurit LIFEBOOK configuration 53 dsinstaller 56 mots de passe 53 utilisation 55 177

 

 

Gobi 3000-WWAN GSG.fm Page 1 Saturday, September 15, 2012 1:10 PM Wireless Wide Area Network

(WWAN) Getting Started Guide Congratulations on your purchase of a Fujitsu LIFEBOOK Tablet PC in Wireless Wide Area Network (WWAN) or WWAN-ready configuration. This document first instructs you on how to determine whether there is a WWAN module already installed in your system. If you do not have a WWAN module installed (i.e., your system is WWAN-ready), you will learn how to order and install a module, and (for AT&T customers) how to install and activate a SIM card. Verifying whether you have a WWAN module installed Launch the Fujitsu Bonus Apps icon on the desktop. If Fujitsu Bonus Apps include a WWAN driver in blue, it indicates that your system is WWAN-ready, but there is no WWAN module; if the WWAN driver is grayed out, it indicates that the WWAN module is already installed. In both cases, Sierra AirCard Watcher will need to be installed from Fujitsu Bonus Apps. For some models, the WWAN driver will not appear in Fujitsu Bonus Apps. If only Sierra AirCard Watcher appears, then your system has WWAN module installed already. Proceed to install Sierra AirCard Watcher. If you have a WWAN module installed in your system, it is not necessary for you to complete the rest of this procedure; please proceed to the Installing Sierra AirCard Watcher section on page 3 before connecting your device. If you dont have a WWAN module installed in your system, please continue with the rest of this procedure. Obtaining a WWAN module for your system To obtain a WWAN module for your WWAN-ready system, go to the Fujitsu online store at:

http://store.shopfujitsu.com/fpc/Ecommerce/accstore.jsp On this page choose Wireless WAN and then choose WWAN Module (Gobi3000). SPECIFIC WWAN MODULE/S ARE TESTED WITH THIS COMPUTER FOR COMPLIANCE WITH FCC REGULATIONS. THESE WWAN MODULE/S ARE FUJITSU-SPECIFIC AND ONLY THE WWAN MODULE/S SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING LINKS ARE AUTHENTICATED TO WORK IN THIS COMPUTER. WWAN MODULES OBTAINED FROM ANY OTHER SOURCE WILL NOT WORK IN THIS COM-

PUTER. YOU ARE STRONGLY ADVISED TO ORDER YOUR WWAN MODULE FROM A FUJITSU-AUTHORIZED SOURCE. IN THE EVENT YOU INSTALL A WWAN MODULE THAT HAS NOT BEEN AUTHORIZED BY FUJITSU, FUJITSU ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR DAMAGES TO THE DEVICE OR YOUR COMPUTER THAT MAY RESULT FROM ITS INSTALLATION. Installing a WWAN module in a WWAN-ready system If you have a WWAN-ready system, and you would like to install a WWAN module, there are two different things that could occur when you install the WWAN driver from Fujitsu Bonus Apps. If you dont have a WWAN module installed yet:

Fujitsu Bonus Apps will display a message telling you that the "WWAN Driver was not installed: Optional device is not detected. If you want to install a WWAN module at a later date:

Install the WWAN driver from Fujitsu Bonus Apps by launching the "Fujitsu Bonus Apps" desktop icon, select-

ing WWAN driver (should be highlighted in blue), and pressing the [Install] button. Material and Tools required Material Required: WWAN Upgrade Kit Tools Required: Philips Screwdriver, #0 Tools Recommended: Tweezers (for attaching cables to antenna posts) 1 Gobi 3000-WWAN GSG.fm Page 2 Saturday, September 15, 2012 1:10 PM Procedure For location of components listed below, reference your system user guide. The system contains components that can be severely damaged by electrostatic discharge

(ESD). To minimize risk to components, observe the following precautions:

BEFORE CHANGING COMPONENTS IN YOUR SYSTEM, IT IS A GOOD PRACTICE TO FIRST TOUCH A GROUNDED METAL OBJECT TO DISCHARGE STATIC ELECTRICITY BUILT UP IN YOUR BODY. BE SURE TO POWER DOWN YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE ADDING OR REMOVING SYSTEM COMPONENTS. EVEN IF THE SYSTEM IS IN HIBERNATE STATES, DATA COULD BE LOST OR MEMORY COULD BE DAMAGED IF POWER IS STILL AVAILABLE TO THE SYSTEM. WHEN INSTALLING OR REMOVING A MODULE, HOLD IT BY THE EDGE SO AS NOT TO TOUCH ANY CONTACTS OR CHIPS. BE CAREFUL NOT TO TOUCH ANY INTERNAL TERMINALS OR COMPONENTS; THE OIL FROM YOUR FIN-

GERS COULD CAUSE A SHORT TO THE COMPONENTS. 1. Turn off the power to your notebook and unplug the power adapter. 2. Turn the unit bottom side up and remove the battery. 3. Using a Philips #0 screwdriver, remove the screw that is securing the WWAN cover. (See Fig. 1). Lift and remove the cover. 4. Locate the module attachment standoff to which the WWAN module will be attached (Fig. 2). 5. Holding the module with the label side up, align the connector edge of the module with the mini card connector slot in the com-

partment (the card and connec-

tor are both keyed so that there is only one way to install it). Cover Screw WWAN Compartment Cover Figure 1. Removing WWAN cover 6. 7. Insert the module at a 45 angle. Press the module edge down so that it lies flat. The hole in the mod-

ule should be aligned over the hole in the attachment standoff. Insert the screw that was contained in the Wireless WAN Upgrade Kit through the module and secure it to the module attachment standoff. Mini-Card Connector Figure 2. Module attachment standoff 2 S MAIN Connector WWAN Module AUX Connector Module Attachment Standoff Gobi 3000-WWAN GSG.fm Page 3 Saturday, September 15, 2012 1:10 PM PERSONS WITH LARGER HANDS MAY HAVE DIFFICULTY CONNECTING THE CABLES TO THE POSTS MANUALLY. IF NECESSARY, USE A SET OF TWEEZERS, BUT TAKE CARE NOT TO CONTACT OTHER COMPONENTS WITHIN THE COMPARTMENT, AS FRAGILE COMPONENTS COULD BE DAMAGED BY THE TWEEZERS. 8. The yellow cable should be attached to the MAIN antenna post on the module, and the salmon-colored cable to the AUX antenna post as shown in Figure 2. (Be very sure they are connected to the correct posts; MAIN and AUX are printed on the module circuit board adjacent to the posts.) Connect the two antenna cables by pressing the cap at the end of the cable over the post associated with each terminal. 9. Route the cables around the module such that they wont be pinched between the module and the cover when it is replaced.*

10. Replace the cover and reinstall the screws removed in step 3. 11. If you need or want to install an AT&T SIM card, proceed to Obtaining and installing a SIM card (AT&T 3G users only) . 12. If you are not installing a SIM card, continue with the following steps 13. Replace the battery and apply power to your system. 14. Verify that the WLAN/Bluetooth/WWAN switch is in the ON position. 15. Proceed to the Installing Sierra AirCard Watcher section below before connecting your device. WWAN Compartment Cover (bottom)

* NOTE:

When replacing the WWAN compartment cover, be sure the gasket that is located on the bottom of the cover is positioned so that when the cover is replaced, it does not come in contact with the MAIN or AUX cables. The approxi-

mate location is shown in Fig-

ure 3. If the gasket comes into contact with the metal con-

nectors, that is permissible. Gasket Gasket Contact Area Figure 3. Connecting to Antenna Posts Installing Sierra AirCard Watcher Whether your WWAN module was pre-installed, or you installed it yourself, it is necessary for you to install the Sierra AirCard Watcher from Fujitsu Bonus Apps. To do so, launch the "Fujitsu Bonus Apps" desktop icon, select Sierra AirCard Watcher, and then press the [Install] button. After you complete the installation, the Sierra AirCard Watcher icon will appear on your desktop. Note: The first time you click the icon, you will be prompted to accept the license agreement. Click [Accept] to proceed. Proceed to the activation flier for your carrier. If it is not readily available, go to:

http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/mobile/accessory to download one. 3 Gobi 3000-WWAN GSG.fm Page 4 Saturday, September 15, 2012 1:10 PM Obtaining and installing a SIM card (AT&T 3G users only) To obtain a SIM card, you will need to contact your WWAN account representative or your local provider. To install the SIM card in your notebook, perform the following steps carefully:

1. Verify that your system is powered down and unplug any connected power adapter. 2. Turn your system upside down and rest it on a flat surface. 3. Remove the battery as directed in your system user guide. 4. Locate the SIM Slot as shown in Figure 5. 5. Position the SIM card as shown in the small orientation figure in Figure 5, and push it into the SIM card slot until flush with the slot edge. 6. Replace the battery. Turn the system so the top is facing up. 7. Apply power to your system. 8. Verify that the WLAN/Bluetooth/

WWAN switch is in the ON posi-

tion. SIM card slot SIM Card Slot SIM card Battery Bay with Battery Removed SIM Card SIM Slot Orientation Icon Figure 5. SIM slot location 9. To remove the SIM card, push the SIM card in slightly to unlock it. It will pop out of the slot slightly, allowing you to remove it. After installing the SIM, refer to the providers activation flier to connect to AT&T. If the flier is not avail-

able, you can download one from: http://solutions.us.fujitsu.com/www/content/support/mobile/accessory Once the activation request is initiated, activation should occur within 10 minutes, but under some cir-

cumstances the process could take up to 48 hours. THE GPS OPTION ONLY PROVIDES COORDINATES. A GPS APPLICATION (COMPATIBLE WITH NMEA V3.1 OR LATER) MUST BE PURCHASED SEPARATELY. NOTE: The available Cellular signal strength will vary from location to location. Buildings, natural obsta-

cles such as mountains, and tower locations play a large part in the performance. Your system is designed to achieve the maximum signal strength available in notebook mode, since the antennas are located at the top of the display housing. If your signal strength seems weak or the performance seems slower in tablet mode, please convert to notebook mode and try again. Fujitsu, the Fujitsu logo, and LIFEBOOK are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Ltd. in the United States and other countries. AT&T and other AT&T product/service names and logos are trademarks and service marks of AT&T Intellectual Property or AT&T affiliated company (AT&T Marks). Sierra, AirCard, and Watcher are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sierra Wireless, Inc. in the United States and other coun-

tries. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. 4

 

 

Operating manual System LIFEBOOK T732 Congratulations on your purchase of an innovative product from Fujitsu. The latest information about our products, tips, updates etc. can be found on the Internet at: "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/"

For automatic driver updates, go to: "http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/download"

Should you have any technical questions, please contact:

our Hotline/Service Desk (see the Service Desk list or visit:

"http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/contact/servicedesk") Your sales partner Your sales ofce We hope you enjoy working with your new Fujitsu system!

Published by Fujitsu Technology Solutions Mies-van-der-Rohe-Strae 8 (Mies-van-der-Rohe Street No. 8) 80807 Munich, Germany Contact http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/

Copyright Fujitsu Technology Solutions 2012. All rights reserved. Publication Date 10/12 Order No.: A26391-K368-Z320-1-7619, edition 1 LIFEBOOK T732 Operating manual Innovative technology Ports and controls Important notes First-time setup of your device Working with the notebook Security functions Connecting external devices Removing and installing components during servicing Settings in BIOS Setup Utility Troubleshooting and tips Technical data Manufacturers notes Index 7 9 12 15 18 68 75 82 90 92 99 102 108 Remarks Information on the product description meets the design specications of Fujitsu and is provided for comparison purposes. Several factors may cause the actual results to differ. Technical data is subject to change without prior notication. Fujitsu rejects any responsibility with regard to technical or editorial mistakes or omissions. Trademarks Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks of Fujitsu Limited or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Made under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS and the symbol are registered trademarks and

& DTS Boost is a trademark of DTS, Inc. Product contains software. DTS, Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks specied here are the property of their respective owners. Copyright No part of this publication may be copied, reproduced or translated without the prior written consent of Fujitsu. No part of this publication may be saved or transferred by any electronic means without the written approval of Fujitsu. Contents Contents 7 Innovative technology . 7 Further information . 8 Notational conventions . Ports and controls . 9 Important notes . 12 Safety notes . 12 Additional safety notes for devices with radio components . 12 Energy saving . 13 Energy saving under Windows . 13 Travelling with your notebook . 13 Before you travel

. 13 Notebook: transporting . 14 Cleaning the notebook . 14 First-time setup of your device . 15 Unpacking and checking the device . 15 Selecting a location . 16 Mains adapter connecting . 16 Switching on the device for the rst time . 17 Working with the notebook . 18 Status indicators . 18 Opening the notebook . 20 Switching on the notebook . 21 Programming the ON/OFF switch . 21 Different ways to use your notebook . 22 From notebook to Tablet PC . 22 Select display orientation (portrait or landscape orientation) . 24 From Tablet PC to notebook . 25 Switching off the notebook . 26 Closing the notebook . 27 Handwriting recognition under Windows 7 . 27 LCD screen . 28 Ambient Light Sensor . 28 Using a device as a tablet PC . 28 Using ngers . 29 Using the stylus pen . 32 Using the device as a notebook . 35 Touchpad and touchpad buttons . 35 Keyboard . 37 Virtual numeric keypad . 39 Country and keyboard settings . 39 Key combinations . 40 Tablet buttons . 42 Programming the tablet buttons . 43 Webcam . 44 Rechargeable battery . 45 Charging, caring for and maintaining the battery . 45 Removing and installing the battery . 46 Battery charge status indicator

. 48 Fujitsu 3 Contents Module . 49 Removing a module . 49 Installing a module . 50 Optical drive . 50 Handling data carriers . 50

. 51 CD/DVD indicator

. 51 Inserting or removing a data carrier

. 52 Manual removal (emergency removal) Removing and tting the dust removal cover (ventilation slot cover)

. 52 Using the power-management features . 54 Memory cards . 55 Supported format . 55 Inserting the memory card . 55 Removing the memory card . 56 ExpressCards . 56 Inserting the card . 57 Removing the card . 58 Loudspeakers and microphones . 58 SIM card . 59 Inserting the SIM card . 59 Removing the SIM card . 59 Optional Wireless LAN / Bluetooth / UMTS / LTE wireless components . 60 Switching the wireless components on and off

. 60 Setting up WLAN access . 61 Access via UMTS / LTE . 61 UMTS/LTE antenna . 61 Ethernet and LAN . 62

. 62 Your Port Replicator (optional)

. 63 Ports on the Port Replicator Setting up the port replicator

. 64 Connect the notebook to the port replicator . 64 Switching on the notebook via the port replicator . 66 Switching off notebook via Port Replicator . 66 Disconnecting the notebook from the port replicator

. 67 Security functions . 68 Brief overview of security functions . 68 Conguring the ngerprint sensor

. 69 Using the Security Lock . 69 Conguring password protection in BIOS Setup Utility . 70 Protecting BIOS Setup Utility (supervisor and user password) . 70 Password protection for booting of the operating system . 71 Password protection for the hard disk . 72 Using the security function of the tablet keys . 73 Setting the Supervisor password . 73 Setting the User password . 73 Entering passwords using the tablet buttons . 73

. 74 Enabling TPM . 74 Disabling TPM . 74 Connecting external devices . 75

. 76 Connecting an external monitor

. 77 Trusted Platform Module (TPM) (device-dependent) Connecting an external monitor to the DisplayPort 4 Fujitsu Contents HDMI port

. 78 Connecting USB devices . 79 USB port with charging function (Anytime USB charge) . 80 How to remove USB devices correctly . 80 Connecting external audio devices . 81 Microphone port/Line In . 81 Headphone port

. 81 Removing and installing components during servicing . 82 Notes on installing and removing boards and components . 82 Preparing to remove components . 83 Installing and removing memory expansion . 83 Removing a cover . 84 Removing memory modules . 84 Installing a memory module . 85 Attaching the cover . 85 Removing and installing the hard disk . 86 Removing a cover . 86 Removing a hard disk . 87 Installing a hard disk . 88 Attaching the cover . 89 Finishing component removal

. 89 Settings in BIOS Setup Utility . 90 Starting the BIOS Setup Utility . 90 Operating BIOS Setup Utility . 90 Exiting BIOS Setup Utility . 91 Exit Saving Changes - save changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility

. 91 Exit Discarding Changes Discard changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility . 91 Load Setup Defaults Copy Standard Entries . 91 Discard Changes Discard changes without exiting the BIOS Setup Utility . 91 Save Changes - save changes without exiting the BIOS Setup Utility . 91

. 91 Save Changes and Power Off Troubleshooting and tips . 92 Help if problems occur . 92 The notebooks date or time is incorrect . 93 Battery indicator does not illuminate . 93 When certain characters are entered on the keyboard, only numerals are written . 93 The notebooks LCD screen remains blank . 93 The LCD screen is difcult to read . 94 The external monitor remains blank . 94 The external monitor is blank or the image is unstable . 94 The cursor does not correctly follow the pen movements . 95 Pen input not working . 95 The notebook cannot be started . 95 The notebook stops working . 96 The printer does not print

. 96 The radio connection to a network does not work . 96 The battery discharges too quickly . 97 Acoustic warnings . 97 Error messages on the screen . 97 Technical data . 99 Fujitsu 5 Contents Notebook . 99 Port Replicator (optional)

. 100 Rechargeable battery . 101 Mains adapter for use with the notebook and port replicator

. 101 Manufacturers notes . 102 Disposal and recycling . 102 Declarations of Conformity . 102 CE marking . 102 Regulatory notices . 102 Regulatory information for notebooks without radio device . 103 DOC (Industry CANADA) notices . 104 FCC regulatory information for notebooks with radio device . 106 Index . 108 6 Fujitsu Innovative technology Innovative technology

... and ergonomic design make your device a reliable and convenient companion. The device boots very quickly, is ready for immediate use and offers a particularly long operating time because of its high capacity battery. With the user-friendly "BIOS Setup Utility" you can control your notebooks hardware and better protect your system against unauthorised access by using the powerful password properties. Information on the connections and user components of your notebook can be found in" Ports and controls", Page 9. Further information The Windows drivers for your device can be found on our Internet site. The factory installation of your device does not support any other operating system. Fujitsu Technology Solutions accepts no liability whatsoever if any other operating system is used. Software oriented components of these instructions refer to Microsoft products, if they come within the scope of the delivery. If you install other software products, pay attention to the operating instructions of the manufacturer. Fujitsu 7 Innovative technology Notational conventions

This font This font This font

"This font"

Pay particular attention to text marked with this symbol. Failure to observe these warnings could pose a risk to health, damage the device or lead to loss of data. The warranty will be invalidated if the device becomes defective through failure to observe these warnings. Indicates important information for the proper use of the device. Indicates an activity that must be performed Indicates a result indicates data entered using the keyboard in a program dialogue or at the command line, e.g. your password (Name123) or a command used to start a program (start.exe) indicates information that is displayed on the screen by a program, e.g.:

Installation is complete. indicates indicates terms and texts used in a software interface, e.g.: Click on Save names of programs or les, e.g. Windows or setup.exe. cross-references to another section, e.g. "Safety information"

cross-references to an external source, e.g. a web address: For more information, go to "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/"

Names of CDs, DVDs and titles or designations for other materials, e.g.: "CD/DVD Drivers & Utilities" or "Safety/Regulations" manual Key This font indicates a key on the keyboard, e.g: F10 indicates terms and texts that are emphasised or highlighted, e.g.: Do not switch off the device 8 Fujitsu Ports and controls Ports and controls This chapter presents the individual hardware components of your device. It gives you an overview of the devices indicators and connections. Please familiarise yourself with these components before you start to work with the device. Notebook open 1 2 3 5 6 11 4 12 13 14 6 18 17 16 15 14 7 8 9 10 5 1 = LCD screen 2 = WebCam (* optional) 3 = WebCam LED 4 = Fingerprint sensor 5 = Microphone 6 = Status indicators 7 = Windows button 8 = Tablet buttons 9 = ON/OFF switch 10 = Ambient light sensor 11 = Keyboard 12 = Touchpad 13 = Touchpad buttons 14 = Loudspeakers 15 = Microphone jack 16 = Headphone port 17 = Memory card slot 18 = ON/OFF switch for wireless components Fujitsu 9 Ports and controls Left panel 1 2 3 1 = DC input connector (DC IN) 2 = HDMI port Rear 3 = USB port with charging function (Anytime USB charge, USB 3.0) 1 2 3 4 1 = Security Lock device 2 = VGA monitor port 3 = USB ports (USB 2.0) 4 = LAN port 10 Fujitsu Right-hand side Ports and controls 1 2 3 4 1 = Pen slot 2 = ExpressCard slot Bottom 3 = Module bay with optical drive 4 = Eject lever for module bay 1 2 3 7 6 5 4 1 = Hard disk service compartment 2 = Memory service compartment 3 = Attachment eye for the pen cord 4 = Battery with SIM card slot under the battery 5 = Battery charge status indicator 6 = Port for port replicator 7 = Ventilation slot cover Fujitsu 11 Important notes Important notes Importantnotes Notes This chapter contains essential safety information which must be followed when working with your notebook. Other notes also provide useful information which will help you with your notebook. Safety notes Safetynotes Notes Please follow the safety notes provided in the "Safety/Regulations" manual as well as the safety notes given below. Please pay special attention to the sections in the manual marked with the symbol on the left. When connecting and disconnecting cables, observe the relevant notes in this operating manual. Read the information on the ambient conditions in the "Technical data", Page 99 and "First-time setup of your device", Page 15 before preparing your notebook for use and switching it on for the rst time. When cleaning the device, please observe the relevant notes in the section "Cleaning the notebook", Page 14. Pay attention to the additional safety notes for devices with radio components provided in the "Safety/Regulations" manual. Please refer to the notes in the chapter "Removing and installing components during servicing", Page 82. This notebook complies with the relevant safety regulations for data processing equipment. If you have questions about using your notebook in a particular area, please contact your sales outlet or our Hotline/Service Desk. Radiocomponent:

WirelessLAN:

Bluetooth,safetynotes Additional safety notes for devices with radio components If a radio component (Wireless LAN, Bluetooth, UMTS/LTE) is incorporated in your notebook, you must be sure to observe the following safety notes when using your notebook:

Switch off the radio components when you are in an aircraft or driving in a car. Switch off the radio components when you are in a hospital, an operating room or near a medical electronics system. The transmitted radio waves can impair the operation of medical devices. Switch off the radio components when you let the device get near ammable gases or into hazardous environments (e.g. petrol station, paintshops), as the transmitted radio waves can cause an explosion or a re. For information on how to switch radio components on and off, see chapter

"Switching the wireless components on and off", Page 60. 12 Fujitsu Important notes Notes Energy Energy saving EnergysavingSwitch the notebook off when it is not in use. Switch off external, connected devices if you are not using them. If you use the energy saving functions, the notebook uses less energy. You will then be able to work for longer before having to recharge the battery. Energy efciency is increased and the environmental impact is reduced. You save money while protecting the environment. Energy saving under Windows Make use of the power management features (see ""Using the power-management features", Page 54"). Travelling with your notebook NotebookPlease observe the points listed below when travelling with your notebook. Mobileoperation Notes Transportation Before you travel Back up important data stored on your hard disk. Switch off the radio component for data security reasons. With data trafc via a wireless Notebook Travel,notebook connection, it is also possible for unauthorised third parties to receive data. Information on activating data encryption is provided in the documentation for your radio component. If you wish to use your notebook during a ight, rst check with the ight attendants if it is OK to do so. When travelling in other countries If you are travelling abroad, check that the mains adapter can be operated with the local mains voltage. If this is not the case, obtain the appropriate mains adapter for your notebook. Do not use any other voltage converter!

Check whether the local mains voltage and the power cable are compatible. If this is not the case, buy a power cable that matches the local conditions. Enquire with the corresponding government ofce of the country you will be travelling in as to whether you may operate the radio component integrated in your notebook there (see also "CE marking", Page 102). Fujitsu 13 Important notes Notebook:

transporting Protect the notebook from severe shocks and extreme temperatures

(e.g. direct sunlight in a car). Transportation If your device has an optical drive, remove all data media (e.g. CD, DVD) from the drives. Notebook Switch the notebook off. Unplug the mains adapter and all external devices from the power socket. Disconnect the mains adapter cable and the data cables for all external devices. Close the LCD screen. To protect against damaging jolts and bumps, use a notebook carrying case to transport your notebook. Cleaning the notebook Do not clean any interior parts yourself; leave this job to a service technician. Only use cleaning products designed for computers. Normal household cleaners and polishes can damage the markings on the keyboard and the device, the paintwork or the notebook itself. Ensure that no liquid enters the notebook. The LCD screen very sensitive to scratches. Only clean the display surface with a very soft, slightly damp cloth. Cleaning Notes Notebook Keyboard Touchpad LCDscreen Switch the notebook off. CrystalViewdisplay In order to prevent accidentially switching the device on, remove the power cable from the mains adaptor and remove the battery (see "Removing and installing the battery", Page 46).

The surface can be cleaned with a dry cloth. If particularly dirty, use a cloth which has been moistened in mild domestic detergent and then carefully wrung out. To clean the keyboard and the touchpad, if available, you can use disinfectant wipes. Ensure that no liquid enters the device. 14 Fujitsu First-time setup of your device First-time setup of your device First-timesetup Gettingstarted Please read the chapter "Important notes", Page 12. If your device is equipped with a Windows operating system, the necessary hardware drivers and supplied software are already pre-installed. Before you switch on the device for the rst time, connect it to the mains voltage using the mains adapter, see "Mains adapter connecting", Page 16. The mains adapter must be connected during the entire installation process. A system test is performed when your device is rst switched on. Various messages can appear. The display may remain dark for a short time or may icker. Please follow the instructions on the screen. NEVER switch off your device during the rst-time setup process. On delivery, the battery can be found in the battery compartment or in the accessories kit. The battery must be charged if you want to operate your device using the battery. When used on the move, the built-in battery provides the device with the necessary power. You can increase the operating time by using the available energy-saving functions. For instructions on how to connect external devices (e.g. mouse, printer) to your device, please refer to the operating manual for your device. Unpacking and checking the device Should you discover any damage that occurred during transportation, notify your local sales outlet immediately!

Unpack all the individual parts. Transport Check your device for any visible damage which may have occurred during transportation. Packaging You may need the packaging in the future, if you need to transport your device. Fujitsu 15 First-time setup of your device Selecting a location Selectingalocation Device Mainsadapter Select a suitable location for the device before setting it up. Follow the instructions below when doing so:

Never place the device or the mains adapter on a heat-sensitive surface. The surface could be damaged as a result. Never place the device on a soft surface (e.g. carpeting, upholstered furniture, bed). This can block the air vents and cause overheating and damage. The underside of the device heats up during normal operation. Prolonged contact with the skin may become unpleasant or even result in burns. Place the device on a stable, at, non-slippery surface. Please note that the rubber feet of the device may mark certain types of delicate surfaces. Keep other objects at least 100 mm away from the device and its mains adapter to ensure adequate ventilation. Never cover the ventilation slots of the device. Do not expose the device to extreme environmental conditions. Protect the device from dust, humidity, and heat. Mains adapter connecting Preparingforoperation Mainsadapter Observe the safety notes in the enclosed "Safety/Regulations" manual. The supplied power cable conforms to the requirements of the country in which you purchased your device. Make sure that the power cable is approved for use in the country in which you intend to use it. Connect the power cable (1) to the mains adapter. Plug the mains cable (2) into a mains outlet. Connect the mains adapter cable (3) to the DC jack (DC IN) of the device. 3 1 2 16 Fujitsu First-time setup of your device Switching on the device for the rst time Switchingonforthersttime On devices with ON/OFF switch for wireless components: Slide the ON/OFF switch for wireless components to the ON position before switching on the device. When you switch on the device for the rst time, the supplied software is installed and congured. Because this procedure must not be interrupted, you should set aside enough time for it to be fully completed and connect the device to the mains using the mains adapter. During the installation process, DO NOT restart the device unless you are requested to do so!

To make it easier to use your device for the rst time, the operating system is pre-installed on the hard disk. 1 Slide the ON/OFF switch (1) to the right to switch on the notebook.

The ON/OFF switch returns automatically to its original position. During installation, follow the instructions on screen. If a Windows operating system is installed on your device, you will nd more information on the system and drivers, help programmes, updates, manuals etc. on the device or on the Internet under "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/support/". Fujitsu 17 Working with the notebook Working with the notebook Notebook,operation NotebookThis chapter describes the basics for operating your notebook. Please read the chapter entitled "Connecting external devices", Page 75 for instructions on how to connect devices such as a mouse and a printer to the notebook. Please refer to the notes in "Important notes", Page 12. Status indicators The status indicators provide information about the status of the power supply, the drives and the keyboard functions etc. Statusindicators Symbols 18 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Status displays Description Power-on indicator Indicator is illuminated: The notebook is switched on. Indicator ashes: The notebook is in sleep mode (Save-to-RAM). The indicator is not illuminated: The notebook is switched off or in Save-to-Disk mode. Battery charging indicator The battery charging indicator shows whether a battery is installed and being charged. Battery indicator This description applies for both batteries. The battery indicator shows the state of charge of the installed battery. The indicator is lit green: The battery is between 51 % and 100 %

charged. The indicator is lit orange: The battery is between 13 % and 50 %

charged. The indicator is lit red: The battery is between 0 % and 12 % charged. The indicator ashes orange: The battery state of charge is being checked (for four seconds after battery installation). The indicator ashes red: The battery is faulty. The indicator is not lit: There is no battery installed. Note: if you use batteries with a capacity of 5800 mAh or 6200 mAh, you can also check the charge status on the battery itself. Note: You can also check the state of charge directly at the main battery. Drive indicator Indicator is illuminated: The hard disk drive or the CD/DVD in the optical drive of the notebook is being accessed. Num Lock indicator Indicator is lit: The Num key has been pressed. The virtual numerical keypad is activated. You can output the characters indicated on the upper right of the keys. Caps Lock indicator Indicator is lit: The Caps Lock key has been pressed. All letters will be output as uppercase letters. In the case of keys labelled several times, the character printed on the upper left of the key will appear when that key is pressed. Scroll Lock indicator Indicator is lit: The key combination Fn + Scr has been pressed. The effect that this key has varies between applications. Lock Workstation indicator The indicator is illuminated: The security functions of the Notebook have locked your workstation. Fujitsu 19 Working with the notebook Opening the notebook 1 Open the LCD screen. 20 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Switching on the notebook Notebook:switchingon Power-onindicator Suspend/Resumebutton 1 Slide the ON/OFF switch (1) to the right to switch on the notebook.

The ON/OFF switch returns automatically to its original position. The ON/OFF switch (1) lights up whenever the system is switched on. Programming the ON/OFF switch You can program the ON/OFF switch:

Operating system Windows 7 Menu Start - (Settings) - Control Panel - System and Security - Power Options If you have assigned a password, you must enter this when requested to do so, in order to start the operating system. Detailed information can be found in the chapter "Security functions", Page 68. Fujitsu 21 Working with the notebook Different ways to use your notebook During your daily work, you can use your notebook as a tablet PC or as a notebook, just as you wish. Note the direction of rotation in the following description! No guarantee claims can be met for damage caused by turning in the wrong direction. You must note that the display cannot be turned completely on its own axis!

From notebook to Tablet PC Raise the LCD display into a vertical position. 22 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Hold the screen as low as possible on both sides. Turn the screen to the left or right in the direction of the arrow. At rst you will feel some slight resistance, then it will turn easily and without friction. Turn the display further until it has turned 180 and the hinge latches in. Fujitsu 23 Working with the notebook Now fold the screen down until the back of the screen is at on top of the keyboard.

The screen is now secured in the tablet position. Select display orientation (portrait or landscape orientation) DisplayorientationYou can choose to use either portrait or landscape orientation for the display. To switch between portrait or landscape orientation, press the tablet button:

Landscapeorientation Portraitorientation Windows 7 You can change these settings in the Fujitsu menu or under Start - (Settings -) Control Panel - Hardware and Sound - Display - Settings. Proles for operating with various different screen modes can be selected via the Fujitsu Tablet Control option in the Fujitsu menu. These proles have preset standard congurations that can be modied as desired. These settings do not just affect the monitor settings on the Tablet PC, but also any external monitors that may be connected. 24 Fujitsu From Tablet PC to notebook Working with the notebook 1 Raise the LCD screen into a vertical position. Fujitsu 25 Working with the notebook Note the direction of rotation in the following description! No guarantee claims can be met for damage caused by turning in the wrong direction. hold the screen as near to the bottom as possible on both sides and turn the screen in the direction indicated by the rotational direction indicator. It will turn easily and without resistance. Turn or move the display further until it has turned 180 and the hinge latches in. Switching off the notebook Notebook Close all applications and then shut down the operating system (please see the "Operating System Manual"). Slide the ON/OFF switch towards the right.

The ON/OFF switch returns automatically to its original position. 26 Fujitsu Closing the notebook Working with the notebook Fold the LCD screen down onto the lower part of the notebook until you feel it lock into place. Handwriting recognition under Windows 7 Handwriting recognition under Windows 7 currently supports the following languages:

English, German, French, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Chinese (traditional and simplied), Dutch, Portuguese, Spanish, Brazilian, Norwegian (Bokml and Nynorsk), Swedish, Finnish, Danish, Polish, Rumanian, Serbian (Cyrillic and Latin script), Catalan, Russian, Czech and Croatian. Fujitsu 27 Working with the notebook LCDscreen LCD screen NotesHigh-quality TFT displays are installed in notebooks from Fujitsu Technology Solutions GmbH. For technical reasons, TFT monitors are manufactured for a specic resolution. An optimal, clear picture can only be ensured with the correct resolution intended for the relevant TFT monitor. A monitor resolution which differs from the specication can result in an unclear picture. The screen resolution of the LCD monitor of your notebook is optimally set at the factory. The standard of production techniques today cannot guarantee an absolutely fault-free screen display. A few isolated constant lit or unlit pixels (picture elements) may be present. The maximum permitted number of pixels faults is stipulated in the international standard ISO 9241-3 (Class II). Example:

A screen with a resolution of 1280 x 800 has 1280 x 800 = 1024000 pixels. Each pixel consists of three subpixels (red, green and blue), so there are about 3 million subpixels in total. According to ISO 9241-3 (class II), a maximum of 2 light and 2 dark pixels and in addition 5 light or 10 dark subpixels or an equivalent mix (1 light subpixel counts as 2 dark subpixels) are allowed to be defective. At a resolution of 1600 x 900 = 1440000 pixels, a maximum of 3 light and 3 dark pixels and in addition 7 light or 14 dark subpixels are allowed to be defective. Pixel A pixel consists of 3 subpixels, normally red, green and blue. A pixel is the smallest element that can be generated by complete functionality of the display. A subpixel is a separately addressable internal structure within a pixel that enhances the pixel function. A cluster contains two or more defective pixels or subpixels in a 5 x 5 pixel block. Subpixel Cluster Background lighting TFT monitors are operated with background lighting. The luminosity of the background lighting can decrease during the period of use of the notebook. However, you can set the brightness of your monitor individually. Synchronising the display on the LCD screen and an external monitor For more information, please refer to the chapter "Key combinations", Page 40 under "Display output, switch between". Ambient Light Sensor In the case of delivery with a Windows operating system, the screen brightness is regulated by means of the ambient light sensor and depending on the particular light conditions. This results in optimum readability and longer battery life at the same time. Using a device as a tablet PC You can execute commands as follows:

using the stylus pen (supplied with your device). using your ngers 28 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Using ngers You can execute certain commands by using your nger tip on the touchscreen of your device. Everything which you can select or activate using your nger tip can also be selected or activated using the stylus pen. Calibrate the Dual Digitizer for nger-based operation of the device. Please see the appropriate supplementary sheet for instructions on how to calibrate your device to use Dual Digitizer Technology. Please note: There are separate calibration programs available for calibrating the stylus pen and for calibrating nger-based operation. In each case, use the calibration tool described in the supplementary sheet. Do not use the calibration tool for the stylus pen to calibrate nger-based operation. Actions with one nger Action Selecting objects (click with the left mouse button) Starting programs (double-click with the left mouse button) Moving objects/windows (drag with left mouse button pressed, Drag & Drop) Description With your nger, tap once briey on the object. With your nger, tap twice briey in quick succssion on the program icon. Opening a context menu (click with the right mouse button) Moving the cursor Place a nger directly on the object/window, hold the nger pressed against the touchscreen and move the desired object/window. Touch the desired item once with your nger tip. Keep the nger tip pressed against the touchscreen. The context menu appears. Position one nger on the touchscreen and move the nger in the desired direction. Fujitsu 29 Working with the notebook Actions with two ngers Action Scrolling Description Position two ngers on the touchscreen. Move your ngers upwards to scroll up. or Move your ngers downwards to scroll down. Rotating Position the thumb on the touchscreen, then turn the picture clockwise or counter-clockwise using your index nger. 30 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Action Increasing or decreasing the view Description Position two ngers on the touchscreen and move them apart to increase the view. Blocking context-sensitive menus or Position two ngers on the touchscreen and move them together to decrease the view. With two ngers, tap twice briey in quick succession on the touchscreen. Fujitsu 31 Working with the notebook Using the stylus pen 2 1 4 3 1 = pen tip 2 = rocker button 3 = eyelet for pen cord 4 = eraser You can use the pen on your notebook as an electronic writing implement to select items and to navigate through menu options and programs. Programs that support handwriting recognition also allow you to write characters directly on the screen with the pen. You can also use the pen as a drawing tool. The notebook pen is retained securely in the pen slot. This ensures that the pen cannot be lost, regardless of whether you use the notebook as a Tablet PC or as a notebook, or transport it while travelling. Always replace the pen in its slot when you are not using it. The notebook is supplied with a pen cord which you can attach to the eyelets on the pen and on the notebook. Only use the pen provided with your notebook. Do not use substitute pen tips that were not specially designed for your notebook. Replace the stylus tip if it is worn. The warranty does not cover a scratched screen. While writing, you should take care not to scratch the surface of the display (e.g. with a wristwatch or bracelet). 32 Fujitsu Working with the notebook The pen of your notebook is an electronic instrument which can be damaged if used incorrectly. Handle the pen with care. The following list contains guidelines for proper pen handling:

Do not gesture with the pen. Do not use the pen as a pointer. Never use the pen on any other surface than the screen of your notebook. Do not try to turn the thumb grip on the pen. The thumb grip is used to place the pen in its slot and to take it out of the slot. Never store the pen with the tip bearing the weight of the pen (e.g. with the tip down in a pen holder). If the pen is stored with the tip pointing down, this may have an adverse effect on the pen mechanism (particularly under high temperatures). In this case the pen tip may react as though it is constantly being pressed down. To avoid damage, the pen should be stored in the pen slot when not in use. The pen can be inuenced by electromagnetic elds (cursor quivers or jumps). There may be a few areas on the screen where the cursor quivers slightly in spite of pressing the pen down rmly. The screen responds to entries made with the tip of the nger or the pen when the tip of the nger or the pen is in direct contact with the screen. You can use the pen to perform all the functions for which you would otherwise use a mouse. In addition, you can conveniently delete hand-written pen entries using the pen. Handling Selecting menu entries Starting programs Double click with the left-hand mouse Mouse Click with the left-hand mouse button. Touch the menu entry with the pen tip. Pen Moving objects/windows button. Drag with the left-hand mouse button held pressed. Briey touch the program icon twice with the pen tip. Place the pen tip directly on the object/window. Hold the pen tip pressed against the screen. Move the desired object/window. Touch the desired element with the pen and leave the pen on the element for a moment. Place the pen tip directly on the screen. Opening a context menu Click with the right-hand mouse button. Moving the cursor

Setting the pen Operating system Windows 7 Menu Under Hardware and Sound Pen and Input Devices in the Control Panel you can change various settings for the pen (assignment and function of the pen button). Fujitsu 33 Working with the notebook Calibrating the pen Before using the pen for the rst time, you should calibrate it so that the cursor follows the movements of the pen as accurately as possible. You should also always repeat the calibration if the co-ordination between the pen and cursor movement deteriorates. Operating system Windows 7 Menu To calibrate, call up the Hardware and Sound / Tablet PC Settings function in the Control Panel. You need to calibrate both portrait and landscape formats. Replacing the pen tip With use, the pen tip may become worn or may pick up foreign particles that can scratch the screen. A damaged or worn tip may not move freely, causing unpredictable results when using the pen. If your pen exhibits these problems, you should replace the pen tip. To do this, use the supplied tool (1). To remove the tip, position the tip in the gap between the two ends of the tool supplied. Pinch the two ends of the supplied tool together so that the tip is rmly clasped, then pull it from the barrel. To replace the tip, retrieve one of the new tips that were supplied your pen. Insert the at end of the tip into the barrel and exerting gentle pressure, push it in until it is rmly in place. 1 If the tip is worn or damaged, discard it. Installing a pen cord You should attach the pen with a pen cord to prevent accidentally dropping or losing it. Attach the end of the pen cord with the smaller loop to your pen. Attach the end of the pen cord with the larger loop to your notebook. 34 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Using the device as a notebook Touchpad and touchpad buttons Touchpad Keep the touchpad clean. Protect it from dirt, liquids and grease. TouchpadDo not use the touchpad if your ngers are dirty. Do not rest heavy objects (e.g. books) on the touchpad or the touchpad buttons. 1 1 = Touchpad 2 = Touchpad buttons 2 The touchpad enables you to move the mouse pointer on the screen. The touchpad buttons allow you to select and execute commands. They correspond to the buttons on a conventional mouse. You can use a key combination to disable the touchpad, to avoid accidentally moving the pointer on the screen (see also "Key combinations", Page 40). Moving the pointer Move your nger on the touchpad.

The pointer will move. Touchpad Selecting an item Move the pointer to the item you wish to select. Touchpad Tap the touchpad once or press the left button once.

The item is selected. Executing commands Move the pointer to the eld you wish to select. Touchpad Tap the touchpad twice or press the left button twice.

The command is executed. Fujitsu 35 Working with the notebook Dragging items Select the desired item. Touchpad Press and hold the left button and drag the item to the desired position with the nger on the touchpad.

The item will be moved. Switching the Touchpad on and off You can switch the Touchpad on and off using a key combination, see "Key combinations", Page 40. 36 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Keyboard Keyboard Numerickeypad Numerickeypad Buttons The keyboard of your notebook is subject to continuous wear through normal use. The key markings are especially prone to wear. The key markings are liable to wear away over the life of the notebook. The keyboard has been designed to provide all the functions of an enhanced keyboard. Some enhanced keyboard functions are mapped with key combinations. The following description of keys refers to Windows. Additional functions supported by the keys are described in the relevant manuals supplied with your application programs. The gure below shows how to access the different characters on keys with overlaid functions. The example applies when the Caps Lock key has not been activated. The illustrations shown below may differ from your actual device. Num

0

0

0

0

Alt Gr

0

Fujitsu 37 Working with the notebook Key Description Backspace key The Backspace key deletes the character to the left of the cursor. Backspace Backspace Tab key The Tab key moves the cursor to the next tab stop. Tabkey Enter key (return) The Enter key terminates a command line. The command you have entered is executed when you press this key. Enterkey Return Enter Linefeed Shiftkey CapsLock Caps Lock key The Caps Lock key activates the Caps Lock mode, and the corresponding icon is displayed in the Windows information area. In Caps Lock mode, all of the characters you type appear in upper case. In the case of overlay keys, the character printed on the upper left of the key will appear when that key is pressed. To cancel the Caps Lock function, simply press the Caps Lock key again. Shift key The Shift key causes uppercase characters to appear. In the case of overlay keys, the character printed on the upper left of the key appears when that key is pressed. Fn button The Fn key enables the special functions indicated on overlay keys (see

"Key combinations", Page 40). Shiftkey Shift Fnkey Cursor keys The cursor keys move the cursor in the direction of the arrow, i.e. up, down, left, or right. Cursorkeys Cursorcontrolkeys Start key The Start key opens the Windows Start menu. Startkey Menu key The Menu key invokes the menu for the marked item. 38 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Numerickeypad Virtualnumerickeypad NumLock Virtual numeric keypad To provide the convenience of a numeric keypad, your keyboard is equipped with a virtual numeric keypad. The special keys of the virtual numeric keypad are recognisable by the numbers and symbols printed in the upper right corner of each key. If you have switched on the virtual numeric keypad, you can output the characters shown on the upper right of the keys. The keyboard layout shown below may differ from your actual device. 1 = Valid characters when the Num key is not activated 2 = Valid characters when the Num is activated Further information about the status indicators can be found in chapter "Status indicators", Page 18. Country and keyboard settings If you want to change the country and keyboard settings, proceed as follows:

Enter the settings by clicking Start (Settings) Control Panel Time, Regional and Language Options. Fujitsu 39 Working with the notebook Key combinations The key combinations described below apply when using Microsoft Windows operating systems. Some of the following key combinations may not function in other operating systems or with certain device drivers. Key combinations are entered as follows:

Press the rst key in the combination and keep it pressed. While holding the rst key down, press the other key or keys in the combination. Combination Description Switching the loudspeakers on/off This key combination switches the integrated loudspeakers on and off. Fn+F3 Loudspeaker Loudspeaker Enable/disable touchpad This key combination enables and disables the touchpad. Fn+F4 Touchpad Touchpadbuttons Touchpad Decrease screen brightness This key combination decreases the brightness of the screen. Screenbrightness Fn+F6 LCDscreen Increase screen brightness This key combination increases the brightness of the screen. Screenbrightness Fn+F7 Decrease volume This key combination reduces the volume of the internal loudspeakers. Fn+F8 Volume Increase volume This key combination increases the volume of the internal loudspeakers. Fn+F9 Volume 40 Fujitsu Combination Ctrl

C Working with the notebook Fn+F10 Description Toggle output screen ToggleoutputscreenUse this key combination to select which screen(s) is/are used for display if an external monitor is connected. Screen output is possible:

only on the notebooks LCD screen only on the external monitor on the notebooks LCD screen and the external monitor at the same time. Press the key combination several times to switch through all possible settings. It is possible to display video on two screens simultaneously, regardless of the type and number of external screens connected. If you have connected two external monitors to the port replicator, the following display outputs are possible:

only on the notebooks LCD screen only on the external monitor (analogue) at the same time on the LCD screen (digital) at the same time on the notebooks LCD screen and on the external monitor (analogue) You cannot use the key combination to switch output at the same time to both external monitors on the Port Replicator. Halt current operation This key combination can be used to halt an operation instantly without clearing the keyboard buffer. Back tab This key combination moves the cursor back to the previous tab stop. Shift+Tab Tabback Fujitsu 41 Working with the notebook Tablet buttons Your notebook has six multifunctional tablet buttons. You can navigate on the screen with a simple press of a button, call preset applications or ones that you have set yourself. The tablet buttons have different uses in different modes. In addition, you can still individually program some of the tablet buttons, see "Programming the tablet buttons", Page 43. 42 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Basic functions when the device has booted Button Basic function Windows button This button corresponds to the function of the Windows Start key on a keyboard. If the button is pressed in combination with the ON/OFF switch, the function corresponds to the key combination Ctrl + Alt + Del . Decrease volume This button reduces the volume of the built-in loudspeakers. Increase volume This button increases the volume of the built-in loudspeakers. Rotation Lock When you press this button, the orientation of the screen display changes from portrait (vertical) to landscape (horizontal) or vice versa. When you would like to use the Tablet PC as an eBook, for example, you would use the portrait orientation. When accessing spreadsheets, you would more typically use a landscape orientation. Windows 7:

This button locks and unlocks the automatic rotation of the display. Button "A"

This button starts the Fujitsu Menu application. You can use this application to change certain system settings. The button is freely programmable. Button "B"

Use this button to start the Windows Journal. The button is freely programmable. Programming the tablet buttons You can program the tablet buttons to open a specic application or execute a specic function when pressed. Proceed as follows:

In Control Panel, select the option to manage the settings for the tablet buttons and pen. Follow the instructions on the screen and program the tablet buttons as you require. Fujitsu 43 Working with the notebook Webcam WebcamDepending on the software used, you can use your Webcam to take pictures, record video clips or take part in web chats. The picture quality depends on the lighting conditions and the software being used. You can only operate the webcam with a particular application (e.g. an Internet telephony program or a video conferencing program which supports a webcam). When using the webcam the notebook support must not wobble. The webcam automatically adjusts itself to the current light level. For this reason the LCD screen may icker while the light level is adjusted. Further information on using the webcam and on the additional settings which are possible for your webcam can be found in the help function of the program which uses the webcam. If you would like to perform a function test of your web cam, there is suitable test software available at "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/support/index.html". 44 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Rechargeablebattery Battery Life,battery Rechargeablebattery Rechargeable battery RechargeablebatteryWhen not plugged into a mains socket, the notebook runs on its built-in battery. You can increase the life of the battery by caring for the battery properly. The average battery life is around 500 charge/discharge cycles. You can extend the battery life by taking advantage of the available energy saving functions. Battery Charging, caring for and maintaining the battery BatteryThe notebook battery can only be charged, when the ambient temperature is between 5C and max. 35C. You can charge the battery by connecting the notebook to the mains adapter

(see "Mains adapter connecting", Page 16). If the battery is running low you will hear a warning alarm. If you do not connect the mains adapter within ve minutes of the warning alarm described above, your notebook will automatically switch off. Battery monitoring the battery charging level BatterystatusmeterWindows also has a "Battery status meter" in the taskbar for monitoring the battery capacity. When you place the mouse pointer on the battery symbol, the system displays the battery status. The battery capacity can be monitored using an indicator which shows the current state of charge. Use the following menu to enable this feature:

Operating system Windows 7 Menu Start (Settings) Control panel Mobile PC Power options Self-discharge,battery Chargingcapacity,battery Battery Battery Battery storage Keep the battery pack between 0C and +30C. The lower the temperature at which the batteries are stored, the lower the rate of self-discharge. If you will be storing batteries for a longer period (longer than two months), the battery charge level should be approx. 30 %. To prevent exhaustive discharge which would permanently damage the battery, check the level of charge of the battery at regular intervals. To be able to make use of the optimal charging capacity of the batteries, the battery should be completely discharged and then fully recharged. If you do not use the batteries for long periods, remove them from the notebook. Never store the batteries in the device. Fujitsu 45 Working with the notebook Removing and installing the battery Only use rechargeable batteries approved by Fujitsu Technology Solutions for your notebook. Never use force when tting or removing a battery. Make sure that no foreign bodies get into the battery connections. Never store a battery for longer periods in the discharged state. This can make it impossible to recharge. Removing the battery Prepare for removal, see chapter "Preparing to remove components", Page 83. 1 3 2 Slide the release button (1) in direction of the arrow. Slide the release button (2) in direction of the arrow. Lift the battery out of the battery compartment (3). 46 Fujitsu Inserting battery Working with the notebook 3 2 1 Place the battery on the lower edge of the battery compartment (1). Slide the battery into the battery compartment until you feel it engage (2). Slide the release button into its locked position (3). Complete the removal, see chapter "Finishing component removal", Page 89. Fujitsu 47 Working with the notebook Battery charge status indicator You can check the charge status directly on the battery itself. a 11 Press the key (1).

The LED (a) lights up in one of the following colours:

LED indicator Green Orange Red LED not lit State of charge The battery is between 50 % and 100 %

charged. The battery is between 11 % and 49 % charged. The battery is between 1 % and 10 % charged. The battery is fully discharged. 48 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Modulebay Module ModulesThe design of your notebook enables the exible use of notebook batteries and drives. The following modules can be operated in the module bay of your notebook:

Optical drive Empty plug-in unit (save weight) Second battery Only use modules designed for your notebook. Do not use force when installing or removing the module. Make sure that no foreign objects enter the module bay. You can swap modules during operation. This means you do not need to switch off the notebook. To replace a module, simply click on the corresponding icon in the task bar and then on Exit or Select - Exit. The module can now be removed without any further actions being necessary. Removing a module 1 2 Module DriveWeightSaver Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow (1). Now pull the module out of the module bay (2). Fujitsu 49 Working with the notebook Installing a module Place the module into the module bay so that the contacts enter rst. Push the module into the module bay until you feel it locking into place. Optical drive Opticaldrive This product contains a light emitting diode, classication according to IEC 60825 1:2007: LASER CLASS 1, and must therefore not be opened. Handling data carriers HandlingObserve the following guidelines when handling data carriers:

Avoid touching the surface of a data carrier. Only handle data carriers by their edges. Always store data carriers in their cases. This will protect the data carrier against being covered in dust, scratched or damaged in any other way. Protect your data carriers against dust, mechanical vibrations and direct sunlight. Avoid storing a data carrier in areas subject to high temperatures or humidity. You may use both 8-cm and 12-cm data carriers in the optical drive. When using a data carrier of lesser quality, vibrations and reading errors may occur. 50 Fujitsu Working with the notebook CD/DVDindicator CD/DVD indicator The CD/DVD indicator ashes when a data carrier is inserted. The indicator goes out when the drive is ready for reading. The indicator lights up when the drive is being accessed. You may only remove the data carrier when the indicator is unlit. If the CD/DVD indicator does not go out after a data carrier has been inserted, but instead continues to ash, this means that the drive cannot access the data carrier. Either the data carrier is damaged or dirty or you are using a data carrier that the drive cannot read. Inserting or removing a data carrier RemovingThe notebook must be switched on. Inserting Push the insert/eject button (1).

The drive tray will open. Gently pull the drive tray (2) completely out. 2 1 Place the data carrier in the drive tray with the printed side facing upwards. or Remove a data carrier that has been inserted. Push in the drive tray until you feel it lock into place. Fujitsu 51 Working with the notebook Manual removal (emergency removal) In the event of a power failure or damage to the drive, you can remove the data carrier manually. CD/DVD:

Manualremovalofdatacarrier Emergencyremovalofdatacarrier Switch your notebook off. Push a pen or a piece of wire (such as a paperclip) rmly into the opening (1).

The drive tray is ejected. You can now pull the drive tray (2) out of the drive. 2 1 Removing and tting the dust removal cover

(ventilation slot cover) In order to ensure optimum cooling of the components in your notebook, you should periodically clean the ventilation slot of the heatsink. This ensures optimum fan performance. You can achieve the best cleaning results with a small hand-held vacuum cleaner. If necessary, you can also use a dry brush to release dust from the ventilation slots. Do not use any cleaning liquids! Ensure that no liquid enters the device. To avoid overheating of the device, do not remove the ventilation slot cover when the device is switched on. Prepare for removal, see chapter "Preparing to remove components", Page 83. Press and hold the lock of the ventilation slot cover (1) and remove it from its slot (2). Clean the dust chamber. 2 1 52 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Insert the ventilation slot cover into the slot (1) at an angle as shown, and ensure that you feel it click into place. Complete the removal, see chapter

"Finishing component removal", Page 89. 1 Fujitsu 53 Working with the notebook Using the power-management features BatteryThe notebook uses less power when the available power-management features are used. You will then be able to work longer when using the battery before having to recharge it. Power Power Power efciency is increased and environmental pollution reduced. By choosing the best power options, you can make signicant savings and at the same time help protect the environment. When you close the LCD screen, depending on the setting in Windows, the notebook automatically enters a power saving mode. We recommend the following settings:

Function Turn off monitor Turn off hard disk(s) Energy saving (S3) Hibernate mode (S4) On external power After 10 minutes After 15 minutes After 20 minutes After 1 hour On battery power After 5 minutes After 10 minutes After 15 minutes After 30 minutes Select the power management functions in your Control Panel. Select the Screen Saver in your Control Panel. or Right-click on the desktop. Switch on the screen saver by clicking Personalization Change screen saver. If you need further information about an option, you can get help with most settings by pressing F1 to open the Microsoft Help. When the notebook is in power-saving mode, the following must be remembered:

During power saving mode, open les are held in the main memory or in a swap le on the hard disk. Never turn off your notebook while it is in a power saving mode. If the built-in battery is nearly empty, close the open les and do not go into power saving mode. If you do not intend to use your notebook for a long period of time:

Exit power saving mode if necessary via the mouse or keyboard or by switching on the notebook. Close all opened programs and completely shut down the notebook. 54 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Memory cards SlotYour notebook is equipped with an integrated memory card reader. Observe the manufacturers instructions when handling the memory cards. Memorycard Supported format The memory card reader supports the following format:

Secure Digital (SDTM card) Inserting the memory card Carefully slide the memory card into the slot. The label should be facing upward. Do not apply excessive force, as otherwise the delicate contact surfaces could be damaged. Memorycard

Depending on the particular type used, the memory card may protrude slightly from the slot. Fujitsu 55 Working with the notebook Removing the memory card Memorycard In order to protect your data, always follow the correct procedure for removing the card outlined below. You can stop the memory card via the corresponding icon in the task bar:

Left-click on the icon. Select the card you want to stop and remove. Press the Enter key.

Wait for the dialogue box which tells you that it is now safe to remove the memory card. On devices with card locking: Press on the storage card (1). Memorycard

The storage card is released and can now be removed. Pull the storage card out of the slot (2). 1 2 ExpressCards An ExpressCard slot allows an ExpressCard/54 to be used with the computer. SlotExpressCard Consult the documentation supplied by the ExpressCards manufacturer and follow the instructions provided. Never use force when installing or removing an ExpressCard. Make sure that no foreign objects enter the ExpressCard slot. 56 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Inserting the card Keep the placeholder for the slot in a safe place. When you remove the card again, you must reinstall the place holder. This prevents foreign objects from getting into the slot. 1 2 Press the edge of the placeholder (1) to make the card placeholder protrude from the notebooks case. Pull the card placeholder out of the slot (2). Insert the card into the slot guide with the connection contacts rst. Gently push the card into the slot until you feel it click into place. Do not use any force. Depending on the particular type used, the card may protrude slightly from the slot. Please see the documentation relating to the card for driver installation instructions. Fujitsu 57 Working with the notebook Removing the card Always remove the card according to the rules described below, to ensure that none of your data is lost. You can stop the ExpressCard using the corresponding symbol in the task bar:

Click on the symbol for safe removal of hardware with the left mouse button. Select the ExpressCard you want to stop and remove. Press the Enter key.

Wait for the dialogue box which tells you that it is now safe to remove the ExpressCard. Press the edge of the card (1) so that the card protrudes a little from the notebook. Pull the card out of the slot (2). 1 2 2 Insert the card placeholder into the slot guide. Gently slide the card placeholder into the slot until you feel it click into place. Microphone Loudspeakers Bassloudspeaker(subwoofer) Loudspeakers and microphones VolumecontrolInformation on the exact position of the speakers and microphone can be found in "Ports and controls", Page 9. Please refer to chapter "Key combinations", Page 40 for information on setting the volume and also enabling/disabling the loudspeakers using key combinations. If you attach an external microphone, the built-in microphone is disabled. When you connect headphones or external speakers, the built-in speakers are disabled. Information on connecting headphones and a microphone can be found in "Connecting external devices", Page 75. 58 Fujitsu Working with the notebook SIM card A SIM card (Subscriber Identity Module) is a chip card which is inserted in a mobile phone or notebook and, together with an integrated UMTS/LTE module, enables access to a mobile network. When handling SIM cards, follow the instructions supplied by the provider. Inserting the SIM card Prepare for installation of the SIM card, see chapter "Preparing to remove components", Page 83. Slide the SIM card into the slot (1) until it is felt to engage, as shown in the battery compartment. 1 Complete the installation, see chapter "Finishing component removal", Page 89. Removing the SIM card Prepare for removal of the SIM card, see chapter "Preparing to remove components", Page 83. Press on the edge of the SIM card so that it jumps up slightly out of the slot. Pull the SIM card out of the slot in the direction of the arrow (1). 1 Complete the removal, see chapter "Finishing component removal", Page 89. Fujitsu 59 Working with the notebook Optional Wireless LAN / Bluetooth / UMTS /

LTE wireless components The installation of radio components not approved by Fujitsu Technology Solutions will invalidate the certications issued for this device. Depending on the device conguration you ordered, your device will be equipped with Wireless LAN, Bluetooth and/or UMTS / LTE. Switching the wireless components on and off Before switching on your device for the rst time, the on/off switch for radio components must be in the "ON" position. Slide the ON/OFF switch into the "ON"

position to activate the radio components. or WirelessLAN WirelessLAN Bluetooth Bluetooth Slide the ON/OFF switch to the

"OFF" position to deactivate the radio components. If you switch off the radio components, the wireless LAN antenna and, when present, the Bluetooth module and UMTS/LTE module will be switched off. You can use the PlugfreeNetwork program to switch the installed radio components on and off individually. You can also deactivate the wireless components individually in the BIOS Setup. For this to occur, you must either not have assigned a supervisor password or if a supervisor password has been assigned, you must know this password. Pay attention to the additional safety notes for devices with radio components provided in the "Safety/Regulations" manual. Details on using Wireless LAN can be found in the online help system included in the Wireless LAN software. You can nd more information on how to use Bluetooth on the CD you received with your Bluetooth software. You can obtain more information on UMTS/LTE from your service provider. 60 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Setting up WLAN access Requirement: A WLAN must be available and you must have the corresponding access information. Information on conguring the WLAN access can be found in the documentation for your operating system. Access via UMTS / LTE If you ordered an integrated UMTS / LTE module with your system, you can enjoy optimum reception and maximum energy efciency without awkward cables or antennas. The optional UMTS / LTE module is ready for use straight away. If you did not order a UMTS / LTE module, you can purchase the accessories for UMTS /

LTE reception from your retailer or your Fujitsu Technology Solutions dealer. You will nd information on establishing the connection with the UMTS / LTE network in the documentation for the hardware used. Your device can connect to the Internet via UMTS / LTE. To do this, use one of the following types of connection:

Integrated UMTS / LTE module (availability dependent on your model variant) a USB dongle (a USB stick with your mobile phone providers SIM card) a mobile end-device (e.g. mobile phone with Bluetooth or cable connection) UMTS ExpressCard (ts into the ExpressCard slot on your device) UMTS/LTE antenna To improve the signal strength of the UMTS/LTE, fold out the UMTS/LTE antenna in the direction of the arrow (1). UMTS UMTS 1 Fujitsu 61 Working with the notebook Ethernet and LAN EthernetLANThe internal network module of your notebook supports Ethernet LAN. You can use it to establish a connection to a local network (LAN = Local Area Network). Connect the network cable to the LAN port of the notebook (1). Connect the network cable to your network connection (2). 1 2 Your network administrator can help you to congure and use the LAN connections. The network cable is not included in the delivery scope. This type of cable can be obtained from a specialist dealer. Your Port Replicator (optional) Your Port Replicator is a device that enables you to quickly connect your notebook to your peripherals, such as a monitor, printer etc. The features offered by the Port Replicator include standard ports for monitor, audio, mouse and keyboard. You need only dock the notebook in order to use your peripheral devices. 62 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Ports on the Port Replicator PortReplicator Ports 1 10 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 1 = ON/OFF switch 2 = USB ports (USB 3.0) 3 = DVI port 4 = DisplayPort 5 = VGA monitor port 6 = LAN port 7 = Headphone port 11 8 = Security Lock device 9 = DC input connector (DC IN) 10 = Adjusting lever of the Port Replicator 11 = Unlocking lever 12 = Connector on the Port Replicator for the docking port on the bottom of the notebook Fujitsu 63 Working with the notebook Setting up the port replicator Select a suitable location for the port replicator before setting it up. Follow the instructions below when doing so:

Never place the port replicator on a soft surface (e.g. carpeting, upholstered furniture, bed). This can block the air vents of the notebook and cause overheating and damage. Place the port replicator on a stable, at and non-slip surface. Please note that the port replicators rubber feet may mark certain types of surface. Never place the port replicator and the mains adapter on a heat-sensitive surface. Do not expose the port replicator to extreme environmental conditions. Protect the port replicator from dust, humidity and heat. Connect the notebook to the port replicator The Port Replicator supports various LIFEBOOK models. The adjusting lever of the Port Replicator can be used to adapt the Port Replicator to the size of the particular LIFEBOOK. Before connecting the notebook to the port replicator, check if the setting lever of the port replicator is in the right position. the setting lever to the correct position. If necessary, adjust Disconnect the mains adapter cable from the DC socket (DC IN) of the notebook. 64 Fujitsu Working with the notebook 3 1 2 Position the notebook on the port replicator in such a way that the docking connector on the underside of the notebook is aligned with the docking connector of the port replicator as shown. Press down on the notebooks rear corners so that it locks into position. Connect the mains adapter cable to the DC jack (DC IN) of the port replicator (1). Connect the power cable to the mains adapter (2). Plug the power cable into the mains socket (3). Fujitsu 65 Working with the notebook Switching on the notebook via the port replicator Press the ON/OFF switch on the port replicator to switch the notebook on. Switching off notebook via Port Replicator Close all applications and shut down your operating system (please refer to the manual for the operating system). If the notebook cannot be shut down properly, press the ON/OFF button on the Port Replicator for approx. four seconds. The notebook will switch off. Any unsaved data may however be lost. 66 Fujitsu Working with the notebook Disconnecting the notebook from the port replicator Problems may occur if the notebook is removed from the port replicator during operation. We recommend that you switch off the notebook beforehand or use the Windows function Start Undock. Windows 7 Problems may occur if the notebook is removed from the port replicator during operation. We recommend that you switch off the notebook beforehand or use the Windows function Start (arrow icon) Undock. 2 Pull the release button in the direction of the arrow (1). Pick up the notebook (2). 1 Fujitsu 67 Security functions Security functions SecurityfunctionsYour notebook has several security features that you can use to secure your system from unauthorised access. This chapter explains how to use each function, and what the benets are. Please remember that in some cases, for example, forgetting your password, you may be locked out and unable to access your data. Therefore, please note the following information:

Make regular backups to external data carriers such as external hard drives, CDs, DVDs or Blu-ray Discs. Some security functions need you to choose passwords. Make a note of the passwords and keep them in a safe place. If you forget your passwords you will need to contact the our Service Desk. Deletion or resetting of passwords is not covered by your warranty and a charge will be made for assistance. Brief overview of security functions Detailed information about the security equipment of your device can be found in the "Professional Notebook" manual, on the "Drivers & Utilities" CD/DVD or on the Internet at "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/support/index.html". Security functions Security Lock Fingerprint sensor (depending on the device) BIOS password protection Boot from removable media Owner Information Trusted Platform Module

(device dependent) Type of protection Mechanical Biometric Password protection for BIOS Setup, operating system and hard disk with supervisor and user password. The passwords consist of a maximum of eight alphanumeric characters. Prevents unauthorised booting of an operating system from external media (e.g. USB stick, USB CD-ROM drive etc.). Overlay service desk or owner information during the boot process. Identication and authentication of the notebook Preparation Fit and lock the Kensington Lock Cable (accessory). Install the supplied ngerprint software. Specify at least one supervisor password in the BIOS Setup and activate the password protection for the operating system and hard disk as desired. In the BIOS Setup, go to the Security menu and edit the option Boot from Removable Media. In the BIOS Setup, go to the Security menu and edit the option Owner Information. Dene a supervisor password in the BIOS Setup and enable the TPM (Security Chip). 68 Fujitsu Security functions Conguring the ngerprint sensor FingerprintsensorThe ngerprint sensor can record an image of a ngerprint. With additional ngerprint software, this image can be processed and used instead of a password. Fingerprintsensor You must install the ngerprint software in order to be able to use the ngerprint sensor (1). 1 Using the Security Lock Your device comes with a Security Lock device for the Kensington Lock Cable. You can use the Kensington Lock Cable, a sturdy steel cable, to help protect your notebook from theft. The Kensington Lock Cable is available as an accessory. Fujitsu Technology Solutions recommends the use of a combination lock. Fit the Kensington Lock Cable on the device on your notebook. UsingtheKensingtonLockCable SecurityLock Mechanicalbackup Anti-theftprotection Attach another Kensington Lock Cable to your Port Replicator to protect your Port Replicator from theft as well. Fujitsu 69 Security functions Conguring password protection in BIOS Setup Utility Before using the various options for password protection in the BIOS Setup utility to increase data security, please observe the following:

Make a note of the passwords and keep them in a safe place. If you forget your supervisor password you will not be able to access your notebook. Passwords are not covered by your warranty and a charge will be made for assistance. Passwordprotection Your password can be up to eight characters long and contain letters and numbers. No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase. Protecting BIOS Setup Utility (supervisor and user password) If you have opened these operating instructions on the screen, we recommend that you print out the following instructions. Because you cannot call the instructions onto the screen while you are setting up the password. BIOS SetupUtilityYou prevent unauthorised use of the BIOS Setup Utility with both the supervisor and the user password. The supervisor password gives you access to all functions of the BIOS Setup Utility, while the user password only provides some of the functions. You can only set a user password if a supervisor password has already been assigned. Please refer to the ""Settings in BIOS Setup Utility", Page 90 section for a description of how to call up and operate the BIOS Setup Utility. Setting supervisor and user password Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Select the Set Supervisor Password eld and press the Enter key.

With Enter new Password: you are asked to enter a password. Enter the password and press the Enter key.

Conrm new Password requires you to conrm the password. Enter the password again and press the Enter key.

Changes have been saved is a conrmation that the new password has been saved. To set the user password, select Set User Password and proceed exactly as when conguring the supervisor password.

If you do not want to change any other settings, you can exit BIOS Setup Utility. In the Exit menu, select the option Save Changes & Exit. Select Yes and press the Enter key.

The notebook will be rebooted and the new password will come into effect. It will now be Password Supervisorpassword Userpassword necessary to rst enter your supervisor or user password in order to open the BIOS Setup Utility. Please note that the user password only provides access to a few of the BIOS settings. 70 Fujitsu Security functions Changing the supervisor or user password You can only change the supervisor password when you have logged into the BIOS Setup Utility with the supervisor password. Userpassword Call the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. When changing the password, proceed exactly as for password assignment. Password Supervisorpassword Password Supervisorpassword Removing passwords To remove a password (without setting a new password) perform the following steps:

Userpassword Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Highlight the Set Supervisor Password or Set User Password eld and press the Enter key.

You will be requested to enter the current password by the Enter Current Password prompt. You will be requested to enter a new password by the Enter New Password prompt. Press the Enter key twice. In the Exit menu, select the option Save Changes & Exit. Select Yes and press the Enter key.

The notebook will now reboot with the password removed. Removing the supervisor password simultaneously deactivates the user password. Password protection for booting of the operating system With the supervisor password you have set in the BIOS Setup Utility (see section "Setting supervisor and user password", Page 70), you can also prevent booting of the operating system. Operatingsystem Activating system protection Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Operatingsystem Select the Password on Boot option and press the Enter key. Select the desired option (Disabled, First Boot or Every Boot) and press the Enter key Select the Save Changes & Exit option under Exit.

The notebook will reboot. You will be prompted to enter your password (the supervisor password). Deactivating system protection Start the BIOS Setup Utility and go to the Security menu. Operatingsystem Select the Password on Boot option and press the Enter key. Select the Disabled option and press the Enter key.

If you do not want to change any other settings, you can exit BIOS Setup Utility. Select the Save Changes & Exit option under Exit.

The notebook will reboot. The system is no longer password-protected. Fujitsu 71 Security functions Password protection for the hard disk Passwordprotection:

The had disk password prevents unauthorised access to the hard disk drives and is checked internally each time the system is booted. The condition for this is that you have assigned at least the supervisor password. Activating hard disk protection Call up the BIOS Setup and select the Security menu.

If you have not assigned BIOS passwords yet, dene the supervisor and the user password now, if desired (see "Security functions", Page 68). Mark the Hard Disk Security eld and press the Enter key. In the Drive0 area mark the Set Master Password eld and press the Enter key.

Enter new Password then appears and you are asked to enter a password. Enter the password and press the Enter key.

Conrm new Password requires you to conrm the password. Enter the password again and press the Enter key.

Setup Notice: Changes have been saved is displayed to conrm that the new password has been saved. To assign the password for the second hard disk (Drive1), go to the Drive1 area and select the eld Set Master Password, then proceed in exactly the same way as for setting up the password for the rst hard disk (Drive0).

The eld Password Entry on Boot is set to Enabled by default. You can exit the BIOS Setup once you have nished changing the settings. From the Exit menu, choose the option Exit Saving Changes. Press the Enter key and select Yes.

The notebook reboots and your hard disk is now protected with a password. The system will ask you to enter the password when the notebook is restarted again. Deactivating hard disk protection To cancel a password without setting a new one, proceed as follows:

Call up the BIOS Setup and select the Security menu. Mark the Hard Disk Security eld and press the Enter key. In the Drive0 area mark the Set Master Password eld and press the Enter key.

You will be initially requested to enter the old password by the Enter current Password prompt. You will then be requested to enter a new password by the Enter new Password prompt. After entering the password, press the Enter key three times. From the Exit menu, choose the option Exit Saving Changes. Press the Enter key and select Yes.

The notebook reboots, and password protection for the hard disk is cancelled. To cancel the password for the second hard disk (Drive1), go to the Drive1 area and select the eld Set Master Password, then proceed in exactly the same way as for cancelling the password for the rst hard disk (Drive0). 72 Fujitsu Security functions Using the security function of the tablet keys If you have allotted a supervisor and/or user password in the form of tablet key combinations as described below, you can use the tablet keys to enter this when you start your device. Setting the Supervisor password Select Start - Run. Enter the following at the command line: C:\Program Files\Fujitsu\Security Panel Application\Supervisor\FJSECS.EXE. Conrm with Enter . Follow the instructions on the screen. Setting the User password Select Start - All Programs. Select Security Panel Application Security Panel Application. Follow the instructions on the screen. Entering passwords using the tablet buttons The passwords to be entered via the tablet buttons are usually composed of a combination of button presses, e.g. button 2 + button 3 followed by button 1 and the ENT button. Enter your password using the buttons 1 to 4 . Conrm by pressing ENT .

The device will be unlocked. Fujitsu 73 Security functions Trusted Platform Module (TPM) (device-dependent) TPMTrustedPlatformModuleTo use the TPM, you must activate the TPM in the BIOS Setup before the software is installed. The condition for this is that you have assigned at least the supervisor password (see "Security functions", Page 68). Requirement: You have assigned a supervisor password, see "Security functions", Page 68. Enabling TPM Call up the BIOS Setup and select the Security menu. Mark the TPM Security Chip Setting eld and press the Enter key. Select Enabled to activate the TPM.

Once you have activated the TPM the Clear Security Chip option appears. Select Clear Security Chip to delete the holder in the TPM. By clicking on Enabled, all secret keys (e.g. SRK - Storage Root Keys, AIK - Attestation Identity Keys etc.) generated by applications are deleted. Please note that you will then no longer be able to access the data you have encrypted with the keys based on that holder. Select the Exit Saving Changes option in the Exit menu. Press the Enter key and select Yes.

The notebook will restart, and TPM will be enabled after the reboot. Requirement: You have assigned a supervisor password, see "Security functions", Page 68. Disabling TPM Call up the BIOS Setup and select the Security menu. Mark the TPM Security Chip Setting eld and press the Enter key. Select Disabled to deactivate the TPM. From the Exit menu, choose the option Exit Saving Changes. Press the Enter key and select Yes.

Your notebook will now restart and TPM will be disabled. 74 Fujitsu Connecting external devices Connecting external devices Always refer to the safety information provided in "Important notes", Page 12 before connecting or disconnecting any devices to or from your notebook. Always read the documentation supplied with the device you wish to connect. Never connect or disconnect cables during a thunderstorm. Never pull at a cable when disconnecting it. Always grasp the plug. Follow the steps below in order, when connecting or disconnecting devices to your notebook:

With some devices such as USB devices, it is not necessary to switch off the notebook and the device before connecting/disconnecting. For more information about whether or not devices need to be switched off, please refer to the documentation supplied with the external device. Some of the external devices require special drivers (see the operating system and external device documentation). Connecting devices to the notebook 1. Turn off your notebook and all external devices. 2. Unplug your notebook and all devices from the mains sockets. 3. Connect the cables for your external devices following the instructions. 4. Plug all power cables into the mains sockets. Peripheraldevices Devices Disconnecting devices from the notebook 1. Turn off your notebook and all external devices. 2. Unplug your notebook and all devices from the mains sockets. 3. Disconnect the cables for your external devices following the instructions. Devices Peripheraldevices Fujitsu 75 Connecting external devices Connecting an external monitor The Port Replicator, available as an option for your notebook, offers you a DVI port and a DisplayPort. An analogue monitor is connected to the analogue VGA monitor port, a digital monitor to the DVI-I monitor port of the port replicator. Screen output is limited to a maximum of two screens at any one time (see "Key combinations", Page 40, section "Toggle output screen"). Monitor VGAconnectionsocket Screenport Monitorport Digital DVI monitor port Analogue VGA monitor port Switch off the notebook and the external monitor. Plug the data cable of the external monitor into the monitor port. First switch on the external monitor and then the notebook. You can also switch back and forth between the external monitor and the notebooks LCD monitor, see chapter "Key combinations", Page 40. You can display the same picture on the external monitor and the notebook LCD screen simultaneously. 76 Fujitsu Connecting external devices Connecting an external monitor to the DisplayPort It is possible to connect a digital monitor to the DisplayPort on the port replicator. Screen output is limited to a maximum of two screens at any one time (see "Key combinations", Page 40, section "Toggle output screen"). Digital DisplayPort Switch off the notebook and the external monitor. Plug the data cable of the external monitor into the monitor port. First switch on the external monitor and then the notebook. You can also switch between the external monitor and the LCD monitor of the notebook, see chapter "Key combinations", Page 40. You can display the same picture on the external monitor and the notebook LCD monitor simultaneously. Fujitsu 77 Connecting external devices HDMI port The HDMI port on your notebook can be used to connect an external amplier, LCD TV or a plasma TV with an HDMI connection. HDMIport Connect the data cable to the external device. Connect the data cable to the HDMI port of the notebook. Some LCD televisions have only two loudspeaker connections and therefore cannot reproduce Dolby digital or DTS. In order to reproduce the sound, you must go into Windows and adjust the sound settings. Proceed as follows:

Select Startsymbol (Settings) Control Panel Hardware and Sound Sound. Mark Realtek HDMI Output. Select Properties Supported formats. Deactivate the settings DTS audio and Dolby digital. Conrm the settings with OK. 78 Fujitsu Connecting external devices Connecting USB devices USBportsOn the USB ports, you can connect external devices that also have a USB port

(e.g. a DVD drive, a printer, a scanner or a modem). USB devices are hot-pluggable. This means you can connect and disconnect devices while your operating system is running. USB 1.x has a maximum data transfer rate of 12 Mbit/s. USB 2.0 has a data transfer rate of up to 480 Mbit/s. USB 3.0 has a data transfer rate of up to 5 Gbit/s. Additional information can be found in the documentation for the USB devices. Connect the data cable to the external device. Connect the data cable to a USB port of the notebook. Device drivers USB devices will be automatically recognised and installed by your operating system. Fujitsu 79 Connecting external devices USB port with charging function (Anytime USB charge) USBchargingfunction It is recommended that the notebook be operated with the power supply connected whenever the USB port with charging function is in use, as this function will drain the battery more quickly if an external USB device is being charged. The power supply unit must already be connected when the notebook is switched off, as otherwise the USB charging function will be disabled and the connected USB devices will not be charged. Some USB devices (e.g. mobile telephones) require a driver in order to utilise the USB charging function. In this case the USB charging function will not work when the notebook is switched off, as no drivers are active when the notebook is switched off. You can use this USB port to charge or supply power to a USB device (e.g. to charge a PDA or a mobile phone or to connect a USB lamp), even if the notebook is switched off. How to remove USB devices correctly Always correctly remove the device according to the rules described below, to ensure that none of your data is lost. Left click on the icon to safely remove hardware, located in the taskbar. Select the device which you want to shut down and remove. Press the Enter key.

Wait for the dialogue box which tells you that it is now safe to remove the device. 80 Fujitsu Connecting external devices Connecting external audio devices Microphone port/Line In Microphone,connectingThe microphone port/Line In allows you to connect an external microphone, a MiniDisc player, MP3 player, CD player or a tape deck to your notebook. Audiodevices,connecting Audioports Connect the audio cable to the external device. Connect the audio cable to the microphone port/Line In of the notebook. Headphone port ConnectingheadphonesYou can connect headphones or external loudspeakers to your notebook via the headphone port. Connectingaudio devices Audioports Connect the audio cable to the external device. Connect the audio cable to the headphone port of the notebook.

The internal loudspeakers are disabled. If you purchase a cable from a retailer, please note the following information:

The headphone port on your notebook is a "3.5 mm jack socket". If you want to connect headphones or a speaker you will need a "3.5 mm jack plug". Fujitsu 81 Removing and installing components during servicing Removing and installing components during servicing Only qualied technicians should repair your notebook. Unauthorised opening or incorrect repair may greatly endanger the user (electric shock, re risk) and will invalidate your warranty. Servicing Components After consulting the Hotline/Service Desk, you may remove and install the components described in this chapter yourself. If you remove and install components without consulting the Hotline/Service Desk, then the warranty of your notebook will be voided. Notes on installing and removing boards and components Switch the notebook off and pull the power plug out of the mains socket. Always remove the battery. Take care when you use the locking mechanisms on the battery and any other component. Never use sharp objects such as screwdrivers, scissors or knives as leverage to remove covers. Notes Board ESD Boards with electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are marked with the label shown. When handling boards tted with ESDs, you must always observe the following points:

You must always discharge static build up (e.g. by touching a grounded object) before working. The equipment and tools you use must be free of static charges. Remove the power plug from the mains supply before inserting or removing boards containing ESDs. Always hold boards with ESDs by their edges. Never touch pins or conductors on boards tted with ESDs. 82 Fujitsu Removing and installing components during servicing Preparing to remove components If you are going to remove or change system components, prepare for the removal as follows:

Please observe the safety information in chapter "Important notes", Page 12. Remove the power plug from the mains outlet !

Switch the device off. The device must not be in energy-saving mode !

Close the LCD screen. Remove all the cables from the device. Turn the device over and place it on a stable, at and clean surface. If necessary, lay an anti-slip cloth on this surface to prevent the device from being scratched. Remove the battery (see "Removing the battery", Page 46). Installing and removing memory expansion If you are asked by the Hotline/Service Desk to remove and install the memory expansion yourself, proceed as follows:

Removingmemory Systemexpansion Systemexpansion Memorymodule Mainmemory Please observe the safety information in chapter "Important notes", Page 12. When installing/removing memory modules, the battery must be removed from the notebook and the notebook must not be connected to the power supply, see "Preparing to remove components", Page 83. Only use memory expansion modules that have been approved for your notebook (see "Technical data", Page 99). Never use force when installing or removing a memory extension. Make sure that foreign objects do not fall into the memory extension compartment. You must open the service compartment to remove or install a memory module. On some devices, opening the compartment may expose other components. These components should be removed and replaced only by authorised specialists. Therefore, be sure to observe the following:

Individual components can become very hot during operation. Therefore, we recommend that you wait one hour after switching off the notebook before removing or installing memory modules. Otherwise, there is a risk of suffering burns!

As some components are exposed that are sensitive to static electricity, please take note of chapter "Notes on installing and removing boards and components", Page 82. Fujitsu 83 Removing and installing components during servicing Removing a cover 1 2 Remove the screw (1). Pull off the cover from the notebook in the direction of the arrow (2). Removing memory modules Carefully push the two mounting clips outwards (1). 3 2 1 1 Memoryexpansion Memorymodule

The memory module snaps upwards (2). Pull the memory module out of its slot in the direction of the arrow (3). 84 Fujitsu Removing and installing components during servicing Insert the memory module with the contacts and the recess (a) facing the slot (1). Memorymodule Carefully push the memory module Memoryexpansion downwards until you feel into place (2). it click Installing a memory module 1 2 2 a Attaching the cover 2 1 Place the cover into position, following the direction of the arrow (1). Fasten the cover with the screw (2). Install the battery again (see "Removing and installing the battery", Page 46). Turn the notebook the right way up again and place it on a at surface. Reconnect the cables that were previously disconnected. Fujitsu 85 Removing and installing components during servicing Removing and installing the hard disk Removing a cover 1 2 3 Remove the screw (1). Keep the screw in a safe place. If you are removing more than one component at the same time, store the screws for the individual components separate from each other. If you install the wrong screws, components may be damaged. Slide the cover in direction of the arrow (2). Lift the cover off the notebook (3). 86 Fujitsu Removing and installing components during servicing Removing a hard disk 2 1 To release the hard disk from the contacts, pull it in the direction of the arrow (1). Remove the hard disk from the hard disk compartment (2). Fujitsu 87 Removing and installing components during servicing Installing a hard disk 2 1 Place the hard disk into the hard disk compartment (1). Push the hard disk in the direction of the arrow (2) until the contacts of the hard disk engage. 88 Fujitsu Removing and installing components during servicing Attaching the cover 3 2 1 Place the cover in the correct mounting position (1). Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow (2). Tighten the screw (3). Finishing component removal After you have removed or changed the system components as you required, please prepare your device for operation again as follows:

Install the battery again (see "Inserting battery", Page 47). Turn the notebook the right way up again and place it on a at surface. Reconnect the cables that you disconnected before. Fujitsu 89 Settings in BIOS Setup Utility Settings in BIOS Setup Utility BIOS SetupUtility Systemsettings,BIOSSetupUtility Conguration,BIOSSetupUtility Setup Systemconguration HardwarecongurationThe BIOS Setup Utility allows you to set the system functions and the hardware conguration for the notebook. When it is delivered, the notebook is set to factory default settings. You can change these settings in BIOS Setup Utility. Any changes you make take effect as soon as you save and exit the BIOS Setup Utility. The BIOS Setup Utility program contains the following menus:

About System Advanced Displays information relating to the BIOS, processor and notebook Advanced system settings Conguration of various hardware components, such as mouse, keyboard, processor Password settings and security functions Conguration of the start-up sequence Exits the BIOS Setup Utility Security Boot Exit Starting the BIOS Setup Utility Reboot the device (switch off/on or reboot the operating system).

The following or a similar display appears on the screen at start-up:

BIOSSetupUtility

<F2> BIOS Setup <F12> Boot Menu Press the function key F2 . If a password has been assigned, enter the password and press the Enter key. If you have forgotten the password, contact your system administrator or contact our customer service centre. The BIOS Setup Utility starts. Operating BIOS Setup Utility BIOS SetupUtility Press the F1 key to display help on the operation of the BIOS Setup Utility. The description of the individual settings is shown in the right-hand window of the BIOS Setup Utility. With the F9 key you can load the default settings of the BIOS Setup Utility. Use the cursor keys or to select the menu you wish to access to make changes.

The menu is displayed on the screen. Select the option you want to change with the cursor keys or Press the Enter key. Press the ESC key to exit the selected menu. For future reference, make a note of the changes you have made (for example, in this manual). 90 Fujitsu Settings in BIOS Setup Utility Exiting BIOS Setup Utility BIOS SetupUtilityYou need to select the desired option in the Exit menu and activate it by pressing the Enter key:

Exit Saving Changes - save changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility To save the current menu settings and exit the BIOS Setup Utility, select Exit Saving Changes and Yes.

The notebook is rebooted and the new settings come into effect. Exit Discarding Changes Discard changes and exit BIOS Setup Utility To discard the changes, select Exit Discarding Changes and Yes.

The settings in place when BIOS Setup Utility was called remain effective. BIOS Setup Utility is terminated and the notebook is rebooted. Load Setup Defaults Copy Standard Entries To copy the standard entries for all menus of the BIOS Setup Utility, choose Load Setup Defaults and Yes. Discard Changes Discard changes without exiting the BIOS Setup Utility To discard the changes you have made, select Discard Changes and Yes.

The settings in place when BIOS Setup Utility was called remain effective. You can now make additional settings in the BIOS Setup Utility. If you want to exitBIOS Setup Utilitywith these settings, select Exit Saving Changes and Yes. Save Changes - save changes without exiting the BIOS Setup Utility To save the changes, select Save Changes and Yes.

The changes are saved. You can now make additional settings in the BIOS Setup Utility. If you want to exit BIOS Setup Utility with these settings, choose Exit Saving Changes and Yes. Save Changes and Power Off To save the changes and switch off your device, select Save Changes and Power Off and Yes.

The changes are saved. Your device is shut down. Fujitsu 91 Troubleshooting and tips Troubleshooting and tips Troubleshooting TipsFault Troubleshooting Follow the safety notes in the "Safety/Regulations" manual when connecting or disconnecting cables. If a fault occurs, try to correct it as described. If you fail to correct the problem, proceed as follows:

Make a note of the steps and the circumstances that led to the fault. Also make a note of any error messages displayed. Switch the notebook off. Please contact the Hotline/Service Desk. You can nd the telephone numbers in the service desk list. Please have the following information ready when you call:

The model name and serial number of the notebook. The serial number is located on a sticker on the underside of the notebook. Notes of any messages that appear on the screen and information on acoustic signals. Any changes you have made to the hardware or software since receiving the notebook. Any changes you have made to the BIOS Setup settings since receiving the notebook. Your system conguration and all peripheral devices connected to your system. Your sales contract. Our notebooks have been designed primarily with mobile applications in mind. This means that considerable effort has been made to optimise components and equipment in terms of weight, space and energy requirements. Depending on the particular conguration you have purchased, it is possible that functionality may be slightly reduced compared to a desktop PC if you are running processor-intensive gaming software, e.g. games with intensive 3D graphics. Updating your hardware with drivers which have not been approved by Fujitsu Technology Solutions may result in performance losses, data losses or malfunction of the equipment. A list of approved drivers and current BIOS versions can be downloaded from: "http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/Download/Index.asp"

Help if problems occur Should you encounter a problem with your computer that you cannot resolve yourself:

Note the ID number of your device. The ID number is found on the type rating plate on the back or underside of the casing. For further clarication of the problem, contact the Service Desk for your country (see the Service Desk list or visit the Internet at

"http://support.ts.fujitsu.com/contact/servicedesk/ServiceDeskNumber_Int.asp"). When you do this, please have ready the ID number and serial number of your system. 92 Fujitsu Troubleshooting and tips The notebooks date or time is incorrect Bufferbattery,loadCause Time and date are incorrect. Troubleshooting With the BIOS-Setup-Utility, you can set the Summertime Time,daylightsavings Timenotcorrect Timenotcorrect Incorrectdate/time Dateisincorrect date and time in the main menu. If the time and date are still set incorrectly after switching on the notebook. Please contact your sales outlet or our Hotline/Service Desk. Battery indicator does not illuminate Fault elimination Cause The battery is not installed correctly. Switch the notebook off. Check whether the battery is installed correctly in its compartment. The battery is fully discharged. Switch the notebook on. Charge the battery. or Install a charged battery. or Connect the notebook to a mains outlet using the mains adapter. When certain characters are entered on the keyboard, only numerals are written Troubleshooting AbeepsoundseverysecondCause Press the Num key. The virtual numeric keypad of your device is activated, see "Virtual numeric keypad", Page 39 LCDscreen The notebooks LCD screen remains blank LCDscreenistoodarkCause Monitor is switched off. External monitor or television set connected. Troubleshooting Press a key or touch the touchpad. Press the key combination to switch the screen output, see "Key combinations", Page 40. Fujitsu 93 Troubleshooting and tips The LCD screen is difcult to read Troubleshooting LCDscreenCause Turn the notebook or alter the tilt of the LCD Reected glare LCDscreen screen. Increase the brightness of the screen. The external monitor remains blank Troubleshooting MonitorCause Switch the external monitor on. Monitor is switched off. Press any key to continue. Power saving has been activated (monitor is blank). Brightness is set to dark. Screen output is set to the notebooks LCD screen Adjust the brightness of the monitor. Press the key combination to switch the screen output, see "Key combinations", Page 40. The external monitors power cable or data cable is not connected properly. Switch off the external monitor and the notebook. Check whether the power cable is plugged properly into the external monitor and into the power socket. Check whether the data cable is properly connected to the notebook and the external monitor (if it is plugged in with a connector). Switch on the external monitor and the notebook. Screen The external monitor is blank or the image is unstable MonitorCause The wrong external monitor has been selected or the wrong screen resolution has been set for the application program. Troubleshooting Terminate the application program in Windows by pressing Alt + F4 . If the fault persists after closing the program, use the key combination for switching the screen output (see "Key combinations", Page 40) to switch over to the notebooks LCD screen. Change the following setting:

Set the screen resolution: Set the screen resolution as described in the documentation for your operating system. Select monitor: Select monitor 1 or 2 as described in the documentation for your operating system. 94 Fujitsu Troubleshooting and tips The cursor does not correctly follow the pen movements Cause Pen incorrectly calibrated Fault elimination Calibrate the pen as shown under Hardware and Sound / Tablet PC Settings in the Control Panel, see "Setting the pen", Page 33 and

"Calibrating the pen", Page 34. Pen input not working Cause Incorrect driver installed. Troubleshooting If your device is one which can only be operated using the pen, install the driver for the standard model. or If your device is one which can be operated using the pen and by nger, install the driver for the "Dual Digitizer"

model. The notebook cannot be started NotebookCause The battery is not installed correctly. Troubleshooting Check whether the battery is installed correctly in its compartment. The battery is dead. Switch the notebook on. Charge the battery. or Insert a charged battery. or Connect the mains adapter to the notebook. The power adapter is not connected correctly. Check whether the mains adapter is connected correctly to the notebook. Switch the notebook on. Fujitsu 95 Troubleshooting and tips Notebook The notebook stops working EnergysavingmodeCause Notebook is in energy saving mode. An application programme has caused the malfunction. Troubleshooting Leave energy saving mode. Close the application program or restart the notebook (by restarting the operating system or switching the device off and back on again). The battery is dead. The printer does not print PrinterdoesnotprintCause The printer is not switched on. The printer is not connected correctly. The printer driver is faulty or not correctly installed, or it is the wrong printer driver. Charge the battery. or Insert a charged battery. or Connect the mains adapter to the notebook. Troubleshooting Make sure that the printer is switched on and ready for operation (refer to the documentation supplied with the printer). Check that the data cable connecting the notebook to the printer is properly connected. Check that the data cable connecting the notebook to the printer is properly connected. Check whether the correct printer driver is loaded (refer to the printer documentation). The radio connection to a network does not work TheradioconnectiontoanetworkdoesnotworkCause The wireless component is disabled. Troubleshooting Switch the radio component on (see

"Switching the wireless components on and off", Page 60). The wireless component is enabled. Despite this, the wireless connection to a network does not work. Check whether the radio connection is switched on via the software. Further information on using the radio component can be found in the help les. 96 Fujitsu Troubleshooting and tips The battery discharges too quickly Troubleshooting Battery:Cause The battery is either too hot or too cold. In this Bring the notebook up/down to a normal case the battery indicator ashes. temperature again. You may have an application running that consumes a great deal of power due to frequent accessing of the hard disk or optical drive. The maximum brightness may have been set for the screen. If the operating time of the battery life is extremely short, the battery is probably too old. Replace battery if necessary. Use the mains adapter as frequently as possible. Set the screen slightly darker with the key combination for Decreasing the screen brightness in order to reduce the amount of power being drawn. Acousticerrormessages Acoustic warnings ErrorsCause A beep sounds every few seconds. The battery is almost at. Troubleshooting Charge the battery. Error messages on the screen Errormessage:This section describes the error messages generated by the BIOS Setup. Error messages displayed by the operating system or programmes are described in the relevant documentation. Errormessagesonthescreen If the error message appears repeatedly, despite troubleshooting measures, please contact the place of purchase or our customer service centre. Error message/cause CMOS battery bad If the error message occurs repeatedly, the buffer battery in the notebook is at. System CMOS checksum bad - default conguration used The system conguration information is incorrect. Resolution Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. Switch the notebook off. Switch the notebook on. Press the function key F2 to access the BIOS Setup. In the BIOS Setup, select the Exit menu. Select the entry Load Setup Defaults. Select OK and press the Enter key. Fujitsu 97 Troubleshooting and tips Error message/cause Extended memory failed at offset: xxxx Failing Bits:

zzzz zzzz When testing the extended memory an error has resulted at the address xxxx. Failure Fixed Disk n The settings of the hard disk drive are incorrect. Keyboard controller error Keyboard error nn Stuck key Operating system not found Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP This error message appears if an error occurs during the self-test before starting the operating system. Previous boot incomplete - Default conguration used Due to an error during the previous system boot, default values were used for certain settings. Check the settings in the BIOS Setup. Real time clock error nnnnK Shadow RAM failed at offset: xxxx Failing Bits: zzzz System battery is dead - Replace and run SETUP System cache error - Cache disabled System timer error Resolution Check whether the additional memory module has been inserted correctly. Start the BIOS Setup (Primary Master submenu) and select the correct settings. Switch the notebook off with the ON/OFF switch. Wait 3 - 5 seconds and switch on the notebook again. If you are using an external keyboard:

Check the connection and reboot the notebook. Make sure that no key is pressed. Check in the BIOS Setup whether your hard disk has been set correctly. Make sure that the operating system is installed on the corresponding drive. Press the F1 function key to start the operating system. Press the function key F2 to access the BIOS Setup. Press the F1 function key when prompted to do so. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. Contact your sales outlet or our customer service centre. 98 Fujitsu Technical data Notebook General Processor Main memory (SO DIMM) Electrical data Safety regulations complied with Protection class Maximum power draw (when the notebook is switched on and the battery is charged):

LCD screen Size Resolution Pixel class Brightness control Technology Digitizer and glass panel WebCam Graphics card Chip Maximum resolution on external display:

Dimensions Width x depth x height Weight depending on conguration Input devices Keyboard Touchpad Tablet buttons Pen Technical data 3rd Generation Intel Core with vPro technology Maximum 16 Gbyte DDR3 2 slots for 2 Gbyte, 4 Gbyte or 8 Gbyte modules CE II 80 W (with and without connected port replicator) 31.75 cm / 12.5" TFT HD 1366 x 768 (HD), 16 mio. colors II 12 levels Wide-View High-Bright WXGA Display with LED Background Lighting Matter Touchscreen Full-HD camera (1080 p), with status indicator Toughened glass Dual Digitizer Intel HD Graphics 4000 1920 x 1200 subpixels, 16 mio. colors on port replicator:

VGA: 1920 x 1200 subpixels DVI: 1920 x 1200 subpixels DisplayPort: 2560 x 1600 subpixels 315.6 mm x 233 mm x 37.5-33.5 mm with rubber feet from 1.8 kg 85 buttons, splash-protected 2 keys 5 buttons + 1 Windows button 1 freely programmable rocker button / eraser Fujitsu 99 Technical data Slots Memory card slot ExpressCard slot SIM card slot Ports Monitor port (analogue) HDMI port LAN port Microphone port/Line In Headphones port/Line Out Docking port USB (Universal Serial Bus) Security Lock Ambient conditions Environment class DIN IEC 721 Mechanism class DIN IEC 721 Operating temperature Transport temperature (2K2) Port Replicator (optional) Electrical data Safety regulations complied with Protection class Ports Monitor port (analogue) Monitor port (digital) DisplayPort LAN port USB (Universal Serial Bus) Audio Docking port Security Lock Ambient conditions Environment class DIN IEC 721 Mechanism class DIN IEC 721 Operating temperature Transport temperature 1 x SD Card 1 x ExpressCard/54 1 x 15-pin socket 1 x Socket, RJ45 3.5 mm stereo mini jack 3.5 mm stereo mini jack 100-pin socket Total: 3 x USB (1 x USB 3.0 with charging function (Anytime USB charge), 2 x USB 2.0) 1 x 7K1 7M2 5 .... 35 15C .... 60C CE II 15-pin 25-pin, DVI-D 1 x RJ45 4 x USB 3.0 Headphone port 100-pin 1 x 7K1 7M2 5 C .... 35 15 C .... 60 100 Fujitsu Technical data Rechargeable battery You will nd information on the batteries used in your device on the Internet at "http://www.fujitsu.com/fts/support/". In addition to the main battery, you can order an optional battery which is inserted in the module slot. All rechargeable batteries are 6-cell batteries. Rated voltage Rated capacity Nominal power Main battery 10.8 V 72.4 Wh 6700 mAh Optional battery

(to be inserted in the module bay) 10.8 V 28.1 Wh 2600 mAh The operating time depends on the device conguration, the active applications and the energy-saving settings. Mains adapter for use with the notebook and port replicator The following technical data applies to the mains adapter supplied with the notebook and to the port replicator which you can order optionally. Primary Rated voltage Rated frequency Max. rated current Secondary Nominal power Rated voltage Max. rated current 100 V to 240 V (automatic) 50 Hz to 60 Hz (automatic) 0.7 A to 1.2 A 80 W 19 V 4.22 A An additional mains adapter or power cable can be ordered at any time. Fujitsu 101 Manufacturers notes Manufacturers notes Disposal and recycling NotesInformation about this subject can be found on your notebook or on our Internet pages. Declarations of Conformity DeclarationofconformityThe "Declarations of Conformity" for the device can be found on the Internet at:

"http://globalsp.ts.fujitsu.com/sites/certicates/default.aspx". Fujitsu Technology Solutions hereby declares that your device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. CE marking CEmarkingCE marking for devices with radio component This equipment complies with the requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC of the European Parliament and Commission from 9 March, 1999 governing Radio and Telecommunications Equipment and mutual recognition of conformity. This equipment can be used in the following countries:

Belgium Estonia UK Latvia Malta Poland Switzerland Czech Republic Bulgaria Finland Ireland Liechtenstein The Netherlands Portugal Slovakia Hungary Germany Greece Italy Luxembourg Austria Sweden Spain Denmark France Iceland Lithuania Norway Rumania Slovenia Cyprus Contact the corresponding government ofce in the respective country for current information on possible operating restrictions. If your country is not included in the list, then please contact the corresponding supervisory authority as to whether the use of this product is permitted in your country. Regulatory notices 102 Fujitsu Regulatory Information Notice Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Fujitsu could void this users authority to operate the equipment. FCC NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limit for class B digital devices, pursuant to parts 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet that is on a different circuit than the receiver. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded interconnect cables must be employed with this equipment to ensure compliance with the pertinent RF emission limits governing this device. DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES Notice to Users of Radios and Television This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. CET appareil numrique de la class B respecte toutes les exigence du Rglement sur le matrial brouilleur du Canada. 103 - Regulatory Information Appendix A: WLAN Users Guide FCC Regulatory Information Please note the following regulatory information related to the optional wireless LAN device. Regulatory Notes and Statements Wireless LAN, Health and Authorization for use Radio frequency electromagnetic energy is emitted from Wireless LAN devices. The energy levels of these emissions, however, are far much less than the electromagnetic energy emissions from wireless devices such as mobile phones. Wireless LAN devices are safe for use by consumers because they operate within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations. The use of Wireless LAN devices may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as:

On board an airplane, or In an explosive environment, or In situations where the interference risk to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. In cases in which the policy regarding use of Wireless LAN devices in specific environments is not clear (e.g., airports, hospitals, chemical/oil/gas industrial plants, private buildings), obtain authorization to use these devices prior to operating the equipment. Regulatory Information/Disclaimers Installation and use of this Wireless LAN device must be in strict accordance with the instructions included in the user documentation provided with the product. Any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer may void the users authority to operate the equipment. The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of this device, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by the manufacturer. It is the responsibility of the user to correct any interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment. The manufacturer and its authorized resellers or distributors will assume no liability for any damage or violation of government regulations arising from failure to comply with these guidelines. 104 This device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. For IEEE 802.11a Wireless LAN: For operation within 5.15~5.25 GHz frequency range, it is restricted to indoor environments, and the antenna of this device must be integral. Federal Communications Commission and Industry Canada statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and, (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of this device. FCC Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 2 Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. 3 Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from the one the receiver is connected to. 4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposure have not found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The wireless LAN radio device has been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. 105 Figure A-1. Ad Hoc Mode Network Export restrictions This product or software contains encryption code which may not be exported or transferred from the US or Canada without an approved US Department of Commerce export license. This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules., as well as ICES 003 B / NMB 003 B. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation. Modifications not expressly authorized by Fujitsu America, Inc. may invalidate the user's right to operate this equipment. Canadian Notice The device for the 5150 - 5250 MHz band is only for indoor usage to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems. The maximum antenna gain of 6 dBi permitted (for devices in the 5250 - 5350 MHz, 5470 - 5725 MHz and 5725 - 5825 MHz bands) to comply with the e.i.r.p. limit as stated in A9.2 of RSS210. In addition, users are cautioned to take note that high power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250 -

5350 MHz and 5650 - 5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. 106 -

Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN This manual describes the procedures required to properly set up and configure the optional integrated Wireless LAN Mini-PCI device (referred to as "WLAN device" in the rest of the manual). Before using the WLAN device, read this manual carefully to ensure its correct operation. Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. Wireless LAN Device Covered by this Document This document is applicable to systems containing one of the following optional devices:

Integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11a/b/g/n) Atheros XSPAN 802.11abgn Characteristics of the WLAN Device The WLAN device is a Mini-PCI card attached to the main board of the mobile computer. The WLAN device operates in license-free RF bands, eliminating the need to procure an FCC operating license. The WLAN operates in the 2.4GHz Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) RF band and the lower, middle, and upper bands of the 5GHz Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (UNII) bands. The WLAN devices are capable of four operating modes, IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and The WLAN devices are Wi-Fi certified and operate (as applicable) at a the maximum data rate of 450 Mbps

(theoretical) in IEEE802.11n mode; 54 Mbps in IEEE802.11a or IEEE802.11g mode; and 11 Mbps in IEEE802.11b mode. The WLAN devices support the following encryption methods - WEP, TKIP, CKIP, and AES encryption. The Wireless LAN devices are compliant with the following standards: WPA, WPA2, CCX1.0, CCX2.0, CCX3.0, and IEEE802.11n CCX4.0. 107- Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Modes Using this Device Ad Hoc Mode

"Ad Hoc Mode" refers to a wireless network architecture where wireless network connectivity between multiple computers is established without a central wireless network device, typically known as Access Point(s). Connectivity is accomplished using only client devices in a peer-to-peer fashion. That is why Ad Hoc networks are also known as peer-to-peer networks. Ad Hoc networks are an easy and inexpensive method for establishing network connectivity between multiple computers. Ad Hoc mode requires that the SSID, network authentication, and encryption key settings are identically configured on all computers in the Ad Hoc network. Figure 49. Ad Hoc Mode Network 108- Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Infrastructure mode refers to a wireless network architecture in which devices communicate with wireless or wired network devices by communicating through an Access Point. In infrastructure mode, wireless devices can communicate with each other or with a wired network. Corporate wireless networks operate in infrastructure mode because they require access to the WLAN in order to access services, devices, and computers (e.g., file servers, printers, databases). Internet ADSL modem, cable modem, or similar Wired LAN Access Point*

Wireless LAN

*An optional hub for a wired LAN may be required depending upon the type of access point used. Figure 50. Access Point (Infrastructure) Mode Network 109 Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN How to Handle This Device The WLAN device is an optional device that may come pre-installed in your mobile computer. Under normal circumstances, it should not be necessary for you to remove or re-install it. The operating system that your mobile computer comes with has been pre-configured to support the WLAN device. The Wireless LAN devices support IEEE802.11a, IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g, and IEEE802.11n. The WLAN devices operate in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and the 5 GHz lower, middle, and upper UNII bands. Microwave ovens may interfere with the operation of WLAN devices since they operate in the same 2.4 GHz frequency range as IEEE802.11b/g/n devices. Interference by microwaves does not occur with IEEE802.11a radio which operates in the 5 GHz RF band. Wireless devices that transmit in the 2.4 GHz range may interfere with operation of WLAN devices in IEEE802.11b/g/n modes. Symptoms of interference include reduced throughput, intermittent disconnects, and many frame errors. It is HIGHLY recommended that these interfering devices be powered off to ensure proper operation of the WLAN device. Deactivating/Disconnecting the WLAN Device Disconnecting the WLAN device may be desired in certain circumstances (to extend battery life) or where certain environments require it (i.e. hospitals, clinics, airplanes, etc.). The WLAN device can be deactivated by using the Wireless On/Off Switch, and it can be disconnected in Windows using the WLAN icon in the system tray (Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected.). 110 - Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Deactivation Using the Wireless On/Off Switch The WLAN device can be deactivated quickly and efficiently by toggling the Wireless Device On/Off Switch to the Off position. The switch has no effect on non-Wireless LAN models. Wireless Device Switch Figure 51. Wireless Device On/Off Switch Location Disconnection Using the Icon in the Taskbar Note that disconnecting via the icon in the system tray does not turn off the radio; it continues to transmit and receive even though its not connected. 1 Right-click the WLAN icon in the taskbar at the bottom right of your screen. 2 Choose Disconnect from a network. Activating the WLAN Device Activation of the WLAN device can be accomplished using the same methods as the deactivation process Using the Wireless On/Off Switch In Windows, by right-clicking the WLAN icon then clicking Connect to a network 111- Before Using the Optional Wireless LAN Configuring the Wireless LAN The optional WLAN device can be configured to establish wireless network connectivity using the software that is built into Windows. Support for most industry standard security solutions is contained in this software. Pre-defined parameters will be required for this procedure. Please consult with your network administrator for these parameters:

Configuring the WLAN 1 Click the Start button, then select Control Panel. (If you are in Windows Vista and the Control Panel is not in Classic View, select Classic View from the left panel.) 2 Double-click the Network and Sharing Center icon. 3 Select Manage wireless networks from the left panel. 4 Click on the [Add] button. 5 Depending upon what type of connection you would like to make, make a selection. For an infrastructure network, select Manually create a network profile. For ad hoc network, select Create an ad hoc network. 6 Enter the required information. If necessary, consult with your network administrator for some of the information. 7 In the event you require assistance, go to the Network and Sharing Center window (Start -> Control Panel ->

Network and Sharing Center), and type in relevant keywords in the Search box. Connecting to a Network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by performing the following steps:

1 Click on the WLAN icon in the system tray. 2 Select Connect to a network. 3 Select a network from the list that appears, and click the [Connect] button. Connection to the network After you have configured your computer, you can connect to an active network by clicking on the Wireless Network icon in the system tray:

112- Configuring the Wireless LAN Troubleshooting the WLAN Troubleshooting Causes and countermeasures for troubles you may encounter while using your wireless LAN are described in the following table. If you are unfamiliar with the steps required, consult your System Administrator or go to [Start] ->

Help and Support -> Networking and the Web Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection Incorrect network name (SSID) or network key Weak received signal strength and/or link quality The WLAN device has been deactivated or disabled The computer to be connected is turned off Ad hoc connection: verify that the network names (SSIDs) and network keys (WEP) of all computers to be connected have been configured correctly. SSIDs and WEP or WPA/WPA2 Pre-

Shared key values must be identical on each machine. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: set network name (SSID) and network key to the same values as those of the access point. Set the Network Authentication value identically to that of the Access Point. Please consult your network administrator for this value, if necessary. Ad hoc connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the destination computer or removing any obstacles for better sight. Access Point (Infrastructure) connection: Retry connection after shortening the distance to the access point or removing any obstacles for better transmission. Check if the wireless switch is turned On. Go to Start -> Control Panel, and double-click on Windows Mobility Center. If the wireless network is off, click the [Turn wireless on] button. Check if the computer to be connected is turned ON. 113 Troubleshooting the WLAN Problem Possible Cause Possible Solution Unavailable network connection

(continued) RF interference from Access Points or other wireless networks Wireless network authentication has failed Incorrectly configured network settings The use of identical or overlapping RF channels can cause interference with the operation of the WLAN device. Change the channel of your Access Point to a channel that does not overlap with the interfering device. Re-check your Network Authentication, Encryption, and Security settings. Incorrectly configured security settings such as an incorrectly typed WEP key, a misconfigured LEAP username/password, or an incorrectly chosen authentication method will cause the LAN device to associate but not authenticate to the wireless network. Recheck the configuration of your network settings. Incorrect IP address configuration This only applies to networks using static IP addresses. Please contact your network administrator for the correct settings. 114- Troubleshooting the WLAN WLAN Specifications Specifications Item Specification Type of network Transfer rate Active frequency Typical operating distances**

Number of channels The integrated Intel Centrino Advanced-N 6205 (802.11abgn 2x2) and Atheros XSPAN 802.11a/b/g/n WLAN devices conform to IEEE 802.11a, 802.11b/g, and 802.11n, Wi-Fi based*.

(Automatic switching) 54 Mbps maximum data rate (IEEE802.11n to be determined) 802.11n: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz 802.11b/g: 2400~2473 MHz 802.11a: 4900 ~ 5850 MHz 802.11a: 40 ft. (12 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 6 Mbps 802.11b: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 11 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11g: 100 ft. (30 m) @ 54 Mbps; 300 ft. (91 m) @ 1 Mbps 802.11n: Estimated double the operating distance of 802.11g and 802.11a in their respective frequencies. 802.11a: 8 independent channels 802.11b/g: 11 channels, 3 non-overlapping channels 802.11n: 2.4 GHz - 3 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is not used; 2 non-overlapping channels when Channel Bonding is used. 5 GHz - 12 non-overlapping UNII channels with or without Channel Bonding Security Encryption Types - WEP, TKIP, AES***, CKIP, WPA 1.0 and WPA 2.0 compliant Maximum recommended number of computers to be connected over wireless LAN (during ad hoc connection) 10 units or less ****

* Wi-Fi based indicates that the interconnectivity test of the organization which guarantees the interconnectivity of wireless LAN (Wi-Fi Alliance) has been passed.

** The communication ranges shown above will increase or decrease depending on factors such as number of walls, reflective material, or interference from external RF sources.

*** Encryption with network key (WEP) is performed using the above number of bits, however, users can set 40 bits/ 104 bits after subtracting the fixed length of 24 bits.

**** Depending on practical environments, the allowable number of computers to be connected may be decreased. 115 WLAN Specifications Using the Bluetooth Device The Integrated Bluetooth module is a wireless device installed in selected Fujitsu mobile computers. What is Bluetooth Bluetooth technology is designed as a short-range wireless link between mobile devices, such as laptop computers, phones, printers, and cameras. Bluetooth technology is used to create Personal Area Networks (PANs) between devices in short-range of each other. SLIDING THE WIRELESS DEVICE SWITCH ON THE FRONT OF THE SYSTEM WILL TURN BOTH THE OPTIONAL WIRELESS LAN AND BLUETOOTH DEVICES ON AND OFF AT THE SAME TIME. TO ENABLE OR DISABLE BLUETOOTH INDIVIDUALLY, PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS:

CLICK ON THE BLUETOOTH ICON IN THE SYSTEM NOTIFICATION AREA LOCATED IN THE LOWER RIGHT CORNER OF THE SCREEN. SELECT TURN ADAPTER OFF. Where to Find Information About Bluetooth The Bluetooth module contains a robust Help users guide to assist you in learning about operation of the Bluetooth device. To access the Help file:

1 Click on the Bluetooth icon in notification area. 2 Select Open Settings. The "Bluetooth Settings" dialog will be opened. 3 Select the Share tab. 4 Click on "Learn more about Bluetooth sharing" link. The Bluetooth User Guide will open. For additional information about Bluetooth Technology, visit the Bluetooth Web site at: www.bluetooth.com. 116 - Using the Bluetooth Device FCC Radiation Exposure Statement This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The Bluetooth antenna is exempt from minimum distance criteria due to its low power. The transmitters in this device must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canadian Notice To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing. Warranty Users are not authorized to modify this product. Any modifications invalidate the warranty. This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without signed written permission from Fujitsu. Unauthorized modification will void the equipment authorization from the FCC and Industry Canada and the warranty. 117 - Using the Bluetooth Device Index Index A A beep sounds every second 93 Acoustic error messages 97 Anti-theft protection 69 Audio devices, connecting 81 Audio ports 81 B Backspace 38 Bass loudspeaker (subwoofer) 58 Battery battery life 45 caring for and maintaining 45 charge level 45, 54 charging 45 self-discharge 45 storage 45 Battery status meter 45 Battery:

discharges too quickly 97 BIOS Setup Utility calling 90 exiting 91 operating 90 protecting with password 70 settings 90 Bluetooth Switching off module 60 Switching on module 60 Bluetooth, safety notes 12 Board 82 Buffer battery, load 93 Buttons 37 C Caps Lock 38 CD/DVD indicator 51 CD/DVD:

manual emergency removal 52 CE marking 102 Charging capacity, battery 45 Cleaning 14 Components installing / removing 82 Conguration, BIOS Setup Utility 90 Connecting audio devices 81 Connecting headphones 81 Crystal View display cleaning 14 Cursor control keys 38 Cursor keys 38 D Date is incorrect 93 Declaration of conformity 102 Device setting up 16 Devices connecting 75 disconnecting 75 Display orientation selecting 24 DOC (INDUSTRY CANADA) NOTICES 104 Drive Removing 49 E Emergency removal of data carrier 52 Energy energy saving 13 Energy saving 13 Energy saving mode leaving 96 Enter 38 Enter key 38 Error message:

on the screen 97 Error messages on the screen 97 Errors Acoustic warnings 97 ESD 82 Ethernet LAN 62 ExpressCard 56 F Fault correction 92 Fingerprint sensor 69 congure 69 15 First-time setup Fn + F10 41 Fn key 38 Fn+F3 40 Fn+F4 40 Fn+F6 40 Fn+F7 40 Fn+F8 40 Fn+F9 40 118 Fujitsu Index removing 84 Memory module important notes 83 installing 85 removing 84 Microphone 58 Microphone, connecting 81 Mobile operation 13 Module Removing 49 Module bay 49 Modules 49 Monitor connecting 76 drifting display 94 remains blank 94 Monitor port see VGA connection socket 76 N Notebook before you travel 13 cannot be started 95 cleaning 14 stops working 96 switching off 26 transporting 1314 using 18 Notebook, operation 18 Notebook: switching on 21 Notes 12 boards 82 cleaning 14 disposal / recycling 102 energy saving 13 LCD screen 28 Safety 12 transport 13 Num Lock indicator 39 Numeric keypad 37 see Virtual numeric keypad 39 O Operating system activating system protection 71 cancel system protection 71 protecting with password 71 Optical drive 50 P Packaging 15 G Getting started 15 H Handling data carriers 50 Hardware conguration 90 HDMI port 78 I Important notes 12 Incorrect date/time 93 Inserting a data carrier 51 K Keyboard 37 cleaning 14 L Landscape orientation screen 24 LCD screen cleaning 14 difcult to read 94 notes 28 reduce brightness 40 reected glare 94 remains blank 93 LCD screen is too dark 93 Life, battery 45 Line feed 38 Loudspeaker switch off 40 switch on 40 Loudspeakers 58 see Adding memory 83 M Main memory Mains adapter connecting 16 setting up 16 Manual removal of data carrier 52 Mechanical backup 69 Memory card handling 55 inserting 55 removing 56 Memory expansion installing 85 Fujitsu 119 Index Password changing 71 entering 70 removing 71 Password protection 70 Password protection:

hard disk 72 Peripheral devices connecting 75 disconnecting 75 Port Replicator Ports 63 Portrait orientation screen 24 Port Replicator 63 Ports Power power consumption 54 power-management features 54 Power-on indicator 21 Preparing for operation 16 Printer does not print 96 R Radio component:

safety notes 12 Rechargeable battery 45 see Battery 45 Regulatory information notebooks with radio device 106 Notebooks without radio device 103 Removing a data carrier 51 Removing memory see Adding memory 83 Return 38 no screen display 94 S Safety notes 12 Screen Screen brightness increase 40 reduce 40 Screen port Security functions 68 Security Lock 69 Selecting a location 16 Self-discharge, battery 45 Servicing 82 Setup see VGA connection socket 76 see BIOS Setup Utility 90 Shift 38 Shift key 38 Shift+Tab 41 Slot ExpressCard 56 Memory cards 55 Start key 38 Status indicators 18 Summer time 93 Supervisor password changing 71 entering 70 removing 71 Suspend/Resume button 21 Switching on for the rst time 17 Symbols indicators 18 System conguration 90 System expansion 83 see Adding memory 83 System settings, BIOS Setup Utility 90 T Tab back 41 Tab key 38 The radio connection to a network does not work 96 Time not correct 93 Time, daylight savings 93 Tips 92 Toggle output screen 41 Touchpad 35, 40 buttons 35 cleaning 14 dragging items 36 executing commands 35 moving the pointer 35 selecting an item 35 switch off 40 Touchpad buttons 40 TPM 74 Transport Transport damage 15 Transportation 1314 Travel, notebook 13 Troubleshooting 92 Trusted Platform Module 74 U UMTS 61 Antenna 61 120 Fujitsu USB charging function 80 USB ports 79 User password changing 71 entering 70 removing 71 Using the Kensington Lock Cable 69 V VGA connection socket 76 Virtual numeric keypad 39 Volume decrease 40 Index increase 40 Volume control 58 W Webcam 44 Weight Saver Removing 49 Wireless LAN Switching off module 60 Switching on module 60 Wireless LAN:

safety notes 12 Fujitsu 121

 

 

Cider Gobi3000-FCC-FPC58-2970-01-v2.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 11, 2011 10:03 AM F u j i t s u A m e r i c a , I n c . 3G Mini-Card Gobi 3000 Regulatory and Safety Information Please read this document carefully prior to using the 3G Mini-Card Gobi 3000 modem in your Fujitsu computer. Important notice Because of the nature of wireless communications, transmission and reception of data can never be guar-

anteed. Data may be delayed, corrupted (that is, have errors) or be totally lost. Although significant delays or losses of data are rare when wireless devices such as the 3G Mini-Card modem are used in a normal manner with a well-constructed network, the card should not be used in situations where failure to trans-

mit or receive data could result in damage of any kind to the user or any other party, including but not lim-

ited to personal injury, death, or loss of property. Sierra Wireless and its affiliates accept no responsibil-

ity for damages of any kind resulting from delays or errors in data transmitted or received using the 3G Mini-Card modem, or for failure of the modem to transmit or receive such data. Cider Gobi3000-FCC-FPC58-2970-01-v2.fm Page 2 Thursday, August 11, 2011 10:03 AM Safety and hazards The 3G Mini-Card modem MUST BE POWERED OFF in all areas that may be susceptible to radio interference. In particular:

Prohibited Areas Obey all signs and notices and follow all rules and regulations. Power off the 3G Mini-Card modem when instructed to do so or when you suspect that it may cause interference or danger. Where explosive atmospheres may be present Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are not always clearly marked. Such areas include gas sta-

tions, fuel depots, chemical transfer or storage facili-

ties, areas where blasting is in progress, areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your cellular phone or vehicle engine. Near medical or life-support equipment In areas where medical equipment may be susceptible to any form of radio interference. In such areas the 3G Mini-Card modem can transmit signals that could interfere with this equipment. On board aircraft In addition to Federal Aviation Authority (FAA) requirements, many airline regulations state that you must suspend wireless operations before boarding an aircraft. The 3G Mini-Card modem is capable of transmitting signals that could interfere with various 2 Cider Gobi3000-FCC-FPC58-2970-01-v2.fm Page 3 Thursday, August 11, 2011 10:03 AM onboard systems and controls. Failure to observe this instruction may lead to suspen-

sion or denial of cellular telephone services to the offender, legal action, or both. Some airlines may permit the use of cellular phones while the aircraft is on the ground and the door is open. The 3G Mini-Card modem may be used nor-

mally at this time. While operating a vehicle The driver or operator of any vehicle should not use a wireless data device while in control of a vehicle. Doing so detracts from the driver or operator's ability to control and operate the vehicle. In some countries, using such communications devices while in control of a vehicle is an offence. Important safety/compliance information for North American users Caution: Unauthorized modifications or changes not expressly approved by Sierra Wireless, Inc. could void compliance with regulatory rules, and thereby your authority to use this equipment. The design of the 3G Mini-Card modem complies with U.S. Federal Communications Commission

(FCC) and Industry Canada (IC) guidelines respecting safety levels of radio frequency (RF) exposure for portable devices, which in turn are consistent with the following safety standards previously set by Cana-

dian, U.S. and international standards bodies:

3 Cider Gobi3000-FCC-FPC58-2970-01-v2.fm Page 4 Thursday, August 11, 2011 10:03 AM ANSI / IEEE C95.1-1999, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300 GHz National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP) Report 86, -1986, Biologi-

cal Effects and Exposure Criteria for Radio Fre-

quency Electromagnetic Fields Health Canada, Safety Code 6, 1999, Limits of Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromag-

netic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz International Commission on Non-Ionising Radia-

tion Protection (ICNIRP) 1998, Guidelines for lim-

iting exposure to time-varying electric, magnetic, and electromagnetic fields (up to 300 GHz) 3G Mini-Card Modem Gobi 3000 FCC ID: N7NMC8355 IC: 2417C-MC8355 Caution: When the unit is undocked, the wireless WAN antenna is designed to operate at reduced power levels when the tilt angle of the display is less than approximately 45 degrees from the horizontal

(flat) position. While larger angles are possible when the tablet is undocked and the wireless WAN antenna may operate at higher power, a tilt angle greater than 45 degrees generally does not provide optimal view-

ing clarity and is not recommended. 4 Cider Gobi3000-FCC-FPC58-2970-01-v2.fm Page 5 Thursday, August 11, 2011 10:03 AM Caution: The 3G Mini-Card modem has been evalu-

ated for compliance with FCC/IC RF exposure limits in this laptop configuration. This 3G Mini-Card modem must not be co-located or operated in con-

junction with any other antenna or transmitter other than the transmitters that have been approved with this laptop. Use of this device in any other configura-

tion may exceed the FCC RF Exposure compliance limit. FCC Radio Frequency Exposure statement The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power wireless devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can pro-

duce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low-level RF that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposure have not found any biologi-

cal effects. Some studies have suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have not been confirmed by additional research. The WWAN and the WLAN radio devices have been tested and found to comply with FCC radiation expo-

sure limits set forth for an uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. 5 Cider Gobi3000-FCC-FPC58-2970-01-v2.fm Page 6 Thursday, August 11, 2011 10:03 AM 1250 E. Arques Avenue, Sunnyvale, California 94085 For more information, call 1-877-372-3473 or visit our website at www.shopfujitsu.com. For technical support call 1-800-8fujitsu Fujitsu and the Fujitsu logo are registered trademarks of Fujitsu, Ltd. Gobi is a trademark of Qualcomm Inc. All other trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners. Product description data represents Fujitsu design objectives and is provided for comparative purposes; actual results may vary based upon a variety of factors. Specifications subject to change without notice. 2011 Fujitsu America, Incorporated. All rights reserved. FPC58-2970-01 6